AI Tipiṭaka Translations

Hide English Translation

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa

Dīghanikāye

Dīghanikāye

Pāthikavaggaṭṭhakathā

Pāthikavaggaṭṭhakathā

1. Pāthikasuttavaṇṇanā

1. Pāthikasuttavaṇṇanā

Sunakkhattavatthuvaṇṇanā
Sunakkhattavatthuvaṇṇanā

1.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… mallesu viharatīti pāthikasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā.Mallesu viharatīti mallā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā, tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhīsaddena ‘‘mallā’’ti vuccati, tasmiṃ mallesu janapade. ‘‘Anupiyaṃ nāma mallānaṃ nigamo’’tianupiyanti evaṃnāmako mallānaṃ janapadassa eko nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā ekasmiṃ chāyūdakasampanne vanasaṇḍe viharatīti attho. Anopiyantipi pāṭho.Pāvisīti paviṭṭho. Bhagavā pana na tāva paviṭṭho, pavisissāmīti nikkhantattā pana pāvisīti vutto. Yathā kiṃ, yathā ‘‘gāmaṃ gamissāmī’’ti nikkhanto puriso taṃ gāmaṃ apattopi ‘‘kuhiṃ itthannāmo’’ti vutte ‘‘gāmaṃ gato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ.Etadahosīti gāmasamīpe ṭhatvā sūriyaṃ olokentassa etadahosi.Atippago khoti ativiya pago kho, na tāva kulesu yāgubhattaṃ niṭṭhitanti. Kiṃ pana bhagavā kālaṃ ajānitvā nikkhantoti? Na ajānitvā. Paccūsakāleyeva hi bhagavā ñāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā lokaṃ volokento ñāṇajālassa anto paviṭṭhaṃ bhaggavagottaṃ channaparibbājakaṃ disvā ‘‘ajjāhaṃ imassa paribbājakassa mayā pubbe katakāraṇaṃ samāharitvā dhammaṃ kathessāmi, sā dhammakathā assa mayi pasādappaṭilābhavasena saphalā bhavissatī’’ti ñatvāva paribbājakārāmaṃ pavisitukāmo atippagova nikkhami. Tasmā tattha pavisitukāmatāya evaṃ cittaṃ uppādesi.

1.Evaṃme sutaṃ…pe… mallesu viharatīti the Pāthika Sutta. Herein, this is the explanation of novel words. Mallesu viharatīti 'Malla' means princes of a rural area. Their residence, even a single district, is commonly called "Malla," thus, in that Malla district. Anupiyaṃ nāma mallānaṃ nigamoti anupiyanti is the name of a market town in the Malla district, making that a village for alms, he lived in a grove endowed with shade and water, is the meaning. Anopiyanti is also a reading. Pāvisīti entered. However, the Blessed One had not yet entered but had left with the intention to enter, hence he is said to have entered. How is it? Just as a man who has left, saying, "I will go to the village," even if he has not reached that village, if asked, "Where has so-and-so gone?" it is said, "He has gone to the village," so it is. Etadahosīti while standing near the village, looking at the sun, this occurred to him. Atippago khoti it is very early indeed, the gruel and breakfast are not yet finished in the families. But did the Blessed One leave without knowing the time? No, not without knowing. Indeed, at dawn, the Blessed One, having spread the net of knowledge, surveying the world, seeing Channa the wanderer, a descendant of the Bhaggava clan, having entered into the net of knowledge, knowing that "Today, having gathered the past deeds done by me for this wanderer, I will speak the Dhamma, that Dhamma talk will be fruitful for him through the gain of faith in me," he left very early, wishing to enter the wanderer's park. Therefore, with the intention of entering there, he produced this thought.

2.Etadavocāti bhagavantaṃ disvā mānathaddhataṃ akatvā satthāraṃ paccuggantvā etaṃetu kho, bhantetiādikaṃ vacanaṃ avoca.Imaṃ pariyāyanti imaṃ vāraṃ, ajja imaṃ āgamanavāranti attho. Kiṃ pana bhagavā pubbepi tattha gatapubboti? Na gatapubbo, lokasamudācāravasena pana evamāha. Lokiyā hi cirassaṃ āgatampi anāgatapubbampi manāpajātikaṃ āgataṃ disvā ‘‘kuto bhavaṃ āgato, cirassaṃ bhavaṃ āgato, kathaṃ te idhāgamanamaggo ñāto, kiṃ maggamūḷhosī’’tiādīni vadanti. Tasmā ayampi lokasamudācāravasena evamāhāti veditabbo.Idamāsananti attano nisinnāsanaṃ papphoṭetvā sampādetvā dadamāno evamāha.Sunakkhatto licchaviputtoti sunakkhatto nāma licchavirājaputto. So kira tassa gihisahāyo hoti, kālena kālaṃ tassa santikaṃ gacchati.Paccakkhātoti ‘‘paccakkhāmi dānāhaṃ, bhante, bhagavantaṃ na dānāhaṃ, bhante, bhagavantaṃ uddissa viharissāmī’’ti evaṃ paṭiakkhāto nissaṭṭho pariccatto.

2.Etadavocāti seeing the Blessed One, not being arrogant, having gone to greet the Teacher, he spoke these words beginning with etu kho, bhante. Imaṃ pariyāyanti this turn, today this turn of arrival, is the meaning. But has the Blessed One been there before? He has not been there before, but he spoke thus according to worldly custom. For worldly people, seeing someone of pleasing nature who has come after a long time, even if he has never come before, say, "Where have you come from? You have come after a long time. How did you know the way here? Have you lost your way?" Therefore, this should be understood as according to worldly custom. Idamāsananti having snapped and prepared his own sitting place, offering it, he spoke thus. Sunakkhatto licchaviputtoti Sunakkhatta by name, the Licchavi prince. It seems he was his friend when he was a householder, going to his presence from time to time. Paccakkhātoti "I renounce, O Venerable One, I will no longer live under the Blessed One," thus he is rejected, dismissed, abandoned.

3.Bhagavantaṃ uddissāti bhagavā me satthā ‘‘bhagavato ahaṃ ovādaṃ paṭikaromī’’ti evaṃ apadisitvā.Ko santo kaṃ paccācikkhasīti yācako vā yācitakaṃ paccācikkheyya, yācitako vā yācakaṃ. Tvaṃ pana neva yācako na yācitako, evaṃ sante, moghapurisa, ko santo ko samāno kaṃ paccācikkhasīti dasseti.Passa moghapurisāti passa tucchapurisa.Yāvañca te idaṃ aparaddhanti yattakaṃ idaṃ tava aparaddhaṃ, yattako te aparādho tattako dosoti evāhaṃ bhaggava tassa dosaṃ āropesinti dasseti.

3.Bhagavantaṃ uddissāti the Blessed One is my teacher, "I will practice the Blessed One's advice," thus designating. Ko santo kaṃ paccācikkhasīti either a beggar might reject a borrower, or a borrower might reject a beggar. But you are neither a beggar nor a borrower, so, foolish man, who being what, do you reject whom? he shows. Passa moghapurisāti see, foolish man. Yāvañca te idaṃ aparaddhanti as much as this is your offense, as much as your offense, so much is the fault, thus I accused Bhaggava of that fault, he shows.

4.Uttarimanussadhammāti pañcasīladasasīlasaṅkhātā manussadhammāuttari.Iddhipāṭihāriyanti iddhibhūtaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ.Kate vāti katamhi vā.Yassatthāyāti yassa dukkhakkhayassa atthāya.Soniyyāti takkarassāti so dhammo takkarassa yathā mayā dhammo desito, tathā kārakassa sammā paṭipannassa puggalassa sabbavaṭṭadukkhakkhayāya amatanibbānasacchikiriyāya gacchati, na gacchati, saṃvattati, na saṃvattatīti pucchati.Tatra sunakkhattāti tasmiṃ sunakkhatta mayā desite dhamme takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya saṃvattamāne kiṃ uttarimanussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ kataṃ karissati, ko tena katena attho. Tasmiñhi katepi akatepi mama sāsanassa parihāni natthi, devamanussānañhi amatanibbānasampāpanatthāya ahaṃ pāramiyo pūresiṃ, na pāṭihāriyakaraṇatthāyāti pāṭihāriyassa niratthakataṃ dassetvā ‘‘passa, moghapurisā’’ti dutiyaṃ dosaṃ āropesi.

4.Uttarimanussadhammāti human qualities that are higher, reckoned as the five precepts and the ten precepts. Iddhipāṭihāriyanti the miracle that is the power. Kate vāti in what has been done. Yassatthāyāti for the sake of which cessation of suffering. Soniyyāti takkarassāti that Dhamma goes, does not go, conduces, does not conduce to the complete cessation of suffering, to the realization of deathless Nibbāna, for the person who does rightly, the doer, just as the Dhamma has been taught by me; thus he asks. Tatra sunakkhattāti in that Dhamma taught by me, conducing to the complete cessation of suffering for the doer, what will the miracle of super-human qualities do, what is the use of that done? For even if that is done or not done, there is no decline of my teaching; indeed, I fulfilled the perfections for the attainment of deathless Nibbāna for gods and humans, not for the sake of performing miracles, thus, having shown the uselessness of miracles, he accused him of a second fault, saying, "See, foolish man."

5.Aggaññanti lokapaññattiṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ nāma lokassa agga’’nti evaṃ jānitabbampi aggaṃ mariyādaṃ na taṃ paññapetīti vadati. Sesamettha anantaravādānusāreneva veditabbaṃ.

5.Aggaññanti the world's concept. He does not declare that which should be known as the highest limit, saying, "This is the highest for the world." The rest here should be understood according to the immediately preceding statement.

6.Anekapariyāyena khoti idaṃ kasmā āraddhaṃ. Sunakkhatto kira ‘‘bhagavato guṇaṃ makkhessāmi, ‘‘dosaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti ettakaṃ vippalapitvā bhagavato kathaṃ suṇanto appatiṭṭho niravo aṭṭhāsi.

6.Anekapariyāyena khoti why was this begun? It seems Sunakkhatta, having babbled so much, thinking, "I will disparage the Blessed One's virtues, I will declare faults," stood unsteady, without support, silent, listening to the Blessed One's words.

anekapariyāyenātiādimāha. Tatthaanekapariyāyenāti anekakāraṇena.Vajjigāmeti vajjirājānaṃ gāme, vesālīnagareno visahīti nāsakkhi.So avisahantoti so sunakkhatto yassa pubbe tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ kathentassa mukhaṃ nappahoti, so dāni teneva mukhena avaṇṇaṃ katheti, addhā avisahanto asakkonto brahmacariyaṃ carituṃ attano bālatāya avaṇṇaṃ kathetvā hīnāyāvatto. Buddho pana subuddhova, dhammo svākkhātova, saṅgho suppaṭipannova. Evaṃ tīṇi ratanāni thomentā manussā tuyheva dosaṃ dassessantīti.Iti kho teti evaṃ kho te, sunakkhatta, vattāro bhavissanti. Tato evaṃ dose uppanne satthā atītānāgate appaṭihatañāṇo, mayhaṃ evaṃ doso uppajjissatīti jānantopi puretaraṃ na kathesīti vattuṃ na lacchasīti dasseti.Apakkamevāti apakkamiyeva, apakkanto vā cutoti attho.Yathātaṃ āpāyikoti yathā apāye nibbattanāraho satto apakkameyya, evameva apakkamīti attho.

anekapariyāyenāti he said, beginning with. Therein, anekapariyāyenāti by many reasons. Vajjigāmeti in the village of the Vajjian kings, in the city of Vesālī. No visahīti he could not. So avisahantoti that Sunakkhatta, whose mouth was not able to speak when previously describing the virtues of the Three Jewels, now speaks dispraise with that same mouth; indeed, being unable, not being able to live the holy life, having spoken dispraise due to his own foolishness, he has returned to the inferior. But the Buddha is well-enlightened, the Dhamma is well-proclaimed, the Saṅgha is practicing well. Thus, while praising the Three Jewels, people will show your own faults. Iti kho teti thus, indeed, these, Sunakkhatta, will be your speakers. Therefore, when such a fault has arisen, the Teacher, knowing the past and future with unobstructed knowledge, that such a fault will arise for me, you will not be able to say that he did not speak beforehand, he shows. Apakkamevāti having departed, or he has fallen away, is the meaning. Yathātaṃ āpāyikoti just as a being worthy of being reborn in a woeful state might depart, even so he departed, is the meaning.

Korakkhattiyavatthuvaṇṇanā
Korakkhattiyavatthuvaṇṇanā

7.Ekamidāhanti iminā kiṃ dasseti? Idaṃ suttaṃ dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ iddhipāṭihāriyaṃ na karotīti ca aggaññaṃ na paññapetīti ca. Tattha ‘‘aggaññaṃ na paññapetī’’ti idaṃ padaṃ suttapariyosāne dassessati. ‘‘Pāṭihāriyaṃ na karotī’’ti imassa pana padassa anusandhidassanavasena ayaṃ desanā āraddhā.

7.Ekamidāhanti with this, what does he show? This sutta is connected by two phrases: he does not perform miracles of power, and he does not declare the highest knowledge. Therein, the phrase "he does not declare the highest knowledge" will be shown at the end of the sutta. However, this teaching is begun by way of showing the connection of the phrase "he does not perform miracles."

ekamidāhanti ekasmiṃ ahaṃ.Samayanti samaye, ekasmiṃ kāle ahanti attho.Thūlūsūti thūlū nāma janapado, tattha viharāmi.Uttarakā nāmāti itthiliṅgavasena uttarakāti evaṃnāmako thūlūnaṃ janapadassa nigamo, taṃ nigamaṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvāti attho.Aceloti naggo.Korakkhattiyoti antovaṅkapādo khattiyo.Kukkuravatikoti samādinnakukkuravato sunakho viya ghāyitvā khādati, uddhanantare nipajjati, aññampi sunakhakiriyameva karoti.Catukkuṇḍikoti catusaṅghaṭṭito dve jāṇūni dve ca kappare bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā vicarati.Chamānikiṇṇanti bhūmiyaṃ nikiṇṇaṃ pakkhittaṃ ṭhapitaṃ.Bhakkhasanti bhakkhaṃ yaṃkiñci khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ.Mukhenevāti hatthena aparāmasitvā khādanīyaṃ mukheneva khādati, bhojanīyampi mukheneva bhuñjati.Sādhurūpoti sundararūpo.Ayaṃ samaṇoti ayaṃ arahataṃ samaṇo ekoti. Tatthavatāti patthanatthe nipāto. Evaṃ kirassa patthanā ahosi ‘‘iminā samaṇena sadiso añño samaṇo nāma natthi, ayañhi appicchatāya vatthaṃ na nivāseti, ‘esa papañco’ti maññamāno bhikkhābhājanampi na pariharati, chamānikiṇṇameva khādati, ayaṃ samaṇo nāma. Mayaṃ pana kiṃ samaṇā’’ti? Evaṃ sabbaññubuddhassa pacchato carantova imaṃ pāpakaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakkesi.

ekamidāhanti in one I. Samayanti at a time, at one time, I, is the meaning. Thūlūsūti Thūlū by name, a district, there I lived. Uttarakā nāmāti in terms of the feminine gender, Uttaraka by name, is the name of a town in the Thūlū district, having made that town a village for alms, is the meaning. Aceloti naked. Korakkhattiyoti a prince with deformed legs. Kukkuravatikoti one who has undertaken the dog-duty, he eats sniffing like a dog, lies down in a dung heap, and does other dog-like actions. Catukkuṇḍikoti moving around having placed two knees and two elbows, four elbows, on the ground. Chamānikiṇṇanti scattered, thrown, placed on the ground. Bhakkhasanti food, whatever is edible and chewable. Mukhenevāti without touching it with his hand, he eats the edible with his mouth, and he eats the chewable with his mouth. Sādhurūpoti of beautiful form. Ayaṃ samaṇoti this is a recluse, one of the arahants. Therein, vatāti an indeclinable used in the sense of wishing. It seems this was his wish, "There is no other recluse like this recluse, for he, desiring little, does not wear clothes, thinking 'this is proliferation,' he does not even carry an alms bowl, he eats only what is scattered on the ground, this is a recluse. What are we, then, as recluses?" Thus, walking behind the all-knowing Buddha, he thought this evil thought.

Etadavocāti bhagavā kira cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ sunakkhatto pāpajjhāsayo, kiṃ nu imaṃ disvā cintesī’’ti? Athevaṃ cintento tassa ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā ‘‘ayaṃ moghapuriso mādisassa sabbaññuno pacchato āgacchanto acelaṃ arahāti maññati, idheva dānāyaṃ bālo niggahaṃ arahatī’’ti anivattitvāva etaṃtvampi nāmātiādivacanamavoca. Tatthatvampi nāmāti garahatthe pikāro. Garahanto hi naṃ bhagavā ‘‘tvampi nāmā’’ti āha. ‘‘Tvampi nāma evaṃ hīnajjhāsayo, ahaṃ samaṇo sakyaputtiyoti evaṃ paṭijānissasī’’ti ayañhettha adhippāyo.Kiṃ pana maṃ, bhanteti mayhaṃ, bhante, kiṃ gārayhaṃ disvā bhagavā ‘‘evamāhā’’ti pucchati. Athassa bhagavā ācikkhanto ‘‘nanu te’’tiādimāha.Maccharāyatīti ‘‘mā aññassa arahattaṃ hotū’’ti kiṃ bhagavā evaṃ arahattassa maccharāyatīti pucchati.Na kho ahanti ahaṃ, moghapurisa, sadevakassa lokassa arahattappaṭilābhameva paccāsīsāmi, etadatthameva me bahūni dukkarāni karontena pāramiyo pūritā, na kho ahaṃ, moghapurisa, arahattassa maccharāyāmi.Pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti na arahantaṃ arahāti, arahante ca anarahantoti evaṃ tassa diṭṭhi uppannā. Taṃ sandhāya ‘‘pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigata’’nti āha.Yaṃ kho panāti yaṃ etaṃ acelaṃ evaṃ maññasi.Sattamaṃ divasanti sattame divase.Alasakenāti alasakabyādhinā.Kālaṅkarissatīti uddhumātaudaro marissati.

Etadavocāti it seems the Blessed One thought, "This Sunakkhatta has evil intentions, what did he think seeing this?" Then, knowing his intention as he was thinking thus, "This foolish man, coming behind me, an all-knowing one, thinks that the naked one is an arahant, here now this fool deserves rebuke," without turning back, he spoke these words beginning with tvampi nāmā. Therein, tvampi nāmāti the particle pi is in the sense of reproach. Indeed, reproaching him, the Blessed One said, "Tvampi nāmā." "You too have such base intentions, you will claim to be a recluse, a follower of the Sakyan, this is the meaning here. Kiṃ pana maṃ, bhanteti having seen what fault of mine, O Venerable One, did the Blessed One say thus? he asks. Then, showing it to him, the Blessed One said, beginning with "nanu te." Maccharāyatīti "May another not attain arahantship?" does the Blessed One envy arahantship thus he asks? Na kho ahanti I, foolish man, only desire the attainment of arahantship for the world with its devas; for this purpose, having done many difficult deeds, the perfections were fulfilled by me; indeed, I do not envy arahantship, foolish man. Pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigatanti not an arahant is an arahant, and arahants are not arahants, thus such a view has arisen for him. Referring to that, he said, "pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigata." Yaṃ kho panāti that naked one whom you think thus. Sattamaṃ divasanti on the seventh day. Alasakenāti by means of the disease called alasaka. Kālaṅkarissatīti his body will swell up and he will die.

Kālakañcikāti tesaṃ asurānaṃ nāmaṃ. Tesaṃ kira tigāvuto attabhāvo appamaṃsalohito purāṇapaṇṇasadiso kakkaṭakānaṃ viya akkhīni nikkhamitvā matthake tiṭṭhanti, mukhaṃ sūcipāsakasadisaṃ matthakasmiṃyeva hoti, tena oṇamitvā gocaraṃ gaṇhanti.Bīraṇatthambaketi bīraṇatiṇatthambo tasmiṃ susāne atthi, tasmā taṃ bīraṇatthambakanti vuccati.

Kālakañcikāti the name of those asuras. It seems their body is three leagues in size, with little flesh and blood, eyes like old leaves protruding and standing on their heads, their mouths like a needle's eye are on the top of their heads, with that they bend down and take their food. Bīraṇatthambaketi there is a clump of bīraṇa grass in that cemetery, therefore it is called bīraṇatthambaka.

Tenupasaṅkamīti bhagavati ettakaṃ vatvā tasmiṃ gāme piṇḍāya caritvā vihāraṃ gate vihārā nikkhamitvā upasaṅkami.Yena tvanti yena kāraṇena tvaṃ. Yasmāpi bhagavatā byākato, tasmāti attho.Mattaṃmattanti pamāṇayuttaṃ pamāṇayuttaṃ. ‘‘Mantā mantā’’tipi pāṭho, paññāya upaparikkhitvā upaparikkhitvāti attho.Yathā samaṇassa gotamassāti yathā samaṇassa gotamassa micchā vacanaṃ assa, tathā kareyyāsīti āha. Evaṃ vutte acelo sunakho viya uddhanaṭṭhāne nipanno sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā akkhīni ummīletvā olokento kiṃ kathesi ‘‘samaṇo nāma gotamo amhākaṃ verī visabhāgo, samaṇassa gotamassa uppannakālato paṭṭhāya mayaṃ sūriye uggate khajjopanakā viya jātā. Samaṇo gotamo amhe, evaṃ vācaṃ vadeyya aññathā vā. Verino pana kathā nāma tacchā na hoti, gaccha tvaṃ ahamettha kattabbaṃ jānissāmī’’ti vatvā punadeva nipajji.

Tenupasaṅkamīti having said so much to the Blessed One, after he had gone to the monastery having gone for alms in that village, having left the monastery, he approached. Yena tvanti for what reason you. Because you were predicted by the Blessed One, therefore, is the meaning. Mattaṃmattanti measured, measured. "Mantā mantā" is also a reading, having investigated with wisdom, having investigated, is the meaning. Yathā samaṇassa gotamassāti just as the recluse Gotama's speech might be false, so may you do, he said. When this was said, the naked one, like a dog, lying down in a dung heap, lifting his head, opening his eyes, looking around, what did he say? "The recluse Gotama is our enemy, different from us; since the time the recluse Gotama arose, we have become like fireflies when the sun rises. The recluse Gotama might say this or something else to us. But the speech of an enemy is not true, go you, I will know what should be done here," having said this, he lay down again.

8.Ekadvīhikāyāti ekaṃ dveti vatvā gaṇesi.Yathā tanti yathā asaddahamāno koci gaṇeyya, evaṃ gaṇesi. Ekadivasañca tikkhattuṃ upasaṅkamitvā eko divaso atīto, dve divasā atītāti ārocesi.Sattamaṃ divasanti so kira sunakkhattassa vacanaṃ sutvā sattāhaṃ nirāhārova ahosi. Athassa sattame divase eko upaṭṭhāko ‘‘amhākaṃ kulūpakasamaṇassa ajja sattamo divaso gehaṃ anāgacchantassa aphāsu nu kho jāta’’nti sūkaramaṃsaṃ pacāpetvā bhattamādāya gantvā purato bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipi. Acelo disvā cintesi ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassa kathā tacchā vā atacchā vā hotu, āhāraṃ pana khāditvā suhitassa me maraṇampi sumaraṇa’’nti dve hatthe jaṇṇukāni ca bhūmiyaṃ ṭhapetvā kucchipūraṃ bhuñji. So rattibhāge jīrāpetuṃ asakkonto alasakena kālamakāsi. Sacepi hi so ‘‘na bhuñjeyya’’nti cinteyya, tathāpi taṃ divasaṃ bhuñjitvā alasakena kālaṃ kareyya. Advejjhavacanā hi tathāgatāti.

8.Ekadvīhikāyāti having counted saying one, two. Yathā tanti just as someone who does not believe might count, even so he counted. Having approached three times in one day, he announced, "One day has passed, two days have passed." Sattamaṃ divasanti it seems, having heard Sunakkhatta's words, he was without food for a week. Then on the seventh day, one attendant thinking, "Today is the seventh day for the recluse who is a family friend of ours, not coming to the house, has he become unwell?" having cooked pig meat, taking the food, he placed it on the ground in front of him. Seeing it, the naked one thought, "Whether the words of the recluse Gotama are true or untrue, but having eaten food, even my death is a good death," having placed both hands and knees on the ground, he ate his fill. In the night, being unable to digest it, he died from alasaka. Even if he thought, "I will not eat," even so, having eaten on that day, he would die from alasaka. For the words of the Tathāgata are not twofold.

Bīraṇatthambaketi titthiyā kira ‘‘kālaṅkato korakkhattiyo’’ti sutvā divasāni gaṇetvā idaṃ tāva saccaṃ jātaṃ, idāni naṃ aññattha chaḍḍetvā ‘‘musāvādena samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ niggaṇhissāmā’’ti gantvā tassa sarīraṃ valliyā bandhitvā ākaḍḍhantā ‘‘ettha chaḍḍessāma, ettha chaḍḍessāmā’’ti gacchanti. Gatagataṭṭhānaṃ aṅgaṇameva hoti. Te kaḍḍhamānā bīraṇatthambakasusānaṃyeva gantvā susānabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘aññattha chaḍḍessāmā’’ti ākaḍḍhiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ valli chijjittha, pacchā cāletuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Te tatova pakkantā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bīraṇatthambake susāne chaḍḍesu’’nti.

Bīraṇatthambaketi: It is said that the Tirthikas, having heard that "Korakkhattiya is dead," counted the days and realized this was true. Now, intending to dispose of him elsewhere and "defeat the ascetic Gotama with a lie," they went, tied his body with vines, and dragged it, saying, "We will throw him here, we will throw him there." Every place they went became a courtyard. As they dragged him, they went to the Bīraṇatthambaka cemetery and, recognizing it as a cemetery, they dragged him further, intending to throw him elsewhere. Then their vine broke, and afterwards they were unable to move him. They departed from there. Therefore it was said, "They threw him in the Bīraṇatthambaka cemetery."

9.Tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? So kira cintesi ‘‘avasesaṃ tāva samaṇassa gotamassa vacanaṃ sameti, matassa pana uṭṭhāya aññena saddhiṃ kathanaṃ nāma natthi, handāhaṃ gantvā pucchāmi. Sace katheti, sundaraṃ. No ce katheti, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ musāvādena niggaṇhissāmī’’ti iminā kāraṇena upasaṅkami.Ākoṭesīti pahari.Jānāmi āvusoti matasarīraṃ uṭṭhahitvā kathetuṃ samatthaṃ nāma natthi, idaṃ kathaṃ kathesīti? Buddhānubhāvena. Bhagavā kira korakkhattiyaṃ asurayonito ānetvā sarīre adhimocetvā kathāpesi. Tameva vā sarīraṃ kathāpesi, acinteyyo hi buddhavisayo.

9. Tenupasaṅkamīti: Why did he approach? It is said that he thought, "The rest of the words of the ascetic Gotama agree, but there is no speaking with another after death. Come, I will go and ask. If he speaks, excellent. If he does not speak, I will defeat the ascetic Gotama with a lie." For this reason, he approached. Ākoṭesīti: He struck. Jānāmi āvusoti: Is there any dead body capable of rising and speaking? How did he speak? By the power of the Buddha. It is said that the Blessed One brought Korakkhattiya from the Asura realm, placed him in the body, and caused him to speak. Or perhaps it was that very body that spoke; the Buddha's domain is inconceivable.

10.Tatheva taṃ vipākanti tassa vacanassa vipākaṃ tatheva, udāhu noti liṅgavipallāso kato, tatheva so vipākoti attho. Keci pana ‘‘vipakka’’ntipi paṭhanti, nibbattanti attho.

10. Tatheva taṃ vipākanti: Is the result of that statement the same, or not? A gender change has been made; the meaning is that the result is the same. But some read "vipakka," meaning "they arise."

Ettha ṭhatvā pāṭihāriyāni samānetabbāni. Sabbāneva hetāni pañca pāṭihāriyāni honti. ‘‘Sattame divase marissatī’’ti vuttaṃ, so tatheva mato, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ. ‘‘Alasakenā’’ti vuttaṃ, alasakeneva mato, idaṃ dutiyaṃ. ‘‘Kālakañcikesu nibbattissatī’’ti vuttaṃ, tattheva nibbatto, idaṃ tatiyaṃ. ‘‘Bīraṇatthambake susāne chaḍḍessantī’’ti vuttaṃ, tattheva chaḍḍito, idaṃ catutthaṃ. ‘‘Nibbattaṭṭhānato āgantvā sunakkhattena saddhiṃ kathessatī’’ti vutto, so kathesiyeva, idaṃ pañcamaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ.

Here, miracles should be brought together. All of these are five miracles. It was said, "He will die on the seventh day," and he died just so; this is the first miracle. It was said, "By indigestion," and he died by indigestion; this is the second. It was said, "He will be reborn among the Kālakañjikas," and he was reborn there; this is the third. It was said, "They will throw him in the Bīraṇatthambaka cemetery," and he was thrown there; this is the fourth. It was said, "Having come from the place of rebirth, he will speak with Sunakkhatta," and he did speak; this is the fifth miracle.

Acelakaḷāramaṭṭakavatthuvaṇṇanā
Acelakaḷāramaṭṭakavatthuvaṇṇanā

11.Kaḷāramaṭṭakoti nikkhantadantamattako. Nāmameva vā tassetaṃ.Lābhaggappattoti lābhaggaṃ patto, aggalābhaṃ pattoti vuttaṃ hoti.Yasaggappattoti yasaggaṃ aggaparivāraṃ patto.Vatapadānīti vatāniyeva, vatakoṭṭhāsā vā.Samattānīti gahitāni.Samādinnānīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Puratthimena vesālinti vesālito avidūre puratthimāya disāya.Cetiyanti yakkhacetiyaṭṭhānaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.

11. Kaḷāramaṭṭakoti: One with teeth that have just come out. Or that was simply his name. Lābhaggappattoti: Having attained the peak of gains, it is said that he attained the foremost gains. Yasaggappattoti: Having attained the peak of fame, the foremost retinue. Vatapadānīti: Just observances, or sections of observances. Samattānīti: Taken. Samādinnānīti: A synonym for that. Puratthimena vesālinti: Not far from Vesali, in the eastern direction. Cetiyanti: A place for a Yakkha shrine. This is the method everywhere.

12.Yena acelakoti bhagavato vattaṃ katvā yena acelo kaḷāramaṭṭako tenupasaṅkami.Pañhaṃ apucchīti gambhīraṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ pañhaṃ pucchi.Na sampāyāsīti na sammā ñāṇagatiyā pāyāsi, andho viya visamaṭṭhāne tattha tattheva pakkhali. Neva ādiṃ, na pariyosānamaddasa. Atha vā ‘‘na sampāyāsī’’ti na sampādesi, sampādetvā kathetuṃ nāsakkhi.Asampāyantoti kabarakkhīni parivattetvā olokento ‘‘asikkhitakassa santike vuṭṭhosi, anokāsepi pabbajito pañhaṃ pucchanto vicarasi, apehi mā etasmiṃ ṭhāne aṭṭhāsī’’ti vadanto.Kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsīti kuppanākāraṃ kopaṃ, dussanākāraṃ dosaṃ, atuṭṭhākārabhūtaṃ domanassasaṅkhātaṃ appaccayañca pākaṭamakāsi.Āsādimhaseti āsādiyimha ghaṭṭayimha.Mā vata no ahosīti aho vata me na bhaveyya. Maṃ vata no ahosītipi pāṭho. Tatthamanti sāmivacanatthe upayogavacanaṃ, ahosi vata nu mamāti attho. Evañca pana cintetvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā ‘‘khamatha me, bhante’’ti taṃ khamāpesi. Sopi ito paṭṭhāya aññaṃ kiñci pañhaṃ nāma na pucchissasīti. Āma na pucchissāmīti. Yadi evaṃ gaccha, khamāmi teti taṃ uyyojesi.

12. Yena acelakoti: Having done his duty to the Blessed One, he approached the naked ascetic Kaḷāramaṭṭaka. Pañhaṃ apucchīti: He asked a profound question struck by the three characteristics. Na sampāyāsīti: He did not rightly go by knowledge; like a blind man in an uneven place, he stumbled here and there. He did not see either the beginning or the end. Or, "na sampāyāsī"ti: he did not accomplish, he was unable to accomplish and speak. Asampāyantoti: Looking around, rolling his fierce eyes, saying, "You have lived under an unlearned one, you have gone forth at an inopportune time, asking questions you wander about. Go away, do not stand in this place." Kopañca dosañca appaccayañca pātvākāsīti: He made manifest the nature of anger, anger; the nature of aversion, aversion; and displeasure, known as dissatisfaction, which is the nature of discontent. Āsādimhaseti: We have offended, we have clashed. Mā vata no ahosīti: Oh, may it not have happened to me. "Maṃ vata no ahosīti" is also a reading. There, manti is a word used in the sense of ownership; the meaning is, "Oh, had it not happened to me!" Thinking thus, he sat squatting and, saying, "Forgive me, Bhante," he begged his forgiveness. He (Kaḷāramaṭṭaka) said: "From now on, you will not ask any other question?" "Yes, I will not ask." "If so, go, I forgive you," he dismissed him.

14.Parihitoti paridahito nivatthavattho.Sānucārikoti anucārikā vuccati bhariyā, saha anucārikāya sānucāriko, taṃ taṃ brahmacariyaṃ pahāya sabhariyoti attho.Odanakummāsanti surāmaṃsato atirekaṃ odanampi kummāsampi bhuñjamāno.Yasā nihīnoti yaṃ lābhaggayasaggaṃ patto, tato parihīno hutvā. ‘‘Kataṃ hoti uttarimanussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriya’’nti idha sattavatapadātikkamavasena satta pāṭihāriyāni veditabbāni.

14. Parihitoti: Clothed, wearing clothes. Sānucārikoti: Anucārikā is said to be a wife; sānucāriko means with a wife, having abandoned that Brahmacariya, with a wife. Odanakummāsanti: Eating rice and gruel, which are superior to liquor and meat. Yasā nihīnoti: Having attained the peak of gain and fame, having declined from that. "Kataṃ hoti uttarimanussadhammā iddhipāṭihāriya"nti: Here, seven miracles should be understood by way of transgressing the seven vows.

Acelapāthikaputtavatthuvaṇṇanā
Acelapāthikaputtavatthuvaṇṇanā

15.Pāthikaputtoti pāthikassa putto.Ñāṇavādenāti ñāṇavādena saddhiṃ.Upaḍḍhapathanti yojanaṃ ce, no antare bhaveyya, gotamo aḍḍhayojanaṃ, ahaṃ aḍḍhayojanaṃ. Esa nayo aḍḍhayojanādīsu. Ekapadavārampi atikkamma gacchato jayo bhavissati, anāgacchato parājayoti.Te tatthāti te mayaṃ tattha samāgataṭṭhāne.Taddiguṇaṃ taddiguṇāhanti tato tato diguṇaṃ diguṇaṃ ahaṃ karissāmi, bhagavatā saddhiṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ kātuṃ asamatthabhāvaṃ jānantopi ‘‘uttamapurisena saddhiṃ paṭṭhapetvā asakkuṇantassāpi pāsaṃso hotī’’ti ñatvā evamāha. Nagaravāsinopi taṃ sutvā ‘‘asamattho nāma evaṃ na gajjati, addhā ayampi arahā bhavissatī’’ti tassa mahantaṃ sakkāramakaṃsu.

15. Pāthikaputtoti: The son of Pāthika. Ñāṇavādenāti: Together with an argument about knowledge. Upaḍḍhapathanti: If it is a yojana, it should not be in between. Gotama a half yojana, I a half yojana. This is the method for half a yojana and so on. Even if he goes beyond one step, there will be victory; if he does not come, there will be defeat. Te tatthāti: We, at that place of assembly. Taddiguṇaṃ taddiguṇāhanti: From then on, I will make it double and double again. Although knowing that he is incapable of performing a miracle with the Blessed One, he said this, knowing that "Even for one who cannot establish after setting out with the best person, there is praise." The townspeople also, having heard that, thought, "One who is incapable does not roar like this. Surely, this one too will be an Arahant," and they made great offerings to him.

16.Yenāhaṃ tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘sunakkhatto kira pāthikaputto evaṃ vadatī’’ti assosi. Athassa hīnajjhāsayattā hīnadassanāya cittaṃ udapādi.

16. Yenāhaṃ tenupasaṅkamīti: "Sunakkhatta says that Pāthikaputta is speaking thus," he heard. Then, because of his inferior intention, a mind arose for inferior seeing.

Taṃ vācantiādīsu ‘‘ahaṃ abuddhova samāno buddhomhīti vicariṃ, abhūtaṃ me kathitaṃ nāhaṃ buddho’’ti vadanto taṃ vācaṃ pajahati nāma. Raho nisīditvā cintayamāno ‘‘ahaṃ ‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ abuddhova samāno buddhomhī’ti vicariṃ, ito dāni paṭṭhāya nāhaṃ buddho’’ti cintayanto taṃ cittaṃ pajahati nāma. ‘‘Ahaṃ ‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ abuddhova samāno buddhomhī’ti pāpakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ gahetvā vicariṃ, ito dāni paṭṭhāya imaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pajahāmī’’ti pajahanto taṃ diṭṭhiṃ paṭinissajjati nāma. Evaṃ akaronto pana taṃ vācaṃ appahāya taṃ cittaṃ appahāya taṃ diṭṭhiṃ appaṭinissajjitvāti vuccati.Vipateyyāti bandhanā muttatālapakkaṃ viya gīvato pateyya, sattadhā vā pana phaleyya.

Taṃ vācantiādīsu: "I, being an unawakened one, wandered about as if I were awakened; I have spoken untruthfully, I am not awakened," thus, he abandons that speech. Sitting alone in seclusion, thinking, "I wandered about for so long as if I were awakened, from now on I am not awakened," thus, he abandons that thought. "I, having taken up the evil view that 'I wandered about for so long as if I were unawakened, from now on I abandon this view,'" thus, abandoning, he relinquishes that view. If he does not do so, it is said that he does not abandon that speech, he does not abandon that thought, he does not relinquish that view. Vipateyyāti: He should fall from the neck like a ripe palm fruit freed from its stem, or he should shatter into seven pieces.

17.Rakkhatetanti rakkhatu etaṃ.Ekaṃsenāti nippariyāyena.Odhāritāti bhāsitā.Aceloca, bhante, pāthikaputtoti evaṃ ekaṃsena bhagavato vācāya odhāritāya sace acelo pāthikaputto.Virūparūpenāti vigatarūpena vigacchitasabhāvena rūpena attano rūpaṃ pahāya adissamānena kāyena. Sīhabyagghādivasena vā vividharūpena sammukhībhāvaṃ āgaccheyya.Tadassa bhagavato musāti evaṃ sante bhagavato taṃ vacanaṃ musā bhaveyyāti musāvādena niggaṇhāti. Ṭhapetvā kira etaṃ na aññena bhagavā musāvādena niggahitapubboti.

17. Rakkhatetanti: May he protect this. Ekaṃsenāti: Unequivocally. Odhāritāti: Spoken. Aceloca, bhante, pāthikaputtoti: Thus, if the naked ascetic Pāthikaputta, with the Blessed One's word being unequivocally declared. Virūparūpenāti: With a deformed form, with a form of destroyed nature, abandoning his own form, with an invisible body. Or, by way of lions, tigers, etc., he might come into sight in various forms. Tadassa bhagavato musāti: In that case, that word of the Blessed One would be false; thus, he would defeat him with a lie. It is said that, setting this aside, the Blessed One was never before defeated by a lie.

18.Dvayagāminīti sarūpena atthibhāvaṃ, atthena natthibhāvanti evaṃ dvayagāminī. Alikatucchanipphalavācāya etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

18. Dvayagāminīti: Going in two ways; existence in form, non-existence in meaning. This is a designation for false, empty, fruitless speech.

19.Ajitopi nāma licchavīnaṃ senāpatīti so kira bhagavato upaṭṭhāko ahosi, so kālamakāsi. Athassa sarīrakiccaṃ katvā manussā pāthikaputtaṃ pucchiṃsu ‘‘kuhiṃ nibbatto senāpatī’’ti? So āha – ‘‘mahāniraye nibbatto’’ti. Idañca pana vatvā puna āha ‘‘tumhākaṃ senāpati mama santikaṃ āgamma ahaṃ tumhākaṃ vacanamakatvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādaṃ patiṭṭhapetvā niraye nibbattomhī’’ti paroditthāti.Tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāyāti ettha ‘‘pāṭihāriyakaraṇatthāyā’’ti kasmā na vadati? Abhāvā. Sammukhībhāvopi hissa tena saddhiṃ natthi, kuto pāṭihāriyakaraṇaṃ, tasmā tathā avatvā ‘‘divāvihārāyā’’ti āha.

19. Ajitopi nāma licchavīnaṃ senāpatīti: He was an attendant of the Blessed One; he died. Then, having performed the funeral rites for him, people asked Pāthikaputta, "Where was the general reborn?" He said, "He was reborn in the great hell." Having said this, he further said, "Your general came to my presence and, having established the doctrine of the ascetic Gotama without heeding your words, was reborn in hell, weeping." Tenupasaṅkami divāvihārāyāti: Here, why does he not say "for the sake of performing a miracle"? Because of its absence. There is not even a face-to-face encounter with him, how could there be the performance of a miracle? Therefore, without saying so, he said "for the sake of the day's dwelling."

Iddhipāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā
Iddhipāṭihāriyakathāvaṇṇanā

20.Gahapatinecayikāti gahapati mahāsālā. Tesañhi mahādhanadhaññanicayo, tasmā ‘‘necayikā’’ti vuccanti.Anekasahassāti sahassehipi aparimāṇagaṇanā. Evaṃ mahatiṃ kira parisaṃ ṭhapetvā sunakkhattaṃ añño sannipātetuṃ samattho natthi. Teneva bhagavā ettakaṃ kālaṃ sunakkhattaṃ gahetvā vicari.

20. Gahapatinecayikāti: Householders, great halls. Indeed, there is a great accumulation of wealth and grain for them; therefore, they are called "accumulators." Anekasahassāti: Countless, even by thousands. It is said that, having established such a great assembly, no one other than Sunakkhatta was able to convene it. Therefore, the Blessed One wandered about with Sunakkhatta for such a long time.

21.Bhayanti cittutrāsabhayaṃ.Chambhitattanti sakalasarīracalanaṃ.Lomahaṃsoti lomānaṃ uddhaggabhāvo. So kira cintesi – ‘‘ahaṃ atimahantaṃ kathaṃ kathetvā sadevake loke aggapuggalena saddhiṃ paṭiviruddho, mayhaṃ kho panabbhantare arahattaṃ vā pāṭihāriyakaraṇahetu vā natthi, samaṇo pana gotamo pāṭihāriyaṃ karissati, athassa pāṭihāriyaṃ disvā mahājano ‘tvaṃ dāni pāṭihāriyaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto kasmā attano pamāṇamajānitvā loke aggapuggalena saddhiṃ paṭimallo hutvā gajjasī’ti kaṭṭhaleḍḍudaṇḍādīhi viheṭhessatī’’ti. Tenassa mahājanasannipātañceva tena bhagavato ca āgamanaṃ sutvā bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ vā lomahaṃso vā udapādi. So tato dukkhā muccitukāmo tindukakhāṇukaparibbājakārāmaṃ agamāsi. Tamatthaṃ dassetuṃatha kho bhagavātiādimāha. Tatthaupasaṅkamīti na kevalaṃ upasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā pana dūraṃ aḍḍhayojanantaraṃ paribbājakārāmaṃ paviṭṭho. Tatthapi cittassādaṃ alabhamāno antantena āvijjhitvā ārāmapaccante ekaṃ gahanaṭṭhānaṃ upadhāretvā pāsāṇaphalake nisīdi. Atha bhagavā cintesi – ‘‘sace ayaṃ bālo kassacideva kathaṃ gahetvā idhāgaccheyya, mā nassatu bālo’’ti ‘‘nisinnapāsāṇaphalakaṃ tassa sarīre allīnaṃ hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi. Saha adhiṭṭhānacittena taṃ tassa sarīre allīyi. So mahāaddubandhanabaddho viya chinnapādo viya ca ahosi.

21. Bhayanti: Fear, terror, fear. Chambhitattanti: Trembling of the whole body. Lomahaṃsoti: The rising up of the hairs. He thought, "Having spoken such a great word, I am opposed to the foremost person in the world with its devas; but within me there is no Arahatship or cause for performing miracles. The ascetic Gotama will perform a miracle, and having seen his miracle, the great crowd will scold me with clods, sticks, etc., saying, 'Unable to perform a miracle, why do you boast, not knowing your own measure, having become a rival to the foremost person in the world?'" Therefore, having heard of that great gathering and of the Blessed One's arrival, fear, trembling, or hair-raising arose in him. Desiring to escape from that suffering, he went to the Tindukakhāṇuka Paribbājaka monastery. To show that matter, he said atha kho bhagavātiādi. There, upasaṅkamīti: He not only approached, but having approached, he entered the Paribbājaka monastery a distant half a yojana away. Not obtaining satisfaction of mind there either, probing inwardly, having determined a secluded place at the edge of the monastery, he sat on a stone slab. Then the Blessed One thought, "If this fool should come here having taken up some kind of talk, may the fool not perish," he determined, "May the stone slab on which he is sitting cling to his body." With the thought of determination, it clung to his body. He became like one bound by a great vine-rope, or like one with severed feet.

Assosīti ito cito ca pāthikaputtaṃ pariyesamānā parisā tassa anupadaṃ gantvā nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ ñatvā āgatena aññatarena purisena ‘‘tumhe kaṃ pariyesathā’’ti vutte pāthikaputtanti. So ‘‘tindukakhāṇukaparibbājakārāme nisinno’’ti vuttavacanena assosi.

Assosīti: Searching for Pāthikaputta here and there, the assembly, going after his footsteps, having recognized the place where he was sitting, heard from another man who had come, "Whom are you searching for?" "Pāthikaputta." He heard by the words, "He is sitting in the Tindukakhāṇuka Paribbājaka monastery."

22.Saṃsappatīti osīdati. Tattheva sañcarati.Pāvaḷāvuccati ānisadaṭṭhikā.

22. Saṃsappatīti: He sinks down. He travels right there. Pāvaḷāvuccati: The ankle bone is called pāvaḷā.

23.Parābhūtarūpoti parājitarūpo, vinaṭṭharūpo vā.

23. Parābhūtarūpoti: Of defeated form, or of destroyed form.

25.Goyugehīti goyuttehi satamattehi vā sahassamattehi vā yugehi.Āviñcheyyāmāti ākaḍḍheyyāma.Chijjeyyunti chindeyyuṃ. Pāthikaputto vā bandhaṭṭhāne chijjeyya.

25. Goyugehīti: With hundreds or thousands of yokes yoked to cows. Āviñcheyyāmāti: We should drag him. Chijjeyyunti: They should break. Or Pāthikaputta should break at the place of binding.

26.Dārupattikantevāsīti dārupattikassa antevāsī. Tassa kira etadahosi ‘‘tiṭṭhatu tāva pāṭihāriyaṃ, samaṇo gotamo ‘acelo pāthikaputto āsanāpi na vuṭṭhahissatī’ti āha. Handāhaṃ gantvā yena kenaci upāyena taṃ āsanā vuṭṭhāpemi. Ettāvatā ca samaṇassa gotamassa parājayo bhavissatī’’ti. Tasmā evamāha.

26. Dārupattikantevāsīti: A student of Dārupattika. The following occurred to him, "Let the miracle stand for now. The ascetic Gotama said, 'The naked ascetic Pāthikaputta will not even get up from his seat.' Come, I will go and make him get up from his seat by some means. In this way, the ascetic Gotama will be defeated." Therefore, he said this.

27.Sīhassāti cattāro sīhā tiṇasīho ca kāḷasīho ca paṇḍusīho ca kesarasīho ca. Tesaṃ catunnaṃ sīhānaṃ kesarasīho aggataṃ gato, so idhādhippeto.Migaraññoti sabbacatuppadānaṃ rañño.Āsayanti nivāsaṃ.Sīhanādanti abhītanādaṃ.Gocarāyapakkameyyanti āhāratthāya pakkameyyaṃ.Varaṃ varanti uttamuttamaṃ, thūlaṃ thūlanti attho.Mudumaṃsānīti mudūni maṃsāni. ‘‘Madhumaṃsānī’’tipi pāṭho, madhuramaṃsānīti attho.Ajjhupeyyanti upagaccheyyaṃ.Sīhanādaṃ naditvāti ye dubbalā pāṇā, te palāyantūti attano sūrabhāvasannissitena kāruññena naditvā.

27. Sīhassāti: There are four lions: the grass lion, the black lion, the pale lion, and the maned lion. Among those four lions, the maned lion has gone to the forefront; that is what is intended here. Migaraññoti: Of the king of all quadrupeds. Āsayanti: Dwelling. Sīhanādanti: Fearless roar. Gocarāyapakkameyyanti: I would depart for the sake of food. Varaṃ varanti: Best of the best, meaning coarse and thick. Mudumaṃsānīti: Tender meats. "Madhumaṃsānī" is also a reading, meaning sweet meats. Ajjhupeyyanti: I would approach. Sīhanādaṃ naditvāti: Having roared with compassion relying on his own courageous nature, so that the weak creatures might flee.

28.Vighāsasaṃvaḍḍhoti vighāsena saṃvaḍḍho, vighāsaṃ bhakkhitā tirittamaṃsaṃ khāditvā vaḍḍhito.Dittoti dappito thūlasarīro.Balavāti balasampanno.Etadahosīti kasmā ahosi? Asmimānadosena.

28.Vighāsasaṃvaḍḍho means grown up on leftovers, grown up eating the remains of meat that has been eaten. Ditto means proud, having a stout body. Balavā means possessing strength. Etadahosī means why did this happen? Because of the fault of conceit.

Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – ekadivasaṃ kira so sīho gocarato nivattamāno taṃ siṅgālaṃ bhayena palāyamānaṃ disvā kāruññajāto hutvā ‘‘vayasa, mā bhāyi, tiṭṭha ko nāma tva’’nti āha. Jambuko nāmāhaṃ sāmīti. Vayasa, jambuka, ito paṭṭhāya maṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ sakkhissasīti. Upaṭṭhahissāmīti. So tato paṭṭhāya upaṭṭhāti. Sīho gocarato āgacchanto mahantaṃ mahantaṃ maṃsakhaṇḍaṃ āharati. So taṃ khāditvā avidūre pāsāṇapiṭṭhe vasati. So katipāhaccayeneva thūlasarīro mahākhandho jāto. Atha naṃ sīho avoca – ‘‘vayasa, jambuka, mama vijambhanakāle avidūre ṭhatvā ‘viroca sāmī’ti vattuṃ sakkhissasī’’ti. Sakkomi sāmīti. So tassa vijambhanakāle tathā karoti. Tena sīhassa atireko asmimāno hoti.

Here is the sequential story: It seems that one day that lion, returning from its foraging ground, saw that jackal running away in fear, and, feeling compassion, said, "Friend, do not be afraid, stay here, who are you?" He said, "I am called Jambuka, master." "Friend Jambuka, from today onwards, will you be able to attend to me?" "I will attend to you." From then on, he attended to him. The lion, coming from its foraging ground, would bring a large piece of meat. He would eat that and live on a nearby stone slab. After a few days, he became stout-bodied and large-limbed. Then the lion said to him, "Friend Jambuka, when I yawn, will you be able to stand not far away and say, 'You shine, master'?" "I am able, master." So he did that when he yawned. By that, the lion had excessive conceit.

ko cāhanti ahaṃ ko, sīho migarājā ko, na me ñāti, na sāmiko, kimahaṃ tassa nipaccakāraṃ karomīti adhippāyo.Siṅgālakaṃyevāti siṅgālaravameva.Bheraṇḍakaṃyevāti appiyaamanāpasaddameva.Ke ca chave siṅgāleti ko ca lāmako siṅgālo.Ke pana sīhanādeti ko pana sīhanādo siṅgālassa ca sīhanādassa ca ko sambandhoti adhippāyo.Sugatāpadānesūti sugatalakkhaṇesu. Sugatassa sāsanasambhūtāsu tīsu sikkhāsu. Kathaṃ panesa tattha jīvati? Etassa hi cattāro paccaye dadamānā sīlādiguṇasampannānaṃ sambuddhānaṃ demāti denti, tena esa abuddho samāno buddhānaṃ niyāmitapaccaye paribhuñjanto sugatāpadānesu jīvati nāma.Sugatātirittānīti tesaṃ kira bhojanāni dadamānā buddhānañca buddhasāvakānañca datvā pacchā avasesaṃ sāyanhasamaye denti. Evamesa sugatātirittāni bhuñjati nāma.Tathāgateti tathāgataṃ arahantaṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ āsādetabbaṃ ghaṭṭayitabbaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tathāgate’’tiādīni upayogabahuvacanāneva.Āsādetabbanti idampi bahuvacanameva ekavacanaṃ viya vuttaṃ.Āsādanāti ahaṃ buddhena saddhiṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ karissāmīti ghaṭṭanā.

ko cāha means "who am I, the lion, the king of beasts, who are not my relatives, nor my master, why do I pay homage to him?" is the idea. Siṅgālakaṃyevā means only the cry of a jackal. Bheraṇḍakaṃyevā means only an unpleasant, disagreeable sound. Ke ca chave siṅgāle means what is a wretched jackal? Ke pana sīhanāde means what is the roar of a lion, what is the relationship between the jackal's cry and the lion's roar? is the idea. Sugatāpadānesū means in the characteristics of the Sugata. In the three trainings that arose from the Sugata's teaching. How does he live there? People give the four requisites to him, thinking "we give to the fully enlightened Buddhas who are endowed with virtuous qualities such as morality," therefore, this ignorant one, using the requisites intended for the Buddhas, lives in the Sugata's dispensation. Sugatātirittānī means when those people give food, they give to the Buddhas and the Buddha's disciples, and then they give the remaining leftovers in the evening. Thus, he eats the Sugata's leftovers. Tathāgate means a Tathāgata, an Arahant, a Sammāsambuddha must be approached and associated with. Alternatively, "Tathāgate," etc. are just plurals of use. Āsādetabba is also a plural, though spoken as if it were singular. Āsādanā means association, thinking "I will perform a miracle with the Buddha."

29.Samekkhiyānāti samekkhitvā, maññitvāti attho.Amaññīti puna amaññitthakotthūti siṅgālo.

29.Samekkhiyānā means having considered, having thought, is the meaning. Amaññī means again, he did not think. Kotthū means jackal.

30.Attānaṃ vighāse samekkhiyāti soṇḍiyaṃ ucchiṭṭhodake thūlaṃ attabhāvaṃ disvā.Yāva attānaṃ na passatīti yāva ahaṃ sīhavighāsasaṃvaḍḍhitako jarasiṅgāloti evaṃ yathābhūtaṃ attānaṃ na passati.Byagghotimaññatīti sīhohamasmīti maññati, sīhena vā samānabalo byagghoyeva ahanti maññati.

30.Attānaṃ vighāse samekkhiyā means seeing his stout body in the refuse and leftover water. Yāva attānaṃ na passatī means until he sees himself as he truly is, as "I am a decrepit jackal grown fat on lion's leftovers." Byaggho maññatī means he thinks "I am a lion," or "I am a tiger with strength equal to a lion."

31.Bhutvāna bheketi āvāṭamaṇḍūke khāditvā.Khalamūsikāyoti khalesu mūsikāyo ca khāditvā.Kaṭasīsu khittāni ca koṇapānīti susānesu chaḍḍitakuṇapāni ca khāditvā.Mahāvaneti mahante vanasmiṃ.Suññavaneti tucchavane.Vivaḍḍhoti vaḍḍhito.Tatheva so siṅgālakaṃ anadīti evaṃ saṃvaḍḍhopi migarājāhamasmīti maññitvāpi yathā pubbe dubbalasiṅgālakāle, tatheva so siṅgālaravaṃyeva aravīti. Imāyapi gāthāya bhekādīni bhutvā vaḍḍhitasiṅgālo viya lābhasakkāragiddho tvanti pāthikaputtameva ghaṭṭesi.

31.Bhutvāna bheke means having eaten frogs in puddles. Khalamūsikāyo means having eaten mice in the fields. Kaṭasīsu khittāni ca koṇapānī means having eaten corpses thrown in cemeteries. Mahāvane means in a great forest. Suññavane means in an empty forest. Vivaḍḍho means grown up. Tatheva so siṅgālakaṃ anadī means even though he had grown up like this, thinking "I am the king of beasts," just as in his former time as a weak jackal, so too, he only made the cry of a jackal. In this verse also, just like the jackal grown fat eating frogs, etc., you only provoked Pāthikaputta.

Nāgehīti hatthīhi.Mahābandhanāti mahatā kilesabandhanā mocetvā.Mahāviduggāti mahāviduggaṃ nāma cattāro oghā. Tato uddharitvā nibbānathale patiṭṭhapetvā.

Nāgehī means by elephants. Mahābandhanā means having freed them from the great bondage of defilements. Mahāviduggā means the great stronghold, namely, the four floods. Having lifted them from that, and established them on the shore of Nibbāna.

Aggaññapaññattikathāvaṇṇanā
The Description of the Aggañña Paññatti Story

36.Iti ‘‘bhagavā ettakena kathāmaggena pāṭihāriyaṃ na karotī’’ti padassa anusandhiṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘na aggaññaṃ paññāpetī’’ti imassa anusandhiṃ dassentoaggaññañcāhanti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthaaggaññañcāhanti ahaṃ, bhaggava, aggaññañca pajānāmi lokuppatticariyavaṃsañca.Tañca pajānāmīti na kevalaṃ aggaññameva, tañca aggaññaṃ pajānāmi. Tato ca uttaritaraṃ sīlasamādhito paṭṭhāya yāva sabbaññutaññāṇā pajānāmi.Tañca pajānaṃ na parāmasāmīti tañca pajānantopi ahaṃ idaṃ nāma pajānāmīti taṇhādiṭṭhimānavasena na parāmasāmi. Natthi tathāgatassa parāmāsoti dīpeti.Paccattaññevanibbuti viditāti attanāyeva attani kilesanibbānaṃ viditaṃ.Yadabhijānaṃ tathāgatoti yaṃ kilesanibbānaṃ jānanto tathāgato.No anayaṃ āpajjatīti aviditanibbānā titthiyā viya anayaṃ dukkhaṃ byasanaṃ nāpajjati.

36.Thus, after showing the connection of the phrase "the Blessed One does not perform a miracle with so much talk," now, showing the connection of this, "he does not teach about Aggañña," he began the teaching aggaññañcāha. There, aggaññañcāha means "I, Bhaggava, know Aggañña, and the conduct and lineage of the origin of the world." Tañca pajānāmī means "not only Aggañña, but I know that Aggañña." And from that, I know even more, starting from morality and concentration, up to the omniscience-knowledge. Tañca pajānaṃ na parāmasāmī means even knowing that, I do not cling to it with craving, views, and conceit, thinking "I know this." He shows that there is no clinging in the Tathāgata. Paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā means only by oneself is the extinguishing of defilements known in oneself. Yadabhijānaṃ tathāgato means the extinguishing of defilements which the Tathāgata knows. No anayaṃ āpajjatī means he does not encounter misfortune and suffering like the heretics who do not know extinguishing.

37.Idāni yaṃ taṃ titthiyā aggaññaṃ paññapenti, taṃ dassentosanti bhaggavātiādimāha. Tatthaissarakuttaṃ brahmakuttanti issarakataṃ brahmakataṃ, issaranimmitaṃ brahmanimmitanti attho. Brahmā eva hi ettha ādhipaccabhāvena issaroti veditabbo.Ācariyakanti ācariyabhāvaṃ ācariyavādaṃ. Tattha ācariyavādo aggaññaṃ. Aggaññaṃ pana ettha desitanti katvā so aggaññaṃ tveva vutto.Kathaṃ vihitakanti kena vihitaṃ kinti vihitaṃ. Sesaṃ brahmajāle vitthāritanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

37.Now, showing what the heretics teach as Aggañña, he said santi bhaggavā, etc. There, issarakuttaṃ brahmakutta means made by Īsvara, made by Brahmā, created by Īsvara, created by Brahmā, is the meaning. For here, Brahmā should be understood as Īsvara due to the nature of being the overlord. Ācariyaka means the state of being a teacher, the doctrine of a teacher. There, the doctrine of a teacher is Aggañña. However, since Aggañña is taught here, he is only called Aggañña. Kathaṃ vihitaka means by whom was it done, how was it done? The rest should be understood according to the method explained in the Brahmajāla Sutta.

41.Khiḍḍāpadosikanti khiḍḍāpadosikamūlaṃ.

41.Khiḍḍāpadosika means having its root in addiction to amusement.

47.Asatāti avijjamānena, asaṃvijjamānaṭṭhenāti attho.Tucchāti tucchena antosāravirahitena.Musāti musāvādena.Abhūtenāti bhūtatthavirahitena.Abbhācikkhantīti abhiācikkhanti.Viparītoti viparītasañño viparītacitto.Bhikkhavo cāti na kevalaṃ samaṇo gotamoyeva, ye ca assa anusiṭṭhiṃ karonti, te bhikkhū ca viparītā. Atha yaṃ sandhāya viparītoti vadanti, taṃ dassetuṃsamaṇo gotamotiādi vuttaṃ.Subhaṃ vimokkhanti vaṇṇakasiṇaṃ.Asubhantvevāti subhañca asubhañca sabbaṃ asubhanti evaṃ pajānāti.Subhantveva tasmiṃ samayeti subhanti eva ca tasmiṃ samaye pajānāti, na asubhaṃ.Bhikkhavo cāti ye te evaṃ vadanti, tesaṃ bhikkhavo ca antevāsikasamaṇā viparītā.Pahotīti samattho paṭibalo.

47.Asatā means by what is non-existent, in the sense of being non-existent. Tucchā means by what is empty, devoid of inner essence. Musā means by false speech. Abhūtenā means by what is devoid of truth. Abbhācikkhantī means they accuse. Viparīto means having a perverted perception, having a perverted mind. Bhikkhavo cā means not only Samaṇa Gotama, but also those monks who follow his instructions are perverted. Now, to show what they mean by saying "perverted," it is said samaṇo gotamo, etc. Subhaṃ vimokkha means the beautiful Kasiṇa. Asubhantvevā means he perceives everything, both beautiful and unbeautiful, as unbeautiful. Subhantveva tasmiṃ samaye means and he perceives it as beautiful at that time, not unbeautiful. Bhikkhavo cā means the monks who say that, and their resident novices, are perverted. Pahotī means capable, competent.

48.Dukkaraṃ khoti ayaṃ paribbājako yadidaṃ ‘‘evaṃpasanno ahaṃ, bhante’’tiādimāha, taṃ sāṭheyyena kohaññena āha. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo mayhaṃ ettakaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathesi, tamahaṃ sutvāpi pabbajituṃ na sakkomi, mayā etassa sāsanaṃ paṭipannasadisena bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Tato so sāṭheyyena kohaññena evamāha. Tenassa bhagavā mammaṃ ghaṭṭento viya ‘‘dukkaraṃ kho etaṃ, bhaggava tayā aññadiṭṭhikenā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ poṭṭhapādasutte vuttatthameva.Sādhukamanurakkhāti suṭṭhu anurakkha.

48.Dukkaraṃ kho means this wanderer said this, beginning with "I am pleased in this way, venerable sir," with deceit and dishonesty. It seems he thought, "Samaṇa Gotama has given me so much Dhamma talk, but even having heard it, I am unable to ordain; I should be like one who has entered his dispensation." Then, with deceit and dishonesty, he said this. Therefore, the Blessed One, as if touching his sore spot, said "it is difficult for you, Bhaggava, who have a different view," etc. This has the same meaning as explained in the Poṭṭhapāda Sutta. Sādhukamanurakkhā means protect it well.

Iti bhagavā pasādamattānurakkhaṇe paribbājakaṃ niyojesi. Sopi evaṃ mahantaṃ suttantaṃ sutvāpi nāsakkhi kilesakkhayaṃ kātuṃ. Desanā panassa āyatiṃ vāsanāya paccayo ahosi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

Thus, the Blessed One instructed the wanderer to protect his mere faith. Even having heard such a great discourse, he was unable to destroy the defilements. However, the teaching became a condition for a tendency in the future. The rest is easy to understand everywhere.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

The Commentary to the Dīgha Nikāya, Sumaṅgalavilāsinī

2. Udumbarikasuttavaṇṇanā

2. The Description of the Udumbarika Sutta

Nigrodhaparibbājakavatthuvaṇṇanā
The Description of the Story of Nigrodha the Wanderer

49.Evaṃme sutanti udumbarikasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamapubbapadavaṇṇanā –paribbājakoti channaparibbājako.Udumbarikāya paribbājakārāmeti udumbarikāya deviyā santake paribbājakārāme.Sandhānoti tassa nāmaṃ. Ayaṃ pana mahānubhāvo parivāretvā vicarantānaṃ pañcannaṃ upāsakasatānaṃ aggapuriso anāgāmī bhagavatā mahāparisamajjhe evaṃ saṃvaṇṇito –

49.Evaṃ me suta means the Udumbarika Sutta. Here is the word-by-word explanation: paribbājako means a covered-up wanderer. Udumbarikāya paribbājakārāme means in the wanderers' park belonging to the goddess Udumbarikā. Sandhāno is his name. However, this man of great power, the foremost of five hundred lay followers who were wandering around in a group, was described by the Blessed One in the midst of the great assembly thus:

‘‘Chahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato sandhāno gahapati tathāgate niṭṭhaṅgato saddhamme iriyati. Katamehi chahi? Buddhe aveccappasādena dhamme aveccappasādena saṅghe aveccappasādena ariyena sīlena ariyena ñāṇena ariyāya vimuttiyā. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi aṅgehi samannāgato sandhāno gahapati tathāgate niṭṭhaṅgato saddhamme iriyatī’’ti (a. ni. 6.120-139).

"Monks, Sandhāna the householder, endowed with six qualities, is firmly established in the Tathāgata and prospers in the good Dhamma. Which six? Unwavering faith in the Buddha, unwavering faith in the Dhamma, unwavering faith in the Saṅgha, noble morality, noble knowledge, and noble liberation. Monks, Sandhāna the householder, endowed with these six qualities, is firmly established in the Tathāgata and prospers in the good Dhamma" (A. Ni. 6.120-139).

divā divassa rājagahā nikkhamīti. Tatthadivā divassāti divasassa divā nāma majjhanhātikkamo, tasmiṃ divasassāpi divābhūte atikkantamatte majjhanhike nikkhamīti attho.Paṭisallīnoti tato tato rūpādigocarato cittaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā nilīno jhānaratisevanāvasena ekībhāvaṃ gato.Manobhāvanīyānanti manavaḍḍhakānaṃ. Ye ca āvajjato manasikaroto cittaṃ vinīvaraṇaṃ hoti unnamati vaḍḍhati.

divā divassa rājagahā nikkhamī means. There, divā divassā means in the daytime of the day, namely, after midday has passed; it means he went out at midday, when that day had become daytime. Paṭisallīno means having withdrawn and secluded the mind from sense objects such as forms, having gone to a state of oneness by way of cultivating the delight of jhāna. Manobhāvanīyāna means those which develop the mind. And those which, when one attends and applies the mind to them, the mind becomes free from hindrances and rises up and develops.

50.Unnādiniyātiādīni poṭṭhapādasutte vitthāritanayeneva veditabbāni.

50.Unnādiniyā, etc., should be understood according to the method explained in detail in the Poṭṭhapāda Sutta.

51.Yāvatāti yattakā.Ayaṃ tesaṃ aññataroti ayaṃ tesaṃ abbhantaro eko sāvako, bhagavato kira sāvakā gihianāgāminoyeva pañcasatā rājagahe paṭivasanti. Yesaṃ ekekassa pañca pañca upāsakasatāni parivārā, te sandhāya ‘‘ayaṃ tesaṃ aññataro’’ti āha.Appeva nāmāti tassa upasaṅkamanaṃ patthayamāno āha. Patthanākāraṇaṃ pana poṭṭhapādasutte vuttameva.

51.Yāvatā means as many as. Ayaṃ tesaṃ aññataro means this is one of their inner circle of disciples; it seems that five hundred of the Blessed One's disciples, householder-anāgāmis, were living in Rajagaha. Referring to those, each of whom had five hundred lay followers in their retinue, he said, "This is one of them." Appeva nāmā means he said this desiring to approach him. However, the reason for the desire has been stated in the Poṭṭhapāda Sutta.

52.Etadavocāti āgacchanto antarāmaggeyeva tesaṃ kathāya sutattā etaṃaññathā kho imetiādivacanaṃ avoca. Tatthaaññatitthiyāti dassanenapi ākappenapi kuttenapi ācārenapi vihārenapi iriyāpathenapi aññe titthiyāti aññatitthiyā.Saṅgamma samāgammāti saṅgantvā samāgantvā rāsi hutvā nisinnaṭṭhāne.Araññavanapatthānīti araññavanapatthāni gāmūpacārato muttāni dūrasenāsanāni.Pantānīti dūratarāni manussūpacāravirahitāni.Appasaddānīti vihārūpacārena gacchato addhikajanassapi saddena mandasaddāni.Appanigghosānīti avibhāvitatthena nigghosena mandanigghosāni.Vijanavātānīti antosañcārino janassa vātena vigatavātāni.Manussarāhasseyyakānīti manussānaṃ rahassakaraṇassa yuttāni anucchavikāni.Paṭisallānasāruppānīti ekībhāvassa anurūpāni. Iti sandhāno gahapati ‘‘aho mama satthā yo evarūpāni senāsanāni paṭisevatī’’ti añjaliṃ paggayha uttamaṅge sirasmiṃ patiṭṭhapetvā imaṃ udānaṃ udānento nisīdi.

52.Etadavocā means having heard their talk on the road while coming, he said this statement aññathā kho ime, etc. There, aññatitthiyā means other heretics are different in appearance, manner, deceit, conduct, behavior and deportment. Saṅgamma samāgammā means having gathered together, having assembled, having become a mass in the place where they were sitting. Araññavanapatthānī means forest and woodland tracts, remote lodgings free from the vicinity of villages. Pantānī means very remote, devoid of human contact. Appasaddānī means with faint sounds, with the sound even of travelers going by the vicinity of the monastery. Appanigghosānī means with faint echoes due to the indistinctness of the sound. Vijanavātānī means with winds free from the passage of people moving inside. Manussarāhasseyyakānī means suitable and appropriate for people to do in secret. Paṭisallānasāruppānī means conforming to seclusion. Thus, Sandhāna the householder, thinking, "Oh, my teacher is one who frequents such lodgings," raised his joined hands and placed them on his head, and sat down uttering this exclamation.

53.Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ sandhānena gahapatinā udānaṃ udānentena vutte. Nigrodho paribbājako ayaṃ gahapati mama santike nisinnopi attano satthāraṃyeva thometi ukkaṃsati, amhe pana atthītipi na maññati, etasmiṃ uppannakopaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa upari pātessāmīti sandhānaṃ gahapatiṃ etadavoca.

53.Evaṃ vutte means when Sandhāna the householder had uttered the exclamation. Nigrodha the wanderer thought, "Even though this householder is sitting near me, he only praises and exalts his own teacher, and does not even think that we exist; I will vent the anger that has arisen in me onto Samaṇa Gotama," and he said this to Sandhāna the householder.

Yaggheti codanatthe nipāto.Jāneyyāsīti bujjheyyāsi passeyyāsi.Kena samaṇo gotamo saddhiṃ sallapatīti kena kāraṇena kena puggalena saddhiṃ samaṇo gotamo sallapati vadati bhāsati. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yadi kiñci sallāpakāraṇaṃ bhaveyya, yadi vā koci samaṇassa gotamassa santikaṃ sallāpatthiko gaccheyya, sallapeyya, na pana kāraṇaṃ atthi, na tassa santikaṃ koci gacchati, svāyaṃ kena samaṇo gotamo saddhiṃ sallapati, asallapanto kathaṃ unnādī bhavissatī’’ti.

Yagghe is a particle used in the sense of reproach. Jāneyyāsī means you should understand, you should see. Kena samaṇo gotamo saddhiṃ sallapatī means with what reason, with what person, does Samaṇa Gotama converse, speak, and talk? What is said is, "If there were any reason to converse, or if anyone desiring to converse were to go to Samaṇa Gotama, he would converse; but there is no reason, no one goes to his presence, so with whom does Samaṇa Gotama converse? How will he be noisy without conversing?"

Sākacchanti saṃsandanaṃ.Paññāveyyattiyanti uttarapaccuttaranayena ñāṇabyattabhāvaṃ.Suññāgārahatāti suññāgāresu naṭṭhā, samaṇena hi gotamena bodhimūle appamattikā paññā adhigatā, sāpissa suññāgāresu ekakassa nisīdato naṭṭhā. Yadi pana mayaṃ viya gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ katvā nisīdeyya, nāssa paññā nasseyyāti dasseti.Aparisāvacaroti avisāradattā parisaṃ otarituṃ na sakkoti.Nālaṃ sallāpāyāti na samattho sallāpaṃ kātuṃ.Antamantānevāti koci maṃ pañhaṃ puccheyyāti pañhābhīto antamantāneva pantasenāsanāni sevati.Gokāṇāti ekakkhihatā kāṇagāvī. Sā kira pariyantacārinī hoti, antamantāneva sevati. Sā kira kāṇakkhibhāvena vanantābhimukhīpi na sakkoti bhavituṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā pattena vā sākhāya vā kaṇṭakena vā pahārassa bhāyati. Gunnaṃ abhimukhīpi na sakkoti bhavituṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā siṅgena vā kaṇṇena vā vālena vā pahārassa bhāyati.Iṅghāti codanatthe nipāto.Saṃsādeyyāmāti ekapañhapucchaneneva saṃsādanaṃ visādamāpannaṃ kareyyāma.Tucchakumbhīva nanti rittaghaṭaṃ viya naṃ.Orodheyyāmāti vinandheyyāma. Pūritaghaṭo hi ito cito ca parivattetvā na suvinandhanīyo hoti. Rittako yathāruci parivattetvā sakkā hoti vinandhituṃ, evameva hatapaññatāya rittakumbhisadisaṃ samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ vādavinandhanena samantā vinandhissāmāti vadati.

Sākacchaṃ means conversing. Paññāveyyattiyaṃ means the state of skillful knowledge through question and answer. Suññāgārahatā means lost in empty dwellings; for the ascetic Gotama attained unfailing wisdom at the foot of the Bodhi tree, but even that would be lost if he were to sit alone in empty dwellings. It indicates that if he were to sit making a group and assembly like us, his wisdom would not be lost. Aparisāvacaro means unable to enter an assembly due to lack of confidence. Nālaṃ sallāpāyā means not capable of conversing. Antamantāneva means, fearing that someone might ask me a question, he frequents only remote forest abodes. Gokāṇā means a blind cow struck in one eye. It is said that she wanders only around the edges, frequenting only remote places. It is said that she is unable to face the forest's edge due to being blind in one eye. Why? Because she fears being struck by a branch or a thorn. She is also unable to face the herd. Why? Because she fears being struck by a horn, an ear, or a tail. Iṅgha is a particle used in the sense of incitement. Saṃsādeyyāmā means we would cause dejection, a state of depression, by asking a single question. Tucchakumbhīva naṃ means him like an empty pot. Orodheyyāmā means we would make him resound. For a full pot, having been turned this way and that, cannot be easily made to resound. An empty one can be made to resound, having been turned as desired. Just so, he says, we will make the ascetic Gotama, similar to an empty pot due to his destroyed wisdom, resound from all sides by means of an argument that defeats him.

Iti paribbājako satthu suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ nalāṭamaṇḍalaṃ apassanto dasabalassa parammukhā attano balaṃ dīpento asambhinnaṃ khattiyakumāraṃ jātiyā ghaṭṭayanto caṇḍālaputto viya asambhinnakesarasīhaṃ migarājānaṃ thāmena ghaṭṭento jarasiṅgālo viya ca nānappakāraṃ tucchagajjitaṃ gajji. Upāsakopi cintesi ‘‘ayaṃ paribbājako ati viya gajjati, avīciphusanatthāya pādaṃ, bhavaggaggahaṇatthāya hatthaṃ pasārayanto viya niratthakaṃ vāyamati. Sace me satthā imaṃ ṭhānamāgaccheyya, imassa paribbājakassa yāva bhavaggā ussitaṃ mānaddhajaṃ ṭhānasova opāteyyā’’ti.

Thus, the wanderer, not seeing the golden-hued forehead of the Teacher, and showing his strength in the face of the Ten-Powered One, insulting the unblemished noble youth by his birth, like a caṇḍāla's son, insulting the lion, king of beasts, with his strength, and like a decrepit jackal, roared various empty roars. The lay disciple also thought, "This wanderer roars exceedingly, striving in vain as if stretching out his foot to touch Avīci hell, and his hand to grasp the peak of existence. If my Teacher were to come to this place, he would strike down the banner of pride raised by this wanderer, even to the peak of existence."

54.Bhagavāpi tesaṃ taṃ kathāsallāpaṃ assosiyeva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘assosi kho imaṃ kathāsallāpa’’nti.

54. The Blessed One heard their discussion. Therefore, it was said, "He heard this discussion."

Sumāgadhāyāti sumāgadhā nāma pokkharaṇī, yassā tīre nisinno aññataro puriso padumanāḷantarehi asurabhavanaṃ pavisantaṃ asurasenaṃ addasa.Moranivāpoti nivāpo vuccati bhattaṃ, yattha morānaṃ abhayena saddhiṃ nivāpo dinno, taṃ ṭhānanti attho.Abbhokāseti aṅgaṇaṭṭhāne.Assāsapattāti tuṭṭhipattā somanassapattā.Ajjhāsayanti uttamanissayabhūtaṃ.Ādibrahmacariyanti purāṇabrahmacariyasaṅkhātaṃ ariyamaggaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘ko nāma so, bhante, dhammo yena bhagavatā sāvakā vinītā ajjhāsayādibrahmacariyabhūtaṃ ariyamaggaṃ pūretvā arahattādhigamavasena assāsapattā paṭijānantī’’ti.

Sumāgadhāya means Sumāgadhā is the name of a pond, on the bank of which a certain man saw an army of asuras entering the asura's abode through the interior of lotus stalks. Moranivāpo means nivāpo is called food, the place where food has been given to peacocks together with assurance of safety, is the meaning. Abbhokāse means in an open space, in the courtyard. Assāsapattā means having attained satisfaction, having attained joy. Ajjhāsayaṃ means the supreme ground of reliance. Ādibrahmacariyaṃ means the Noble Path, reckoned as the ancient holy life. This is what was said: "What, O Blessed One, is the Dhamma by which the disciples, trained by the Blessed One, having fulfilled the Noble Path, which is the ground of reliance and the ancient holy life, declare that they have attained satisfaction by way of the attainment of arahantship?"

Tapojigucchāvādavaṇṇanā
Description of the Doctrine of Disgust with Austerities

55.Vippakatāti mamāgamanapaccayā aniṭṭhitā, va hutvā ṭhitā, kathehi, ahametaṃ niṭṭhapetvā matthakaṃ pāpetvā dassemīti sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāresi.

55. Vippakatā means unfinished due to my arrival, having become va and standing still. Speak, I will complete it, bring it to the summit, and show it, thus he invited the All-Knowing One's invitation.

56.Dujjānaṃ khoti bhagavā paribbājakassa vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ayaṃ paribbājako mayā sāvakānaṃ desetabbaṃ dhammaṃ tehi pūretabbaṃ paṭipattiṃ pucchati, sacassāhaṃ āditova taṃ kathessāmi, kathitampi naṃ na jānissati, ayaṃ pana vīriyena pāpajigucchanavādo, handāhaṃ etasseva visaye pañhaṃ pucchāpetvā puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ laddhiyā niratthakabhāvaṃ dassemi. Atha pacchā imaṃ pañhaṃ byākarissāmī’’ti cintetvādujjānaṃ khoetantiādimāha. Tatthasake ācariyaketi attano ācariyavāde.Adhijeguccheti vīriyena pāpajigucchanabhāve.Kathaṃ santāti kathaṃ bhūtā.Tapojigucchāti vīriyena pāpajigucchā pāpavivajjanā.Paripuṇṇāti parisuddhā.Kathaṃaparipuṇṇāti kathaṃ aparisuddhā hotīti evaṃ pucchāti.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.

56. Dujjānaṃ kho – having heard the wanderer’s words, the Blessed One thought, "This wanderer is asking about the Dhamma to be taught by me to the disciples and the practice to be fulfilled by them. If I were to tell him that from the beginning, he would not understand it even after it has been told. Now, this is the doctrine of disgust with evil through effort. Come, let me first make him ask a question on this very topic and show the meaninglessness of the doctrines of various ascetics and Brahmins. Then afterwards, I will explain this question," thinking thus, he said dujjānaṃ kho and so on. There, sake ācariyake means in his own teacher's doctrine. Adhijegucche means in the state of disgust with evil through effort. Kathaṃ santā means how are they? Tapojigucchā means disgust with evil through effort, avoidance of evil. Paripuṇṇā means completely pure. Kathaṃ aparipuṇṇā means how is it impure? Thus, he asks. Yatra hi nāmā means where indeed.

57.Appasaddekatvāti nirave appasadde katvā. So kira cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo ekaṃ pañhampi na katheti, sallāpakathāpissa atibahukā natthi, ime pana ādito paṭṭhāya samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ anuvattanti ceva pasaṃsanti ca, handāhaṃ ime nissadde katvā sayaṃ kathemī’’ti. So tathā akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘appasadde katvā’’ti. ‘‘Tapojigucchavādā’’tiādīsu tapojigucchaṃ vadāma, manasāpi tameva sārato gahetvā vicarāma, kāyenapimhā tameva allīnā, nānappakārakaṃ attakilamathānuyogamanuyuttā viharāmāti attho.

57. Appasadde katvā means having made them silent, without noise. It seems he thought: "The ascetic Gotama does not speak even a single question, and he does not have very much to say in conversation. But these ones, from the beginning, both follow and praise the ascetic Gotama. Come, let me make these ones silent and speak myself." He did so. Therefore, it was said, "having made them silent." In "Tapojigucchavādā," and so on, we speak of disgust with austerities, and even in our minds, we take that very thing as essential and wander about, and even with our bodies we are attached to that very thing, and we live devoted to the practice of various kinds of self-mortification, is the meaning.

Upakkilesavaṇṇanā
Description of Defilements

58.Tapassīti tapanissitako. ‘‘Acelako’’tiādīni sīhanāde (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.393) vitthāritanayeneva veditabbāni.Tapaṃ samādiyatīti acelakabhāvādikaṃ tapaṃ sammā ādiyati, daḷhaṃ gaṇhāti.Attamano hotīti ko añño mayā sadiso imasmiṃ tape atthīti tuṭṭhamano hoti.Paripuṇṇasaṅkappoti alamettāvatāti evaṃ pariyositasaṅkappo, idañca titthiyānaṃ vasena āgataṃ. Sāsanāvacarenāpi pana dīpetabbaṃ. Ekacco hi dhutaṅgaṃ samādiyati, so teneva dhutaṅgena ko añño mayā sadiso dhutaṅgadharoti attamano hoti paripuṇṇasaṅkappo.Tapassino upakkileso hotīti duvidhassāpetassa tapassino ayaṃ upakkileso hoti. Ettāvatāyaṃ tapo upakkileso hotīti vadāmi.

58. Tapassī means one who relies on austerity. "Acelako" and so on, should be understood in the same way as explained in the Lion's Roar Discourse (Dī. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.393). Tapaṃ samādiyatī means he properly undertakes, firmly grasps, the austerity consisting of being naked and so on. Attamano hotī means he is pleased in mind, thinking, "Who else is like me in this austerity?" Paripuṇṇasaṅkappo means one whose intention is complete, thinking, "This is enough." And this comes from the perspective of the Titthiyas. But it should also be shown from the perspective of one who belongs to the Teaching. For some undertake a dhutaṅga, and by that very dhutaṅga, they are pleased in mind, thinking, "Who else is like me, a possessor of dhutaṅgas?" [They are] with complete intention. Tapassino upakkileso hotī means this is a defilement for that ascetic who lacks twofold restraint. I say that to this extent, this is a defilement of austerity.

Attānukkaṃsetīti ‘‘ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti attānaṃ ukkaṃsati ukkhipati.Paraṃ vambhetīti ‘‘ayaṃ na mādiso’’ti paraṃ saṃhāreti avakkhipati.

Attānukkaṃsetī means he praises, exalts himself, [thinking], "Who is like me?" Paraṃ vambhetī means he disparages, puts down others [thinking], "This one is not like me."

Majjatīti mānamadakaraṇena majjati.Mucchatīti mucchito hoti gadhito ajjhāpanno.Pamādamāpajjatīti etadeva sāranti pamādamāpajjati. Sāsane pabbajitopi dhutaṅgasuddhiko hoti, na kammaṭṭhānasuddhiko. Dhutaṅgameva arahattaṃ viya sārato pacceti.

Majjatī means he is intoxicated by the act of creating pride. Mucchatī means he is infatuated, attached, addicted. Pamādamāpajjatī means he falls into negligence, [thinking], "This alone is essential." Even one who has gone forth in the Teaching may be pure in terms of dhutaṅgas, but not pure in terms of meditation subjects. He perceives the dhutaṅgas alone as essential, as if they were arahantship.

59.Lābhasakkārasilokanti ettha cattāro paccayā labbhantīti lābhā, teyeva suṭṭhu katvā paṭisaṅkharitvā laddhā sakkāro, vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ siloko.Abhinibbattetīti acelakādibhāvaṃ terasadhutaṅgasamādānaṃ vā nissāya mahālābho uppajjati, tasmā ‘‘abhinibbattetī’’ti vutto. Sesamettha purimavāranayeneva duvidhassāpi tapassino vasena veditabbaṃ.

59. Lābhasakkārasilokaṃ – here, the four requisites are obtained, therefore, they are gains; those same things, having been well prepared and received, are honor; praise is fame. Abhinibbattetī means a great gain arises relying on the state of being naked and so on, or on undertaking the thirteen dhutaṅgas, therefore it is called "abhinibbatteti." The rest here should be understood according to the method of the previous passage, from the perspective of the ascetic who lacks twofold restraint.

60.Vodāsaṃ āpajjatīti dvebhāgaṃ āpajjati, dve bhāge karoti.Khamatīti ruccati.Nakkhamatīti na ruccati.Sāpekkho pajahatīti sataṇho pajahati. Kathaṃ? Pātova khīrabhattaṃ bhutto hoti. Athassa maṃsabhojanaṃ upaneti. Tassa evaṃ hoti ‘‘idāni evarūpaṃ kadā labhissāma, sace jāneyyāma, pātova khīrabhattaṃ na bhuñjeyyāma, kiṃ mayā sakkā kātuṃ, gaccha bho, tvameva bhuñjā’’ti jīvitaṃ pariccajanto viya sāpekkho pajahati.Gadhitoti gedhajāto.Mucchitoti balavataṇhāya mucchito saṃmuṭṭhassatī hutvā.Ajjhāpannoti āmise atilaggo, ‘‘bhuñjissatha, āvuso’’ti dhammanimantanamattampi akatvā mahante mahante kabaḷe karoti.Anādīnavadassāvītiādīnavamattampi na passati.Anissaraṇapaññoti idha mattaññutānissaraṇapaccavekkhaṇaparibhogamattampi na karoti.Lābhasakkārasilokanikantihetūti lābhādīsu taṇhāhetu.

60. Vodāsaṃ āpajjatī means he incurs a share, makes two shares. Khamatī means it pleases. Nakkhamatī means it does not please. Sāpekkho pajahatī means he abandons with craving. How? In the morning, he has eaten milk-rice. Then they offer him meat dishes. It occurs to him, "When will we get such a thing again? If we had known, we would not have eaten milk-rice in the morning. What can I do? Go, sir, you eat it," as if abandoning his life, he abandons with longing. Gadhito means filled with greed. Mucchito means infatuated by strong craving, having lost mindfulness. Ajjhāpanno means extremely attached to material things, without even making the polite invitation, "Eat, friend," he makes big mouthfuls. Anādīnavadassāvī means he does not even see a mere danger. Anissaraṇapañño means here, he does not even practice the use of moderation, escape, and reflection. Lābhasakkārasilokanikantihetū means because of craving for gains and so on.

61.Saṃbhakkhetīti saṃkhādati.Asanivicakkanti vicakkasaṇṭhānā asaniyeva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘asanivicakkaṃ imassa dantakūṭaṃ mūlabījādīsu na kiñci na saṃbhuñjati. Atha ca pana naṃ samaṇappavādena samaṇoti sañjānantī’’ti. Evaṃ apasādeti avakkhipati. Idaṃ titthiyavasena āgataṃ. Bhikkhuvasena panettha ayaṃ yojanā, attanā dhutaṅgadharo hoti, so aññaṃ evaṃ apasādeti ‘‘kiṃ samaṇā nāma ime samaṇamhāti vadanti, dhutaṅgamattampi natthi, uddesabhattādīni pariyesantā paccayabāhullikā vicarantī’’ti.Lūkhājīvinti acelakādivasena vā dhutaṅgavasena vā lūkhājīviṃ.Issāmacchariyanti parassa sakkārādisampattikhīyanalakkhaṇaṃ issaṃ, sakkārādikaraṇaakkhamanalakkhaṇaṃ macchariyañca.

61. Saṃbhakkhetī means consumes. Asanivicakkaṃ means like thunderbolts in the shape of wheels. This is what is said: "This one's tooth-row, like thunderbolt wheels, does not fail to consume anything among roots, seeds, and so on. And yet, they recognize him as an ascetic by the pretense of asceticism." Thus, he degrades, puts down. This comes from the perspective of the Titthiyas. Here, in terms of a bhikkhu, this is the connection: he is himself a possessor of dhutaṅgas, and he degrades another in this way: "What ascetics are these who call themselves ascetics? They do not even possess a dhutaṅga, wandering about with an excess of requisites, seeking invitation-food and so on." Lūkhājīviṃ means one who lives a rough life, by way of being naked and so on, or by way of [practicing] the dhutaṅgas. Issāmacchariyaṃ means envy, which has the characteristic of being displeased at another's success in honor and so on, and avarice, which has the characteristic of being incapable of [another's] acquisition of honor and so on.

62.Āpāthakanisādīhotīti manussānaṃ āpāthe dassanaṭṭhāne nisīdati. Yattha te passanti, tattha ṭhito vaggulivataṃ carati, pañcātapaṃ tappati, ekapādena tiṭṭhati, sūriyaṃ namassati. Sāsane pabbajitopi samādinnadhutaṅgo sabbarattiṃ sayitvā manussānaṃ cakkhupathe tapaṃ karoti, mahāsāyanheyeva cīvarakuṭiṃ karoti, sūriye uggate paṭisaṃharati, manussānaṃ āgatabhāvaṃ ñatvā ghaṇḍiṃ paharitvā cīvaraṃ matthake ṭhapetvā caṅkamaṃ otarati, sammuñjaniṃ gahetvā vihāraṅgaṇaṃ sammajjati.

62. Āpāthakanisādī hotī means he sits in a place visible to people. Where they see him, he practices the bat-like vow, bakes in the five-fold heat, stands on one foot, and worships the sun. Even one who has gone forth in the Teaching, having undertaken a dhutaṅga, sleeps all night and performs austerity in the sight of people, and he makes his robe-hut very early in the morning, and when the sun has risen, he puts it away, and having known that people have come, he strikes the gong and, placing the robe on his head, descends to the cloister walk, and taking a broom, sweeps the courtyard of the monastery.

Attānanti attano guṇaṃadassayamānoti ettha a-kāro nipātamattaṃ, dassayamānoti attho.Idampi me tapasminti idampi kammaṃ mameva tapasmiṃ, paccatte vā bhummaṃ, idampi mama tapoti attho. So hi asukasmiṃ ṭhāne acelako atthi muttācārotiādīni sutvā amhākaṃ esa tapo, amhākaṃ so antevāsikotiādīni bhaṇati. Asukasmiṃ vā pana ṭhāne paṃsukūliko bhikkhu atthītiādīni sutvā amhākaṃ esa tapo, amhākaṃ so antevāsikotiādīni bhaṇati.

Attānaṃ means his own qualities, adassayamāno – here, the a- is merely a particle, meaning dassayamāno, showing. Idampi me tapasmiṃ means this action is also in my austerity, in the individual or in the collective, this too is my austerity, is the meaning. For he, having heard that in such and such a place there is a naked ascetic, one who behaves as he likes, says, "This is our austerity, that is our pupil," and so on. Or, having heard that in such and such a place there is a paṃsukūlika bhikkhu, he says, "This is our austerity, that is our pupil," and so on.

Kiñcidevāti kiñci vajjaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ vā.Paṭicchannaṃ sevatīti yathā aññe na jānanti, evaṃ sevati.Akkhamamānaṃ āha khamatīti aruccamānaṃyeva ruccati meti vadati. Attanā kataṃ atimahantampi vajjaṃ appamattakaṃ katvā paññapeti, parena kataṃ dukkaṭamattaṃ vītikkamampi pārājikasadisaṃ katvā dasseti.Anuññeyyanti anujānitabbaṃ anumoditabbaṃ.

Kiñcidevā means some fault or view. Paṭicchannaṃ sevatī means he practices it so that others do not know. Akkhamamānaṃ āha khamatī means he says that what is displeasing is pleasing to me. He declares a fault committed by himself, even if it is very great, as a small matter, and he shows even a minor transgression committed by another as similar to a pārājika. Anuññeyyaṃ means should be approved, should be rejoiced in.

63.Kodhanohoti upanāhīti kujjhanalakkhaṇena kodhena, veraappaṭinissaggalakkhaṇena upanāhena ca samannāgato.Makkhī hoti paḷāsīti paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇena makkhena, yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena ca samannāgato.

63. Kodhano hoti upanāhī means endowed with anger, which has the characteristic of being wrathful, and with resentment, which has the characteristic of not relinquishing enmity. Makkhī hoti paḷāsī means endowed with detraction, which has the characteristic of disparaging others' virtues, and with arrogance, which has the characteristic of clinging to quarrels.

Issukī hoti maccharīti parasakkārādīsu usūyanalakkhaṇāya issāya, āvāsakulalābhavaṇṇadhammesu maccharāyanalakkhaṇena pañcavidhamaccherena ca samannāgato hoti.Saṭho hoti māyāvīti kerāṭikalakkhaṇena sāṭheyyena, katappaṭicchādanalakkhaṇāya māyāya ca samannāgato hoti.Thaddhohoti atimānīti nissinehanikkaruṇathaddhalakkhaṇena thambhena, atikkamitvā maññanalakkhaṇena atimānena ca samannāgato hoti.Pāpiccho hotīti asantasambhāvanapatthanalakkhaṇāya pāpicchatāya samannāgato hoti.Pāpikānanti tāsaṃyeva lāmakānaṃ icchānaṃ vasaṃ gato.Micchādiṭṭhikoti natthi dinnantiādinayappavattāya ayāthāvadiṭṭhiyā upeto.Antaggāhikāyāti sāyeva diṭṭhi ucchedantassa gahitattā ‘‘antaggāhikā’’ti vuccati, tāya samannāgatoti attho.Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsītiādīsu sayaṃ diṭṭhi sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhimeva parāmasati gahetvā vadatītisandiṭṭhiparāmāsī.Ādhānaṃ vuccati daḷhaṃ suṭṭhu ṭhapitaṃ, tathā katvā gaṇhātītiādhānaggāhī.Ariṭṭho viya na sakkā hoti paṭinissajjāpetuntiduppaṭinissaggī. Yadimeti yadi ime.

Issukī hoti maccharī means endowed with envy, which has the characteristic of being jealous of others' success and so on, and with avarice, which has the characteristic of being miserly with dwellings, families, gains, praise, and dhamma. Saṭho hoti māyāvī means endowed with deceit, which has the characteristic of trickery, and with deceitfulness, which has the characteristic of concealing what has been done. Thaddho hoti atimānī means endowed with rigidity, which has the characteristic of being stiff, unkind, and uncompassionate, and with conceit, which has the characteristic of thinking excessively. Pāpiccho hotī means endowed with evil desire, which has the characteristic of desiring unreal attainments. Pāpikānaṃ means gone to the control of those same low desires. Micchādiṭṭhiko means possessed of wrong view, which arises from the perspective of "there is no giving" and so on, and is untruthful. Antaggāhikāyā means that same view is called "antaggāhikā" because it grasps the extreme of annihilation; he is endowed with that, is the meaning. In sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī and so on, sandiṭṭhi is one's own view, he clings to and declares his own view, therefore sandiṭṭhiparāmāsī. Ādhānaṃ means firmly, well established, thus having done he grasps, therefore ādhānaggāhī. Like Ariṭṭha, he cannot be made to relinquish it, therefore duppaṭinissaggī. Yadime means if these.

Parisuddhapapaṭikappattakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Pure Practice

64.Idha, nigrodha, tapassīti evaṃ bhagavā aññatitthiyehi gahitaladdhiṃ tesaṃ rakkhitaṃ tapaṃ sabbameva saṃkiliṭṭhanti upakkilesapāḷiṃ dassetvā idāni parisuddhapāḷidassanatthaṃ desanamārabhantoidha, nigrodhātiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘na attamano’’tiādīni vuttavipakkhavaseneva veditabbāni. Sabbavāresu ca lūkhatapassino ceva dhutaṅgadharassa ca vasena yojanā veditabbā.Evaṃ so tasmiṃ ṭhāne parisuddho hotīti evaṃ so tena na attamanatā na paripuṇṇasaṅkappabhāvasaṅkhātena kāraṇena parisuddho nirupakkileso hoti, uttari vāyamamāno kammaṭṭhānasuddhiko hutvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.

64. Idha, nigrodha, tapassī – thus, having shown the defilement passage, in which the Blessed One [described] all the doctrines embraced by other sectarians and their protected austerities as defiled, now, beginning the discourse for the purpose of showing pure practice, he said idha, nigrodha and so on. There, "na attamano" and so on should be understood in the same way, by way of the opposite of what was said. And in all cases, the connection should be understood in terms of both the ascetic who lives a rough life and the possessor of dhutaṅgas. Evaṃ so tasmiṃ ṭhāne parisuddho hotī means thus, he is pure, without defilement, in that place by the reason of not being pleased and not having the state of complete intention, and striving further, having become pure in terms of meditation subject, he attains arahantship. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all cases.

69.Addhā kho, bhanteti bhante evaṃ sante ekaṃseneva vīriyena pāpajigucchanavādo parisuddho hotīti anujānāti. Ito parañca aggabhāvaṃ vā sārabhāvaṃ vā ajānantoaggappattā sārappattā cāti āha. Athassa bhagavā sārappattabhāvaṃ paṭisedhentona kho nigrodhātiādimāha.Papaṭikappattā hotīti sāravato rukkhassa sāraṃ phegguṃ tacañca atikkamma bahipapaṭikasadisā hotīti dasseti.

69. "Addhā kho, bhante" means, "Bhante, in this case, with singular effort, the teaching against evil conduct is purified," thus he approves. Furthermore, not knowing the highest state or the essential state, he says, "aggappattā sārappattā cā" (attained the highest, attained the essence). Then, the Blessed One, refuting his attainment of the essential state, said, "na kho nigrodhā" (not so, Nigrodha), etc. "Papaṭikappattā hoti" shows that it is like the outer bark (papaṭika) of a tree, having gone beyond the sapwood (sāra), the heartwood (pheggu), and the inner bark (taca).

Parisuddhatacappattādikathāvaṇṇanā
Description of Attaining Pure Bark, Etc.

70.Aggaṃpāpetūti desanāvasena aggaṃ pāpetvā desetu, sāraṃ pāpetvā desetūti dasabalaṃ yācati.Cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvutoti catubbidhena saṃvarena pihito.Na pāṇaṃ atipātetīti pāṇaṃ na hanati.Na bhāvitamāsīsatīti bhāvitaṃ nāma tesaṃ saññāya pañca kāmaguṇā, te na āsīsati na sevatīti attho.

70. "Aggaṃ pāpetū" (cause to reach the highest): he requests the Ten-Powered One to teach, having caused to reach the highest, in terms of teaching, and to teach, having caused to reach the essence. "Cātuyāmasaṃvarasaṃvuto" (restrained by the fourfold restraint): covered by the fourfold restraint. "Na pāṇaṃ atipātetī" (does not kill a living being): does not kill a living being. "Na bhāvitamāsīsatī" (does not desire what is cultivated): what is cultivated (bhāvita) means the five strands of sense pleasure according to their perception; he does not desire or pursue these, is the meaning.

Aduṃ cassa hotīti etañcassa idāni vuccamānaṃ ‘‘so abhiharatī’’tiādilakkhaṇaṃ.Tapassitāyāti tapassibhāvena hoti. Tatthaso abhiharatīti so taṃ sīlaṃ abhiharati, uparūpari vaḍḍheti. Sīlaṃ me paripuṇṇaṃ, tapo āraddho, alamettāvatāti na vīriyaṃ vissajjeti.No hīnāyāvattatīti hīnāya gihibhāvatthāya na āvattati. Sīlato uttari visesādhigamatthāya vīriyaṃ karotiyeva, evaṃ karonto so vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ bhajati. ‘‘Arañña’’ntiādīni sāmaññaphale (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.216) vitthāritāneva. ‘‘Mettāsahagatenā’’tiādīni visuddhimagge vaṇṇitāni.Tacappattāti papaṭikato abbhantaraṃ tacaṃ pattā.Phegguppattāti tacato abbhantaraṃ phegguṃ pattā, pheggusadisā hotīti attho.

"Aduṃ cassa hotī" (this also is his): this characteristic of his, which is being said now, beginning with "so abhiharati" (he cultivates it). "Tapassitāyā" (for asceticism): it is for the sake of asceticism. Therein, "so abhiharatī" means he cultivates that virtue (sīla), increases it more and more. He does not abandon effort, thinking, "My virtue is complete, effort is begun, enough of loving-kindness." "No hīnāyāvattatī" (does not return to the inferior): he does not return to an inferior state, for the sake of the life of a householder. He certainly makes effort for the sake of attaining further distinction beyond virtue, and while doing so, he resorts to a secluded dwelling. "Arañña" (forest), etc., have already been extensively explained in the Commentary on the Sāmaññaphala Sutta (D.A. 1.216). "Mettāsahagatenā" (accompanied by loving-kindness), etc., have been described in the Visuddhimagga. "Tacappattā" (attained the inner bark): having reached the inner bark (taca), inside the outer bark (papaṭika). "Phegguppattā" (attained the heartwood): having reached the heartwood (pheggu), inside the inner bark (taca); the meaning is that it is like heartwood.

74.‘‘Ettāvatā, kho nigrodha, tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā cā’’ti idaṃ bhagavā titthiyānaṃ vasenāha. Titthiyānañhi lābhasakkāro rukkhassa sākhāpalāsasadiso. Pañcasīlamattakaṃ papaṭikasadisaṃ. Aṭṭhasamāpattimattaṃ tacasadisaṃ. Pubbenivāsañāṇāvasānā abhiññā pheggusadisā. Dibbacakkhuṃ panete arahattanti gahetvā vicaranti. Tena nesaṃ taṃ rukkhassa sārasadisaṃ. Sāsane pana lābhasakkāro sākhāpalāsasadiso. Sīlasampadā papaṭikasadisā. Jhānasamāpattiyo tacasadisā. Lokiyābhiññā pheggusadisā. Maggaphalaṃ sāro. Iti bhagavatā attano sāsanaṃ onatavinataphalabhārabharitarukkhūpamāya upamitaṃ. So desanākusalatāya tato tacasārasampattito mama sāsanaṃ uttaritarañceva paṇītatarañca, taṃ tuvaṃ kadā jānissasīti attanodesanāya visesabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘iti kho nigrodhā’’ti desanaṃ ārabhi.Te paribbājakāti te tassa parivārā tiṃsasatasaṅkhyā paribbājakā.Ettha mayaṃ anassāmāti ettha acelakapāḷiādīsu, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘amhākaṃ acelakapāḷimattampi natthi, kuto parisuddhapāḷi. Amhākaṃ parisuddhapāḷimattampi natthi, kuto cātuyāmasaṃvarādīni. Cātuyāmasaṃvaropi natthi, kuto araññavāsādīni. Araññavāsopi natthi, kuto nīvaraṇappahānādīni. Nīvaraṇappahānampi natthi, kuto brahmavihārādīni. Brahmavihāramattampi natthi, kuto pubbenivāsādīni. Pubbenivāsañāṇamattampi natthi, kuto amhākaṃ dibbacakkhu. Ettha mayaṃ saācariyakā naṭṭhā’’ti.Ito bhiyyo uttaritaranti ito dibbacakkhuñāṇādhigamato bhiyyo aññaṃ uttaritaraṃ visesādhigamaṃ mayaṃ sutivasenāpi na jānāmāti vadanti.

74. "Ettāvatā, kho nigrodha, tapojigucchā aggappattā ca hoti sārappattā cā" (Thus far, Nigrodha, the revulsion from austerity reaches the highest and attains the essence): the Blessed One said this with reference to the Titthiyas. For the gains and honor of the Titthiyas are like the branches and leaves of a tree. Merely the five precepts are like the outer bark. Merely the eight attainments are like the inner bark. The higher knowledges ending with the knowledge of past lives are like the heartwood. But they assume and go around that the divine eye is arahatta (arahantship). Therefore, that is like the sapwood of a tree for them. In the Dispensation (sāsana), however, gains and honor are like branches and leaves. Accomplishment in virtue is like the outer bark. Jhana attainments are like the inner bark. Mundane higher knowledges are like the heartwood. The path and its fruition is the sapwood. Thus, the Blessed One compared his own Dispensation to a tree laden with drooping, bent, and fruitful branches. Showing the excellence of his own teaching due to his skill in teaching, "When will you know that my Dispensation is superior and more excellent than that attainment of inner bark and sapwood?" he began the teaching, "iti kho nigrodhā" (thus, Nigrodha). "Te paribbājakā" (those wanderers): those thirty-hundred (tiṃsasatasaṅkhyā) wanderers were his retinue. "Ettha mayaṃ anassāmā" (here we are without): here, in the Acelaka-pāli, etc.; this means, "We do not even have the Acelaka-pāli, how could we have the pure Pāli? We do not even have the pure Pāli, how could we have the fourfold restraint, etc.? We do not even have the fourfold restraint, how could we have dwelling in the forest, etc.? We do not even have dwelling in the forest, how could we have the abandonment of the hindrances, etc.? We do not even have the abandonment of the hindrances, how could we have the divine abodes, etc.? We do not even have the divine abodes, how could we have the knowledge of past lives, etc.? We do not even have the knowledge of past lives, how could we have the divine eye? Here we, together with our teacher, are lost." "Ito bhiyyo uttaritara" (beyond this, further surpassing): beyond this attainment of the divine eye knowledge, we do not know any further surpassing distinction even by report, they say.

Nigrodhassapajjhāyanavaṇṇanā
Description of Nigrodha's Utterance

75.Atha nigrodhaṃ paribbājakanti evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘ime paribbājakā idāni bhagavato bhāsitaṃ sussūsanti, iminā ca nigrodhena bhagavato parammukhā kakkhaḷaṃ durāsadavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, idāni ayampi sotukāmo jāto, kālo dāni me imassa mānaddhajaṃ nipātetvā bhagavato sāsanaṃ ukkhipitu’’nti. Atha nigrodhaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavoca. Aparampissa ahosi ‘‘ayaṃ mayi akathente satthāraṃ na khamāpessati, tadassa anāgate ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattissati, mayā pana kathite khamāpessati, tadassa bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti. Atha nigrodhaṃ paribbājakaṃ etadavoca.Aparisāvacaraṃ pana naṃ karothāti etthapanāti nipāto, atha naṃ aparisāvacaraṃ karothāti attho. ‘‘Aparisāvacareta’’ntipi pāṭho, aparisāvacaraṃ vā etaṃ karotha, gokāṇādīnaṃ vā aññataranti attho.

75. "Atha nigrodhaṃ paribbājakaṃ" (Then he said to Nigrodha the wanderer): Thus it occurred to him, "These wanderers are now listening attentively to the Blessed One's speech, and harsh, difficult-to-approach words have been spoken by this Nigrodha turning away from the Blessed One; now he also has become desirous to listen. Now is the time for me to bring down his banner of conceit and raise up the Blessed One's Dispensation." Then he said this to Nigrodha the wanderer. Furthermore, it occurred to him, "If I do not speak, he will not appease the Teacher, and that will lead to his harm and suffering in the future; but if it is spoken by me, he will appease [the Teacher], and that will be for his long-term benefit and happiness." Then he said this to Nigrodha the wanderer. "Aparisāvacaraṃ pana naṃ karothā" (Rather, make him a non-follower of the assembly): here, "pana" is a particle; rather, make him a non-follower of the assembly is the meaning. "Aparisāvacaretaṃ" is also a reading; or, make this one a non-follower of the assembly, or one of the Gokāṇas, etc., is the meaning.

Gokāṇanti etthāpi gokāṇaṃ pariyantacāriniṃ viya karothāti attho.Tuṇhībhūtoti tuṇhībhāvaṃ upagato.Maṅkubhūtoti nittejataṃ āpanno.Pattakkhandhoti onatagīvo.Adhomukhoti heṭṭhāmukho.

"Gokāṇa" (Gokāṇa): here also, the meaning is, make him like a Gokāṇa wandering at the periphery. "Tuṇhībhūto" (silent): having become silent. "Maṅkubhūto" (crestfallen): having become dejected. "Pattakkhandho" (downcast): with drooping shoulders. "Adhomukho" (facing downwards): facing downwards.

76.Buddhoso bhagavā bodhāyāti sayaṃ buddho sattānampi catusaccabodhatthāya dhammaṃ deseti.Dantoti cakkhutopi danto…pe… manatopi danto.Damathāyāti aññesampi damanatthāya eva, na vādatthāya.Santoti rāgasantatāya santo, dosamohasantatāya sabba akusalasabbābhisaṅkhārasantatāya santo.Samathāyāti mahājanassa rāgādisamanatthāya dhammaṃ deseti.Tiṇṇoti cattāro oghe tiṇṇo.Taraṇāyāti mahājanassa oghanittharaṇatthāya.Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto.Parinibbānāyāti mahājanassāpi sabbakilesaparinibbānatthāya dhammaṃ deseti.

76. "Buddho so bhagavā bodhāyā" (The Buddha, that Blessed One, teaches for enlightenment): the Buddha himself teaches the Dhamma for the sake of the enlightenment of beings to the four noble truths. "Danto" (tamed): tamed from the eye…pe… tamed from the mind. "Damathāyā" (for taming): for the taming of others as well, not for the sake of argument. "Santo" (peaceful): peaceful due to the cessation of greed, peaceful due to the cessation of hatred and delusion, peaceful due to the cessation of all unwholesome and conditioned phenomena. "Samathāyā" (for peace): he teaches the Dhamma for the sake of the pacification of greed, etc., of the great multitude. "Tiṇṇo" (crossed over): crossed over the four floods. "Taraṇāyā" (for crossing over): for the sake of the multitude's crossing over the flood. "Parinibbuto" (fully extinguished): fully extinguished by the extinction of defilements. "Parinibbānāyā" (for full extinction): for the sake of the full extinction of all defilements of the multitude as well.

Brahmacariyapariyosānādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Consummation of the Holy Life, Etc.

77.Accayotiādīni sāmaññaphale (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.250) vuttāni.Ujujātikoti kāyavaṅkādivirahito ujusabhāvo.Ahamanusāsāmīti ahaṃ tādisaṃ puggalaṃ anusāsāmi, dhammaṃ assa desemi.Sattāhanti sattadivasāni, idaṃ sabbampi bhagavā dandhapaññaṃ puggalaṃ sandhāyāha asaṭho pana amāyāvī ujujātiko taṃmuhutteneva arahattaṃ pattuṃ sakkhissati. Iti bhagavā ‘‘asaṭha’’ntiādivacanena saṭho hi vaṅkavaṅko, mayāpi na sakkā anusāsitunti dīpento paribbājakaṃ pādesu gahetvā mahāmerupādatale viya khipittha. Kasmā? Ayañhi atisaṭho, kuṭilacitto satthari evaṃ kathentepi buddhadhammasaṅghesu nādhimuccati, adhimuccanatthāya sotaṃ na odahati, kohaññe ṭhito satthāraṃ khamāpeti. Tasmā bhagavā tassajjhāsayaṃ viditvā ‘‘etu viññū puriso asaṭho’’tiādimāha. Saṭhaṃ panāhaṃ anusāsituṃ na sakkomīti.

77. "Accayo" (transgression), etc., have been stated in the Sāmaññaphala Sutta (D.A. 1.250). "Ujujātiko" (of upright nature): of upright nature, devoid of crookedness of body, etc. "Ahamanusāsāmī" (I will instruct): I will instruct such a person, I will teach him the Dhamma. "Sattāha" (seven days): seven days; the Blessed One said all this referring to a person of slow wisdom, but one who is not deceitful, not fraudulent, and of upright nature will be able to attain arahatta at that very moment. Thus, by the words "asaṭha" (not deceitful), etc., the Blessed One, showing that "a deceitful person is crooked and bent; even I am not able to instruct him," threw the wanderer as if grasping him by the feet at the foot of Mount Meru. Why? Because he is extremely deceitful, of crooked mind, and even when the Teacher speaks thus, he does not have conviction in the Buddha, Dhamma, and Sangha, he does not lend an ear for the sake of conviction, and standing in stubbornness, he appeases the Teacher. Therefore, knowing his disposition, the Blessed One said, "etu viññū puriso asaṭho" (Let an intelligent man come, not deceitful), etc. "But I am not able to instruct a deceitful person."

78.Antevāsikamyatāti antevāsikamyatāya, amhe antevāsike icchanto.Evamāhāti ‘‘etu viññupuriso’’tiādimāha.Yo eva vo ācariyoti yo eva tumhākaṃ pakatiyā ācariyo.Uddesā no cāvetukāmoti attano anusāsaniṃ gāhāpetvā amhe amhākaṃ uddesato cāvetukāmo.Soeva vo uddeso hotūti yo tumhākaṃ pakatiyā uddeso, so tumhākaṃyeva hotu, na mayaṃ tumhākaṃ uddesena atthikā.Ājīvāti ājīvato.Akusalasaṅkhātāti akusalāti koṭṭhāsaṃ pattā.Akusalā dhammāti dvādasa akusalacittuppādadhammā taṇhāyeva vā visesena. Sā hi punabbhavakaraṇato ‘‘ponobbhavikā’’ti vuttā.Sadarathāti kilesadarathasampayuttā.Jātijarāmaraṇiyāti jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ paccayabhūtā.Saṃkilesikā dhammāti dvādasa akusalacittuppādā.Vodāniyāti, samathavipassanā dhammā. Te hi satte vodāpenti, tasmā ‘‘vodāniyā’’ti vuccanti.Paññāpāripūrinti maggapaññāpāripūriṃ.Vepullattañcāti phalapaññāvepullataṃ, ubhopi vā etāni aññamaññavevacanāneva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘tato tumhe maggapaññañceva phalapaññañca diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissathā’’ti. Evaṃ bhagavā paribbājake ārabbha attano ovādānusāsaniyā phalaṃ dassento arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.

78. "Antevāsikamyatā" (desiring to be a pupil): for the sake of being a pupil, desiring us to be pupils. "Evamāhā" (said thus): said "etu viññupuriso" (let an intelligent man come), etc. "Yo eva vo ācariyo" (whoever is your teacher): whoever is naturally your teacher. "Uddesā no cāvetukāmo" (wishes to remove us from our teaching): having made us grasp his instruction, he wishes to remove us from our teaching. "So eva vo uddeso hotū" (Let that be your teaching): whatever is naturally your teaching, let that be yours, we are not interested in your teaching. "Ājīvā" (livelihoods): from livelihoods. "Akusalasaṅkhātā" (termed unwholesome): obtained the term "unwholesome." "Akusalā dhammā" (unwholesome phenomena): the twelve unwholesome consciousness-moments, or especially craving itself. For that is called "ponobbhavikā" (leading to renewed existence) because it causes rebirth. "Sadarathā" (accompanied by anguish): associated with the anguish of defilements. "Jātijarāmaraṇiyā" (subject to birth, aging, and death): the cause of birth, aging, and death. "Saṃkilesikā dhammā" (defiling phenomena): the twelve unwholesome consciousness-moments. "Vodāniyā" (purifying): the phenomena of serenity and insight. For they purify beings, therefore they are called "vodāniyā." "Paññāpāripūriṃ" (fulfillment of wisdom): the fulfillment of path wisdom. "Vepullattañcā" (and expansiveness): the expansiveness of fruition wisdom, or both of these are merely synonyms of each other. This means, "Then you yourselves will realize, experience, and abide in path wisdom and fruition wisdom in this very life." Thus, with reference to the wanderers, the Blessed One, showing the fruit of his own advice and instruction, concluded the teaching with the pinnacle of arahatta.

79.Yathā taṃ mārenāti yathā mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittā nisīdanti evameva tuṇhībhūtā…pe… appaṭibhānā nisinnā.

79. "Yathā taṃ mārenā" (just as by Māra): just as they sit with minds possessed by Māra, so too they sat silent…pe… without eloquence.

Māro kira satthā ativiya gajjanto buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā imesaṃ paribbājakānaṃ dhammaṃ deseti, kadāci dhammābhisamayo bhaveyya, handāhaṃ pariyuṭṭhāmīti so tesaṃ cittāni pariyuṭṭhāsi. Appahīnavipallāsānañhi cittaṃ mārassa yathākāmakaraṇīyaṃ hoti. Tepi mārena pariyuṭṭhitacittā thaddhaṅgapaccaṅgā viya tuṇhī appaṭibhānā nisīdiṃsu. Atha satthā ime paribbājakā ativiya niravā hutvā nisinnā, kiṃ nu khoti āvajjanto mārena pariyuṭṭhitabhāvaṃ aññāsi. Sace pana tesaṃ maggaphaluppattihetu bhaveyya, māraṃ paṭibāhitvāpi bhagavā dhammaṃ deseyya, so pana tesaṃ natthi. ‘‘Sabbepi me tucchapurisā’’ti aññāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavato etadahosi sabbepi me moghapurisā’’tiādi.

It seems that Māra, roaring excessively, showing the power of the Buddha, and teaching the Dhamma to these wanderers, [feared] lest an attainment of the Dhamma might occur; "Come, I will possess them," so he possessed their minds. For the minds of those whose perversions have not been abandoned can be manipulated as Māra pleases. And they, with minds possessed by Māra, sat silent and without eloquence, like statues with stiff limbs and appendages. Then the Teacher, considering, "These wanderers are sitting excessively speechless; what could be the reason?" understood that they were possessed by Māra. If, however, there were a cause for the arising of the path and its fruition in them, the Blessed One would teach the Dhamma even after repelling Māra, but that was not in them. "All these men are empty," he understood. Therefore, it was said, "atha kho bhagavato etadahosi sabbepi me moghapurisā" (then it occurred to the Blessed One, all these men are worthless), etc.

phuṭṭhā pāpimatāti pāpimatā mārena phuṭṭhā.Yatra hi nāmāti yesu nāma.Aññāṇatthampīti jānanatthampi.Kiṃ karissati sattāhoti samaṇena gotamena paricchinnasattāho amhākaṃ kiṃ karissati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘samaṇena gotamena ‘sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharissati sattāha’nti vuttaṃ, so sattāho amhākaṃ kiṃ apphāsukaṃ karissati. Handa mayaṃ sattāhabbhantare etaṃ dhammaṃ sacchikātuṃ sakkā, na sakkāti aññāṇatthampi brahmacariyaṃ carissāmā’’ti. Atha vā jānāma tāvassa dhammanti ekadivase ekavāraṃ aññāṇatthampi etesaṃ cittaṃ nuppannaṃ, sattāho pana etesaṃ kusītānaṃ kiṃ karissati, kiṃ sakkhissanti te sattāhaṃ pūretunti ayamettha adhippāyo.Sīhanādanti paravādabhindanaṃ sakavādasamussāpanañca abhītanādaṃ naditvā.Paccupaṭṭhāsīti patiṭṭhito.Tāvadevāti tasmiññeva khaṇe.Rājagahaṃ pāvisīti rājagahameva paviṭṭho. Tesaṃ pana paribbājakānaṃ kiñcāpi idaṃ suttantaṃ sutvā viseso na nibbatto, āyatiṃ pana nesaṃ vāsanāya paccayo bhavissatīti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.

"phuṭṭhā pāpimatā" (touched by the Evil One): touched by Māra, the Evil One. "Yatra hi nāmā" (in whom): in whom. "Aññāṇatthampī" (even for the sake of unknowing): even for the sake of knowing. "Kiṃ karissati sattāho" (what will the week do): what will the week defined by the ascetic Gotama do to us? This means, "The ascetic Gotama said, 'He will realize, experience, and abide in it himself within a week'; what discomfort will that week cause us? Come, we will practice the holy life even for the sake of not knowing whether we are able to realize this Dhamma within a week or not." Or, "Let us see what his Dhamma is"; even for the sake of not knowing, a single consciousness did not arise in them in a single day, but what will the week do for these lazy ones? What will they be able to accomplish in completing the week? This is the meaning here. "Sīhanāda" (lion's roar): having uttered the fearless roar that shatters the doctrines of others and raises up one's own doctrine. "Paccupaṭṭhāsī" (attended): established. "Tāvadevā" (at that very moment): at that very moment. "Rājagahaṃ pāvisī" (entered Rājagaha): entered Rājagaha itself. Although no distinction arose for those wanderers after hearing this sutta, in the future it will be a cause for their disposition. The rest is easily understood everywhere.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

End of the Commentary to the Dīgha Nikāya in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī.

3. Cakkavattisuttavaṇṇanā

3. Description of the Cakkavatti Sutta

Attadīpasaraṇatāvaṇṇanā
Description of Being One's Own Island and Refuge

80.Evaṃme sutanti cakkavattisuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā –mātulāyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Taṃ nagaraṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā avidūre vanasaṇḍe viharati. ‘‘Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesī’’ti ettha ayamanupubbikathā –

80. "Evaṃ me sutaṃ" (Thus I have heard): the Cakkavatti Sutta. Therein, this is the explanation of the easily understood words— "mātulāya" (at Mātula): in a city of this name. Making that city a pasture village, he dwells not far away in a forest grove. "Tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesī" (There the Blessed One addressed the monks): here is the preliminary account—

Bhagavā kira imassa suttassa samuṭṭhānasamaye paccūsakāle mahākaruṇāsamāpattito vuṭṭhāya lokaṃ volokento imāya anāgatavaṃsadīpikāya suttantakathāya mātulanagaravāsīnaṃ caturāsītiyā pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayaṃ disvā pātova vīsatibhikkhusahassaparivāro mātulanagaraṃ sampatto. Mātulanagaravāsino khattiyā ‘‘bhagavā āgato’’ti sutvā paccuggamma dasabalaṃ nimantetvā mahāsakkārena nagaraṃ pavesetvā nisajjaṭṭhānaṃ saṃvidhāya bhagavantaṃ mahārahe pallaṅke nisīdāpetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusaṅghassa mahādānaṃ adaṃsu. Bhagavā bhattakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ imasmiṃ ṭhāne imesaṃ manussānaṃ dhammaṃ desessāmi, ayaṃ padeso sambādho, manussānaṃ ṭhātuṃ vā nisīdituṃ vā okāso na bhavissati, mahatā kho pana samāgamena bhavitabba’’nti.

It seems that at the time of the arising of this sutta, the Blessed One, rising from the Great Compassion Attainment at dawn, surveying the world, and seeing the attainment of the Dhamma by eighty-four thousand beings residing in the city of Mātula by means of this sutta teaching the lineage of the future, arrived at the city of Mātula early in the morning with a retinue of twenty thousand monks. The Khattiyas residing in the city of Mātula, hearing that the Blessed One had arrived, went to meet him, invited the Ten-Powered One, brought him into the city with great honor, prepared a seating place, seated the Blessed One on a valuable seat, and gave a great donation to the Sangha of monks with the Buddha at its head. The Blessed One, having finished his meal, thought, "If I teach the Dhamma to these people in this place, this area is crowded, and there will be no opportunity for the people to stand or sit; there must be a great gathering."

Atha rājakulānaṃ bhattānumodanaṃ akatvāva pattaṃ gahetvā nagarato nikkhami. Manussā cintayiṃsu – ‘‘satthā amhākaṃ anumodanampi akatvā gacchati, addhā bhattaggaṃ amanāpaṃ ahosi, buddhānaṃ nāma na sakkā cittaṃ gahetuṃ, buddhehi saddhiṃ vissāsakaraṇaṃ nāma samussitaphaṇaṃ āsīvisaṃ gīvāya gahaṇasadisaṃ hoti; etha bho, tathāgataṃ khamāpessāmā’’ti. Sakalanagaravāsino bhagavatā saheva nikkhantā. Bhagavā gacchantova magadhakkhette ṭhitaṃ sākhāviṭapasampannaṃ sandacchāyaṃ karīsamattabhūmipatthaṭaṃ ekaṃ mātularukkhaṃ disvā imasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisīditvā dhamme desiyamāne ‘‘mahājanassa ṭhānanisajjanokāso bhavissatī’’ti. Nivattitvā maggā okkamma rukkhamūlaṃ upasaṅkamitvā dhammabhaṇḍāgārikaṃ ānandattheraṃ olokesi. Thero olokitasaññāya eva ‘‘satthā nisīditukāmo’’ti ñatvā sugatamahācīvaraṃ paññapetvā adāsi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Athassa purato manussā nisīdiṃsu. Ubhosu passesu pacchato ca bhikkhusaṅgho, ākāse devatā aṭṭhaṃsu, evaṃ mahāparisamajjhagato tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi.

Then, without making an anumodana (rejoicing) for the royal families, he took his bowl and left the city. People thought, "The Teacher is leaving without even allowing us to rejoice; truly, the meal was displeasing. It is impossible to fathom the minds of Buddhas. Making friends with Buddhas is like grasping a cobra with raised hood by the neck. Come, let us apologize to the Tathāgata." All the city dwellers went out with the Blessed One. While walking, the Blessed One saw a mātula tree in the Magadha region, full of branches and twigs, providing dense shade, spread over an area the size of a karīsa (unit of land measurement), and thought, "When the Dhamma is preached while sitting at the root of this tree, there will be space for the crowd to sit." Turning back from the road, he approached the root of the tree and looked at Ānanda Thera, the treasurer of the Dhamma. The Thera, understanding from the glance that the Teacher wished to sit, spread out the Sugata's great robe and offered it. The Blessed One sat on the prepared seat. Then the people sat in front of him. On both sides and behind were the bhikkhusaṅgha, and in the sky were devatās. Thus, in the midst of a great assembly, the Blessed One addressed the bhikkhus there.

Te bhikkhūti tatra upaviṭṭhā dhammappaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū.Attadīpāti attānaṃ dīpaṃ tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ gatiṃ parāyaṇaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ katvā viharathāti attho.Attasaraṇāti idaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ.Anaññasaraṇāti idaṃ aññasaraṇapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Na hi añño aññassa saraṇaṃ hoti, aññassa vāyāmena aññassa asujjhanato. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘attā hi attano nātho, ko hi nātho paro siyā’’ti (dha. pa. 160). Tenāha ‘‘anaññasaraṇā’’ti. Ko panettha attā nāma, lokiyalokuttaro dhammo. Tenāha – ‘‘dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā’’ti. ‘‘Kāye kāyānupassī’’tiādīni mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vitthāritāni.

Te bhikkhūti: "Those bhikkhus" means the bhikkhus sitting there, receptive to the Dhamma. Attadīpā: "Making themselves their own island" means living having made oneself one's own island, refuge, shelter, destination, final support, and foundation. Attasaraṇā: "With themselves as their own refuge" is a synonym for that. Anaññasaraṇā: "With no other refuge" is a statement rejecting other refuges. Indeed, no one is a refuge for another, as one person's efforts do not purify another. It was also said, "Oneself is one's own protector; who else could be the protector?" (dha. pa. 160). Therefore, he said, "anaññasaraṇā". What is this "self" here? It is the mundane and supramundane Dhamma. Therefore, he said, "dhammadīpā dhammasaraṇā anaññasaraṇā". "Kāye kāyānupassī..." (contemplating the body in the body) and the rest are explained in detail in the Mahāsatipaṭṭhāna.

Gocareti carituṃ yuttaṭṭhāne.Saketi attano santake.Pettike visayeti pitito āgatavisaye.Caratanti carantānaṃ. ‘‘Caranta’’ntipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Na lacchatīti na labhissati na passissati.Māroti devaputtamāropi, maccumāropi, kilesamāropi.Otāranti randhaṃ chiddaṃ vivaraṃ. Ayaṃ panattho leḍḍuṭṭhānato nikkhamma toraṇe nisīditvā bālātapaṃ tapantaṃ lāpaṃ sakuṇaṃ gahetvā. Pakkhandasenasakuṇavatthunā dīpetabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –

Gocare: In a place suitable for wandering. Sake: In one's own. Pettike visaye: In the ancestral domain. Carataṃ: For those who wander. "Carantaṃ" is also a reading; the meaning is the same. Na lacchatī: Will not obtain, will not see. Māro: Refers to devaputtamāra, maccumāra, and kilesamāra. Otāraṃ: Opportunity, loophole, opening. This meaning should be illustrated by the story of the quail who, after leaving the clod of earth, sat on the city gate enjoying the warm sunlight and was caught. It should be explained by the story of the Hawk and the Quail. It was said thus:

‘‘Bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave, sakuṇagghi lāpaṃ sakuṇaṃ sahasā ajjhappattā aggahesi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, lāpo sakuṇo sakuṇagghiyā hariyamāno evaṃ paridevasi ‘mayamevamha alakkhikā, mayaṃ appapuññā, ye mayaṃ agocare carimha paravisaye, sacejja mayaṃ gocare careyyāma sake pettike visaye, na myāyaṃ sakuṇagghi alaṃ abhavissa yadidaṃ yuddhāyā’ti. Ko pana te lāpa gocaro sako pettiko visayoti? Yadidaṃ naṅgalakaṭṭhakaraṇaṃ leḍḍuṭṭhānanti. Atha kho, bhikkhave, sakuṇagghi sake bale apatthaddhā sake bale asaṃvadamānā lāpaṃ sakuṇaṃ pamuñci gaccha kho tvaṃ lāpa, tatrapi gantvā na mokkhasīti.

"Once upon a time, bhikkhus, a hawk suddenly swooped down and seized a quail. Then, bhikkhus, as the quail was being carried away by the hawk, it lamented thus: 'We are so unlucky, we are so lacking in merit, that we wander in a foreign domain, not in our own pasture. If only we were to wander in our own pasture, in our ancestral domain, this hawk would not be able to wage war against me!' But what is your own pasture, your ancestral domain, quail? It is the clod of earth where the ploughshare turns the soil.' Then, bhikkhus, the hawk, relying on its own strength, unyielding in its own strength, released the quail, saying, 'Go then, quail, even going there you will not escape.'"

Atha kho, bhikkhave, lāpo sakuṇo naṅgalakaṭṭhakaraṇaṃ leḍḍuṭṭhānaṃ gantvā mahantaṃ leḍḍuṃ abhiruhitvā sakuṇagghiṃ vadamāno aṭṭhāsi ‘‘ehi kho dāni me sakuṇagghi, ehi kho dāni me sakuṇagghī’’ti. Atha kho sā, bhikkhave, sakuṇagghi sake bale apatthaddhā sake bale asaṃvadamānā ubho pakkhe sannayha lāpaṃ sakuṇaṃ sahasā ajjhappattā. Yadā kho, bhikkhave, aññāsi lāpo sakuṇo bahuāgatā kho myāyaṃ sakuṇagghīti, atha kho tasseva leḍḍussa antaraṃ paccupādi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, sakuṇagghi tattheva uraṃ paccatāḷesi. Evañhi taṃ, bhikkhave, hoti yo agocare carati paravisaye.

"Then, bhikkhus, the quail went to the clod of earth where the ploughshare turns the soil, climbed onto a large clod, and stood taunting the hawk, 'Come now, hawk! Come now, hawk!' Then, bhikkhus, the hawk, relying on its own strength, unyielding in its own strength, folded both wings and suddenly swooped down on the quail. When the quail knew, 'This hawk has come too close to me,' then the space within that clod opened up. Then, bhikkhus, the hawk struck its chest right there. Thus it is, bhikkhus, for one who wanders in a foreign domain, not in one's own pasture."

Tasmātiha, bhikkhave, mā agocare carittha paravisaye, agocare, bhikkhave, carataṃ paravisaye lacchati māro otāraṃ, lacchati māro ārammaṇaṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno agocaro paravisayo, yadidaṃ pañca kāmaguṇā. Katame pañca? Cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā, sotaviññeyyā saddā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā, ghānaviññeyyā gandhā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā, jivhāviññeyyā rasā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā, kāyaviññeyyā phoṭṭhabbā iṭṭhā kantā manāpā piyarūpā kāmūpasaṃhitā rajanīyā. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno agocaro paravisayo.

"Therefore, bhikkhus, do not wander in a foreign domain, not in your own pasture. For one who wanders in a foreign domain, bhikkhus, Māra gains an opportunity, Māra gains a foothold. And what, bhikkhus, is a bhikkhu's foreign domain, not his own pasture? It is these five strands of sense pleasure. Which five? Forms cognizable by the eye that are desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasing, connected with desire, enticing; sounds cognizable by the ear... smells cognizable by the nose... tastes cognizable by the tongue... tactile objects cognizable by the body that are desirable, lovely, agreeable, pleasing, connected with desire, enticing. This, bhikkhus, is a bhikkhu's foreign domain, not his own pasture."

Gocare, bhikkhave, caratha…pe… na lacchati māro ārammaṇaṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayo, yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro? Idha bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ; vedanāsu vedanānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ; citte cittānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ; dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā, vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ – ayaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno gocaro sako pettiko visayoti (saṃ. ni. 5.371).

"Wander, bhikkhus, in your own pasture...pe... Māra does not gain a foothold. And what, bhikkhus, is a bhikkhu's own pasture, his ancestral domain? It is these four foundations of mindfulness. Which four? Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu dwells contemplating the body in the body, ardent, fully knowing, mindful, having removed covetousness and displeasure in the world; he dwells contemplating feelings in feelings... he dwells contemplating mind in mind... he dwells contemplating phenomena in phenomena, ardent, fully knowing, mindful, having removed covetousness and displeasure in the world - this, bhikkhus, is a bhikkhu's own pasture, his ancestral domain" (saṃ. ni. 5.371).

Kusalānanti anavajjalakkhaṇānaṃ.Samādānahetūti samādāya vattanahetu.Evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatīti evaṃ idaṃ lokiyalokuttaraṃ puññaphalaṃ vaḍḍhati, puññaphalanti ca uparūpari puññampi puññavipākopi veditabbo.

Kusalānaṃ: Of wholesome qualities, characterized by blamelessness. Samādānahetū: Because of undertaking and maintaining. Evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī: Thus, this mundane and supramundane fruit of merit increases; "fruit of merit" should be understood as both merit upon merit and the result of merit.

Daḷhanemicakkavattirājakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Daḷhanemi Cakkavatti King Story

81.Tatthaduvidhaṃ kusalaṃvaṭṭagāmī ca vivaṭṭagāmī ca. Tattha vaṭṭagāmikusalaṃ nāma mātāpitūnaṃ puttadhītāsu puttadhītānañca mātāpitūsu sinehavasena mudumaddavacittaṃ. Vivaṭṭagāmikusalaṃ nāma ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādibhedā sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Tesu vaṭṭagāmipuññassa pariyosānaṃ manussaloke cakkavattisirīvibhavo. Vivaṭṭagāmikusalassa maggaphalanibbānasampatti. Tattha vivaṭṭagāmikusalassa vipākaṃ suttapariyosāne dassessati.

81.There, kusala is of two kinds: that which leads to the cycle [of rebirth] and that which leads out of the cycle. There, kusala that leads to the cycle is the tenderness and gentleness of mind arising from the love of parents for their children and of children for their parents. Kusala that leads out of the cycle is the thirty-seven factors conducive to enlightenment, beginning with the four foundations of mindfulness. The culmination of merit that leads to the cycle is the glory and splendor of a Universal Monarch in the human world. The culmination of kusala that leads out of the cycle is the attainment of the path, its fruit, and Nibbāna. At the end of the sutta, he will show the result of kusala that leads out of the cycle.

Idha pana vaṭṭagāmikusalassa vipākadassanatthaṃ, bhikkhave, yadā puttadhītaro mātāpitūnaṃ ovāde na aṭṭhaṃsu, tadā āyunāpi vaṇṇenāpi issariyenāpi parihāyiṃsu. Yadā pana aṭṭhaṃsu, tadā vaḍḍhiṃsūti vatvā vaṭṭagāmikusalānusandhivasena ‘‘bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha cakkavattītiādīni mahāpadāne (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33) vitthāritāneva.

Here, however, to show the result of kusala that leads to the cycle, he began the discourse, "bhūtapubbaṃ, bhikkhave" (Once in the past, bhikkhus), saying that when sons and daughters did not abide by the advice of their parents, they declined in life-span, beauty, and authority, and when they did abide, they increased, in connection with kusala that leads to the cycle. There, "cakkavattītiādīni" (Universal Monarch, etc.) are already explained in detail in the Mahāpadāna Sutta (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33).

82.Osakkitanti īsakampi avasakkitaṃ.Ṭhānā cutanti sabbaso ṭhānā apagataṃ. Taṃ kira cakkaratanaṃ antepuradvāre akkhāhataṃ viya vehāsaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Athassa ubhosu passesu dve khadiratthambhe nikhaṇitvā cakkaratanamatthake nemiabhimukhaṃ ekaṃ suttakaṃ bandhiṃsu. Adhobhāgepi nemiabhimukhaṃ ekaṃ bandhiṃsu. Tesu uparimasuttato appamattakampi ogataṃ cakkaratanaṃ osakkitaṃ nāma hoti, heṭṭhā suttassa ṭhānaṃ uparimakoṭiyā atikkantagataṃ ṭhānā cutaṃ nāma hoti, tadetaṃ atibalavadose sati evaṃ hoti. Suttamattampi ekaṅguladvaṅgulamattaṃ vā bhaṭṭhaṃ ṭhānā cutameva hoti. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘osakkitaṃ ṭhānā cuta’’nti.

82.Osakkitaṃ: Having receded even slightly. Ṭhānā cutaṃ: Completely departed from its place. It is said that the cakka-ratana (wheel-jewel) stood in the sky at the palace gate like an axle struck. Then, having dug two khadira posts on both sides of it, they tied a thread facing the circumference on the head of the cakka-ratana. They also tied one facing the circumference at the lower part. If the cakka-ratana went down even a little from the upper thread, it is called osakkitaṃ, and if the place of the lower thread went beyond the upper tip, it is called ṭhānā cutaṃ. This happens only when there is a very strong fault. Even if a thread or one or two inches are missing, it is still ṭhānā cutameva (departed from its place). Referring to that, it was said, "osakkitaṃ ṭhānā cutaṃ".

Atha me āroceyyāsīti tāta, tvaṃ ajja ādiṃ katvā divasassa tikkhattuṃ cakkaratanassa upaṭṭhānaṃ gaccha, evaṃ gacchanto yadā cakkaratanaṃ īsakampi osakkitaṃ ṭhānā cutaṃ passasi, atha mayhaṃ ācikkheyyāsi. Jīvitañhi me tava hatthe nikkhittanti.Addasāti appamatto divasassa tikkhattuṃ gantvā olokento ekadivasaṃ addasa.

Atha me āroceyyāsī: "Dear one, starting from today, go to attend to the cakka-ratana three times a day. While going like this, when you see the cakka-ratana has receded even slightly or has departed from its place, then you should inform me. Indeed, my life is placed in your hands." Addasā: He, being diligent, going and looking three times a day, saw it one day.

83.Athakho, bhikkhaveti bhikkhave, atha rājā daḷhanemi ‘‘cakkaratanaṃ osakkita’’nti sutvā uppannabalavadomanasso ‘‘na dāni mayā ciraṃ jīvitabbaṃ bhavissati, appāvasesaṃ me āyu, na me dāni kāme paribhuñjanakālo, pabbajjākālo me idānī’’ti roditvā paridevitvā jeṭṭhaputtaṃ kumāraṃ āmantāpetvā etadavoca.Samuddapariyantanti parikkhittaekasamuddapariyantameva. Idaṃ hissa kulasantakaṃ. Cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ pana puññiddhivasena nibbattaṃ, na taṃ sakkā dātuṃ. Kulasantakaṃ pana niyyātento ‘‘samuddapariyanta’’nti āha.Kesamassunti tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajantāpi hi paṭhamaṃ kesamassuṃ ohārenti. Tato paṭṭhāya parūḷhakese bandhitvā vicaranti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘kesamassuṃ ohāretvā’’ti.

83.Atha kho, bhikkhave: Bhikkhus, then King Daḷhanemi, hearing that the "cakka-ratana had receded," with great sorrow arising, thought, "I will not live long now, my life is nearly over, now is not the time for me to enjoy sensual pleasures, now is the time for me to go forth," and having wept and lamented, he summoned his eldest son, the prince, and said this. Samuddapariyantaṃ: Only up to the border of the surrounding ocean. This, indeed, was his family inheritance. However, that which arose due to the power of merit extended to the cakkavāḷa (world-circle), and that cannot be given away. But when handing over the family inheritance, he said, "samuddapariyantaṃ". Kesamassuṃ: Even those who go forth into the ascetic life first shave off their hair and beard. From then on, they tie up their overgrown hair and wander. Therefore, it was said - "kesamassuṃ ohāretvā".

Kāsāyānīti kasāyarasapītāni. Ādito evaṃ katvā pacchā vakkalānipi dhārenti.Pabbajīti pabbajito. Pabbajitvā ca attano maṅgalavanuyyāneyeva vasi.Rājisimhīti rājaīsimhi. Brāhmaṇapabbajitā hi ‘‘brāhmaṇisayo’’ti vuccanti. Setacchattaṃ pana pahāya rājapabbajitā rājisayoti.Antaradhāyīti antarahitaṃ nibbutadīpasikhā viya abhāvaṃ upagataṃ.Paṭisaṃvedesīti kandanto paridevanto jānāpesi.Pettikanti pitito āgataṃ dāyajjaṃ na hoti, na sakkā kusītena hīnavīriyena dasa akusalakammapathe samādāya vattantena pāpuṇituṃ. Attano pana sukataṃ kammaṃ nissāya dasavidhaṃ dvādasavidhaṃ vā cakkavattivattaṃ pūrentenevetaṃ pattabbanti dīpeti. Atha naṃ vattapaṭipattiyaṃ codento ‘‘iṅgha tva’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaariyeti niddose.Cakkavattivatteti cakkavattīnaṃ vatte.

Kāsāyāni: Colored with kasāya (astringent) taste. Having done so from the beginning, they later also wore bark garments. Pabbajī: He went forth. And having gone forth, he lived in his own auspicious grove and park. Rājisimhī: Rāja + isī + mhi. Brahmins who go forth are called "brāhmaṇisayo". However, having given up the white parasol, the royal renunciates are called rājisayo. Antaradhāyī: Disappeared, having gone to non-existence like the flame of an extinguished lamp. Paṭisaṃvedesī: Making it known while weeping and lamenting. Pettikaṃ: Ancestral inheritance is not something that can be attained by a lazy person, lacking in vigor, maintaining the ten unwholesome courses of action. But it is attained only by relying on one's own well-done deeds and fulfilling the ten or twelve kinds of duties of a Universal Monarch. Therefore, he indicates this. Then, urging him in the practice of duties, he said, "iṅgha tva" (come now, you), etc. There, ariye: Noble, faultless. Cakkavattivatte: In the duties of a Universal Monarch.

Cakkavattiariyavattavaṇṇanā
Description of the Noble Duties of a Universal Monarch

84.Dhammanti dasakusalakammapathadhammaṃ.Nissāyāti tadadhiṭṭhānena cetasā tameva nissayaṃ katvā.Dhammaṃ sakkarontoti yathā kato so dhammo suṭṭhu kato hoti, evametaṃ karonto.Dhammaṃ garuṃ karontoti tasmiṃ gāravuppattiyā taṃ garuṃ karonto.Dhammaṃ mānentoti tameva dhammaṃ piyañca bhāvanīyañca katvā viharanto.Dhammaṃ pūjentoti taṃ apadisitvā gandhamālādipūjanenassa pūjaṃ karonto.Dhammaṃapacayamānoti tasseva dhammassa añjalikaraṇādīhi nīcavuttitaṃ karonto.Dhammaddhajodhammaketūti taṃ dhammaṃ dhajamiva purakkhatvā ketumiva ca ukkhipitvā pavattiyā dhammaddhajo dhammaketu ca hutvāti attho.Dhammādhipateyyoti dhammādhipatibhūto āgatabhāvena dhammavaseneva sabbakiriyānaṃ karaṇena dhammādhipateyyo hutvā.Dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṃ saṃvidahassūti dhammo assā atthīti dhammikā, rakkhā ca āvaraṇañca gutti ca rakkhāvaraṇagutti. Tattha ‘‘paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.385) vacanato khantiādayo rakkhā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, paraṃ rakkhanto attānaṃ rakkhati. Khantiyā avihiṃsāya mettacittatā anuddayatā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.385). Nivāsanapārupanagehādīnaṃ nivāraṇā āvaraṇaṃ, corādiupaddavanivāraṇatthaṃ gopāyanā gutti, taṃ sabbampi suṭṭhu saṃvidahassu pavattaya ṭhapehīti attho. Idāni yattha sā saṃvidahitabbā, taṃ dassentoantojanasmintiādimāha.

84.Dhammaṃ: The ten wholesome courses of action. Nissāyā: Relying on that basis, making that itself the support. Dhammaṃ sakkaronto: Doing this, making that Dhamma well-done, properly done. Dhammaṃ garuṃ karonto: Making it heavy, honoring it with reverence. Dhammaṃ mānento: Living having made that very Dhamma dear and worthy of cultivation. Dhammaṃ pūjento: Making offerings to it by worshipping it with perfumes, garlands, etc., as appropriate. Dhammaṃ apacayamāno: Showing humility towards that very Dhamma by offering salutations, etc. Dhammaddhajo dhammaketū: Having the Dhamma as a banner, like a banner carried forth, and as a standard, like a standard raised up, having the Dhamma as banner and standard. Dhammādhipateyyo: Having the Dhamma as the sovereign, because of acting in accordance with the Dhamma in all actions, being one who has the Dhamma as the sovereign. Dhammikaṃ rakkhāvaraṇaguttiṃ saṃvidahassū: One who has Dhamma is dhammikā (righteous); rakkhā (protection), āvaraṇa (defense), and gutti (guard) are rakkhāvaraṇagutti. There, "protecting others, one protects oneself" (saṃ. ni. 5.385), therefore patience, etc., are rakkhā. It was said, "And how, bhikkhus, does one protect others while protecting oneself? By patience, non-violence, a mind of loving-kindness, and compassion" (saṃ. ni. 5.385). Āvaraṇa (defense) is the prevention of residences, clothing, houses, etc., and gutti (guard) is the guarding for the purpose of preventing disturbances from thieves, etc. You should well-arrange and establish all of that. Now, showing where that should be arranged, he said, "antojanasmiṃ" (in the inner circle), etc.

Balakāyādīsupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – balakāyo kālaṃ anatikkamitvā bhattavetanasampadānenapi anuggahetabbo. Abhisittakhattiyā bhadrassājāneyyādiratanasampadānenapi upasaṅgaṇhitabbā. Anuyantakhattiyā tesaṃ anurūpayānavāhanasampadānenapi paritosetabbā. Brāhmaṇā annapānavatthādinā deyyadhammena. Gahapatikā bhattabījanaṅgalaphālabalibaddādisampadānena. Tathā nigamavāsino negamā, janapadavāsino ca jānapadā. Samitapāpabāhitapāpā samaṇabrāhmaṇā samaṇaparikkhārasampadānena sakkātabbā. Migapakkhino abhayadānena samassāsetabbā.

The same method applies to "balakāyādisupi" (troops, etc.). However, this is the difference: the troops should be favored by providing food and wages without delay. Consecrated nobles should be favored by providing noble horses, thoroughbreds, and jewels. The tributary nobles should be pleased with conveyances and vehicles appropriate to them. Brahmins should be given gifts of food, drink, clothing, etc., as alms. Householders should be given provisions of food, seeds, plows, shares, oxen, etc. Similarly, the town dwellers are the negamā (townsfolk), and the country dwellers are the jānapadā (countryfolk). Samaṇas and brāhmaṇas, who have stilled evil and abandoned evil, should be honored with provisions of requisites for samaṇas. Birds and beasts should be reassured with the gift of fearlessness.

Vijiteti attano āṇāpavattiṭṭhāne.Adhammakāroti adhammakiriyā.Mā pavattitthāti yathā nappavattati, tathā naṃ paṭipādehīti attho.Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti samitapāpabāhitapāpā.Madappamādāpaṭiviratāti navavidhā mānamadā, pañcasu kāmaguṇesu cittavossajjanasaṅkhātā pamādā ca paṭiviratā.Khantisoracce niviṭṭhāti adhivāsanakhantiyañca suratabhāve ca patiṭṭhitā.Ekamattānanti attano rāgādīnaṃ damanādīhi ekamattānaṃ damenti samenti parinibbāpentīti vuccanti.Kālena kālanti kāle kāle.Abhinivajjeyyāsīti gūthaṃ viya visaṃ viya aggiṃ viya ca suṭṭhu vajjeyyāsi.Samādāyāti surabhikusumadāmaṃ viya amataṃ viya ca sammā ādāya pavatteyyāsi.

Vijite means in his own command-obeying territory. Adhammakāro means an unrighteous act. Mā pavattitthā means deal with it in such a way that it does not occur, this is the meaning. Samaṇabrāhmaṇā means those who have calmed evil, who have banished evil. Madappamādāpaṭiviratā means abstaining from nine kinds of conceit, intoxication, and negligence, which is defined as the abandonment of the mind in the five sense pleasures. Khantisoracce niviṭṭhā means established in forbearance of endurance and gentleness. Ekamattānanti means they are called those who tame, harmonize, and extinguish their own selves, which are one with defilements such as lust, through taming, etc. Kālena kālanti means from time to time. Abhinivajjeyyāsīti means you should thoroughly avoid it like excrement, like poison, and like fire. Samādāyāti means having rightly taken and practiced like a fragrant garland of flowers and like nectar.

Idaṃ kho tāta tanti idaṃ dasavidhaṃ dvādasavidhañca ariyacakkavattivattaṃ nāma.Vattamānassāti pūretvā vattamānassa.Tadahuposathetiādi mahāsudassane vuttaṃ.

Idaṃ kho tāta tanti means this is the ten kinds or twelve kinds of Ariyacakkavattivatta. Vattamānassāti means for one who is acting, having fulfilled it. Tadahuposathetiādi is stated in Mahāsudassana Sutta.

90.Samatenāti attano matiyā.Sudanti nipātamattaṃ.Pasāsatīti anusāsati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – porāṇakaṃ rājavaṃsaṃ rājapaveṇiṃ rājadhammaṃ pahāya attano matimatte ṭhatvā janapadaṃ anusāsatīti. Evamayaṃ maghadevavaṃsassa kaḷārajanako viya daḷhanemivaṃsassa upacchedako antimapuriso hutvā uppanno.Pubbenāparanti pubbakālena sadisā hutvā aparakālaṃ.Janapadā na pabbantīti na vaḍḍhanti.Yathā taṃ pubbakānanti yathā pubbakānaṃ rājūnaṃ pubbe ca pacchā ca sadisāyeva hutvā pabbiṃsu, tathā na pabbanti. Katthaci suññā honti hataviluttā, telamadhuphāṇitādīsu ceva yāgubhattādīsu ca ojāpi parihāyitthāti attho.

90. Samatenāti means according to his own opinion. Sudanti is merely a particle. Pasāsatīti means instructs. This is what is said: having abandoned the ancient royal lineage, the royal tradition, the royal custom, he instructs the country while standing only on his own opinion. Thus, this final man, like Kaḷārajanaka of the Maghadeva lineage, arose as the cutter off of the Daḷhanemi lineage. Pubbenāparanti means the later time, being similar to the earlier time. Janapadā na pabbantīti means the regions do not increase. Yathā taṃ pubbakānanti means just as the former kings increased having been similar both before and after, so they do not increase. In some places, they are empty, destroyed, and plundered, and the flavor in things such as sesame oil, honey, molasses, as well as rice gruel and cooked rice, also diminishes, this is the meaning.

Amaccā pārisajjāti amaccā ceva parisāvacarā ca.Gaṇakamahāmattāti acchiddakādipāṭhagaṇakā ceva mahāamaccā ca.Anīkaṭṭhāti hatthiācariyādayo.Dovārikāti dvārarakkhino.Mantassājīvinoti mantā vuccati paññā, taṃ nissayaṃ katvā ye jīvanti paṇḍitā mahāmattā, tesaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ.

Amaccā pārisajjāti means both ministers and attendants. Gaṇakamahāmattāti means both accountants who know calculations such as acchiddaka and great ministers. Anīkaṭṭhāti means elephant trainers, etc. Dovārikāti means gatekeepers. Mantassājīvinoti means mantā is called wisdom; this is a name for those wise, great ministers who live relying on that.

Āyuvaṇṇādiparihānikathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Discourse on the Decline of Life Span, Beauty, etc.

91.Noca kho adhanānanti balavalobhattā pana adhanānaṃ daliddamanussānaṃ dhanaṃ nānuppadāsi.Nānuppadiyamāneti ananuppadiyamāne, ayameva vā pāṭho.Dāliddiyanti daliddabhāvo.Attanā ca jīvāhīti sayañca jīvaṃ yāpehīti attho.Uddhaggikantiādīsu uparūparibhūmīsu phaladānavasena uddhamaggamassāti uddhaggikā. Saggassa hitā tatrupapattijananatoti sovaggikā. Nibbattaṭṭhāne sukho vipāko assāti sukhavipākā. Suṭṭhu aggānaṃ dibbavaṇṇādīnaṃ dasannaṃ visesānaṃ nibbattanato saggasaṃvattanikā. Evarūpaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ dānaṃ patiṭṭhapetīti attho.

91. No ca kho adhanānanti means but he did not give wealth to the poor, impoverished people, by means of strength, vigor and food. Nānuppadiyamāneti means while not giving; or this is the reading. Dāliddiyanti means poverty. Attanā ca jīvāhīti means may you continue to live by yourself, this is the meaning. In Uddhaggikantiādi, because it gives fruit on the upper and upper levels of the earth, it ascends upwards, therefore, uddhaggikā. It is beneficial for heaven because it generates rebirth there, therefore, sovaggikā. Because its result is happiness in the place where it arises, it is sukhavipākā. Because it produces the ten distinctions of the best, divine beauty, etc., it is saggasaṃvattanikā. He establishes such a right donation, this is the meaning.

92.Pavaḍḍhissatīti vaḍḍhissati bahuṃ bhavissati.Sunisedhaṃ nisedheyyanti suṭṭhu nisiddhaṃ nisedheyyaṃ.Mūlaghaccanti mūlahataṃ.Kharassarenāti pharusasaddena.Paṇavenāti vajjhabheriyā.

92. Pavaḍḍhissatīti means will increase, will become much. Sunisedhaṃ nisedheyyanti means should thoroughly prohibit what is prohibited. Mūlaghaccanti means strike at the root. Kharassarenāti means with a harsh sound. Paṇavenāti means with a war drum.

93.Sīsāninesaṃ chindissāmāti yesaṃ antamaso mūlakamuṭṭhimpi harissāma, tesaṃ tatheva sīsāni chindissāma, yathā koci haṭabhāvampi na jānissati, amhākaṃ dāni kimettha rājāpi evaṃ uṭṭhāya paraṃ māretīti ayaṃ nesaṃ adhippāyo.Upakkamiṃsūti ārabhiṃsu.Panthaduhananti panthaghātaṃ, panthe ṭhatvā corakammaṃ.

93. Sīsāni nesaṃ chindissāmāti means those whose even the smallest handful of roots we will take, we will cut off their heads just like that, so that no one will even know of any violence, now even the king of us gets up and kills others, this is their intention. Upakkamiṃsūti means they began. Panthaduhananti means highway robbery, committing theft while standing on the road.

94.Na hi, devāti so kira cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ rājā saccaṃ devāti mukhapaṭiññāya dinnāya mārāpeti, handāhaṃ musāvādaṃ karomī’’ti, maraṇabhayā ‘‘na hi devā’’ti avoca.

94. Na hi, devāti it is said that he thought, "This king kills based on the verbal promise that he is truly a god, let me tell a lie," out of fear of death he said, "No, gods."

96.Ekidanti etthaidanti nipātamattaṃ, eke sattāti attho.Cārittanti micchācāraṃ.Abhijjhābyāpādāti abhijjhā ca byāpādo ca.Micchādiṭṭhīti natthi dinnantiādikā antaggāhikā paccanīkadiṭṭhi.

96. Ekidanti here idanti is merely a particle, it means some beings. Cārittanti means misconduct. Abhijjhābyāpādāti means covetousness and ill will. Micchādiṭṭhīti means the holding on to extreme views, such as ‘there is no giving,’ which is an opposing view.

101.Adhammarāgoti mātā mātucchā pitucchā mātulānītiādike ayuttaṭṭhāne rāgo.Visamalobhoti paribhogayuttesupi ṭhānesu atibalavalobho.Micchādhammoti purisānaṃ purisesu itthīnañca itthīsu chandarāgo.

101. Adhammarāgoti means lust in inappropriate places, such as for mother, maternal aunt, paternal aunt, maternal uncle's wife, etc. Visamalobhoti means very strong greed even in places suitable for consumption. Micchādhammoti means lustful desire of men for men and of women for women.

Amatteyyatātiādīsu mātu hito matteyyo, tassa bhāvo matteyyatā, mātari sammā paṭipattiyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Tassā abhāvo ceva tappaṭipakkhatā ca amatteyyatā.Apetteyyatādīsupi eseva nayo.Na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyitāti kule jeṭṭhānaṃ apacitiyā nīcavuttiyā akaraṇabhāvo.

Amatteyyatātiādīsu in these, one who is helpful to the mother is matteyyo, the state of being so is matteyyatā, this is a name for proper conduct towards the mother. The absence of that, and opposition to it, is amatteyyatā. The same method applies in Apetteyyatādīsu also. Na kule jeṭṭhāpacāyitāti means the state of not showing respect to elders in the family by behaving humbly.

Dasavassāyukasamayavaṇṇanā
Description of the Period of Ten-Year Lifespans

103.Yaṃ imesanti yasmiṃ samaye imesaṃ.Alaṃpateyyāti patino dātuṃ yuttā.Imāni rasānīti imāni loke aggarasāni.Atibyādippissantīti ativiya dippissanti, ayameva vā pāṭho.Kusalantipi na bhavissatīti kusalanti nāmampi na bhavissati, paññattimattampi na paññāyissatīti attho.Pujjā ca bhavissanti pāsaṃsā cāti pūjārahā ca bhavissanti pasaṃsārahā ca. Tadā kira manussā ‘‘asukena nāma mātā pahatā, pitā pahato, samaṇabrāhmaṇā jīvitā voropitā, kule jeṭṭhānaṃ atthibhāvampi na jānāti, aho puriso’’ti tameva pūjessanti ceva pasaṃsissanti ca.

103. Yaṃ imesanti means at which time of these. Alaṃpateyyāti means fit to give to her husband. Imāni rasānīti means these are the best tastes in the world. Atibyādippissantīti means they will shine exceedingly, or this is the reading. Kusalantipi na bhavissatīti means even the name 'kusala' will not exist, even the designation will not be known, this is the meaning. Pujjā ca bhavissanti pāsaṃsā cāti means they will be worthy of veneration and worthy of praise. It is said that at that time, people will venerate and praise him saying, "So-and-so struck his mother, struck his father, deprived ascetics and brahmins of life, does not even know of the existence of elders in the family, oh, what a man!"

Nabhavissati mātāti vāti ayaṃ mayhaṃ mātāti garucittaṃ na bhavissati. Gehe mātugāmaṃ viya nānāvidhaṃ asabbhikathaṃ kathayamānā agāravupacārena upasaṅkamissanti.Mātucchādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha camātucchāti mātubhaginī.Mātulānīti mātulabhariyā.Ācariyabhariyāti sippāyatanāni sikkhāpakassa ācariyassa bhariyā.Garūnaṃ dārāti cūḷapitumahāpituādīnaṃ bhariyā.Sambhedanti missībhāvaṃ, mariyādabhedaṃ vā.

Na bhavissati mātāti vāti means there will be no respectful thought that this is my mother. They will approach the women as if they were in a house, speaking various kinds of unrefined talk without respect or reverence. The same method applies in Mātucchādīsu also. Here, mātucchāti means mother's sister. Mātulānīti means maternal uncle's wife. Ācariyabhariyāti means the wife of the teacher who instructs in the crafts. Garūnaṃ dārāti means the wives of great-grandfathers, grandfathers, etc. Sambhedanti means mingling, or breach of decorum.

Tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito bhavissatīti balavakopo punappunaṃ uppattivasena paccupaṭṭhito bhavissati. Aparāni dve etasseva vevacanāni. Kopo hi cittaṃ āghātetītiāghāto.Attano ca parassa ca hitasukhaṃ byāpādetītibyāpādo.Manopadūsanatomanopadosoti vuccati.Tibbaṃ vadhakacittanti piyamānassāpi paraṃ māraṇatthāya vadhakacittaṃ. Tassa vatthuṃ dassetuṃmātupi puttamhītiādi vuttaṃ.Māgavikassāti migaluddakassa.

Tibbo āghāto paccupaṭṭhito bhavissatīti means strong anger will be present again and again, arising repeatedly. The other two are synonyms for this. Because anger harms the mind, it is called āghāto. Because it destroys the benefit and happiness of oneself and others, it is called byāpādo. Because of defiling the mind, it is called manopadoso. Tibbaṃ vadhakacittanti means a deadly mind to kill even the one who is dear. To show its basis, mātupi puttamhītiādi is stated. Māgavikassāti means of a deer hunter.

104.Satthantarakappoti satthena antarakappo. Saṃvaṭṭakappaṃ appatvā antarāva lokavināso. Antarakappo ca nāmesa dubbhikkhantarakappo rogantarakappo satthantarakappoti tividho. Tattha lobhussadāya pajāya dubbhikkhantarakappo hoti. Mohussadāya rogantarakappo. Dosussadāya satthantarakappo. Tattha dubbhikkhantarakappena naṭṭhā yebhuyyena pettivisaye upapajjanti. Kasmā? Āhāranikantiyā balavattā. Rogantarakappena naṭṭhā yebhuyyena sagge nibbattanti kasmā? Tesañhi ‘‘aho vataññesaṃ sattānaṃ evarūpo rogo na bhaveyyā’’ti mettacittaṃ uppajjatīti. Satthantarakappena naṭṭhā yebhuyyena niraye upapajjanti. Kasmā? Aññamaññaṃ balavāghātatāya.

104. Satthantarakappoti means a period between eons with weapons. The destruction of the world before reaching the Saṃvaṭṭakappa. And the Antarakappa is of three kinds, namely Dubbhikkhantarakappa, Rogantarakappa, and Satthantarakappa. There, due to the excess of greed, the famine between eons occurs for the population. Due to the excess of delusion, the disease between eons. Due to the excess of hatred, the weapon between eons. There, those who are destroyed by the famine between eons are mostly reborn in the realm of pretas. Why? Because of the strength of the desire for food. Those who are destroyed by the disease between eons are mostly reborn in heaven. Why? Because for them, the thought arises, "Oh, may such a disease not befall other beings." Those who are destroyed by the weapon between eons are mostly reborn in hell. Why? Because of the strong hatred for one another.

Migasaññanti ‘‘ayaṃ migo, ayaṃ migo’’ti saññaṃ.Tiṇhāni satthāni hatthesu pātubhavissantīti tesaṃ kira hatthena phuṭṭhamattaṃ yaṃkiñci antamaso tiṇapaṇṇaṃ upādāya āvudhameva bhavissati.Mā ca mayaṃ kañcīti mayaṃ kañci ekapurisampi jīvitā mā voropayimha.Mā ca amhe kocīti amhepi koci ekapuriso jīvitā mā voropayittha.Yaṃnūna mayanti ayaṃ lokavināso paccupaṭṭhito, na sakkā dvīhi ekaṭṭhāne ṭhitehi jīvitaṃ laddhunti maññamānā evaṃ cintayiṃsu.Vanagahananti vanasaṅkhātehi tiṇagumbalatādīhi gahanaṃ duppavesaṭṭhānaṃ.Rukkhagahananti rukkhehi gahanaṃ duppavesaṭṭhānaṃ.Nadīvidugganti nadīnaṃ antaradīpādīsu duggamanaṭṭhānaṃ.Pabbatavisamanti pabbatehi visamaṃ, pabbatesupi vā visamaṭṭhānaṃ.Sabhāgāyissantīti yathā ahaṃ jīvāmi diṭṭhā bho sattā, tvampi tathā jīvasīti evaṃ sammodanakathāya attanā sabhāge karissanti.

Migasaññanti means the perception, "This is a deer, this is a deer." Tiṇhāni satthāni hatthesu pātubhavissantīti means whatever they touch with their hands, even a blade of grass or a leaf, will become a weapon. Mā ca mayaṃ kañcīti means may we not deprive any single person of life. Mā ca amhe kocīti means may not any single person deprive us of life. Yaṃnūna mayanti means thinking that this destruction of the world is imminent, and it is not possible to obtain life if two remain in one place, they thought thus. Vanagahananti means a dense, impenetrable place full of grass, bushes, vines, etc., called a forest. Rukkhagahananti means a dense, impenetrable place full of trees. Nadīvidugganti means a difficult place in the middle of rivers, such as islands. Pabbatavisamanti means uneven with mountains, or an uneven place even on mountains. Sabhāgāyissantīti means they will make others their companions by saying in a friendly way, "Just as I live, having seen you, O beings, may you also live."

Āyuvaṇṇādivaḍḍhanakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Discourse on the Increase of Life Span, Beauty, etc.

105.Āyatanti mahantaṃ.Pāṇātipātā virameyyāmāti pāṇātipātato osakkeyyāma. Pāṇātipātaṃ virameyyāmātipi sajjhāyanti, tattha pāṇātipātaṃ pajaheyyāmāti attho.Vīsativassāyukāti mātāpitaro pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā, puttā kasmā vīsativassāyukā ahesunti khettavisuddhiyā. Tesañhi mātāpitaro sīlavanto jātā. Iti sīlagabbhe vaḍḍhitattā imāya khettavisuddhiyā dīghāyukā ahesuṃ. Ye panettha kālaṃ katvā tattheva nibbattā, te attanova sīlasampattiyā dīghāyukā ahesuṃ.

105. Āyatanti means long. Pāṇātipātā virameyyāmāti means we should abstain from taking life. They also recite pāṇātipātaṃ virameyyāmāti, there the meaning is, we should abandon the taking of life. Vīsativassāyukāti, why were the sons of parents who abstained from taking life only twenty years old? Because of the purity of the field. For their parents were born virtuous. Thus, because they were raised in a womb of virtue, they were long-lived because of this purity of the field. Those who died here and were reborn there were long-lived due to their own virtuous accomplishment.

Assāmāti bhaveyyāma.Cattārīsavassāyukātiādayo koṭṭhāsā adinnādānādīhi paṭiviratānaṃ vasena veditabbā.

Assāmāti means may we be. The sections Cattārīsavassāyukātiādayo should be understood in terms of abstaining from theft, etc.

Saṅkharājauppattivaṇṇanā
Description of the Origin of Saṅkharāja

106.Icchāti mayhaṃ bhattaṃ dethāti evaṃ uppajjanakataṇhā.Anasananti na asanaṃ avipphārikabhāvo kāyālasiyaṃ, bhattaṃ bhuttānaṃ bhattasammadapaccayā nipajjitukāmatājanako kāyadubbalabhāvoti attho.Jarāti pākaṭajarā.Kukkuṭasampātikāti ekagāmassa chadanapiṭṭhato uppatitvā itaragāmassa chadanapiṭṭhe patanasaṅkhāto kukkuṭasampāto. Etāsu atthīti kukkuṭasampātikā. ‘‘Kukkuṭasampādikā’’tipi pāṭho, gāmantarato gāmantaraṃ kukkuṭānaṃ padasā gamanasaṅkhāto kukkuṭasampādo etāsu atthīti attho. Ubhayampetaṃ ghananivāsataṃyeva dīpeti.Avīci maññe phuṭo bhavissatīti avīcimahānirayo viya nirantarapūrito bhavissati.

106. Icchāti means the craving that arises, saying, "Give me food." Anasananti means not eating, a state of inactivity, laziness of the body, it means a weakness of the body that generates a desire to lie down due to the exhaustion from eating food. Jarāti means obvious old age. Kukkuṭasampātikāti means that those villages have Kukkuṭasampātikā, which is defined as chickens flying from the roofs of one village to the roofs of another village. ‘‘Kukkuṭasampādikā’’tipi is also a reading, it means that those villages have Kukkuṭasampāda, which is defined as chickens going on foot from one village to another. Both of these indicate only dense habitation. Avīci maññe phuṭo bhavissatīti means it will be continuously filled like the Avīci great hell.

107.‘‘Asītivassasahassāyukesu, bhikkhave, manussesumetteyyonāma bhagavā loke uppajjissatī’’ti na vaḍḍhamānakavasena vuttaṃ. Na hi buddhā vaḍḍhamāne āyumhi nibbattanti, hāyamāne pana nibbattanti. Tasmā yadā taṃ āyu vaḍḍhitvā asaṅkheyyataṃ patvā puna hāyamānaṃ asītivassasahassakāle ṭhassati, tadā uppajjissatīti attho.Pariharissatīti idaṃ pana parivāretvā vicarantānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ.Yūpoti pāsādo.Raññā mahāpanādena kārāpitoti raññā hetubhūtena tassatthāya sakkena devarājena vissakammadevaputtaṃ pesetvā kārāpito. Pubbe kira dve pitāputtā naḷakārā paccekabuddhassa naḷehi ca udumbarehi ca paṇṇasālaṃ kārāpetvā taṃ tattha vāsāpetvā catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahiṃsu. Te kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbattā. Tesu pitā devalokeyeva aṭṭhāsi. Putto devalokā cavitvā surucissa rañño deviyā sumedhāya kucchismiṃ nibbatto. Mahāpanādo nāma kumāro ahosi. So aparabhāge chattaṃ ussāpetvā mahāpanādo nāma rājā jāto. Athassa puññānubhāvena sakko devarājā vissakammadevaputtaṃ rañño pāsādaṃ karohīti pahiṇi so tassa pāsādaṃ nimmini pañcavīsatiyojanubbedhaṃ sattaratanamayaṃ satabhūmakaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya jātake vuttaṃ –

107. "In the time of humans with a lifespan of eighty thousand years, bhikkhus, a Blessed One named Metteyya will arise in the world" is not stated in terms of increasing. For Buddhas do not arise when the lifespan is increasing, but they do arise when it is decreasing. Therefore, when that lifespan increases to an incalculable amount and then decreases again and stands at eighty thousand years, then he will arise, this is the meaning. Pariharissatīti this, however, is stated in terms of those who go around surrounded. Yūpoti means a palace. Raññā mahāpanādena kārāpitoti means caused to be built by King Mahāpanāda, with Sakka sending Vissakammadevaputta for that purpose. It is said that in the past two father and son reed makers had a leaf hut made for a Paccekabuddha with reeds and fig trees, and having had him live there, they attended to him with the four requisites. Having died, they were reborn in the deva world. Of those, the father remained in the deva world itself. The son, having passed away from the deva world, was born in the womb of Queen Sumedhā of King Suruci. He became a prince named Mahāpanāda. Later, having raised an umbrella, he became a king named Mahāpanāda. Then, by the power of his merit, Sakka, the king of the gods, sent Vissakammadevaputta to build a palace for the king. He built him a palace with a height of twenty-five yojanas, made of seven jewels, with a hundred stories. Referring to which, it is said in the Jātaka:

‘‘Panādo nāma so rājā, yassa yūpo suvaṇṇayo;

‘‘Panādo nāma so rājā, yassa yūpo suvaṇṇayo;
Tiriyaṃ soḷasubbedho, uddhamāhu sahassadhā.

Sahassakaṇḍo satageṇḍu, dhajālu haritāmayo;

Sahassakaṇḍo satageṇḍu, dhajālu haritāmayo;
Anaccuṃ tattha gandhabbā, cha sahassāni sattadhā.

Evametaṃ tadā āsi, yathā bhāsasi bhaddaji;

Evametaṃ tadā āsi, yathā bhāsasi bhaddaji;
Sakko ahaṃ tadā āsiṃ, veyyāvaccakaro tavā’’ti. (jā. 5.3.42);

So rājā tattha yāvatāyukaṃ vasitvā kālaṃ katvā devaloke nibbatti. Tasmiṃ devaloke nibbatte so pāsādo mahāgaṅgāya anusotaṃ pati. Tassa dhurasopānasammukhaṭṭhāne payāgapatiṭṭhānaṃ nāma nagaraṃ māpitaṃ. Thupikāsammukhaṭṭhāne koṭigāmo nāma. Aparabhāge amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle so naḷakāradevaputto devalokato cavitvā manussapathe bhaddajiseṭṭhi nāma hutvā satthu santike pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So nāvāya gaṅgātaraṇadivase bhikkhusaṅghassa taṃ pāsādaṃ dassetīti vatthu vitthāretabbaṃ. Kasmā panesa pāsādo na antarahitoti? Itarassa ānubhāvā. Tena saddhiṃ puññaṃ katvā devaloke nibbattakulaputto anāgate saṅkho nāma rājā bhavissati. Tassa paribhogatthāya so pāsādo uṭṭhahissati, tasmā na antarahitoti.

That king, having lived there for his entire lifespan, passed away and was reborn in the deva world. Upon his rebirth in that deva world, that palace floated downstream along the Mahāgaṅgā River. At the location facing the stairway of the palace, a city named Payāgapatiṭṭhāna was built. At the location facing the spire, a village named Koṭigāma was established. Later, in the time of our Blessed One, that Naḷakāradevaputta, having passed away from the deva world, became a wealthy man named Bhaddaji in the human realm and, having gone forth in the presence of the Teacher, attained arahantship. The story should be elaborated that he showed that palace to the Saṅgha of monks on the day of crossing the Gaṅgā River by boat. Why, then, did this palace not disappear? Because of the power of the other one. The son of a good family, having performed meritorious deeds with him and been reborn in the deva world, will become a king named Saṅkha in the future. That palace will arise for his use; therefore, it will not disappear.

108.Ussāpetvāti taṃ pāsādaṃ uṭṭhāpetvā.Ajjhāvasitvāti tattha vasitvā.Taṃ datvā vissajjitvāti taṃ pāsādaṃ dānavasena datvā nirapekkho pariccāgavasena ca vissajjitvā. Kassa ca evaṃ datvāti? Samaṇādīnaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavanibbakayācakānaṃ dānaṃ datvā’’ti. Kathaṃ pana so ekaṃ pāsādaṃ bahūnaṃ dassatīti? Evaṃ kirassa cittaṃ uppajjissati ‘‘ayaṃ pāsādo vippakiriyatū’’ti. So khaṇḍakhaṇḍaso vippakirissati. So taṃ alaggamānova hutvā ‘‘yo yattakaṃ icchati, so tattakaṃ gaṇhatū’’ti dānavasena vissajjissati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘dānaṃ datvā metteyyassa bhagavato…pe… viharissatī’’ti. Ettakena bhagavā vaṭṭagāmikusalassa anusandhiṃ dasseti.

108. Ussāpetvā: Having raised up that palace. Ajjhāvasitvā: Having lived there. Taṃ datvā vissajjitvā: Having given that palace as a gift and, being without attachment, having relinquished it as a donation. To whom did he give it in this way? To ascetics and others. Therefore, he said, "Having given a gift to ascetics, brahmins, the poor, wanderers, beggars, and supplicants." But how would he give one palace to many? It seems that such a thought would arise in him: "May this palace be scattered." It would be scattered into fragments. He, without clinging to it, would relinquish it as a gift, saying, "Whoever wants as much as they want, let them take that much." Therefore, it was said, "Having given a gift, to the Buddha Metteyya…pe…will live." With this much, the Blessed One shows the connection to the merit of Vaṭṭagāmika.

109.Idāni vivaṭṭagāmikusalassa anusandhiṃ dassento punaattadīpā, bhikkhave, viharathātiādimāha.

109. Now, showing the connection to the merit of Vivaṭṭagāmika, he says again, "Be ye dwelling, monks, with yourselves as an island," and so on.

Bhikkhuno āyuvaṇṇādivaḍḍhanakathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Discourse on Increasing a Monk's Life, Beauty, etc.

110.Idaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno āyusminti bhikkhave yaṃ vo ahaṃ āyunāpi vaḍḍhissathāti avocaṃ, tattha idaṃ bhikkhuno āyusmiṃ idaṃ āyukāraṇanti attho. Tasmā tumhehi āyunā vaḍḍhitukāmehi ime cattāro iddhipādā bhāvetabbāti dasseti.

110. "This, monks, is for a monk's life": Monks, what I said to you, "You will increase in life," there, this is for a monk's life, this is the cause of life; this is the meaning. Therefore, he shows that these four bases of power (iddhipāda) should be cultivated by those who wish to increase in life.

Vaṇṇasminti yaṃ vo ahaṃ vaṇṇenapi vaḍḍhissathāti avocaṃ, idaṃ tattha vaṇṇakāraṇaṃ. Sīlavato hi avippaṭisārādīnaṃ vasena sarīravaṇṇopi kittivasena guṇavaṇṇopi vaḍḍhati. Tasmā tumhehi vaṇṇena vaḍḍhitukāmehi sīlasampannehi bhavitabbanti dasseti.

"In beauty": What I said to you, "You will increase in beauty," this is the cause of beauty there. For a virtuous person, both bodily beauty because of freedom from remorse, etc., and beauty of qualities as renown increase. Therefore, he shows that you should be accomplished in virtue, desiring to increase in beauty.

Sukhasminti yaṃ vo ahaṃ sukhenapi vaḍḍhissathāti avocaṃ, idaṃ tattha vivekajaṃ pītisukhādinānappakārakaṃ jhānasukhaṃ. Tasmā tumhehi sukhena vaḍḍhitukāmehi imāni cattāri jhānāni bhāvetabbāni.

"In happiness": What I said to you, "You will increase in happiness," there, this is the happiness of jhāna, which is of various kinds, such as joy and happiness born of seclusion. Therefore, these four jhānas should be cultivated by those who wish to increase in happiness.

Bhogasminti yaṃ vo ahaṃ bhogenapi vaḍḍhissathāti avocaṃ, ayaṃ so appamāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ appaṭikūlatāvaho sukhasayanādi ekādasānisaṃso sabbadisāvipphāritabrahmavihārabhogo. Tasmā tumhehi bhogena vaḍḍhitukāmehi ime brahmavihārā bhāvetabbā.

"In wealth": What I said to you, "You will increase in wealth," this is that brahmavihāra wealth, which brings non-opposition to countless beings, the eleven blessings beginning with happy sleep, and is spread in all directions. Therefore, these brahmavihāras should be cultivated by those who wish to increase in wealth.

Balasminti yaṃ vo ahaṃ balenapi vaḍḍhissathāti avocaṃ, idaṃ āsavakkhayapariyosāne uppannaṃ arahattaphalasaṅkhātaṃ balaṃ. Tasmā tumhehi balena vaḍḍhitukāmehi arahattappattiyā yogo karaṇīyo.

"In strength": What I said to you, "You will increase in strength," this is the strength reckoned as the fruit of arahantship, arising at the end of the destruction of the āsavas. Therefore, effort should be made for the attainment of arahantship by those who wish to increase in strength.

Yathayidaṃ, bhikkhave, mārabalanti yathā idaṃ devaputtamāramaccumārakilesamārānaṃ balaṃ duppasahaṃ durabhisambhavaṃ, evaṃ aññaṃ loke ekabalampi na samanupassāmi. Tampi balaṃ idameva arahattaphalaṃ pasahati abhibhavati ajjhottharati. Tasmā ettheva yogo karaṇīyoti dasseti.

"Just as this, monks, is the strength of Māra": Just as this strength of Māra, the son of the gods, the Māra of death, and the Māra of the defilements, is difficult to endure and overcome, so too, I do not see even one other strength in the world comparable to it. Even that strength, this very fruit of arahantship, overcomes, subdues, and surpasses. Therefore, effort should be made in this very thing, he shows.

Evamidaṃ puññanti evaṃ idaṃ lokuttarapuññampi yāva āsavakkhayā pavaḍḍhatīti vivaṭṭagāmikusalānusandhiṃ niṭṭhapento arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Suttapariyosāne vīsati bhikkhusahassāni arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Caturāsīti pāṇasahassāni amatapānaṃ piviṃsūti.

"Thus this merit": Thus, this supramundane merit also increases until the destruction of the āsavas. Concluding the connection to the merit of Vivaṭṭagāmika, he concluded the teaching with the pinnacle of arahantship. At the end of the sutta, twenty thousand monks attained arahantship. Eighty-four thousand beings drank the deathless drink.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

From the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, commentary to the Dīgha Nikāya,

4. Aggaññasuttavaṇṇanā

4. Explanation of the Aggañña Sutta

Vāseṭṭhabhāradvājavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja

111.Evaṃme sutanti aggaññasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā –pubbārāme migāramātupāsādeti ettha ayaṃ anupubbikathā. Atīte satasahassakappamatthake ekā upāsikā padumuttaraṃ bhagavantaṃ nimantetvā buddhappamukhassa bhikkhusatasahassassa dānaṃ datvā bhagavato pādamūle nipajjitvā ‘‘anāgate tumhādisassa buddhassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā homī’’ti patthanaṃ akāsi. Sā kappasatasahassaṃ devesu ceva manussesu ca saṃsaritvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle bhaddiyanagare meṇḍakaseṭṭhiputtassa dhanañcayaseṭṭhino gehe sumanadeviyā kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi. Jātakāle tassā visākhāti nāmaṃ akaṃsu. Sā yadā bhagavā bhaddiyanagaraṃ āgamāsi, tadā pañcadāsisatehi saddhiṃ bhagavato paccuggamanaṃ katvā paṭhamadassanamhiyeva sotāpannā ahosi.

111. "Thus I have heard": The Aggañña Sutta. There, this is the explanation of the obvious words: "At Pubbārāma, in the palace of Migāramātā": Here, this is the connected story. In the past, hundreds of thousands of aeons ago, a female lay follower invited the Blessed One Padumuttara and, having given alms to a hundred thousand monks with the Buddha at their head, she prostrated herself at the feet of the Blessed One and made the aspiration, "In the future, may I be the chief supporter of a Buddha like you." Having wandered for a hundred thousand aeons among gods and humans, in the time of our Blessed One, in the city of Bhaddiya, she took rebirth in the womb of Sumanadevī, the wife of Dhanañcaya-seṭṭhi, the son of Meṇḍaka-seṭṭhi. At the time of her birth, they gave her the name Visākhā. When the Blessed One came to Bhaddiyanagara, she went out to meet the Blessed One with five hundred female attendants and, at the very first sight, became a Sotāpanna.

Aparabhāge sāvatthiyaṃ migāraseṭṭhiputtassa puṇṇavaḍḍhanakumārassa gehaṃ gatā. Tattha naṃ migāraseṭṭhi mātuṭṭhāne ṭhapesi. Tasmā migāramātāti vuccati. Patikulaṃ gacchantiyā cassā pitā mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ nāma kārāpesi. Tasmiṃ piḷandhane catasso vajiranāḷiyo upayogaṃ agamaṃsu, muttānaṃ ekādasa nāḷiyo, pavāḷassa dvāvīsati nāḷiyo, maṇīnaṃ tettiṃsa nāḷiyo. Iti etehi ca aññehi ca sattahi ratanehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sīse paṭimukkaṃ yāva pādapiṭṭhiyā bhassati. Pañcannaṃ hatthīnaṃ balaṃ dhārayamānāva naṃ itthī dhāretuṃ sakkoti. Sā aparabhāge dasabalassa aggupaṭṭhāyikā hutvā taṃ pasādhanaṃ vissajjetvā navahi koṭīhi bhagavato vihāraṃ kārayamānā karīsamatte bhūmibhāge pāsādaṃ kāresi. Tassa uparibhūmiyaṃ pañca gabbhasatāni honti, heṭṭhimabhūmiyaṃ pañcāti gabbhasahassappaṭimaṇḍito ahosi. Sā ‘‘suddhapāsādova na sobhatī’’ti taṃ parivāretvā pañca duvaḍḍhagehasatāni, pañca cūḷapāsādasatāni, pañca dīghasālasatāni ca kārāpesi. Vihāramaho catūhi māsehi niṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi.

Later, she went to the house of Puṇṇavaḍḍhana-kumāra, the son of Migāra-seṭṭhi, in Sāvatthi. There, Migāra-seṭṭhi placed her in the position of mother. Therefore, she is called Migāramātā. When she went to her husband's family, her father had a great jeweled ornament made, called Mahālatāpiḷandhana. In that ornament, four diamond tubes were used, eleven tubes of pearls, twenty-two tubes of coral, and thirty-three tubes of jewels. Thus, it was completed with these and other seven kinds of gems. When she put it on her head, it slipped down to the instep of her feet. Only a woman who could bear the strength of five elephants could wear it. Later, having become the chief supporter of the Ten-Powered One, she gave away that ornament and, having a monastery built for the Blessed One with nine crores, she had a palace built on an area of land equal to a karīsa. On its upper floor, there were five hundred apartments; on the lower floor, there were also five hundred, so it was adorned with a thousand apartments. Thinking, "A mere palace is not beautiful," she had it surrounded by five hundred double-storied houses, five hundred small palaces, and five hundred long halls. The monastery festival was completed in four months.

Mātugāmattabhāve ṭhitāya visākhāya viya aññissā buddhasāsane dhanapariccāgo nāma natthi, purisattabhāve ṭhitassa anāthapiṇḍikassa viya aññassāti. So hi catupaṇṇāsakoṭiyo vissajjetvā sāvatthiyā dakkhiṇabhāge anurādhapurassa mahāvihārasadise ṭhāne jetavanamahāvihāraṃ nāma kāresi. Visākhā sāvatthiyā pācīnabhāge uttaradeviyā vihārasadise ṭhāne pubbārāmaṃ nāma kāresi. Bhagavā imesaṃ dvinnaṃ kulānaṃ anukampāya sāvatthiṃ nissāya viharanto imesu dvīsu vihāresu nibaddhavāsaṃ vasi. Ekaṃ antovassaṃ jetavane vasati, ekaṃ pubbārāme. Tasmiṃ samaye pana bhagavā pubbārāme viharati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbārāme migāramātupāsāde’’ti.

There is no one else in the Buddha's dispensation like Visākhā, who, remaining in the state of womanhood, made such a donation of wealth, and no one else like Anāthapiṇḍika, who, remaining in the state of manhood. For he, having spent fifty-four crores, had the Jetavana Mahāvihāra built in a place similar to the Mahāvihāra of Anurādhapura in the southern part of Sāvatthi. Visākhā had the Pubbārāma built in a place similar to the Uttara-devī monastery in the eastern part of Sāvatthi. Out of compassion for these two families, the Blessed One, dwelling in dependence on Sāvatthi, resided constantly in these two monasteries. He spent one rainy season at Jetavana and one at Pubbārāma. At that time, however, the Blessed One was dwelling at Pubbārāma. Therefore, it was said, "At Pubbārāma, in the palace of Migāramātā."

Vāseṭṭhabhāradvājāti vāseṭṭho ca sāmaṇero bhāradvājo ca.Bhikkhūsu parivasantīti te neva titthiyaparivāsaṃ vasanti, na āpattiparivāsaṃ. Aparipuṇṇavassattā pana bhikkhubhāvaṃ patthayamānā vasanti. Tenevāha ‘‘bhikkhubhāvaṃ ākaṅkhamānā’’ti. Ubhopi hete udiccabrāhmaṇamahāsālakule nibbattā, cattālīsa cattālīsa koṭivibhavā tiṇṇaṃ vedānaṃ pāragū majjhimanikāyevāseṭṭhasuttaṃsutvā saraṇaṃ gatā,tevijjasuttaṃsutvā pabbajitvā imasmiṃ kāle bhikkhubhāvaṃ ākaṅkhamānā parivasanti.Abbhokāse caṅkamatīti uttaradakkhiṇena āyatassa pāsādassa puratthimadisābhāge pāsādacchāyāyaṃ yantarajjūhi ākaḍḍhiyamānaṃ ratanasatubbedhaṃ suvaṇṇaagghikaṃ viya anilapathe vidhāvantīhi chabbaṇṇāhi buddharasmīhi sobhamāno aparāparaṃ caṅkamati.

Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja: Vāseṭṭha, the novice, and Bhāradvāja. Dwelling in association with the monks: They are dwelling desiring the state of monkhood, however, they are not observing the probationary period for heretics, nor the probationary period for offenses. However, due to not having completed the full rains residence, they are dwelling desiring the state of monkhood. Therefore, he said, "Desiring the state of monkhood." Both of them were born into great wealthy brahmin families from the northern region, possessing forty crores each, were experts in the three Vedas, having heard the Vāseṭṭha Sutta in the Majjhima Nikāya, went for refuge, having heard the Tevijja Sutta, went forth, and at this time are observing the probationary period desiring the state of monkhood. Walking up and down in the open: On the eastern side of the palace, which extends from north to south, in the shade of the palace, shining with the six-colored Buddha rays that flicker in the sky like a golden yoke drawn by celestial ropes, he walks back and forth.

113.Anucaṅkamiṃsūti añjaliṃ paggayha onatasarīrā hutvā anuvattamānā caṅkamiṃsu.Vāseṭṭhaṃ āmantesīti so tesaṃ paṇḍitataro gahetabbaṃ vissajjetabbañca jānāti, tasmā taṃ āmantesi.Tumhe khvatthāti tumhe kho attha.Brāhmaṇajaccāti, brāhmaṇajātikā.Brāhmaṇakulīnāti brāhmaṇesu kulīnā kulasampannā.Brāhmaṇakulāti brāhmaṇakulato, bhogādisampannaṃ brāhmaṇakulaṃ pahāyāti attho.Na akkosantīti dasavidhena akkosavatthunā na akkosanti.Na paribhāsantīti nānāvidhāya paribhavakathāya na paribhāsantīti attho. Iti bhagavā ‘‘brāhmaṇā ime sāmaṇere akkosanti paribhāsantī’’ti jānamānova pucchati. Kasmā? Ime mayā apucchitā paṭhamataraṃ na kathessanti, akathite kathā na samuṭṭhātīti kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthāya.Tagghāti ekaṃsavacane nipāto, ekaṃseneva no, bhante, brāhmaṇā akkosanti paribhāsantīti vuttaṃ hoti.Attarūpāyāti attano anurūpāya.Paripuṇṇāyāti yathāruci padabyañjanāni āropetvā āropetvā paripūritāya.No aparipuṇṇāyāti antarā aṭṭhapitāya nirantaraṃ pavattāya.

113. Anucaṅkamiṃsu: They walked up and down following him, with their hands folded in añjali and their bodies bowed. Addressed Vāseṭṭha: He is more learned than them and knows what should be taken up and what should be relinquished; therefore, he addressed him. "You, I understand": You, I understand. "By birth brahmins": Of brahmin birth. "Of brahmin lineage": Of brahmin lineage, well-born in brahmin families. "From brahmin families": From brahmin families, having left behind a brahmin family endowed with wealth and so on, is the meaning. "Do not revile": They do not revile with the ten kinds of grounds for reviling. "Do not reproach": They do not reproach with various kinds of reproaching speech, is the meaning. Thus, the Blessed One, knowing that "Brahmins revile and reproach these novices," asks. Why? "If I do not ask them, they will not speak first; if it is not spoken, a conversation will not arise," for the purpose of initiating a conversation. "Indeed": A particle used in affirmation, indeed, brahmins do not revile and reproach us, venerable sir, is what was said. "Appropriate": Corresponding to oneself. "Complete": Having filled it completely by adding and adding words and phrases as desired. "Not incomplete": Not interrupted, continuously flowing.

yathā kathaṃ pana voti pucchati. Te ācikkhantābrāhmaṇā bhantetiādimāhaṃsu.

"How then do they": He asks. Explaining, they said, "Brahmins, venerable sir," and so on.

seṭṭho vaṇṇoti jātigottādīnaṃ paññāpanaṭṭhāne brāhmaṇova seṭṭhoti dassenti.Hīnā aññe vaṇṇāti itare tayo vaṇṇā hīnā lāmakāti vadanti.Sukkoti paṇḍaro.Kaṇhoti kāḷako.Sujjhantīti jātigottādīnaṃ paññāpanaṭṭhāne sujjhanti.Brahmuno puttāti mahābrahmuno puttā.Orasā mukhato jātāti ure vasitvā mukhato nikkhantā, ure katvā saṃvaḍḍhitāti vā orasā.Brahmajāti brahmato nibbattā.Brahmanimmitāti brahmunā nimmitā.Brahmadāyādāti brahmuno dāyādā.Hīnamattha vaṇṇaṃ ajjhupagatāti hīnaṃ vaṇṇaṃ ajjhupagatā attha.Muṇḍakesamaṇaketi nindantā jigucchantā vadanti, na muṇḍakamattañceva samaṇamattañca sandhāya.Ibbheti gahapatike.Kaṇheti kāḷake.Bandhūti mārassa bandhubhūte mārapakkhike.Pādāpacceti mahābrahmuno pādānaṃ apaccabhūte pādato jāteti adhippāyo.

"The best class": In the place of declaring caste and clan, they show that only brahmins are the best. "Other classes are inferior": The other three classes are inferior, base, they say. "White": Pale. "Black": Dark. "Are purified": In the place of declaring caste and clan, they are purified. "Sons of Brahmā": Sons of Mahābrahmā. "Born of his mouth, his offspring": Having dwelt in his chest and come forth from his mouth, or fostered having made them in his chest, are his offspring. "Brahmajā": Born of Brahmā. "Brahmanimmitā": Created by Brahmā. "Brahmadāyādā": Heirs of Brahmā. "Have approached a low class": They have approached a low class. "Bald ascetics": Reviling and despising, they say, not referring merely to baldness or being an ascetic. "Commoners": Householders. "Black ones": Dark ones. "Relatives": Relatives of Māra, belonging to Māra's party. "Offspring of his feet": Having the idea that they are offspring of the feet of Mahābrahmā, born from his feet.

114.‘‘Taggha vo, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇā porāṇaṃ assarantā evamāhaṃsū’’ti etthavoti nipātamattaṃ, sāmivacanaṃ vā, tumhākaṃ brāhmaṇāti attho.Porāṇanti porāṇakaṃ aggaññaṃ lokuppatticariyavaṃsaṃ.Assarantāti assaramānā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, ekaṃsena vo, vāseṭṭha, brāhmaṇā porāṇaṃ lokuppattiṃ ananussarantā ajānantā evaṃ vadantīti. ‘‘Dissanti kho panā’’ti evamādi tesaṃ laddhibhindanatthāya vuttaṃ. Tatthabrāhmaṇiyoti brāhmaṇānaṃ puttappaṭilābhatthāya āvāhavivāhavasena kulaṃ ānītā brāhmaṇiyo dissanti. Tā kho panetā aparena samayena utuniyopi honti, sañjātapupphāti attho.Gabbhiniyoti sañjātagabbhā.Vijāyamānāti puttadhītaro janayamānā.Pāyamānāti dārake thaññaṃ pāyantiyo.Yonijāva samānāti brāhmaṇīnaṃ passāvamaggena jātā samānā.Evamāhaṃsūti evaṃ vadanti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo…pe… brahmadāyādā’’ti. Yadi pana nesaṃ taṃ saccavacanaṃ siyā, brāhmaṇīnaṃ kucchi mahābrahmassa uro bhaveyya, brāhmaṇīnaṃ passāvamaggo mahābrahmuno mukhaṃ bhaveyya, na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘te ca brahmūnañceva abbhācikkhantī’’tiādi.

114. "Indeed, Vāseṭṭha, the brahmins, not remembering the ancient [lore], said thus": Here, "vo" is merely a particle, or a word of possession, meaning "your brahmins." "Porāṇaṃ": Ancient, the foremost, the origin of the world, the lineage of conduct. "Assarantā": Not remembering. This is what was said: "Certainly, Vāseṭṭha, your brahmins, not remembering the ancient origin of the world, not knowing, say thus." "Do they appear?" and so on, was said to break their view. There, "Brāhmaṇiyo": Brahmin women, brought into the family by way of marriage for the sake of obtaining children for the brahmins, are seen. Those women, however, at another time, are also subject to menstruation, meaning they have produced flowers. "Gabbhiniyo": Pregnant. "Vijāyamānā": Giving birth to sons and daughters. "Pāyamānā": Giving breast milk to infants. "Born of the womb": Born through the birth passage of brahmin women. "Evamāhaṃsū": They say thus. How? "The brahmin is the best class…pe…heirs of Brahmā." If that were their true statement, the wombs of brahmin women would be the chest of Mahābrahmā, the birth passage of brahmin women would be the mouth of Mahābrahmā, but this should not be seen thus. Therefore, he said, "They also falsely accuse Brahmā," and so on.

Catuvaṇṇasuddhivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Purity in the Four Classes

cattārome, vāseṭṭha, vaṇṇātiādimāha.Akusalasaṅkhātāti akusalāti saṅkhātā akusalakoṭṭhāsabhūtā vā. Esa nayo sabbattha.Na alamariyāti ariyabhāve asamatthā.Kaṇhāti pakatikāḷakā.Kaṇhavipākāti vipākopi nesaṃ kaṇho dukkhoti attho.Khattiyepi teti khattiyamhipi te.Ekacceti ekasmiṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.

"Cattārome, vāseṭṭha, vaṇṇā" etc. was said first. "Akusalasaṅkhātā": known as akusala, or being part of the akusala. This method applies everywhere. "Na alamariyā": not capable of the state of ariya. "Kaṇhā": naturally dark. "Kaṇhavipākā": their result is also dark, meaning painful. "Khattiyepi te": even among Khattiyas, they are. "Ekacce": in one. This method applies everywhere.

Sukkāti nikkilesabhāvena paṇḍarā.Sukkavipākāti vipākopi nesaṃ sukko sukhoti attho.

"Sukkā": white due to being without defilements. "Sukkavipākā": their result is also white, meaning happiness.

116.Ubhayavokiṇṇesu vattamānesūti ubhayesu vokiṇṇesu missībhūtesu hutvā vattamānesu. Katamesu ubhayesūti? Kaṇhasukkesu dhammesu viññugarahitesu ceva viññuppasatthesu ca.Yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṃsūti ettha etesu kaṇhasukkadhammesu vattamānāpi brāhmaṇā yadetaṃ evaṃ vadanti ‘‘brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo’’tiādi.Taṃ nesaṃ viññū nānujānantīti ye loke paṇḍitā, te nānumodanti, na pasaṃsantīti attho.Taṃ kissa hetu? Imesañhi vāseṭṭhātiādimhi ayaṃ saṅkhepattho. Yaṃ vuttaṃ nānujānantīti, taṃ kasmāti ce? Yasmā imesaṃ catunnaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ yo bhikkhu arahaṃ…pe… sammadaññā vimutto, so tesaṃ aggamakkhāyati, te ca na evarūpā. Tasmā nesaṃ viññū nānujānanti.

116."Ubhayavokiṇṇesu vattamānesū": existing mixed up in both. In which both? In dark and white (Kaṇhasukka) qualities, in those despised by the wise and praised by the wise. "Yadettha brāhmaṇā evamāhaṃsū": here, even while existing in these dark and white qualities, the brahmins say this: "The brahmin is the best caste," etc. "Taṃ nesaṃ viññū nānujānantī": those who are wise in the world do not approve of that, they do not praise it, is the meaning. "Taṃ kissa hetu? Imesañhi vāseṭṭhā": this is the meaning in brief of the passage beginning with "Taṃ kissa hetu? Imesañhi vāseṭṭhā". If asked why they do not approve, it is because whichever bhikkhu of these four castes is an arahant…pe… liberated by perfect knowledge, he is said to be the foremost of them, and they are not of such a kind. Therefore, the wise do not approve of them.

Arahantiādipadesu cettha kilesānaṃ ārakattādīhi kāraṇehiarahaṃ.Āsavānaṃ khīṇattākhīṇāsavo. Satta sekkhā puthujjanakalyāṇakā ca brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasanti nāma. Ayaṃ pana vutthavāsotivusitavā.Catūhi maggehi catūsu saccesu parijānanādikaraṇīyaṃ kataṃ assātikatakaraṇīyo.Kilesabhāro ca khandhabhāro ca ohito assātiohitabhāro.Ohitoti ohārito. Sundaro attho, sako vā attho sadattho, anuppatto sadattho etenātianuppattasadattho.Bhavasaṃyojanaṃ vuccati taṇhā, sā parikkhīṇā assātiparikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano. Sammadaññā vimuttoti sammā hetunā kāraṇena jānitvā vimutto.Janetasminti jane etasmiṃ, imasmiṃ loketi attho.Diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañcāti idhattabhāve ca parattabhāve.

"Arahaṃ": In the passages beginning with "Arahaṃ", here, due to reasons such as being far from the kilesas, he is an "arahaṃ." Because his āsavas are destroyed, he is "khīṇāsavo". Seven trainees (sekha) and ordinary virtuous people are said to live the brahma-life. But this one has lived the life, therefore "vusitavā." He has done what needs to be done by completely understanding the four noble truths (sacca) through the four paths (magga), therefore "katakaraṇīyo." Because the burden of kilesas and the burden of khandhas are put down, therefore "ohitabhāro." "Ohito" means put down. Because he has attained the beautiful meaning, or his own meaning, the true meaning, therefore "anuppattasadattho." Craving is called the bond of existence (bhavasaṃyojana), and that is exhausted in him, therefore "parikkhīṇabhavasaṃyojano." "Sammadaññā vimutto": liberated having known by the right cause. "Janetasmiṃ": in this person, in this world, is the meaning. "Diṭṭhe ceva dhamme abhisamparāyañcā": in this existence and in the future existence.

117.Anantarāti antaravirahitā, attano kulena sadisāti attho.Anuyuttāti vasavattino.Nipaccakāranti mahallakatarā nipaccakāraṃ dassenti. Daharatarā abhivādanādīni karonti. Tatthasāmīcikammanti taṃtaṃvattakaraṇādi anucchavikakammaṃ.

117."Anantarā": without interval, similar to their own clan, is the meaning. "Anuyuttā": following. "Nipaccakāraṃ": the elders show respect. The younger ones do things like paying homage. There, "sāmīcikammaṃ": is the appropriate action such as performing the respective duties.

118.Niviṭṭhāti abhiniviṭṭhā acalaṭṭhitā. Kassa pana evarūpā saddhā hotīti? Sotāpannassa. So hi niviṭṭhasaddho asinā sīse chejjamānepi buddho abuddhoti vā, dhammo adhammoti vā, saṅgho asaṅghoti vā na vadati. Patiṭṭhitasaddho hoti sūrambaṭṭho viya.

118."Niviṭṭhā": firmly fixed, unshakeable. But who has such faith? A Sotāpanna. He has unwavering faith, even if his head is cut off with a sword, he would not say the Buddha is not a Buddha, or the Dhamma is not the Dhamma, or the Saṅgha is not the Saṅgha. He has established faith, like Sūrambaṭṭha.

So kira satthu dhammadesanaṃ sutvā sotāpanno hutvā gehaṃ agamāsi. Atha māro dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ buddharūpaṃ māpetvā tassa gharadvāre ṭhatvā ‘‘satthā āgato’’ti sāsanaṃ pahiṇi. Sūrambaṭṭho cintesi ‘‘ahaṃ idāneva satthu santike dhammaṃ sutvā āgato, kiṃ nu kho bhavissatī’’ti upasaṅkamitvā satthusaññāya vanditvā aṭṭhāsi. Māro āha – ‘‘ambaṭṭha, yaṃ te mayā ‘rūpaṃ aniccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ aniccanti kathitaṃ, taṃ dukkathitaṃ. Anupadhāretvāva hi mayā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā tvaṃ ‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ…pe… viññāṇaṃ nicca’nti gaṇhāhī’’ti. So cintesi – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ yaṃ buddhā anupadhāretvā apaccakkhaṃ katvā kiñci katheyyuṃ, addhā ayaṃ mayhaṃ vicchindajananatthaṃ māro āgato’’ti. Tato naṃ ‘‘tvaṃ mārosī’’ti āha. So musāvādaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. ‘‘Āma mārosmī’’ti paṭijānāti. ‘‘Kasmā āgatosī’’ti? Tava saddhācālanatthanti āha. ‘‘Kaṇha pāpima, tvaṃ tāva eko tiṭṭha, tādisānaṃ mārānaṃ satampi sahassampi satasahassampi mama saddhaṃ cāletuṃ asamatthaṃ, maggena āgatasaddhā nāma thirā silāpathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitasineru viya acalā hoti, kiṃ tvaṃ etthā’’ti accharaṃ pahari. So ṭhātuṃ asakkonto tattheva antaradhāyi. Evarūpaṃ saddhaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘niviṭṭhā’’ti.

It is said that having heard the Buddha's teaching, he became a Sotāpanna and went home. Then Māra, having created a form of the Buddha adorned with the thirty-two major marks, stood at the door of his house and sent a message, "The Teacher has arrived." Sūrambaṭṭha thought, "I have just come from the Teacher's presence after hearing the Dhamma, what could this be?" Approaching, he paid homage with the perception of the Teacher and stood aside. Māra said, "Ambaṭṭha, what was said by me, 'Rūpa is impermanent…pe… Viññāṇa is impermanent,' that was badly spoken. I said it without properly considering. Therefore, you should take it that 'Rūpa is permanent…pe… Viññāṇa is permanent.'" He thought, "This is impossible, that Buddhas would say something without considering or directly knowing it. Surely this Māra has come to destroy me." Then he said to him, "You are Māra." He could not lie. He admitted, "Yes, I am Māra." "Why have you come?" He said, "To shake your faith." "Dark Evil One, you stand alone! Even a hundred, a thousand, a hundred thousand Māras like you are not able to shake my faith. The faith that has come by the Path is stable, like Mount Sineru established on solid rock. What are you here for?" He uttered an insult. Unable to stand, he disappeared right there. This was said with reference to such faith, "niviṭṭhā."

Mūlajātāpatiṭṭhitāti maggamūlassa sañjātattā tena maggamūlena patiṭṭhitā.Daḷhāti thirā.Asaṃhāriyāti sunikhātaindakhīlo viya kenaci cāletuṃ asakkuṇeyyā.Tassetaṃ kallaṃ vacanāyāti tassa ariyasāvakassa yuttametaṃ vattuṃ. Kinti? ‘‘Bhagavatomhi putto oraso’’ti evamādi. So hi bhagavantaṃ nissāya ariyabhūmiyaṃ jātotibhagavato putto.Ure vasitvā mukhato nikkhantadhammaghosavasena maggaphalesu patiṭṭhitattāoraso mukhato jāto.Ariyadhammato jātattā ariyadhammena ca nimmitattādhammajo dhammanimmito.Navalokuttaradhammadāyajjaṃ arahatītidhammadāyādo. Taṃ kissa hetūti yadetaṃ ‘‘bhagavatomhi putto’’ti vatvā ‘‘dhammajo dhammanimmito’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ kasmāti ce? Idānissa atthaṃ dassentotathāgatassa hetantiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘dhammakāyo itipī’’ti kasmā tathāgato ‘‘dhammakāyo’’ti vutto? Tathāgato hi tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ hadayena cintetvā vācāya abhinīhari. Tenassa kāyo dhammamayattā dhammova. Iti dhammo kāyo assātidhammakāyo.Dhammakāyattā evabrahmakāyo.Dhammo hi seṭṭhatthena brahmāti vuccati.Dhammabhūtoti dhammasabhāvo. Dhammabhūtattā evabrahmabhūto.

"Mūlajātā patiṭṭhitā": because it has arisen from the root of the Path, it is established by that root of the Path. "Daḷhā": firm. "Asaṃhāriyā": unable to be moved by anyone, like a deeply planted post. "Tassetaṃ kallaṃ vacanāyā": it is fitting for that ariyasāvaka to say. What? "I am the Lord's own son," etc. Because he is born in the ariya plane relying on the Lord, he is "bhagavato putto." Because he is established in the fruits of the path by the sound of the Dhamma that has come out of the mouth, having resided in the breast, he is "oraso mukhato jāto." Because he is born of the ariya Dhamma and created by the ariya Dhamma, he is "dhammajo dhammanimmito." He deserves the inheritance of the new supramundane Dhamma, therefore he is a "dhammadāyādo." "Taṃ kissa hetū": why is it said "I am the Lord's son," and "born of the Dhamma, created by the Dhamma"? Now, showing its meaning, he said "tathāgatassa heta"ntiādimāha. There, why is the Tathāgata called "dhammakāyo"? The Tathāgata contemplates the Tipitaka, the word of the Buddha, in his heart and expresses it with his voice. Therefore his body is of Dhamma, is Dhamma itself. Thus, because the Dhamma is his body, he is "dhammakāyo." Because he is a Dhammakāya, he is also a "brahmakāyo." Dhamma is called Brahma in the sense of excellence. "Dhammabhūto": of the nature of Dhamma. Because he is of the nature of Dhamma, he is also "brahmabhūto."

119.Ettāvatā bhagavā seṭṭhacchedakavādaṃ dassetvā idāni aparenapi nayena seṭṭhacchedakavādameva dassetuṃhoti kho so, vāseṭṭha, samayotiādimāha. Tattha saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakathābrahmajālevitthāritāva.Itthattaṃ āgacchantīti itthabhāvaṃ manussattaṃ āgacchanti.Tedha honti manomayāti te idha manussaloke nibbattamānāpi opapātikā hutvā maneneva nibbattāti manomayā. Brahmaloke viya idhāpi nesaṃ pītiyeva āhārakiccaṃ sādhetītipītibhakkhā.Eteneva nayenasayaṃpabhādīnipi veditabbānīti.

119.Having shown the doctrine of superiority by selection (seṭṭhacchedakavāda) to this extent, now, to show the doctrine of superiority by selection in another way, he said "hoti kho so, vāseṭṭha, samayo"tiādimāha. There, the account of the world contracting and expanding is already explained in detail in the "Brahmajāla." "Itthattaṃ āgacchantī": they come to this state, to human existence. "Tedha honti manomayā": even being born here in the human world, they are born spontaneously, created by mind, therefore, they are manomayā. Just like in the Brahma world, joy itself fulfills their need for food, therefore "pītibhakkhā." In this very way, "sayaṃpabhā" etc. should be understood.

Rasapathavipātubhāvavaṇṇanā
Description of the appearance of the rasa-earth

120.Ekodakībhūtanti sabbaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ ekodakameva bhūtaṃ.Andhakāroti tamo.Andhakāratimisāti cakkhuviññāṇuppattinivāraṇena andhabhāvakaraṇaṃ bahalatamaṃ.Samatanīti patiṭṭhahi samantato patthari.Payasotattassāti tattassa khīrassa.Vaṇṇasampannāti vaṇṇena sampannā. Kaṇikārapupphasadiso hissā vaṇṇo ahosi.Gandhasampannāti gandhena sampannā dibbagandhaṃ vāyati.Rasasampannāti rasena sampannā pakkhittadibbojā viya hoti.Khuddamadhunti khuddakamakkhikāhi katamadhuṃ.Aneḷakanti niddosaṃ makkhikaṇḍakavirahitaṃ.Lolajātikoti lolasabhāvo. Atītānantarepi kappe loloyeva.Ambhoti acchariyajāto āha.Kimevidaṃ bhavissatīti vaṇṇopissā manāpo gandhopi, raso panassā kīdiso bhavissatīti attho. Yo tattha uppannalobho, so rasapathaviṃ aṅguliyā sāyi, aṅguliyā gahetvā jivhagge ṭhapesi.

120."Ekodakībhūtaṃ": the entire world system became just one water. "Andhakāro": darkness. "Andhakāratimisā": dense darkness that prevents the arising of eye-consciousness and causes blindness. "Samatanī": established, spread everywhere. "Payaso tattassā": of hot milk. "Vaṇṇasampannā": endowed with color. Its color was like that of a kanikara flower. "Gandhasampannā": endowed with fragrance, it emits a divine scent. "Rasasampannā": endowed with taste, it is like divine food that has been placed there. "Khuddamadhuṃ": honey made by small bees. "Aneḷakaṃ": faultless, without bee stings. "Lolajātiko": of a greedy nature. Even in the past endless eons, he was greedy. "Ambho": an exclamation of wonder. "Kimevidaṃ bhavissati": this color is pleasing, and its scent too, but what will its taste be like, is the meaning. Whoever arose there with greed, tasted the rasa-earth with his finger, took it with his finger and placed it on the tip of his tongue.

Acchādesīti jivhagge ṭhapitamattā satta rasaharaṇīsahassāni pharitvā manāpā hutvā tiṭṭhati.Taṇhā cassa okkamīti tattha cassa taṇhā uppajji.

"Acchādesī": just as it is placed on the tip of the tongue, it permeates seven thousand taste receptors and stands there pleasingly. "Taṇhā cassa okkamī": and craving arose in him there.

Candimasūriyādipātubhāvavaṇṇanā
Description of the appearance of the moon, sun, etc.

121.Āluppakārakaṃ upakkamiṃsu paribhuñjitunti ālopaṃ katvā piṇḍe piṇḍe chinditvā paribhuñjituṃ ārabhiṃsu.Candimasūriyāti candimā ca sūriyo ca.Pāturahesunti pātubhaviṃsu.

121."Āluppakārakaṃ upakkamiṃsu paribhuñjituṃ": they began to make mouthfuls, cutting them into pieces, and consuming them. "Candimasūriyā": the moon and the sun. "Pāturahesuṃ": appeared.

Ko pana tesaṃ paṭhamaṃ pātubhavi, ko kasmiṃ vasati, kassa kiṃ pamāṇaṃ, ko upari, ko sīghaṃ gacchati, kati nesaṃ vīthiyo, kathaṃ caranti, kittake ṭhāne ālokaṃ karontīti? Ubho ekato pātubhavanti. Sūriyo paṭhamataraṃ paññāyati. Tesañhi sattānaṃ sayaṃpabhāya antarahitāya andhakāro ahosi. Te bhītatasitā ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vatassa sace āloko pātubhaveyyā’’ti cintayiṃsu. Tato mahājanassa sūrabhāvaṃ janayamānaṃ sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ uṭṭhahi. Tenevassa sūriyoti nāmaṃ ahosi. Tasmiṃ divasaṃ ālokaṃ katvā atthaṅgate puna andhakāro ahosi. Te ‘‘bhaddakaṃ vatassa sace añño āloko uppajjeyyā’’ti cintayiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ chandaṃ ñatvāva candamaṇḍalaṃ uṭṭhahi. Tenevassa candoti nāmaṃ ahosi.

Which of them appeared first, where does each reside, what is its size, which is above, which goes faster, how many paths do they have, how do they travel, how much area do they illuminate? Both appear together. The sun is perceived earlier. For those beings, when the self-illumination disappeared, there was darkness. Being frightened and thirsty, they thought, "It would be good if light would appear." Then, the solar mandala arose, creating the state of the sun for the great mass of people. Therefore, its name became Sūriya. When it set after illuminating the day, there was darkness again. They thought, "It would be good if another light would arise." Then, knowing their desire, the lunar mandala arose. Therefore, its name became Canda.

Tesu cando antomaṇivimāne vasati. Taṃ bahi rajatena parikkhittaṃ. Ubhayampi sītalameva ahosi. Sūriyo antokanakavimāne vasati. Taṃ bāhiraṃ phalikaparikkhittaṃ hoti. Ubhayampi uṇhameva.

Among them, the moon resides in a mansion of precious stones inside. It is surrounded by silver outside. Both are cool. The sun resides in a mansion of gold inside. It is surrounded by crystal outside. Both are hot.

Pamāṇato cando ujukaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojano. Parimaṇḍalato tīhi yojanehi ūnadiyaḍḍhasatayojano. Sūriyo ujukaṃ paññāsayojano, parimaṇḍalato diyaḍḍhasatayojano.

In size, the moon is directly forty-nine yojanas. In circumference, it is one hundred and forty-seven yojanas. The sun is directly fifty yojanas, and in circumference, it is one hundred and fifty yojanas.

Cando heṭṭhā, sūriyo upari, antarā nesaṃ yojanaṃ hoti. Candassa heṭṭhimantato sūriyassa uparimantato yojanasataṃ hoti.

The moon is below, the sun is above, and the distance between them is one yojana. From the bottom edge of the moon to the top edge of the sun is one hundred yojanas.

Cando ujukaṃ saṇikaṃ gacchati, tiriyaṃ sīghaṃ. Dvīsu passesu nakkhattatārakā gacchanti. Cando dhenu viya vacchaṃ taṃ taṃ nakkhattaṃ upasaṅkamati. Nakkhattāni pana attano ṭhānaṃ na vijahanti. Sūriyassa ujukaṃ gamanaṃ sīghaṃ, tiriyaṃ gamanaṃ dandhaṃ. So kāḷapakkhauposathato pāṭipadadivase yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ candamaṇḍalaṃ ohāya gacchati. Atha cando lekhā viya paññāyati. Pakkhassa dutiyāya satasahassanti evaṃ yāva uposathadivasā satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ ohāya gacchati. Atha cando anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā uposathadivase paripuṇṇo hoti. Puna pāṭipadadivase yojanānaṃ satasahassaṃ dhāvitvā gaṇhāti. Dutiyāya satasahassanti evaṃ yāva uposathadivasā satasahassaṃ satasahassaṃ dhāvitvā gaṇhāti. Atha cando anukkamena hāyitvā uposathadivase sabbaso na paññāyati. Candaṃ heṭṭhā katvā sūriyo upari hoti. Mahatiyā pātiyā khuddakabhājanaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ pidhīyati. Majjhanhike gehacchāyā viya candassa chāyā na paññāyati. So chāyāya apaññāyamānāya dūre ṭhitānaṃ divā padīpo viya sayampi na paññāyati.

The moon travels slowly directly, but quickly in a curve. Stars and constellations travel on two sides. The moon, like a cow approaching its calf, approaches each constellation. But the constellations do not leave their place. The sun's direct movement is fast, its curved movement is slow. From the Kāḷapakkhauposatha to the first day of the waxing moon, it moves away from the lunar mandala by one hundred thousand yojanas. Then the moon appears like a line. On the second day of the pakkhā, it moves away by one hundred thousand yojanas, and so on until the uposatha day, it moves away by one hundred thousand yojanas each day. Then the moon gradually grows and becomes full on the uposatha day. Again, on the first day of the waning moon, it runs and catches up by one hundred thousand yojanas. On the second day, one hundred thousand yojanas, and so on until the uposatha day, it runs and catches up by one hundred thousand yojanas each day. Then the moon gradually diminishes and does not appear at all on the uposatha day. The sun is above, with the moon below. The lunar mandala is covered like a small bowl by a large bowl. Like the shadow of a house at midday, the shadow of the moon does not appear. Because the shadow does not appear, it is not seen, like a lamp during the day for those standing far away.

Kati nesaṃ vīthiyoti ettha pana ajavīthi, nāgavīthi, govīthīti tisso vīthiyo honti. Tattha ajānaṃ udakaṃ paṭikūlaṃ hoti, hatthināgānaṃ manāpaṃ. Gunnaṃ sītuṇhasamatāya phāsu hoti. Tasmā yaṃ kālaṃ candimasūriyā ajavīthiṃ āruhanti, tadā devo ekabindumpi na vassati. Yadā nāgavīthiṃ ārohanti, tadā bhinnaṃ viya nabhaṃ paggharati. Yadā govīthiṃ ārohanti, tadā utusamatā sampajjati. Candimasūriyā chamāse sineruto bahi nikkhamanti, chamāse anto vicaranti. Te hi āsāḷhamāse sinerusamīpena vicaranti. Tato pare dve māse nikkhamitvā bahi vicarantā paṭhamakattikamāse majjhena gacchanti. Tato cakkavāḷābhimukhā gantvā tayo māse cakkavāḷasamīpena caritvā puna nikkhamitvā citramāse majjhena gantvā tato dve māse sinerubhimukhā pakkhanditvā puna āsāḷhe sinerusamīpena caranti.

How many paths do they have? There are three paths: the goat path (ajavīthi), the nāga path (nāgavīthi), and the cow path (govīthi). There, water is unfavorable for goats but pleasing to elephant-nāgas. For cows, a balance of hot and cold is comfortable. Therefore, when the moon and sun ascend the goat path, the deva does not rain even a single drop. When they ascend the nāga path, the sky pours down as if broken. When they ascend the cow path, there is a balance of seasons. The moon and sun go outside Mount Sineru for six months and travel inside for six months. They travel near Mount Sineru in Āsāḷha month. Then, after going out for two months, while traveling outside, they go through the middle in the first Kattika month. Then, after going towards the edge of the world (cakkavāḷa) and traveling near the edge of the world for three months, they go out again, and after going through the middle in Citta month, then after rushing towards Mount Sineru for two months, they again travel near Sineru in Āsāḷha.

Kittake ṭhāne ālokaṃ karontīti? Ekappahārena tīsu dīpesu ālokaṃ karonti. Kathaṃ? Imasmiñhi dīpe sūriyuggamanakālo pubbavidehe majjhanhiko hoti, uttarakurūsu atthaṅgamanakālo, aparagoyāne majjhimayāmo. Pubbavidehamhi uggamanakālo uttarakurūsu majjhanhiko, aparagoyāne atthaṅgamanakālo, idha majjhimayāmo. Uttarakurūsu uggamanakālo aparagoyāne majjhanhiko, idha atthaṅgamanakālo, pubbavidehe majjhimayāmo. Aparagoyānadīpe uggamanakālo idha majjhanhiko, pubbavidehe atthaṅgamanakālo, uttarakurūsu majjhimayāmoti.

How much area do they illuminate? They illuminate three continents at once. How? In this continent, when it is sunrise, it is midday in Pubbavideha, sunset in Uttarakuru, and midnight in Aparagoyāna. When it is sunrise in Pubbavideha, it is midday in Uttarakuru, sunset in Aparagoyāna, and midnight here. When it is sunrise in Uttarakuru, it is midday in Aparagoyāna, sunset here, and midnight in Pubbavideha. When it is sunrise in Aparagoyāna continent, it is midday here, sunset in Pubbavideha, and midnight in Uttarakuru.

Nakkhattānitārakarūpānīti kattikādinakkhattāni ceva sesatārakarūpāni ca candimasūriyehi saddhiṃyeva pāturahesuṃ.Rattindivāti tato sūriyatthaṅgamanato yāva aruṇuggamanā ratti, aruṇuggamanato yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā divāti evaṃ rattindivā paññāyiṃsu. Atha pañcadasa rattiyo aḍḍhamāso, dve aḍḍhamāsā māsoti evaṃ māsaḍḍhamāsā paññāyiṃsu. Atha cattāro māsā utu, tayo utū saṃvaccharoti evaṃ utusaṃvaccharā paññāyiṃsu.

Nakkhattāni tārakarūpānī means the asterisms beginning with Krittika and the remaining forms of stars appeared together with the moon and sun. Rattindivā means that from the setting of the sun until the rising of the dawn is night, and from the rising of the dawn until the setting of the sun is day; thus, night and day were distinguished. Then, fifteen nights constitute half a month (aḍḍhamāsa), and two half-months constitute a month (māsa); thus, months and half-months were distinguished. Then, four months constitute a season (utu), and three seasons constitute a year (saṃvacchara); thus, seasons and years were distinguished.

122.Vaṇṇavevaṇṇatā cāti vaṇṇassa vivaṇṇabhāvo.Tesaṃ vaṇṇātimānapaccayāti tesaṃ vaṇṇaṃ ārabbha uppannaatimānapaccayā.Mānātimānajātikānanti punappunaṃ uppajjamānātimānasabhāvānaṃ.Rasāya pathaviyāti sampannarasattā rasāti laddhanāmāya pathaviyā.Anutthuniṃsūti anubhāsiṃsu.Aho rasanti aho amhākaṃ madhurarasaṃ antarahitaṃ.Aggaññaṃ akkharanti lokuppattivaṃsakathaṃ.Anusarantīti anugacchanti.

122. Vaṇṇavevaṇṇatā cā means the state of being discolored from the original color. Tesaṃ vaṇṇātimānapaccayā means because of the excessive pride that arose concerning their complexion. Mānātimānajātikāna means those who are by nature repeatedly prone to excessive pride. Rasāya pathaviyā means of the earth that had acquired the name "rasā" due to being full of delicious flavor. Anutthuniṃsū means they proclaimed. Aho rasa means "Ah, our delicious flavor is not lost!" Aggaññaṃ akkhara means the account of the origin and lineage of the world. Anusarantī means following.

Bhūmipappaṭakapātubhāvādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Appearance of Earth-cakes, etc.

123.Evameva pāturahosīti ediso hutvā uṭṭhahi, antovāpiyaṃ udake chinne sukkhakalalapaṭalaṃ viya ca uṭṭhahi.

123. Evameva pāturahosī means it arose having such a form, and it rose up like a layer of dried scum when the water in an inner pond has been drained.

124.Padālatāti ekā madhurarasā bhaddālatā.Kalambukāti nāḷikā.Ahu vata noti madhurarasā vata no padālatā ahosi.Ahāyi vata noti sā no etarahi antarahitāti.

124. Padālatā means a beautiful creeper with a sweet taste. Kalambukā means water lilies. Ahu vata no means "Indeed, for us there was a sweet creeper." Ahāyi vata no means "Indeed, it has now disappeared for us."

125.Akaṭṭhapākoti akaṭṭheyeva bhūmibhāge uppanno.Akaṇoti nikkuṇḍako.Athusoti nitthuso.Sugandhoti dibbagandhaṃ vāyati.Taṇḍulapphaloti suparisuddhaṃ paṇḍaraṃ taṇḍulameva phalati.Pakkaṃ paṭivirūḷhanti sāyaṃ gahitaṭṭhānaṃ pāto pakkaṃ hoti, puna virūḷhaṃ paṭipākatikameva gahitaṭṭhānaṃ na paññāyati.Nāpadānaṃ paññāyatīti alāyitaṃ hutvā anūnameva paññāyati.

125. Akaṭṭhapāko means that which ripens in uncultivated land. Akaṇo means without husks. Athuso means without chaff. Sugandho means it emits a divine fragrance. Taṇḍulapphalo means it produces pure white rice as its fruit. Pakkaṃ paṭivirūḷha means that which is harvested in the evening is ripe in the morning, and when regrown, the place where it was harvested is not evident, as it is naturally regenerated. Nāpadānaṃ paññāyatī means the harvested place appears undiminished, as if nothing has been taken.

Itthipurisaliṅgādipātubhāvavaṇṇanā
Description of the Appearance of Male and Female Characteristics, etc.

126.Itthiyā cāti yā pubbe manussakāle itthī, tassa itthiliṅgaṃ pātubhavati, pubbe purisassa purisaliṅgaṃ. Mātugāmo nāma hi purisattabhāvaṃ labhanto anupubbena purisattapaccaye dhamme pūretvā labhati. Puriso itthattabhāvaṃ labhanto kāmesumicchācāraṃ nissāya labhati. Tadā pana pakatiyā mātugāmassa itthiliṅgaṃ, purisassa purisaliṅgaṃ pāturahosi.Upanijjhāyatanti upanijjhāyantānaṃ olokentānaṃ.Pariḷāhoti rāgapariḷāho.Seṭṭhinti chārikaṃ.Nibbuyhamānāyāti niyyamānāya.

126. Itthiyā cā means that for the one who was a female in the previous human existence, the female characteristics appeared, and for the one who was a male, the male characteristics appeared. For, a woman, when attaining the state of being male, gradually fulfills the conditions for being male. A man, when attaining the state of being female, attains it based on misconduct in sexual pleasures. But then, by nature, the female characteristics appeared for the female, and the male characteristics for the male. Upanijjhāyata means for those who were observing and gazing intently. Pariḷāho means the burning of lust. Seṭṭhi means residue. Nibbuyhamānāyā means being taken out.

127.Adhammasammatanti taṃ paṃsukhipanādi adhammoti sammataṃ.Tadetarahi dhammasammatanti taṃ idāni dhammoti sammataṃ, dhammoti taṃ gahetvā vicaranti. Tathā hi ekaccesu jānapadesu kalahaṃ kurumānā itthiyo ‘‘tvaṃ kasmā kathesi? Yā gomayapiṇḍamattampi nālatthā’’ti vadanti.Pātabyatanti sevitabbataṃ.Sannidhikārakanti sannidhiṃ katvā.Apadānaṃ paññāyitthāti chinnaṭṭhānaṃ ūnameva hutvā paññāyittha.Saṇḍasaṇḍāti ekekasmiṃ ṭhāne kalāpabandhā viya gumbagumbā hutvā.

127. Adhammasammata means that which is considered unrighteous, such as picking up rags from dust heaps. Tadetarahi dhammasammata means that which is now considered righteous; they treat it as righteous and conduct themselves accordingly. For instance, in some rural areas, women who are quarreling say, "Why are you talking? You couldn't even get as much as a lump of cow dung." Pātabyata means the state of being worthy of being served. Sannidhikāraka means having made a hoard. Apadānaṃ paññāyitthā means the harvested place appeared diminished, as if something had been taken. Saṇḍasaṇḍā means in each place, like clusters tied together, forming clumps.

128.Mariyādaṃṭhapeyyāmāti sīmaṃ ṭhapeyyāma.Yatra hi nāmāti yo hi nāma.Pāṇinā pahariṃsūti tayo vāre vacanaṃ agaṇhantaṃ pāṇinā pahariṃsu.Tadagge khoti taṃ aggaṃ katvā.

128. Mariyādaṃ ṭhapeyyāmā means let us establish boundaries. Yatra hi nāmā means indeed. Pāṇinā pahariṃsū means they struck with their hands those who did not accept their words after three times. Tadagge kho means making that the foremost.

Mahāsammatarājavaṇṇanā
Description of Mahā Sammata Rāja

130.Khīyitabbaṃ khīyeyyāti pakāsetabbaṃ pakāseyya khipitabbaṃ khipeyya, hāretabbaṃ hāreyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Yo nesaṃ sattoti yo tesaṃ satto. Ko pana soti? Amhākaṃ bodhisatto.Sālīnaṃ bhāgaṃ anupadassāmāti mayaṃ ekekassa khettato ambaṇambaṇaṃ āharitvā tuyhaṃ sālibhāgaṃ dassāma, tayā kiñci kammaṃ na kātabbaṃ, tvaṃ amhākaṃ jeṭṭhakaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhāti.

130. Khīyitabbaṃ khīyeyyā means what should be proclaimed, he should proclaim; what should be reproached, he should reproach; what should be driven away, he should drive away. Yo nesaṃ satto means who is devoted to them. Who is that? Our Bodhisatta. Sālīnaṃ bhāgaṃ anupadassāmā means we will bring an ambaṇa from each field and give you a share of rice; you need not do any work; you should stay in the position of the eldest for us.

131.Akkharaṃ upanibbattanti saṅkhā samaññā paññatti vohāro uppanno.Khattiyo khattiyotveva dutiyaṃ akkharanti na kevalaṃ akkharameva, te panassa khettasāmino tīhi saṅkhehi abhisekampi akaṃsu.Rañjetīti sukheti pineti.Aggaññenāti agganti ñātena, agge vā ñātena lokuppattisamaye uppannena abhinibbatti ahosīti.

131. Akkaraṃ upanibbatta means designation, convention, concept, and usage arose. Khattiyo khattiyotveva dutiyaṃ akkhara means not only the term, but the owners of the fields also consecrated him with three consecrations. Rañjetī means delights and pleases. Aggaññenā means with what is known as foremost, or with what is primarily known, an arising occurred at the time of the origin of the world.

Brāhmaṇamaṇḍalādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Brāhmaṇa Group, etc.

132.Vītaṅgārāvītadhūmāti pacitvā khāditabbābhāvato vigatadhūmaṅgārā.Pannamusalāti koṭṭetvā pacitabbābhāvato patitamusalā.Ghāsamesamānāti bhikkhācariyavasena yāgubhattaṃ pariyesantā.Tamenaṃ manussā disvāti te ete manussā passitvā.Anabhisambhuṇamānāti asahamānā asakkontā.Ganthe karontāti tayo vede abhisaṅkharontā ceva vācentā ca.Acchantīti vasanti, ‘‘acchentī’’tipi pāṭho. Esevattho.Hīnasammatanti ‘‘mante dhārenti mante vācentī’’ti kho, vāseṭṭha, idaṃ tena samayena hīnasammataṃ.Tadetarahi seṭṭhasammatanti taṃ idāni ‘‘ettake mante dhārenti ettake mante vācentī’’ti seṭṭhasammataṃ jātaṃ.Brāhmaṇamaṇḍalassāti brāhmaṇagaṇassa.

132. Vītaṅgārā vītadhūmā means without embers and smoke because there was no need to cook and eat. Pannamusalā means with fallen pestles because there was no need to pound and cook. Ghāsamesamānā means seeking rice and porridge in the manner of alms-seekers. Tamenaṃ manussā disvā means those people, having seen them. Anabhisambhuṇamānā means unable to tolerate or endure. Ganthe karontā means compiling and reciting the three Vedas. Acchantī means they dwell; "acchentī" is also a reading. The meaning is the same. Hīnasammata means, "Those who memorize the mantras and recite the mantras," this, Vāseṭṭha, was considered inferior at that time. Tadetarahi seṭṭhasammata means that now it has become highly regarded, "They memorize so many mantras, they recite so many mantras." Brāhmaṇamaṇḍalassā means of the group of Brahmins.

133.Methunaṃ dhammaṃ samādāyāti methunadhammaṃ samādiyitvā.Visukammantepayojesunti gorakkha vāṇijakammādike vissute uggate kammante payojesuṃ.

133. Methunaṃ dhammaṃ samādāyā means having engaged in sexual activity. Visukammante payojesu means they engaged in various well-known and prominent occupations such as cattle-rearing and trade.

134.Suddā suddāti tena luddācārakammakhuddācārakammunā suddaṃ suddaṃ lahuṃ lahuṃ kucchitaṃ gacchanti, vinassantīti attho.Ahu khoti hoti kho.

134. Suddā suddā means by that wretched conduct and petty deeds, they go wretchedly, quickly, despicably; that is, they perish. Ahu kho means it is indeed so.

135.Sakaṃdhammaṃ garahamānoti na setacchattaṃ ussāpanamattena sujjhituṃ sakkāti evaṃ attano khattiyadhammaṃ nindamāno. Esa nayo sabbattha. ‘‘Imehi kho, vāseṭṭha, catūhi maṇḍalehī’’ti iminā imaṃ dasseti ‘‘samaṇamaṇḍalaṃ nāma visuṃ natthi, yasmā pana na sakkā jātiyā sujjhituṃ, attano attano sammāpaṭipattiyā visuddhi hoti. Tasmā imehi catūhi maṇḍalehi samaṇamaṇḍalassa abhinibbatti hoti. Imāni maṇḍalāni samaṇamaṇḍalaṃ anuvattanti, anuvattantāni ca dhammeneva anuvattanti, no adhammena. Samaṇamaṇḍalañhi āgamma sammāpaṭipattiṃ pūretvā suddhiṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti.

135. Sakaṃ dhammaṃ garahamāno means disparaging one’s own Khattiya Dhamma, thinking that one cannot be purified merely by raising a white umbrella. This method applies everywhere. “Imehi kho, vāseṭṭha, catūhi maṇḍalehī” indicates this: “There is no separate Samaṇa group, because one cannot be purified by birth; purity comes from one's own right practice. Therefore, the Samaṇa group arises from these four groups. These groups follow the Samaṇa group, and they follow it by Dhamma, not by non-Dhamma. For, having come to the Samaṇa group and fulfilled right practice, they attain purity.”

Duccaritādikathāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Discourse on Misconduct, etc.

136.Idāni yathājātiyā na sakkā sujjhituṃ, sammāpaṭipattiyāva sujjhanti, tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karontokhattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭhāti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthamicchādiṭṭhikammasamādānahetūti micchādiṭṭhivasena samādinnakammahetu, micchādiṭṭhikammassa vā samādānahetu.

136. Now, making clear the point that one cannot be purified by birth, but only by right practice, the Blessed One began the discourse, khattiyopi kho, vāseṭṭhā. Here, micchādiṭṭhikammasamādānahetū means because of undertaking actions in accordance with wrong view, or because of the undertaking of actions based on wrong view.

137.Dvayakārīti kālena kusalaṃ karoti, kālena akusalanti evaṃ ubhayakārī.Sukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī hotīti ekakkhaṇe ubhayavipākadānaṭṭhānaṃ nāma natthi. Yena pana akusalaṃ bahuṃ kataṃ hoti, kusalaṃ mandaṃ, so taṃ kusalaṃ nissāya khattiyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā nibbattati. Atha naṃ akusalakammaṃ kāṇampi karoti khujjampi pīṭhasappimpi. So rajjassa vā anaraho hoti, abhisittakāle vā evaṃbhūto bhoge paribhuñjituṃ na sakkoti. Aparassa maraṇakāle dve balavamallā viya te dvepi kusalākusalakammāni upaṭṭhahanti. Tesu akusalaṃ balavataraṃ hoti, taṃ kusalaṃ paṭibāhitvā tiracchānayoniyaṃ nibbattāpeti. Kusalakammampi pavattivedanīyaṃ hoti. Tamenaṃ maṅgalahatthiṃ vā karonti maṅgalaassaṃ vā maṅgalausabhaṃ vā. So sampattiṃ anubhavati. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī hotī’’ti.

137. Dvayakārī means one who sometimes does good and sometimes does evil; thus, one who does both. Sukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī hotī means there is no such thing as a single moment that gives both kinds of results. However, one who has done much evil and little good is born in a Khattiya or Brāhmaṇa family because of that good. Then the evil action makes that one blind, hunchbacked, or flat-footed. That one is unworthy of kingship, or being such, cannot enjoy possessions at the time of consecration. At the time of death for another, these two, like two strong wrestlers, the two kinds of wholesome and unwholesome actions, stand by. Among them, the unwholesome is stronger, and having repelled the wholesome, it causes rebirth in the animal realm. The wholesome action also becomes operative. They make that one a auspicious elephant, an auspicious horse, or an auspicious bull. That one experiences prosperity. This is what is meant by "sukhadukkhappaṭisaṃvedī hotī".

Bodhipakkhiyabhāvanāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Development of the Qualities Conducive to Enlightenment

138.Sattannaṃ bodhipakkhiyānanti ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti ādikoṭṭhāsavasena sattannaṃ, paṭipāṭiyā pana sattatiṃsāya bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ.Bhāvanamanvāyāti bhāvanaṃ anugantvā, paṭipajjitvāti attho.Parinibbāyatīti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyati. Iti bhagavā cattāro vaṇṇe dassetvā vinivattetvā paṭividdhacatusaccaṃ khīṇāsavameva devamanussesu seṭṭhaṃ katvā dassesi.

138. Sattannaṃ bodhipakkhiyāna means of the seven categories according to the divisions beginning with "the four foundations of mindfulness," but in order, of the thirty-seven qualities conducive to enlightenment (bodhipakkhiyā dhammā). Bhāvanamanvāyā means following the development, that is, practicing. Parinibbāyatī means attains final Nibbāna through the Nibbāna of defilements. Thus, having shown and refuted the four castes, and having shown that only the perfected one who has realized the four truths is the best among gods and humans.

140.Idāni tamevatthaṃ lokasammatassa brahmunopi vacanadassanānusārena daḷhaṃ katvā dassentoimesañhi vāseṭṭha catunnaṃ vaṇṇānantiādimāha. ‘‘Brahmunāpesā’’tiādi ambaṭṭhasutte vitthāritaṃ. Iti bhagavā ettakena iminā kathāmaggena seṭṭhacchedakavādameva dassetvā suttantaṃ vinivattetvā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.Attamanā vāseṭṭhabhāradvājāti vāseṭṭhabhāradvāja sāmaṇerāpi hi sakamanā tuṭṭhamanā ‘‘sādhu, sādhū’’ti bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandiṃsu. Idameva suttantaṃ āvajjantā anumajjantā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsūti.

140. Now, further solidifying that very point in accordance with the words and teachings recognized by the world, the Blessed One said imesañhi vāseṭṭha catunnaṃ vaṇṇāna, etc. “Brahmunāpesā” etc., is elaborated in the Ambaṭṭha Sutta. Thus, with this much of a discourse, having shown only the doctrine that distinguishes the best, and having concluded the Sutta with the state of Arahantship, the Blessed One brought the discourse to an end. Attamanā vāseṭṭhabhāradvājā means the Vāseṭṭha and Bhāradvāja novices, being delighted and joyful, applauded the Blessed One's words, saying, "Sādhu, Sādhu." Contemplating and reflecting on this very Sutta, they attained Arahantship together with the discriminations.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

Here ends the commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī.

5. Sampasādanīyasuttavaṇṇanā

5. Description of the Sampasādanīya Sutta

Sāriputtasīhanādavaṇṇanā
Description of Sāriputta's Lion's Roar

141.Evaṃme sutanti sampasādanīyasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā –nāḷandāyanti nāḷandāti evaṃnāmake nagare, taṃ nagaraṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā.Pāvārikambavaneti dussapāvārikaseṭṭhino ambavane. Taṃ kira tassa uyyānaṃ ahosi. So bhagavato dhammadesanaṃ sutvā bhagavati pasanno tasmiṃ uyyāne kuṭileṇamaṇḍapādipaṭimaṇḍitaṃ bhagavato vihāraṃ katvā niyyātesi. So vihāro jīvakambavanaṃ viya ‘‘pāvārikambavana’’ntveva saṅkhyaṃ gato, tasmiṃ pāvārikambavane viharatīti attho. Bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘evaṃpasanno ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatī’’ti. Kasmā evaṃ avoca? Attano uppannasomanassapavedanatthaṃ.

141. Evaṃ me sutaṃ means the Sampasādanīya Sutta. Herein follows the word-by-word explanation of terms that are not obvious: nāḷandāya means in a city named Nāḷandā, having made that city a place for alms-seeking. Pāvārikambavane means in the mango grove of the weaver Pāvārika. It seems that this was his park. Having heard the Buddha’s teaching and being pleased with the Buddha, he had a monastery built in that park, complete with huts, resting places, pavilions, etc., and dedicated it to the Buddha. That monastery, like Jīvaka’s mango grove, came to be known as “Pāvārika’s mango grove”; the meaning is that he was dwelling in that Pāvārika’s mango grove. He said this to the Blessed One: “I am so pleased, venerable sir, with the Blessed One.” Why did he say this? To express the joy that had arisen in him.

Tatrāyamanupubbikathā – thero kira taṃdivasaṃ kālasseva sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ katvā sunivatthanivāsano pattacīvaramādāya pāsādikehi abhikkantādīhi devamanussānaṃ pasādaṃ āvahanto nāḷandavāsīnaṃ hitasukhamanubrūhayanto piṇḍāya pavisitvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto vihāraṃ gantvā satthu vattaṃ dassetvā satthari gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhe satthāraṃ vanditvā attano divāṭṭhānaṃ agamāsi. Tattha saddhivihārikantevāsikesu vattaṃ dassetvā paṭikkantesu divāṭṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā cammakkhaṇḍaṃ paññapetvā udakatumbato udakena hatthapāde sītale katvā tisandhipallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā kālaparicchedaṃ katvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajji.

Here is the preliminary account: it seems that the Elder, having attended to his bodily needs early that day, dressed properly, and taking his bowl and robe, entered Nāḷandā for alms, bringing joy to gods and humans with his pleasing manner, promoting their welfare and happiness. After the meal, having returned from his alms round, he went to the monastery, performed his duties to the Teacher, and after the Teacher had entered the Perfumed Chamber, he paid homage to the Teacher and went to his day quarters. There, having shown his duties to his pupils and students, and after they had departed, he swept the day quarters, spread out a leather mat, cooled his hands and feet with water from the water jug, folded his legs into the three-jointed lotus position, determined the time, and entered the fruition attainment.

So yathāparicchinnakālavasena samāpattito vuṭṭhāya attano guṇe anussaritumāraddho. Athassa guṇe anussarato sīlaṃ āpāthamāgataṃ. Tato paṭipāṭiyāva samādhi paññā vimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpatti viññānañcāyatanasamāpatti ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpatti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpatti vipassanāñāṇaṃ manomayiddhiñāṇaṃ iddhividhañāṇaṃ dibbasotañāṇaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ…pe… sotāpattimaggo sotāpattiphalaṃ…pe… arahattamaggo arahattaphalaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā dhammapaṭisambhidā niruttipaṭisambhidā paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Ito paṭṭhāya kappasatasahassādhikassa asaṅkhyeyyassa upari anomadassībuddhassa pādamūle kataṃ abhinīhāraṃ ādiṃ katvā attano guṇe anussarato yāva nisinnapallaṅkā guṇā upaṭṭhahiṃsu.

Having arisen from the attainment according to the time he had determined, he began to recollect his qualities. Then, as he was recollecting his qualities, morality came to mind. Then, in order, concentration, wisdom, liberation, the knowledge and vision of liberation, the first jhāna, the second jhāna, the third jhāna, the fourth jhāna, the attainment of the sphere of infinite space, the attainment of the sphere of infinite consciousness, the attainment of the sphere of nothingness, the attainment of the sphere of neither perception nor non-perception, the knowledge of insight, the knowledge of the mind-made body, the knowledge of psychic powers, the knowledge of the divine ear, the knowledge of the minds of others, the knowledge of past lives, the knowledge of the divine eye…pe… the path of stream-entry, the fruit of stream-entry…pe… the path of Arahantship, the fruit of Arahantship, the discrimination of meaning, the discrimination of the Dhamma, the discrimination of language, the discrimination of ingenuity, and the knowledge of the perfection of a disciple. From here, beginning with the aspiration made at the feet of Anomadassī Buddha, more than one hundred thousand aeons ago, the qualities came to mind up to the seat on which he was sitting.

Evaṃ thero attano guṇe anussaramāno guṇānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā paricchedaṃ vā daṭṭhuṃ nāsakkhi. So cintesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ tāva padesañāṇe ṭhitassa sāvakassa guṇānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā paricchedo vā natthi. Ahaṃ pana yaṃ satthāraṃ uddissa pabbajito, kīdisā nu kho tassa guṇā’’ti dasabalassa guṇe anussarituṃ āraddho. So bhagavato sīlaṃ nissāya, samādhiṃ paññaṃ vimuttiṃ vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ nissāya, cattāro satipaṭṭhāne nissāya, cattāro sammappadhāne cattāro iddhipāde cattāro magge cattāri phalāni catasso paṭisambhidā catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ cattāro ariyavaṃse nissāya dasabalassa guṇe anussaritumāraddho.

Tathā pañca padhāniyaṅgāni, pañcaṅgikaṃsammāsamādhiṃ, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, pañca nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo, pañca vimuttāyatanāni, pañca vimuttiparipācaniyā paññā, cha sāraṇīye dhamme, cha anussatiṭṭhānāni, cha gārave, cha nissaraṇiyā dhātuyo, cha satatavihāre, cha anuttariyāni, cha nibbedhabhāgiyā paññā, cha abhiññā, cha asādhāraṇañāṇāni, satta aparihāniye dhamme, satta ariyadhanāni, satta bojjhaṅge, satta sappurisadhamme, satta nijjaravatthūni, satta paññā, satta dakkhiṇeyyapuggale, satta khīṇāsavabalāni, aṭṭha paññāpaṭilābhahetū, aṭṭha sammattāni, aṭṭha lokadhammātikkame, aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni, aṭṭha akkhaṇadesanā, aṭṭha mahāpurisavitakke, aṭṭha abhibhāyatanāni, aṭṭha vimokkhe, nava yonisomanasikāramūlake dhamme, nava pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅgāni, nava sattāvāsadesanā, nava āghātappaṭivinaye, nava paññā, nava nānattāni, nava anupubbavihāre, dasa nāthakaraṇe dhamme, dasa kasiṇāyatanāni, dasa kusalakammapathe, dasa tathāgatabalāni, dasa sammattāni, dasa ariyavāse, dasa asekkhadhamme, ekādasa mettānisaṃse, dvādasa dhammacakkākāre, terasa dhutaṅgaguṇe, cuddasa buddhañāṇāni, pañcadasa vimuttiparipācaniye dhamme, soḷasavidhaṃ ānāpānassatiṃ, aṭṭhārasa buddhadhamme, ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, catucattālīsa ñāṇavatthūni, paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhamme, sattasattati ñāṇavatthūni, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasamāpattisañcaramahāvajirañāṇaṃ nissāya dasabalassa guṇe anussarituṃ ārabhi.

Tasmiṃyeva ca divāṭṭhāne nisinnoyeva upari ‘‘aparaṃ pana, bhante, etadānuttariya’’nti āgamissanti soḷasa aparampariyadhammā, tepi nissāya anussarituṃ ārabhi. So ‘‘kusalapaññattiyaṃ anuttaro mayhaṃ satthā, āyatanapaññattiyaṃ anuttaro, gabbhāvakkantiyaṃ anuttaro, ādesanāvidhāsu anuttaro, dassanasamāpattiyaṃ anuttaro, puggalapaññattiyaṃ anuttaro, padhāne anuttaro, paṭipadāsu anuttaro, bhassasamācāre anuttaro, purisasīlasamācāre anuttaro, anusāsanīvidhāsu anuttaro, parapuggalavimuttiñāṇe anuttaro, sassatavādesu anuttaro, pubbenivāsañāṇe anuttaro, dibbacakkhuñāṇe anuttaro, iddhividhe anuttaro, iminā ca iminā ca anuttaro’’ti evaṃ dasabalassa guṇe anussaranto bhagavato guṇānaṃ neva antaṃ, na pamāṇaṃ passi. Thero attanopi tāva guṇānaṃ antaṃ vā pamāṇaṃ vā nāddasa, bhagavato guṇānaṃ kiṃ passissati? Yassa yassa hi paññā mahatī ñāṇaṃ visadaṃ, so so buddhaguṇe mahantato saddahati. Lokiyamahājano ukkāsitvāpi khipitvāpi ‘‘namo buddhāna’’nti attano attano upanissaye ṭhatvā buddhānaṃ guṇe anussarati. Sabbalokiyamahājanato eko sotāpanno buddhaguṇe mahantato saddahati. Sotāpannānaṃ satatopi sahassatopi eko sakadāgāmī. Sakadāgāmīnaṃ satatopi sahassatopi eko anāgāmī. Anāgāmīnaṃ satatopi sahassatopi eko arahā buddhaguṇe mahantato saddahati. Avasesaarahantehi asīti mahātherā buddhaguṇe mahantato saddahanti. Asītimahātherehi cattāro mahātherā. Catūhi mahātherehi dve aggasāvakā. Tesupi sāriputtatthero, sāriputtattheratopi eko paccekabuddho buddhaguṇe mahantato saddahati. Sace pana sakalacakkavāḷagabbhe saṅghāṭikaṇṇena saṅghāṭikaṇṇaṃ pahariyamānā nisinnā paccekabuddhā buddhaguṇe anussareyyuṃ, tehi sabbehipi eko sabbaññubuddhova buddhaguṇe mahantato saddahati.

Seyyathāpi nāma mahājano ‘‘mahāsamuddo gambhīro uttāno’’ti jānanatthaṃ yottāni vaṭṭeyya, tattha koci byāmappamāṇaṃ yottaṃ vaṭṭeyya, koci dve byāmaṃ, koci dasabyāmaṃ, koci vīsatibyāmaṃ, koci tiṃsabyāmaṃ, koci cattālīsabyāmaṃ, koci paññāsabyāmaṃ, koci satabyāmaṃ, koci sahassabyāmaṃ, koci caturāsītibyāmasahassaṃ. Te nāvaṃ āruyha, samuddamajjhe uggatapabbatādimhi vā ṭhatvā attano attano yottaṃ otāreyyuṃ, tesu yassa yottaṃ byāmamattaṃ, so byāmamattaṭṭhāneyeva udakaṃ jānāti…pe… yassa caturāsītibyāmasahassaṃ, so caturāsītibyāmasahassaṭṭhāneyeva udakaṃ jānāti. Parato udakaṃ ettakanti na jānāti. Mahāsamudde pana na tattakaṃyeva udakaṃ, atha kho anantamaparimāṇaṃ. Caturāsītiyojanasahassaṃ gambhīro hi mahāsamuddo, evameva ekabyāmayottato paṭṭhāya navabyāmayottena ñātaudakaṃ viya lokiyamahājanena diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā veditabbā. Dasabyāmayottena dasabyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya sotāpannena diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Vīsatibyāmayottena vīsatibyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya sakadāgāminā diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Tiṃsabyāmayottena tiṃsabyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya anāgāminā diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Cattālīsabyāmayottena cattālīsabyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya arahatā diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Paññāsabyāmayottena paññāsabyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya asītimahātherehi diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Satabyāmayottena satabyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya catūhi mahātherehi diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Sahassabyāmayottena sahassabyāmaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya mahāmoggallānattherena diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Caturāsītibyāmasahassayottena caturāsītibyāmasahassaṭṭhāne ñātaudakaṃ viya dhammasenāpatinā sāriputtattherena diṭṭhabuddhaguṇā. Tattha yathā so puriso mahāsamudde udakaṃ nāma na ettakaṃyeva, anantamaparimāṇanti gaṇhāti, evameva āyasmā sāriputto dhammanvayena anvayabuddhiyā anumānena nayaggāhena sāvakapāramīñāṇe ṭhatvā dasabalassa guṇe anussaranto ‘‘buddhaguṇā anantā aparimāṇā’’ti saddahi.

Therena hi diṭṭhabuddhaguṇehi dhammanvayena gahetabbabuddhaguṇāyeva bahutarā. Yathā kathaṃ viya? Yathā ito nava ito navāti aṭṭhārasa yojanāni avattharitvā gacchantiyā candabhāgāya mahānadiyā puriso sūcipāsena udakaṃ gaṇheyya, sūcipāsena gahitaudakato aggahitameva bahu hoti. Yathā vā pana puriso mahāpathavito aṅguliyā paṃsuṃ gaṇheyya, aṅguliyā gahitapaṃsuto avasesapaṃsuyeva bahu hoti. Yathā vā pana puriso mahāsamuddābhimukhiṃ aṅguliṃ kareyya, aṅguliabhimukhaudakato avasesaṃ udakaṃyeva bahu hoti. Yathā ca puriso ākāsābhimukhiṃ aṅguliṃ kareyya, aṅguliabhimukhaākāsato sesaākāsappadesova bahu hoti. Evaṃ therena diṭṭhabuddhaguṇehi adiṭṭhā guṇāva bahūti veditabbā. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ,

Evaṃ therassa attano ca satthu ca guṇe anussarato yamakamahānadīmahogho viya abbhantare pītisomanassaṃ avattharamānaṃ vāto viya bhastaṃ, ubbhijjitvā uggataudakaṃ viya mahārahadaṃ sakalasarīraṃ pūreti. Tato therassa ‘‘supatthitā vata me patthanā, suladdhā me pabbajjā, yvāhaṃ evaṃvidhassa satthu santike pabbajito’’ti āvajjantassa balavataraṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajji.

evaṃpasanno ahaṃ, bhantetiādimāha. Tatthaevaṃpasannoti evaṃ uppannasaddho, evaṃ saddahāmīti attho.Bhiyyobhiññataroti bhiyyataro abhiññāto, bhiyyatarābhiñño vā, uttaritarañāṇoti attho.Sambodhiyanti sabbaññutaññāṇe arahattamaggañāṇe vā, arahattamaggeneva hi buddhaguṇā nippadesā gahitā honti. Dve hi aggasāvakā arahattamaggeneva sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ paṭilabhanti. Paccekabuddhā paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ. Buddhā sabbaññutaññāṇañceva sakale ca buddhaguṇe. Sabbañhi nesaṃ arahattamaggeneva ijjhati. Tasmā arahattamaggañāṇaṃ sambodhi nāma hoti. Tena uttaritaro bhagavatā natthi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro yadidaṃ sambodhiya’’nti.

142.Uḷārāti seṭṭhā. Ayañhi uḷārasaddo ‘‘uḷārāni khādanīyāni khādantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.366) madhure āgacchati. ‘‘Uḷārāya khalu bhavaṃ, vacchāyano, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ pasaṃsāya pasaṃsatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.280) seṭṭhe. ‘‘Appamāṇo uḷāro obhāso’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.32) vipule. Svāyamidha seṭṭhe āgato. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘uḷārāti seṭṭhā’’ti.Āsabhīti usabhassa vācāsadisī acalā asampavedhī.Ekaṃso gahitoti anussavena vā ācariyaparamparāya vā itikirāya vā piṭakasampadānena vā ākāraparivitakkena vā diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā vā takkahetu vā nayahetu vā akathetvā paccakkhato ñāṇena paṭivijjhitvā viya ekaṃso gahito, sanniṭṭhānakathāva kathitāti attho.

Sīhanādoti seṭṭhanādo, neva dandhāyantena na gaggarāyantena sīhena viya uttamanādo naditoti attho.Kiṃ te sāriputtāti imaṃ desanaṃ kasmā ārabhīti? Anuyogadāpanatthaṃ. Ekacco hi sīhanādaṃ naditvā attano sīhanāde anuyogaṃ dātuṃ na sakkoti, nighaṃsanaṃ nakkhamati, lepe patitamakkaṭo viya hoti. Yathā dhamamānaṃ aparisuddhalohaṃ jhāyitvā jhāmaaṅgāro hoti, evaṃ jhāmaṅgāro viya hoti. Eko sīhanāde anuyogaṃ dāpiyamāno dātuṃ sakkoti, nighaṃsanaṃ khamati, dhamamānaṃ niddosajātarūpaṃ viya adhikataraṃ sobhati, tādiso thero. Tena naṃ bhagavā ‘‘anuyogakkhamo aya’’nti ñatvā sīhanāde anuyogadāpanatthaṃ imampi desanaṃ ārabhi.

sabbe teti sabbe te tayā.Evaṃsīlātiādīsu lokiyalokuttaravasena sīlādīni pucchati. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā mahāpadāne kathitāva.

Kiṃ pana te, sāriputta, ye te bhavissantīti atītā ca tāva niruddhā, apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gatā dīpasikhā viya nibbutā, evaṃ niruddhe apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gate tvaṃ kathaṃ jānissasi, anāgatabuddhānaṃ pana guṇā kinti tayā attano cittena paricchinditvā viditāti pucchanto evamāha.Kiṃ pana te, sāriputta, ahaṃ etarahīti anāgatāpi buddhā ajātā anibbattā anuppannā, tepi kathaṃ tvaṃ jānissasi? Tesañhi jānanaṃ apade ākāse padadassanaṃ viya hoti. Idāni mayā saddhiṃ ekavihāre vasasi, ekato bhikkhāya carasi, dhammadesanākāle dakkhiṇapasse nisīdasi, kiṃ pana mayhaṃ guṇā attano cetasā paricchinditvā viditā tayāti anuyuñjanto evamāha.

Thero pana pucchite pucchite ‘‘no hetaṃ, bhante’’ti paṭikkhipati. Therassa ca viditampi atthi aviditampi atthi, kiṃ so attano viditaṭṭhāne paṭikkhepaṃ karoti, aviditaṭṭhāneti? Viditaṭṭhāne na karoti, aviditaṭṭhāneyeva karotīti. Thero kira anuyoge āraddheyeva aññāsi. Na ayaṃ anuyogo sāvakapāramīñāṇe, sabbaññutaññāṇe ayaṃ anuyogoti attano sāvakapāramīñāṇe paṭikkhepaṃ akatvā aviditaṭṭhāne sabbaññutaññāṇe paṭikkhepaṃ karoti. Tena idampi dīpeti ‘‘bhagavā mayhaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ buddhānaṃ sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttikāraṇajānanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ natthī’’ti.

Etthāti etesu atītādibhedesu buddhesu.Atha kiñcarahīti atha kasmā evaṃ ñāṇe asati tayā evaṃ kathitanti vadati.

Etthati in these Buddhas of various kinds, past, etc. Atha kiñcarahīti why then, if such knowledge is absent, does she speak in this way?

143.Dhammanvayoti dhammassa paccakkhato ñāṇassa anuyogaṃ anugantvā uppannaṃ anumānañāṇaṃ nayaggāho vidito. Sāvakapāramīñāṇe ṭhatvāva imināva ākārena jānāmi bhagavāti vadati. Therassa hi nayaggāho appamāṇo apariyanto. Yathā sabbaññutaññāṇassa pamāṇaṃ vā pariyanto vā natthi, evaṃ dhammasenāpatino nayaggāhassa. Tena so ‘‘iminā evaṃvidho, iminā anuttaro satthā’’ti jānāti. Therassa hi nayaggāho sabbaññutaññāṇagatiko eva. Idāni taṃ nayaggāhaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ upamāya dassentoseyyathāpi, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha yasmā majjhimapadese nagarassa uddhāpapākārādīni thirāni vā hontu, dubbalāni vā, sabbaso vā pana mā hontu, corāsaṅkā na hoti, tasmā taṃ aggahetvā paccantimanagaranti āha.Daḷhuddhāpanti thirapākārapādaṃ.Daḷhapākāratoraṇanti thirapākārañceva thirapiṭṭhasaṅghāṭañca.Ekadvāranti kasmā āha? Bahudvāre hi nagare bahūhi paṇḍitadovārikehi bhavitabbaṃ. Ekadvāre ekova vaṭṭati. Therassa ca paññāya sadiso añño natthi. Tasmā attano paṇḍitabhāvassa opammatthaṃ ekaṃyeva dovārikaṃ dassetuṃ ekadvāra’’nti āha.Paṇḍitoti paṇḍiccena samannāgato.Byattoti veyyattiyena samannāgato visadañāṇo.Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattikapaññāsaṅkhātāya medhāya samannāgato.Anupariyāyapathanti anupariyāyanāmakaṃ pākāramaggaṃ.Pākārasandhinti dvinnaṃ iṭṭhakānaṃ apagataṭṭhānaṃ.Pākāravivaranti pākārassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ.

143.Dhammanvayoti anumānañāṇa knowledge arisen following the anuyoga, the direct knowledge of the Dhamma, the grasp of the method is known. Standing in the knowledge of a disciple-level perfection, he says, "I know the Blessed One in just this manner." For the Elder, the grasp of the method is immeasurable, limitless. Just as there is no measure or limit to the knowledge of the All-knowing One, so it is with the grasp of the method of the General of the Dhamma. Therefore, he knows, "The Teacher is like this through this, the unsurpassed through this." For the Elder, the grasp of the method is indeed directed towards the knowledge of the All-knowing One. Now, to make that grasp of the method clear, showing it by simile, he said, "Seyyathāpi, bhante," etc. There, because in the middle country, there is no fear of thieves whether the ramparts, etc., of a city are strong or weak, or even if they do not exist at all, therefore, not taking that, he says, "a frontier city." Daḷhuddhāpanti with a strong rampart foundation. Daḷhapākāratoraṇanti with a strong rampart and a strong upper archway. Ekadvāranti why does he say this? In a city with many gates, there must be many wise gatekeepers. With one gate, one is enough. And there is no other equal to the Elder's wisdom. Therefore, to illustrate his own wise nature, to show a single gatekeeper, he says, "one gate." Paṇḍitoti endowed with wisdom. Byattoti endowed with expertise, clear knowledge. Medhāvīti endowed with intelligence consisting of the wisdom that arises in the right place. Anupariyāyapathanti the rampart path called anupariyāya. Pākārasandhinti the place where two bricks are separated. Pākāravivaranti a break in the rampart.

Cetaso upakkileseti pañca nīvaraṇāni cittaṃ upakkilesenti kiliṭṭhaṃ karonti upatāpenti vibādhenti, tasmā ‘‘cetaso upakkilesā’’ti vuccanti.Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti nīvaraṇā uppajjamānā anuppannāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na denti, uppannāya paññāya vaḍḍhituṃ na denti, tasmā ‘‘paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā’’ti vuccanti.Suppatiṭṭhitacittāti catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu suṭṭhu ṭhapitacittā hutvā.Satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtanti satta bojjhaṅge yathāsabhāvena bhāvetvā.Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti arahattaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ vā paṭivijjhiṃsūti dasseti.

Cetaso upakkileseti the five hindrances defile the mind, making it impure, tormenting it, oppressing it, therefore, they are called "defilements of the mind." Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti the hindrances, arising, do not allow unarisen wisdom to arise, they do not allow arisen wisdom to grow, therefore, they are called "weakeners of wisdom." Suppatiṭṭhitacittāti having established the mind well in the four foundations of mindfulness. Satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtanti having cultivated the seven factors of enlightenment according to their true nature. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti shows that they realized arahatta or the knowledge of the All-knowing One.

Apicettha satipaṭṭhānāti vipassanā. Sambojjhaṅgā maggo. Anuttarāsammāsambodhi arahattaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānāti vā maggāti vā bojjhaṅgamissakā. Sammāsambodhi arahattameva. Dīghabhāṇakamahāsīvatthero panāha ‘‘satipaṭṭhāne vipassanāti gahetvā bojjhaṅge maggo ca sabbaññutaññāṇañcāti gahite sundaro pañho bhaveyya, na panevaṃ gahita’’nti. Iti thero sabbaññubuddhānaṃ nīvaraṇappahāne satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya sambodhiyañca majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇarajatānaṃ viya nānattābhāvaṃ dasseti.

Moreover, here, satipaṭṭhāna is insight. Sambojjhaṅga is the path. Anuttarāsammāsambodhi is arahatta. Or, satipaṭṭhāna or the path are mixed with the factors of enlightenment. Sammāsambodhi is simply arahatta. However, the Elder Dīghabhāṇakamahāsīva said, "If one takes satipaṭṭhāna as insight and the factors of enlightenment as the path and the knowledge of the All-knowing One, the question would be beautiful, but it is not taken that way." Thus, the Elder shows the non-difference between the elimination of the hindrances, the cultivation of mindfulness, and enlightenment, in the Buddhas who know all, like pieces of gold and silver that are different.

Idha ṭhatvā upamā saṃsandetabbā – āyasmā hi sāriputto paccantanagaraṃ dassesi, pākāraṃ dassesi, pariyāyapathaṃ dassesi, dvāraṃ dassesi, paṇḍitadovārikaṃ dassesi, nagaraṃ pavesanakanikkhamanake oḷārike pāṇe dassesi, paṇḍitadovārikassa tesaṃ pāṇānaṃ pākaṭabhāvañca dassesi. Tattha kiṃ kena sadisanti ce. Nagaraṃ viya hi nibbānaṃ, pākāro viya sīlaṃ, pariyāyapatho viya hirī, dvāraṃ viya ariyamaggo, paṇḍitadovāriko viya dhammasenāpati, nagarappavisanakanikkhamanakaoḷārikapāṇā viya atītānāgatapaccuppannā buddhā, dovārikassa tesaṃ pāṇānaṃ pākaṭabhāvo viya āyasmato sāriputtassa atītānāgatapaccuppannabuddhānaṃ sīlasamathādīhi pākaṭabhāvo. Ettāvatā therena bhagavā evamahaṃ sāvakapāramīñāṇe ṭhatvā dhammanvayena nayaggāhena jānāmīti attano sīhanādassa anuyogo dinno hoti.

Here, the simile should be compared: Venerable Sāriputta showed a frontier city, he showed a rampart, he showed a rampart path, he showed a gate, he showed a wise gatekeeper, he showed coarse beings entering and exiting the city, and he showed the obviousness of those beings to the wise gatekeeper. There, what is similar to what? Nibbāna is like the city, sīla is like the rampart, shame is like the rampart path, the Noble Path is like the gate, the General of the Dhamma is like the wise gatekeeper, coarse beings entering and exiting the city are like the Buddhas of the past, future, and present, the obviousness of those beings to the gatekeeper is like the obviousness of the Buddhas of the past, future, and present to Venerable Sāriputta through sīla, calm, etc. To this extent, the Elder has given the reason for his lion's roar, "Blessed One, I know by means of the Dhamma following, by the grasp of the method, standing in the knowledge of a disciple-level perfection."

144.Idhāhaṃ, bhante, yena bhagavāti imaṃ desanaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Sāvakapāramīñāṇassa nipphattidassanatthaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo, bhagavā ahaṃ sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ paṭilabhanto pañcanavutipāsaṇḍe na aññaṃ ekampi samaṇaṃ vā brāhmaṇaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā sāvakapāramīñāṇampi paṭilabhiṃ, tumheyeva upasaṅkamitvā tumhe payirupāsanto paṭilabhinti. Tatthaidhāti nipātamattaṃ.Upasaṅkamiṃ dhammasavanāyāti tumhe upasaṅkamanto panāhaṃ na cīvarādihetu upasaṅkamanto, dhammasavanatthāya upasaṅkamanto. Evaṃ upasaṅkamitvā sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ paṭilabhiṃ. Kadā pana thero dhammasavanatthāya upasaṅkamantoti. Sūkarakhataleṇe bhāgineyyadīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanāpariggahasuttantakathanadivase (ma. ni. 2.205) upasaṅkamanto, tadāyeva sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ paṭilabhīti. Taṃdivasañhi thero tālavaṇṭaṃ gahetvā bhagavantaṃ bījamāno ṭhito taṃ desanaṃ sutvā tattheva sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ hatthagataṃ akāsi.Uttaruttaraṃ paṇītapaṇītanti uttaruttarañceva paṇītapaṇītañca katvā desesi.Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāganti kaṇhañceva sukkañca. Tañca kho sappaṭibhāgaṃ savipakkhaṃ katvā. Kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkaṃ, sukkaṃ paṭibāhitvā kaṇhanti evaṃ sappaṭibhāgaṃ katvā kaṇhasukkaṃ desesi, kaṇhaṃ desentopi ca saussāhaṃ savipākaṃ desesi, sukkaṃ desentopi saussāhaṃ savipākaṃ desesi.

144.Idhāhaṃ, bhante, yena bhagavāti why was this discourse begun? To show the accomplishment of disciple-level perfection knowledge. The meaning here is this: "Blessed One, while attaining disciple-level perfection knowledge, I did not approach any of the ninety-five heretics, nor any other ascetic or brahmin, and attain disciple-level perfection knowledge; but approaching you alone, attending on you, I attained it." There, idhāti is merely a particle. Upasaṅkamiṃ dhammasavanāyāti approaching you, however, I was not approaching for the sake of robes, etc., but approaching for the sake of hearing the Dhamma. Approaching in this way, I attained disciple-level perfection knowledge. When did the Elder approach for the sake of hearing the Dhamma? Approaching on the day of the discourse on the perception of feeling to his nephew, the wanderer Dīghanakha, at Sūkarakhataleṇa (M. ii.205), at that very time he attained disciple-level perfection knowledge. Indeed, on that day, the Elder, holding a palm leaf fan and fanning the Blessed One, having heard that discourse, right there made disciple-level perfection knowledge his own. Uttaruttaraṃ paṇītapaṇītanti he taught making it both higher and higher, and more and more refined. Kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāganti both dark and bright. And that too, having made it with opposing factors, with opposite parts. Having rejected the dark, the bright; having rejected the bright, the dark; thus, having made it with opposite parts, he taught the dark and bright; even teaching the dark, he taught with enthusiasm and with result; even teaching the bright, he taught with enthusiasm and with result.

Tasmiṃ dhamme abhiññā idhekaccaṃ dhammaṃ dhammesu niṭṭhamagamanti tasmiṃ desite dhamme ekaccaṃ dhammaṃ nāma sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ sañjānitvā dhammesu niṭṭhamagamaṃ. Katamesu dhammesūti? Catusaccadhammesu. Etthāyaṃ therasallāpo, kāḷavallavāsī sumatthero tāva vadati ‘‘catusaccadhammesu idāni niṭṭhagamanakāraṇaṃ natthi. Assajimahāsāvakassa hi diṭṭhadivaseyeva so paṭhamamaggena catusaccadhammesu niṭṭhaṃ gato, aparabhāge sūkarakhataleṇadvāre upari tīhi maggehi catusaccadhammesu niṭṭhaṃ gato, imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ‘dhammesū’ti buddhaguṇesu niṭṭhaṃ gato’’ti. Lokantaravāsī cūḷasīvatthero pana ‘‘sabbaṃ tatheva vatvā imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ‘dhammesū’ti arahatte niṭṭhaṃ gato’’ti āha. Dīghabhāṇakatipiṭakamahāsīvatthero pana ‘‘tatheva purimavādaṃ vatvā imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ‘dhammesū’ti sāvakapāramīñāṇe niṭṭhaṃ gato’’ti vatvā ‘‘buddhaguṇā pana nayato āgatā’’ti āha.

Tasmiṃ dhamme abhiññā idhekaccaṃ dhammaṃ dhammesu niṭṭhamagamanti in that Dhamma that was taught, having understood a certain Dhamma, namely, disciple-level perfection knowledge, I reached completion in the Dhammas. In which Dhammas? In the four Noble Truths. Here is the Elder's conversation: The Elder Suma, resident of Kāḷavalli, says, "There is now no reason for reaching completion in the four Noble Truths. Indeed, Assaji Mahāsāvaka, on the very day he saw, reached completion in the four Noble Truths with the first path; later, at the entrance to Sūkarakhataleṇa, he reached completion in the four Noble Truths with the three higher paths; but in this place, he reached completion in the 'Dhammas' in the qualities of the Buddha." The Elder Cūḷasīva, resident of Lokantara, however, says, "Having said everything in the same way, but in this place, he reached completion in the 'Dhammas' in arahantship." The Elder Dīghabhāṇakatipiṭakamahāsīva, however, having said the previous view in the same way, says, "But in this place, he reached completion in the 'Dhammas' in disciple-level perfection knowledge," and he said, "However, the qualities of the Buddha come by way of method."

Satthari pasīdinti evaṃ sāvakapāramīñāṇadhammesu niṭṭhaṃ gantvā bhiyyosomattāya ‘‘sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā’’ti satthari pasīdiṃ.Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammoti suṭṭhu akkhāto sukathito niyyāniko maggo phalatthāya niyyāti rāgadosamohanimmadanasamattho.

Satthari pasīdinti thus, having reached completion in the Dhammas of disciple-level perfection knowledge, with even greater intensity, I became confident in the Teacher, "Indeed, the Blessed One is a Fully Enlightened One." Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammoti the Dhamma is well-expounded by the Blessed One, well-spoken, leading out, it leads to the fruit, capable of eliminating lust, hatred, and delusion.

Suppaṭipanno saṅghoti buddhassa bhagavato sāvakasaṅghopi vaṅkādidosavirahitaṃ sammāpaṭipadaṃ paṭipannattā suppaṭipannoti pasannomhi bhagavatīti dasseti.

Suppaṭipanno saṅghoti the Sangha of disciples of the Buddha, the Blessed One, too, is well-practicing, because they have practiced the right practice, free from crookedness and faults, thus, he shows that he is confident in the Blessed One.

Kusaladhammadesanāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Teaching of Skillful Qualities

145.Idāni divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā samāpajjite soḷasa aparāpariyadhamme dassetuṃaparaṃ pana bhante etadānuttariyanti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthaanuttariyanti anuttarabhāvo.Yathā bhagavādhammaṃ desetīti yathā yenākārena yāya desanāya bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti, sā tumhākaṃ desanā anuttarāti vadati.Kusalesu dhammesūti tāya desanāya desitesu kusalesu dhammesupi bhagavāva anuttaroti dīpeti. Yā vā sā desanā, tassā bhūmiṃ dassentopi ‘‘kusalesu dhammesū’’ti āha.Tatrime kusalā dhammāti tatra kusalesu dhammesūti vuttapade ime kusalā dhammā nāmāti veditabbā. Tattha ārogyaṭṭhena, anavajjaṭṭhena, kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena, niddarathaṭṭhena, sukhavipākaṭṭhenāti pañcadhā kusalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tesu jātakapariyāyaṃ patvā ārogyaṭṭhena kusalaṃ vaṭṭati. Suttantapariyāyaṃ patvā anavajjaṭṭhena. Abhidhammapariyāyaṃ patvā kosallasambhūtaniddarathasukhavipākaṭṭhena. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne bāhitikasuttantapariyāyena (ma. ni. 2.358) anavajjaṭṭhena kusalaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.

145.Now, to show the sixteen qualities beyond another, which are realized sitting in the day's dwelling, he began the discourse, aparaṃ pana bhante etadānuttariyanti. There, anuttariyanti the state of being unsurpassed. Yathā bhagavā dhammaṃ desetīti in whatever way, by whatever method, with whatever teaching the Blessed One teaches the Dhamma, that teaching of yours is unsurpassed, he says. Kusalesu dhammesūti even in the skillful qualities taught by that teaching, the Blessed One alone is unsurpassed, he indicates. Even showing the basis of that teaching, he says, "in skillful qualities." Tatrime kusalā dhammāti in that phrase, "in skillful qualities," these qualities should be understood as being named skillful qualities. There, skillfulness should be understood as fivefold, in the sense of health, in the sense of faultlessness, in the sense of being born of skill, in the sense of being without distress, in the sense of having a happy result. Among these, having attained the Jātaka category, skillfulness is fitting in the sense of health. Having attained the Suttanta category, in the sense of faultlessness. Having attained the Abhidhamma category, in the sense of being born of skill, without distress, and with a happy result. In this place, however, skillfulness should be seen in the sense of faultlessness, by way of the external Suttanta category (M. ii.358).

Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, navavidhena vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, pañcavidhena dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānanti evaṃ nānānayehi vibhajitvā samathavipassanāmaggavasena lokiyalokuttaramissakā cattāro satipaṭṭhānā desitā. Phalasatipaṭṭhānaṃ pana idha anadhippetaṃ.Cattāro sammappadhānāti paggahaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇā, kiccavasena nānākiccā. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāyā’’tiādinā nayena samathavipassanāmaggavasena lokiyalokuttaramissakāva cattāro sammappadhānā desitā.Cattāro iddhipādāti ijjhanaṭṭhena ekasaṅgahā, chandādivasena nānāsabhāvā. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgataṃ iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādinā nayena samathavipassanāmaggavasena lokiyalokuttaramissakāva cattāro iddhipādā desitā.

Cattāro satipaṭṭhānāti the four foundations of mindfulness are taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight, by dividing in various ways: the mindfulness of contemplating the body in fourteen ways, the mindfulness of contemplating feeling in nine ways, the mindfulness of contemplating the mind in sixteen ways, the mindfulness of contemplating phenomena in five ways. However, mindfulness as a result is not intended here. Cattāro sammappadhānāti the four right efforts are of one characteristic in the sense of exertion, of various functions in the sense of duty. The four right efforts are taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight, by the method beginning with "Here, a bhikkhu generates desire for the non-arising of unarisen evil unskillful qualities," etc. Cattāro iddhipādāti the four bases of power are of one collection in the sense of accomplishment, of various natures in the sense of desire, etc. The four bases of power are taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight, by the method beginning with "Here, a bhikkhu cultivates the base of power endowed with concentration of intention and striving," etc.

Pañcindriyānīti ādhipateyyaṭṭhena ekalakkhaṇāni, adhimokkhādisabhāvavasena nānāsabhāvāni. Samathavipassanāmaggavaseneva ca lokiyalokuttaramissakāni saddhādīni pañcindriyāni desitāni.Pañca balānīti upatthambhanaṭṭhena akampiyaṭṭhena vā ekasaṅgahāni, salakkhaṇena nānāsabhāvāni. Samathavipassanāmaggavaseneva lokiyalokuttaramissakāni saddhādīni pañca balāni desitāni.Satta bojjhaṅgāti niyyānaṭṭhena ekasaṅgahā, upaṭṭhānādinā salakkhaṇena nānāsabhāvā. Samathavipassanā maggavaseneva lokiyalokuttaramissakā satta bojjhaṅgā desitā.

Pañcindriyānīti the five faculties are of one characteristic in the sense of dominance, of various natures in the sense of conviction, etc. The five faculties, such as faith, etc., are taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight. Pañca balānīti the five powers are of one collection in the sense of support or in the sense of being unshakeable, of various natures in their own characteristics. The five powers, such as faith, etc., are taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight. Satta bojjhaṅgāti the seven factors of enlightenment are of one collection in the sense of leading out, of various natures in their own characteristics in the sense of presence of mind, etc. The seven factors of enlightenment are taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight.

Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti hetuṭṭhena ekasaṅgaho, dassanādinā salakkhaṇena nānāsabhāvo. Samathavipassanāmaggavaseneva lokiyalokuttaramissako ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo desitoti attho.

Ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti the Noble Eightfold Path is of one collection in the sense of cause, of various natures in their own characteristics in the sense of seeing, etc. The Noble Eightfold Path is taught, mixed with mundane and supramundane, by way of calm and insight, this is the meaning.

Idha, bhante, bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayāti idaṃ kimatthaṃ āraddhaṃ? Sāsanassa pariyosānadassanatthaṃ. Sāsanassa hi na kevalaṃ maggeneva pariyosānaṃ hoti, arahattaphalena pana hoti. Tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ idamāraddhanti veditabbaṃ.Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, kusalesu dhammesūti bhante yā ayaṃ kusalesu dhammesu evaṃdesanā, etadānuttariyaṃ.Taṃbhagavāti taṃ desanaṃ bhagavā asesaṃ sakalaṃ abhijānāti.Taṃ bhagavatoti taṃ desanaṃ bhagavato asesaṃ abhijānato.Uttari abhiññeyyaṃ natthīti taduttari abhijānitabbaṃ natthi, ayaṃ nāma ito añño dhammo vā puggalo vā yaṃ bhagavā na jānātīti idaṃ natthi.Yadabhijānaṃ añño samaṇo vāti yaṃ tumhehi anabhiññātaṃ, taṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā abhijānanto bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro assa, adhikatarapañño bhaveyya.Yadidaṃ kusalesu dhammesūti etthayadidanti nipātamattaṃ, kusalesu dhammesu bhagavatā uttaritaro natthīti ayametthattho. Iti bhagavāva kusalesu dhammesu anuttaroti dassento ‘‘imināpi kāraṇena evaṃpasanno ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatī’’ti dīpeti. Ito paresuaparaṃ panātiādīsu visesamattameva vaṇṇayissāma. Purimavārasadisaṃ pana vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Idha, bhante, bhikkhu āsavānaṃ khayāti why was this begun? To show the conclusion of the Dispensation. Indeed, the Dispensation does not have its conclusion only with the path, but it has it with the fruit of arahantship. Therefore, it should be understood that this was begun to show that. Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, kusalesu dhammesūti Blessed One, this teaching in skillful qualities is unsurpassed. Taṃ bhagavāti the Blessed One knows that teaching completely, entirely. Taṃ bhagavatoti for the Blessed One who knows that teaching completely, uttari abhiññeyyaṃ natthīti there is nothing further to be known than that; this name, there is no other quality or person whom the Blessed One does not know, this is not. Yadabhijānaṃ añño samaṇo vāti whatever is not directly known by you, another ascetic or brahmin, knowing that, would be more directly knowing than the Blessed One, would be of superior wisdom. Yadidaṃ kusalesu dhammesūti here, yadidanti is merely a particle; there is no one superior to the Blessed One in skillful qualities, this is the meaning here. Thus, showing that the Blessed One alone is unsurpassed in skillful qualities, he indicates, "Because of this reason, too, I am confident in the Blessed One, Blessed One." In the following aparaṃ panāti, etc., we will describe only the distinctions. However, it should be understood in the same way as said in the previous passage.

Āyatanapaṇṇattidesanāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Teaching on the Exposition of the Sense Bases

146.Āyatanapaṇṇattīsūti āyatanapaññāpanāsu. Idāni tā āyatanapaññattiyo dassentochayimāni, bhantetiādimāha. Āyatanakathā panesā visuddhimagge vitthārena kathitā, tena na taṃ vitthārayissāma, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva sā vitthārato veditabbā.

146.Āyatanapaṇṇattīsūti in the expositions of the sense bases. Now, to show those expositions of the sense bases, he says, chayimāni, bhanteti, etc. However, this talk on the sense bases has been spoken about in detail in the Visuddhimagga, therefore, we will not describe that in detail, therefore, that should be understood in detail in the way it is said there.

Etadānuttariyaṃ,bhante, āyatanapaṇṇattīsūti yāyaṃ āyatanapaṇṇattīsu ajjhattikabāhiravavatthānādivasena evaṃ desanā, etadānuttariyaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

Gabbhāvakkantidesanāvaṇṇanā

147.Gabbhāvakkantīsūti gabbhokkamanesu. Tā gabbhāvakkantiyo dassentocatasso imā, bhantetiādimāha. Tatthaasampajānoti ajānanto sammūḷho hutvā.Mātukucchiṃ okkamatīti paṭisandhivasena pavisati.Ṭhātīti vasati.Nikkhamatīti nikkhamantopi asampajāno sammūḷhova nikkhamati.Ayaṃ paṭhamāti ayaṃ pakatilokiyamanussānaṃ paṭhamā gabbhāvakkanti.

Sampajāno mātukucchiṃ okkamatīti okkamanto sampajāno asammūḷho hutvā okkamati.

Ayaṃdutiyāti ayaṃ asītimahātherānaṃ sāvakānaṃ dutiyā gabbhāvakkanti. Te hi pavisantāva jānanti, vasantā ca nikkhamantā ca na jānanti.

Ayaṃ tatiyāti ayaṃ dvinnañca aggasāvakānaṃ paccekabodhisattānañca tatiyā gabbhāvakkanti. Te kira kammajehi vātehi adhosirā uddhaṃpādā anekasataporise papāte viya yonimukhe khittā tāḷacchiggaḷena hatthī viya sambādhena yonimukhena nikkhamamānā anantaṃ dukkhaṃ pāpuṇanti. Tena nesaṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nikkhamamhā’’ti sampajānatā na hoti. Evaṃ pūritapāramīnampi ca sattānaṃ evarūpe ṭhāne mahantaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjatīti alameva gabbhāvāse nibbindituṃ alaṃ virajjituṃ.

Ayaṃ catutthāti ayaṃ sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ vasena catutthā gabbhāvakkanti. Sabbaññubodhisattā hi mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantāpi jānanti, tattha vasantāpi jānanti, nikkhamantāpi jānanti, nikkhamanakālepi ca te kammajavātā uddhaṃpāde adhosire katvā khipituṃ na sakkonti, dve hatthe pasāretvā akkhīni ummīletvā ṭhitakāva nikkhamanti. Bhavaggaṃ upādāya avīciantare añño tīsu kālesu sampajāno nāma natthi ṭhapetvā sabbaññubodhisatte. Teneva nesaṃ mātukucchiṃ okkamanakāle ca nikkhamanakāle ca dasasahassilokadhātu kampatīti. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

Ādesanavidhādesanāvaṇṇanā

148.Ādesanavidhāsūti ādesanakoṭṭhāsesu. Idāni tā ādesanavidhā dassentocatasso imātiādimāha.Nimittena ādisatīti āgatanimittena gatanimittena ṭhitanimittena vā idaṃ nāma bhavissatīti katheti.

Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko rājā tisso muttā gahetvā purohitaṃ pucchi ‘‘kiṃ me, ācariya, hatthe’’ti? So ito cito ca olokesi. Tena ca samayena ekā sarabū ‘‘makkhikaṃ gahessāmī’’ti pakkhandi, gahaṇakāle makkhikā palātā, so makkhikāya muttattā ‘‘muttā mahārājā’’ti āha. Muttā tāva hotu, kati muttāti? So puna nimittaṃ olokesi. Atha avidūre kukkuṭo tikkhattuṃ saddaṃ nicchāresi. Brāhmaṇo ‘‘tisso mahārājā’’ti āha. Evaṃ ekacco āgatanimittena katheti. Etenupāyena gataṭhitani mittehipi kathanaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Amanussānanti yakkhapisācādīnaṃ.Devatānanti cātumahārājikādīnaṃ.Saddaṃ sutvāti aññassa cittaṃ ñatvā kathentānaṃ saddaṃ sutvā.Vitakkavipphārasaddanti vitakkavipphāravasena uppannaṃ vippalapantānaṃ suttapamattādīnaṃ saddaṃ.Sutvāti taṃ saddaṃ sutvā. Yaṃ vitakkayato tassa so saddo uppanno, tassa vasena ‘‘evampi te mano’’ti ādisati.Manosaṅkhārā paṇihitāti cittasaṅkhārā suṭṭhapitā.Vitakkessatīti vitakkayissati pavattessatīti pajānāti. Jānanto ca āgamanena jānāti, pubbabhāgena jānāti, antosamāpattiyaṃ cittaṃ oloketvā jānāti.Āgamanena jānātināma kasiṇaparikammakāleyeva yenākārena esa kasiṇabhāvanaṃ āraddho paṭhamajjhānaṃ vā…pe… catutthajjhānaṃ vā aṭṭhasamāpattiyo vā nibbattessatīti jānāti.Pubbabhāgena jānātināma samathavipassanāya āraddhāyeva jānāti, yenākārena esa vipassanaṃ āraddho sotāpattimaggaṃ vā nibbattessati, sakadāgāmimaggaṃ vā nibbattessati, anāgāmimaggaṃ vā nibbattessati, arahattamaggaṃ vā nibbattessatīti jānāti.Antosamāpattiyaṃ cittaṃ oloketvā jānātināma yenākārena imassa manosaṅkhārā suṭṭhapitā, imassa nāma cittassa anantarā imaṃ nāma vitakkaṃ vitakkessati. Ito vuṭṭhitassa etassa hānabhāgiyo vā samādhi bhavissati, ṭhitibhāgiyo vā visesabhāgiyo vā nibbedhabhāgiyo vā abhiññāyo vā nibbattessatīti jānāti.

Tatheva taṃ hotīti idaṃ ekaṃsena tatheva hoti. Cetopariyañāṇavasena ñātañhi aññathābhāvī nāma natthi. Sesaṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Dassanasamāpattidesanāvaṇṇanā

149.Ātappamanvāyātiādi brahmajāle vitthāritameva. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo,ātappanti vīriyaṃ. Tadeva padahitabbatopadhānaṃ.Anuyuñjitabbatoanuyogo.Appamādanti satiavippavāsaṃ.Sammāmanasikāranti anicce aniccantiādivasena pavattaṃ upāyamanasikāraṃ.Cetosamādhinti paṭhamajjhānasamādhiṃ.Ayaṃ paṭhamā dassanasamāpattīti ayaṃ dvattiṃ sākāraṃ paṭikūlato manasikatvā paṭikūladassanavasena uppāditā paṭhamajjhānasamāpatti paṭhamā dassanasamāpatti nāma, sace pana taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā sotāpanno hoti, ayaṃ nippariyāyeneva paṭhamā dassanasamāpatti.

Atikkamma cāti atikkamitvā ca.Chavimaṃsalohitanti chaviñca maṃsañca lohitañca.Aṭṭhiṃ paccavekkhatīti aṭṭhi aṭṭhīti paccavekkhati. Aṭṭhi aṭṭhīti paccavekkhitvā uppāditā aṭṭhiārammaṇā dibbacakkhupādakajjhānasamāpatti dutiyā dassanasamāpatti nāma. Sace pana taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā sakadāgāmimaggaṃ nibbatteti. Ayaṃ nippariyāyena dutiyā dassanasamāpatti. Kāḷavallavāsī sumatthero pana ‘‘yāva tatiyamaggā vaṭṭatī’’ti āha.

Viññāṇasotanti viññāṇameva.Ubhayato abbocchinnanti dvīhipi bhāgehi acchinnaṃ.Idha loke patiṭṭhitañcāti chandarāgavasena imasmiñca loke patiṭṭhitaṃ. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Kammaṃ vā kammato upagacchantaṃ idha loke patiṭṭhitaṃ nāma. Kammabhavaṃ ākaḍḍhantaṃ paraloke patiṭṭhitaṃ nāma. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ? Sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Sekkhaputhujjanānañhi cetopariyañāṇaṃ tatiyā dassanasamāpatti nāma.

Idha loke appatiṭṭhitañcāti nicchandarāgattā idhaloke ca appatiṭṭhitaṃ. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Kammaṃ vā kammato na upagacchantaṃ idha loke appatiṭṭhitaṃ nāma. Kammabhavaṃ anākaḍḍhantaṃ paraloke appatiṭṭhitaṃ nāma. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ? Khīṇāsavassa cetopariyañāṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Khīṇāsavassa hi cetopariyañāṇaṃ catutthā dassanasamāpatti nāma.

Apica dvattiṃsākāre āraddhavipassanāpi paṭhamā dassanasamāpatti. Aṭṭhiārammaṇe āraddhavipassanā dutiyā dassanasamāpatti. Sekkhaputhujjanānaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ khīṇāsavassa cetopariyañāṇanti idaṃ padadvayaṃ niccalameva. Aparo nayo paṭhamajjhānaṃ paṭhamā dassanasamāpatti. Dutiyajjhānaṃ dutiyā. Tatiyajjhānaṃ tatiyā. Catutthajjhānaṃ catutthā dassanasamāpatti. Tathā paṭhamamaggo paṭhamā dassanasamāpatti. Dutiyamaggo dutiyā. Tatiyamaggo tatiyā. Catutthamaggo catutthā dassanasamāpattīti. Sesamettha purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Puggalapaṇṇattidesanāvaṇṇanā

150.Puggalapaṇṇattīsūti lokavohāravasena ‘‘satto puggalo naro poso’’ti evaṃ paññāpetabbāsu lokapaññattīsu. Buddhānañhi dve kathā sammutikathā, paramatthakathāti poṭṭhapādasutte (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.439-443) vitthāritā.

sattime bhante puggalā. Ubhatobhāgavimuttotiādimāha. Tatthaubhatobhāgavimuttoti dvīhi bhāgehi vimutto, arūpasamāpattiyā rūpakāyato vimutto, maggena nāmakāyato. So catunnaṃ arūpasamāpattīnaṃ ekekato vuṭṭhāya saṅkhāre sammasitvā arahattappattānaṃ, catunnaṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhāya arahattappattaanāgāmino ca vasena pañcavidho hoti.

paññāvimutto.So sukkhavipassako ca, catūhi jhānehi vuṭṭhāya arahattaṃ pattā cattāro cāti imesaṃ vasena pañcavidhova hoti.

Pāḷi panettha aṭṭhavimokkhapaṭikkhepavaseneva āgatā. Yathāha ‘‘na heva kho aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharati. Paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo paññāvimutto’’ti (dhātu. 25).

kāyasakkhi.So jhānaphassaṃ paṭhamaṃ phusati, pacchā nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, so sotāpattiphalaṭṭhaṃ ādiṃ katvā yāva arahattamaggaṭṭhā chabbidho hotīti veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘idhekacco puggalo aṭṭha vimokkhe kāyena phusitvā viharati, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo kāyasakkhī’’ti (dhātu. 26).

diṭṭhippatto.Tatridaṃ saṅkhepalakkhaṇaṃ, dukkhā saṅkhārā sukho nirodhoti ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ viditaṃ sacchikataṃ passitaṃ paññāyātidiṭṭhippatto.Vitthārato panesopi kāyasakkhi viya chabbidho hoti. Tenevāha – ‘‘idhekacco puggalo idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti…pe… ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, tathāgatappaveditā cassa dhammā paññāya vodiṭṭhā honti vocaritā, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo diṭṭhippatto’’ti (dhātu. 27).

saddhāvimutto.Sopi vuttanayeneva chabbidho hoti. Tenevāha – ‘‘idhekacco puggalo idaṃ dukkhanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayoti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhoti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, ayaṃ dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, tathāgatappaveditā cassa dhammā paññāya vodiṭṭhā honti vocaritā, paññāya cassa disvā ekacce āsavā parikkhīṇā honti no ca kho yathā diṭṭhippattassa. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo saddhāvimutto’’ti (dhātu. 28). Etesu hi saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe saddahantassa viya, okappentassa viya, adhimuccantassa viya ca kilesakkhayo hoti. Diṭṭhippattassa pubbabhāgamaggakkhaṇe kilesacchedakaṃ ñāṇaṃ adandhaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūraṃ hutvā vahati. Tasmā yathā nāma nātitikhiṇena asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ na maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi na sīghaṃ vahati, saddo suyyati, balavataro vāyāmo kātabbo hoti, evarūpā saddhāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā. Yathā pana atinisitena asinā kadaliṃ chindantassa chinnaṭṭhānaṃ maṭṭhaṃ hoti, asi sīghaṃ vahati, saddo na suyyati, balavataraṃ vāyāmakiccaṃ na hoti, evarūpā paññāvimuttassa pubbabhāgamaggabhāvanā veditabbā.

dhammānusārī. Dhammoti paññā, paññāpubbaṅgamaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetīti attho.Saddhānusārimhipieseva nayo, ubhopete sotāpattimaggaṭṭhāyeva. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘yassa puggalassa sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, paññāvāhiṃ paññāpubbaṅgamaṃ ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo dhammānusārī’’ti.

Tathā ‘‘yassa puggalassa sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāya paṭipannassa saddhindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, saddhāvāhiṃ saddhāpubbaṅgamaṃ ariyamaggaṃ bhāveti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo saddhānusārī’’ti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panesā ubhatobhāgavimuttādikathā visuddhimagge paññābhāvanādhikāre vuttā. Tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Padhānadesanāvaṇṇanā

151.Padhānesūti idha padahanavasena ‘‘satta bojjhaṅgā padhānā’’ti vuttā. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā mahāsatipaṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

151.Padhānesūti: Here, with regard to effort (padhāna), it is said, "The seven factors of enlightenment are efforts." The detailed exposition of these should be understood in the same manner as explained in the Mahāsatipaṭṭhāna. The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

Paṭipadādesanāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Courses of Practice

152.Dukkhapaṭipadādīsu ayaṃ vitthāranayo – ‘‘tattha katamā dukkhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññā paññā? Dukkhena kasirena samādhiṃ uppādentassa dandhaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ abhijānantassa yā paññā pajānanā…pe… amoho dhammavicayo sammādiṭṭhi, ayaṃ vuccati dukkhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññā paññā. Tattha katamā dukkhapaṭipadā khippābhiññā paññā? Dukkhena kasirena samādhiṃ uppādentassa khippaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ abhijānantassa yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, ayaṃ vuccati dukkhapaṭipadā khippābhiññā paññā. Tattha katamā sukhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññā paññā? Akicchena akasirena samādhiṃ uppādentassa dandhaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ abhijānantassa yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, ayaṃ vuccati sukhapaṭipadā dandhābhiññā paññā. Tattha katamā sukhapaṭipadā khippābhiññā paññā? Akicchena akasirena samādhiṃ uppādentassa khippaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ abhijānantassa yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, ayaṃ vuccati sukhapaṭipadā khippābhiññā paññā’’ti (vibha. 801). Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge vutto. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

152.Dukkhapaṭipadā etc.: Here, this is the detailed method: "What is the course of practice that is painful with slow insight? The wisdom of one who generates samādhi with difficulty and hardship, and slowly understands that state, that which is wisdom, knowing…pe… non-delusion, investigation of phenomena, right view, this is called the course of practice that is painful with slow insight. What is the course of practice that is painful with quick insight? The wisdom of one who generates samādhi with difficulty and hardship, and quickly understands that state, that which is wisdom, knowing…pe… right view, this is called the course of practice that is painful with quick insight. What is the course of practice that is pleasant with slow insight? The wisdom of one who generates samādhi without difficulty or hardship, and slowly understands that state, that which is wisdom, knowing…pe… right view, this is called the course of practice that is pleasant with slow insight. What is the course of practice that is pleasant with quick insight? The wisdom of one who generates samādhi without difficulty or hardship, and quickly understands that state, that which is wisdom, knowing…pe… right view, this is called the course of practice that is pleasant with quick insight" (vibha. 801). This is the summary here, but the detailed exposition is stated in the Visuddhimagga. The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

Bhassasamācārādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Talk & Right Livelihood

153.Na ceva musāvādūpasañhitanti bhassasamācāre ṭhitopi kathāmaggaṃ anupacchinditvā kathentopi idhekacco bhikkhu na ceva musāvādūpasañhitaṃ bhāsati. Aṭṭha anariyavohāre vajjetvā aṭṭha ariyavohārayuttameva bhāsati.Naca vebhūtiyanti bhassasamācāre ṭhitopi bhedakaravācaṃ na bhāsati.Na ca pesuṇiyanti tassāyevetaṃ vevacanaṃ. Vebhūtiyavācā hi piyabhāvassa suññakaraṇato ‘‘pesuṇiya’’nti vuccati. Nāmamevassā etanti mahāsīvatthero avoca.Na ca sārambhajanti sārambhajā ca yā vācā, tañca na bhāsati. ‘‘Tvaṃ dussīlo’’ti vutte, ‘‘tvaṃ dussīlo tavācariyo dussīlo’’ti vā, ‘‘tuyhaṃ āpattī’’ti vutte, ‘‘ahaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā pāṭaliputtaṃ gato’’tiādinā nayena bahiddhā vikkhepakathāpavattaṃ vā karaṇuttariyavācaṃ na bhāsati.Jayāpekkhoti jayapurekkhāro hutvā, yathā hatthako sakyaputto titthiyā nāma dhammenapi adhammenapi jetabbāti saccālikaṃ yaṃkiñci bhāsati, evaṃ jayāpekkho jayapurekkhāro hutvā na bhāsatīti attho.Mantā mantā ca vācaṃ bhāsatīti ettha mantāti vuccati paññā, mantāya paññāya. Puna mantāti upaparikkhitvā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, bhassasamācāre ṭhito divasabhāgampi kathento paññāya upaparikkhitvā yuttakathameva kathetīti.Nidhānavatinti hadayepi nidahitabbayuttaṃ.Kālenāti yuttapattakālena.

153.Na ceva musāvādūpasañhitaṃ: Even while engaged in talk (bhassasamācāra), without interrupting the flow of conversation, a certain bhikkhu here does not speak with falsehood (musāvāda). Avoiding the eight kinds of ignoble speech, he speaks only with the eight kinds of noble speech. Na ca vebhūtiyaṃ: Even while engaged in talk, he does not speak divisive speech. Na ca pesuṇiyaṃ: This is another term for that same thing. Divisive speech is called "pesuṇiya" because it empties out affection. The Great Sīva Thera said that this is simply its name. Na ca sārambhajaṃ: And he does not speak speech that is quarrelsome (sārambhajā). If someone says, "You are immoral," he does not say, "You are immoral, your teacher is immoral," or if someone says, "You have an offense," he does not utter speech that deflects to external matters, such as "I went on alms round and went to Pāṭaliputta," in the manner of initiating talk that digresses outward. Jayāpekkho: Not being one who anticipates victory, just as Hatthaka the Sakyan said to the non-Buddhists that they should be conquered by Dhamma or by non-Dhamma, he does not speak just anything that is false. Thus, he does not speak anticipating victory. Mantā mantā ca vācaṃ bhāsatī: Here, mantā is said to be wisdom (paññā); with wisdom. Again, mantā: having investigated. This is what is said: even while engaged in talk, even speaking for a portion of the day, he speaks only what is fitting, having investigated with wisdom. Nidhānavatiṃ: Fitting to be placed even in the heart. Kālena: At the appropriate time.

etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, bhassasamācāreti taṃ purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, bhassasamācāre: That should be connected in the same manner as before.

Sacco cassa saddho cāti sīlācāre ṭhito bhikkhu sacco ca bhaveyya saccakatho saddho ca saddhāsampanno. Nanu heṭṭhā saccaṃ kathitameva, idha kasmā puna vuttanti? Heṭṭhā vācāsaccaṃ kathitaṃ. Sīlācāre ṭhito pana bhikkhu antamaso hasanakathāyapi musāvādaṃ na karotīti dassetuṃ idha vuttaṃ. Idāni so dhammena samena jīvitaṃ kappetīti dassanatthaṃna ca kuhakotiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kuhako’’tiādīni brahmajāle vitthāritāni.

Sacco cassa saddho cā: A bhikkhu established in conduct regarding virtue (sīlācāra) should be truthful (sacco), one who speaks truthfully, and faithful (saddho), endowed with faith. But didn’t we already speak of truth below? Why is it said again here? Below, we spoke of truthfulness of speech. Here it is said to show that a bhikkhu established in conduct regarding virtue does not engage in falsehood even in jest. Now, to show that he maintains his life in accordance with Dhamma and equity, na ca kuhako etc., is said. There, "kuhako" etc., are explained in detail in the Brahmajāla Sutta.

Indriyesu guttadvāro, bhojane mattaññūti chasu indriyesu guttadvāro bhojanepi pamāṇaññū.Samakārīti samacārī, kāyena vācāya manasā ca kāyavaṅkādīni pahāya samaṃ caratīti attho.Jāgariyānuyogamanuyuttoti rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā ‘‘divasaṃ caṅkamena nisajjāyā’’ti vuttanayeneva jāgariyānuyogaṃ yuttappayutto viharati.Atanditoti nittandī kāyālasiyavirahito.Āraddhavīriyoti kāyikavīriyenāpi āraddhavīriyo hoti, gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā catūsu iriyāpathesu aṭṭhaārabbhavatthuvasena ekavihārī. Cetasikavīriyenāpi āraddhavīriyo hoti, kilesasaṅgaṇikaṃ pahāya vinodetvā aṭṭhasamāpattivasena ekavihārī. Api ca yathā tathā kilesuppattiṃ nivārento cetasikavīriyena āraddhavīriyo hoti.Jhāyīti ārammaṇalakkhaṇūpanijjhānavasena jhāyī.Satimāti cirakatādianussaraṇasamatthāya satiyā samannāgato.

Indriyesu guttadvāro, bhojane mattaññū: Guarded in the six senses, and knowing moderation in food as well. Samakārī: One who behaves equitably; behaving equitably with body, speech, and mind, having abandoned bodily crookedness etc. This is the meaning. Jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto: Devoting himself to wakefulness, dividing the day and night into six portions, he lives devoted to wakefulness in the manner stated as "during the day by walking and sitting." Atandito: Unwearied, devoid of bodily laziness. Āraddhavīriyo: He is one who has aroused energy even with bodily energy, having dispelled association with groups, living alone in the four postures, on the basis of the eight foundations for arousing effort. He is one who has aroused energy even with mental energy, having abandoned and dispelled association with defilements, living alone through the eight attainments (samāpatti). Moreover, he is one who has aroused energy with mental energy, preventing the arising of defilements in whatever way possible. Jhāyī: One who meditates in terms of focusing on the characteristic and approaching. Satimā: Endowed with mindfulness that is capable of recollecting what was done long ago etc.

Kalyāṇapaṭibhānoti vākkaraṇasampanno ceva hoti paṭibhānasampanno ca. Yuttapaṭibhāno kho pana hoti no muttapaṭibhāno. Sīlasamācārasmiñhi ṭhitabhikkhu muttapaṭibhāno na hoti, yuttapaṭibhāno pana hoti vaṅgīsatthero viya.Gatimāti gamanasamatthāya paññāya samannāgato.Dhitimāti dhāraṇasamatthāya paññāya samannāgato.Matimāti ettha pana matīti paññāya nāmameva, tasmā paññavāti attho. Iti tīhipi imehi padehi paññāva kathitā. Tattha heṭṭhā samaṇadhammakaraṇavīriyaṃ kathitaṃ, idha buddhavacanagaṇhanavīriyaṃ. Tathā heṭṭhā vipassanāpaññā kathitā, idha buddhavacanagaṇhanapaññā.Na ca kāmesu giddhoti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu agiddho.Sato ca nipako cāti abhikkantapaṭikkantādīsu sattasu ṭhānesu satiyā ceva ñāṇena ca samannāgato caratīti attho. Nepakkanti paññā, tāya samannāgatattā nipakoti vutto. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Kalyāṇapaṭibhāno: He is skilled in speaking and endowed with ready wit. However, he has appropriate wit, not wit that is unrestrained. For a bhikkhu established in conduct regarding virtue does not have unrestrained wit, but has appropriate wit, like the Elder Vaṅgīsa. Gatimā: Endowed with wisdom that is capable of going (gamanasamatthāya paññāya). Dhitimā: Endowed with wisdom that is capable of retaining (dhāraṇasamatthāya paññāya). Matimā: Here, mati is simply a name for wisdom; therefore, it means wise. Thus, with these three terms, wisdom itself is spoken of. There, below, we spoke of the energy for performing the duties of a contemplative, here, the energy for retaining the Buddha’s word. Likewise, below, we spoke of insight wisdom, here, the wisdom for retaining the Buddha’s word. Na ca kāmesu giddho: Not greedy for sense pleasures regarding object-desires and defilement-desires. Sato ca nipako cā: In going forward, going back, and the other seven instances, he behaves endowed with both mindfulness and knowledge. Nepakka means wisdom; because he is endowed with that, he is said to be discerning (nipako). The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

Anusāsanavidhādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Method of Instruction etc.

154.Paccattaṃ yoniso manasikārāti attano upāyamanasikārena.Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipajjamānoti yathā mayā anusiṭṭhaṃ anusāsanī dinnā, tathā paṭipajjamāno.Tiṇṇaṃsaṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayātiādi vuttatthameva. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

154.Paccattaṃ yoniso manasikārā: By attending appropriately to himself. Yathānusiṭṭhaṃ tathā paṭipajjamāno: Just as I have instructed, just as the instruction has been given, behaving accordingly. Tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā: The meaning has been stated already. The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

155.Parapuggalavimuttiñāṇeti sotāpannādīnaṃ parapuggalānaṃ tena tena maggena kilesavimuttiñāṇe. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

155.Parapuggalavimuttiñāṇe: In the knowledge of the liberation from defilements of other individuals, such as stream-enterers, by that particular path. The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

156.Amutrāsiṃ evaṃnāmoti eko pubbenivāsaṃ anussaranto nāmagottaṃ pariyādiyamāno gacchati. Eko suddhakhandheyeva anussarati, eko hi sakkoti, eko na sakkoti. Tattha yo sakkoti, tassa vasena aggahetvā asakkontassa vasena gahitaṃ. Asakkonto pana kiṃ karoti? Suddhakhandheyeva anussaranto gantvā anekajātisatasahassamatthake ṭhatvā nāmagottaṃ pariyādiyamāno otarati. Taṃ dassentoevaṃnāmotiādimāha.So evamāhāti so diṭṭhigatiko evamāha. Tattha kiñcāpi sassatoti vatvā ‘‘te ca sattā saṃsarantī’’ti vadantassa vacanaṃ pubbāparaviruddhaṃ hoti. Diṭṭhigatikattā panesa etaṃ na sallakkhesi. Diṭṭhigatikassa hi ṭhānaṃ vā niyamo vā natthi. Imaṃ gahetvā imaṃ vissajjeti, imaṃ vissajjetvā imaṃ gaṇhātīti brahmajāle vitthāritamevetaṃ.Ayaṃ tatiyo sassatavādoti thero lābhisseva vasena tayo sassatavāde āha. Bhagavatā pana takkīvādampi gahetvā brahmajāle cattāro vuttā. Etesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ vādānaṃ vitthārakathā brahmajāle (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.30) vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva vitthāretabbaṃ.

156.Amutrāsiṃ evaṃnāmo: One, recollecting a past life, proceeds declaring the name and clan. One recollects only the pure aggregates; one is able, one is not able. There, what is taken is with regard to the one who is not able, not taking the one who is able. But what does the one who is not able do? Recollecting only the pure aggregates, having gone and stood at the head of hundreds of thousands of births, he descends declaring the name and clan. Showing that, he said evaṃnāmo etc. So evamāhā: That adherent of a view says thus. There, although he says that it is eternal (sassato) and then says "and those beings transmigrate," his speech is contradictory in its earlier and later parts. But because he adheres to a view, he does not notice this. For there is no basis or consistency for one who adheres to a view. He dismisses this and takes that, he dismisses that and takes this; this is explained in detail in the Brahmajāla Sutta. Ayaṃ tatiyo sassatavādo: The Elder spoke of the three eternalist views (sassatavāda) only with regard to gain. But the Blessed One, including the view based on reasoning, spoke of four in the Brahmajāla Sutta. However, the detailed explanation of these three views should be understood in the same manner as explained in the Brahmajāla Sutta (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.30). The rest should be elaborated here in the same way as before.

157.Gaṇanāya vāti piṇḍagaṇanāya.Saṅkhānenāti acchiddakavasena manogaṇanāya. Ubhayathāpi piṇḍagaṇanameva dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, vassānaṃ satavasena sahassavasena satasahassavasena koṭivasena piṇḍaṃ katvāpi ettakāni vassasatānīti vā ettakā vassakoṭiyoti vā evaṃ saṅkhātuṃ na sakkā. Tumhe pana attano dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ pūritattā sabbaññutaññāṇassa suppaṭividdhattā yasmā vo anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ sūraṃ vahati. Tasmā desanāñāṇakusalataṃ purakkhatvā vassagaṇanāyapi pariyantikaṃ katvā kappagaṇanāyapi paricchinditvā ettakanti dassethāti dīpeti. Pāḷiyattho panettha vuttanayoyeva. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

157.Gaṇanāya vā: By counting groups. Saṅkhānenā: By mental counting in a way that is unbroken. In both ways, it shows only the counting of groups. This is what is said: even having made a group of hundreds of years, thousands of years, hundreds of thousands of years, millions of years, it is not possible to count thus: "so many hundreds of years" or "so many millions of years." But because you have completely fulfilled your ten perfections (pāramī), because of the complete penetration of the knowledge of omniscience, since your unobstructed knowledge carries the burden, therefore, giving precedence to skill in the knowledge of teaching, even having made an end to the counting of years, even having defined the counting of aeons (kappa), you demonstrate that it is "so much," he reveals. The meaning of the Pali here is in the manner stated already. The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

158.Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇeti bhante yāpi ayaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena ñāṇadesanā, sāpi tumhākaṃyeva anuttarā. Atītabuddhāpi evameva desesuṃ. Anāgatāpi evameva desessanti. Tumhe tesaṃ atītānāgatabuddhānaṃ ñāṇena saṃsanditvāva desayittha. ‘‘Imināpi kāraṇena evaṃpasanno ahaṃ bhante bhagavatī’’ti dīpeti. Pāḷiyattho panettha vitthāritoyeva.

158.Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇe: Venerable sir, that exposition of knowledge by way of the deceasing and rebirth of beings is unsurpassed only in you. Past Buddhas also taught in just this way. Future Buddhas also will teach in just this way. Having compared it with the knowledge of those Buddhas of the past and future, you have taught it. "For this reason too, I am thus pleased with the Blessed One, venerable sir," he reveals. The meaning of the Pali here is already elaborated.

159.Sāsavā saupadhikāti sadosā saupārambhā.No ariyāti vuccatīti ariyiddhīti na vuccati.Anāsavā anupadhikāti niddosā anupārambhā.Ariyāti vuccatīti ariyiddhīti vuccati.Appaṭikūlasaññītattha viharatīti kathaṃ appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharatīti? Paṭikūle satte mettaṃ pharati, saṅkhāre dhātusaññaṃ upasaṃharati. Yathāha ‘‘kathaṃ paṭikūle appaṭikūlasaññī viharati (paṭi. ma. 3.97)? Aniṭṭhasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ mettāya vā pharati, dhātuto vā upasaṃharatī’’ti.Paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharatīti appaṭikūle satte asubhasaññaṃ pharati, saṅkhāre aniccasaññaṃ upasaṃharati. Yathāha ‘‘kathaṃ appaṭikūle paṭikūlasaññī viharati? Iṭṭhasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ asubhāya vā pharati, aniccato vā upasaṃharatī’’ti. Evaṃ sesapadesupi attho veditabbo.

159.Sāsavā saupadhikā: With flaws, with obstacles. No ariyāti vuccatī: It is not called noble supernormal power. Anāsavā anupadhikā: Without flaws, without obstacles. Ariyāti vuccatī: It is called noble supernormal power. Appaṭikūlasaññī tattha viharatī: How does he abide there perceiving non-repulsiveness? He suffuses beings that are repulsive with loving-kindness, he applies the designation of elements to formations. As he said, "How does he abide perceiving non-repulsiveness in what is repulsive (paṭi. ma. 3.97)? He suffuses an undesirable object with loving-kindness or he applies the designation of elements." Paṭikūlasaññī tattha viharatī: He suffuses beings that are non-repulsive with the perception of unattractiveness, he applies the perception of impermanence to formations. As he said, "How does he abide perceiving repulsiveness in what is non-repulsive? He suffuses a desirable object with unattractiveness or he applies the perception of impermanence." The meaning should be understood in this way in the remaining terms as well.

Upekkhako tattha viharatīti iṭṭhe arajjanto aniṭṭhe adussanto yathā aññe asamapekkhanena mohaṃ uppādenti, evaṃ anuppādento chasu ārammaṇesu chaḷaṅgupekkhāya upekkhako viharati.Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, iddhividhāsūti, bhante, yā ayaṃ dvīsu iddhīsu evaṃdesanā, etadānuttariyaṃ.Taṃ bhagavāti taṃ desanaṃ bhagavā asesaṃ sakalaṃ abhijānāti.Taṃ bhagavatoti taṃ desanaṃ bhagavato asesaṃ abhijānato.Uttari abhiññeyyaṃ natthīti uttari abhijānitabbaṃ natthi. Ayaṃ nāma ito añño dhammo vā puggalo vā yaṃ bhagavā na jānāti idaṃ natthi.Yadabhijānaṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vāti yaṃ tumhehi anabhiññātaṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā abhijānanto bhagavatā bhiyyobhiññataro assa, adhikatarapañño bhaveyya.Yadidaṃ iddhividhāsūti etthayadidanti nipātamattaṃ. Iddhividhāsu bhagavatā uttaritaro natthi. Atītabuddhāpi hi imā dve iddhiyo desesuṃ, anāgatāpi imāva desessanti. Tumhepi tesaṃ ñāṇena saṃsanditvā imāva desayittha. Iti bhagavā iddhividhāsu anuttaroti dassento ‘‘imināpi kāraṇena evaṃpasanno ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatī’’ti dīpeti. Ettāvatā ye dhammasenāpati divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā soḷasa aparampariyadhamme sammasi, teva dassitā honti.

Upekkhako tattha viharatī: Not being attached to what is desirable, not being averse to what is undesirable, just as others generate delusion by means of inappropriate equanimity, without generating it, he abides with equanimity in the six sense objects through equanimity in the six aspects (chaḷaṅgupekkhā). Etadānuttariyaṃ, bhante, iddhividhāsū: Venerable sir, that teaching in this way regarding the two kinds of supernormal power is unsurpassed. Taṃ bhagavā: The Blessed One fully knows that teaching entirely. Taṃ bhagavato: The Blessed One knows that teaching entirely. Uttari abhiññeyyaṃ natthī: There is nothing further to be known. There is no other Dhamma or individual that the Blessed One does not know. Yadabhijānaṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā: If another contemplative or brahmin, knowing what you do not know, would be more knowledgeable than the Blessed One, would have greater wisdom. Yadidaṃ iddhividhāsū: Here, yadidaṃ is merely an expletive. There is no one superior to the Blessed One in supernormal powers. For past Buddhas also taught these two kinds of supernormal power, future Buddhas also will teach these same two. Having compared it with their knowledge, you have taught these same two. Thus, showing that the Blessed One is unsurpassed in supernormal powers, he reveals, "For this reason too, I am thus pleased with the Blessed One, venerable sir." Thus, to this extent, those sixteen qualities of the unbroken tradition (aparampariyadhamma) that the Dhamma-commander contemplates while sitting in the day quarters have been shown.

Aññathāsatthuguṇadassanādivaṇṇanā
Explanation of Showing Other Qualities of the Teacher etc.

160.Idāni aparenapi ākārena bhagavato guṇe dassentoyaṃ taṃ bhantetiādimāha. Tatthasaddhena kulaputtenāti saddhā kulaputtā nāma atītānāgatapaccuppannā bodhisattā. Tasmā yaṃ sabbaññubodhisattena pattabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ pana tena pattabbaṃ? Nava lokuttaradhammā.Āraddhavīriyenātiādīsu ‘‘vīriyaṃ thāmo’’tiādīni sabbāneva vīriyavevacanāni. Tatthaāraddhavīriyenāti paggahitavīriyena.Thāmavatāti thāmasampannena thiravīriyena.Purisathāmenāti tena thāmavatā yaṃ purisathāmena pattabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anantarapadadvayepi eseva nayo.Purisadhorayhenāti yā asamadhurehi buddhehi vahitabbā dhurā, taṃ dhuraṃ vahanasamatthena mahāpurisena.Anuppattaṃ taṃ bhagavatāti taṃ sabbaṃ atītānāgatabuddhehi pattabbaṃ, sabbameva anuppattaṃ, bhagavato ekaguṇopi ūno natthīti dasseti.Kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyoganti vatthukāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ. Yathā aññe keṇiyajaṭilādayo samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘ko jānāti paralokaṃ. Sukho imissā paribbājikāya mudukāya lomasāya bāhāya samphasso’’ti moḷibandhāhi paribbājikāhi paricārenti sampattaṃ sampattaṃ rūpādiārammaṇaṃ anubhavamānā kāmasukhamanuyuttā, na evamanuyuttoti dasseti.

160.Now, showing the qualities of the Blessed One in another way, he says yaṃ taṃ bhante etc. There, saddhena kulaputtenā: Faithful sons of good family (kulaputtā) are namely, Bodhisattas of the past, future, and present. Therefore, it is said that which is to be attained by the all-knowing Bodhisatta. But what is to be attained by him? The nine supramundane Dhammas. In āraddhavīriyenā etc., "vīriyaṃ thāmo" etc., are all synonyms for energy. There, āraddhavīriyenā: With aroused energy. Thāmavatā: Endowed with strength, with firm energy. Purisathāmenā: It is said that which is to be attained by that strong one with manly strength. This same method applies in the subsequent two terms as well. Purisadhorayhenā: By a great man who is capable of bearing the burden (dhura) that is to be borne by unequalled Buddhas. Anuppattaṃ taṃ bhagavatā: All of that which is to be attained by the Buddhas of the past and future, all of that has been attained; there is not even one quality lacking in the Blessed One, he shows. Kāmesu kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ: Addiction to sensual pleasure (kāmasukhallikānuyoga) in object-desires. Just as other contemplatives and brahmins, such as the Keṇiya Jaṭilas, saying, "Who knows the next world? Pleasant is the touch of this female ascetic's soft, hairy arm," attend to female ascetics with topknots, experiencing each and every sense object that arrives, being addicted to sensual pleasure, he shows that he is not addicted in that way.

Hīnanti lāmakaṃ.Gammanti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammaṃ.Pothujjanikanti puthujjanehi sevitabbaṃ.Anariyanti na niddosaṃ. Na vā ariyehi sevitabbaṃ.Anatthasañhitanti anatthasaṃyuttaṃ.Attakilamathānuyoganti attano ātāpanaparitāpanānuyogaṃ.Dukkhanti dukkhayuttaṃ, dukkhamaṃ vā. Yathā eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā kāmasukhallikānuyogaṃ parivajjessāmāti kāyakilamathaṃ anudhāvanti, tato muñcissāmāti kāmasukhaṃ anudhāvanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana ubho ete ante vajjetvā yā sā ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, majjhimā paṭipadā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā cakkhukaraṇī’’ti evaṃ vuttā sammāpaṭipatti, tameva paṭipanno. Tasmā ‘‘na ca attakilamathānuyoga’’ntiādimāha.

Hīna means inferior. Gamma means the Dhamma for villagers. Pothujjanika means to be frequented by ordinary people. Anariya means not faultless, or not to be frequented by the Noble Ones. Anatthasañhita means associated with non-benefit. Attakilamathānuyoga means devotion to self-mortification, tormenting oneself. Dukkha means associated with suffering or consisting of suffering. Just as some ascetics and brahmins, thinking they will avoid devotion to sensual pleasures, pursue bodily mortification; thinking they will be liberated from that, they pursue sensual pleasures. The Blessed One is not like that. But the Blessed One, having avoided both these extremes, cultivated that right practice which was said, "There is, monks, a middle way discovered by the Tathāgata, which gives vision." Therefore, he said, "nor to devotion to self-mortification," and so on.

Ābhicetasikānanti abhicetasikānaṃ, kāmāvacaracittāni atikkamitvā ṭhitānanti attho.Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānanti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve sukhavihārānaṃ.Poṭṭhapādasuttantasmiñhi sappītikadutiyajjhānaphalasamāpatti kathitā (dī. ni. 1.432).Pāsādikasuttantesaha maggena vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃ. Dasuttarasuttante catutthajjhānikaphalasamāpatti. Imasmiṃ sampasādanīye diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārajjhānāni kathitāni.Nikāmalābhīti yathākāmalābhī.Akicchalābhīti adukkhalābhī.Akasiralābhīti vipulalābhī.

Ābhicetasikāna means those that are mental, meaning having transcended the sense-sphere minds. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāna means a pleasant abiding in this very existence. For in the Poṭṭhapādasuttanta the fruition attainment of the second jhāna with joy is described (dī. ni. 1.432). In the Pāsādikasuttanta, insight-based jhāna together with the path. In the Dasuttarasuttanta, the fruition attainment of the fourth jhāna. In this Sampasādanīya, jhāna for pleasant abiding in this very existence is described. Nikāmalābhī means obtaining as desired. Akicchalābhī means obtaining without difficulty. Akasiralābhī means obtaining abundantly.

Anuyogadānappakāravaṇṇanā
Description of the Manner of Giving Guidance

161.Ekissā lokadhātuyāti dasasahassilokadhātuyā. Tīṇi hi khettāni – jātikhettaṃ āṇākhettaṃ visayakhettaṃ. Tatthajātikhettaṃnāma dasasahassī lokadhātu. Sā hi tathāgatassa mātukucchiṃ okkamanakāle nikkhamanakāle sambodhikāle dhammacakkappavattane āyusaṅkhārossajjane parinibbāne ca kampati. Koṭisatasahassacakkavāḷaṃ panaāṇākhettaṃnāma. Āṭānāṭiyamoraparittadhajaggaparittaratanaparittādīnañhi ettha āṇā vattati.Visayakhettassapana parimāṇaṃ natthi, buddhānañhi ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ ñeyyaṃ, ñeyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (mahāni. 55) vacanato avisayo nāma natthi.

161.Ekissā lokadhātuyā means in a ten-thousand world-system. For there are three fields: the field of birth, the field of authority, and the field of range. Herein, jātikhettaṃ means the ten-thousand world-system. For it quakes when the Tathāgata enters his mother's womb, at the time of his birth, at the time of enlightenment, at the turning of the Wheel of Dhamma, at the relinquishing of the life-span, and at the parinibbāna. But the hundred-thousand-million world-systems is called the āṇākhettaṃ. For the authority of Āṭānāṭiya, Mora Paritta, Dhajagga Paritta, Ratana Paritta and others prevail here. But there is no limit to the visayakhettassa, for it is said of the Buddhas, "As far as the knowledge, so far the knowable; as far as the knowable, so far the knowledge; the knowable is bounded by knowledge, knowledge is bounded by the knowable" (mahāni. 55), therefore there is nothing that is not their range.

Imesu pana tīsu khettesu ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantīti suttaṃ natthi, nuppañjantīti pana atthi. Tīṇi piṭakāni vinayapiṭakaṃ, suttantapiṭakaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ. Tisso saṅgītiyo mahākassapattherassa saṅgīti, yasattherassa saṅgīti, moggaliputtatissattherassa saṅgītīti. Imā tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane ‘‘imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ muñcitvā aññattha buddhā uppajjantī’’ti suttaṃ natthi, nuppajjantīti pana atthi.

Among these three fields, there is no sutta that Buddhas arise in another world-system besides this one, excluding this world-system; but there is [a sutta saying] that they do not arise. The three Piṭakas [are]: the Vinaya Piṭaka, the Suttanta Piṭaka, and the Abhidhamma Piṭaka. The three councils [are]: the council of Mahākassapa Thera, the council of Yasa Thera, and the council of Moggaliputta Tissa Thera. In these three councils, in the entire Tipiṭaka, in the Buddha's teachings, there is no sutta that "Buddhas arise elsewhere excluding this world-system," but there is [a sutta saying] that they do not arise.

Apubbaṃ acarimanti apure apacchā ekato nuppajjanti, pure vā pacchā vā uppajjantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha bodhipallaṅke ‘‘bodhiṃ apatvā na uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya yāva mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇaṃ, tāva pubbeti na veditabbaṃ. Bodhisattassa hi paṭisandhiggahaṇe dasasahassacakkavāḷakampaneneva khettapariggaho kato. Aññassa buddhassa uppattipi nivāritā hoti. Parinibbānato paṭṭhāya ca yāva sāsapamattāpi dhātuyo tiṭṭhanti, tāva pacchāti na veditabbaṃ. Dhātūsu hi ṭhitāsu buddhāpi ṭhitāva honti. Tasmā etthantare aññassa buddhassa uppatti nivāritāva hoti. Dhātuparinibbāne pana jāte aññassa buddhassa uppatti na nivāritā.

Apubbaṃ acarima means they do not arise simultaneously, neither before nor after, it is said that they arise either before or after. Herein, from the time of sitting at the Bodhi-pallaṅka, [thinking] "Without attaining enlightenment, I will not rise," up to the conception in the mother's womb, one should not consider that as 'before'. For at the conception of the Bodhisatta, the field was demarcated by the quaking of the ten-thousand world-system. The arising of another Buddha is also prevented. And from the parinibbāna up to the time when even mustard-seed sized relics remain, one should not consider that as 'after'. For while the relics remain, the Buddhas are indeed considered to remain. Therefore, in this interval, the arising of another Buddha is indeed prevented. But when the relic-parinibbāna has occurred, the arising of another Buddha is not prevented.

Tipiṭakaantaradhānakathā
Account of the Disappearance of the Tipiṭaka

Tīṇi antaradhānānināma pariyattiantaradhānaṃ, paṭivedhaantaradhānaṃ, paṭipattiantaradhānanti. Tatthapariyattīti tīṇi piṭakāni.Paṭivedhoti saccappaṭivedho.Paṭipattīti paṭipadā. Tattha paṭivedho ca paṭipatti ca hotipi na hotipi. Ekasmiñhi kāle paṭivedhakarā bhikkhū bahū honti, esa bhikkhu puthujjanoti aṅguliṃ pasāretvā dassetabbo hoti. Imasmiṃyeva dīpe ekavāraṃ puthujjanabhikkhu nāma nāhosi. Paṭipattipūrakāpi kadāci bahū honti, kadāci appā. Iti paṭivedho ca paṭipatti ca hotipi na hotipi. Sāsanaṭṭhitiyā pana pariyatti pamāṇaṃ. Paṇḍito hi tepiṭakaṃ sutvā dvepi pūreti.

Tīṇi antaradhānāni means three disappearances: the disappearance of the teaching, the disappearance of realization, and the disappearance of practice. Herein, pariyattī means the three Piṭakas. Paṭivedho means the realization of the Truths. Paṭipattī means the practice. Herein, realization and practice, both can exist and not exist. For at one time there are many monks who realize, [to the point that] this monk is a worldling, has to be pointed out with a finger. At one time in this very island, there was no such thing as a worldling monk. And those who fulfill the practice are sometimes many, sometimes few. Thus, realization and practice, both can exist and not exist. But for the stability of the Sāsana, the teaching is the measure. For the wise one, having heard the Tipiṭaka, fulfills both.

Yathā amhākaṃ bodhisatto āḷārassa santike pañcābhiññā satta ca samāpattiyo nibbattetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā parikammaṃ pucchi, so na jānāmīti āha. Tato udakassa santikaṃ gantvā adhigatavisesaṃ saṃsanditvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanassa parikammaṃ pucchi, so ācikkhi, tassa vacanasamanantarameva mahāsatto taṃ jhānaṃ sampādesi, evameva paññavā bhikkhu pariyattiṃ sutvā dvepi pūreti. Tasmā pariyattiyā ṭhitāya sāsanaṃ ṭhitaṃ hoti. Yadā pana sā antaradhāyati, tadā paṭhamaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ nassati. Tattha paṭṭhānaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ antaradhāyati. Anukkamena pacchā dhammasaṅgaho, tasmiṃ antarahite itaresu dvīsu piṭakesu ṭhitesupi sāsanaṃ ṭhitameva hoti.

Just as our Bodhisatta, having developed the five supernormal knowledges and the seven attainments in the presence of Āḷāra, asked about the preliminary work for the attainment of the state of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, he said, "I do not know." Then having gone to the presence of Udaka, having compared the attained distinction, he asked about the preliminary work for the attainment of the state of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, he explained, and immediately upon his words, the Great Being accomplished that jhāna. Just so, the wise monk, having heard the teaching, fulfills both. Therefore, with the teaching remaining, the Sāsana remains. But when that disappears, then first the Abhidhamma Piṭaka vanishes. Therein, the Paṭṭhāna disappears first of all. Gradually afterwards the Dhammasaṅgaha. When that has disappeared, even when the other two Piṭakas remain, the Sāsana still remains.

Tattha suttantapiṭake antaradhāyamāne paṭhamaṃ aṅguttaranikāyo ekādasakato paṭṭhāya yāva ekakā antaradhāyati, tadanantaraṃ saṃyuttanikāyo cakkapeyyālato paṭṭhāya yāva oghataraṇā antaradhāyati. Tadanantaraṃ majjhimanikāyo indriyabhāvanato paṭṭhāya yāva mūlapariyāyā antaradhāyati. Tadanantaraṃ dīghanikāyo dasuttarato paṭṭhāya yāva brahmajālā antaradhāyati. Ekissāpi dvinnampi gāthānaṃ pucchā addhānaṃ gacchati, sāsanaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkoti, sabhiyapucchā āḷavakapucchā viya ca. Etā kira kassapabuddhakālikā antarā sāsanaṃ dhāretuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu.

Therein, when the Suttanta Piṭaka is disappearing, first the Aṅguttara Nikāya disappears from the eleventh onwards down to the first. After that, the Saṃyutta Nikāya disappears from the Cakkapeyyāla onwards down to the Oghataraṇa. After that, the Majjhima Nikāya disappears from the Indriyabhāvana onwards down to the Mūlapariyāya. After that, the Dīgha Nikāya disappears from the Dasuttara onwards down to the Brahmajāla. Even the inquiry of one or two verses goes a long way, it is not able to sustain the Sāsana, like the Sabhiya's question and the Āḷavaka's question. It seems that those [questions] from the time of Kassapa Buddha were unable to sustain the Sāsana in between.

Paṭisambhidāpattehivassasahassaṃ aṭṭhāsi.Chaḷabhiññehivassasahassaṃ.Tevijjehivassasahassaṃ.Sukkhavipassakehivassasahassaṃ.Pātimokkhehivassasahassaṃ aṭṭhāsi. Pacchimakassa pana saccappaṭivedhato pacchimakassa sīlabhedato paṭṭhāya sāsanaṃ osakkitaṃ nāma hoti. Tato paṭṭhāya aññassa buddhassa uppatti na nivāritā.

It stood for a thousand years with Paṭisambhidāpatta. It stood for a thousand years with Chaḷabhiñña. It stood for a thousand years with Tevijja. It stood for a thousand years with Sukkhavipassaka. It stood for a thousand years with Pātimokkha. But from the final realization of the Truths, from the final breaking of sīla, the Sāsana is said to be in decline. From then on, the arising of another Buddha is not prevented.

Sāsanaantarahitavaṇṇanā
Description of the Disappearance of the Sāsana

Tīṇi parinibbānānināma kilesaparinibbānaṃ khandhaparinibbānaṃ dhātuparinibbānanti. Tattha kilesaparinibbānaṃ bodhipallaṅke ahosi. Khandhaparinibbānaṃ kusinārāyaṃ. Dhātuparinibbānaṃ anāgate bhavissati. Sāsanassa kira osakkanakāle imasmiṃ tambapaṇṇidīpe dhātuyo sannipatitvā mahācetiyaṃ gamissanti. Mahācetiyato nāgadīpe rājāyatanacetiyaṃ. Tato mahābodhipallaṅkaṃ gamissanti. Nāgabhavanatopi devalokatopi brahmalokatopi dhātuyo mahābodhipallaṅkameva gamissanti. Sāsapamattāpi dhātuyo na antarā nassissanti. Sabbadhātuyo mahābodhipallaṅke rāsibhūtā suvaṇṇakkhandho viya ekagghanā hutvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo vissajjessanti.

Tīṇi parinibbānāni means three parinibbānas: the parinibbāna of defilements, the parinibbāna of aggregates, and the parinibbāna of relics. Therein, the parinibbāna of defilements occurred at the Bodhi-pallaṅka. The parinibbāna of aggregates in Kusinārā. The parinibbāna of relics will occur in the future. It is said that at the time of the decline of the Sāsana, in this island of Tambapaṇṇi, the relics will gather together and go to the Mahācetiya. From the Mahācetiya to the Rājāyatana Cetiya in Nāgadīpa. Then they will go to the Mahābodhipallaṅka. From the Nāga-abode, from the deva-world, and from the Brahma-world, the relics will go to the Mahābodhipallaṅka. Even mustard-seed sized relics will not perish in between. All the relics, gathered together at the Mahābodhipallaṅka, having become a single mass like a golden pillar, will emit six-colored rays.

Tā dasasahassilokadhātuṃ pharissanti, tato dasasahassacakkavāḷadevatā sannipatitvā ‘‘ajja satthā parinibbāti, ajja sāsanaṃ osakkati, pacchimadassanaṃ dāni idaṃ amhāka’’nti dasabalassa parinibbutadivasato mahantataraṃ kāruññaṃ karissanti. Ṭhapetvā anāgāmikhīṇāsave avasesā sakabhāvena sandhāretuṃ na sakkhissanti. Dhātūsu tejodhātu uṭṭhahitvā yāva brahmalokā uggacchissati. Sāsapamattāyapi dhātuyā sati ekajālā bhavissati. Dhātūsu pariyādānaṃ gatāsu upacchijjissati. Evaṃ mahantaṃ ānubhāvaṃ dassetvā dhātūsu antarahitāsu sāsanaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma hoti.

They will pervade the ten-thousand world-system, then the devatās of the ten-thousand world-systems, having gathered together, will express a compassion greater than the day of the passing away of the Ten-Powered One, [saying], "Today the Teacher passes away, today the Sāsana declines, this is now our last sight." Except for the anāgāmins and arahants, the remaining ones will not be able to maintain themselves in their natural state. Fire element will arise in the relics and ascend up to the Brahma-world. There will be a single flame even if there is a mustard-seed sized relic. When the relics have reached their end, it will cease. Thus, having shown such great power, when the relics have disappeared, the Sāsana is said to have disappeared.

Yāva na evaṃ antaradhāyati, tāva acarimaṃ nāma hoti. Evaṃ apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyuṃ, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Kasmā pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ nuppajjantīti? Anacchariyattā. Buddhā hi acchariyamanussā. Yathāha – ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati acchariyamanusso. Katamo ekapuggalo? Tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’ti (a. ni. 1.172). Yadi ca dve vā cattāro vā aṭṭha vā soḷasa vā ekato uppajjeyyuṃ, anacchariyā bhaveyyuṃ. Ekasmiñhi vihāre dvinnaṃ cetiyānampi lābhasakkāro uḷāro na hoti. Bhikkhūpi bahutāya na acchariyā jātā, evaṃ buddhāpi bhaveyyuṃ, tasmā nuppajjanti. Desanāya ca visesābhāvato. Yañhi satipaṭṭhānādibhedaṃ dhammaṃ eko deseti. Aññena uppajjitvāpi sova desetabbo siyā, tato anacchariyo siyā. Ekasmiṃ pana dhammaṃ desente desanāpi acchariyā hoti, vivādabhāvato ca. Bahūsu hi buddhesu uppannesu bahūnaṃ ācariyānaṃ antevāsikā viya amhākaṃ buddho pāsādiko, amhākaṃ buddho madhurassaro lābhī puññavāti vivadeyyuṃ. Tasmāpi evaṃ nuppajjanti. Api cetaṃ kāraṇaṃ milindaraññāpi puṭṭhena nāgasenattherena vitthāritameva. Vuttañhi tattha –

As long as it does not disappear thus, it is called not final. It is not possible that they would arise thus, neither before nor final. Why do they not arise thus, neither before nor final? Because of the lack of extraordinariness. For Buddhas are extraordinary humans. As he said, "A unique person, monks, being born in the world, is born for the benefit of many people, for the happiness of many people, out of compassion for the world, for the benefit, happiness, and welfare of devas and humans. Who is that unique person? The Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One" (a. ni. 1.22). And if two or four or eight or sixteen were to arise together, they would not be extraordinary. For even in one monastery, the gain and honor for two shrines is not abundant. Even monks, because of their great number, do not become extraordinary, so too would Buddhas be, therefore they do not arise. And because of the lack of distinction in the teaching. For the Dhamma that one teaches, with its distinctions of the four foundations of mindfulness and so on. Even if another were to arise, he would have to teach the same, then he would not be extraordinary. But when one teaches the Dhamma, the teaching is also extraordinary. And because of the presence of disputes. For if many Buddhas arose, they would dispute, like the disciples of many teachers, [saying] "Our Buddha is pleasing, our Buddha has a sweet voice, is a gainer, is meritorious." Therefore, they do not arise thus. Moreover, this reason has also been elaborated by Nāgasena Thera when questioned by King Milinda. For it was said there -

Bhante, nāgasena, bhāsitampi hetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyuṃ, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti. Desayantā ca, bhante nāgasena, sabbepi tathāgatā sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiye dhamme desenti, kathayamānā ca cattāri ariyasaccāni kathenti, sikkhāpentā ca tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhāpenti, anusāsamānā ca appamādappaṭipattiyaṃ anusāsanti. Yadi, bhante nāgasena, sabbesampi tathāgatānaṃ ekā desanā ekā kathā ekasikkhā ekānusāsanī, kena kāraṇena dve tathāgatā ekakkhaṇe nuppajjanti. Ekenapi tāva buddhuppādena ayaṃ loko obhāsajāto, yadi dutiyo buddho bhaveyya, dvinnaṃ pabhāya ayaṃ loko bhiyyosomattāya obhāsajāto bhaveyya, ovadamānā ca dve tathāgatā sukhaṃ ovadeyyuṃ, anusāsamānā ca sukhaṃ anusāseyyuṃ, tattha me kāraṇaṃ desehi, yathāhaṃ nissaṃsayo bhaveyya’’nti.

"Venerable Nāgasena, was this also spoken by the Blessed One, 'This is impossible, monks, there is no opportunity for two Arahants, Perfectly Enlightened Ones, to arise simultaneously in one world-system; this is not possible'? And, Venerable Nāgasena, all the Tathāgatas teach the thirty-seven factors of enlightenment while teaching, they speak of the four noble truths while speaking, they train in the three trainings while training, and they instruct in diligence while instructing. If, Venerable Nāgasena, the teaching of all the Tathāgatas is the same, the speech is the same, the training is the same, the instruction is the same, for what reason do two Tathāgatas not arise at the same moment? Even with the arising of one Buddha, this world becomes illuminated; if there were a second Buddha, this world would become even more illuminated by the light of two. And two Tathāgatas would instruct comfortably while instructing, and would instruct comfortably while instructing. Therein, explain the reason to me, so that I may be free from doubt.'"

Ayaṃ, mahārāja, dasasahassī lokadhātu ekabuddhadhāraṇī, ekasseva tathāgatassa guṇaṃ dhāreti, yadi dutiyo buddho uppajjeyya, nāyaṃ dasasahassī lokadhātu dhāreyya, caleyya, kampeyya, nameyya, oṇameyya, vinameyya, vikireyya, vidhameyya, viddhaṃseyya, na ṭhānamupagaccheyya.

"This ten-thousand world-system, O Great King, is capable of sustaining [the virtues of] one Buddha; it can sustain the virtue of only one Tathāgata. If a second Buddha were to arise, this ten-thousand world-system would not be able to sustain it; it would shake, tremble, bend, incline, twist, scatter, collapse, be destroyed, and would not reach a stable state.

Yathā, mahārāja, nāvā ekapurisasandhāraṇī bhaveyya, ekapurise abhirūḷhe sā nāvā samupādikā bhaveyya, atha dutiyo puriso āgaccheyya tādiso āyunā vaṇṇena vayena pamāṇena kisathūlena sabbaṅgapaccaṅgena, so taṃ nāvaṃ abhirūheyya, api nu sā, mahārāja, nāvā dvinnampi dhāreyyāti? Na hi, bhante, caleyya, kampeyya, nameyya, oṇameyya, vinameyya, vikireyya, vidhameyya, viddhaṃseyya, na ṭhānamupagaccheyya osīdeyya udaketi. Evameva kho, mahārāja, ayaṃ dasasahassī lokadhātu ekabuddhadhāraṇī, ekasseva tathāgatassa guṇaṃ dhāreti, yadi dutiyo buddho uppajjeyya, nāyaṃ dasasahassī lokadhātu dhāreyya…pe… na ṭhānamupagaccheyya.

Just as, O Great King, a boat might be able to support one person; when one person has boarded, that boat would be suitable; then another person might come, similar in age, complexion, size, and proportions, with all limbs and features. If he were to board that boat, would that boat be able to sustain even the two? No, Venerable Sir, it would shake, tremble, bend, incline, twist, scatter, collapse, be destroyed, and would not reach a stable state; it would sink into the water. Just so, O Great King, this ten-thousand world-system is capable of sustaining [the virtues of] one Buddha; it can sustain the virtue of only one Tathāgata...pe... it would not reach a stable state.

Yathā vā pana, mahārāja, puriso yāvadatthaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjeyya chādentaṃ yāva kaṇṭhamabhipūrayitvā, so dhāto pīṇito paripuṇṇo nirantaro tandīkato anoṇamitadaṇḍajāto punadeva tāvatakaṃ bhojanaṃ bhuñjeyya, api nu kho so, mahārāja, puriso sukhito bhaveyyāti? Na hi, bhante, sakiṃ bhuttova mareyyāti; evameva kho, mahārāja, ayaṃ dasasahassī lokadhātu ekabuddhadhāraṇī …pe… na ṭhānamupagaccheyyāti.

Or again, O Great King, a man might eat food to his satisfaction, filling himself up to his throat; he would be nourished, satisfied, full, continuous, lacking space, like a straight rod. If he were to eat the same amount of food again, would that man be happy? No, Venerable Sir, he would die from eating once. Just so, O Great King, this ten-thousand world-system is capable of sustaining [the virtues of] one Buddha...pe... it would not reach a stable state."

Kiṃ nu kho, bhante nāgasena, atidhammabhārena pathavī calatīti? Idha, mahārāja, dve sakaṭā ratanapūritā bhaveyyuṃ yāva mukhasamā, ekasmā sakaṭato ratanaṃ gahetvā ekasmiṃ sakaṭe ākireyyuṃ, api nu kho taṃ, mahārāja, sakaṭaṃ dvinnampi sakaṭānaṃ ratanaṃ dhāreyyāti? Na hi, bhante, nābhipi tassa phaleyya, arāpi tassa bhijjeyyuṃ, nemipi tassa opateyya, akkhopi tassa bhijjeyyāti. Kiṃ nu kho, mahārāja, atiratanabhārena sakaṭaṃ bhijjatīti? Āma, bhante,ti. Evameva kho, mahārāja, atidhammabhārena pathavī calati.

"Is it because of the burden of excessive Dhamma that the earth shakes, Venerable Nāgasena?" "Here, O Great King, there might be two carts filled with jewels up to the brim. If one were to take jewels from one cart and pile them into one cart, would that cart be able to sustain the jewels of even two carts? No, Venerable Sir, even the nave of it would split, the spokes of it would break, the rim of it would collapse, and the axle of it would break." "Is it because of the burden of excessive jewels that the cart breaks?" "Yes, Venerable Sir." "Just so, O Great King, it is because of the burden of excessive Dhamma that the earth shakes."

Apica, mahārāja, imaṃ kāraṇaṃ buddhabalaparidīpanāya osāritaṃ aññampi tattha atirūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ suṇohi, yena kāraṇena dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe nuppajjanti. Yadi, mahārāja, dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe uppajjeyyuṃ, tesaṃ parisāya vivādo uppajjeyya ‘‘tumhākaṃ buddho amhākaṃ buddho’’ti, ubhato pakkhajātā bhaveyyuṃ. Yathā, mahārāja, dvinnaṃ balavāmaccānaṃ parisāya vivādo uppajjeyya ‘‘tumhākaṃ amacco amhākaṃ amacco’’ti, ubhato pakkhajātā honti; evameva kho, mahārāja, yadi dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe uppajjeyyuṃ, tesaṃ parisāya vivādo uppajjeyya ‘‘tumhākaṃ buddho, amhākaṃ buddho’’ti, ubhato pakkhajātā bhaveyyuṃ, idaṃ tāva, mahārāja, ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ, yena kāraṇena dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe nuppajjanti.

“Indeed, great king, this reason has been put forth to illuminate the power of a Buddha. Listen to another, even more outstanding reason why two Sammāsambuddhas do not arise at the same moment. If, great king, two Sammāsambuddhas were to arise at the same moment, a dispute would arise in their assemblies, saying, ‘Yours is the Buddha; ours is the Buddha.’ There would be partisanship on both sides. Just as, great king, a dispute would arise in the assemblies of two powerful ministers, saying, ‘Yours is the minister; ours is the minister,’ and there would be partisanship on both sides; so too, great king, if two Sammāsambuddhas were to arise at the same moment, a dispute would arise in their assemblies, saying, ‘Yours is the Buddha; ours is the Buddha,’ and there would be partisanship on both sides. This, great king, is one reason why two Sammāsambuddhas do not arise at the same moment.

Aparampi, mahārāja, uttariṃ kāraṇaṃ suṇohi, yena kāraṇena dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe nuppajjanti. Yadi, mahārāja, dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe uppajjeyyuṃ, ‘‘aggo buddho’’ti yaṃ vacanaṃ, taṃ micchā bhaveyya, ‘‘jeṭṭho buddho’’ti, seṭṭho buddhoti, visiṭṭho buddhoti, uttamo buddhoti, pavaro buddhoti, asamo buddhoti, asamasamo buddhoti, appaṭimo buddhoti, appaṭibhāgo buddhoti, appaṭipuggalo buddhoti yaṃ vacanaṃ, taṃ micchā bhaveyya. Imampi kho tvaṃ, mahārāja, kāraṇaṃ atthato sampaṭiccha, yena kāraṇena dve sammāsambuddhā ekakkhaṇe nuppajjanti.

“Furthermore, great king, listen to a superior reason why two Sammāsambuddhas do not arise at the same moment. If, great king, two Sammāsambuddhas were to arise at the same moment, the saying ‘the foremost Buddha’ would be false, as would ‘the eldest Buddha,’ ‘the best Buddha,’ ‘the distinguished Buddha,’ ‘the supreme Buddha,’ ‘the excellent Buddha,’ ‘the matchless Buddha,’ ‘the peerless Buddha,’ ‘the incomparable Buddha,’ ‘the unequalled Buddha,’ ‘the unique individual Buddha.’ This too, great king, you should accept in principle as a reason why two Sammāsambuddhas do not arise at the same moment.

Apica kho, mahārāja, buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ sabhāvapakati esā, yaṃ ekoyeva buddho loke uppajjati. Kasmā kāraṇā? Mahantatāya sabbaññubuddhaguṇānaṃ, yaṃ aññampi, mahārāja, mahantaṃ hoti, taṃ ekaṃyeva hoti. Pathavī, mahārāja, mahantī, sā ekāyeva. Sāgaro mahanto, so ekoyeva. Sineru girirājā mahanto, so ekoyeva. Ākāso mahanto, so ekoyeva. Sakko mahanto, so ekoyeva. Māro mahanto, so ekoyeva. Mahābrahmā mahanto, so ekoyeva. Tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho mahanto, so ekoyeva lokasmiṃ. Yattha te uppajjanti, tattha aññesaṃ okāso na hoti. Tasmā, mahārāja, tathāgato arahaṃ sammāsambuddho ekoyeva loke uppajjatīti. Sukathito, bhante nāgasena, pañho opammehi kāraṇehīti (mi. pa. 5.1.1).

“Moreover, great king, this is the intrinsic nature of the Buddhas, the Blessed Ones, that only one Buddha arises in the world. Why? Because of the greatness of the qualities of the All-Knowing Buddha. Whatever else, great king, is great, that exists as only one. The earth, great king, is great; it is only one. The ocean is great; it is only one. Mount Sineru, the king of mountains, is great; it is only one. The sky is vast; it is only one. Sakka is great; he is only one. Māra is great; he is only one. Mahābrahmā is great; he is only one. The Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Sammāsambuddha, is great; he is only one in the world. Where they arise, there is no room for others. Therefore, great king, the Tathāgata, the Arahant, the Sammāsambuddha, arises as only one in the world.” “Well spoken, Venerable Nāgasena! The question has been clarified with similes and reasons” (mi. pa. 5.1.1).

Dhammassa cānudhammanti navavidhassa lokuttaradhammassa anudhammaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipadaṃ.Sahadhammikoti sakāraṇo.Vādānuvādoti vādoyeva.

Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ: Anudhamma to the Dhamma, meaning the preliminary practice to the ninefold supramundane Dhamma. Sahadhammiko: With reason. Vādānuvādo: Is merely debate.

Acchariyaabbhutavaṇṇanā
Exposition on Wonder and Awe

162.Āyasmā udāyīti tayo therā udāyī nāma – lāḷudāyī, kāḷudāyī, mahāudāyīti. Idha mahāudāyī adhippeto. Tassa kira imaṃ suttaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā suṇantassa abbhantare pañcavaṇṇā pīti uppajjitvā pādapiṭṭhito sīsamatthakaṃ gacchati, sīsamatthakato pādapiṭṭhiṃ āgacchati, ubhato paṭṭhāya majjhaṃ otarati, majjhato paṭṭhāya ubhato gacchati. So nirantaraṃ pītiyā phuṭasarīro balavasomanassena dasabalassa guṇaṃ kathentoacchariyaṃ bhantetiādimāha.Appicchatāti nittaṇhatā.Santuṭṭhitāti catūsu paccayesu tīhākārehi santoso.Sallekhatāti sabbakilesānaṃ sallikhitabhāvo.Yatra hi nāmāti yo nāma.Na attānaṃ pātukarissatīti attano guṇe na āvi karissati.Paṭākaṃ parihareyyunti ‘‘ko amhehi sadiso atthī’’ti vadantā paṭākaṃ ukkhipitvā nāḷandaṃ vicareyyuṃ.

162. Āyasmā Udāyī: There were three elders named Udāyī: Lāḷudāyī, Kāḷudāyī, and Mahāudāyī. Here, Mahāudāyī is intended. It is said that as he listened to this sutta from beginning to end, a five-colored joy arose within him, moving from the soles of his feet to the crown of his head, and from the crown of his head back to the soles of his feet, descending from both ends to the middle, and from the middle back to both ends. His body filled with continuous joy, and with strong gladness, recounting the qualities of the Ten-Powered One, he said, "Wonderful, venerable sir," and so on. Appicchatā: Absence of craving. Santuṭṭhitā: Contentment with the four requisites in three ways. Sallekhatā: The state of scouring away all defilements. Yatra hi nāmā: Whoever. Na attānaṃ pātukarissatī: Will not reveal his own virtues. Paṭākaṃ parihareyyuṃ: Saying, “Who is equal to us?” they would raise a flag and wander through Nāḷanda.

Passakho tvaṃ, udāyi, tathāgatassa appicchatāti passa udāyi yādisī tathāgatassa appicchatāti therassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchanto āha. Kiṃ pana bhagavā neva attānaṃ pātukaroti, na attano guṇaṃ kathetīti ce? Na, na katheti. Appicchatādīhi kathetabbaṃ, cīvarādihetuṃ na katheti. Tenevāha – ‘‘passa kho tvaṃ, udāyi, tathāgatassa appicchatā’’tiādi. Bujjhanakasattaṃ pana āgamma veneyyavasena katheti. Yathāha –

Passa kho tvaṃ, udāyi, tathāgatassa appicchatā: “See, Udāyī, such is the frugality of the Tathāgata!”—he spoke, accepting the Elder's statement. But does the Blessed One not reveal himself, not speak of his own virtues? No, he does not. He speaks in terms of frugality and so on, but not for the sake of robes and the like. Therefore, he said, "See, Udāyī, such is the frugality of the Tathāgata!" However, regarding a potential convert, he speaks according to their disposition. As he said:

‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati;

"I have no teacher, none equal to me is found;
In the world with its devas, there is no rival to me" (mahāva. 11);

Evaṃ tathāgatassa guṇadīpikā bahū gāthāpi suttantāpi vitthāretabbā.

In this way, many verses and discourses that illuminate the qualities of the Tathāgata should be expanded upon.

163.Abhikkhaṇaṃ bhāseyyāsīti punappunaṃ bhāseyyāsi. Pubbaṇhasamaye me kathitanti mā majjhanhikādīsu na kathayittha. Ajja vā me kathitanti mā paradivasādīsu na kathayitthāti attho.Pavedesīti kathesi.Imassa veyyākaraṇassāti niggāthakattā idaṃ suttaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.Adhivacananti nāmaṃ. Idaṃ pana ‘‘iti hida’’nti paṭṭhāya padaṃ saṅgītikārehi ṭhapitaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

163. Abhikkhaṇaṃ bhāseyyāsī: You should speak repeatedly. Do not speak of it only in the morning, but also at midday and other times. The meaning is, do not speak of it only today, but also on subsequent days. Pavedesī: He declared. Imassa veyyākaraṇassa: Because this sutta is a collection of verses, it is called a "veyyākaraṇa." Adhivacanaṃ: A name. However, the phrase "iti hida" (thus indeed) was established by the compilers. The rest is straightforward in meaning everywhere.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

The commentary to the Dīgha Nikāya in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī

6. Pāsādikasuttavaṇṇanā

6. Pāsādika Sutta Commentary

Nigaṇṭhanāṭaputtakālaṅkiriyavaṇṇanā
Exposition on Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta’s Death

164.Evaṃme sutanti pāsādikasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā –vedhaññā nāma sakyāti dhanumhi katasikkhā vedhaññanāmakā eke sakyā.Tesaṃ ambavane pāsādeti tesaṃ ambavane sippaṃ uggaṇhatthāya kato dīghapāsādo atthi, tattha viharati.Adhunā kālaṅkatoti sampati kālaṅkato.Dvedhikajātāti dvejjhajātā, dvebhāgā jātā.Bhaṇḍanādīsubhaṇḍanaṃ pubbabhāgakalaho, taṃ daṇḍādānādivasena paṇṇattivītikkamavasena ca vaḍḍhitaṃkalaho.‘‘Na tvaṃ imaṃ dhammavinayaṃ ājānāsī’’tiādinā nayena viruddhavacanaṃvivādo. Vitudantāti vijjhantā.Sahitaṃ meti mama vacanaṃ atthasañhitaṃ.Adhiciṇṇaṃ te viparāvattanti yaṃ tava adhiciṇṇaṃ cirakālāsevanavasena paguṇaṃ, taṃ mama vādaṃ āgamma nivattaṃ.Āropito te vādoti tuyhaṃ upari mayā doso āropito.Cara vādappamokkhāyāti bhattapuṭaṃ ādāya taṃ taṃ upasaṅkamitvā vādappamokkhatthāya uttari pariyesamāno vicara.Nibbeṭhehi vāti atha vā mayā āropitadosato attānaṃ mocehi.Sace pahosīti sace sakkosi.Vadhoyevāti maraṇameva.Nāṭaputtiyesūti nāṭaputtassa antevāsikesu.Nibbinnarūpāti ukkaṇṭhitasabhāvā abhivādanādīnipi na karonti.Virattarūpāti vigatapemā.Paṭivānarūpāti tesaṃ sakkaccakiriyato nivattanasabhāvā.Yathā tanti yathā durakkhātādisabhāve dhammavinaye nibbinnavirattappaṭivānarūpehi bhavitabbaṃ, tatheva jātāti attho.Durakkhāteti dukkathite.Duppavediteti duviññāpite.Anupasamasaṃvattaniketi rāgādīnaṃ upasamaṃ kātuṃ asamatthe.Bhinnathūpeti bhindappatiṭṭhe. Ettha hi nāṭaputtova nesaṃ patiṭṭhaṭṭhena thūpo. So pana bhinno mato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhinnathūpe’’ti.Appaṭisaraṇeti tasseva abhāvena paṭisaraṇavirahite.

164. Evaṃ me sutaṃ: Thus I have heard, the Pāsādika Sutta. Herein is an explanation of the straightforward words: Vedhaññā nāma sakyā: The Sakyans named Vedhañña were skilled in archery. Tesaṃ ambavane pāsāde: They had a long hall in their mango grove, built for learning crafts, where he was staying. Adhunā kālaṅkato: Recently deceased. Dvedhikajātā: Having two minds, having two parts. Bhaṇḍanādīsu: Bhaṇḍanaṃ is a preliminary quarrel, which is increased by punishments and transgressions of rules, and kalaho is strife. Vivādo is contradictory speech, in the manner of “You do not understand this Dhamma-Vinaya.” Vitudantā: Piercing. Sahitaṃ me: My word is connected to the meaning. Adhiciṇṇaṃ te viparāvattaṃ: What you have long been accustomed to, what you have become proficient in through long practice, that has turned back upon encountering my argument. Āropito te vādo: I have placed blame upon you. Cara vādappamokkhāyā: Taking your alms bowl, wander seeking further ways to be released from the argument, approaching various people. Nibbeṭhehi vā: Or free yourself from the blame I have placed on you. Sace pahosī: If you are able. Vadhoyeva: It is simply death. Nāṭaputtiyesū: Among the disciples of Nāṭaputta. Nibbinnarūpā: Being disgusted, they do not even offer greetings and the like. Virattarūpā: Being without affection. Paṭivānarūpā: Being of a nature that turns away from their respectful actions. Yathā taṃ: Just as they should be disgusted, dispassionate, and averse in a Dhamma-Vinaya that is poorly proclaimed, so it has become. Durakkhāte: Poorly proclaimed. Duppavedite: Poorly explained. Anupasamasaṃvattanike: Unable to lead to the calming of passions and the like. Bhinnathūpe: With a broken stupa (support). Here, Nāṭaputta was their stupa in the sense of being their support. But he is broken, dead. Therefore, it is said, "bhinnathūpe." Appaṭisaraṇe: Without a refuge, due to his absence.

Nanu cāyaṃ nāṭaputto nāḷandavāsiko, so kasmā pāvāyaṃ kālaṅkatoti? So kira upālinā gahapatinā paṭividdhasaccena dasahi gāthāhi bhāsite buddhaguṇe sutvā uṇhaṃ lohitaṃ chaḍḍesi. Atha naṃ aphāsukaṃ gahetvā pāvaṃ agamaṃsu. So tattha kālamakāsi. Kālaṃ kurumāno ca cintesi – ‘‘mama laddhi aniyyānikā sāravirahitā, mayaṃ tāva naṭṭhā, avasesajanopi mā apāyapūrako ahosi, sace panāhaṃ ‘mama sāsanaṃ aniyyānika’nti vakkhāmi, na saddahissanti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ dvepi jane na ekanīhārena uggaṇhāpeyyaṃ, te mamaccayena aññamaññaṃ vivadissanti, satthā taṃ vivādaṃ paṭicca ekaṃ dhammakathaṃ kathessati, tato te sāsanassa mahantabhāvaṃ jānissantī’’ti.

But wasn’t this Nāṭaputta a resident of Nāḷanda? So why did he die in Pāvā? It is said that when the householder Upāli spoke ten verses describing the Buddha’s virtues, having realized the truth, he vomited hot blood. Then they took him to Pāvā because he felt unwell. He died there. While dying, he thought, "My doctrine is not a vehicle to liberation, it is devoid of essence. We are destroyed, may the remaining people not be ones who fill the lower realms. But if I say ‘my teaching is not a vehicle to liberation,’ they will not believe it. What if I were to not teach two people with one consistent method, so that they will dispute each other after my death? The teacher will deliver a Dhamma talk concerning that dispute, and then they will realize the greatness of the teaching."

Atha naṃ eko antevāsiko upasaṅkamitvā āha – ‘‘bhante tumhe dubbalā, mayhampi imasmiṃ dhamme sāraṃ ācikkhatha, ācariyappamāṇa’’nti. ‘‘Āvuso, tvaṃ mamaccayena sassatanti gaṇheyyāsī’’ti. Aparopi upasaṅkami, taṃ ucchedaṃ gaṇhāpesi. Evaṃ dvepi jane ekaladdhike akatvā bahū nānānīhārena uggaṇhāpetvā kālamakāsi. Te tassa sarīrakiccaṃ katvā sannipatitvā aññamaññaṃ pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kassāvuso, ācariyo sāraṃ ācikkhī’’ti? Eko uṭṭhahitvā mayhanti āha. Kiṃ ācikkhīti? Sassatanti. Aparo taṃ paṭibāhitvā ‘‘mayhaṃ sāraṃ ācikkhī’’ti āha. Evaṃ sabbe ‘‘mayhaṃ sāraṃ ācikkhi, ahaṃ jeṭṭhako’’ti aññamaññaṃ vivādaṃ vaḍḍhetvā akkose ceva paribhāse ca hatthapādappahārādīni ca pavattetvā ekamaggena dve agacchantā nānādisāsu pakkamiṃsu.

Then a disciple approached him and said, "Venerable sir, you are weak, tell me the essence in this doctrine, the standard of the teacher." "Friend, after my death, you should grasp onto eternalism." Another approached, and he made him grasp onto annihilationism. In this way, without making even two people adhere to a single view, he taught many people with various methods and then died. After performing the rites for his body, they gathered and asked each other, "Whom did the teacher tell the essence to?" One stood up and said, "To me." "What did he tell you?" "Eternalism." Another refuted him, saying, "He told me the essence." In this way, everyone said, "He told me the essence, I am the elder," and increasing their dispute, they proceeded to scold and insult each other, with blows of hands and feet, and departed in different directions, not going in one way.

165.Atha kho cundo samaṇuddesoti ayaṃ thero dhammasenāpatissa kaniṭṭhabhātiko. Taṃ bhikkhū anupasampannakāle ‘‘cundo samaṇuddeso’’ti samudācaritvā therakālepi tatheva samudācariṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cundo samaṇuddeso’’ti.

165. Atha kho cundo samaṇuddeso: Now, the novice Cunda. This elder was the younger brother of the General of the Dhamma. The monks addressed him as "the novice Cunda" when he was not yet fully ordained, and they continued to address him in the same way even when he was an elder. Therefore, it is said, "cundo samaṇuddeso."

‘‘Pāvāyaṃ vassaṃvuṭṭho yena sāmagāmo, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamī’’ti kasmā upasaṅkami? Nāṭaputte kira kālaṅkate jambudīpe manussā tattha tattha kathaṃ pavattayiṃsu ‘‘nigaṇṭho nāṭaputto eko satthāti paññāyittha, tassa kālaṅkiriyāya sāvakānaṃ evarūpo vivādo jāto. Samaṇo pana gotamo jambudīpe cando viya sūriyo viya ca pākaṭo, sāvakāpissa pākaṭāyeva. Kīdiso nu kho samaṇe gotame parinibbute sāvakānaṃ vivādo bhavissatī’’ti. Thero taṃ kathaṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ kathaṃ gahetvā dasabalassa ārocessāmi, satthā etaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā ekaṃ desanaṃ kathessatī’’ti. So nikkhamitvā yena sāmagāmo, yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami.

“Having spent the rains in Pāvā, he approached Venerable Ānanda in Sāmagāma”—why did he approach him? It is said that after Nāṭaputta’s death, people in Jambudīpa were discussing in various places, "Nigaṇṭha Nāṭaputta was known as a teacher, and after his death, such a dispute arose among his disciples. But the ascetic Gotama is well-known in Jambudīpa, like the moon and the sun, and his disciples are also well-known. What kind of dispute will arise among the disciples after the ascetic Gotama passes away?" Having heard that talk, the elder thought, "I will take this matter and report it to the Ten-Powered One, and the Teacher will give a teaching after establishing this as the starting point." He went forth and approached Venerable Ānanda in Sāmagāma.

Sāmagāmoti sāmākānaṃ ussannattā tassa gāmassa nāmaṃ.Yenāyasmā ānandoti ujumeva bhagavato santikaṃ agantvā yenassa upajjhāyo āyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami.

Sāmagāmo: The name of the village was due to the abundance of Sāmāka plants. Yenāyasmā ānando: Without going directly to the Blessed One, he approached his preceptor, Venerable Ānanda.

Buddhakāle kira sāriputtatthero ca ānandatthero ca aññamaññaṃ mamāyiṃsu. Sāriputtatthero ‘‘mayā kātabbaṃ satthu upaṭṭhānaṃ karotī’’ti ānandattheraṃ mamāyi. Ānandatthero ‘‘bhagavato sāvakānaṃ aggo’’ti sāriputtattheraṃ mamāyi. Kuladārake ca pabbājetvā sāriputtattherassa santike upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpesi. Sāriputtattheropi tatheva akāsi. Evaṃ ekamekena attano pattacīvaraṃ datvā pabbājetvā upajjhaṃ gaṇhāpitāni pañca pañca bhikkhusatāni ahesuṃ. Āyasmā ānando paṇītāni cīvarādīnipi labhitvā therassa adāsi.

It is said that in the Buddha's time, Sāriputta Thera and Ānanda Thera cherished each other. Sāriputta Thera cherished Ānanda Thera, thinking, "He performs the service to the Teacher that I should be doing." Ānanda Thera cherished Sāriputta Thera, thinking, "He is foremost among the Blessed One’s disciples." Having ordained young men from good families, he had them take Sāriputta Thera as their preceptor. Sāriputta Thera did likewise. In this way, there were five hundred monks for whom each had given his own bowl and robe, had ordained, and had taken as preceptor. Āyasmā Ānanda, having obtained excellent robes and other items, gave them to the Elder.

Dhammaratanapūjā
Offering to the Jewel of the Dhamma

Eko kira brāhmaṇo cintesi – ‘‘buddharatanassa ca saṅgharatanassa ca pūjā paññāyati, kathaṃ nu kho dhammaratanaṃ pūjitaṃ hotī’’ti? So bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etamatthaṃ pucchi. Bhagavā āha – ‘‘sacepi brāhmaṇa dhammaratanaṃ pūjetukāmo, ekaṃ bahussutaṃ pūjehī’’ti. Bahussutaṃ, bhante, ācikkhathāti. Bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pucchāti. So bhikkhusaṅghaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘bahussutaṃ, bhante, ācikkhathā’’ti āha. Ānandatthero brāhmaṇāti. Brāhmaṇo theraṃ sahassagghanikena ticīvarena pūjesi. Thero taṃ gahetvā bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā ‘‘kuto, ānanda, laddha’’nti āha? Ekena, bhante, brāhmaṇena dinnaṃ, idaṃ panāhaṃ āyasmato sāriputtassa dātukāmoti. Dehi, ānandāti. Cārikaṃ pakkanto bhanteti. Āgatakāle dehīti, sikkhāpadaṃ bhante, paññattanti. Kadā pana sāriputto āgamissatīti? Dasāhamattena bhanteti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, ānanda, dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ nikkhipitu’’nti sikkhāpadaṃ paññāpesi.

It is said that a certain brahmin thought, “An offering to the Jewel of the Buddha and the Jewel of the Saṅgha is apparent, but how is the Jewel of the Dhamma venerated?” He approached the Blessed One and asked about this matter. The Blessed One said, “If, brahmin, you wish to venerate the Jewel of the Dhamma, venerate a learned one.” “Tell me who is a learned one, venerable sir.” “Ask the Saṅgha of monks.” He approached the Saṅgha of monks and said, “Tell me who is a learned one, venerable sirs.” “Ānanda Thera, brahmin.” The brahmin venerated the Elder with a set of three robes worth a thousand. The Elder took it and went to the Blessed One. The Blessed One said, "From where, Ānanda, did you obtain this?" "It was given by a certain brahmin, venerable sir, but I wish to give this to Venerable Sāriputta." "Give it, Ānanda." "He has departed on a journey, venerable sir." "Give it when he returns; a training rule has been established, venerable sir." "When will Sāriputta return?" "In about ten days, venerable sir." "I allow, Ānanda, to keep an extra robe for up to ten days," he established the training rule.

Kathāpābhatanti kathāya mūlaṃ. Mūlañhi ‘‘pābhata’’nti vuccati. Yathāha –

Kathāpābhata: The beginning of the story. For the origin is called "pābhata." As it is said:

‘‘Appakenāpi medhāvī, pābhatena vicakkhaṇo;

‘‘Even with a small beginning, the wise,
The discerning one, with an insignificant offering,
Raises himself up,
Like a small fire that is fanned’’ (jā. 1.1.4);

Bhagavantaṃ dassanāyāti bhagavantaṃ dassanatthāya. Kiṃ panānena bhagavā na diṭṭhapubboti? No na diṭṭhapubbo. Ayañhi āyasmā divā nava vāre, rattiṃ nava vāreti ekāhaṃ aṭṭhārasa vāre upaṭṭhānameva gacchati. Divasassa pana satavāraṃ vā sahassavāraṃ vā gantukāmo samānopi na akāraṇā gacchati, ekaṃ pañhuddhāraṃ gahetvāva gacchati. So taṃ divasaṃ tena kathāpābhatena gantukāmo evamāha.

Bhagavantaṃ dassanāyā means for the purpose of seeing the Blessed One. But has this person never seen the Blessed One before? No, he has seen him before. This venerable one goes to attend on the Blessed One eighteen times a day, nine times during the day and nine times at night. However, even if he wanted to go a hundred or a thousand times during the day, he would not go without a reason, but only after having taken up a question to be answered. So, wanting to go that day with that gift of conversation, he spoke thus.

Asammāsambuddhappaveditadhammavinayavaṇṇanā
Description of the Dhamma-Vinaya Declared by an Unenlightened Buddha

166.Evañhetaṃ, cunda, hotīti bhagavā ānandattherena ārocitepi yasmā na ānandatthero imissā kathāya sāmiko, cundatthero pana sāmiko. Sova tassā ādimajjhapariyosānaṃ jānāti. Tasmā bhagavā tena saddhiṃ kathento ‘‘evañhetaṃ, cunda, hotī’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – cunda evañhetaṃ hoti durakkhātādisabhāve dhammavinaye sāvakā dvedhikajātā bhaṇḍanādīni katvā mukhasattīhi vitudantā viharanti.

166.Evañhetaṃ, cunda, hotī—although the venerable Ānanda had announced it, because the venerable Ānanda was not the owner of this statement, but the venerable Cunda was the owner, and he knew its beginning, middle, and end, therefore the Blessed One, speaking with him, said, "Evañhetaṃ, cunda, hotī," and so on. Its meaning is: Cunda, it is thus that in a Dhamma-Vinaya that is badly proclaimed, disciples, having become divided, making quarrels and so on, live piercing each other with weapons of the mouth.

idha cunda satthā ca hoti asammāsambuddhotiādimāha. Tatthavokkamma ca tamhā dhammā vattatīti na nirantaraṃ pūreti, okkamitvā okkamitvā antarantaraṃ katvā vattatīti attho.Tassa te, āvuso, lābhāti tassa tuyhaṃ ete dhammānudhammappaṭipattiādayo lābhā.Suladdhanti manussattampi te suladdhaṃ.Tathā paṭipajjatūti evaṃ paṭipajjatu.Yathā te satthārā dhammo desitoti yena te ākārena satthārā dhammo kathito.Yo ca samādapetīti yo ca ācariyo samādapeti.Yañca samādapetīti yaṃ antevāsiṃ samādapeti.Yo ca samādapitoti yo ca evaṃ samādapito antevāsiko. Yathā ācariyena samādapitaṃ, tathatthāya paṭipajjati.Sabbe teti tayopi te. Ettha hi ācariyo samādapitattā apuññaṃ pasavati, samādinnantevāsiko samādinnattā, paṭipannako paṭipannattā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sabbe te bahuṃ apuññaṃ pasavantī’’ti. Etenupāyena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.

Idha cunda satthā ca hoti asammāsambuddho and so on. There, vokkamma ca tamhā dhammā vattatī means he does not fulfill it continuously; having skipped, having skipped, making intervals, he proceeds; this is the meaning. Tassa te, āvuso, lābhā—these gains are yours, namely, the practice of the Dhamma in accordance with the Dhamma and so on. Suladdhaṃ—even your human existence is well gained. Tathā paṭipajjatū—practice in that way. Yathā te satthārā dhammo desito—in whatever manner the Dhamma was taught by your teacher. Yo ca samādapetī—and whichever teacher encourages. Yañca samādapetī—and whichever pupil he encourages. Yo ca samādapito—and whichever pupil is thus encouraged. Just as encouraged by the teacher, he practices for that purpose. Sabbe te—all three of them. Here, the teacher begets demerit because of encouraging, the encouraged pupil because of being encouraged, the practitioner because of practicing. Therefore, it was said, "Sabbe te bahuṃ apuññaṃ pasavantī". In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances.

167.Apicetthañāyappaṭipannoti kāraṇappaṭipanno.Ñāyamārādhessatīti kāraṇaṃ nipphādessati.Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti attano dukkhanibbattakaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘durakkhāte, bhikkhave, dhammavinaye yo āraddhavīriyo, so dukkhaṃ viharati. Yo kusīto, so sukhaṃ viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.318).

167.Moreover, here ñāyappaṭipanno means practicing according to reason. Ñāyamārādhessatī means he will accomplish the reason. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatī means he exerts effort that produces suffering for himself. For it was said, "In a Dhamma-Vinaya that is badly proclaimed, the one who exerts effort lives in suffering. The one who is lazy lives in happiness" (A. Ni. 1.318).

Sammāsambuddhappaveditadhammavinayādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Dhamma-Vinaya Well-proclaimed by a Sammāsambuddha and So On

168.Evaṃ aniyyānikasāsanaṃ dassetvā idāni niyyānikasāsanaṃ dassentoidha pana, cunda, satthā ca hoti sammāsambuddhotiādimāha. Tatthaniyyānikoti maggatthāya phalatthāya ca niyyāti.

168.Having shown the dispensation that does not lead out in this way, now, showing the dispensation that leads out, he said idha pana, cunda, satthā ca hoti sammāsambuddho and so on. There, niyyāniko means it leads out for the sake of the path and for the sake of the fruit.

169.Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti attano sukhanipphādakaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhati. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘svākkhāte, bhikkhave, dhammavinaye yo kusīto, so dukkhaṃ viharati. Yo āraddhavīriyo, so sukhaṃ viharatī’’ti (a. ni. 1.319).

169.Vīriyaṃ ārabhatī means he exerts effort that produces happiness for himself. For it was said, "In a Dhamma-Vinaya that is well-proclaimed, the one who is lazy lives in suffering. The one who exerts effort lives in happiness" (A. Ni. 1.319).

170.Iti bhagavā niyyānikasāsane sammāpaṭipannassa kulaputtassa pasaṃsaṃ dassetvā puna desanaṃ vaḍḍhentoidha, cunda, satthā ca loke udapādītiādimāha. Tatthaaviññāpitatthāti abodhitatthā.Sabbasaṅgāhapadakatanti sabbasaṅgahapadehi kataṃ, sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ kataṃ na hotīti attho. ‘‘Sabbasaṅgāhapadagata’’ntipi pāṭho, na sabbasaṅgāhapadesu gataṃ, na ekasaṅgahajātanti attho.Sappāṭihīrakatanti niyyānikaṃ.Yāvadevamanussehīti devalokato yāva manussalokā suppakāsitaṃ.Anutappo hotīti anutāpakaro hoti.Satthā ca no loketi idaṃ tesaṃ anutāpakāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Nānutappo hotīti satthāraṃ āgamma sāvakehi yaṃ pattabbaṃ, tassa pattattā anutāpakaro na hoti.

170.Thus, after showing the praise of a clansman who practices rightly in a dispensation that leads out, again increasing the teaching, the Blessed One said idha, cunda, satthā ca loke udapādī and so on. There, aviññāpitatthā means with meanings not made known. Sabbasaṅgāhapadakata means made with all comprehensive terms, made all inclusive, which means it is not. "Sabbasaṅgāhapadagata" is also a reading, meaning not gone to all comprehensive terms, not of one inclusive kind. Sappāṭihīrakata means leading out. Yāva devamanussehī means well-proclaimed from the world of gods to the world of humans. Anutappo hotī means it causes remorse. Satthā ca no loke—this was said to show them causing remorse. Nānutappo hotī means, because of attaining what should be attained by disciples through the teacher, it does not cause remorse.

172.Theroti thiro therakārakehi dhammehi samannāgato. ‘‘Rattaññū’’tiādīni vuttatthāneva.Etehi ce pīti etehi heṭṭhā vuttehi.

172.Thero means stable, endowed with qualities that make one a thera. "Rattaññū" and the rest have the meanings as stated earlier. Etehi ce pī means with these stated below.

173.Pattayogakkhemāti catūhi yogehi khemattā arahattaṃ idha yogakkhemaṃ nāma, taṃ pattāti attho.Alaṃ samakkhātuṃ saddhammassāti sammukhā gahitattā assa saddhammaṃ sammā ācikkhituṃ samatthā.

173.Pattayogakkhemā—because of being secure from the four bonds, here, arahantship is called yogakkhema, having attained that is the meaning. Alaṃ samakkhātuṃ saddhammassā—because of having grasped it directly, they are capable of rightly declaring the true Dhamma.

174.Brahmacārinoti brahmacariyavāsaṃ vasamānā ariyasāvakā.Kāmabhoginoti gihisotāpannā. ‘‘Iddhañcevā’’tiādīni mahāparinibbāne vitthāritāneva.Lābhaggayasaggapattanti lābhaggañceva yasaggañca pattaṃ.

174.Brahmacārino—ariyasāvakā who live the life of celibacy. Kāmabhogino—gihī sotāpannā. "Iddhañcevā" and the rest are only expanded in the Mahāparinibbāna Sutta. Lābhaggayasaggapatta—having attained the foremost of gains and the foremost of fame.

175.Santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi therā bhikkhū sāvakāti sāriputtamoggallānādayo therā.Bhikkhuniyoti khemātherīuppalavaṇṇatherīādayo.Upāsakā sāvakā gihī odātavatthavasanā brahmacārinoti cittagahapatihatthakaāḷavakādayo.Kāmabhoginoti cūḷaanāthapiṇḍikamahāanāthapiṇḍikādayo.Brahmacāriniyoti nandamātādayo.Kāmabhoginiyoti khujjuttarādayo.

175.Santi kho pana me, cunda, etarahi therā bhikkhū sāvakā—theras such as Sāriputta and Moggallāna. Bhikkhuniyo—bhikkhunīs such as Khemā Therī and Uppalavaṇṇā Therī. Upāsakā sāvakā gihī odātavatthavasanā brahmacārino—upāsakas such as Citta Gahapati and Hatthaka Āḷavaka. Kāmabhogino—such as Cūḷa-Anāthapiṇḍika and Mahā-Anāthapiṇḍika. Brahmacāriniyo—such as Nandamātā. Kāmabhoginiyo—such as Khujjuttarā.

176.Sabbākārasampannanti sabbakāraṇasampannaṃ.Idamevatanti idameva brahmacariyaṃ, imameva dhammaṃ sammā hetunā nayena vadamāno vadeyya.Udakāssudantiudako sudaṃ. Passaṃ na passatīti passanto na passati. So kira imaṃ pañhaṃ mahājanaṃ pucchi. Tehi ‘‘na jānāma, ācariya, kathehi no’’ti vutto so āha – ‘‘gambhīro ayaṃ pañho āhārasappāye sati thokaṃ cintetvā sakkā kathetu’’nti. Tato tehi cattāro māse mahāsakkāre kate taṃ pañhaṃ kathentokiñca passaṃ na passatītiādimāha. Tatthasādhunisitassāti suṭṭhunisitassa tikhiṇassa, sunisitakhurassa kira talaṃ paññāyati, dhārā na paññāyatīti ayamettha attho.

176.Sabbākārasampanna—endowed with all reasons. Idameva ta—this very life of celibacy, one should speak declaring this very Dhamma with right reason and method. Udakāssuda—udako sudaṃ. Passaṃ na passatī—seeing, he does not see. It seems that he asked this question of a large group of people. When they said, "We do not know, teacher, tell us," he said, "This question is profound. It is possible to speak after thinking a little when food is agreeable." Then, when they had made great offerings for four months, when he was speaking of that question, kiñca passaṃ na passatī and so on. There, sādhunisitassā means of one that is well sharpened, sharp, it seems the surface of a well-sharpened razor is visible, but the edge is not visible; this is the meaning here.

Saṅgāyitabbadhammādivaṇṇanā
Description of Things to be Chanted in Common

177.Saṅgamma samāgammāti saṅgantvā samāgantvā.Atthena atthaṃ, byañjanena byañjananti atthena saha atthaṃ, byañjanenapi saha byañjanaṃ samānentehīti attho.Saṅgāyitabbanti vācetabbaṃ sajjhāyitabbaṃ.Yathayidaṃ brahmacariyanti yathā idaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ.

177.Saṅgamma samāgammā—having come together, having assembled. Atthena atthaṃ, byañjanena byañjana—with meaning together with meaning, with expression also together with expression, by those who equalize, is the meaning. Saṅgāyitabbaṃ—to be recited, to be repeated. Yathayidaṃ brahmacariya—as this whole dispensation is the life of celibacy.

178.Tatra ceti tatra saṅghamajjhe, tassa vā bhāsite.Atthañceva micchā gaṇhāti, byañjanāni ca micchā ropetīti ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti ettha ārammaṇaṃ ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti atthaṃ gaṇhāti. ‘‘Satipaṭṭhānānī’’ti byañjanaṃ ropeti.Imassa nu kho, āvuso, atthassāti ‘‘satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna’’nti. Atthassa ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti kiṃ nu kho imāni byañjanāni, udāhu cattāri satipaṭṭhānānī’’ti etāni vā byañjanāni.Katamāni opāyikatarānīti imassa atthassa katamāni byañjanāni upapannatarāni allīnatarāni.Imesañcabyañjanānanti ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti byañjanānaṃ ‘‘satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna’’nti kiṃ nu kho ayaṃ attho, udāhu ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ satipaṭṭhāna’’nti eso atthoti?Imassa kho, āvuso, atthassāti ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ satipaṭṭhāna’’nti imassa atthassa.Yā ceva etānīti yāni ceva etāni mayā vuttāni.Yā ceva esoti yo ceva esa mayā vutto.So neva ussādetabboti tumhehi tāva sammā atthe ca sammā byañjane ca ṭhātabbaṃ. So pana neva ussādetabbo, na apasādetabbo.Saññāpetabboti jānāpetabbo.Tassa ca atthassāti ‘‘satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna’’nti atthassa ca.Tesañca byañjanānanti ‘‘satipaṭṭhānā’’ti byañjanānaṃ.Nisantiyāti nisāmanatthaṃ dhāraṇatthaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbavāresu attho veditabbo.

178.Tatra ce—there in the midst of the Saṅgha, or in his speech. Atthañceva micchā gaṇhāti, byañjanāni ca micchā ropetī—here, in "cattāro satipaṭṭhānā," he takes the object as the meaning "satipaṭṭhāna." He imposes the expression "satipaṭṭhānānī." Imassa nu kho, āvuso, atthassā—"satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna". Of the meaning "cattāro satipaṭṭhānā," which of these expressions, are these the expressions "udāhu cattāri satipaṭṭhānānī," or are these the expressions? Katamāni opāyikatarānī—of this meaning, which expressions are more suitable, more closely connected? Imesañca byañjanāna—of the expressions "cattāro satipaṭṭhānā," is this the meaning, "satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna," or is this the meaning, "ārammaṇaṃ satipaṭṭhāna"? Imassa kho, āvuso, atthassā—of this meaning, "ārammaṇaṃ satipaṭṭhāna". Yā ceva etānī—and whichever of these have been spoken by me. Yā ceva eso—and whichever of these has been spoken by me. So neva ussādetabbo—you should stand rightly in meaning and in expression. But he should not be elevated, nor should he be degraded. Saññāpetabbo—he should be made to understand. Tassa ca atthassā—of the meaning "satiyeva satipaṭṭhāna". Tesañca byañjanāna—of the expressions "satipaṭṭhānā". Nisantiyā—for the purpose of examining, for the purpose of retaining. In this way, the meaning should be understood in all instances.

181.Tādisanti tumhādisaṃ.Atthupetanti atthena upetaṃ atthassa viññātāraṃ.Byañjanupetanti byañjanehi upetaṃ byañjanānaṃ viññātāraṃ. Evaṃ etaṃ bhikkhuṃ pasaṃsatha. Eso hi bhikkhu na tumhākaṃ sāvako nāma, buddho nāma esa cundāti. Iti bhagavā bahussutaṃ bhikkhuṃ attano ṭhāne ṭhapesi.

181.Tādisa—like you. Atthupeta—endowed with meaning, a knower of meaning. Byañjanupeta—endowed with expressions, a knower of expressions. Thus, praise this bhikkhu. For this bhikkhu is not your disciple, but this is a Buddha, Cunda. Thus, the Blessed One established the learned bhikkhu in his own place.

Paccayānuññātakāraṇādivaṇṇanā
Description of Reasons and Permitted Requisites

182.Idāni tatopi uttaritaraṃ desanaṃ vaḍḍhentona vo ahaṃ, cundātiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhadhammikā āsavā nāma idhaloke paccayahetu uppajjanakā āsavā. Samparāyikā āsavā nāma paraloke bhaṇḍanahetu uppajjanakā āsavā.Saṃvarāyāti yathā te na pavisanti, evaṃ pidahanāya.Paṭighātāyāti mūlaghātena paṭihananāya.Alaṃ vo taṃ yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāyāti taṃ tumhākaṃ sītassa paṭighātāya samatthaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti, yaṃ vo mayā cīvaraṃ anuññātaṃ, taṃ pārupitvā dappaṃ vā mānaṃ vā kurumānā viharissathāti na anuññātaṃ, taṃ pana pārupitvā sītappaṭighātādīni katvā sukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ yoniso manasikāraṃ karissathāti anuññātaṃ. Yathā ca cīvaraṃ, evaṃ piṇḍapātādayopi. Anupadasaṃvaṇṇanā panettha visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva veditabbā.

182.Now, increasing the teaching even further than that, na vo ahaṃ, cundā and so on. There, āsavas pertaining to the immediately visible Dhamma are āsavas that arise in this world because of requisites. Āsavas pertaining to the future are āsavas that arise in the next world because of quarreling. Saṃvarāyā—for the purpose of closing off, so that they do not enter. Paṭighātāyā—for the purpose of striking back with a root strike. Alaṃ vo taṃ yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāyā—that is sufficient for you, for the striking back of cold. What was said is this: I have not permitted you the robes so that having put them on, you would live behaving with arrogance or conceit, but I have permitted them so that having put them on, having struck back the cold and so on, you would happily do the life of a renunciate, paying attention wisely. And just as with robes, so also with alms food and the rest. Here, the detailed description should be understood in the way stated in the Visuddhimagga.

Sukhallikānuyogādivaṇṇanā
Description of Addiction to Comfort and So On

183.Sukhallikānuyoganti sukhalliyanānuyogaṃ, sukhasevanādhimuttanti attho.Sukhetīti sukhitaṃ karoti.Pīṇetīti pīṇitaṃ thūlaṃ karoti.

183.Sukhallikānuyoga—sukhalliyanānuyogaṃ, devoted to the practice of pleasure, is the meaning. Sukhetī—makes happy. Pīṇetī—pleases, makes stout.

186.Aṭṭhitadhammāti naṭṭhitasabhāvā. Jivhā no atthīti yaṃ yaṃ icchanti, taṃ taṃ kathenti, kadāci maggaṃ kathenti, kadāci phalaṃ kadāci nibbānanti adhippāyo.Jānatāti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānantena.Passatāti pañcahi cakkhūhi passantena.Gambhīranemoti gambhīrabhūmiṃ anupaviṭṭho.Sunikhātoti suṭṭhu nikhāto.Evameva kho, āvusoti evaṃ khīṇāsavo abhabbo nava ṭhānāni ajjhācarituṃ. Tasmiṃ anajjhācāro acalo asampavedhī. Tattha sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropanādīsu sotāpannādayopi abhabbā.Sannidhikārakaṃ kāme paribhuñjitunti vatthukāme ca kilesakāme ca sannidhiṃ katvā paribhuñjituṃ.Seyyathāpi pubbe agārikabhūtoti yathā pubbe gihibhūto paribhuñjati, evaṃ paribhuñjituṃ abhabbo.

186.Aṭṭhitadhammā—whose nature is destroyed. "Jivhā no atthīti" means they say whatever they wish; sometimes they speak of the path, sometimes of the fruit, sometimes of Nibbāna, is the meaning. Jānatā—by one knowing with the knowledge of omniscience. Passatā—by one seeing with the five eyes. Gambhīranemo—having sat down in a deep place. Sunikhāto—well fixed. Evameva kho, āvuso—in the same way, a khīṇāsava is incapable of committing the nine offenses. In him, there is no committing, he is unshaken, unwavering. There, sotāpannas and others are also incapable of intentionally taking the life of a living being. Sannidhikārakaṃ kāme paribhuñjituṃ—to enjoy sense pleasures making accumulation of object-kāmas and kilesa-kāmas. Seyyathāpi pubbe agārikabhūto—just as formerly he enjoyed them having been a householder, he is incapable of enjoying them in that way.

Pañhabyākaraṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Answering of Questions

187.Agāramajjhe vasantā hi sotāpannādayo yāvajīvaṃ gihibyañjanena tiṭṭhanti. Khīṇāsavo pana arahattaṃ patvāva manussabhūto parinibbāti vā pabbajati vā. Cātumahārājikādīsu kāmāvacaradevesu muhuttampi na tiṭṭhati. Kasmā? Vivekaṭṭhānassa abhāvā. Bhummadevattabhāve pana ṭhito arahattaṃ patvāpi tiṭṭhati. Tassa vasena ayaṃ pañho āgato. Bhinnadosattā panassa bhikkhubhāvo veditabbo.Atīrakanti atīraṃ aparicchedaṃ mahantaṃ.No ca kho anāgatanti anāgataṃ pana addhānaṃ ārabbha evaṃ na paññapeti, atītameva maññe samaṇo gotamo jānāti, na anāgataṃ. Tathā hissa atīte aḍḍhachaṭṭhasatajātakānussaraṇaṃ paññāyati. Anāgate evaṃ bahuṃ anussaraṇaṃ na paññāyatīti imamatthaṃ maññamānā evaṃ vadeyyuṃ.Tayidaṃ kiṃ sūti anāgate apaññāpanaṃ kiṃ nu kho?Kathaṃsūti kena nu kho kāraṇena ajānantoyeva nu kho anāgataṃ nānussarati, ananussaritukāmatāya nānussaratīti.Aññavihitakena ñāṇadassanenāti paccakkhaṃ viya katvā dassanasamatthatāya dassanabhūtena ñāṇena aññatthavihitakena ñāṇena aññaṃ ārabbha pavattena, aññavihitakaṃ aññaṃ ārabbha pavattamānaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ saṅgāhetabbaṃ paññāpetabbaṃ maññanti. Te hi carato ca tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ maññanti, tādisañca ñāṇaṃ nāma natthi. Tasmā yathariva bālā abyattā, evaṃ maññantīti veditabbo.

187.Sotāpannas and others, living in the midst of a house, remain with the appearance of a householder for as long as they live. But a khīṇāsava, having attained arahantship, either passes away as a human being or goes forth. He does not stay even for a moment among the kāmāvacara gods such as the Cātumahārājika gods. Why? Because of the absence of a place of seclusion. But one established in the state of a bhummadeva, even having attained arahantship, remains. This question came because of that. Because of his faultlessness, his state of a bhikkhu should be understood. Atīraka—without limit, without boundary, great. No ca kho anāgata—but concerning the future, he does not proclaim thus. "I think the samaṇa Gotama knows only the past, not the future." Thus, it appears that he has recollection of a hundred and fifty past lives. In the future, such extensive recollection does not appear; thinking in this way, they would say this. Tayidaṃ kiṃ sū—what is this non-proclamation concerning the future? Kathaṃsū—for what reason? Is it because he does not know the future that he does not recollect, or because he does not wish to recollect that he does not recollect? Aññavihitakena ñāṇadassanenā—by knowledge that has been arranged elsewhere, by knowledge that is fit to be seen, because of its ability to show making it like direct experience; one should include knowledge that has been arranged elsewhere, that proceeds concerning something else, and one should proclaim it; they think so. For they think that knowledge is constantly present whether one is walking, standing, sleeping, or awake, and such knowledge does not exist. Therefore, it should be understood that they think just as fools think without reason.

Satānusārīti pubbenivāsānussatisampayuttakaṃ.Yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhatīti yattakaṃ ñātuṃ icchati, tattakaṃ jānissāmīti ñāṇaṃ pesesi. Athassa dubbalapattapuṭe pakkhandanārāco viya appaṭihataṃ anivāritaṃ ñāṇaṃ gacchati, tena yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhati tāvatakaṃ anussarati.Bodhijanti bodhimūle jātaṃ.Ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti catumaggañāṇaṃ uppajjati.Ayamantimā jātīti tena ñāṇena jātimūlassa pahīnattā puna ayamantimā jāti.Natthidāni punabbhavoti aparampi ñāṇaṃ uppajjati.Anatthasaṃhitanti na idhalokatthaṃ vā paralokatthaṃ vā nissitaṃ.Na taṃ tathāgato byākarotīti taṃ bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇasadisaṃ aniyyānikakathaṃ tathāgato na katheti.Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitanti rājakathāditiracchānakathaṃ.Kālaññū tathāgato hotīti kālaṃ jānāti. Sahetukaṃ sakāraṇaṃ katvā yuttapattakāleyeva katheti.

Satānusārīti means connected with recollection of past lives.Yāvatakaṃ ākaṅkhatīti means he directs his knowledge, wishing to know as much as he desires, thinking, "I will know that much." Then, like an arrow released at a weak leaf-bundle, his unobstructed, unhindered knowledge goes forth; therefore, he recollects as much as he desires.Bodhijaṃti means born at the foot of the Bodhi tree.Ñāṇaṃ uppajjatīti means the knowledge of the four paths arises.Ayamantimā jātīti means, because the root of birth is abandoned by that knowledge, this is the final birth. Natthidāni punabbhavoti means another knowledge also arises.Anatthasaṃhitaṃti means not connected with benefit, not related to benefit in this world or the next.Na taṃ tathāgato byākarotīti means the Tathāgata does not speak of such unprofitable talk, similar to the story of the battle of Bharata or the abduction of Sita, which does not lead to liberation. Bhūtaṃ tacchaṃ anatthasaṃhitaṃti means frivolous talk such as stories about kings.Kālaññū tathāgato hotīti means he knows the right time. Having considered the cause and reason, he speaks only at the appropriate and fitting time.

188.Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatīti yathā yathā gaditabbaṃ, tathā tatheva gadanato dakārassa takāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti vuccatīti attho.Diṭṭhanti rūpāyatanaṃ.Sutanti saddāyatanaṃ.Mutanti mutvā patvā gahetabbato gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ.Viññātanti sukhadukkhādidhammāyatanaṃ.Pattanti pariyesitvā vā apariyesitvā vā pattaṃ.Pariyesitanti pattaṃ vā apattaṃ vā pariyesitaṃ.Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti cittena anusañcaritaṃ. ‘‘Tathāgatena abhisambuddha’’nti iminā etaṃ dasseti, yañhi aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa nīlaṃ pītakantiādi rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthamāgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma rūpārammaṇaṃ disvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa bherisaddo mudiṅgasaddotiādi saddārammaṇaṃ sotadvāre āpāthamāgacchati. Mūlagandho tacagandhotiādi gandhārammaṇaṃ ghānadvāre āpāthamāgacchati. Mūlaraso khandharasotiādi rasārammaṇaṃ jivhādvāre āpāthamāgacchati. Kakkhaḷaṃ mudukantiādi pathavīdhātutejodhātuvāyodhātubhedaṃ phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ kāyadvāre āpāthamāgacchati. ‘‘Ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe imaṃ nāma phoṭṭhabbārammaṇaṃ phusitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ. Tathā yaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu imassa sadevakassa lokassa sukhadukkhādibhedaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ manodvārassa āpāthamāgacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ satto imasmiṃ khaṇe idaṃ nāma dhammārammaṇaṃ vijānitvā sumano vā dummano vā majjhatto vā jāto’’ti sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatassa evaṃ abhisambuddhaṃ.

188.Tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatīti means because he speaks according to how it should be spoken, changing the letter 'da' to 'ta', he is called Tathāgata. Diṭṭhaṃti means the eye-sphere (rūpāyatana). Sutaṃti means the ear-sphere (saddāyatana). Mutaṃti means the nose-sphere (gandhāyatana), the taste-sphere (rasāyatana), and the touch-sphere (phoṭṭhabbāyatana), because they are to be sensed, contacted, and grasped. Viññātaṃti means the mind-sphere (dhammāyatana), such as pleasant and unpleasant things.Pattaṃti means attained, either sought or unsought. Pariyesitaṃti means sought, whether attained or unattained. Anuvicaritaṃ manasāti means pondered over by the mind. "Tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ" indicates this: whatever form object, be it blue, yellow, etc., comes into the range of the eye-door in this world with its deities, in the immeasurable world-spheres, (the Tathagata knows) "This being, having seen this form object at this moment, has become pleased, displeased, or neutral." All that is fully awakened by the Tathagata. Similarly, whatever sound object, be it the sound of a drum, the sound of a lute, etc., comes into the range of the ear-door in this world with its deities, in the immeasurable world-spheres; whatever smell object, be it the smell of roots, the smell of bark, etc., comes into the range of the nose-door; whatever taste object, be it the taste of roots, the taste of branches, etc., comes into the range of the tongue-door; whatever touch object, be it hard, soft, etc., differentiated as earth element, fire element, air element, etc., comes into the range of the body-door; (the Tathagata knows) "This being, having touched this touch object at this moment, has become pleased, displeased, or neutral." All that is fully awakened by the Tathagata. Similarly, whatever mind object, differentiated as pleasant, unpleasant, etc., comes into the range of the mind-door in this world with its deities, in the immeasurable world-spheres, (the Tathagata knows) "This being, having cognized this mind object at this moment, has become pleased, displeased, or neutral." All that is fully awakened by the Tathagata.

brahmajāletathāgatasaddavitthāre vuttāyeva.

Brahmajāle the extensive explanation of the word Tathāgata has already been given.

Abyākataṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Undeclared Topics

189.Evaṃ attano asamataṃ anuttarataṃ sabbaññutaṃ dhammarājabhāvaṃ kathetvā idāni ‘‘puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ laddhīsu mayā aññātaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, sabbaṃ mama ñāṇassa antoyeva parivattatī’’ti sīhanādaṃ nadantoṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ, cunda, vijjatītiādimāha. Tatthatathāgatoti satto.Na hetaṃ, āvuso, atthasaṃhitanti idhalokaparalokaatthasaṃhitaṃ na hoti.Na ca dhammasaṃhitanti navalokuttaradhammanissitaṃ na hoti.Naādibrahmacariyakanti sikkhattayasaṅgahitassa sakalasāsanabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtaṃ na hoti.

189.Thus, having spoken of his own unmatched, unsurpassed, all-knowing state, the state of a king of Dhamma, now, roaring the lion's roar, "There exists, Cunda, a basis," etc., implying "There is nothing unknown or unseen by me in the doctrines of wandering ascetics and brahmins; everything revolves within the scope of my knowledge." Here, tathāgatoti means a being. Na hetaṃ, āvuso, atthasaṃhitaṃti means it is not connected with benefit in this world or the next. Na ca dhammasaṃhitaṃti means it is not based on the nine supramundane Dhammas. Na ādibrahmacariyakaṃti means it is not the beginning of the entire holy life (brahmacariya) included in the three trainings (sikkhā).

190.Idaṃ dukkhanti khotiādīsu taṇhaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā tebhummakā dhammā idaṃ dukkhanti byākataṃ. Tasseva dukkhassa pabhāvikā janikā taṇhādukkhasamudayoti byākataṃ. Ubhinnaṃ appavattidukkhanirodhoti byākataṃ. Dukkhaparijānano samudayapajahano nirodhasacchikaraṇo ariyamaggodukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadāti byākataṃ. ‘‘Etañhi, āvuso, atthasaṃhita’’ntiādīsu etaṃ idhalokaparalokaatthanissitaṃ navalokuttaradhammanissitaṃ sakalasāsanabrahmacariyassa ādi padhānaṃ pubbaṅgamanti ayamattho.

190.In Idaṃ dukkhanti khotiādi, declaring "this is suffering," all the three-realm (tebhūmaka) phenomena except craving are declared as "this is suffering." Craving, the source and cause of that very suffering, is declared as dukkhasamudayo. The non-occurrence of both is declared as dukkhanirodho. The Noble Eightfold Path, which is the complete understanding of suffering, the abandoning of its origin, and the realization of its cessation, is declared as dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. In Etañhi, āvuso, atthasaṃhitaṃtiādi, this means that it is connected with benefit in this world and the next, based on the nine supramundane Dhammas, and the beginning, the principal, the forerunner of the entire holy life.

Pubbantasahagatadiṭṭhinissayavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Dependence on Views Associated with the Beginning

191.Idāni yaṃ taṃ mayā na byākataṃ, taṃ ajānantena na byākatanti mā evaṃ saññamakaṃsu. Jānantova ahaṃ evaṃ ‘‘etasmiṃ byākatepi attho natthī’’ti na byākariṃ. Yaṃ pana yathā byākātabbaṃ, taṃ mayā byākatamevāti sīhanādaṃ nadanto punayepi te, cundātiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhiyovadiṭṭhinissayā,diṭṭhinissitakā diṭṭhigatikāti attho.Idameva saccanti idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ.Moghamaññanti aññesaṃ vacanaṃ moghaṃ.Asayaṃkāroti asayaṃ kato.

191.Now, lest they should assume that what was not declared by me was not declared out of ignorance, roaring again the lion's roar, "Knowing, I did not declare it, thinking, 'There is no benefit even if this is declared.' But what should be declared, that has been declared by me," he said again yepi te, cundātiādi. There, diṭṭhinissayā means dependent on views; having views as their basis, their destination is views.Idameva saccaṃti means this view alone is true.Moghamaññaṃti means the words of others are empty.Asayaṃkāroti means not self-made.

192.Tatrāti tesu samaṇabrāhmaṇesu.Atthi nu kho idaṃ āvuso vuccatīti, āvuso, yaṃ tumhehi sassato attā ca loko cāti vuccati, idamatthi nu kho udāhu natthīti evamahaṃ te pucchāmīti attho.Yañca kho te evamāhaṃsūti yaṃ pana te ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ nānujānāmi.Paññattiyāti diṭṭhipaññattiyā.Samasamanti samena ñāṇena samaṃ.Yadidaṃ adhipaññattīti yā ayaṃ adhipaññatti nāma. Ettha ahameva bhiyyo uttaritaro na mayā samo atthi. Tattha yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘paññattiyāti yañca adhipaññattī’’ti ubhayametaṃ atthato ekaṃ. Bhedato hi paññatti adhipaññattīti dvayaṃ hoti. Tattha paññatti nāma diṭṭhipaññatti. Adhipaññatti nāma khandhapaññatti dhātupaññatti āyatanapaññatti indriyapaññatti saccapaññatti puggalapaññattīti evaṃ vuttā cha paññattiyo. Idha pana paññattiyāti etthāpi paññatti ceva adhipaññatti ca adhippetā, adhipaññattīti etthāpi. Bhagavā hi paññattiyāpi anuttaro, adhipaññattiyāpi anuttaro. Tenāha – ‘‘ahameva tattha bhiyyo yadidaṃ adhipaññattī’’ti.

192.Tatrāti means among those ascetics and brahmins. Atthi nu kho idaṃ āvuso vuccatīti means, "Friend, what you say, 'The self and the world are eternal,' does this exist or not?" Thus, I ask you. Yañca kho te evamāhaṃsūti means I do not approve of what they say, "This alone is true, others are empty." Paññattiyāti means by designation of views. Samasamaṃti means equal with equal knowledge. Yadidaṃ adhipaññattīti means this so-called higher designation. Here, I myself am superior, higher; there is no one equal to me. There, what was said, "paññattiyā" and what was said "adhipaññattī" both are one in meaning. In differentiation, there are two: paññatti and adhipaññatti. There, paññatti means designation of views. Adhipaññatti means the six designations mentioned as the designation of aggregates, the designation of elements, the designation of spheres, the designation of faculties, the designation of truths, and the designation of persons. Here, however, in "paññattiyāti," both designation and higher designation are intended, and in "adhipaññattīti" as well. The Blessed One is unsurpassed in designation as well as in higher designation. Therefore, he said, "I myself am superior there, namely, in higher designation."

196.Pahānāyāti pajahanatthaṃ.Samatikkamāyāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Desitāti kathitā.Paññattāti ṭhapitā. Satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya hi ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā sabbadhammesu yāthāvato diṭṭhesu ‘‘suddhasaṅkhārapuñjoyaṃ nayidha sattūpalabbhatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānato sabbadiṭṭhinissayānaṃ pahānaṃ hotīti. Tena vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhinissayānaṃ pahānāya samatikkamāya evaṃ mayā ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā desitā paññattā’’ti. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

196.Pahānāyāti means for the purpose of abandoning. Samatikkamāyāti is a synonym of that. Desitāti means taught. Paññattāti means established. For by making a solid mass without distinction through the cultivation of mindfulness, when all phenomena are seen as they actually are, and from the conclusion that "this is merely a mass of pure formations, and no being is found here," there is abandonment of all dependence on views. Therefore, it was said, "Thus, these four foundations of mindfulness have been taught and established by me for the abandonment and overcoming of dependence on views." The rest is easily understood everywhere.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

Here ends the commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī.

7. Lakkhaṇasuttavaṇṇanā

7. Explanation of the Lakkhaṇa Sutta

Dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Thirty-Two Marks of a Great Man

199.Evaṃme sutanti lakkhaṇasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā.Dvattiṃsimānīti dvattiṃsa imāni.Mahāpurisalakkhaṇānīti mahāpurisabyañjanāni mahāpurisanimittāni ‘‘ayaṃ mahāpuriso’’ti sañjānanakāraṇāni. ‘‘Yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassā’’tiādi mahāpadāne vitthāritanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

199.Evaṃ me sutaṃti means the Lakkhaṇa Sutta. Here, this is the explanation of the words that are easily understood. Dvattiṃsimānīti means these thirty-two. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇānīti means the signs of a great man, the indications of a great man, the causes for recognizing "this is a great man." "With whom the great man is endowed" etc., should be understood in the same way as explained in detail in the Mahāpadāna Sutta.

‘‘Bāhirakāpi isayo dhārenti, no ca kho jānanti ‘imassa kammassa katattā imaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ paṭilabhatī’ti’’ kasmā āha? Aṭṭhuppattiyā anurūpattā. Idañhi suttaṃ saaṭṭhuppattikaṃ. Sā panassa aṭṭhuppatti kattha samuṭṭhitā? Antogāme manussānaṃ antare. Tadā kira sāvatthivāsino attano attano gehesu ca gehadvāresu ca santhāgārādīsu ca nisīditvā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpesuṃ – ‘‘bhagavato asītianubyañjanāni byāmappabhā dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇāni, yehi ca bhagavato kāyo, sabbaphāliphullo viya pāricchattako, vikasitamiva kamalavanaṃ, nānāratanavicittaṃ viya suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ, tārāmaricivirocamiva gaganatalaṃ, ito cito ca vidhāvamānā vipphandamānā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo muñcanto ativiya sobhati. Bhagavato ca iminā nāma kammena idaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ nibbattanti kathitaṃ natthi, yāguuḷuṅkamattampi pana kaṭacchubhattamattaṃ vā pubbe dinnapaccayā evaṃ uppajjatīti bhagavatā vuttaṃ. Kiṃ nu kho satthā kammaṃ akāsi, yenassa imāni lakkhaṇāni nibbattantī’’ti.

"Even external ascetics know them, but they do not know that 'because of doing this action, one obtains this mark'," why was it said? Because it is appropriate to the origin of the story. For this sutta has its own story of origin. But where did this story of origin arise? Among people in a village. It seems that at that time, the residents of Savatthi, sitting in their own houses, at their house doors, and in assembly halls, etc., were starting a conversation: "The Blessed One has eighty minor marks, a fathom-long aura, and thirty-two marks of a great man, by which the body of the Blessed One, like a fully blooming pāricchattaka tree completely covered in blossoms, like a blooming lotus grove, like a golden archway decorated with various jewels, like the surface of the sky glittering with the rays of stars, exceedingly shines, releasing six-colored rays darting and flickering here and there. But it has not been said that the Blessed One's name and deed caused this mark to arise; even a little gruel, a piece of uḷuṅka, or a spoonful of rice is said by the Blessed One to arise due to a previous cause. What kind of deed did the Teacher do, that these marks arise for him?"

Athāyasmā ānando antogāme caranto imaṃ kathāsallāpaṃ sutvā katabhattakicco vihāraṃ āgantvā satthu vattaṃ katvā vanditvā ṭhito ‘‘mayā, bhante, antogāme ekā kathā sutā’’ti āha. Tato bhagavatā ‘‘kiṃ te, ānanda, suta’’nti vutte sabbaṃ ārocesi. Satthā therassa vacanaṃ sutvā parivāretvā nisinne bhikkhū āmantetvā ‘‘dvattiṃsimāni, bhikkhave, mahāpurisassa mahāpurisalakkhaṇānī’’ti paṭipāṭiyā lakkhaṇāni dassetvā yena kammena yaṃ nibbattaṃ, tassa dassanatthaṃ evamāha.

Then, Venerable Ānanda, while wandering in the village, heard this conversation. After finishing his meal, he went to the monastery, performed his duties to the Teacher, and stood having paid homage, saying, "Venerable Sir, I heard a conversation in the village." When the Blessed One asked, "What did you hear, Ānanda?" he reported everything. Having heard the Elder's words, the Teacher, having addressed the monks sitting around him, and showing the marks in order, said, "These, monks, are the thirty-two marks of a great man," to show which deed caused which mark to arise.

Suppatiṭṭhitapādatālakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Having Well-Established Feet

201.Purimaṃjātintiādīsu pubbe nivutthakkhandhā jātavasena ‘‘jātī’’ti vuttā. Tathā bhavanavasena ‘‘bhavo’’ti, nivutthavasena ālayaṭṭhena vā ‘‘niketo’’ti. Tiṇṇampi padānaṃ pubbe nivutthakkhandhasantāne ṭhitoti attho. Idāni yasmā taṃ khandhasantānaṃ devalokādīsupi vattati. Lakkhaṇanibbattanasamatthaṃ pana kusalakammaṃ tattha na sukaraṃ, manussabhūtasseva sukaraṃ. Tasmā yathābhūtena yaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, taṃ dassentopubbe manussabhūto samānoti āha. Akāraṇaṃ vā etaṃ. Hatthiassamigamahiṃsavānarādibhūtopi mahāpuriso pāramiyo pūretiyeva. Yasmā pana evarūpe attabhāve ṭhitena katakammaṃ na sakkā sukhena dīpetuṃ, manussabhāve ṭhitena katakammaṃ pana sakkā sukhena dīpetuṃ. Tasmā ‘‘pubbe manussabhūto samāno’’ti āha.

201.In Purimaṃ jātiṃtiādi, the aggregates previously dwelt in are called "births" in the sense of jāti. Similarly, "bhava" in the sense of becoming, or "niketo" in the sense of dwelling or in the sense of attachment. The meaning of all three words is that they have existed in the continuum of aggregates previously dwelt in. Now, since that continuum of aggregates occurs even in the heavenly realms, the skillful action capable of producing the mark is not easy to do there, it is easy only for one who has become a human being. Therefore, showing the action that was done as it actually was, he said, pubbe manussabhūto samānoti. Or, this is without a cause. A great being, even having become an elephant, a horse, a deer, a buffalo, a monkey, etc., fulfills the perfections. But since it is not easy to explain the action done while abiding in such an existence, but it is easy to explain the action done while abiding in human existence, therefore, he said, "pubbe manussabhūto samāno."

Daḷhasamādānoti thiragahaṇo.Kusalesu dhammesūti dasakusalakammapathesu.Avatthitasamādānoti niccalagahaṇo anivattitagahaṇo. Mahāsattassa hi akusalakammato aggiṃ patvā kukkuṭapattaṃ viya cittaṃ paṭikuṭati, kusalaṃ patvā vitānaṃ viya pasāriyati. Tasmā daḷhasamādāno hoti avatthitasamādāno. Na sakkā kenaci samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kusalasamādānaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ.

Daḷhasamādānoti means having a firm grasp.Kusalesu dhammesūti means in the ten courses of wholesome action.Avatthitasamādānoti means having an unshakeable grasp, an irreversible grasp. For the mind of a great being recoils from unwholesome action like a chicken feather touching fire, but expands towards wholesome action like a canopy. Therefore, he has a firm grasp, an unshakeable grasp. No ascetic, brahmin, deva, Māra, or Brahmā can cause the wholesome commitment to be relinquished.

Tatrimāni vatthūni – pubbe kira mahāpuriso kalandakayoniyaṃ nibbatti. Atha deve vuṭṭhe ogho āgantvā kulāvakaṃ gahetvā samuddameva pavesesi. Mahāpuriso ‘‘puttake nīharissāmī’’ti naṅguṭṭhaṃ temetvā temetvā samuddato udakaṃ bahi khipi. Sattame divase sakko āvajjitvā tattha āgamma ‘‘kiṃ karosī’’ti pucchi? So tassa ārocesi. Sakko mahāsamuddato udakassa dunnīharaṇīyabhāvaṃ kathesi. Bodhisatto tādisena kusītena saddhiṃ kathetumpi na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Mā idha tiṭṭhā’’ti apasāresi. Sakko ‘‘anomapurisena gahitagahaṇaṃ na sakkā vissajjāpetu’’nti tuṭṭho tassa puttake ānetvā adāsi. Mahājanakakālepi mahāsamuddaṃ taramāno ‘‘kasmā mahāsamuddaṃ tarasī’’ti devatāya puṭṭho ‘‘pāraṃ gantvā kulasantake raṭṭhe rajjaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ dātuṃ tarāmī’’ti āha. Tato devatāya – ‘‘ayaṃ mahāsamuddo gambhīro ceva puthulo ca, kadā naṃ tarissatī’’ti vutte so āha ‘‘taveso mahāsamuddasadiso, mayhaṃ pana ajjhāsayaṃ āgamma khuddakamātikā viya khāyati. Tvaṃyeva maṃ dakkhissasi samuddaṃ taritvā samuddapārato dhanaṃ āharitvā kulasantakaṃ rajjaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ dadamāna’’nti. Devatā ‘‘anomapurisena gahitagahaṇaṃ na sakkā vissajjāpetu’’nti bodhisattaṃ āliṅgetvā haritvā uyyāne nipajjāpesi. So chattaṃ ussāpetvā divase divase pañcasatasahassapariccāgaṃ katvā aparabhāge nikkhamma pabbajito. Evaṃ mahāsatto na sakkā kenaci samaṇena vā…pe… brahmunā vā kusalasamādānaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘daḷhasamādāno ahosi kusalesu dhammesu avatthitasamādāno’’ti.

Here are the instances: It seems that formerly, the Great Being was born in the kalandaka species. Then, after the devas had risen, a flood came, taking the nest and entering the ocean itself. The Great Being, thinking, "I will bring out my children," dipped his tail again and again and threw the water out of the ocean. On the seventh day, Sakka, having reflected and come there, asked, "What are you doing?" He told him. Sakka spoke of the impossibility of drawing water out of the great ocean. The Bodhisatta did not even think it proper to speak with such a lazy person. He drove him away, saying, "Don't stand here." Sakka, pleased that "the resolve made by an extraordinary person cannot be relinquished," brought his children and gave them to him. In the time of Mahājanaka as well, while crossing the great ocean, when asked by a deity, "Why are you crossing the great ocean?" he said, "I am crossing to go to the other shore, take the kingdom belonging to my family, and give alms." Then, when the deity said, "This great ocean is both deep and wide; when will you cross it?" he said, "This ocean appears like a small footprint to me, considering my intention, even though it is like a great ocean to you. You yourself will see me, having crossed the ocean, bringing wealth from the other side of the ocean, taking the kingdom belonging to my family, and giving alms." The deity, saying, "The resolve made by an extraordinary person cannot be relinquished," embraced the Bodhisatta, carried him, and laid him down in the park. He, having raised a parasol, made an expenditure of five hundred thousand each day, and in the latter part, having left, went forth. Thus, a Great Being cannot be made to relinquish a wholesome commitment by any ascetic…pe…or Brahmā. Therefore, it was said – "He was firm in his commitment to wholesome qualities, unshakeable in his commitment."

kāyasucaritetiādimāha.Dānasaṃvibhāgeti ettha ca dānameva diyyanavasena dānaṃ, saṃvibhāgakaraṇavasena saṃvibhāgo.Sīlasamādāneti pañcasīladasasīlacatupārisuddhisīlapūraṇakāle.Uposathūpavāseti cātuddasikādibhedassa uposathassa upavasanakāle.Matteyyatāyāti mātukātabbavatte. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.Aññataraññataresu cāti aññesu ca evarūpesu.Adhikusalesūti ettha atthi kusalā, atthi adhikusalā. Sabbepi kāmāvacarā kusalā kusalā nāma, rūpāvacarā adhikusalā. Ubhopi te kusalā nāma, arūpāvacarā adhikusalā. Sabbepi te kusalā nāma, sāvakapāramīpaṭilābhapaccayā kusalā adhikusalā nāma. Tepi kusalā nāma, paccekabodhipaṭilābhapaccayā kusalā adhikusalā. Tepi kusalā nāma, sabbaññutaññāṇappaṭilābhapaccayā pana kusalā idha ‘‘adhikusalā’’ti adhippetā. Tesu adhikusalesu dhammesu daḷhasamādāno ahosi avatthitasamādāno.

kāyasucaritetiādimāha. Here begins explanation about kāyasucarite. Dānasaṃvibhāgeti, here dāna means giving in the sense of offering, and saṃvibhāga means sharing in the sense of making a distribution. Sīlasamādāneti, at the time of undertaking the five precepts, ten precepts, or fulfilling the fourfold purification of morality. Uposathūpavāseti, at the time of observing uposatha, which is of various kinds such as the fourteenth day of the lunar cycle, etc. Matteyyatāyāti, in duties towards mother. The same method applies to the remaining words. Aññataraññataresu cāti, and in other such wholesome deeds. Adhikusalesūti, here, there are kusalā (wholesome deeds), and there are adhikusalā (superior wholesome deeds). All wholesome deeds pertaining to the sense-sphere are called kusalā, while those pertaining to the form-sphere are adhikusalā. Both are called kusalā, while those pertaining to the formless-sphere are adhikusalā. All of these are called kusalā, while wholesome deeds that are conditions for attaining the disciple's perfection are called adhikusalā. These too are called kusalā, while wholesome deeds that are conditions for attaining individual enlightenment are adhikusalā. These too are called kusalā, but wholesome deeds that are conditions for attaining omniscience are here intended by the term "adhikusalā." In those superior wholesome dhamma, he had firm resolve, not wavering resolve.

Kaṭattā upacitattāti ettha sakimpi kataṃ katameva, abhiṇhakaraṇena pana upacitaṃ hoti.Ussannattāti piṇḍīkataṃ rāsīkataṃ kammaṃ ussannanti vuccati. Tasmā ‘‘ussannattā’’ti vadanto mayā katakammassa cakkavāḷaṃ atisambādhaṃ, bhavaggaṃ atinīcaṃ, evaṃ me ussannaṃ kammanti dasseti.Vipulattāti appamāṇattā. Iminā ‘‘anantaṃ aparimāṇaṃ mayā kataṃ kamma’’nti dasseti.Adhiggaṇhātīti adhibhavati, aññehi devehi atirekaṃ labhatīti attho.Paṭilabhatīti adhigacchati.

Kaṭattā upacitattāti, here, an action done even once is done, but it becomes accumulated by repeated performance. Ussannattāti, action that is heaped up, piled up, is called ussanna. Therefore, saying "ussannattā," he shows, "The cycle of existence is extremely crowded with my performed actions, the peak of existence is very low, thus my action is piled up." Vipulattāti, because it is immeasurable. By this, he shows, "I have done infinite, limitless action." Adhiggaṇhātīti, surpasses, attains superiority over other deities, this is the meaning. Paṭilabhatīti, obtains.

Sabbāvantehi pādatalehīti idaṃ ‘‘samaṃ pādaṃ bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipatī’’ti etassa vitthāravacanaṃ. Tattha sabbāvantehīti sabbapadesavantehi, na ekena padesena paṭhamaṃ phusati, na ekena pacchā, sabbeheva pādatalehi samaṃ phusati, samaṃ uddharati. Sacepi hi tathāgato ‘‘anekasataporisaṃ narakaṃ akkamissāmī’’ti pādaṃ abhinīharati. Tāvadeva ninnaṭṭhānaṃ vātapūritā viya kammārabhastā unnamitvā pathavisamaṃ hoti. Unnataṭṭhānampi anto pavisati. ‘‘Dūre akkamissāmī’’ti abhinīharantassa sineruppamāṇopi pabbato suseditavettaṅkuro viya onamitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgacchati. Tathā hissa yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ katvā ‘‘yugandharapabbataṃ akkamissāmī’’ti pāde abhinīhaṭe pabbato onamitvā pādasamīpaṃ āgato. Sopi taṃ akkamitvā dutiyapādena tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ akkami. Na hi cakkalakkhaṇena patiṭṭhātabbaṭṭhānaṃ visamaṃ bhavituṃ sakkoti. Khāṇu vā kaṇṭako vā sakkharā vā kathalā vā uccārapassāvakheḷasiṅghāṇikādīni vā purimataraṃ vā apagacchanti, tattha tattheva vā pathaviṃ pavisanti. Tathāgatassa hi sīlatejena puññatejena dhammatejena dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ ānubhāvena ayaṃ mahāpathavī sammā mudupupphābhikiṇṇā hoti.

Sabbāvantehi pādatalehīti, this is an expanded explanation of "places his foot evenly on the ground." There, sabbāvantehi means with all the edges, not touching first with one edge and later with another, but touching evenly with all the soles of the feet, and lifting evenly. Indeed, even if the Tathāgata intends to step into "a hell crowded with hundreds of thousands of men," at that very moment, the low places rise up like a bellows filled with wind, becoming level with the earth. High places sink down inside. For one intending to step "far away," even a mountain the size of Mount Sineru bends down and comes near his foot like a well-trained cane sprout. Thus, having performed the twin miracle, when he intended to step onto "Mount Yugandhara," the mountain bent down and came near his foot. He stepped on it and then stepped with his second foot into the Tāvatiṃsa heaven. Indeed, a place to be established with the wheel mark cannot be uneven. Thorns, splinters, gravel, potsherds, or excrement, urine, phlegm, mucus, etc., either disappear beforehand or sink into the earth right there. Indeed, by the power of the Tathāgata's morality, by the power of merit, by the power of dhamma, by the influence of the ten pāramī, this great earth is well covered with soft flowers.

202.Sāgarapariyantanti sāgarasīmaṃ. Na hi tassa rajjaṃ karontassa antarā rukkho vā pabbato vā nadī vā sīmā hoti mahāsamuddova sīmā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sāgarapariyanta’’nti.Akhilamanimittamakaṇṭakanti niccoraṃ. Corā hi kharasamphassaṭṭhena khilā, upaddavapaccayaṭṭhena nimittā, vijjhanaṭṭhena kaṇṭakāti vuccanti.Iddhanti samiddhaṃ.Phītanti sabbasampattiphāliphullaṃ.Khemanti nibbhayaṃ.Sivanti nirupaddavaṃ.Nirabbudanti abbudavirahitaṃ, gumbaṃ gumbaṃ hutvā carantehi corehi virahitanti attho.Akkhambhiyoti avikkhambhanīyo. Na naṃ koci ṭhānato cāletuṃ sakkoti.Paccatthikenāti paṭipakkhaṃ icchantena.Paccāmittenāti paṭiviruddhena amittena. Ubhayampetaṃ sapattavevacanaṃ.Abbhantarehīti anto uṭṭhitehi rāgādīhi.

202.Sāgarapariyantanti, bounded by the ocean. Indeed, while he rules, neither a tree, nor a mountain, nor a river is the boundary, but the great ocean itself is the boundary. Therefore, it was said, "sāgarapariyanta." Akhilamanimittamakaṇṭakanti, without constant theft. Indeed, thieves are called khilā because of their rough contact, nimittā because they are the cause of trouble, and kaṇṭaka because of their piercing nature. Iddhanti, prosperous. Phītanti, flourishing with all kinds of wealth. Khemanti, without fear. Sivanti, without danger. Nirabbudanti, devoid of chaos, meaning devoid of thieves who wander in groups. Akkhambhiyoti, unshakeable. No one can move it from its place. Paccatthikenāti, by one who desires opposition. Paccāmittenāti, by an enemy who is hostile. Both of these are synonyms for adversary. Abbhantarehīti, by internal defilements such as greed, etc.

Bāhirehīti samaṇādīhi. Tathā hi naṃ bāhirā devadattakokālikādayo samaṇāpi soṇadaṇḍakūṭadaṇḍādayo brāhmaṇāpi sakkasadisā devatāpi satta vassāni anubandhamāno māropi bakādayo brahmānopi vikkhambhetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu.

Bāhirehīti, by ascetics, etc. Thus, external ascetics such as Devadatta and Kokālika, Brahmins such as Soṇadaṇḍa and Kūṭadaṇḍa, deities such as Sakka, Māra who followed for seven years, Brahmās such as Baka, were unable to shake him.

Kammaṃnāma satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni daḷhavīriyena hutvā kataṃ kammaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma daḷhena hutvā katabhāvaṃ sadevako loko jānātūti suppatiṭṭhitapādamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma suppatiṭṭhitapādatā.Lakkhaṇānisaṃsonāma paccatthikehi avikkhambhanīyatā.

Kammaṃ means the action done with firm effort for more than four incalculable periods of one hundred thousand eons. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means the great man's characteristic of having well-established feet, so that the world with its deities knows that it was done firmly. Lakkhaṇaṃ means well-established feet. Lakkhaṇānisaṃso means unshakeability by adversaries.

203.Tatthetaṃvuccatīti tattha vutte kammādibhede aparampi idaṃ vuccati, gāthābandhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Etā pana gāthā porāṇakattherā ‘‘ānandattherena ṭhapitā vaṇṇanāgāthā’’ti vatvā gatā. Aparabhāge therā ‘‘ekapadiko atthuddhāro’’ti āhaṃsu.

203.Tatthetaṃ vuccatīti, there, in the aforementioned division of action, etc., this other thing is said, it is said in relation to the structure of the verses. However, these verses were spoken by the ancient elders, saying, "These are the verses of explanation established by Ānanda Thera." In the later part, the elders said, "It is a single-word meaning extraction."

sacceti vacīsacce.Dhammeti dasakusalakammapathadhamme.Dameti indriyadamane.Saṃyameti sīlasaṃyame.‘‘Soceyyasīlālayuposathesu cā’’ti ettha kāyasoceyyādi tividhaṃsoceyyaṃ.Ālayabhūtaṃ sīlamevasīlālayo.Uposathakammaṃuposatho. Ahiṃsāyāti avihiṃsāya.Samattamācarīti sakalaṃ acari.

sacceti, in truthfulness of speech. Dhammeti, in the ten wholesome courses of action. Dameti, in taming the senses. Saṃyameti, in moral restraint. ‘‘Soceyyasīlālayuposathesu cā’’ti, here, soceyyaṃ is purity in three ways, bodily purity, etc. Sīlameva, morality that is a dwelling place, is sīlālayo. Uposatha action is uposatho. Ahiṃsāyā, in non-violence. Samattamācarīti, practiced completely.

Anvabhīti anubhavi.Veyyañjanikāti lakkhaṇapāṭhakā.Parābhibhūti pare abhibhavanasamattho.Sattubhīti sapattehi akkhambhiyo hoti.

Anvabhīti, experienced. Veyyañjanikāti, readers of characteristics. Parābhibhūti, capable of overcoming others. Sattubhīti, unshakeable by enemies.

Na so gacchati jātu khambhananti so ekaṃseneva aggapuggalo vikkhambhetabbataṃ na gacchati.Esā hi tassa dhammatāti tassa hi esā dhammatā ayaṃ sabhāvo.

Na so gacchati jātu khambhananti, that foremost individual never goes to a state of being shaken. Esā hi tassa dhammatāti, indeed, this is his nature, this is his characteristic.

Pādatalacakkalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Foot Sole Wheel Characteristic

204.Ubbegauttāsabhayanti ubbegabhayañceva uttāsabhayañca. Tattha corato vā rājato vā paccatthikato vā vilopanabandhanādinissayaṃ bhayaṃubbegonāma, taṃmuhuttikaṃ caṇḍahatthiassādīni vā ahiyakkhādayo vā paṭicca lomahaṃsanakaraṃ bhayaṃuttāsabhayaṃnāma. Taṃ sabbaṃ apanuditā vūpasametā.Saṃvidhātāti saṃvidahitā. Kathaṃ saṃvidahati? Aṭaviyaṃ sāsaṅkaṭṭhānesu dānasālaṃ kāretvā tattha āgate bhojetvā manusse datvā ativāheti, taṃ ṭhānaṃ pavisituṃ asakkontānaṃ manusse pesetvā paveseti. Nagarādīsupi tesu tesu ṭhānesu ārakkhaṃ ṭhapeti, evaṃ saṃvidahati.Saparivārañca dānaṃ adāsīti annaṃ pānanti dasavidhaṃ dānavatthuṃ.

204.Ubbegauttāsabhayanti, both the fear of agitation and the fear of fright. There, the fear arising from robbery, the king, or adversaries, based on plundering, imprisonment, etc., is called ubbego, and the fear that causes hair to stand on end in that moment, due to fierce elephants or horses, or due to snakes, yakkhas, etc., is called uttāsabhayaṃ. He dispelled and calmed all that. Saṃvidhātāti, one who arranges. How does he arrange? In forests, in dangerous places, having built a charity hall, he feeds those who come there and gives to the people and helps them pass through, sending people to help those who are unable to enter that place. Even in cities, he places guards in various places, thus he arranges. Saparivārañca dānaṃ adāsīti, he gave alms along with its retinue, the ten kinds of alms, food and drink etc.

annanti yāgubhattaṃ. Taṃ dadanto na dvāre ṭhapetvā adāsi, atha kho antonivesane haritupalittaṭṭhāne lājā ceva pupphāni ca vikiritvā āsanaṃ paññapetvā vitānaṃ bandhitvā gandhadhūmādīhi sakkāraṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ nisīdāpetvā yāguṃ adāsi. Yāguṃ dento ca sabyañjanaṃ adāsi. Yāgupānāvasāne pāde dhovitvā telena makkhetvā nānappakārakaṃ anantaṃ khajjakaṃ datvā pariyosāne anekasūpaṃ anekabyañjanaṃ paṇītabhojanaṃ adāsi. Pānaṃ dento ambapānādiaṭṭhavidhaṃ pānaṃ adāsi, tampi yāgubhattaṃ datvā. Vatthaṃ dento na suddhavatthameva adāsi, ekapaṭṭadupaṭṭādipahonakaṃ pana datvā sucimpi adāsi, suttampi adāsi, suttaṃ vaṭṭesi, sūcikammakaraṇaṭṭhāne bhikkhūnaṃ āsanāni, yāgubhattaṃ, pādamakkhanaṃ, piṭṭhimakkhanaṃ, rajanaṃ, paṇḍupalāsaṃ, rajanadoṇikaṃ, antamaso cīvararajanakaṃ kappiyakārakampi adāsi.

annanti, cooked rice gruel and cooked rice. Giving that, he did not give by placing it at the door, but rather, inside the residence, in a place smeared with green clay, having scattered parched grain and flowers, having prepared a seat and hung a canopy, having made offerings with incense and perfume, he invited the Sangha of monks to sit down and gave the rice gruel. Giving the rice gruel, he gave it with relish. At the end of the rice gruel and drinks, having washed their feet and anointed them with oil, having given various kinds of endless snacks, at the end he gave excellent food with various curries and many sauces. Giving drink, he gave eight kinds of drink, such as mango juice, etc., and that too after giving the rice gruel and cooked rice. Giving cloth, he did not give just plain cloth, but rather, giving what was sufficient, such as single-layered and double-layered cloth, he also gave needles, thread, and helped to twist the thread, in the place for doing needlework, he gave seats for the monks, rice gruel, foot ointment, back ointment, dye, paṇḍupalāsa (yellow leaves used for dyeing), a dyeing trough, and even a kappiyakāraka (one who is allowed to handle money and goods for monks) for dyeing robes.

Yānanti upāhanaṃ. Taṃ dadantopi upāhanatthavikaṃ upāhanadaṇḍakaṃ makkhanatelaṃ heṭṭhā vuttāni ca annādīni tasseva parivāraṃ katvā adāsi.Mālaṃdentopi na suddhamālameva adāsi, atha kho naṃ gandhehi missetvā heṭṭhimāni cattāri tasseva parivāraṃ katvā adāsi. Bodhicetiyaāsanapotthakādipūjanatthāya ceva cetiyagharadhūpanatthāya cagandhaṃdentopi na suddhagandhameva adāsi, gandhapisanakanisadāya ceva pakkhipanakabhājanena ca saddhiṃ heṭṭhimāni pañca tassa parivāraṃ katvā adāsi. Cetiyapūjādīnaṃ atthāya haritālamanosilācīnapiṭṭhādivilepanaṃdentopi na suddhavilepanameva adāsi, vilepanabhājanena saddhiṃ heṭṭhimāni cha tassa parivāraṃ katvā adāsi.Seyyāti mañcapīṭhaṃ. Taṃ dentopi na suddhakameva adāsi, kojavakambalapaccattharaṇamañcappaṭipādakehi saddhiṃ antamaso maṅgulasodhanadaṇḍakaṃ heṭṭhimāni ca satta tassa parivāraṃ katvā adāsi.Āvasathaṃdentopi na gehamattameva adāsi, atha kho naṃ mālākammalatākammapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ supaññattaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ kāretvā heṭṭhimāni aṭṭha tassa parivāraṃ katvā adāsi.Padīpeyyanti padīpatelaṃ. Taṃ dento cetiyaṅgaṇe bodhiyaṅgaṇe dhammassavanagge vasanagehe potthakavācanaṭṭhāne iminā dīpaṃ jālāpethāti na suddhatelameva adāsi, vaṭṭi kapallakatelabhājanādīhi saddhiṃ heṭṭhimāni nava tassa parivāraṃ katvā adāsi.Suvibhattantarānīti suvibhattaantarāni.

Yānanti, footwear. Even giving that, he made the accoutrements for footwear, the stick for footwear, the anointing oil, and the food etc. mentioned below, the retinue for that and gave it. Even giving mālaṃ, he did not give just plain garlands, but rather, having mixed them with perfumes, he made the lower four the retinue for that and gave it. For the purpose of worshiping the Bodhi tree, the cetiya, the seat, the books, etc., and for the purpose of fumigating the cetiya house, even giving gandhaṃ, he did not give just plain perfume, but rather, together with a perfumed powder container and a receptacle, he made the lower five the retinue for that and gave it. For the purpose of cetiya worship, etc., even giving vilepanaṃ, orpiment, realgar, Chinese flour, etc., he did not give just plain ointment, but rather, together with an ointment container, he made the lower six the retinue for that and gave it. Seyyāti, couch and chair. Even giving that, he did not give just plain ones, but rather, together with woollen blankets, coverings, couch legs, and even a auspicious cleaning stick, he made the lower seven the retinue for that and gave it. Even giving Āvasathaṃ, he did not give just a house, but rather, having made it decorated with flower work and creeper work, having prepared a well-arranged couch and chair, he made the lower eight the retinue for that and gave it. Padīpeyyanti, lamp oil. Giving that, he said, "Light a lamp in the courtyard of the cetiya, in the courtyard of the Bodhi tree, at the hall for listening to the dhamma, in the dwelling place, in the place for reading books," he did not give just plain oil, but rather, together with wicks, oil cups, and oil containers, he made the lower nine the retinue for that and gave it. Suvibhattantarānīti, those with well-divided interiors.

Rājānoti abhisittā.Bhogiyāti bhojakākumārāti rājakumārā. Idhakammaṃnāma saparivāraṃ dānaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma saparivāraṃ katvā dānaṃ adāsīti iminā kāraṇena sadevako loko jānātūti nibbattaṃ cakkalakkhaṇaṃ.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma tadeva cakkalakkhaṇaṃ.Ānisaṃsomahāparivāratā.

Rājānoti, anointed kings. Bhogiyāti, enjoyers. Kumārāti, princes. Here, kammaṃ means alms with its retinue. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means the wheel mark that arose because of the act "he gave alms along with its retinue," so that the world with its deities knows. Lakkhaṇaṃ means that very wheel mark. Ānisaṃso is having a large retinue.

205.Tatthetaṃ vuccatīti imā tadatthaparidīpanā gāthā vuccanti. Duvidhā hi gāthā honti – tadatthaparidīpanā ca visesatthaparidīpanā ca. Tattha pāḷiāgatameva atthaṃ paridīpanātadatthaparidīpanānāma. Pāḷiyaṃ anāgataṃ paridīpanāvisesatthaparidīpanānāma. Imā pana tadatthaparidīpanā. Tatthapureti pubbe.Puratthāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Purimāsu jātīsūti imissā jātiyā pubbekatakammapaṭikkhepadīpanaṃ.Ubbegauttāsabhayāpanūdanoti ubbegabhayassa ca uttāsabhayassa ca apanūdano.Ussukoti adhimutto.

205.Tatthetaṃ vuccatīti, these are called verses that illuminate the meaning. Indeed, there are two kinds of verses – those that illuminate the meaning and those that illuminate a special meaning. There, that which illuminates only the meaning that comes in the pāḷi is called tadatthaparidīpanā. That which illuminates a meaning not found in the pāḷi is called visesatthaparidīpanā. However, these are verses that illuminate the meaning. There, pureti, in the past. Puratthāti, a synonym for that. Purimāsu jātīsūti, it is a showing of rejection of actions done before this birth. Ubbegauttāsabhayāpanūdanoti, one who dispels the fear of agitation and the fear of fright. Ussukoti, resolved.

Satapuññalakkhaṇanti satena satena puññakammena nibbattaṃ ekekaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ. Evaṃ sante yo koci buddho bhaveyyāti na rocayiṃsu, anantesu pana cakkavāḷesu sabbe sattā ekekaṃ kammaṃ satakkhattuṃ kareyyuṃ, ettakehi janehi kataṃ kammaṃ bodhisatto ekova ekekaṃ sataguṇaṃ katvā nibbatto. Tasmā ‘‘satapuññalakkhaṇo’’ti imamatthaṃ rocayiṃsu.Manussāsurasakkarakkhasāti manussā ca asurā ca sakkā ca rakkhasā ca.

Satapuññalakkhaṇanti, one characteristic arising from a hundred hundred meritorious deeds. Thus, they did not approve of saying that anyone could become a Buddha, but they did approve of this meaning: In countless world-systems, if all beings were to do a single deed a hundred times, the Bodhisatta alone, having done each deed a hundredfold, was born from deeds done by so many people. Therefore, they approved of this meaning, "one whose characteristic arises from a hundred meritorious deeds." Manussāsurasakkarakkhasāti, humans, asuras, sakkas, and rakkhasas.

Āyatapaṇhitāditilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Long Heels and Other Characteristics

206.Antarāti paṭisandhito sarasacutiyā antare. Idhakammaṃnāma pāṇātipātā virati.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma pāṇātipātaṃ karonto padasaddasavanabhayā aggaggapādehi akkamantā gantvā paraṃ pātenti. Atha te iminā kāraṇena tesaṃ taṃ kammaṃ jano jānātūti antovaṅkapādā vā bahivaṅkapādā vā ukkuṭikapādā vā aggakoṇḍā vā paṇhikoṇḍā vā bhavanti. Aggapādehi gantvā parassa amāritabhāvaṃ pana tathāgatassa sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūtiāyatapaṇhimahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati. Tathā paraṃ ghātentā unnatakāyena gacchantā aññe passissantīti onatā gantvā paraṃ ghātenti. Atha te evamime gantvā paraṃ ghātayiṃsūti nesaṃ taṃ kammaṃ iminā kāraṇena paro jānātūti khujjā vā vāmanā vā pīṭhasappi vā bhavanti. Tathāgatassa pana evaṃ gantvā paresaṃ aghātitabhāvaṃ iminā kāraṇena sadevako loko jānātūtibrahmujugattamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati. Tathā paraṃ ghātentā āvudhaṃ vā muggaraṃ vā gaṇhitvā muṭṭhikatahatthā paraṃ ghātenti. Te evaṃ tesaṃ parassa ghātitabhāvaṃ iminā kāraṇena jano jānātūti rassaṅgulī vā rassahatthā vā vaṅkaṅgulī vā phaṇahatthakā vā bhavanti. Tathāgatassa pana evaṃ paresaṃ aghātitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūtidīghaṅgulimahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati. Idametthakammasarikkhakaṃ.Idameva pana lakkhaṇattayaṃlakkhaṇaṃnāma. Dīghāyukabhāvolakkhaṇānisaṃso.

206.Antarāti, between rebirth and death. Here, kammaṃ means abstaining from killing. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means that those who kill, placing their feet carefully for fear of the sound of footsteps, go and kill others. Then, because of that action of theirs, so that people may know that action of theirs, they have inward-curving feet, or outward-curving feet, or squatting feet, or toe-nails bent upward, or heel-nails bent upward. However, because the Tathāgata did not kill others in that way, so that the world with its deities may know this, the great man's characteristic of āyatapaṇhi (long heels) arises. Thus, while killing others, going with an uplifted body, thinking others will see, they bend over and kill others. Then, because others know their action, that they went and killed in this way, they become hunchbacks, or dwarfs, or pīṭhasappī (one with a hump on the back). However, because the Tathāgata did not kill others in that way, so that the world with its deities may know this, the great man's characteristic of brahmujugatta (straight body like Brahmā) arises. Thus, while killing others, taking a weapon or a club, with fists clenched, they kill others. They become short-fingered, or short-handed, or have crooked fingers, or fan hands, so that people know their action, that they killed others in this way. However, because the Tathāgata did not kill others in that way, so that the world with its deities may know this, the great man's characteristic of dīghaṅguli (long fingers) arises. This here is kammasarikkhakaṃ. However, this very triad of characteristics is called lakkhaṇaṃ. Long life is lakkhaṇānisaṃso.

207.Maraṇavadhabhayattanoti ettha maraṇasaṅkhāto vadho maraṇavadho, maraṇavadhato bhayaṃmaraṇavadhabhayaṃ,taṃ attano jānitvā.Paṭivirato paraṃmāraṇāyāti yathā mayhaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ mama jīvitaṃ piyaṃ, evaṃ paresampīti ñatvā paraṃ māraṇato paṭivirato ahosi.Sucaritenāti suciṇṇena.Saggamagamāti saggaṃ gato.

207. Maraṇavadhabhayattanoti: Here, maraṇavadho means death, maraṇavadhabhayaṃ means fear of death, knowing that in oneself. Paṭivirato paraṃmāraṇāyāti: Knowing that just as I fear death and cherish my life, so do others, he refrained from killing others. Sucaritenāti: By good conduct. Saggamagamāti: He went to heaven.

Caviya punaridhāgatoti cavitvā puna idhāgato.Dīghapāsaṇhikoti dīghapaṇhiko.Brahmāva sujūti brahmā viya suṭṭhu uju.

Caviya punaridhāgatoti: Having passed away, he was reborn here again. Dīghapāsaṇhikoti: Of long heels. Brahmāva sujūti: As straight as Brahmā.

Subhujoti sundarabhujo.Susūti mahallakakālepi taruṇarūpo.Susaṇṭhitoti susaṇṭhānasampanno.Mudutalunaṅguliyassāti mudū ca talunā ca aṅguliyo assa.Tībhīti tīhi.Purisavaraggalakkhaṇehīti purisavarassa aggalakkhaṇehi.Cirayapanāyāti ciraṃ yāpanāya, dīghāyukabhāvāya.

Subhujoti: Of beautiful arms. Susūti: Appearing young even in old age. Susaṇṭhitoti: Possessed of excellent structure. Mudutalunaṅguliyassāti: He had soft and tender fingers. Tībhīti: By three. Purisavaraggalakkhaṇehīti: By the auspicious marks of a superior man. Cirayapanāyāti: For long duration, for a long life.

Ciraṃ yapetīti ciraṃ yāpeti.Cirataraṃ pabbajati yadi tatoti tato cirataraṃ yāpeti, yadi pabbajatīti attho.Yāpayatica vasiddhibhāvanāyāti vasippatto hutvā iddhibhāvanāya yāpeti.

Ciraṃ yapetīti: He lives long. Cirataraṃ pabbajati yadi tatoti: He lives even longer than that; this means, if he goes forth. Yāpayati ca vasiddhibhāvanāyāti: And having attained mastery, he lives by developing iddhi.

Sattussadatālakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Seven Flavors

208.Rasitānanti rasasampannānaṃ. ‘‘Khādanīyāna’’ntiādīsukhādanīyānināma piṭṭhakhajjakādīni.Bhojanīyānīti pañca bhojanāni.Sāyanīyānīti sāyitabbāni sappinavanītādīni.Lehanīyānīti nillehitabbāni piṭṭhapāyāsādīni.Pānānīti aṭṭha pānakāni.

208. Rasitānanti: Of flavorful things. In "khādanīyāna," etc., khādanīyāni means pastries, sweets, and the like. Bhojanīyānīti: The five staple foods. Sāyanīyānīti: Things to be tasted, such as ghee and butter. Lehanīyānīti: Things to be licked, such as rice gruel and sweets. Pānānīti: The eight kinds of drinks.

kammaṃnāma kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni dinnaṃ idaṃ paṇītabhojanadānaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma lūkhabhojane kucchigate lohitaṃ sussati, maṃsaṃ milāyati. Tasmā lūkhadāyakā sattā iminā kāraṇena nesaṃ lūkhabhojanassa dinnabhāvaṃ jano jānātūti appamaṃsā appalohitā manussapetā viya dullabhannapānā bhavanti. Paṇītabhojane pana kucchigate maṃsalohitaṃ vaḍḍhati, paripuṇṇakāyā pāsādikā abhirūpadassanā honti. Tasmā tathāgatassa dīgharattaṃ paṇītabhojanadāyakattaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti sattussadamahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma sattussadalakkhaṇameva. Paṇītalābhitāānisaṃso.

kammaṃ means this offering of exquisite food, given for four incalculable periods plus one hundred thousand aeons. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means that in the case of coarse food, blood dries up in the stomach, and the flesh withers. Therefore, beings who give coarse food become like manussapeta with little flesh and blood, and difficult to obtain food and drink, so that people may know that their offering of coarse food was the cause. But with exquisite food, flesh and blood increase in the stomach, the body becomes full, pleasing, and beautiful to behold. Therefore, the characteristic of the seven flavors of a great man arises so that the world with its deities may know that the Tathāgata has long been a giver of exquisite food. Lakkhaṇaṃ means the characteristic of the seven flavors itself. The benefit is the attainment of exquisite things.

209.Khajjabhojjamathaleyyasāyitanti khajjakañca bhojanañca lehanīyañca sāyanīyañca.Uttamaggarasadāyakoti uttamo aggarasadāyako, uttamānaṃ vā aggarasānaṃ dāyako.

209. Khajjabhojjamathaleyyasāyitanti: Snacks, food, things to be licked, and things to be tasted. Uttamaggarasadāyakoti: A giver of the best, chief flavors, or a giver of the chief flavors of the best things.

Satta cussadeti satta ca ussade.Tadatthajotakanti khajjabhojjādijotakaṃ, tesaṃ lābhasaṃvattanikanti attho.Pabbajampi cāti pabbajamānopi ca.Tadādhigacchatīti taṃ adhigacchati.Lābhiruttamanti lābhi uttamaṃ.

Satta cussadeti: And seven flavors. Tadatthajotakanti: Indicating the meaning of snacks, food, etc.; meaning, conducive to their attainment. Pabbajampi cāti: And even when going forth. Tadādhigacchatīti: He attains that. Lābhiruttamanti: Attainer of the best.

Karacaraṇādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristics of Hands, Feet, etc.

210.Dānenātiādīsu ekacco dāneneva saṅgaṇhitabbo hoti, taṃ dānena saṅgahesi. Pabbajitānaṃ pabbajitaparikkhāraṃ, gihīnaṃ gihiparikkhāraṃ adāsi.

210. Dānenātiādīsu: One should be treated with generosity alone, he treated them with generosity. He gave renunciant requisites to renunciants, and household requisites to householders.

Peyyavajjenāti ekacco hi ‘‘ayaṃ dātabbaṃ nāma deti, ekena pana vacanena sabbaṃ makkhetvā nāseti, kiṃ etassa dāna’’nti vattā hoti. Ekacco ‘‘ayaṃ kiñcāpi dānaṃ na deti, kathento pana telena viya makkheti. Eso detu vā mā vā, vacanameva tassa sahassaṃ agghatī’’ti vattā hoti. Evarūpo puggalo dānaṃ na paccāsīsati, piyavacanameva paccāsīsati. Taṃ piyavacanena saṅgahesi.

Peyyavajjenāti: For one might say, "This person gives what should be given, but spoils and ruins everything with a single word; what is the use of their giving?" Another might say, "Although this person does not give anything, when they speak, they smear it as if with oil. Whether they give or not, their word is worth a thousand." Such a person does not expect generosity, but only kind words. He treated them with kind words.

Atthacariyāyāti atthasaṃvaḍḍhanakathāya. Ekacco hi neva dānaṃ, na piyavacanaṃ paccāsīsati. Attano hitakathaṃ vaḍḍhitakathameva paccāsīsati. Evarūpaṃ puggalaṃ ‘‘idaṃ te kātabbaṃ, idaṃ te na kātabbaṃ. Evarūpo puggalo sevitabbo, evarūpo puggalo na sevitabbo’’ti evaṃ atthacariyāya saṅgahesi.

Atthacariyāyāti: By speaking on matters of welfare. For one does not expect generosity or kind words. They expect only words that promote their own good. He treated such a person with words of welfare, saying, "This you should do, this you should not do. Such a person should be associated with, such a person should not be associated with."

Samānattatāyāti samānasukhadukkhabhāvena. Ekacco hi dānādīsu ekampi na paccāsīsati, ekāsane nisajjaṃ, ekapallaṅke sayanaṃ, ekato bhojananti evaṃ samānasukhadukkhataṃ paccāsīsati. Tattha jātiyā hīno bhogena adhiko dussaṅgaho hoti. Na hi sakkā tena saddhiṃ ekaparibhogo kātuṃ, tathā akariyamāne ca so kujjhati. Bhogena hīno jātiyā adhikopi dussaṅgaho hoti. So hi ‘‘ahaṃ jātimā’’ti bhogasampannena saddhiṃ ekaparibhogaṃ na icchati, tasmiṃ akariyamāne kujjhati. Ubhohipi hīno pana susaṅgaho hoti. Na hi so itarena saddhiṃ ekaparibhogaṃ icchati, na akariyamāne ca kujjhati. Ubhohi sadisopi susaṅgahoyeva. Bhikkhūsu dussīlo dussaṅgaho hoti. Na hi sakkā tena saddhiṃ ekaparibhogo kātuṃ, tathā akariyamāne ca kujjhati. Sīlavā susaṅgaho hoti. Sīlavā hi adīyamānepi akariyamānepi na kujjhati. Aññaṃ attanā saddhiṃ paribhogaṃ akarontampi na pāpakena cittena passati. Paribhogopi tena saddhiṃ sukaro hoti. Tasmā evarūpaṃ puggalaṃ evaṃ samānattatāya saṅgahesi.

Samānattatāyāti: By equality in pleasure and pain. For one does not expect any of generosity, etc., but expects equality in pleasure and pain, such as sitting on the same seat, sleeping on the same couch, eating together. There, one who is inferior in birth but superior in wealth is difficult to associate with. For it is not possible to share equally with them, and if it is not done, they become angry. One who is inferior in wealth but superior in birth is also difficult to associate with. For they, thinking "I am of noble birth," do not want to share equally with one who is wealthy, and they become angry if it is not done. But one who is inferior in both is easy to associate with. For they do not want to share equally with the other, nor do they become angry if it is not done. One who is equal in both is also easy to associate with. Among monks, one who is immoral is difficult to associate with. For it is not possible to share equally with them, and they become angry if it is not done. One who is virtuous is easy to associate with. For the virtuous one does not become angry even if things are not given or done. They do not see with an evil mind even if another does not share things with them. And it is easy to share with them. Therefore, he treated such a person with such equality.

Susaṅgahitāssa hontīti susaṅgahitā assa honti. Detu vā mā vā detu, karotu vā mā vā karotu, susaṅgahitāva honti, na bhijjanti. ‘‘Yadāssa dātabbaṃ hoti, tadā deti. Idāni maññe natthi, tena na deti. Kiṃ mayaṃ dadamānameva upaṭṭhahāma? Adentaṃ akarontaṃ na upaṭṭhahāmā’’ti evaṃ cintenti.

Susaṅgahitāssa hontīti: They are well-treated by him. Whether he gives or does not give, whether he does or does not do, they are always well-treated, they do not break away. They think, "When it is time to give, he gives. Now I think he does not have it, so he does not give. Do we attend to him only when he is giving? Do we not attend to him when he is not giving or doing?"

kammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ kataṃ dānādisaṅgahakammaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma yo evaṃ asaṅgāhako hoti, so iminā kāraṇenassa asaṅgāhakabhāvaṃ jano jānātūti thaddhahatthapādo ceva hoti, visamaṭṭhitāvayavalakkhaṇo ca. Tathāgatassa pana dīgharattaṃ saṅgāhakabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti imāni dve lakkhaṇāni nibbattanti.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Susaṅgahitaparijanatāānisaṃso.

kammaṃ means the acts of generosity, etc., done for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means that because of this, people may know that he does not associate with those who are not sociable, therefore his hands and feet are stiff and his limbs are unevenly placed. But so that the world with its deities may know that the Tathāgata has long been sociable, these two characteristics arise: Lakkhaṇaṃ means these two characteristics themselves. Having a well-treated retinue is the benefit.

211.Kariyāti karitvā.Cariyāti caritvā.Anavamatenāti anavaññātena. ‘‘Anapamodenā’’tipi pāṭho, na appamodena, na dīnena na gabbhitenāti attho.

211. Kariyāti: Having done. Cariyāti: Having practiced. Anavamatenāti: Without contempt. "Anapamodenā" is also a reading, meaning without lack of joy, without being dejected, without being haughty.

Caviyāti cavitvā.Atirucira suvaggu dassaneyyanti atirucirañca supāsādikaṃ suvaggu ca suṭṭhu chekaṃ dassaneyyañca daṭṭhabbayuttaṃ.Susu kumāroti suṭṭhu sukumāro.

Caviyāti: Having passed away. Atirucira suvaggu dassaneyyanti: Exceedingly beautiful, very pleasing, very charming, very skillful, and worthy to be seen. Susu kumāroti: Very delicate.

Parijanassavoti parijano assavo vacanakaro.Vidheyyoti kattabbākattabbesu yathāruci vidhātabbo.Mahimanti mahiṃ imaṃ.Piyavadū hitasukhataṃ jigīsamānoti piyavado hutvā hitañca sukhañca pariyesamāno.Vacanapaṭikarassā bhippasannāti vacanapaṭikarā assa abhippasannā.Dhammānudhammanti dhammañca anudhammañca.

Parijanassavoti: The retinue is obedient, follows his words. Vidheyyoti: Manageable according to his wishes in what should be done and what should not be done. Mahimanti: This greatness. Piyavadū hitasukhataṃ jigīsamānoti: Being a pleasant speaker, seeking welfare and happiness. Vacanapaṭikarassā bhippasannāti: Those who respond to his words are very pleased with him. Dhammānudhammanti: Dhamma and anudhamma.

Ussaṅkhapādādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristics of Raised Ankles, etc.

212.Atthūpasaṃhitanti idhalokaparalokatthanissitaṃ.Dhammūpasaṃhitanti dasakusalakammapathanissitaṃ.Bahujanaṃ nidaṃsesīti bahujanassa nidaṃsanakathaṃ kathesi.Pāṇīnanti sattānaṃ. ‘‘Aggo’’tiādīni sabbāni aññamaññavevacanāni. Idhakammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ bhāsitā uddhaṅgamanīyā atthūpasaṃhitā vācā.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma yo evarūpaṃ uggatavācaṃ na bhāsati, so iminā kāraṇena uggatavācāya abhāsanaṃ jano jānātūti adhosaṅkhapādo ca hoti adhonatalomo ca. Tathāgatassa pana dīgharattaṃ evarūpāya uggatavācāya bhāsitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūtiussaṅkhapādalakkhaṇañca uddhaggalomalakkhaṇañcanibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Uttamabhāvoānisaṃso.

212. Atthūpasaṃhitanti: Related to this world and the next. Dhammūpasaṃhitanti: Related to the ten courses of wholesome action. Bahujanaṃ nidaṃsesīti: He spoke demonstrative speech to many people. Pāṇīnanti: Of beings. All the words beginning with "Aggo" are synonyms for each other. Here, kammaṃ means speech that is uplifting, related to welfare, spoken for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means that because of this, people may know that he does not speak such uplifting speech, therefore he has ankles that are not raised and hairs that do not grow upwards. But so that the world with its deities may know that the Tathāgata has long spoken such uplifting speech, the characteristic of raised ankles and the characteristic of upward-growing hairs arise. Lakkhaṇaṃ means these two characteristics themselves. Excellence is the benefit.

213.Erayanti bhaṇanto.Bahujanaṃ nidaṃsayīti bahujanassa hitaṃ dasseti.Dhammayāganti dhammadānayaññaṃ.

213. Erayanti: Speaking. Bahujanaṃ nidaṃsayīti: He shows the good to many people. Dhammayāganti: The sacrifice of the gift of Dhamma.

Ubbhamuppatitalomavā sasoti so esa uddhaggatalomavā hoti.Pādagaṇṭhirahūti pādagopphakā ahesuṃ.Sādhusaṇṭhitāti suṭṭhu saṇṭhitā.Maṃsalohitācitāti maṃsena ca lohitena ca ācitā.Tacotthatāti tacena pariyonaddhā niguḷhā.Vajatīti gacchati.Anomanikkamoti anomavihārī seṭṭhavihārī.

Ubbhamuppatitalomavā sasoti: He has hairs that grow upwards. Pādagaṇṭhirahūti: The ankles were without knots. Sādhusaṇṭhitāti: Well-formed. Maṃsalohitācitāti: Filled with flesh and blood. Tacotthatāti: Covered and concealed by skin. Vajatīti: He goes. Anomanikkamoti: Of unparalleled gait, of excellent gait.

Eṇijaṅghalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Eṇijaṅgha Characteristic

214.Sippaṃ vātiādīsu sippaṃ nāma dve sippāni – hīnañca sippaṃ, ukkaṭṭhañca sippaṃ. Hīnaṃ nāma sippaṃ naḷakārasippaṃ, kumbhakārasippaṃ pesakārasippaṃ nahāpitasippaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhaṃ nāma sippaṃ lekhā muddā gaṇanā.Vijjāti ahivijjādianekavidhā.Caraṇanti pañcasīlaṃ dasasīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ.Kammanti kammassakatājānanapaññā.Kilisseyyunti kilameyyuṃ. Antevāsikavattaṃ nāma dukkhaṃ, taṃ nesaṃ mā ciramahosīti cintesi.

214. Sippaṃ vātiādīsu: Sippaṃ means two kinds of skills—base skills and superior skills. Base skills are those of basket weavers, potters, weavers, and barbers. Superior skills are writing, printing, and arithmetic. Vijjāti: Various kinds of knowledge, such as snake charming. Caraṇanti: The five precepts, the ten precepts, the precepts of the pātimokkha restraint. Kammanti: The wisdom of knowing kamma to be one's own. Kilisseyyunti: They would be weary. He thought, "May the duties of the pupil not be long-lasting for them, which is suffering."

Rājārahānīti rañño anurūpāni hatthiassādīni, tāniyeva rañño senāya aṅgabhūtattārājaṅgānīti vuccanti.Rājūpabhogānīti rañño upabhogaparibhogabhaṇḍāni, tāni ceva sattaratanāni ca.Rājānucchavikānīti rañño anucchavikāni. Tesaṃyeva sabbesaṃ idaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Samaṇārahānīti samaṇānaṃ anurūpāni cīvarādīni.Samaṇaṅgānīti samaṇānaṃ koṭṭhāsabhūtā catasso parisā.Samaṇūpabhogānīti samaṇānaṃ upabhogaparikkhārā.Samaṇānucchavikānīti tesaṃyeva adhivacanaṃ.

Rājārahānīti: Suitable for a king, such as elephants and horses; because they are parts of the king's army, they are called rājaṅgānī. Rājūpabhogānīti: Goods for the king's use and consumption, and the seven treasures. Rājānucchavikānīti: Suitable for a king. This refers to all of those. Samaṇārahānīti: Suitable for ascetics, such as robes. Samaṇaṅgānīti: The four assemblies that are parts of the ascetics. Samaṇūpabhogānīti: Requisites for the ascetics' use. Samaṇānucchavikānīti: Another word for those.

kammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ sakkaccaṃ sippādivācanaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma yo evaṃ sakkaccaṃ sippaṃ avācento antevāsike ukkuṭikāsanajaṅghapesanikādīhi kilameti, tassa jaṅghamaṃsaṃ likhitvā pātitaṃ viya hoti. Tathāgatassa pana sakkaccaṃ vācitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti anupubbauggatavaṭṭitaṃeṇijaṅghalakkhaṇaṃnibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Anucchavikalābhitāānisaṃso.

kammaṃ means repeatedly teaching skills, etc., with respect for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ means that if one does not teach skills with respect, but tires out the pupils with squatting postures and moving their legs, the flesh of their legs becomes as if scraped and cut off. So that the world with its deities may know that the Tathāgata taught with respect for a long time, the eṇijaṅgha characteristic arises, with progressive and rounded contours. Lakkhaṇaṃ means this characteristic itself. Attaining suitable things is the benefit.

215.Yadūpaghātāyāti yaṃ sippaṃ kassaci upaghātāya na hoti.Kilissatīti kilamissati.Sukhumattacotthatāti sukhumattacena pariyonaddhā. Kiṃ pana aññena kammena aññaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ nibbattatīti? Na nibbattati. Yaṃ pana nibbattati, taṃ anubyañjanaṃ hoti, tasmā idha vuttaṃ.

215. Yadūpaghātāyāti: That skill which is not harmful to anyone. Kilissatīti: Will be weary. Sukhumattacotthatāti: Covered with fine skin. But does another characteristic arise from another action? It does not arise. That which does arise is a minor characteristic (anubyañjana), therefore it is mentioned here.

Sukhumacchavilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Fine-Skinned Characteristic

216.Samaṇaṃ vāti samitapāpaṭṭhena samaṇaṃ.Brāhmaṇaṃ vāti bāhitapāpaṭṭhena brāhmaṇaṃ.

216. Samaṇaṃ vāti: An ascetic who has stilled evil. Brāhmaṇaṃ vāti: A brahmin who has banished evil.

Mahāpaññotiādīsu mahāpaññādīhi samannāgato hotīti attho. Tatridaṃ mahāpaññādīnaṃ nānattaṃ.

Mahāpaññotiādīsu: The meaning is that he is endowed with great wisdom, etc. Here is the diversity of great wisdom, etc.

mahāpaññā?Mahante sīlakkhandhe pariggaṇhātītimahāpaññā,mahante samādhikkhandhe paññākkhandhe vimuttikkhandhe vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhe pariggaṇhātīti mahāpaññā. Mahantāni ṭhānāṭhānāni mahantā vihārasamāpattiyo mahantāni ariyasaccāni mahante satipaṭṭhāne sammappadhāne iddhipāde mahantāni indriyāni balāni mahante bojjhaṅge mahante ariyamagge mahantāni sāmaññaphalāni mahantā abhiññāyo mahantaṃ paramatthaṃ nibbānaṃ pariggaṇhātīti mahāpaññā.

mahāpaññā? Mahāpaññā means he comprehends the great aggregate of virtue, he comprehends the great aggregate of concentration, the aggregate of wisdom, the aggregate of liberation, the aggregate of knowledge and vision of liberation. He comprehends the great possibilities and impossibilities, the great meditative attainments, the great Noble Truths, the great foundations of mindfulness, the right efforts, the bases of psychic power, the great faculties, the powers, the great factors of enlightenment, the great Noble Path, the great fruits of asceticism, the great higher knowledges, the great ultimate goal of Nibbāna.

puthupaññā?Puthunānākhandhesu ñāṇaṃ pavattatītiputhupaññā.Puthunānādhātūsu puthunānāāyatanesu puthunānāpaṭiccasamuppādesu puthunānāsuññatamanupalabbhesu puthunānāatthesu dhammesu niruttīsu paṭibhānesu. Puthunānāsīlakkhandhesu puthunānāsamādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiñādassanakkhandhesu puthunānāṭhānāṭhānesu puthunānāvihārasamāpattīsu puthunānāariyasaccesu puthunānāsatipaṭṭhānesu sammappadhānesu iddhipādesu indriyesu balesu bojjhaṅgesu puthunānāariyamaggesu sāmaññaphalesu abhiññāsu puthujjanasādhāraṇe dhamme samatikkamma paramatthe nibbāne ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti puthupaññā.

puthupaññā? Puthupaññā means knowledge functions in various aggregates. Knowledge functions in various elements, various sense bases, various dependent originations, various unperceived emptinesses, various meanings, Dhammas, expressions, and eloquence. It goes beyond the ordinary understanding of the common person and knowledge functions in the ultimate goal of Nibbāna, in various aggregates of virtue, various aggregates of concentration, wisdom, liberation, knowledge, and vision of liberation, in various possibilities and impossibilities, in various meditative attainments, in various Noble Truths, in various foundations of mindfulness, right efforts, bases of psychic power, faculties, powers, factors of enlightenment, various Noble Paths, fruits of asceticism, and higher knowledges.

hāsapaññā?Idhekacco hāsabahulo vedabahulo tuṭṭhibahulo pāmojjabahulo sīlaṃ paripūreti indriyasaṃvaraṃ paripūreti bhojane mattaññutaṃ jāgariyānuyogaṃ sīlakkhandhaṃ samādhikkhandhaṃ paññākkhandhaṃ vimuttikkhandhaṃ vimuttiñāṇadassanakkhandhaṃ paripūretīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo…pe… pāmojjabahulo ṭhānāṭhānaṃ paṭivijjhatīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo vihārasamāpattiyo paripūretīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo ariyasaccāni paṭivijjhatīti hāsapaññā. Satipaṭṭhāne sammappadhāne iddhipāde indriyāni balāni bojjhaṅge ariyamaggaṃ bhāvetīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo sāmaññaphalāni sacchikarotīti hāsapaññā. Abhiññāyo paṭivijjhatīti hāsapaññā. Hāsabahulo vedatuṭṭhipāmojjabahulo paramatthaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikarotīti hāsapaññā.

Hāsapaññā (Wisdom Accompanied by Laughter)? Here, someone is abundant in laughter, abundant in joy, abundant in gladness, abundant in delight, fulfills morality, fulfills sense restraint, fulfills moderation in food, pursues wakefulness, fulfills the aggregate of morality, the aggregate of concentration, the aggregate of wisdom, the aggregate of liberation, the aggregate of the knowledge and vision of liberation; this is hāsapaññā. Abundant in laughter…pe…abundant in delight, understands what is possible and what is impossible; this is hāsapaññā. Abundant in laughter, fulfills the attainments of dwelling (vihārasamāpattiyo); this is hāsapaññā. Abundant in laughter, understands the Noble Truths; this is hāsapaññā. Develops the mindfulness practices, the right efforts, the bases of psychic power, the faculties, the strengths, the factors of enlightenment, the Noble Path; this is hāsapaññā. Abundant in laughter, realizes the fruits of recluseship; this is hāsapaññā. Understands the abhiññās; this is hāsapaññā. Abundant in laughter, joy, gladness and delight, realizes the ultimate meaning, Nibbāna; this is hāsapaññā.

javanapaññā?Yaṃkiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ yaṃ dūre santike vā, sabbaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ aniccato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Dukkhato khippaṃ anattato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Yā kāci vedanā…pe… yaṃkiñci viññāṇaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ viññāṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ bhayaṭṭhena anattā asārakaṭṭhenāti tulayitvā tīrayitvā vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā rūpanirodhe nibbāne khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Vedanā saññā saṅkhārā viññāṇaṃ cakkhu…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhena…pe… vibhūtaṃ katvā jarāmaraṇanirodhe nibbāne khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā. Rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ. Cakkhuṃ…pe… jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccaṃ saṅkhataṃ paṭiccasamuppannaṃ khayadhammaṃ vayadhammaṃ virāgadhammaṃ nirodhadhammanti tulayitvā tīrayitvā vibhāvayitvā vibhūtaṃ katvā jarāmaraṇanirodhe nibbāne khippaṃ javatīti javanapaññā.

Javanapaññā (Swift Wisdom)? Whatever form, whether past, future, or present, whether far or near, all that form swiftly moves away due to impermanence; this is javanapaññā. Swiftly moves away due to suffering, swiftly moves away due to not-self; this is javanapaññā. Whatever feeling…pe… whatever consciousness, whether past, future, or present, all that consciousness swiftly moves away due to impermanence, due to suffering, due to not-self; this is javanapaññā. The eye…pe… old age and death, whether past, future, or present, swiftly moves away due to impermanence, due to suffering, due to not-self; this is javanapaññā. Form, whether past, future, or present, is impermanent in the sense of decay, suffering in the sense of fear, not-self in the sense of being without essence; having weighed it, having judged it, having illuminated it, having made it manifest, one swiftly moves towards Nibbāna, the cessation of form; this is javanapaññā. Feeling, perception, mental formations, consciousness, the eye…pe… old age and death, whether past, future, or present, is impermanent in the sense of decay…pe… having made it manifest, one swiftly moves towards Nibbāna, the cessation of old age and death; this is javanapaññā. Form, whether past, future, or present. The eye…pe… old age and death, is impermanent, conditioned, arisen from conditions, subject to decay, subject to vanishing, subject to cessation; having weighed it, having judged it, having illuminated it, having made it manifest, one swiftly moves towards Nibbāna, the cessation of old age and death; this is javanapaññā.

tikkhapaññā?Khippaṃ kilese chindatīti tikkhapaññā. Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāseti, uppannaṃ byāpādavitakkaṃ, uppannaṃ vihiṃsāvitakkaṃ, uppannuppanne pāpake akusale dhamme uppannaṃ rāgaṃ dosaṃ mohaṃ kodhaṃ upanāhaṃ makkhaṃ paḷāsaṃ issaṃ macchariyaṃ māyaṃ sāṭheyyaṃ thambhaṃ sārambhaṃ mānaṃ atimānaṃ madaṃ pamādaṃ sabbe kilese sabbe duccarite sabbe abhisaṅkhāre sabbe bhavagāmikamme nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti byantī karoti anabhāvaṃ gametīti tikkhapaññā. Ekasmiṃ āsane cattāro ariyamaggā cattāri sāmaññaphalāni catasso paṭisambhidāyo cha abhiññāyo adhigatā honti sacchikatā phassitā paññāyāti tikkhapaññā.

Tikkhapaññā (Sharp Wisdom)? Swiftly cuts off defilements; this is tikkhapaññā. Does not allow an arisen sensual thought to persist, an arisen thought of ill-will, an arisen thought of violence, arisen unwholesome states, arisen greed, hatred, delusion, anger, resentment, contempt, insolence, envy, avarice, hypocrisy, deceitfulness, stubbornness, presumptuousness, conceit, arrogance, intoxication, negligence, all defilements, all wrongdoings, all (unwholesome) volitional formations, all deeds leading to renewed existence; abandons them, dispels them, eliminates them, makes them not exist; this is tikkhapaññā. In one sitting, the four Noble Paths, the four fruits of recluseship, the four paṭisambhidās, the six abhiññās are attained, realized, experienced with wisdom; this is tikkhapaññā.

nibbedhikapaññā?Idhekacco sabbasaṅkhāresu ubbegabahulo hoti uttāsabahulo ukkaṇṭhanabahulo aratibahulo anabhiratibahulo bahimukho na ramati sabbasaṅkhāresu, anibbiddhapubbaṃ apadālitapubbaṃ lobhakkhandhaṃ nibbijjhati padāletīti nibbedhikapaññā. Anibbiddhapubbaṃ apadālitapubbaṃ dosakkhandhaṃ mohakkhandhaṃ kodhaṃ upanāhaṃ…pe… sabbe bhavagāmikamme nibbijjhati padāletīti nibbedhikapaññāti (paṭi. ma. 3.3).

Nibbedhikapaññā (Penetrative Wisdom)? Here, someone is abundant in revulsion towards all conditioned things, abundant in dread, abundant in aversion, abundant in discontent, abundant in non-delight, turns away and does not delight in all conditioned things; penetrates and pierces the mass of greed that was never before penetrated or pierced; this is nibbedhikapaññā. Penetrates and pierces the mass of hatred, the mass of delusion, anger, resentment…pe… all deeds leading to renewed existence that were never before penetrated or pierced; this is nibbedhikapaññā (paṭi. ma. 3.3).

217.Pabbajitaṃ upāsitāti paṇḍitaṃ pabbajitaṃ upasaṅkamitvā payirupāsitā.Atthantaroti yathā eke randhagavesino upārambhacittatāya dosaṃ abbhantaraṃ karitvā nisāmayanti, evaṃ anisāmetvā atthaṃ abbhantaraṃ katvā atthayuttaṃ kathaṃ nisāmayi upadhārayi.

217. Pabbajitaṃ upāsitā: having approached a learned pabbajita, one attends upon him. Atthantaro: just as some, seeking faults with a mind of resentment, listen, having made fault internal, so without listening in that way, having made meaning internal, how did he listen to and consider speech that was connected with the meaning?

Paṭilābhagatenāti paṭilābhatthāya gatena.Uppādanimittakovidāti uppāde ca nimitte ca chekā.Avecca dakkhitīti ñatvā passissati.

Paṭilābhagatenā: having gone for the sake of gain. Uppādanimittakovidā: skilled in the arising and in the causes. Avecca dakkhitī: having known, he will see.

Atthānusiṭṭhīsu pariggahesu cāti ye atthānusāsanesu pariggahā atthānatthaṃ pariggāhakāni ñāṇāni, tesūti attho.

Atthānusiṭṭhīsu pariggahesu cā: in instructions about the meaning and in grasping, meaning knowledges that grasp what is meaningful and not meaningful, that is the meaning.

Suvaṇṇavaṇṇalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of Golden-Skinned Characteristics

218.Akkodhanoti na anāgāmimaggena kodhassa pahīnattā, atha kho sacepi me kodho uppajjeyya, khippameva naṃ paṭivinodeyyanti evaṃ akkodhavasikattā.Nābhisajjīti kuṭilakaṇṭako viya tattha tattha mammaṃ tudanto viya na laggi.Na kuppi na byāpajjītiādīsu pubbuppattikokopo.Tato balavatarobyāpādo.Tato balavatarāpatitthiyanā.Taṃ sabbaṃ akaronto na kuppi na byāpajji na patitthiyi.Appaccayanti domanassaṃ.Na pātvākāsīti na kāyavikārena vā vacīvikārena vā pākaṭamakāsi.

218. Akkodhano: not because anger has been abandoned by the path of non-returning, but rather because, even if anger should arise for me, I would quickly dispel it; thus, due to having mastery over non-anger. Nābhisajjī: he did not cling like a crooked thorn, as if piercing vital spots here and there. Na kuppi na byāpajjī etc.: kopo is the initial arising. Byāpādo is stronger than that. Patitthiyanā is stronger than that. Not doing all that, he was not angry, was not malevolent, did not become established. Appaccayaṃ: displeasure. Na pātvākāsī: he did not make it manifest by bodily expression or verbal expression.

Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma kodhanassa chavivaṇṇo āvilo hoti mukhaṃ duddasiyaṃ vatthacchādanasadisañca maṇḍanaṃ nāma natthi. Tasmā yo kodhano ceva vatthacchādanānañca adātā, so iminā kāraṇenassa jano kodhanādibhāvaṃ jānātūti dubbaṇṇo hoti dussaṇṭhāno. Akkodhanassa pana mukhaṃ virocati, chavivaṇṇo vippasīdati. Sattā hi catūhi kāraṇehi pāsādikā honti āmisadānena vā vatthadānena vā sammajjanena vā akkodhanatāya vā. Imāni cattāripi kāraṇāni dīgharattaṃ tathāgatena katāneva. Tenassa imesaṃ katabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ mahāpurisalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Sukhumattharaṇādilābhitāānisaṃso.

Kammasarikkhakaṃ: the complexion of an angry person is turbid, the face is unpleasant to look at, and there is no adornment similar to clothing. Therefore, so that people will know the state of an angry person because of this reason, that he is ill-complexioned and has a bad figure, one who is angry and does not give clothes. But the face of a non-angry person shines, and the complexion brightens. For beings are pleasing due to four reasons: due to giving material things, due to giving clothes, due to sweeping, or due to being non-angry. These four reasons were long done by the Tathāgata himself. Therefore, so that the world with its devas will know the state of having done these things because of this reason, the characteristic of a golden complexion, a great man's characteristic, arises. Lakkhaṇaṃ: this is the characteristic. Ānisaṃso: the gain is obtaining fine spreads etc.

219.Abhivissajīti abhivissajjesi.Mahimiva suro abhivassanti suro vuccati devo, mahāpathaviṃ abhivassanto devo viya.

219. Abhivissajī: he sent down completely. Mahimiva suro abhivassa: suro means devo, like a devo raining on the great earth.

Suravarataroriva indoti surānaṃ varataro indo viya.

Suravarataroriva indo: like Indo, the best of the devas.

Apabbajjamicchanti apabbajjaṃ gihibhāvaṃ icchanto.Mahatimahinti mahantiṃ pathaviṃ.

Apabbajjamicchaṃ: wishing for non-renunciation, the householder's life. Mahatimahiṃ: the great earth.

Acchādanavatthamokkhapāvuraṇānanti acchādanānañceva vatthānañca uttamapāvuraṇānañca.Panāsoti vināso.

Acchādanavatthamokkhapāvuraṇānaṃ: both of coverings and of clothes and of excellent cloaks. Panāso: destruction.

Kosohitavatthaguyhalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristic of Hidden Genitals

220.Mātarampiputtena samānetā ahosīti imaṃ kammaṃ rajje patiṭṭhitena sakkā kātuṃ. Tasmā bodhisattopi rajjaṃ kārayamāno antonagare catukkādīsu catūsu nagaradvāresu bahinagare catūsu disāsu imaṃ kammaṃ karothāti manusse ṭhapesi. Te mātaraṃ kuhiṃ me putto puttaṃ na passāmīti vilapantiṃ pariyesamānaṃ disvā ehi, amma, puttaṃ dakkhasīti taṃ ādāya gantvā nahāpetvā bhojetvā puttamassā pariyesitvā dassenti. Esa nayo sabbattha.

220. Mātarampi puttena samānetā ahosī: this action can be done by someone established in kingship. Therefore, while Bodhisatta was administering the kingdom, he stationed people, saying: in the inner city, at the four crossroads etc., at the four city gates, and in the outer city, in the four directions, do this deed. They, seeing a mother wailing while searching, "Where is my son? I do not see my son," would say, "Come, mother, you will see your son," and taking her, after bathing her and feeding her, they would look for her son and show him to her. This is the method everywhere.

kammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ ñātīnaṃ samaṅgibhāvakaraṇaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma ñātayo hi samaṅgībhūtā aññamaññassa vajjaṃ paṭicchādenti. Kiñcāpi hi te kalahakāle kalahaṃ karonti, ekassa pana dose uppanne aññaṃ jānāpetuṃ na icchanti. Ayaṃ nāma etassa dosoti vutte sabbe uṭṭhahitvā kena diṭṭhaṃ kena sutaṃ, amhākaṃ ñātīsu evarūpaṃ kattā nāma natthīti. Tathāgatena ca taṃ ñātisaṅgahaṃ karontena dīgharattaṃ idaṃ vajjappaṭicchādanakammaṃ nāma kataṃ hoti. Athassa sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena evarūpassa kammassa katabhāvaṃ jānātūti kosohitavatthaguyhalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Pahūtaputtatāānisaṃso.

Kammaṃ: making harmony among relatives for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ: for relatives, being harmonious, conceal each other's faults. Even though they quarrel at the time of quarreling, when a fault of one arises, they do not want another to know. If it is said, "This is his fault," all rise up and say, "By whom was it seen? By whom was it heard? There is no one among our relatives who does such a thing." And by the Tathāgata, while making that fellowship of relatives, this action of concealing faults was long done. Therefore, so that the world with its devas will know the state of having done such an action because of this reason, the characteristic of hidden genitals arises. Lakkhaṇaṃ: this is the characteristic. Ānisaṃso: the gain is having many sons.

221.Vatthachādiyanti vatthena chādetabbaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ.

221. Vatthachādiyaṃ: the hidden genitals that should be covered with cloth.

Amittatāpanāti amittānaṃ patāpanā.Gihissa pītiṃ jananāti gihibhūtassa sato pītijananā.

Amittatāpanā: burning up enemies. Gihissa pītiṃ jananā: generating joy for one who is a householder.

Parimaṇḍalādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristic of Roundness etc.

222.Samaṃ jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ tārukkhasamo ayaṃ pokkharasātisamo’’ti evaṃ tena tena samaṃ jānāti.Sāmaṃ jānātīti sayaṃ jānāti.Purisaṃ jānātīti ‘‘ayaṃ seṭṭhasammato’’ti purisaṃ jānāti.Purisavisesaṃ jānātīti muggaṃ māsena samaṃ akatvā guṇavisiṭṭhassa visesaṃ jānāti.Ayamidamarahatīti ayaṃ puriso idaṃ nāma dānasakkāraṃ arahati.Purisavisesakaro ahosīti purisavisesaṃ ñatvā kārako ahosi. Yo yaṃ arahati, tasseva taṃ adāsi. Yo hi kahāpaṇārahassa aḍḍhaṃ deti, so parassa aḍḍhaṃ nāseti. Yo dve kahāpaṇe deti, so attano kahāpaṇaṃ nāseti. Tasmā idaṃ ubhayampi akatvā yo yaṃ arahati, tassa tadeva adāsi.Saddhādhanantiādīsu sampattipaṭilābhaṭṭhena saddhādīnaṃ dhanabhāvo veditabbo.

222. Samaṃ jānātī: he knows equality, "This is equal to tārukkha, this is equal to pokkharasāta," thus he knows equality with that and that. Sāmaṃ jānātī: he knows himself. Purisaṃ jānātī: he knows a man, "This one is esteemed as the best." Purisavisesaṃ jānātī: he knows a man's distinction, without making a mung bean equal to a kidney bean, he knows the distinction of one distinguished by qualities. Ayamidamarahatī: this man deserves this gift and honor. Purisavisesakaro ahosī: having known the man's distinction, he was a doer. He gave to whomever deserved what. For one who gives half a kahāpaṇa to one deserving a kahāpaṇa, destroys half a kahāpaṇa of another. One who gives two kahāpaṇas, destroys his own kahāpaṇa. Therefore, without doing both of those, he gave just that to whomever deserved what. Saddhādhanaṃ etc.: the state of being a treasure of faith etc. should be understood in the sense of obtaining fortune.

kammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ purisavisesaṃ ñatvā kataṃ samasaṅgahakammaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma tadassa kammaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti imāni dve lakkhaṇāni nibbattanti.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Dhanasampattiānisaṃso.

Kammaṃ: long done, knowing a man's distinction, the action of equal association. Kammasarikkhakaṃ: so that the world with its devas will know that action of his because of this reason, these two characteristics arise. Lakkhaṇaṃ: these are the two characteristics. Ānisaṃso: the gain is wealth.

223.Tuliyāti tulayitvā.Paṭivicayāti paṭivicinitvā.Mahājanasaṅgāhakanti mahājanasaṅgahaṇaṃ.Samekkhamānoti samaṃ pekkhamāno.Atinipuṇāmanujāti atinipuṇā sukhumapaññā lakkhaṇapāṭhakamanussā.Bahuvividhā gihīnaṃ arahānīti bahū vividhāni gihīnaṃ anucchavikāni paṭilabhati.Daharo susu kumāro‘‘ayaṃ daharo kumāro paṭilabhissatī’’ti byākaṃsumahīpatissāti rañño.

223. Tuliyā: having weighed. Paṭivicayā: having investigated. Mahājanasaṅgāhakaṃ: associating with many people. Samekkhamāno: watching equally. Atinipuṇā manujā: very subtle men, men who read characteristics with subtle wisdom. Bahuvividhā gihīnaṃ arahānī: he obtains many and various things suitable for householders. Daharo susu kumāro: "This young boy will obtain (wealth)," they declared mahīpatissā: to the king.

Sīhapubbaddhakāyādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristics of the Lion-Like Upper Body etc.

224.Yogakkhemakāmoti yogato khemakāmo.Paññāyāti kammassakatapaññāya. Idhakammaṃnāma mahājanassa atthakāmatā.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma taṃ mahājanassa atthakāmatāya vaḍḍhimeva paccāsīsitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti imāni samantaparipūrāni aparihīnāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni nibbattanti.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇattayaṃ. Dhanādīhi ceva saddhādīhi ca aparihāniānisaṃso.

224. Yogakkhemakāmo: wishing for security from bonds. Paññāyā: by wisdom resulting from action. Here kammaṃ is wishing for the welfare of the multitude. Kammasarikkhakaṃ: so that the world with its devas will know the state of hoping for only increase due to wishing for the welfare of that multitude because of this reason, these three characteristics, completely perfect on all sides and not diminished, arise. Lakkhaṇaṃ: these are the three characteristics. Ānisaṃso: the non-diminishment of wealth etc. and of faith etc.

225.Saddhāyāti okappanasaddhāya pasādasaddhāya.Sīlenāti pañcasīlena dasasīlena.Sutenāti pariyattisavanena.Buddhiyāti etesaṃ buddhiyā, ‘‘kinti etehi vaḍḍheyyu’’nti evaṃ cintesīti attho.Dhammenāti lokiyadhammena.Bahūhi sādhūhīti aññehipi bahūhi uttamaguṇehi.Asahānadhammatanti aparihīnadhammaṃ.

225. Saddhāyā: by conviction-faith, by confidence-faith. Sīlena: by the five precepts, by the ten precepts. Sutena: by listening to the Teaching. Buddhiyā: by the intelligence about these things, thinking, "How might these increase?" is the meaning. Dhammena: by worldly Dhamma. Bahūhi sādhūhī: by many other excellent qualities. Asahānadhammataṃ: the state of not diminishing in the Dhamma.

Rasaggasaggitālakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristics of Excellent Taste Buds

226.Samābhivāhiniyoti yathā tilaphalamattampi jivhagge ṭhapitaṃ sabbattha pharati, evaṃ samā hutvā vahanti. Idhakammaṃnāma aviheṭhanakammaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma pāṇiādīhi pahāraṃ laddhassa tattha tattha lohitaṃ saṇṭhāti, gaṇṭhi gaṇṭhi hutvā antova pubbaṃ gaṇhāti, antova bhijjati, evaṃ so bahurogo hoti. Tathāgatena pana dīgharattaṃ imaṃ ārogyakaraṇakammaṃ kataṃ. Tadassa sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti ārogyakaraṃ rasaggasaggilakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Appābādhatāānisaṃso.

226. Samābhivāhiniyo: just as even an amount of sesame seed placed on the tip of the tongue spreads everywhere, so they flow, being equal. Here kammaṃ is the action of non-harming. Kammasarikkhakaṃ: when someone is struck with the hands etc., blood gathers here and there, forming lumps and pus forms inside, it breaks open inside, thus he has many diseases. But by the Tathāgata, this action of making healthy was long done. So that the world with its devas will know that action of his because of this reason, the characteristic of excellent taste buds that makes healthy arises. Lakkhaṇaṃ: this is the characteristic. Ānisaṃso: the gain is freedom from disease.

227.Maraṇavadhenāti ‘‘etaṃ māretha etaṃ ghātethā’’ti evaṃ āṇattena maraṇavadhena.Ubbādhanāyāti bandhanāgārappavesanena.

227. Maraṇavadhenā: by the death penalty ordered, "Kill him, slaughter him." Ubbādhanāyā: by entry into a prison.

Abhinīlanettādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Characteristics of Deep Blue Eyes etc.

228.Na ca visaṭanti kakkaṭako viya akkhīni nīharitvā na kodhavasena pekkhitā ahosi.Na ca visācīti vaṅkakkhikoṭiyā pekkhitāpi nāhosi.Na ca pana viceyya pekkhitāti viceyya pekkhitā nāma yo kujjhitvā yadā naṃ paro oloketi, tadā nimmīleti na oloketi, puna gacchantaṃ kujjhitvā oloketi, evarūpo nāhosi. ‘‘Vineyyapekkhitā’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Ujuṃ tathā pasaṭamujumanoti ujumano hutvā uju pekkhitā hoti, yathā ca ujuṃ, tathā pasaṭaṃ vipulaṃ vitthataṃ pekkhitā hoti.Piyadassanoti piyāyamānehi passitabbo.

228. Na ca visaṭaṃ: and he did not look with eyes bulging out like a crab due to anger. Na ca visācī: and he did not look with the corner of his eye. Na ca pana viceyya pekkhitā: viceyya pekkhitā means one who, being angry, when another looks at him, squints and does not look, then, when the other is going away, angrily looks; he was not like that. There is also the reading "Vineyyapekkhitā," this is the meaning. Ujuṃ tathā pasaṭamujumano: being upright in mind, he looks upright, and as upright, so plainly, widely, extensively he looks. Piyadassano: one who should be seen by those who desire him.

kammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ mahājanassa piyacakkhunā olokanakammaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma kujjhitvā olokento kāṇo viya kākakkhi viya hoti, vaṅkakkhi pana āvilakkhi ca hotiyeva. Pasannacittassa pana olokayato akkhīnaṃ pañcavaṇṇo pasādo paññāyati. Tathāgato ca tathā olokesi. Athassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ piyacakkhunā olokitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti imāni nettasampattikarāni dve mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni nibbattanti.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Piyadassanatāānisaṃso. Abhiyoginoti lakkhaṇasatthe yuttā.

Kammaṃ (action) means the act of looking with affectionate eyes towards the great multitude for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means that one who looks with anger becomes like a blind person or like the eye of a crow; moreover, the eyes become crooked and turbid. But when looking with a serene mind, a five-hued radiance appears in the eyes. The Tathāgata looked in that way. So that the world with its devas may know that he has looked with affectionate eyes for a long time, these two characteristics conducive to excellence of the eyes arise, these two marks of a great man. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just these two characteristics. Being pleasing to see is the ānisaṃsa (benefit). Abhiyogino (those who apply themselves) means those who are engaged in the science of characteristics.

Uṇhīsasīsalakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Uṇhīsa-Head Characteristic

230.Bahujanapubbaṅgamo ahosīti bahujanassa pubbaṅgamo ahosi gaṇajeṭṭhako. Tassa diṭṭhānugatiṃ aññe āpajjiṃsu. Idhakammaṃnāma pubbaṅgamatā.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma yo pubbaṅgamo hutvā dānādīni kusalakammāni karoti, so amaṅkubhūto sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā pītipāmojjena paripuṇṇasīso vicarati, mahāpuriso ca hoti. Tathāgato ca tathā akāsi. Athassa sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena idaṃ pubbaṅgamakammaṃ jānātūti uṇhīsasīsalakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Mahājanānuvattanatāānisaṃso.

230.Bahujanapubbaṅgamo ahosīti (he was a leader of many people) he was a leader of many people, the chief of the group. Others followed his example. Here, kammaṃ (action) means being a leader. Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means that one who, being a leader, performs meritorious deeds such as giving alms, walks with head held high in joy and delight, with a perfect head, and becomes a great man. The Tathāgata did so. So that the world with its devas may know this action of being a leader, the uṇhīsa-head characteristic arises. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just this characteristic. Conforming to the wishes of the great multitude is the ānisaṃsa (benefit).

231.Bahujanaṃhessatīti bahujanassa bhavissati.Paṭibhogiyāti veyyāvaccakarā, etassa bahū veyyāvaccakarā bhavissantīti attho.Abhiharanti tadāti daharakāleyeva tadā evaṃ byākaronti.Paṭihārakanti veyyāvaccakarabhāvaṃ.Visavīti ciṇṇavasī.

231.Bahujanaṃ hessatīti (will be for many people) will be for many people. Paṭibhogiyāti (servants) those who perform services; the meaning is that many servants will be for him. Abhiharanti tadāti (they bring then) even in their youth, they declare thus. Paṭihārakanti (service) the state of being a servant. Visavīti (one who is trained) one who is practiced and skilled.

Ekekalomatādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Single Body Hair Characteristic, Etc.

232.Upavattatīti ajjhāsayaṃ anuvattati, idhakammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ saccakathanaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ advejjhakathāya parisuddhakathāya kathitabhāvamassa sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti ekekalomalakkhaṇañca uṇṇālakkhaṇañca nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Mahājanassa ajjhāsayānukūlena anuvattanatāānisaṃso. Ekekalomūpacitaṅgavāti ekekehi lomehi upacitasarīro.

232.Upavattatīti (conforms) conforms to their inclination; here, kammaṃ (action) means speaking the truth for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means so that the world with its devas may know that he has spoken purely, without duplicity, for a long time, both the single body hair characteristic and the uṇṇā characteristic arise. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just these two characteristics. Conforming to the inclinations of the great multitude is the ānisaṃsa (benefit). Ekekalomūpacitaṅgavāti (with limbs covered with single hairs) one whose body is covered with single hairs.

Cattālīsādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Forty Teeth Characteristic, Etc.

234.Abhejjaparisoti abhinditabbapariso. Idhakammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ apisuṇavācāya kathanaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma pisuṇavācassa kira samaggabhāvaṃ bhindanato dantā aparipuṇṇā ceva honti viraḷā ca. Tathāgatassa pana dīgharattaṃ apisuṇavācataṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti idaṃ lakkhaṇadvayaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Abhejjaparisatāānisaṃso. Caturo dasāti cattāro dasa cattālīsaṃ.

234.Abhejjaparisoti (an indivisible retinue) a retinue that cannot be divided. Here, kammaṃ (action) means speaking without maliciousness for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means because one who speaks maliciously breaks the harmony, their teeth become incomplete and sparse. But so that the world with its devas may know that the Tathāgata has spoken without maliciousness for a long time, these two characteristics arise. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just these two characteristics. Having an indivisible retinue is the ānisaṃsa (benefit). Caturo dasāti (four tens) four tens, forty.

Pahūtajivhādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Large Tongue Characteristic, Etc.

236.Ādeyyavāco hotīti gahetabbavacano hoti. Idhakammaṃnāma dīgharattaṃ apharusavāditā.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma ye pharusavācā honti, te iminā kāraṇena nesaṃ jivhaṃ parivattetvā parivattetvā pharusavācāya kathitabhāvaṃ jano jānātūti baddhajivhā vā honti, gūḷhajivhā vā dvijivhā vā mammanā vā. Ye pana jivhaṃ parivattetvā parivattetvā pharusavācaṃ na vadanti, te baddhajivhā gūḷhajivhā dvijivhā na honti. Mudu nesaṃ jivhā hoti rattakambalavaṇṇā. Tasmā tathāgatassa dīgharattaṃ jivhaṃ parivattetvā pharusāya vācāya akathitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti pahūtajivhālakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati. Pharusavācaṃ kathentānañca saddo bhijjati. Te saddabhedaṃ katvā pharusavācāya kathitabhāvaṃ jano jānātūti chinnassarā vā honti bhinnassarā vā kākassarā vā. Ye pana sarabhedakaraṃ pharusavācaṃ na kathenti, tesaṃ saddo madhuro ca hoti pemanīyo. Tasmā tathāgatassa dīgharattaṃ sarabhedakarāya pharusavācāya akathitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti brahmassaralakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Ādeyyavacanatāānisaṃso.

236.Ādeyyavāco hotīti (he is of trustworthy speech) he is of speech that should be heeded. Here, kammaṃ (action) means abstaining from harsh speech for a long time. Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means those who use harsh speech, because of that, people know that their tongue is twisted and turned, speaking harsh words, so they have a bound tongue, a hidden tongue, a double tongue, or a stammer. But those who do not twist and turn their tongue to speak harshly do not have a bound tongue, a hidden tongue, or a double tongue. Their tongue is soft, the color of a red blanket. Therefore, so that the world with its devas may know that the Tathāgata has not spoken harshly, twisting his tongue for a long time, the large tongue characteristic arises. And the voice of those who speak harshly is broken. Because they make a break in their voice, people know they have spoken harshly, so they have a broken voice, a cracked voice, or a crow-like voice. But those who do not utter harsh words that break the tone, their voice is sweet and endearing. Therefore, so that the world with its devas may know that the Tathāgata has not spoken harshly, breaking the tone for a long time, the Brahma-voice characteristic arises. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just these two characteristics. Being of trustworthy speech is the ānisaṃsa (benefit).

237.Ubbādhikanti akkosayuttattā ābādhakariṃbahujanappamaddananti bahujanānaṃ pamaddaniṃabāḷhaṃ giraṃ so na bhaṇi pharusanti ettha akāro parato bhaṇisaddena yojetabbo.Bāḷhanti balavaṃ atipharusaṃ.Bāḷhaṃ giraṃ so na abhaṇīti ayamettha attho.Susaṃhitanti suṭṭhu pemasañhitaṃ.Sakhilanti mudukaṃ.Vācāti vācāyo.Kaṇṇasukhāti kaṇṇasukhāyo. ‘‘Kaṇṇasukha’’ntipi pāṭho, yathā kaṇṇānaṃ sukhaṃ hoti, evaṃ erayatīti attho.Vedayathāti vedayittha.Brahmassarattanti brahmassarataṃ.Bahuno bahunti bahujanassa bahuṃ. ‘‘Bahūnaṃ bahunti’’pi pāṭho, bahujanānaṃ bahunti attho.

237.Ubbādhikanti (oppressive) because of being connected with abuse, causing harm; bahujanappamaddananti (crushing of many people) crushing of many people; abāḷhaṃ giraṃ so na bhaṇi pharusanti (he did not speak harsh, strong speech) here, the "a" should be joined to the word "bhaṇi" following it. Bāḷhanti (strong) strong, very harsh. Bāḷhaṃ giraṃ so na abhaṇīti (he did not speak strong speech) this is the meaning here. Susaṃhitanti (well-arranged) well-arranged with affection. Sakhilanti (gentle) gentle, soft. Vācāti (speech) speeches. Kaṇṇasukhāti (pleasing to the ear) pleasing to the ears. "Kaṇṇasukha" is also a reading, meaning that it pleases the ears. Vedayathāti (he made known) he made known. Brahmassarattanti (Brahma-voicedness) being Brahma-voiced. Bahuno bahunti (much to many) much to many people. "Bahūnaṃ bahunti" is also a reading, meaning much to many people.

Sīhahanulakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Lion Jaw Characteristic

238.Appadhaṃsiko hotīti guṇato vā ṭhānato vā padhaṃsetuṃ cāvetuṃ asakkuṇeyyo. Idhakammaṃnāma palāpakathāya akathanaṃ.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma ye taṃ kathenti, te iminā kāraṇena nesaṃ hanukaṃ cāletvā cāletvā palāpakathāya kathitabhāvaṃ jano jānātūti antopaviṭṭhahanukā vā vaṅkahanukā vā pabbhārahanukā vā honti. Tathāgato pana tathā na kathesi. Tenassa hanukaṃ cāletvā cāletvā dīgharattaṃ palāpakathāya akathitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti sīhahanulakkhaṇaṃ nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇaṃ. Appadhaṃsikatāānisaṃso.

238.Appadhaṃsiko hotīti (he is unshakeable) impossible to shake or remove from virtue or position. Here, kammaṃ (action) means not speaking deceitfully. Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means those who speak it, because of that, people know they have spoken deceitfully, moving their jaws, so they have sunken jaws, crooked jaws, or protruding jaws. But the Tathāgata did not speak that way. Therefore, so that the world with its devas may know that he has not spoken deceitfully, moving his jaw for a long time, the lion jaw characteristic arises. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just this characteristic. Being unshakeable is the ānisaṃsa (benefit).

239.Avikiṇṇavacanabyappatho cāti avikiṇṇavacanānaṃ viya purimabodhisattānaṃ vacanapatho assāti avikiṇṇavacanabyappatho.Dvidugamavaratarahanuttamalatthāti dvīhi dvīhi gacchatīti dvidugamo, dvīhi dvīhīti catūhi, catuppadānaṃ varatarassa sīhasseva hanubhāvaṃ alatthāti attho.Manujādhipatīti manujānaṃ adhipati.Tathattoti tathasabhāvo.

239.Avikiṇṇavacanabyappatho cāti (and his speech is not scattered) and his path of speech is not scattered, like the speech of previous Bodhisattas, therefore, it is avikiṇṇavacanabyappatho (whose speech is not scattered). Dvidugamavaratarahanuttamalatthāti (he has attained the best state of going by twos) because he goes by twos, he is dvidugamo (going by twos), by twos means by fours, he has attained the jaw condition of a lion, which is the best of quadrupeds, this is the meaning. Manujādhipatīti (lord of men) lord of men. Tathattoti (suchness) such is his nature.

Samadantādilakkhaṇavaṇṇanā
Description of the Even Teeth Characteristic, Etc.

240.Suciparivāroti parisuddhaparivāro. Idhakammaṃnāma sammājīvatā.Kammasarikkhakaṃnāma yo visamena saṃkiliṭṭhājīvena jīvitaṃ kappeti, tassa dantāpi visamā honti dāṭhāpi kiliṭṭhā. Tathāgatassa pana samena suddhājīvena jīvitaṃ kappitabhāvaṃ sadevako loko iminā kāraṇena jānātūti samadantalakkhaṇañca susukkadāṭhālakkhaṇañca nibbattati.Lakkhaṇaṃnāma idameva lakkhaṇadvayaṃ. Suciparivāratāānisaṃso.

240.Suciparivāroti (he has a pure following) he has a purified following. Here, kammaṃ (action) means right livelihood (sammājīvatā). Kammasarikkhakaṃ (the result of action) means that one who maintains life with a defiled and dishonest livelihood, their teeth are also uneven and their fangs are defiled. But so that the world with its devas may know that the Tathāgata has maintained life with an even and pure livelihood, both the even teeth characteristic and the very white fangs characteristic arise. Lakkhaṇaṃ (characteristic) means just these two characteristics. Having a pure following is the ānisaṃsa (benefit).

241.Avassajīti pahāsitidivapuravarasamoti tidivapuravarena sakkena samo.Lapanajanti mukhajaṃ, dantanti attho.Dijasamasukkasucisobhanadantoti dve vāre jātattā dijanāmakā sukkā suci sobhanā ca dantā assāti dijasamasukkasucisobhanadanto.Na ca janapadatudananti yo tassa cakkavāḷaparicchinno janapado, tassa aññena tudanaṃ pīḷā vā ābādho vā natthi.Hitamapi ca bahujana sukhañca carantīti bahujanā samānasukhadukkhā hutvā tasmiṃ janapade aññamaññassa hitañceva sukhañca caranti.Vipāpoti vigatapāpo.Vigatadarathakilamathoti vigatakāyikadarathakilamatho.Malakhilakalikilese panudehīti rāgādimalānañceva rāgādikhilānañca dosakalīnañca sabbakilesānañca apanudehi. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānatthamevāti.

241.Avassajīti (he laughed) he laughed; tidivapuravarasamoti (equal to the excellent city of the gods) equal to Sakka, the excellent city of the gods. Lapanajanti (born from the mouth) born from the mouth, meaning teeth. Dijasamasukkasucisobhanadantoti (he has teeth that are doubly born, even, white, pure, and beautiful) because they are born twice, they are called dijasamasukkasucisobhanadanto (teeth that are doubly born, even, white, pure, and beautiful). Na ca janapadatudananti (and there is no torment of the country) and there is no torment, suffering, or affliction to that country bounded by his universal rule. Hitamapi ca bahujana sukhañca carantīti (and they live doing what is beneficial and bringing happiness to many people) many people, being equal in happiness and suffering, live in that country doing what is beneficial and bringing happiness to each other. Vipāpoti (free from evil) free from evil. Vigatadarathakilamathoti (free from bodily fatigue and exertion) free from bodily fatigue and exertion. Malakhilakalikilese panudehīti (may he remove the stains, obstructions, strife, and defilements) may he remove the stains of greed, etc., the obstructions of greed, etc., the strife of hatred, and all defilements. The rest is clear everywhere.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

In the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya,

8. Siṅgālasuttavaṇṇanā

8. Description of the Siṅgāla Sutta

Nidānavaṇṇanā
Introductory Account

242.Evaṃme sutanti siṅgālasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamanuttānapadavaṇṇanā –veḷuvane kalandakanivāpeti veḷuvananti tassa uyyānassa nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira veḷūhi parikkhittaṃ ahosi aṭṭhārasahatthena ca pākārena gopuraṭṭālakayuttaṃ nīlobhāsaṃ manoramaṃ, tena veḷuvananti vuccati. Kalandakānañcettha nivāpaṃ adaṃsu, tena kalandakanivāpoti vuccati.

242.Evaṃ me sutaṃti (Thus I have heard) the Siṅgāla Sutta. Herein, this is a description of the words that are not self-explanatory: veḷuvane kalandakanivāpeti (in the Bamboo Grove, the feeding ground of the squirrels) veḷuvana is the name of that park. It is said that it was surrounded by bamboo, with a wall of eighteen hands, complete with gate towers, beautiful with a blue hue, therefore it is called Veḷuvana (Bamboo Grove). And they gave a feeding ground (nivāpa) to the squirrels (kalandaka) there, therefore it is called kalandakanivāpa (the feeding ground of the squirrels).

Kalandakāti hi kāḷakānaṃ etaṃ nāmaṃ.

Kalandakāti (squirrels) this is the name for the black ones.

Tena kho pana samayenāti yasmiṃ samaye bhagavā rājagahaṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe viharati, tena samayena.Siṅgālako gahapatiputtoti siṅgālakoti tassa nāmaṃ.Gahapatiputtoti gahapatissa putto gahapatiputto. Tassa kira pitā gahapatimahāsālo, nidahitvā ṭhapitā cassa gehe cattālīsa dhanakoṭiyo atthi. So bhagavati niṭṭhaṅgato upāsako sotāpanno, bhariyāpissa sotāpannāyeva. Putto panassa assaddho appasanno. Atha naṃ mātāpitaro abhikkhaṇaṃ evaṃ ovadanti – ‘‘tāta satthāraṃ upasaṅkama, dhammasenāpatiṃ mahāmoggallānaṃ mahākassapaṃ asītimahāsāvake upasaṅkamā’’ti. So evamāha – ‘‘natthi mama tumhākaṃ samaṇānaṃ upasaṅkamanakiccaṃ, samaṇānaṃ santikaṃ gantvā vanditabbaṃ hoti, onamitvā vandantassa piṭṭhi rujjati, jāṇukāni kharāni honti, bhūmiyaṃ nisīditabbaṃ hoti, tattha nisinnassa vatthāni kilissanti jīranti, samīpe nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya kathāsallāpo hoti, tasmiṃ sati vissāso uppajjati, tato nimantetvā cīvarapiṇḍapātādīni dātabbāni honti. Evaṃ sante attho parihāyati, natthi mayhaṃ tumhākaṃ samaṇānaṃ upasaṅkamanakicca’’nti. Iti naṃ yāvajīvaṃ ovadantāpi mātāpitaro sāsane upanetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu.

Tena kho pana samayenāti (at that time) at that time when the Blessed One, having made Rājagaha his alms-gathering village, was dwelling in the Bamboo Grove, the feeding ground of the squirrels, at that time. Siṅgālako gahapatiputtoti (Siṅgālaka, the householder's son) Siṅgālaka was his name. Gahapatiputtoti (householder's son) the son of a householder is a householder's son. It is said that his father was a wealthy merchant, and there were forty crores of wealth stored and deposited in his house. He was a lay follower, a Stream-enterer, devoted to the Blessed One, and his wife was also a Stream-enterer. But their son was faithless and displeased. Then his parents constantly advised him thus: "Dear son, go to the Teacher, go to the Dhamma Commander, Mahāmoggallāna, Mahākassapa, and the eighty great disciples." He said thus: "I have no need to go to your ascetics. Having gone to the presence of the ascetics, one has to bow down. When bowing, the back breaks, the knees become rough, one has to sit on the ground, and sitting there, the clothes get soiled and worn out. From the time of sitting nearby, there is talk and conversation, and with that confidence arises, then one has to invite them and give them robes, alms food, etc. Thus wealth diminishes. I have no need to go to your ascetics." Thus, even advising him throughout his life, his parents could not bring him into the Dispensation.

Athassa pitā maraṇamañce nipanno ‘‘mama puttassa ovādaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā puna cintesi – ‘‘disā tāta namassāhī’’ti evamassa ovādaṃ dassāmi, so atthaṃ ajānanto disā namassissati, atha naṃ satthā vā sāvakā vā passitvā ‘‘kiṃ karosī’’ti pucchissanti. Tato ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā disā namassanaṃ karohīti maṃ ovadī’’ti vakkhati. Athassa te ‘‘na tuyhaṃ pitā etā disā namassāpeti, imā pana disā namassāpetī’’ti dhammaṃ desessanti. So buddhasāsane guṇaṃ ñatvā ‘‘puññakammaṃ karissatī’’ti. Atha naṃ āmantāpetvā ‘‘tāta, pātova uṭṭhāya cha disā namasseyyāsī’’ti āha. Maraṇamañce nipannassa kathā nāma yāvajīvaṃ anussaraṇīyā hoti. Tasmā so gahapatiputto taṃ pituvacanaṃ anussaranto tathā akāsi. Tasmā ‘‘kālasseva uṭṭhāya rājagahā nikkhamitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.

Then his father, lying on his deathbed, thinking, "It is fitting to give advice to my son," thought again, "I will give him this advice: 'Dear son, worship the directions.' Without understanding the meaning, he will worship the directions. Then the Teacher or his disciples, seeing him, will ask, 'What are you doing?' Then he will say, 'My father advised me to worship the directions.' Then they will teach him, 'Your father did not mean you to worship these directions, but he meant you to worship these directions.' Understanding the qualities of the Buddha's Dispensation, he will do meritorious deeds." Then, having had him summoned, he said, "Dear son, rising early, you should worship the six directions." The words of one lying on his deathbed are to be remembered throughout life. Therefore, remembering that word of his father, the householder's son did so. Therefore, it is said, "Rising early, having gone out of Rājagaha," etc.

243.Puthudisāti bahudisā. Idāni tā dassentopuratthimaṃ disantiādimāha.Pāvisīti na tāva paviṭṭho, pavisissāmīti nikkhantattā pana antarāmagge vattamānopi evaṃ vuccati.Addasā kho bhagavāti na idāneva addasa, paccūsasamayepi buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento etaṃ disā namassamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ajja ahaṃ siṅgālassa gahapatiputtassa gihivinayaṃ siṅgālasuttantaṃ kathessāmi, mahājanassa sā kathā saphalā bhavissati, gantabbaṃ mayā etthā’’ti. Tasmā pātova nikkhamitvā rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi, pavisanto ca naṃ tatheva addasa. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā’’ti.Etadavocāti so kira avidūre ṭhitampi satthāraṃ na passati, disāyeva namassati. Athaṃ naṃ bhagavā sūriyarasmisamphassena vikasamānaṃ mahāpadumaṃ viya mukhaṃ vivaritvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho tvaṃ, gahapatiputtā’’tiādikaṃ etadavoca.

243.Puthudisāti (various directions) many directions. Now, showing those directions, he said, puratthimaṃ disanti (the eastern direction), etc. Pāvisīti (he entered) he has not yet entered, but because he has gone out intending to enter, even while proceeding on the road, he is said to have entered. Addasā kho bhagavāti (then the Blessed One saw) he did not just see him now, but even at dawn, looking out on the world with his Buddha-eye, having seen him worshipping the directions, he thought, "Today, I will teach the Siṅgāla Suttanta, the Vinaya for householders, to Siṅgālaka, the householder's son. That talk will be fruitful for the great multitude. I must go there." Therefore, rising early, he entered Rājagaha for alms. And while entering, he saw him just as before. Therefore, it is said, "then the Blessed One saw." Etadavocāti (he said this) it seems that even though he was standing not far away, he did not see the Teacher, but was worshipping the directions. Then the Blessed One, having opened his mouth like a great lotus blooming with the touch of the sun's rays, said this: "What now, householder's son," etc.

Chadisādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Six Directions, Etc.

244.Yathākathaṃ pana, bhanteti so kira taṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ sutvāva cintesi ‘‘yā kira mama pitarā cha disā namassitabbā’’ti vuttā, na kira tā etā, aññā kira ariyasāvakena cha disā namassitabbā. Handāhaṃ ariyasāvakena namassitabbā disāyeva pucchitvā namassāmīti. So tā pucchantoyathā kathaṃ pana, bhantetiādimāha. Tatthayathāti nipātamattaṃ.Kathaṃ panāti idameva pucchāpadaṃ.Kammakilesāti tehi kammehi sattā kilissanti, tasmā kammakilesāti vuccanti.Ṭhānehīti kāraṇehi.Apāyamukhānīti vināsamukhāni.Soti so sotāpanno ariyasāvako.Cuddasa pāpakāpagatoti etehi cuddasahi pāpakehi lāmakehi apagato.Chaddisāpaṭicchādīti cha disā paṭicchādento.Ubholokavijayāyāti ubhinnaṃ idhalokaparalokānaṃ vijinanatthāya.Ayañceva loko āraddho hotīti evarūpassa hi idha loke pañca verāni na honti, tenassa ayañceva loko āraddho hoti paritosito ceva nipphādito ca. Paralokepi pañca verāni na honti, tenassa paro ca loko ārādhito hoti. Tasmā so kāyassa bhedā parammaraṇā sugatiṃ saggaṃ lokaṃ upapajjati.

244. "But how, Bhante?": Having heard that statement of the Blessed One, he thought, "These, indeed, are not the six directions that my father said should be venerated; other six directions should be venerated by a noble disciple. Let me ask about and venerate the directions that should be venerated by a noble disciple." Asking about them, he said, "But how, Bhante?" etc. Here, "yathā" is merely a particle. "Kathaṃ pana" is the question itself. "Kammakilesā": beings are defiled by these actions; therefore, they are called kammakilesā. "Ṭhānehi": by reasons. "Apāyamukhānī": mouths of ruin. "So": that sotāpanna, noble disciple. "Cuddasa pāpakāpagato": is rid of these fourteen evil, base things. "Chaddisāpaṭicchādī": covering the six directions. "Ubholokavijayāyā": for the sake of conquering both this world and the next. "Ayañceva loko āraddho hotī": for such a person, here in this world, there are no five kinds of fear; therefore, this world is cultivated, satisfied, and fulfilled for him. In the next world also, there are no five kinds of fear; therefore, the next world is also cultivated for him. Therefore, upon the dissolution of the body, after death, he is reborn in a good destination, a heavenly world.

245.Iti bhagavā saṅkhepena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā idāni tameva vitthārentokatamassa cattāro kammakilesātiādimāha.Kammakilesoti kammañca taṃ kilesasampayuttattā kileso cāti kammakileso. Sakilesoyeva hi pāṇaṃ hanati, nikkileso na hanati, tasmā pāṇātipāto ‘‘kammakileso’’ti vutto.Adinnādānādīsupi eseva nayo.Athāparanti aparampi etadatthaparidīpakameva gāthābandhaṃ avocāti attho.

245. Thus, the Blessed One, having established the summary matrix, now expanding upon it, said, "Katamassa cattāro kammakilesā" etc. "Kammakileso": it is both kamma and, being associated with defilements, a defilement; hence, kammakileso. For it is only when defiled that one kills a living being; one who is undefiled does not kill. Therefore, taking life is called "kammakileso". The same method applies to "adinnādānādīsu" (taking what is not given, etc.). "Athāparaṃ": moreover, he spoke another verse that illuminates the same meaning.

Catuṭhānādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Four Reasons, Etc.

246.Pāpakammaṃkarotīti idaṃ bhagavā yasmā kārake dassite akārako pākaṭo hoti, tasmā ‘‘pāpakammaṃ na karotī’’ti mātikaṃ ṭhapetvāpi desanākusalatāya paṭhamataraṃ kārakaṃ dassento āha. Tatthachandāgatiṃ gacchantoti chandena pemena agatiṃ gacchanto akattabbaṃ karonto. Parapadesupi eseva nayo. Tattha yo ‘‘ayaṃ me mitto vā sambhatto vā sandiṭṭho vā ñātako vā lañjaṃ vā pana me detī’’ti chandavasena assāmikaṃ sāmikaṃ karoti, ayaṃ chandāgatiṃ gacchanto pāpakammaṃ karoti nāma. Yo ‘‘ayaṃ me verī’’ti pakativeravasena taṅkhaṇuppannakodhavasena vā sāmikaṃ assāmikaṃ karoti, ayaṃ dosāgatiṃ gacchanto pāpakammaṃ karoti nāma. Yo pana mandattā momūhattā yaṃ vā taṃ vā vatvā assāmikaṃ sāmikaṃ karoti, ayaṃ mohāgatiṃ gacchanto pāpakammaṃ karoti nāma. Yo pana ‘‘ayaṃ rājavallabho vā visamanissito vā anatthampi me kareyyā’’ti bhīto assāmikaṃ sāmikaṃ karoti, ayaṃ bhayāgatiṃ gacchanto pāpakammaṃ karoti nāma. Yo pana yaṃkiñci bhājento ‘‘ayaṃ me sandiṭṭho vā sambhatto vā’’ti pemavasena atirekaṃ deti, ‘‘ayaṃ me verī’’ti dosavasena ūnakaṃ deti, momūhattā dinnādinnaṃ ajānamāno kassaci ūnaṃ kassaci adhikaṃ deti, ‘‘ayaṃ imasmiṃ adiyyamāne mayhaṃ anatthampi kareyyā’’ti bhīto kassaci atirekaṃ deti, so catubbidhopi yathānukkamena chandāgatiādīni gacchanto pāpakammaṃ karoti nāma.

246. "Pāpakammaṃ karotī": Because the Blessed One, when showing the doer, makes the non-doer apparent, therefore, even having established the matrix as "he does not do evil," He first showed the doer due to His skill in teaching. Here, "chandāgatiṃ gacchanto": going to a wrong course (agati) through desire (chanda), doing what should not be done. The same method applies in other instances. Here, the one who, due to desire, thinking, "This is my friend, associate, acquaintance, or relative, or perhaps he will give me a bribe," makes what belongs to no one belong to someone, that one, going to a wrong course through desire, is said to do evil. The one who, due to aversion, out of inherent nature or momentary anger, makes what belongs to someone belong to no one, that one, going to a wrong course through aversion, is said to do evil. But the one who, due to dullness or delusion, saying whatever comes to mind, makes what belongs to no one belong to someone, that one, going to a wrong course through delusion, is said to do evil. But the one who, fearing that "this person is a favorite of the king or relies on injustice and might cause me harm," makes what belongs to no one belong to someone, that one, going to a wrong course through fear, is said to do evil. But the one who, when distributing something, gives more due to affection, thinking, "This is my acquaintance or associate," gives less due to aversion, thinking, "This is my enemy," not knowing what has been given and not given due to delusion, gives less to some and more to others, fearing that "if this is not given to this person, he might cause me harm," gives more to some, that fourfold person, going to wrong courses in due order through desire, etc., is said to do evil.

Ariyasāvako pana jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇantopi chandāgatiādīni na gacchati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘imehi catūhi ṭhānehi pāpakammaṃ na karotī’’ti.

However, the noble disciple does not go to wrong courses through desire, etc., even when facing the end of his life. Therefore, it was said, "He does not do evil through these four reasons."

Nihīyati yaso tassāti tassa agatigāmino kittiyasopi parivārayasopi nihīyati parihāyati.

"Nihīyati yaso tassā": The fame of that person who goes to a wrong course, even if it exists, declines and diminishes.

Chaapāyamukhādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Six Mouths of Ruin, Etc.

247.Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānānuyogoti etthasurāti piṭṭhasurā pūvasurā odanasurā kiṇṇapakkhittā sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā.Merayanti pupphāsavo phalāsavo madhvāsavo guḷāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Taṃ sabbampi madakaraṇavasenamajjaṃ. Pamādaṭṭhānanti pamādakāraṇaṃ. Yāya cetanāya taṃ majjaṃ pivati, tassa etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Anuyogoti tassa surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānassa anuanuyogo punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ. Yasmā panetaṃ anuyuttassa uppannā ceva bhogā parihāyanti, anuppannā ca nuppajjanti, tasmā ‘‘bhogānaṃ apāyamukha’’nti vuttaṃ.Vikālavisikhācariyānuyogoti avelāya visikhāsu cariyānuyuttatā.

247. "Surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhānānuyogo": Here, "surā": there are five kinds of surā: rice-flour surā, cake surā, rice surā, kiṇṇa-mixed, and ingredient-mixed. "Meraya": there are five kinds of āsava: flower āsava, fruit āsava, honey āsava, jaggery āsava, and ingredient-mixed. All of that, due to its intoxicating nature, is "majjaṃ" (intoxicant). "Pamādaṭṭhāna": the cause of negligence. This is a designation for the intention with which one drinks that intoxicant. "Anuyogo": repeatedly engaging in that surāmerayamajjappamādaṭṭhāna. Since the wealth that has arisen in one who is engaged in this declines, and wealth that has not arisen does not arise, therefore it is said to be the "mouth of ruin for wealth." "Vikālavisikhācariyānuyogo": being engaged in wandering in the streets at unseasonable times.

Samajjābhicaraṇanti naccādidassanavasena samajjāgamanaṃ.Ālasyānuyogoti kāyālasiyatāya yuttappayuttatā.

"Samajjābhicaraṇaṃ": going to festivals (samajjā) in terms of seeing dancing, etc. "Ālasyānuyogo": being associated with laziness of the body.

Surāmerayassa chaādīnavādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Six Disadvantages of Intoxicants, Etc.

248.Evaṃ channaṃ apāyamukhānaṃ mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā idāni tāni vibhajantocha kho me, gahapatiputta ādīnavātiādimāha. Tatthasandiṭṭhikāti sāmaṃ passitabbā, idhalokabhāvinī.Dhanajānīti dhanahāni.Kalahappavaḍḍhanīti vācākalahassa ceva hatthaparāmāsādikāyakalahassa ca vaḍḍhanī.Rogānaṃ āyatananti tesaṃ tesaṃ akkhirogādīnaṃ khettaṃ.Akittisañjananīti suraṃ pivitvā hi mātarampi paharanti pitarampi, aññaṃ bahumpi avattabbaṃ vadanti, akattabbaṃ karonti. Tena garahampi daṇḍampi hatthapādādichedampi pāpuṇanti, idhalokepi paralokepi akittiṃ pāpuṇanti, iti tesaṃ sā surā akittisañjananī nāma hoti.Kopīnanidaṃsanīti guyhaṭṭhānañhi vivariyamānaṃ hiriṃ kopeti vināseti, tasmā ‘‘kopīna’’nti vuccati, surāmadamattā ca taṃ taṃ aṅgaṃ vivaritvā vicaranti, tena nesaṃ sā surā kopīnassa nidaṃsanato ‘‘kopīnanidaṃsanī’’ti vuccati.Paññāya dubbalikaraṇīti sāgatattherassa viya kammassakatapaññaṃ dubbalaṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘paññāya dubbalikaraṇī’’ti vuccati. Maggapaññaṃ pana dubbalaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Adhigatamaggānañhi sā antomukhameva na pavisati.Chaṭṭhaṃ padanti chaṭṭhaṃ kāraṇaṃ.

248. Thus, having established the matrix of the six mouths of ruin, now dividing them, he said, "Cha kho me, gahapatiputta ādīnavā" etc. Here, "sandiṭṭhikā": visible in this very life. "Dhanajānī": loss of wealth. "Kalahappavaḍḍhanī": increasing both verbal quarrels and physical quarrels involving touching with hands, etc. "Rogānaṃ āyatanaṃ": the field for various diseases such as eye diseases, etc. "Akittisañjananī": after drinking intoxicants, people strike even their mothers and fathers, and say many other unspeakable things, and do what should not be done. Therefore, they attain blame, punishment, and even the cutting off of hands and feet, and they attain disrepute in this world and the next. Thus, that intoxicant of theirs is called "akittisañjananī". "Kopīnanidaṃsanī": the private parts, when exposed, anger and destroy shame; therefore, they are called "kopīna". Being intoxicated with intoxicants, they wander about exposing those parts; therefore, that intoxicant of theirs, due to exposing the kopīna, is called "kopīnanidaṃsanī". "Paññāya dubbalikaraṇī": it weakens wisdom related to one's own actions, as it did for Sāgata Thera; therefore, it is called "paññāya dubbalikaraṇī". However, it cannot weaken the wisdom of the path (magga-pañña). For it does not enter inward for those who have attained the path. "Chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ": the sixth reason.

249.Attāpissa agutto arakkhito hotīti avelāya caranto hi khāṇukaṇṭakādīnipi akkamati, ahināpi yakkhādīhipi samāgacchati, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ gacchatīti ñatvā verinopi naṃ nilīyitvā gaṇhanti vā hananti vā. Evaṃ attāpissa agutto hoti arakkhito. Puttadārāpi ‘‘amhākaṃ pitā amhākaṃ sāmi rattiṃ vicarati, kimaṅgaṃ pana maya’’nti itissa puttadhītaropi bhariyāpi bahi patthanaṃ katvā rattiṃ carantā anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇanti. Evaṃputtadāropissa agutto arakkhito hoti. Sāpateyyanti tassa puttadāraparijanassa rattiṃ caraṇakabhāvaṃ ñatvā corā suññaṃ gehaṃ pavisitvā yaṃ icchanti, taṃ haranti. Evaṃsāpateyyampissa aguttaṃ arakkhitaṃ hoti. Saṅkiyo ca hotīti aññehi katapāpakammesupi ‘‘iminā kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti saṅkitabbo hoti. Yassa yassa gharadvārena yāti, tattha yaṃ aññena corakammaṃ paradārikakammaṃ vā kataṃ, taṃ ‘‘iminā kata’’nti vutte abhūtaṃ asantampi tasmiṃ rūhati patiṭṭhāti.Bahūnañca dukkhadhammānanti ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ domanassanti vattuṃ na sakkā, aññasmiṃ puggale asati sabbaṃ vikālacārimhi āharitabbaṃ hoti, iti so bahūnaṃ dukkhadhammānaṃ purakkhato puregāmī hoti.

249. "Attāpissa agutto arakkhito hotī": wandering at unseasonable times, he steps on thorns and thistles, and encounters snakes and yakkhas, going to various places. Knowing that, even enemies lie in wait and seize or kill him. Thus, even his self is unguarded and unprotected. Even his sons and wives think, "Our father, our master, wanders at night; what need is there for us?" Thus, his sons, daughters, and wives, wandering about at night, seeking outside pleasures, encounter misfortune and ruin. Thus, "puttadāropissa agutto arakkhito hoti". Knowing the night-wandering behavior of his sons, wives, and family, thieves enter the empty house and take whatever they want. Thus, "sāpateyyampissa aguttaṃ arakkhitaṃ hoti. Saṅkiyo ca hotī": even in evil deeds done by others, he is suspected, thinking, "This must have been done by him." Whatever theft or adultery is committed by another near whose house he goes, even though it is untrue and nonexistent, it grows and takes root in him. "Bahūnañca dukkhadhammānaṃ": it is impossible to say how much suffering and how much sorrow there is. In the absence of another person, everything must be attributed to the night-wanderer. Thus, he is foremost and the leader in many painful things.

250.Kvanaccanti ‘‘kasmiṃ ṭhāne naṭanāṭakādinaccaṃ atthī’’ti pucchitvā yasmiṃ gāme vā nigame vā taṃ atthi, tattha gantabbaṃ hoti, tassa ‘‘sve naccadassanaṃ gamissāmī’’ti ajja vatthagandhamālādīni paṭiyādentasseva sakaladivasampi kammacchedo hoti, naccadassanena ekāhampi dvīhampi tīhampi tattheva hoti, atha vuṭṭhisampattiyādīni labhitvāpi vappādikāle vappādīni akarontassa anuppannā bhogā nuppajjanti, tassa bahi gatabhāvaṃ ñatvā anārakkhe gehe corā yaṃ icchanti, taṃ karonti, tenassa uppannāpi bhogā vinassanti.Kva gītantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tesaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ brahmajāle vuttameva.

250. "Kva naccaṃ": asking "In what place is there dancing, dramas, etc.?" and having to go to whatever village or town it is in, even as he prepares clothes, perfumes, garlands, etc., today, thinking, "Tomorrow I will go to see the dancing," there is a break in work for the entire day. Due to seeing the dancing, he stays there for one, two, or three days. Even having obtained rain and prosperity, he does not do sowing, etc., at the time of sowing, etc., and wealth that has not arisen does not arise. Knowing of his absence outside, thieves do whatever they want in the unprotected house; thus, his wealth that has arisen is also destroyed. The same method applies to "kva gītaṃ" (where is singing), etc. Their distinction has already been stated in the Brahmajāla.

251.Jayaṃ veranti ‘‘jitaṃ mayā’’ti parisamajjhe parassa sāṭakaṃ vā veṭhanaṃ vā gaṇhāti, so ‘‘parisamajjhe me avamānaṃ karosi, hotu, sikkhāpessāmi na’’nti tattha veraṃ bandhati, evaṃ jinanto sayaṃ veraṃ pasavati.Jinoti aññena jito samāno yaṃ tena tassa veṭhanaṃ vā sāṭako vā aññaṃ vā pana hiraññasuvaṇṇādivittaṃ gahitaṃ, taṃ anusocati ‘‘ahosi vata me, taṃ taṃ vata me natthī’’ti tappaccayā socati. Evaṃ so jino vittaṃ anusocati.Sabhāgatassa vacanaṃ na rūhatīti vinicchayaṭṭhāne sakkhipuṭṭhassa sato vacanaṃ na rūhati, na patiṭṭhāti, ‘‘ayaṃ akkhasoṇḍo jūtakaro, mā tassa vacanaṃ gaṇhitthā’’ti vattāro bhavanti.Mittāmaccānaṃparibhūto hotīti tañhi mitāmaccā evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘samma, tvampi nāma kulaputto jūtakaro chinnabhinnako hutvā vicarasi, na te idaṃ jātigottānaṃ anurūpaṃ, ito paṭṭhāya mā evaṃ kareyyāsī’’ti. So evaṃ vuttopi tesaṃ vacanaṃ na karoti. Tato tena saddhiṃ ekato na tiṭṭhanti na nisīdanti. Tassa kāraṇā sakkhipuṭṭhāpi na kathenti. Evaṃ mittāmaccānaṃ paribhūto hoti.

251. "Jayaṃ veraṃ": winning, he takes the cloak or turban of another in the midst of the assembly, thinking, "I have won." That person binds hatred there, thinking, "He insults me in the midst of the assembly; let it be, I will teach him a lesson." Thus, the one who conquers himself generates hatred. "Jino": being conquered by another, he laments over whatever turban or cloak or other wealth of gold and silver, etc., has been taken by that person, thinking, "I had that, now that is no longer mine," and due to that, he grieves. Thus, the one who is conquered grieves over wealth. "Sabhāgatassa vacanaṃ na rūhatī": when asked as a witness in a place of judgment, his word does not take root or stand firm, and there are those who say, "This is an addicted gambler; do not heed his word." "Mittāmaccānaṃ paribhūto hotī": his friends and relatives say thus: "Friend, are you, a person from a good family, wandering about as an addicted gambler, cut off and broken? This is not befitting your lineage and clan; from now on, do not do such a thing." Even when he is told this, he does not heed their words. Therefore, they do not stand or sit together with him. Because of that, even when asked as a witness, they do not speak. Thus, he is despised by his friends and relatives.

Āvāhavivāhakānanti āvāhakā nāma ye tassa gharato dārikaṃ gahetukāmā. Vivāhakā nāma ye tassa gehe dārikaṃ dātukāmā.Apatthito hotīti anicchito hoti.Nālaṃ dārabharaṇāyāti dārabharaṇāya na samattho. Etassa gehe dārikā dinnāpi etassa gehato āgatāpi amhehi eva positabbā bhavissatiyeva.

"Āvāhavivāhakānaṃ": āvāhakā are those who wish to take a girl from his house. Vivāhakā are those who wish to give a girl into his house. "Apatthito hotī": is unwanted. "Nālaṃ dārabharaṇāyā": is not capable of supporting a wife. Even if a girl is given into this house or comes from this house, she will have to be supported by us.

Pāpamittatāya chaādīnavādivaṇṇanā
Description of the Six Disadvantages of Evil Friendship, Etc.

252.Dhuttāti akkhadhuttā.Soṇḍāti itthisoṇḍā bhattasoṇḍā pūvasoṇḍā mūlakasoṇḍā.Pipāsāti pānasoṇḍā.Nekatikāti patirūpakena vañcanakā.Vañcanikāti sammukhāvañcanāhi vañcanikā.Sāhasikāti ekāgārikādisāhasikakammakārino.Tyāssa mittā hontīti te assa mittā honti. Aññehi sappurisehi saddhiṃ na ramati gandhamālādīhi alaṅkaritvā varasayanaṃ āropitasūkaro gūthakūpamiva, te pāpamitteyeva upasaṅkamati. Tasmā diṭṭhe ceva dhamme samparāyañca bahuṃ anatthaṃ nigacchati.

252. "Dhuttā": addicted gamblers. "Soṇḍā": those addicted to women, addicted to food, addicted to cakes, addicted to roots. "Pipāsā": those addicted to drinks. "Nekatikā": those who deceive with false pretenses. "Vañcanikā": those who deceive with face-to-face deceptions. "Sāhasikā": those who commit violent acts such as breaking into houses. "Tyāssa mittā hontī": those are his friends. He does not delight in the company of other good people, but like a pig adorned with perfumes and garlands and placed on a fine bed going to a pile of feces, he approaches those evil friends. Therefore, he incurs much misfortune in this very life and in the future.

253.Atisītanti kammaṃ na karotīti manussehi kālasseva vuṭṭhāya ‘‘etha bho kammantaṃ gacchāmā’’ti vutto ‘‘atisītaṃ tāva, aṭṭhīni bhijjanti viya, gacchatha tumhe pacchā jānissāmī’’ti aggiṃ tapanto nisīdati. Te gantvā kammaṃ karonti. Itarassa kammaṃ parihāyati.Atiuṇhantiādīsupi eseva nayo.

253. "Atisītanti kammaṃ na karotī": when asked by people who have risen early in the morning, "Come, sir, let us go to work," he sits warming himself by the fire, saying, "It is too cold, it is as if my bones are breaking; you go, I will know later." They go and do the work. His work declines. The same method applies to "atiuṇhaṃ" (too hot), etc.

Hoti pānasakhā nāmāti ekacco pānaṭṭhāne surāgeheyeva sahāyo hoti. ‘‘Pannasakhā’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho.Sammiyasammiyoti samma sammāti vadanto sammukheyeva sahāyo hoti, parammukhe verīsadiso otārameva gavesati.Atthesujātesūti tathārūpesu kiccesu samuppannesu.Verappasavoti verabahulatā.Anatthatāti anatthakāritā.Sukadariyatāti suṭṭhu kadariyatā thaddhamacchariyabhāvo.Udakamiva iṇaṃ vigāhatīti pāsāṇo udakaṃ viya saṃsīdanto iṇaṃ vigāhati.

"Hoti pānasakhā nāmā": one is a friend only in the drinking place, in the liquor store. "Pannasakhā" is also a reading, this is the same meaning. "Sammiyasammiyo": saying "samma samma" (friend, friend), he is a friend only to one's face, but behind one's back, he seeks only an opportunity to do harm, like an enemy. "Atthesu jātesū": when such tasks have arisen. "Verappasavo": abundance of hatred. "Anatthatā": causing harm. "Sukadariyatā": very stingy, having a stiff, miserly attitude. "Udakamiva iṇaṃ vigāhatī": he sinks into debt like a stone sinks into water.

Rattinuṭṭhānadessināti rattiṃ anuṭṭhānasīlena.Atisāyamidaṃ ahūti idaṃ atisāyaṃ jātanti ye evaṃ vatvā kammaṃ na karonti.Iti vissaṭṭhakammanteti evaṃ vatvā pariccattakammante.Atthā accenti māṇaveti evarūpe puggale atthā atikkamanti, tesu na tiṭṭhanti.

"Rattinuṭṭhānadessinā": by the habit of not rising at night. "Atisāyamidaṃ ahū": those who do not work, saying "This happened too late in the evening." "Iti vissaṭṭhakammante": having thus abandoned work. "Atthā accenti māṇave": in such a person, wealth passes away and does not remain with them.

Tiṇā bhiyyoti tiṇatopi uttari.So sukhaṃ na vihāyatīti so puriso sukhaṃ na jahāti, sukhasamaṅgīyeva hoti. Iminā kathāmaggena imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘gihibhūtena satā ettakaṃ kammaṃ na kātabbaṃ, karontassa vaḍḍhi nāma natthi. Idhaloke paraloke garahameva pāpuṇātī’’ti.

"Tiṇā bhiyyo": even more than grass. "So sukhaṃ na vihāyatī": that person does not abandon happiness, he is always associated with happiness. By this manner of speaking, he shows this meaning: "Being a householder, so much work should not be done; for one who does, there is no increase. He only attains blame in this world and the next."

Mittapatirūpakādivaṇṇanā
Description of False Friends, Etc.

254.Idāni yo evaṃ karoto anattho uppajjati, aññāni vā pana yāni kānici bhayāni yekeci upaddavā yekeci upasaggā, sabbe te bālaṃ nissāya uppajjanti. Tasmā ‘‘evarūpā bālā na sevitabbā’’ti bāle mittapatirūpake amitte dassetuṃcattārome, gahapatiputta amittātiādimāha. Tatthaaññadatthuharoti sayaṃ tucchahattho āgantvā ekaṃsena yaṃkiñci haratiyeva.Vacīparamoti vacanaparamo vacanamatteneva dāyako kārako viya hoti.Anuppiyabhāṇīti anuppiyaṃ bhaṇati.Apāyasahāyoti bhogānaṃ apāyesu sahāyo hoti.

254. Now, the misfortune that arises for one who does thus, or any other fears, any troubles, any obstacles that arise, all of them arise dependent on a fool. Therefore, to show the fools who are false friends and not friends, thinking, "Such fools should not be associated with," he said, "Cattārome, gahapatiputta amittā" etc. Here, "aññadatthuharo": coming empty-handed himself, he always takes whatever there is. "Vacīparamo": supreme in words, he is like a giver and doer only in words. "Anuppiyabhāṇī": speaks what is agreeable. "Apāyasahāyo": a companion in the mouths of ruin for wealth.

255.Evaṃ cattāro amitte dassetvā puna tattha ekekaṃ catūhi kāraṇehi vibhajantocatūhi kho, gahapatiputtātiādimāha. Tatthaaññadatthuharo hotīti ekaṃsena hārakoyeva hoti. Sahāyassa gehaṃ rittahattho āgantvā nivatthasāṭakādīnaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, so ‘‘ativiya tvaṃ samma imassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsasī’’ti aññaṃ nivāsetvā taṃ deti.Appena bahumicchatīti yaṃkiñci appakaṃ datvā tassa santikā bahuṃ pattheti.Bhayassakiccaṃ karotīti attano bhaye uppanne tassa dāso viya hutvā taṃ taṃ kiccaṃ karoti, ayaṃ sabbadā na karoti, bhaye uppanne karoti, na pemenāti amitto nāma jāto.Sevati atthakāraṇāti mittasanthavavasena na sevati, attano atthameva paccāsīsanto sevati.

255. Having shown the four enemies in this way, he then further divided each one with four reasons, saying, "catūhi kho, gahapatiputtā" [END_OF_SENTENCE] etc. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Here, aññadatthuharo hotī means he is entirely a robber. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Coming to a friend’s house empty-handed and praising the color of the worn garment etc., if the friend dresses him in another garment, saying, “You praise this too much, friend,” and gives it to him. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Appena bahumicchatī means he desires much from him after giving something small. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Bhayassa kiccaṃ karotī means when fear arises for himself, he does this or that task, behaving like a slave to him; he does not do it always, he does it when fear arises, not out of affection; he is therefore known as an enemy. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Sevati atthakāraṇā means he does not associate out of friendly intimacy, but associates expecting only his own benefit.

256.Atītena paṭisantharatīti sahāye āgate ‘‘hiyyo vā pare vā na āgatosi, amhākaṃ imasmiṃ vāre sassaṃ ativiya nipphannaṃ, bahūni sāliyavabījādīni ṭhapetvā maggaṃ olokentā nisīdimha, ajja pana sabbaṃ khīṇa’’nti evaṃ atītena saṅgaṇhāti.Anāgatenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ vāre amhākaṃ sassaṃ manāpaṃ bhavissati, phalabhārabharitā sāliādayo, sassasaṅgahe kate tumhākaṃ saṅgahaṃ kātuṃ samatthā bhavissāmā’’ti evaṃ anāgatena saṅgaṇhāti.Niratthakenāti hatthikkhandhe vā assapiṭṭhe vā nisinno sahāyaṃ disvā ‘‘ehi, bho, idha nisīdā’’ti vadati. Manāpaṃ sāṭakaṃ nivāsetvā ‘‘sahāyakassa vata me anucchaviko añño pana mayhaṃ natthī’’ti vadati, evaṃ niratthakena saṅgaṇhāti nāma.Paccuppannesu kiccesu byasanaṃ dassetīti ‘‘sakaṭena me attho’’ti vutte ‘‘cakkamassa bhinnaṃ, akkho chinno’’tiādīni vadati.

256.Atītena paṭisantharatī means when a friend arrives, he greets him, saying, “You did not come yesterday or the day before; this time our harvest was very abundant; we sat looking at the road, having kept many rice and barley seeds, but today everything is depleted.” In this way, he ingratiates with the past. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Anāgatena means he ingratiates with the future, saying, "This time our harvest will be pleasing, rice etc., laden with fruit; having gathered the harvest, we will be able to favor you." Niratthakenā means seeing a friend sitting on an elephant's back or a horse's back, he says, “Come, friend, sit here.” Dressing in a pleasing garment, he says, “Indeed, there is no one else so suited to my friend as me.” In this way, he is said to ingratiate with empty words. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Paccuppannesu kiccesu byasanaṃ dassetī means when it is said, “I need a cart,” he says, “Its wheel is broken, the axle is shattered,” etc.

257.Pāpakampissa anujānātīti pāṇātipātādīsu yaṃkiñci karomāti vutte ‘‘sādhu samma karomā’’ti anujānāti. Kalyāṇepi eseva nayo.Sahāyo hotīti ‘‘asukaṭṭhāne suraṃ pivanti, ehi tattha gacchāmā’’ti vutte sādhūti gacchati. Esa nayo sabbattha.Iti viññāyāti ‘‘mittapatirūpakā ete’’ti evaṃ jānitvā.

257.Pāpakampissa anujānātī means when it is said, “I will do any of the acts such as killing living beings,” he approves, saying, “Good, friend, let us do it.” The same method applies to wholesome deeds. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Sahāyo hotī means when it is said, "They are drinking liquor in such and such a place, let us go there," he goes, saying "Good." This method applies everywhere. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Iti viññāyā means having known thus, “These are mere pretenders of friends.”

Suhadamittādivaṇṇanā
Description of Suhada Friends, etc.

260.Evaṃ na sevitabbe pāpamitte dassetvā idāni sevitabbe kalyāṇamitte dassento punacattārome, gahapatiputtātiādimāha. Tatthasuhadāti sundarahadayā.

260. Having shown the evil friends who should not be associated with in this way, now showing the good friends who should be associated with, he again said "cattārome, gahapatiputtā" [END_OF_SENTENCE] etc. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Here, suhadā means those with beautiful hearts.

261.Pamattaṃ rakkhatīti majjaṃ pivitvā gāmamajjhe vā gāmadvāre vā magge vā nipannaṃ disvā ‘‘evaṃnipannassa kocideva nivāsanapārupanampi hareyyā’’ti samīpe nisīditvā pabuddhakāle gahetvā gacchati.Pamattassasāpateyyanti sahāyo bahigato vā hoti suraṃ pivitvā vā pamatto, gehaṃ anārakkhaṃ ‘‘kocideva yaṃkiñci hareyyā’’ti gehaṃ pavisitvā tassa dhanaṃ rakkhati.Bhītassāti kismiñcideva bhaye uppanne ‘‘mā bhāyi, mādise sahāye ṭhite kiṃ bhāyasī’’ti taṃ bhayaṃ haranto paṭisaraṇaṃ hoti.Taddiguṇaṃ bhoganti kiccakaraṇīye uppanne sahāyaṃ attano santikaṃ āgataṃ disvā vadati ‘‘kasmā āgatosī’’ti? Rājakule kammaṃ atthīti. Kiṃ laddhuṃ vaṭṭatīti? Eko kahāpaṇoti. ‘‘Nagare kammaṃ nāma na ekakahāpaṇena nipphajjati, dve gaṇhāhī’’ti evaṃ yattakaṃ vadati, tato diguṇaṃ deti.

261.Pamattaṃ rakkhatī means seeing a friend who has drunk alcohol and is lying down in the middle of the village, at the village gate, or on the road, thinking, "Someone might take away even his clothing," he sits nearby and takes him away when he wakes up. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Pamattassa sāpateyyaṃ means when a friend is gone out or intoxicated with liquor or heedless, the house is unguarded, thinking, "Someone might take something," he enters the house and protects his wealth. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Bhītassā means when some fear arises, he becomes a refuge, removing that fear, saying, “Do not be afraid, why do you fear when a friend like me is here?” Taddiguṇaṃ bhogaṃ means when a task arises, seeing a friend coming to him, he says, “Why have you come?” “There is work in the royal court.” “How much is it worth receiving?” “One kahāpaṇa.” “Work in the city is not accomplished with one kahāpaṇa; take two.” Thus, he gives twice as much as he says.

262.Guyhamassa ācikkhatīti attano guyhaṃ nigūhituṃ yuttakathaṃ aññassa akathetvā tasseva ācikkhati.Guyhamassa parigūhatīti tena kathitaṃ guyhaṃ yathā añño na jānāti, evaṃ rakkhati.Āpadāsu na vijahatīti uppanne bhaye na pariccajati.Jīvitampissa atthāyāti attano jīvitampi tassa sahāyassa atthāya pariccattameva hoti, attano jīvitaṃ agaṇetvāpi tassa kammaṃ karotiyeva.

262.Guyhamassa ācikkhatī means he tells him his own secret, a matter fit to be concealed, without telling it to another. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Guyhamassa parigūhatī means he protects the secret told by him, so that another does not know it. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Āpadāsu na vijahatī means he does not abandon him when danger arises. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Jīvitampissa atthāyā means his own life is even given up for the sake of that friend; without regard for his own life, he does that task for him.

263.Pāpā nivāretīti amhesu passantesu passantesu tvaṃ evaṃ kātuṃ na labhasi, pañca verāni dasa akusalakammapathe mā karohīti nivāreti.Kalyāṇe nivesetīti kalyāṇakamme tīsu saraṇesu pañcasīlesu dasakusalakammapathesu vattassu, dānaṃ dehi puññaṃ karohi dhammaṃ suṇāhīti evaṃ kalyāṇe niyojeti.Assutaṃ sāvetīti assutapubbaṃ sukhumaṃ nipuṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ sāveti.Saggassa magganti idaṃ kammaṃ katvā sagge nibbattantīti evaṃ saggassa maggaṃ ācikkhati.

263.Pāpā nivāretī means he prevents him, saying, “While we are watching, you are not allowed to do this; do not commit the five kinds of misconduct or the ten courses of unwholesome action.” Kalyāṇe nivesetī means he establishes him in wholesome deeds, saying, “Undertake the three refuges, the five precepts, the ten courses of wholesome action; give alms, do meritorious deeds, listen to the Dhamma.” Assutaṃ sāvetī means he makes him hear a subtle, skillful reason that has never been heard before. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Saggassa maggaṃ means he shows the path to heaven, saying, “Having done this deed, they are reborn in heaven.”

264.Abhavenassa na nandatīti tassa abhavena avuḍḍhiyā puttadārassa vā parijanassa vā tathārūpaṃ pārijuññaṃ disvā vā sutvā vā na nandati, anattamano hoti.Bhavenāti vuḍḍhiyā tathārūpassa sampattiṃ vā issariyappaṭilābhaṃ vā disvā vā sutvā vā nandati, attamano hoti.Avaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānaṃ nivāretīti ‘‘asuko virūpo na pāsādiko dujjātiko dussīlo’’ti vā vutte ‘‘evaṃ mā bhaṇi, rūpavā ca so pāsādiko ca sujāto ca sīlasampanno cā’’tiādīhi vacanehi paraṃ attano sahāyassa avaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānaṃ nivāreti.Vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānaṃ pasaṃsatīti ‘‘asuko rūpavā pāsādiko sujāto sīlasampanno’’ti vutte ‘‘aho suṭṭhu vadasi, subhāsitaṃ tayā, evametaṃ, esa puriso rūpavā pāsādiko sujāto sīlasampanno’’ti evaṃ attano sahāyakassa paraṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānaṃ pasaṃsati.

264.Abhavenassa na nandatī means he does not rejoice at the misfortune or lack of prosperity of his, his children, wife, or retinue; he is unhappy upon seeing or hearing of such a misfortune. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Bhavenā means he rejoices upon seeing or hearing of the prosperity, such as the attainment of wealth or power; he is happy. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Avaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānaṃ nivāretī means when it is said, “So-and-so is ugly, not pleasing, of bad birth, immoral,” he prevents one speaking ill of his friend, saying, “Do not say so; he is handsome, pleasing, of good birth, and virtuous.” Vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇamānaṃ pasaṃsatī means when it is said, “So-and-so is handsome, pleasing, of good birth, virtuous,” he praises one speaking well of his friend, saying, “How well you speak, you have spoken well, it is just so, this man is handsome, pleasing, of good birth, and virtuous.”

265.Jalaṃ aggīva bhāsatīti rattiṃ pabbatamatthake jalamāno aggi viya virocati.

265.Jalaṃ aggīva bhāsatī means he shines like a blazing fire on a mountain peak at night.

Bhoge saṃharamānassāti attānampi parampi apīḷetvā dhammena samena bhoge sampiṇḍentassa rāsiṃ karontassa.Bhamarasseva irīyatoti yathā bhamaro pupphānaṃ vaṇṇagandhaṃ apothayaṃ tuṇḍenapi pakkhehipi rasaṃ āharitvā anupubbena cakkappamāṇaṃ madhupaṭalaṃ karoti, evaṃ anupubbena mahantaṃ bhogarāsiṃ karontassa.Bhogā sannicayaṃ yantīti tassa bhogā nicayaṃ gacchanti. Kathaṃ? Anupubbena upacikāhi saṃvaḍḍhiyamāno vammiko viya. Tenāha ‘‘vammikovupacīyatī’’ti. Yathā vammiko upaciyati, evaṃ nicayaṃ yantīti attho.

Bhoge saṃharamānassā means of one who amasses wealth righteously, fairly, without oppressing himself or others. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Bhamarasseva irīyato means just as a bee, without damaging the color and scent of flowers, gradually gathers honey with its proboscis and wings, making a honeycomb the size of a wheel, so of one who gradually amasses a great heap of wealth. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Bhogā sannicayaṃ yantī means his riches go to accumulation. [END_OF_SENTENCE] How? Like an anthill growing with gradually accumulating particles. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Therefore he said, "vammikovupacīyatī." Just as an anthill accumulates, so it means they go to accumulation.

Samāhatvāti samāharitvā.Alamatthoti yuttasabhāvo samattho vā pariyattarūpo gharāvāsaṃ saṇṭhāpetuṃ.

Samāhatvā means having gathered together. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Alamattho means having a fitting nature, capable or adequate to maintain a household.

catudhā vibhaje bhogetiādimāha. Tatthasa ve mittāni ganthatīti so evaṃ vibhajanto mittāni ganthati nāma abhejjamānāni ṭhapeti. Yassa hi bhogā santi, so eva mitte ṭhapetuṃ sakkoti, na itaro.

catudhā vibhaje bhoge [END_OF_SENTENCE] etc., he said. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Here, sa ve mittāni ganthatī means he, dividing thus, indeed binds his friends, that is, he keeps them inseparable. [END_OF_SENTENCE] For he who has wealth is able to keep friends, not the other.

Ekenabhoge bhuñjeyyāti ekena koṭṭhāsena bhoge bhuñjeyya.Dvīhi kammaṃ payojayeti dvīhi koṭṭhāsehi kasivāṇijjādikammaṃ payojeyya.Catutthañca nidhāpeyyāti catutthaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ nidhāpetvā ṭhapeyya.Āpadāsu bhavissatīti kulānañhi na sabbakālaṃ ekasadisaṃ vattati, kadāci rājādivasena āpadāpi uppajjanti, tasmā evaṃ āpadāsu uppannāsu bhavissatīti ‘‘ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ nidhāpeyyā’’ti āha. Imesu pana catūsu koṭṭhāsesu katarakoṭṭhāsaṃ gahetvā kusalaṃ kātabbanti? ‘‘Bhoge bhuñjeyyā’’ti vuttakoṭṭhāsaṃ. Tato gaṇhitvā bhikkhūnampi kapaṇaddhikādīnampi dātabbaṃ, pesakāranhāpitādīnampi vetanaṃ dātabbaṃ.

Ekena bhoge bhuñjeyyā means with one portion he should enjoy wealth. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Dvīhi kammaṃ payojaye means with two portions he should engage in work such as farming and trade. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Catutthañca nidhāpeyyā means he should set aside and keep the fourth portion. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Āpadāsu bhavissatī means for families, things do not always go the same way; sometimes dangers arise due to kings, etc.; therefore, thinking that it will be for dangers that arise in this way, he said, “He should set aside one portion.” But among these four portions, which portion should be taken to do meritorious deeds? The portion said, “Bhoge bhuñjeyyā.” Taking from that, it should be given to monks, the poor, travelers, etc.; wages should be given to messengers, barbers, etc.

Chaddisāpaṭicchādanakaṇḍavaṇṇanā
Description of the Section on Covering the Six Directions

266.Iti bhagavā ettakena kathāmaggena evaṃ gahapatiputtassa ariyasāvako catūhi kāraṇehi akusalaṃ pahāya chahi kāraṇehi bhogānaṃ apāyamukhaṃ vajjetvā soḷasa mittāni sevanto gharāvāsaṃ saṇṭhapetvā dārabharaṇaṃ karonto dhammikena ājīvena jīvati, devamanussānañca antare aggikkhandho viya virocatīti vajjanīyadhammavajjanatthaṃ sevitabbadhammasevanatthañca ovādaṃ datvā idāni namassitabbā cha disā dassentokathañca gahapatiputtātiādimāha.

266. Thus, with so much of a path of talk, the Blessed One, having given advice to the householder's son that an Ariyan disciple, abandoning the unwholesome with four reasons, avoiding the gateways to loss of wealth with six reasons, associating with sixteen kinds of friends, maintaining his household, supporting his wife, living by a righteous livelihood, shines like a firebrand among gods and humans, for the purpose of abandoning blameworthy things and associating with praiseworthy things, now showing the six directions that should be venerated, said, "kathañca gahapatiputtā" [END_OF_SENTENCE] etc.

chaddisāpaṭicchādīti yathā chahi disāhi āgamanabhayaṃ na āgacchati, khemaṃ hoti nibbhayaṃ evaṃ viharanto ‘‘chaddisāpaṭicchādī’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Puratthimā disā mātāpitaro veditabbā’’tiādīsumātāpitaropubbupakāritāyapuratthimā disāti veditabbā.Ācariyādakkhiṇeyyatāyadakkhiṇā disāti.Puttadārāpiṭṭhito anubandhanavasenapacchimā disāti.Mittāmaccāyasmā so mittāmacce nissāya te te dukkhavisese uttarati, tasmāuttarā disāti.Dāsakammakarāpādamūle patiṭṭhānavasenaheṭṭhimā disāti.Samaṇabrāhmaṇāguṇehi upari ṭhitabhāvenauparimā disāti veditabbā.

chaddisāpaṭicchādī means just as no fear of coming comes from the six directions, it is safe, fearless, thus he is called "one who covers the six directions," living thus. [END_OF_SENTENCE] In "mātāpitaro pubbuppakāritāya puratthimā disā" [END_OF_SENTENCE] etc., mātāpitaro are to be known as puratthimā disā because of their prior helpfulness. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Ācariyā are dakkhiṇā disā because of their worthiness of offerings. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Puttadārā are pacchimā disā because of following behind. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Mittāmaccā are uttarā disā because one crosses over various sufferings relying on friends and relatives. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Dāsakammakarā are heṭṭhimā disā because of their standing at the base of the feet. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Samaṇabrāhmaṇā are to be known as uparimā disā because of standing above with virtues.

267.Bhato ne bharissāmīti ahaṃ mātāpitūhi thaññaṃ pāyetvā hatthapāde vaḍḍhetvā mukhena siṅghāṇikaṃ apanetvā nahāpetvā maṇḍetvā bhato bharito jaggito, svāhaṃ ajja te mahallake pādadhovananhāpanayāgubhattadānādīhi bharissāmi.

267.Bhato ne bharissāmī means I was nourished by my parents, having been fed milk, my hands and feet were grown, mucus was removed from my face, I was bathed, adorned, nourished, and cherished, so today I will nourish them, now that they are old, with washing their feet, bathing, providing rice-gruel, giving food, etc.

Kiccaṃ nesaṃ karissāmīti attano kammaṃ ṭhapetvā mātāpitūnaṃ rājakulādīsu uppannaṃ kiccaṃ gantvā karissāmi.Kulavaṃsaṃ saṇṭhapessāmīti mātāpitūnaṃ santakaṃ khettavatthuhiraññasuvaṇṇādiṃ avināsetvā rakkhantopi kulavaṃsaṃ saṇṭhapeti nāma. Mātāpitaro adhammikavaṃsato hāretvā dhammikavaṃse ṭhapentopi, kulavaṃsena āgatāni salākabhattādīni anupacchinditvā pavattentopi kulavaṃsaṃ saṇṭhapeti nāma. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘kulavaṃsaṃ saṇṭhapessāmī’’ti.

Kiccaṃ nesaṃ karissāmī means setting aside my own work, I will go and do the work of my parents that has arisen in the royal family, etc. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Kulavaṃsaṃ saṇṭhapessāmī means he also maintains the family lineage by protecting the fields, goods, silver, gold, etc., belonging to his parents, without destroying them. [END_OF_SENTENCE] He also maintains the family lineage by turning his parents away from an unrighteous lineage and establishing them in a righteous lineage. [END_OF_SENTENCE] He also maintains the family lineage by continuing the customary alms, etc., that have come down through the family, without cutting them off. [END_OF_SENTENCE] With this in mind, it was said, “kulavaṃsaṃ saṇṭhapessāmī”.

Dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjāmīti mātāpitaro attano ovāde avattamāne micchāpaṭipanne dārake vinicchayaṃ patvā aputte karonti, te dāyajjārahā na honti. Ovāde vattamāne pana kulasantakassa sāmike karonti, ahaṃ evaṃ vattissāmīti adhippāyena ‘‘dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjāmī’’ti vuttaṃ.

Dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjāmī means parents, when their children do not follow their advice, are wrongly engaged, after reaching a decision, make them heirless, and they are not worthy of inheritance. [END_OF_SENTENCE] But when they are following their advice, they make them masters of the family property; with the intention that "I will behave thus," it was said, "dāyajjaṃ paṭipajjāmī."

Dakkhiṇaṃ anuppadassāmīti tesaṃ pattidānaṃ katvā tatiyadivasato paṭṭhāya dānaṃ anuppadassāmi.Pāpā nivārentīti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ ādīnavaṃ vatvā, ‘‘tāta, mā evarūpaṃ karī’’ti nivārenti, katampi garahanti.Kalyāṇe nivesentīti anāthapiṇḍiko viya lañjaṃ datvāpi sīlasamādānādīsu nivesenti.Sippaṃ sikkhāpentīti attano ovāde ṭhitabhāvaṃ ñatvā vaṃsānugataṃ muddāgaṇanādisippaṃ sikkhāpenti.Patirūpenāti kulasīlarūpādīhi anurūpena.

Dakkhiṇaṃ anuppadassāmī means having made an offering to them, I will continually give alms starting from the third day. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Pāpā nivārentī means having stated the immediate and future dangers of actions such as killing living beings, they prevent him, saying, "Father, do not do such a thing," and they also censure him if he has done it. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Kalyāṇe nivesentī means like Anāthapiṇḍika, they establish him in the undertaking of precepts, etc., even by giving a bribe. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Sippaṃ sikkhāpentī means knowing that he stands in their advice, they teach him a family craft such as accounting. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Patirūpenā means with one who is suitable in family, virtue, looks, etc.

Samaye dāyajjaṃ niyyādentīti samaye dhanaṃ denti. Tattha niccasamayo kālasamayoti dve samayā.Niccasamayedenti nāma ‘‘uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya imaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ gaṇha, ayaṃ te paribbayo hotu, iminā kusalaṃ karohī’’ti denti.Kālasamayedenti nāma sikhāṭhapanaāvāhavivāhādisamaye denti. Apica pacchime kāle maraṇamañce nipannassa ‘‘iminā kusalaṃ karohī’’ti dentāpi samaye denti nāma.Paṭicchannā hotīti yaṃ puratthimadisato bhayaṃ āgaccheyya, yathā taṃ nāgacchati, evaṃ pihitā hoti. Sace hi puttā vippaṭipannā, assu, mātāpitaro daharakālato paṭṭhāya jagganādīhi sammā paṭipannā, ete dārakā, mātāpitūnaṃ appatirūpāti etaṃ bhayaṃ āgaccheyya. Puttā sammā paṭipannā, mātāpitaro vippaṭipannā, mātāpitaro puttānaṃ nānurūpāti etaṃ bhayaṃ āgaccheyya. Ubhosu vippaṭipannesu duvidhampi taṃ bhayaṃ hoti. Sammā paṭipannesu sabbaṃ na hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā’’ti.

Samaye dāyajjaṃ niyyādentī means they give wealth at the appropriate time. [END_OF_SENTENCE] There are two times: a regular time and a time of occasion. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Niccasamaye denti nāma they give at the regular time, saying, “Get up and take this, may this be your expense, may you do meritorious deeds with this.” Kālasamaye denti nāma they give at a time of occasion, at the time of cutting the hair knot, marriage, etc. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Moreover, they also give at the appropriate time when lying on the deathbed in old age, saying, “Do meritorious deeds with this.” Paṭicchannā hotī means whatever fear might come from the eastern direction, it is warded off so that it does not come. [END_OF_SENTENCE] For if the sons are opposed, there would be the fear that "having been properly cared for by their parents from a young age with cherishing etc., these children are unworthy of their parents." If the sons are properly engaged, there would be the fear that the parents are opposed, that "the parents are unworthy of their sons." When both are opposed, there is that double fear. [END_OF_SENTENCE] When properly engaged, none of that exists. [END_OF_SENTENCE] Therefore it was said - "paṭicchannā hoti khemā appaṭibhayā".

Evañca pana vatvā bhagavā siṅgālakaṃ etadavoca – ‘‘na kho te, gahapatiputta, pitā lokasammataṃ puratthimaṃ disaṃ namassāpeti. Mātāpitaro pana puratthimadisāsadise katvā namassāpeti. Ayañhi te pitarā puratthimā disā akkhātā, no aññā’’ti.

Having said this, the Blessed One said this to Siṅgālaka: “It is not that your father causes you to venerate the east direction that is recognized by the world. [END_OF_SENTENCE] But he causes you to venerate your parents, having made them like the east direction. [END_OF_SENTENCE] For this is the east direction explained by your father, not another.”

268.Uṭṭhānenāti āsanā uṭṭhānena. Antevāsikena hi ācariyaṃ dūratova āgacchantaṃ disvā āsanā vuṭṭhāya paccuggamanaṃ katvā hatthato bhaṇḍakaṃ gahetvā āsanaṃ paññapetvā nisīdāpetvā bījanapādadhovanapādamakkhanāni kātabbāni. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘uṭṭhānenā’’ti.Upaṭṭhānenāti divasassa tikkhattuṃ upaṭṭhānagamanena. Sippuggahaṇakāle pana avassakameva gantabbaṃ hoti.Sussūsāyāti saddahitvā savanena. Asaddahitvā suṇanto hi visesaṃ nādhigacchati.Pāricariyāyāti avasesakhuddakapāricariyāya. Antevāsikena hi ācariyassa pātova vuṭṭhāya mukhodakadantakaṭṭhaṃ datvā bhattakiccakālepi pānīyaṃ gahetvā paccupaṭṭhānādīni katvā vanditvā gantabbaṃ. Kiliṭṭhavatthādīni dhovitabbāni, sāyaṃ nahānodakaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Aphāsukāle upaṭṭhātabbaṃ. Pabbajitenapi sabbaṃ antevāsikavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Idaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘pāricariyāyā’’ti.Sakkaccaṃ sippapaṭiggahaṇenāti sakkaccaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ nāma thokaṃ gahetvā bahuvāre sajjhāyakaraṇaṃ, ekapadampi visuddhameva gahetabbaṃ.

268. Uṭṭhānenāti: By rising from one's seat. When a pupil sees his teacher coming from afar, he should rise from his seat, go to meet him, take the bowl and robe from his hands, prepare a seat, invite him to sit, and perform the services of fanning, washing the feet, and massaging the feet. With reference to this, it is said, "by rising." Upaṭṭhānenāti: By attending upon him three times a day. However, when learning a craft, one must go necessarily. Sussūsāyāti: By listening with faith. For one who listens without faith does not attain distinction. Pāricariyāyāti: By remaining minor services. A pupil should rise early and give the teacher water for washing the face and a tooth stick. At mealtime, he should bring water and attend to him, then take his leave after paying homage. Soiled robes and such should be washed, and water for bathing should be provided in the evening. When he is ill, one should attend to him. Even a monk should perform all the duties of a pupil. With reference to this, it is said, "by personal service." Sakkaccaṃ sippapaṭiggahaṇenāti: "Receiving the craft respectfully" means taking a little at a time and reviewing it many times; even a single word should be taken purely.

Suvinītaṃ vinentīti ‘‘evaṃ te nisīditabbaṃ, evaṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, evaṃ khāditabbaṃ, evaṃ bhuñjitabbaṃ, pāpamittā vajjetabbā, kalyāṇamittā sevitabbā’’ti evaṃ ācāraṃ sikkhāpenti vinenti.Suggahitaṃ gāhāpentīti yathā suggahitaṃ gaṇhāti, evaṃ atthañca byañjanañca sodhetvā payogaṃ dassetvā gaṇhāpenti.Mittāmaccesu paṭiyādentīti ‘‘ayaṃ amhākaṃ antevāsiko byatto bahussuto mayā samasamo, etaṃ sallakkheyyāthā’’ti evaṃ guṇaṃ kathetvā mittāmaccesu patiṭṭhapenti.

Suvinītaṃ vinentīti: "Training him when well-disciplined" means training and disciplining him by teaching good conduct, saying, "You should sit like this, stand like this, eat like this, consume like this, avoid bad friends, cultivate good friends." Suggahitaṃ gāhāpentīti: "Causing him to grasp what is well-grasped" means causing him to grasp the meaning and the letter purely, showing the application. Mittāmaccesu paṭiyādentīti: "Commending him to his friends and colleagues" means establishing him among his friends and colleagues by praising his qualities, saying, "This is our pupil, learned and well-versed, equal to me; take note of him."

Disāsu parittāṇaṃ karontīti sippasikkhāpanenevassa sabbadisāsu rakkhaṃ karonti. Uggahitasippo hi yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ gantvā sippaṃ dasseti, tattha tatthassa lābhasakkāro uppajjati. So ācariyena kato nāma hoti, guṇaṃ kathentopissa mahājano ācariyapāde dhovitvā vasitaantevāsiko vata ayanti paṭhamaṃ ācariyasseva guṇaṃ kathenti, brahmalokappamāṇopissa lābho uppajjamāno ācariyasantakova hoti. Apica yaṃ vijjaṃ parijappitvā gacchantaṃ aṭaviyaṃ corā na passanti, amanussā vā dīghajātiādayo vā na viheṭhenti, taṃ sikkhāpentāpi disāsu parittāṇaṃ karonti. Yaṃ vā so disaṃ gato hoti, tato kaṅkhaṃ uppādetvā attano santikaṃ āgatamanusse ‘‘etissaṃ disāyaṃ amhākaṃ antevāsiko vasati, tassa ca mayhañca imasmiṃ sippe nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, gacchatha tameva pucchathā’’ti evaṃ antevāsikaṃ paggaṇhantāpi tassa tattha lābhasakkāruppattiyā parittāṇaṃ karonti nāma, patiṭṭhaṃ karontīti attho. Sesamettha purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Disāsu parittāṇaṃ karontīti: By teaching him the craft, he protects him in all directions. For when one who has learned a craft goes to any direction and demonstrates his skill, he gains profit and honor there. That is said to be done by the teacher. Even when they are praising his virtues, the great crowd, after washing the teacher's feet, say, "Indeed, this is a resident pupil," and first praise the teacher's virtues. Even if profit arises as vast as the Brahma world, it belongs to the teacher. Moreover, by teaching the knowledge by which thieves do not see one going through the forest, or non-human beings or long-lived beings do not harm him, he protects him in all directions. Or, when he has gone to a certain direction, if people come to him with doubts and he says to them, "Our pupil lives in that direction, and there is no difference between his and my skill in this craft; go and ask him," by thus supporting the pupil, he protects him by the arising of profit and honor for him there; that is, he establishes him. The rest should be connected here in the same way as before.

269.Tatiyadisāvāresammānanāyāti devamāte tissamāteti evaṃ sambhāvitakathākathanena.Anavamānanāyāti yathā dāsakammakarādayo pothetvā viheṭhetvā kathenti, evaṃ hīḷetvā vimānetvā akathanena.Anaticariyāyāti taṃ atikkamitvā bahi aññāya itthiyā saddhiṃ paricaranto taṃ aticarati nāma, tathā akaraṇena.Issariyavossaggenāti itthiyo hi mahālatāsadisampi ābharaṇaṃ labhitvā bhattaṃ vicāretuṃ alabhamānā kujjhanti, kaṭacchuṃ hatthe ṭhapetvā tava ruciyā karohīti bhattagehe vissaṭṭhe sabbaṃ issariyaṃ vissaṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ karaṇenāti attho.Alaṅkārānuppadānenāti attano vibhavānurūpena alaṅkāradānena.Susaṃvihitakammantāti yāgubhattapacanakālādīni anatikkamitvā tassa tassa sādhukaṃ karaṇena suṭṭhu saṃvihitakammantā.Saṅgahitaparijanāti sammānanādīhi ceva paheṇakapesanādīhi ca saṅgahitaparijanā. Idha parijano nāma sāmikassa ceva attano ca ñātijano.Anaticārinīti sāmikaṃ muñcitvā aññaṃ manasāpi na pattheti.Sambhatanti kasivāṇijjādīni katvā ābhatadhanaṃ.Dakkhāca hotīti yāgubhattasampādanādīsu chekā nipuṇā hoti.Analasāti nikkosajjā. Yathā aññā kusītā nisinnaṭṭhāne nisinnāva honti ṭhitaṭṭhāne ṭhitāva, evaṃ ahutvā vipphāritena cittena sabbakiccāni nipphādeti. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

269. In the third direction, sammānanāyāti: By speaking respectfully, saying, "Devamātā, Tissamātā." Anavamānanāyāti: By not speaking scornfully or slightingly, as servants and laborers do when they beat and abuse. Anaticariyāyāti: By not transgressing against her, that is, by not consorting with another woman outside of her. Issariyavossaggenāti: For when women obtain even ornaments like a great creeper, they get angry if they cannot get rice to their liking. When all authority is relinquished in the kitchen, placing the ladle in her hand, saying, "Do it according to your taste," then all authority is relinquished. Alaṅkārānuppadānenāti: By giving ornaments according to one's means. Susaṃvihitakammantāti: By properly managing the work, not neglecting the time for cooking rice-gruel and meals, etc. Saṅgahitaparijanāti: By treating the attendants with respect and sending gifts, etc. Here, "attendants" means the relatives of both the husband and herself. Anaticārinīti: She does not desire another even in her mind, forsaking her husband. Sambhatanti: Wealth accumulated by doing agriculture, trade, etc. Dakkhā ca hotīti: She is clever and skilled in preparing rice-gruel and meals, etc. Analasāti: Not lazy. Unlike other lazy women who remain sitting where they sit or standing where they stand, she accomplishes all tasks with a vibrant mind. The rest here should also be connected in the same way as before.

270.Catutthadisāvāreavisaṃvādanatāyāti yassa yassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ taṃ avisaṃvādetvā idampi amhākaṃ gehe atthi, idampi atthi, gahetvā gacchāhīti evaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dānena.Aparapajā cassa paṭipūjentīti sahāyassa puttadhītaro pajā nāma, tesaṃ pana puttadhītaro ca nattupanattakā ca aparapajā nāma. Te paṭipūjenti keḷāyanti mamāyanti maṅgalakālādīsu tesaṃ maṅgalādīni karonti. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

270. In the fourth direction, avisaṃvādanatāyāti: By not deceiving anyone whose name she takes, saying, "This and that are in our house, take them and go," and giving accordingly. Aparapajā cassa paṭipūjentīti: The sons and daughters of a friend are called offspring (pajā), but their sons and daughters and grandchildren and great-grandchildren are called remote offspring (aparapajā). She honors, caresses, cherishes them, and performs auspicious rites for them at times of celebrations, etc. The rest here should also be understood in the same way.

271.Yathābalaṃ kammantasaṃvidhānenāti daharehi kātabbaṃ mahallakehi, mahallakehi vā kātabbaṃ daharehi, itthīhi kātabbaṃ purisehi, purisehi vā kātabbaṃ itthīhi akāretvā tassa tassa balānurūpeneva kammantasaṃvidhānena.Bhattavetanānuppadānenāti ayaṃ khuddakaputto, ayaṃ ekavihārīti tassa tassa anurūpaṃ sallakkhetvā bhattadānena ceva paribbayadānena ca.Gilānupaṭṭhānenāti aphāsukakāle kammaṃ akāretvā sappāyabhesajjādīni datvā paṭijagganena.Acchariyānaṃ rasānaṃ saṃvibhāgenāti acchariye madhurarase labhitvā sayameva akhāditvā tesampi tato saṃvibhāgakaraṇena.Samaye vossaggenāti niccasamaye ca kālasamaye ca vossajjanena.Niccasamayevossajjanaṃ nāma sakaladivasaṃ kammaṃ karontā kilamanti. Tasmā yathā na kilamanti, evaṃ velaṃ ñatvā vissajjanaṃ.Kālasamayevossaggo nāma chaṇanakkhattakīḷādīsu alaṅkārabhaṇḍakhādanīyabhojanīyādīni datvā vissajjanaṃ.Dinnādāyinoti corikāya kiñci agahetvā sāmikehi dinnasseva ādāyino.Sukatakammakarāti ‘‘kiṃ etassa kammena katena, na mayaṃ kiñci labhāmā’’ti anujjhāyitvā tuṭṭhahadayā yathā taṃ kammaṃ sukataṃ hoti, evaṃ kārakā.Kittivaṇṇaharāti parisamajjhe kathāya sampattāya ‘‘ko amhākaṃ sāmikehi sadiso atthi, mayaṃ attano dāsabhāvampi na jānāma, tesaṃ sāmikabhāvampi na jānāma, evaṃ no anukampantī’’ti guṇakathāhārakā. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

271. Yathābalaṃ kammantasaṃvidhānenāti: By arranging work according to the strength of each, without causing the young to do what should be done by the old, or the old by the young, or women by men, or men by women. Bhattavetanānuppadānenāti: By giving food and wages, considering what is appropriate for each, such as "this is a young son," "this is a solitary monk." Gilānupaṭṭhānenāti: By not making them work when they are ill and by attending to them by giving suitable medicines, etc. Acchariyānaṃ rasānaṃ saṃvibhāgenāti: By sharing with them the delicious flavors that are obtained, without eating them oneself. Samaye vossaggenāti: By granting leave at the proper time, both regularly and occasionally. Niccasamaye vossajjanaṃ nāma: "Granting leave at the regular time" means that they get tired working all day, so knowing the time when they will get tired, granting them leave accordingly. Kālasamaye vossaggo nāma: "Granting leave at the occasional time" means giving ornaments, goods, edibles, and food at festivals, celebrations, and games. Dinnādāyinoti: Taking only what is given by the masters, without taking anything by theft. Sukatakammakarāti: They do not grumble, thinking, "What do we gain by doing this work?" but with joyful hearts, they work so that the work is well done. Kittivaṇṇaharāti: When a discussion arises in an assembly, they praise their virtues, saying, "Who is like our masters? We do not even know that we are slaves, nor do we know that they are masters; they are so compassionate to us." The rest here should also be connected in the same way.

272.Mettena kāyakammenātiādīsu mettacittaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā katāni kāyakammādīni mettāni nāma vuccanti. Tattha bhikkhū nimantessāmīti vihāragamanaṃ, dhamakaraṇaṃ gahetvā udakaparissāvanaṃ, piṭṭhiparikammapādaparikammādikaraṇañca mettaṃkāyakammaṃnāma. Bhikkhū piṇḍāya paviṭṭhe disvā ‘‘sakkaccaṃ yāguṃ detha, bhattaṃ dethā’’tiādivacanañceva, sādhukāraṃ datvā dhammasavanañca sakkaccaṃ paṭisanthārakaraṇādīni ca mettaṃvacīkammaṃnāma. ‘‘Amhākaṃ kulūpakattherā averā hontu abyāpajjā’’ti evaṃ cintanaṃ mettaṃmanokammaṃnāma.Anāvaṭadvāratāyāti apihitadvāratāya. Tattha sabbadvārāni vivaritvāpi sīlavantānaṃ adāyako akārako pihitadvāroyeva. Sabbadvārāni pana pidahitvāpi tesaṃ dāyako kārako vivaṭadvāroyeva. Iti sīlavantesu gehadvāraṃ āgatesu santaṃyeva natthīti avatvā dātabbaṃ. Evaṃ anāvaṭadvāratā nāma hoti.

272. In mettena kāyakammenāti, deeds of body, etc., done with loving-kindness present are called loving deeds. Here, going to the monastery thinking, "I will invite the monks," taking the water filter, attending to their backs and feet, etc., are called loving kāyakammaṃ, deed of body. Seeing the monks entering for alms, saying, "Respectfully give rice-gruel, give food," giving approval, listening to the Dhamma, and respectfully offering hospitality, etc., are called loving vacīkammaṃ, deed of speech. Thinking, "May our venerable preceptors be without enmity and free from affliction," is called loving manokammaṃ, deed of mind. Anāvaṭadvāratāyāti: By not closing the door. For even with all the doors open, one who does not give to the virtuous is as if the door is closed. But even with all the doors closed, one who gives to them is as if the door is open. Thus, when virtuous ones come to the house, one should give what is available without saying that there is nothing. This is called not having a closed door.

Āmisānuppadānenāti purebhattaṃ paribhuñjitabbakaṃ āmisaṃ nāma, tasmā sīlavantānaṃ yāgubhattasampadānenāti attho.Kalyāṇena manasā anukampantīti ‘‘sabbe sattā sukhitā hontu averā arogā abyāpajjā’’ti evaṃ hitapharaṇena. Apica upaṭṭhākānaṃ gehaṃ aññe sīlavante sabrahmacārī gahetvā pavisantāpi kalyāṇena cetasā anukampanti nāma.Sutaṃ pariyodāpentīti yaṃ tesaṃ pakatiyā sutaṃ atthi, tassa atthaṃ kathetvā kaṅkhaṃ vinodenti, tathattāya vā paṭipajjāpenti. Sesamidhāpi purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.

Āmisānuppadānenāti: Material things that should be enjoyed before meals are called āmisa; therefore, it means providing rice-gruel and food for the virtuous. Kalyāṇena manasā anukampantīti: With a kind mind, being compassionate, wishing, "May all beings be happy, free from enmity, healthy, and free from affliction," with such pervasive welfare. Moreover, even when other virtuous co-religionists enter the house of the supporters, they are compassionate with a kind heart. Sutaṃ pariyodāpentīti: They clarify the meaning of what they have naturally heard, dispel doubts, or encourage them to practice accordingly. The rest here should also be connected in the same way.

273.Alamattoti puttadārabharaṇaṃ katvā agāraṃ ajjhāvasanasamattho.Paṇḍitoti disānamassanaṭṭhāne paṇḍito hutvā.Saṇhoti sukhumatthadassanena saṇhavācābhaṇanena vā saṇho hutvā.Paṭibhānavāti disānamassanaṭṭhāne paṭibhānavā hutvānivātavuttīti nīcavutti.Atthaddhoti thambharahito.Uṭṭhānakoti uṭṭhānavīriyasampanno.Analasoti nikkosajjo.Acchinnavuttīti nirantarakaraṇavasena akhaṇḍavutti.Medhāvīti ṭhānuppattiyā paññāya samannāgato.

273. Alamattoti: Capable of maintaining the household, supporting his children and wife. Paṇḍitoti: Being wise in the matter of honoring the directions. Saṇhoti: Being gentle by showing subtle meanings or by speaking gentle words. Paṭibhānavāti: Being quick-witted in the matter of honoring the directions. Nivātavuttīti: Of humble conduct. Atthaddhoti: Without arrogance. Uṭṭhānakoti: Endowed with energetic effort. Analasoti: Not lazy. Acchinnavuttīti: Of unbroken conduct, by acting continuously. Medhāvīti: Endowed with wisdom regarding what is appropriate.

Saṅgāhakoti catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi saṅgahakaro.Mittakaroti mittagavesano.Vadaññūti pubbakārinā, vuttavacanaṃ jānāti. Sahāyakassa gharaṃ gatakāle ‘‘mayhaṃ sahāyakassa veṭhanaṃ detha, sāṭakaṃ detha, manussānaṃ bhattavetanaṃ dethā’’ti vuttavacanamanussaranto tassa attano gehaṃ āgatassa tattakaṃ vā tato atirekaṃ vā paṭikattāti attho. Apica sahāyakassa gharaṃ gantvā imaṃ nāma gaṇhissāmīti āgataṃ sahāyakaṃ lajjāya gaṇhituṃ asakkontaṃ anicchāritampi tassa vācaṃ ñatvā yena atthena so āgato, taṃ nipphādento vadaññū nāma. Yena yena vā pana sahāyakassa ūnaṃ hoti, oloketvā taṃ taṃ dentopi vadaññūyeva.Netāti taṃ taṃ atthaṃ dassento paññāya netā. Vividhāni kāraṇāni dassento netītivinetā.Punappunaṃ netītianunetā.

Saṅgāhakoti: One who helps with the four bases of sympathy. Mittakaroti: One who seeks friends. Vadaññūti: Knows what has been said by one who has done a favor before. When he goes to a friend's house, remembering what he has said, "Give my friend a wrapper, give a cloth, give food and wages to the people," when that friend comes to his house, he should repay him with that much or more. Moreover, when a friend comes to his house, knowing that he is unable to take what he has come to take out of shame, even if he does not express it, he fulfills the purpose for which he has come, such a one is called vadaññū, appreciative. Or, he is also vadaññū who, seeing what a friend lacks, gives it to him. Netāti: A leader by wisdom, showing that particular meaning. One who shows various reasons is called netīti vinetā, a guide. One who leads again and again is called anunetā, a follower.

Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ puggale.Rathassāṇīva yāyatoti yathā āṇiyā satiyeva ratho yāti, asati na yāti, evaṃ imesu saṅgahesu satiyeva loko vattati, asati na vattati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ete kho saṅgahā loke, rathassāṇīva yāyato’’ti.

Tattha tatthāti: In each and every person. Rathassāṇīva yāyatoti: Just as a chariot goes only when there is an axle, and does not go when there is none, so too, the world functions only when these bases of sympathy are present, and does not function when they are absent. Therefore, it was said, "These bases of sympathy are to the world like the axle of a chariot."

Na mātā puttakāraṇāti yadi mātā ete saṅgahe puttassa na kareyya, puttakāraṇā mānaṃ vā pūjaṃ vā na labheyya.

Na mātā puttakāraṇāti: If a mother does not do these acts of sympathy for her son, she would not receive honor or respect because of her son.

Saṅgahā eteti upayogavacane paccattaṃ. ‘‘Saṅgahe ete’’ti vā pāṭho.Sammapekkhantīti sammā pekkhanti.Pāsaṃsā ca bhavantīti pasaṃsanīyā ca bhavanti.

Saṅgahā eteti: In the sense of usefulness, individually. Alternatively, "Saṅgahe ete" is also a reading. Sammapekkhantīti: They look upon rightly. Pāsaṃsā ca bhavantīti: And they become praiseworthy.

274.Iti bhagavā yā disā sandhāya te gahapatiputta pitā āha ‘‘disā namasseyyāsī’’ti, imā tā cha disā. Yadi tvaṃ pitu vacanaṃ karosi, imā disā namassāti dassento siṅgālassa pucchāya ṭhatvā desanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. Siṅgālakopi saraṇesu patiṭṭhāya cattālīsakoṭidhanaṃ buddhasāsane vikiritvā puññakammaṃ katvā saggaparāyaṇo ahosi. Imasmiñca pana sutte yaṃ gihīhi kattabbaṃ kammaṃ nāma, taṃ akathitaṃ natthi,gihivinayo nāmāyaṃ suttanto.Tasmā imaṃ sutvā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānassa vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā, no parihānīti.

274. Thus, the Blessed One, showing which directions the householder's son's father told him, "You should worship the directions," saying, "These are the six directions. If you follow your father's advice, worship these directions," having brought the teaching to its culmination in response to Siṅgāla's question, he entered Rājagaha for alms. Siṅgāla too, having become established in the refuges, spent forty crores of wealth in the Buddha's dispensation, performed meritorious deeds, and went to heaven. Moreover, in this sutta, there is nothing unsaid regarding the duties that should be done by householders; this sutta is called the Discipline for Householders. Therefore, for one who, having heard this, practices as instructed, only growth is to be expected, not decline.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

The Commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya, the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī

9. Āṭānāṭiyasuttavaṇṇanā

9. A Description of the Āṭānāṭiya Sutta

Paṭhamabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā
Description of the First Recitation Section

275.Evaṃme sutanti āṭānāṭiyasuttaṃ. Tatrāyamapubbapadavaṇṇanā –catuddisaṃ rakkhaṃ ṭhapetvāti asurasenāya nivāraṇatthaṃ sakkassa devānamindassa catūsu disāsu ārakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā.Gumbaṃ ṭhapetvāti balagumbaṃ ṭhapetvā.Ovaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvāti catūsu disāsu ārakkhake ṭhapetvā. Evaṃ sakkassa devānamindassa ārakkhaṃ susaṃvihitaṃ katvā āṭānāṭanagare nisinnā satta buddhe ārabbha imaṃ parittaṃ bandhitvā ‘‘ye satthu dhammaāṇaṃ amhākañca rājaāṇaṃ na suṇanti, tesaṃ idañcidañca karissāmā’’ti sāvanaṃ katvā attanopi catūsu disāsu mahatiyā ca yakkhasenāyātiādīhi catūhi senāhi ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahitvā abhikkantāya rattiyā…pe… ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu.

275. Evaṃ me sutaṃ means the Āṭānāṭiya Sutta. Herein is the word-for-word commentary of the first phrase: Catuddisaṃ rakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā means having established protection in the four directions for Sakka, the king of the gods, to prevent the asura army. Gumbaṃ ṭhapetvā means having established a troop of forces. Ovaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā means having stationed guards in the four directions. Having thus made the protection of Sakka, the king of the gods, very well-arranged, they, residing in the city of Āṭānāṭa, having composed this paritta (protective verses) concerning the seven Buddhas, and having made the announcement, "Those who do not heed the command of the Teacher (Buddha) and our royal command, we will do this and that to them," and having also arranged protection for themselves in the four directions with four great armies of yakkhas, beginning with the great army, as the night was far advanced...pe… sat down to one side.

Abhikkantāya rattiyāti ettha abhikkantasaddo khayasundarābhirūpaabbhanumodanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘abhikkantā, bhante ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha’’nti (a. ni. 8.20) evamādīsu khaye dissati. ‘‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro paṇītataro cā’’ti (a. ni. 4.100) evamādīsu sundare.

Abhikkantāya rattiyā: Here, the word abhikkanta is seen in the senses of decay, beautiful, lovely, approval, etc. There, in "Abhikkantā, bhante ratti, nikkhanto paṭhamo yāmo, ciranisinno bhikkhusaṅgho uddisatu, bhante, bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ pātimokkha" (A. Ni. 8.20), it is seen in the sense of decay. In "Ayaṃ imesaṃ catunnaṃ puggalānaṃ abhikkantataro paṇītataro cā" (A. Ni. 4.100), it is seen in the sense of beautiful.

‘‘Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;

"Ko me vandati pādāni, iddhiyā yasasā jalaṃ;
Abhikkantena vaṇṇena, sabbā obhāsayaṃ disā" (Vi. Va. 857);

Evamādīsu abhirūpe. ‘‘Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamāti (pārā. 15) evamādīsu abbhanumodane. Idha pana khaye. Tena abhikkantāya rattiyā, parikkhīṇāya rattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti.

In these examples, it is seen in the sense of lovely. In "Abhikkantaṃ, bho gotamāti (Pārā. 15), it is seen in the sense of approval. But here, it means decay. Therefore, abhikkantāya rattiyā means the night having waned, having passed.

Abhikkantavaṇṇāti idha abhikkantasaddo abhirūpe. Vaṇṇasaddo pana chavithutikulavaggakāraṇasaṇṭhānapamāṇarūpāyatanādīsu dissati. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.399) evamādīsu chaviyaṃ. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.77) evamādīsu thutiyaṃ. ‘‘Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.266) evamādīsu kulavagge. ‘‘Atha kena nu vaṇṇena gandhathenoti vuccatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.234) kāraṇe. ‘‘Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.138) evamādīsu saṇṭhāne. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’ti (pārā. 602) evamādīsu pamāṇe. ‘‘Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā’’ti evamādīsu rūpāyatane. So idha chaviyaṃ daṭṭhabbo. Tena ‘‘abhikkantavaṇṇā abhirūpacchavī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti.

Abhikkantavaṇṇā: Here, the word abhikkanta means lovely. The word vaṇṇa, however, is seen in the senses of complexion, praise, lineage, class, cause, configuration, form, size, and the sense-sphere of form, etc. There, in "Suvaṇṇavaṇṇosi bhagavā" (M. Ni. 2.399), it is in the sense of complexion. In "Kadā saññūḷhā pana te, gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā" (M. Ni. 2.77), it is in the sense of praise. In "Cattārome, bho gotama, vaṇṇā" (Dī. Ni. 1.266), it is in the sense of lineage. In "Atha kena nu vaṇṇena gandhathenoti vuccatī" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.234), it is in the sense of cause. In "Mahantaṃ hatthirājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.138), it is in the sense of configuration. In "Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā" (Pārā. 602), it is in the sense of size. In "Vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā," it is in the sense of the sense-sphere of form. Here, it should be understood as complexion. Therefore, "abhikkantavaṇṇā" means "one with a lovely complexion".

Kevalakappanti ettha kevalasaddo anavasesayebhuyyaabyāmissānatirekadaḷhatthavisaṃyogādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariya’’nti (pārā. 1) evamādīsu anavasesatā attho. ‘‘Kevalakappā ca aṅgamāgadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ ādāya abhikkamitukāmā hontī’’ti (mahāva. 43) evamādīsu yebhuyyatā. ‘‘Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti (mahāva. 1) evamādīsu abyāmissatā. ‘‘Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā’’ti (a. ni. 6.55) evamādīsu anatirekatā. ‘‘Āyasmato, bhante, anuruddhassa bāhiko nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito’’ti (a. ni. 4.243) evamādīsu daḷhatthatā. ‘‘Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 10.12) evamādīsu visaṃyogo. Idha panassa anavasesattho adhippeto.

Kevalakappaṃ: Here, the word kevala has various meanings such as complete, abundant, unmixed, non-excessive, firm, and detachment, etc. Thus, for example, in "kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ parisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ" (Pārā. 1), it has the meaning of completeness. In "Kevalakappā ca aṅgamāgadhā pahūtaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ ādāya abhikkamitukāmā hontī" (Mahāva. 43), it has the meaning of abundance. In "Kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī" (Mahāva. 1), it has the meaning of unmixed. In "Kevalaṃ saddhāmattakaṃ nūna ayamāyasmā" (A. Ni. 6.55), it has the meaning of non-excessive. In "Āyasmato, bhante, anuruddhassa bāhiko nāma saddhivihāriko kevalakappaṃ saṅghabhedāya ṭhito" (A. Ni. 4.243), it has the meaning of firmness. In "Kevalī vusitavā uttamapurisoti vuccatī" (A. Ni. 10.12), it has the meaning of detachment. Here, however, the meaning of completeness is intended.

Kappasaddo panāyaṃ abhisaddahanavohārakālapaññattichedanavikappalesasamantabhāvādianekattho. Tathā hissa ‘‘okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa. Yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387) evamādīsu abhisaddahanamattho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 250) evamādīsu vohāro. ‘‘Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387) evamādīsu kālo. ‘‘Iccāyasmā kappo’’ti (su. ni. 1098) evamādīsu paññatti. ‘‘Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū’’ti (vi. va. 1094) evamādīsu chedanaṃ. ‘‘Kappati dvaṅgulakappo’’ti (cūḷava. 446) evamādīsu vikappo, atthi kappo nipajjitu’’nti (a. ni. 8.80) evamādīsu leso. ‘‘Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.94) evamādīsu samantabhāvo. Idha pana samantabhāvo attho adhippeto. Tasmā ‘‘kevalakappaṃ gijjhakūṭa’’nti ettha anavasesaṃ samantato gijjhakūṭanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.

The word kappa has various meanings such as conviction, usage, time, designation, cutting, option, trace, and all-encompassing state. Thus, for example, in "okappaniyametaṃ bhoto gotamassa. Yathā taṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassā" (M. Ni. 1.387), it has the meaning of conviction. In "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjitu" (Cūḷava. 250), it has the meaning of usage. In "Yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī" (M. Ni. 1.387), it has the meaning of time. In "Iccāyasmā kappo" (Su. Ni. 1098), it is designation. In "Alaṅkato kappitakesamassū" (Vi. Va. 1094), it is cutting. In "Kappati dvaṅgulakappo" (Cūḷava. 446), it is option; atthi kappo nipajjitu (A. Ni. 8.80), it is trace. In "Kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā" (Saṃ. Ni. 1.94), it has the meaning of all-encompassing state. Here, however, the meaning of all-encompassing state is intended. Therefore, "kevalakappaṃ gijjhakūṭa" means the entirety of Gijjhakūṭa, all around.

Obhāsetvāti vatthamālālaṅkārasarīrasamuṭṭhitāya ābhāya pharitvā, candimā viya sūriyo viya ca ekobhāsaṃ ekapajjotaṃ karitvāti attho.Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsūti devatānaṃ dasabalassa santike nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ nāma na bahu, imasmiṃ pana sutte parittagāravavasena nisīdiṃsu.

Obhāsetvā means having pervaded with light arising from clothes, garlands, ornaments, and the body, making it a single radiance, a single light, like the moon and the sun. Ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsū means the place where the deities sat near the Ten-Powered One was not large, but in this sutta, they sat down out of respect for the protective verses (paritta).

276.Vessavaṇoti kiñcāpi cattāro mahārājāno āgatā, vessavaṇo pana dasabalassa vissāsiko kathāpavattane byatto susikkhito, tasmā vessavaṇo mahārājā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca.Uḷārāti mahesakkhānubhāvasampannā.Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyāti pāṇātipāte diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaṃ ādīnavaṃ dassetvā tato veramaṇiyā dhammaṃ deseti. Sesesupi eseva nayo.Tattha santi uḷārā yakkhā nivāsinoti tesu senāsanesu santi uḷārā yakkhā nibaddhavāsino.Āṭānāṭiyanti āṭānāṭanagare baddhattā evaṃnāmaṃ. Kiṃ pana bhagavato apaccakkhadhammo nāma atthīti, natthi. Atha kasmā vessavaṇo ‘‘uggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā’’tiādimāha? Okāsakaraṇatthaṃ. So hi bhagavantaṃ imaṃ parittaṃ sāvetuṃ okāsaṃ kārento evamāha. Satthu kathite imaṃ parittaṃ garu bhavissatītipi āha.Phāsuvihārāyāti gamanaṭṭhānādīsu catūsu iriyāpathesu sukhavihārāya.

276. Vessavaṇo: Although the four Great Kings had come, Vessavaṇa was trustworthy to the Ten-Powered One, skilled in initiating conversation, well-trained; therefore, Vessavaṇa, the Great King, said this to the Blessed One. Uḷārā means possessing great power and influence. Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiyā: He demonstrates the immediate and future dangers in taking life, and then teaches the Dhamma of abstaining from it. The same method applies to the rest. Tattha santi uḷārā yakkhā nivāsino: In those resting places, there are yakkhas of great power and permanent residence. Āṭānāṭiya: Because they are bound to the city of Āṭānāṭa, it is named thus. But is there any Dhamma unknown to the Blessed One? No, there isn't. Then why did Vessavaṇa say "Uggaṇhātu, bhante, bhagavā," etc.? To ask for permission. He asked thus, seeking permission to recite this paritta to the Blessed One. He also said, "This paritta will be honored when spoken by the Teacher." Phāsuvihārāyā means for comfortable dwelling in the four postures of going, standing, sitting, and lying down.

277.Cakkhumantassāti na vipassīyeva cakkhumā, sattapi buddhā cakkhumanto, tasmā ekekassa buddhassa etāni satta satta nāmāni honti. Sabbepi buddhā cakkhumanto, sabbe sabbabhūtānukampino, sabbe nhātakilesattā nhātakā. Sabbe mārasenāpamaddino, sabbe vusitavanto, sabbe vimuttā, sabbe aṅgato rasmīnaṃ nikkhantattā aṅgīrasā. Na kevalañca buddhānaṃ etāneva satta nāmāni asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni saguṇena mahesinoti vuttaṃ.

277. Cakkhumantassā: Not only Vipassī is one with vision; all seven Buddhas are ones with vision. Therefore, each Buddha has these seven names. All Buddhas are ones with vision, all compassionate to all beings, all who have washed away defilements, the washed ones. All are destroyers of Māra's army, all have lived the holy life, all are liberated, all are Aṅgirasas because rays have issued from their bodies. And not only do Buddhas have these seven names, but they have countless names, great sages with virtues.

Te janāti idha khīṇāsavā janāti adhippetā.Apisuṇāthāti desanāsīsamattametaṃ, amusā apisuṇā apharusā mantabhāṇinoti attho.Mahattāti mahantabhāvaṃ pattā. ‘‘Mahantā’’tipi pāṭho, mahantāti attho.Vītasāradāti nissāradā vigatalomahaṃsā.

Te janā: Here, it refers to people who are arahants. Apisuṇāthā: This is merely an introductory statement of the teaching, meaning not slanderous, not malicious, not harsh, speakers of gentle words. Mahattā: Having attained greatness. "Mahantā" is also a reading, meaning great. Vītasāradā: Free from anxiety, devoid of hair-raising fear.

Hitanti mettāpharaṇena hitaṃ.Yaṃ namassantīti ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ.Mahattanti mahantaṃ. Ayameva vā pāṭho, idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘ye cāpi loke kilesanibbānena nibbutā yathābhūtaṃ vipassisuṃ, vijjādiguṇasampannañca hitaṃ devamanussānaṃ gotamaṃ namassanti, te janā apisuṇā, tesampi namatthū’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana te janā apisuṇāti te buddhā apisuṇāti evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya buddhānaṃyeva vaṇṇo kathito, tasmā paṭhamagāthā sattannaṃ buddhānaṃ vasena vuttā. Dutiyagāthāya ‘‘gotama’’nti desanāmukhamattametaṃ. Ayampi hi sattannaṃyeva vasena vuttāti veditabbā. Ayañhettha attho – loke paṇḍitā devamanussā yaṃ namassanti gotamaṃ, tassa ca tato purimānañca buddhānaṃ namatthūti.

Hitaṃ: Beneficial through the pervading of loving-kindness. Yaṃ namassantī: Here, yaṃ is merely a particle. Mahattaṃ: Great. Or this itself is the reading; this is what is said, "Those who are extinguished in the world by the extinction of defilements, who have seen things as they are, who are endowed with the qualities of knowledge, and who worship Gotama, the benefactor of gods and humans, those people are not slanderous; homage to them too." In the commentary, however, "te janā apisuṇā" means "those Buddhas are not slanderous." Thus, in the first verse, only the praise of the Buddhas is spoken; therefore, the first verse is spoken in reference to the seven Buddhas. In the second verse, "Gotama" is merely an introductory phrase. This too should be understood as spoken in reference to the seven Buddhas. For this is the meaning here: homage to Gotama, whom the wise gods and humans in the world worship, and to the Buddhas before him.

278.Yato uggacchatīti yato ṭhānato udeti.Ādiccoti aditiyā putto, vevacanamattaṃ vā etaṃ sūriyasaddassa. Mahantaṃ maṇḍalaṃ assātimaṇḍalīmahā. Yassa cuggacchamānassāti yamhi uggacchamāne.Saṃvarīpi nirujjhatīti ratti antaradhāyati.Yassa cuggateti yasmiṃ uggate.

278. Yato uggacchatī: From which place it rises. Ādicco: Son of Aditi, or this is simply a synonym for the word sūriya (sun). Maṇḍalīmahā: It has a great orb. Yassa cuggacchamānassā: In which, as it rises. Saṃvarīpi nirujjhatī: Night disappears. Yassa cuggate: In which, when it has risen.

Rahadoti udakarahado.Tatthāti yato uggacchati sūriyo, tasmiṃ ṭhāne.Samuddoti yo so rahadoti vutto, so na añño, atha kho samuddo.Saritodakoti visaṭodako, saritā nānappakārā nadiyo assa udake paviṭṭhāti vāsaritodako. Evaṃ taṃ tattha jānantīti taṃ rahadaṃ tattha evaṃ jānanti. Kinti jānanti? Samuddo saritodakoti evaṃ jānanti.

Rahado: A lake of water. Tatthā: In that place from which the sun rises. Samuddo: That which was called a lake is none other than the ocean. Saritodako: With scattered water, or because various rivers have entered its water, it is called saritodako. Evaṃ taṃ tattha jānantī: They know that lake there as such. How do they know it? They know it as "the ocean with river water."

Itoti sineruto vā tesaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānato vā.Janoti ayaṃ mahājano.Ekanāmāti indanāmena ekanāmā. Sabbesaṃ kira tesaṃ sakkassa devarañño nāmameva nāmamakaṃsu.Asīti dasa eko cāti ekanavutijanā.Indanāmāti indoti evaṃnāmā.Buddhaṃ ādiccabandhunanti kilesaniddāpagamanenāpi buddhaṃ. Ādiccena samānagottatāyapi ādiccabandhunaṃ.Kusalena samekkhasīti anavajjena nipuṇena vā sabbaññutaññāṇena mahājanaṃ olokesi.Amanussāpi taṃ vandantīti amanussāpi taṃ ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇena mahājanaṃ olokesī’’ti vatvā vandanti.Sutaṃ netaṃ abhiṇhasoti etaṃ amhehi abhikkhaṇaṃ sutaṃ.Jinaṃ vandatha gotamaṃ, jinaṃ vandāma gotamanti amhehi puṭṭhā jinaṃ vandāma gotamanti vadanti.

Ito: From Mount Sineru or from the place where they were sitting. Jano: This great multitude. Ekanāmā: Having the same name as Indra. It seems they all made their names the same as the name of Sakka, the king of the gods. Asīti dasa eko cā: Ninety-one people. Indanāmā: Having the name Indra. Buddhaṃ ādiccabandhuna: Buddha also because of having dispelled the sleep of defilements. Also because of having the same lineage as the sun, the kinsman of the sun. Kusalena samekkhasī: You observe the great multitude with faultless, skillful, or omniscient knowledge. Amanussāpi taṃ vandantī: Non-humans also, saying, "You observe the great multitude with omniscient knowledge," worship him. Sutaṃ netaṃ abhiṇhaso: This has been frequently heard by us. Jinaṃ vandatha gotamaṃ, jinaṃ vandāma gotama: When asked by us, they say, "We worship Gotama, the Victor."

279.Yenapetā pavuccantīti petā nāma kālaṅkatā, te yena disābhāgena nīhariyantūti vuccanti.Pisuṇā piṭṭhimaṃsikāti pisuṇāvācā ceva piṭṭhimaṃsaṃ khādantā viya parammukhā garahakā ca. Ete ca yena nīhariyantūti vuccanti, sabbepi hete dakkhiṇadvārena nīharitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa ḍayhantu vā chijjantu vā haññantu vāti evaṃ vuccanti.Ito sā dakkhiṇā disāti yena disābhāgena te petā ca pisuṇādikā ca nīhariyantūti vuccanti, ito sā dakkhiṇā disā.Itoti sineruto vā tesaṃ nisinnaṭṭhānato vā.Kumbhaṇḍānanti te kira devā mahodarā honti, rahassaṅgampi ca nesaṃ kumbho viya mahantaṃ hoti. Tasmā kumbhaṇḍāti vuccanti.

279. Yena petā pavuccantī: Petas are those who have died; they are said to be taken out by that direction. Pisuṇā piṭṭhimaṃsikā: Those with slanderous speech and those who eat the flesh of others, like those who criticize behind their backs. They are said to be taken out by that direction; all of them are taken out through the southern gate, and to the south of the city, they are burned, cut up, or killed. Ito sā dakkhiṇā disā: That direction by which those petas and slanderers are taken out is the southern direction. Ito: From Mount Sineru or from the place where they were sitting. Kumbhaṇḍāna: Those gods are said to have large bellies, and their private parts are also large like a pot (kumbha). Therefore, they are called Kumbhaṇḍas.

280.Yattha coggacchati sūriyoti yasmiṃ disābhāge sūriyo atthaṃ gacchati.

280. Yattha coggacchati sūriyo: In which direction the sun sets.

281.Yenāti yena disābhāgena.Mahānerūti mahāsineru pabbatarājā.Sudassanoti sovaṇṇamayattā sundaradassano. Sinerussa hi pācīnapassaṃ rajatamayaṃ, dakkhiṇapassaṃ maṇimayaṃ, pacchimapassaṃ phalikamayaṃ, uttarapassaṃ sovaṇṇamayaṃ, taṃ manuññadassanaṃ hoti. Tasmā yena disābhāgena sineru sudassanoti ayametthattho.Manussā tattha jāyantīti tattha uttarakurumhi manussā jāyanti.Amamāti vatthābharaṇapānabhojanādīsupi mamattavirahitā.Apariggahāti itthipariggahena apariggahā. Tesaṃ kira ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ bhariyā’’ti mamattaṃ na hoti, mātaraṃ vā bhaginiṃ vā disvā chandarāgo nuppajjati.

281. Yenā: By which direction. Mahānerū: The great Mount Sineru, the king of mountains. Sudassano: Because it is made of gold, it is beautiful to see. For the eastern side of Mount Sineru is made of silver, the southern side is made of jewels, the western side is made of crystal, and the northern side is made of gold; that is pleasing to see. Therefore, the meaning here is, "By which direction is Sineru, the beautiful one?" Manussā tattha jāyantī: Humans are born there in Uttarakuru. Amamā: Without attachment even to clothes, ornaments, drinks, and food. Apariggahā: Without the possessions of women. For they do not have attachment, thinking "This is my wife"; seeing their mother or sister, lust does not arise.

Napi nīyanti naṅgalāti naṅgalānipi tattha ‘‘kasikammaṃ karissāmā’’ti na khettaṃ nīyanti.Akaṭṭhapākimanti akaṭṭhe bhūmibhāge araññe sayameva jātaṃ.Taṇḍulapphalanti taṇḍulāva tassa phalaṃ hoti.

Napi nīyanti naṅgalā: Plows are not taken there to the field, thinking, "We will do farming." Akaṭṭhapākimaṃ: Ripening without being plowed, grown spontaneously in the uncultivated ground, in the forest. Taṇḍulapphalaṃ: Its fruit is like rice grains.

Tuṇḍikīre pacitvānāti ukkhaliyaṃ ākiritvā niddhumaṅgārena agginā pacitvā. Tattha kira jotikapāsāṇā nāma honti. Atha kho te tayo pāsāṇe ṭhapetvā taṃ ukkhaliṃ āropenti. Pāsāṇehi tejo samuṭṭhahitvā taṃ pacati.Tato bhuñjanti bhojananti tato ukkhalito bhojanameva bhuñjanti, añño sūpo vā byañjanaṃ vā na hoti, bhuñjantānaṃ cittānukūloyevassa raso hoti. Te taṃ ṭhānaṃ sampattānaṃ dentiyeva, macchariyacittaṃ nāma na hoti. Buddhapaccekabuddhādayopi mahiddhikā tattha gantvā piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhanti.

Tuṇḍikīre pacitvānā: Having poured it into a pot and cooked it with smokeless embers of fire. There, it seems, there are stones called jotikapāsāṇas. Then, having placed those three stones, they place that pot on them. Heat arises from the stones and cooks it. Tato bhuñjanti bhojanaṃ: Then, they eat only the food from the pot; there is no other soup or curry, and the taste is just as one likes when eating. They give that place to those who arrive; there is no miserly thought. Even great ones with psychic power, such as Buddhas and Paccekabuddhas, go there and receive alms food.

Gāviṃekakhuraṃ katvāti gāviṃ gahetvā ekakhuraṃ vāhanameva katvā. Taṃ abhiruyha vessavaṇassa paricārakā yakkhā.Anuyanti disodisanti tāya tāya disāya caranti.Pasuṃ ekakhuraṃ katvāti ṭhapetvā gāviṃ avasesacatuppadajātikaṃ pasuṃ ekakhuraṃ vāhanameva katvā disodisaṃ anuyanti.

Gāviṃ ekakhuraṃ katvā: Having taken a cow and made a single hoof into a vehicle. Having mounted it, the yakkhhas who are attendants of Vessavaṇa. Anuyanti disodisaṃ: They travel in that direction. Pasuṃ ekakhuraṃ katvā: Having kept the cow, and having made the remaining four-legged animals into a single-hoofed vehicle, they travel in various directions.

Itthiṃ vā vāhanaṃ katvāti yebhuyyena gabbhiniṃ mātugāmaṃ vāhanaṃ karitvā. Tassā piṭṭhiyā nisīditvā caranti. Tassā kira piṭṭhi onamituṃ sahati. Itarā pana itthiyo yāne yojenti.Purisaṃ vāhanaṃ katvāti purise gahetvā yāne yojenti. Gaṇhantā ca sammādiṭṭhike gahetuṃ na sakkonti. Yebhuyyena paccantimamilakkhuvāsike gaṇhanti. Aññataro kirettha jānapado ekassa therassa samīpe nisīditvā niddāyati, thero ‘‘upāsaka ativiya niddāyasī’’ti pucchi. ‘‘Ajja, bhante, sabbarattiṃ vessavaṇadāsehi kilamitomhī’’ti āha.

Itthiṃ vā vāhanaṃ katvā means, for the most part, having a pregnant woman made into a mount. They ride, sitting on her back. It seems her back can bear the weight. Other women, however, are yoked to vehicles. Purisaṃ vāhanaṃ katvā means, seizing men, they yoke them to vehicles. And when seizing them, they cannot seize those of right view. For the most part, they seize inhabitants of border regions, barbarians. It is said that in this connection a certain villager, sitting near an elder, fell asleep, and the elder asked, "Layman, you are sleeping excessively?" He said, "Venerable sir, today I have been toiling all night for the Vessavaṇa's servants."

Kumāriṃ vāhanaṃ katvāti kumāriyo gahetvā ekakhuraṃ vāhanaṃ katvā rathe yojenti.Kumāravāhanepieseva nayo.Pacārā tassa rājinoti tassa rañño paricārikā.Hatthiyānaṃ assayānanti na kevalaṃ goyānādīniyeva, hatthiassayānādīnipi abhiruhitvā vicaranti.Dibbaṃ yānanti aññampi nesaṃ bahuvidhaṃ dibbayānaṃ upaṭṭhitameva hoti, etāni tāva nesaṃ upakappanayānāni. Te pana pāsāde varasayanamhi nipannāpi pīṭhasivikādīsu ca nisinnāpi vicaranti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pāsādā sivikā cevā’’ti.Mahārājassa yasassinoti evaṃ ānubhāvasampannassa yasassino mahārājassa etāni yānāni nibbattanti.

Kumāriṃ vāhanaṃ katvā means, seizing young girls, they yoke them to one-hoofed vehicles, to chariots. Kumāravāhanepi the same method applies to young boys. Pacārā tassa rājino means, attendants of that king. Hatthiyānaṃ assayāna means, not only vehicles drawn by cattle, etc., but they also travel about mounted on elephant vehicles, horse vehicles, etc. Dibbaṃ yāna means, other various divine vehicles of theirs are also always available; these are merely the vehicles they use for convenience. Moreover, they travel about lying down in a fine bed in a palace and also sitting in palanquins and the like. Therefore, it was said, "palaces and palanquins too." Mahārājassa yasassino means, these vehicles arise for the glorious Great King who is endowed with such power.

Tassaca nagarā ahu antalikkhe sumāpitāti tassa rañño ākāse suṭṭhu māpitā ete āṭānāṭādikā nagarā ahesuṃ, nagarāni bhaviṃsūti attho. Ekañhissa nagaraṃ āṭānāṭā nāma āsi, ekaṃ kusināṭā nāma, ekaṃ parakusināṭā nāma, ekaṃ nāṭasūriyā nāma, ekaṃ parakusiṭanāṭā nāma.

Tassa ca nagarā ahu antalikkhe sumāpitā means, for that king, there were cities such as Āṭānāṭa, well-measured in the sky; that is, there were cities. For one of his cities was named Āṭānāṭa, one was named Kusināṭa, one was named Parakusināṭa, one was named Nāṭasūriya, one was named Parakusiṭanāṭa.

Uttarena kasivantoti tasmiṃ ṭhatvā ujuṃ uttaradisāya kasivanto nāma aññaṃ nagaraṃ.Janoghamaparena cāti etassa aparabhāge janoghaṃ nāma aññaṃ nagaraṃ.Navanavatiyoti aññampi navanavatiyo nāma ekaṃ nagaraṃ. Aparaṃ ambaraambaravatiyo nāma.Āḷakamandāti aparampi āḷakamandā nāma rājadhānī.

Uttarena kasivanto means, standing in that place, directly to the north is another city named Kasivanto. Janoghamaparena cā means, on the far side of that is another city named Janogha. Navanavatiyo means, another city named Navanavatiyo. Another is named Ambaraambaravatiyo. Āḷakamandā means, another capital city named Āḷakamandā.

Tasmākuvero mahārājāti ayaṃ kira anuppanne buddhe kuvero nāma brāhmaṇo hutvā ucchuvappaṃ kāretvā satta yantāni yojesi. Ekissāya yantasālāya uṭṭhitaṃ āyaṃ āgatāgatassa mahājanassa datvā puññaṃ akāsi. Avasesasālāhi tattheva bahutaro āyo uṭṭhāsi, so tena pasīditvā avasesasālāsupi uppajjanakaṃ gahetvā vīsati vassasahassāni dānaṃ adāsi. So kālaṃ katvā cātumahārājikesu kuvero nāma devaputto jāto. Aparabhāge visāṇāya rājadhāniyā rajjaṃ kāresi. Tato paṭṭhāya vessavaṇoti vuccati.

Tasmā kuvero mahārājā means, it is said that before a Buddha arose, a brahmin named Kuvera, after having sugarcane planted, employed seven machines. The income arising from one machine-hall he gave to the great crowd that came and went, and he performed merit. From the remaining halls, even more income arose there, so he, being pleased with that, taking the income that arose even from the remaining halls, gave alms for twenty thousand years. He, having died, was born as a son of the gods named Kuvera in the realm of the Four Great Kings. Afterwards, he ruled the kingdom in the city of Visāṇa. From then on, he is called Vessavaṇa.

Paccesanto pakāsentīti paṭiesanto visuṃ visuṃ atthe upaparikkhamānā anusāsamānā aññe dvādasa yakkharaṭṭhikā pakāsenti. Te kira yakkharaṭṭhikā sāsanaṃ gahetvā dvādasannaṃ yakkhadovārikānaṃ nivedenti. Yakkhadovārikā taṃ sāsanaṃ mahārājassa nivedenti. Idāni tesaṃ yakkharaṭṭhikānaṃ nāmaṃ dassentotatolātiādimāha. Tesu kira eko tatolā nāma, eko tattalā nāma, eko tatotalā nāma, eko ojasi nāma, eko tejasi nāma, eko tatojasī nāma.Sūro rājāti eko sūro nāma, eko rājā nāma, eko sūrorājā nāma,ariṭṭho nemīti eko ariṭṭho nāma, eko nemi nāma, eko ariṭṭhanemi nāma.

Paccesanto pakāsentī means, twelve other Yaksha generals proclaim, examining and instructing, each one individually, in the meaning. It is said that those Yaksha generals, having received the instruction, announce it to the twelve Yaksha gatekeepers. The Yaksha gatekeepers announce that instruction to the Great King. Now, showing the names of those Yaksha generals, he says tatolā and so on. Among them, one is named Tatolā, one is named Tattalā, one is named Tatotalā, one is named Ojasi, one is named Tejasi, one is named Tatojasī. Sūro rājā means, one is named Sūra, one is named Rājā, one is named Sūrorājā, ariṭṭho nemī means, one is named Ariṭṭha, one is named Nemi, one is named Ariṭṭhanemi.

Rahadopitattha dharaṇī nāmāti tattha paneko nāmena dharaṇī nāma udakarahado atthi, paṇṇāsayojanā mahāpokkharaṇī atthīti vuttaṃ hoti.Yato meghā pavassantīti yato pokkharaṇito udakaṃ gahetvā meghā pavassanti.Vassā yato patāyantīti yato vuṭṭhiyo avattharamānā nigacchanti. Meghesu kira uṭṭhitesu tato pokkharaṇito purāṇaudakaṃ bhassati. Upari megho uṭṭhahitvā taṃ pokkharaṇiṃ navodakena pūreti. Purāṇodakaṃ heṭṭhimaṃ hutvā nikkhamati. Paripuṇṇāya pokkharaṇiyā valāhakā vigacchanti.Sabhāpīti sabhā. Tassā kira pokkharaṇiyā tīre sālavatiyā nāma latāya parikkhitto dvādasayojaniko ratanamaṇḍapo atthi, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

Rahadopi tattha dharaṇī nāmā means, there, moreover, is a lake named Dharaṇī; it is said there is a great lotus pond of fifty yojanas. Yato meghā pavassantī means, from that pond, taking water, the clouds rain. Vassā yato patāyantī means, from that, showers descend, falling down. It seems that when clouds arise, the old water flows away from that pond. Above, a cloud arises and fills that pond with new water. The old water, becoming the lower layer, flows out. When the pond is full, the rain clouds depart. Sabhāpī means, also a assembly hall. It is said that on the shore of that pond, there is a jeweled pavilion of twelve yojanas, surrounded by a creeper named Sālavatī; referring to that, this was said.

Payirupāsantīti nisīdanti.Tattha niccaphalā rukkhāti tasmiṃ ṭhāne taṃ maṇḍapaṃ parivāretvā sadā phalitā ambajambuādayo rukkhā niccapupphitā ca campakamālādayoti dasseti.Nānādijagaṇāyutāti vividhapakkhisaṅghasamākulā.Mayūrakoñcābhirudāti mayūrehi koñcasakuṇehi ca abhirudā upagītā.

Payirupāsantī means, they sit around. Tattha niccaphalā rukkhā means, in that place, surrounding that pavilion, there are trees such as mango and jambu, which are always bearing fruit, and campaka, jasmine, etc., which are always flowering, this he shows. Nānādijagaṇāyutā means, crowded with various flocks of birds. Mayūrakoñcābhirudā means, resounded and celebrated by peacocks and heron birds.

Jīvañjīvakasaddetthāti ‘‘jīva jīvā’’ti evaṃ viravantānaṃ jīvañjīvakasakuṇānampi ettha saddo atthi.Oṭṭhavacittakāti ‘‘uṭṭhehi, citta, uṭṭhehi cittā’’ti evaṃ vassamānā uṭṭhavacittakasakuṇāpi tattha vicaranti.Kukkuṭakāti vanakukkuṭakā.Kuḷīrakāti suvaṇṇakakkaṭakā.Vaneti padumavane.Pokkharasātakāti pokkharasātakā nāma sakuṇā.

Jīvañjīvakasaddetthā means, here too there is the sound of jīvañjīvaka birds, which cry out "jīva jīva." Oṭṭhavacittakā means, oṭṭhavacittaka birds, which cry out "rise up, Citta, rise up, Cittā," also wander there. Kukkuṭakā means, forest fowl. Kuḷīrakā means, golden crabs. Vane means, in a lotus grove. Pokkharasātakā means, birds named pokkharasātaka.

Sukasāḷikasaddetthāti sukānañca sāḷikānañca saddo ettha.Daṇḍamāṇavakāni cāti manussamukhasakuṇā. Te kira dvīhi hatthehi suvaṇṇadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā ekaṃ pokkharapattaṃ akkamitvā anantare pokkharapatte suvaṇṇadaṇḍaṃ nikkhipantā vicaranti.Sobhati sabbakālaṃ sāti sā pokkharaṇī sabbakālaṃ sobhati.Kuveranaḷinīti kuverassa naḷinī padumasarabhūtā, sā dharaṇī nāma pokkharaṇī sadā nirantaraṃ sobhati.

Sukasāḷikasaddetthā means, here is the sound of parrots and mynah birds. Daṇḍamāṇavakāni cā means, birds with human faces. It seems they wander about holding a golden staff in their two hands, stepping on one lotus leaf, and placing the golden staff on the next lotus leaf. Sobhati sabbakālaṃ sā means, that pond is beautiful at all times. Kuveranaḷinī means, Kuvera's lotus pond, that pond named Dharaṇī, is always constantly beautiful.

282.Yassa kassacīti idaṃ vessavaṇo āṭānāṭiyaṃ rakkhaṃ niṭṭhapetvā tassā parikammaṃ dassento āha. Tatthasuggahitāti atthañca byañjanañca parisodhetvā suṭṭhu uggahitā.Samattā pariyāputāti padabyañjanāni ahāpetvā paripuṇṇaṃ uggahitā. Atthampi pāḷimpi visaṃvādetvā sabbaso vā pana appaguṇaṃ katvā bhaṇantassa hi parittaṃ tejavantaṃ na hoti, sabbaso paguṇaṃ katvā bhaṇantasseva tejavantaṃ hoti. Lābhahetu uggahetvā bhaṇantassāpi atthaṃ na sādheti, nissaraṇapakkhe ṭhatvā mettaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā bhaṇantasseva atthāya hotīti dasseti.Yakkhapacāroti yakkhaparicārako.

282. Yassa kassacī this Vessavaṇa said, finishing the protection in Āṭānāṭa, showing its preparation. There, suggahitā means, well grasped, having purified both the meaning and the phrasing. Samattā pariyāputā means, completely grasped, without omitting words or phrases. For the protective verses of one who speaks after distorting the meaning and the Pali, or after making it completely deficient, do not have power; only the verses of one who speaks after making it completely proficient have power. He shows that even if one grasps and speaks it for the sake of gain, it does not accomplish the meaning; it is only for the sake of one who stands on the side of release, having made loving-kindness the forerunner.Yakkhapacāro means, a Yaksha attendant.

Vatthuṃ vāti gharavatthuṃ vā.Vāsaṃ vāti tattha nibaddhavāsaṃ vā.Samitinti samāgamaṃ.Anāvayhanti na āvāhayuttaṃ.Avivayhanti na vivāhayuttaṃ. Tena saha āvāhavivāhaṃ na kareyyunti attho.Attāhipi paripuṇṇāhīti ‘‘kaḷārakkhi kaḷāradantā’’ti evaṃ etesaṃ attabhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāhi paripuṇṇabyañjanāhi paribhāsāhi paribhāseyyuṃ yakkhaakkosehi nāma akkoseyyunti attho.Rittampissa pattanti bhikkhūnaṃ pattasadisameva lohapattaṃ hoti. Taṃ sīse nikkujjitaṃ yāva galavāṭakā bhassati. Atha naṃ majjhe ayokhīlena ākoṭenti.

Vatthuṃ vā means, a house site. Vāsaṃ vā means, or a permanent dwelling there. Samiti means, an assembly. Anāvayha means, not fit for marriage. Avivayha means, not fit for betrothal. The meaning is that one should not engage in marriage or betrothal with them. Attāhipi paripuṇṇāhī means, they should revile with complete curses, bringing up their own being with complete phrases, saying, "Kaḷāra-teeth, Kaḷāra-killer," and so on; that is, they should curse with Yaksha curses.

Caṇḍāti kodhanā.Ruddhāti viruddhā.Rabhasāti karaṇuttariyā.Neva mahārājānaṃ ādiyantīti vacanaṃ na gaṇhanti, āṇaṃ na karonti.Mahārājānaṃ purisakānanti aṭṭhavīsatiyakkhasenāpatīnaṃ.Purisakānanti yakkhasenāpatīnaṃ ye manassā tesaṃ.Avaruddhā nāmāti paccāmittā verino.Ujjhāpetabbanti parittaṃ vatvā amanusse paṭikkamāpetuṃ asakkontena etesaṃ yakkhānaṃ ujjhāpetabbaṃ, ete jānāpetabbāti attho.

Rittampissa patta means, he has an iron bowl just like the bowls of monks. It is overturned on his head, pouring down as far as his throat. Then they strike it in the middle with an iron stake. Caṇḍā means, wrathful. Ruddhā means, opposed. Rabhasā means, acting impetuously. Neva mahārājānaṃ ādiyantī means, they do not heed the word, they do not carry out the order. Mahārājānaṃ purisakāna means, of the twenty-eight Yaksha generals. Purisakāna means, of those who are adherents of the Yaksha generals. Avaruddhā nāmā means, they are called enemies, adversaries. Ujjhāpetabba means, by one who cannot drive away the non-humans by reciting the protective verses, these Yakshas should be denounced, these should be made known; this is the meaning.

Parittaparikammakathā
Discourse on Preparations for Protection

Idha pana ṭhatvā parittassa parikammaṃ kathetabbaṃ. Paṭhamameva hi āṭānāṭiyasuttaṃ na bhaṇitabbaṃ, mettasuttaṃ dhajaggasuttaṃ ratanasuttanti imāni sattāhaṃ bhaṇitabbāni. Sace muñcati, sundaraṃ. No ce muñcati, āṭānāṭiyasuttaṃ bhaṇitabbaṃ, taṃ bhaṇantena bhikkhunā piṭṭhaṃ vā maṃsaṃ vā na khāditabbaṃ, susāne na vasitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Amanussā okāsaṃ labhanti. Parittakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ haritupalittaṃ kāretvā tattha parisuddhaṃ āsanaṃ paññapetvā nisīditabbaṃ.

Here, moreover, standing in this place, the preparations for the protection should be described. For at the very beginning, the Āṭānāṭiya Sutta should not be recited; the Metta Sutta, the Dhajagga Sutta, and the Ratana Sutta should be recited for a week. If he is released, that is good. If he is not released, the Āṭānāṭiya Sutta should be recited; a monk reciting it should not eat meat or fish, nor should he dwell in a cemetery. Why? Non-humans get an opportunity. Having the place where the protection is to be done plastered with green clay, one should sit there after preparing a clean seat.

Parittakārako bhikkhu vihārato gharaṃ nentehi phalakāvudhehi parivāretvā netabbo. Abbhokāse nisīditvā na vattabbaṃ, dvāravātapānāni pidahitvā nisinnena āvudhahatthehi saṃparivāritena mettacittaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā vattabbaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ sikkhāpadāni gāhāpetvā sīle patiṭṭhitassa parittaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evampi mocetuṃ asakkontena vihāraṃ ānetvā cetiyaṅgaṇe nipajjāpetvā āsanapūjaṃ kāretvā dīpe jālāpetvā cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā maṅgalakathā vattabbā. Sabbasannipāto ghosetabbo. Vihārassa upavane jeṭṭhakarukkho nāma hoti, tattha bhikkhusaṅgho tumhākaṃ āgamanaṃ paṭimānetīti pahiṇitabbaṃ. Sabbasannipātaṭṭhāne anāgantuṃ nāma na labbhati. Tato amanussagahitako ‘‘tvaṃ ko nāmā’’ti pucchitabbo. Nāme kathite nāmeneva ālapitabbo. Itthannāma tuyhaṃ mālāgandhādīsu patti āsanapūjāya patti piṇḍapāte patti, bhikkhusaṅghena tuyhaṃ paṇṇākāratthāya mahāmaṅgalakathā vuttā, bhikkhusaṅghe gāravena etaṃ muñcāhīti mocetabbo. Sace na muñcati, devatānaṃ ārocetabbaṃ ‘‘tumhe jānātha, ayaṃ amanusso amhākaṃ vacanaṃ na karoti, mayaṃ buddhaāṇaṃ karissāmā’’ti parittaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etaṃ tāva gihīnaṃ parikammaṃ. Sace pana bhikkhu amanussena gahito hoti, āsanāni dhovitvā sabbasannipātaṃ ghosāpetvā gandhamālādīsu pattiṃ datvā parittaṃ bhaṇitabbaṃ. Idaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ parikammaṃ.

The monk who is performing the protection should be led from the monastery to the house surrounded by those carrying clubs and weapons. He should not speak sitting in the open air; having closed the doors and windows and being surrounded by those holding weapons, he should speak having made loving-kindness the forerunner. First, having had him take the precepts, the protection should be done for one established in morality. Even failing to release him thus, having brought him to the monastery, having had him lie down in the courtyard of the shrine, having had him perform seat-offerings, having lit lamps, having swept the courtyard of the shrine, auspicious talks should be spoken. A general assembly should be announced. In the vicinity of the monastery, there is a tree called Jeṭṭhaka; it should be sent to say, "The Sangha of monks is waiting for your arrival." In a place of general assembly, there is no obtaining the name of a non-entrant. Then the one possessed by a non-human should be asked, "What is your name?" When the name is spoken, he should be addressed by that very name. "So-and-so, may merit accrue to you from the garlands, perfumes, etc., may merit accrue to you from the seat-offering, may merit accrue to you from the alms-food, a great auspicious talk has been spoken by the Sangha of monks for your donation, revering the Sangha of monks, release this," he should be released. If he does not release him, the deities should be informed, "You know, this non-human does not heed our word, we will carry out the Buddha's command," the protection should be done. This, for the householders, is the preparation. If, however, a monk is possessed by a non-human, having washed the seats, having announced a general assembly, having given merit for perfumes, garlands, etc., the protection should be recited. This, for the monks, is the preparation.

Vikkanditabbanti sabbasannipātaṃ ghosāpetvā aṭṭhavīsati yakkhasenāpatayo kanditabbā.Viravitabbanti ‘‘ayaṃ yakkho gaṇhātī’’tiādīni bhaṇantena tehi saddhiṃ kathetabbaṃ. Tatthagaṇhātīti sarīre adhimuccati.Āvisatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Atha vā laggati na apetīti vuttaṃ hoti.Heṭhetīti uppannaṃ rogaṃ vaḍḍhento bādhati.Viheṭhetīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Hiṃsatīti appamaṃsalohitaṃ karonto dukkhāpeti.Vihiṃsatīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Na muñcatīti appamādagāho hutvā muñcituṃ na icchati, evaṃ etesaṃ viravitabbaṃ.

Vikkanditabba means, having announced a general assembly, the twenty-eight Yaksha generals should be called out. Viravitabba means, along with them, one should speak saying, "This Yaksha seizes," and so on. There, gaṇhāti means, he is fixated on the body. Āvisatī is a synonym for that. Or else, it means he clings and does not go away. Heṭhetī means, afflicts, increasing the disease that has arisen. Viheṭhetī is a synonym for that. Hiṃsatī means, hurts, making little flesh and blood, causing pain. Vihiṃsatī is a synonym for that. Na muñcatī means, becoming a careless grasper, he does not want to release; in this way, one should speak to them.

283.Idāni yesaṃ evaṃ viravitabbaṃ, te dassetuṃkatamesaṃ yakkhānantiādimāha. Tatthaindo somotiādīni tesaṃ nāmāni. Tesuvessāmittoti vessāmittapabbatavāsī eko yakkho.Yugandharopiyugandharapabbatavāsīyeva.Hiri netti ca mandiyoti hiri ca netti ca mandiyo ca.Maṇi māṇi varo dīghoti maṇi ca māṇi ca varo ca dīgho ca.Atho serīsako sahāti tehi saha añño serīsako nāma. ‘‘Imesaṃ yakkhānaṃ…pe… ujjhāpetabba’’nti ayaṃ yakkho imaṃ heṭheti viheṭheti na muñcatīti evaṃ etesaṃ yakkhasenāpatīnaṃ ārocetabbaṃ. Tato te bhikkhusaṅgho attano dhammaāṇaṃ karoti, mayampi amhākaṃ yakkharājaāṇaṃ karomāti ussukkaṃ karissanti. Evaṃ amanussānaṃ okāso na bhavissati, buddhasāvakānaṃ phāsuvihāro ca bhavissatīti dassento ‘‘ayaṃ kho sā, mārisa, āṭānāṭiyā rakkhā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ, tato parañca uttānatthamevāti.

283. Now, to show those to whom one should speak in this way, he says katamesaṃ yakkhāna and so on. There, indo somo and so on are their names. Among them, vessāmitto is a Yaksha who dwells on Mount Vessāmitta. Yugandharopi is one who dwells on Mount Yugandhara itself. Hiri netti ca mandiyo are Hiri, Netti, and Mandiya. Maṇi māṇi varo dīgho are Maṇi, Māṇi, Vara, and Dīgha. Atho serīsako sahā is another named Serīsaka along with them. "Of these Yakshas…pe…should be denounced," one should announce to these Yaksha generals in this way: "This Yaksha afflicts, torments, and does not release." Then the Sangha of monks will eagerly say, "We will carry out our command of the Dhamma; we too will carry out our command of the Yaksha king." Showing that in this way there will be no opportunity for non-humans, and there will be a comfortable dwelling for the disciples of the Buddha, he says, "This, venerable sir, is the protection of Āṭānāṭa," and so on. All of that, and what follows from that, has a straightforward meaning.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

The Commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya in the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī

10. Saṅgītisuttavaṇṇanā

10. Exposition of the Saṅgīti Sutta

296.Evaṃme sutanti saṅgītisuttaṃ. Tatrāyamapubbapadavaṇṇanā –cārikaṃ caramānoti nibaddhacārikaṃ caramāno. Tadā kira satthā dasasahassacakkavāḷe ñāṇajālaṃ pattharitvā lokaṃ volokayamāno pāvānagaravāsino mallarājāno disvā ime rājāno mayhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇajālassa anto paññāyanti, kiṃ nu khoti āvajjanto ‘‘rājāno ekaṃ sandhāgāraṃ kāresuṃ, mayi gate maṅgalaṃ bhaṇāpessanti, ahaṃ tesaṃ maṅgalaṃ vatvā uyyojetvā ‘bhikkhusaṅghassa dhammakathaṃ kathehī’ti sāriputtaṃ vakkhāmi, sāriputto tīhi piṭakehi sammasitvā cuddasapañhādhikena pañhasahassena paṭimaṇḍetvā bhikkhusaṅghassa saṅgītisuttaṃ nāma kathessati, suttantaṃ āvajjetvā pañca bhikkhusatāni saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇissantī’’ti imamatthaṃ disvā cārikaṃ pakkanto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘mallesu cārikaṃ caramāno’’ti.

296. Evaṃ me sutaṃ means the Saṅgīti Sutta. Herein is the word-by-word explanation of the initial passage: cārikaṃ caramāno means wandering on a continuous tour. It is said that then the Teacher, having spread the net of knowledge in ten thousand world-systems and surveying the world, seeing the Malla kings residing in Pāvā city, thought, "These kings appear within the range of my omniscient knowledge. What could be the reason?" Reflecting, he thought, "The kings have built a meeting hall, and when I arrive, they will ask me to recite auspicious verses. After reciting the auspicious verses for them and dismissing them, I will tell Sāriputta, 'Give a Dhamma talk to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus.' Sāriputta, having thoroughly examined the three Piṭakas, will adorn it with a thousand questions and fourteen additional questions and deliver the Saṅgīti Sutta to the Saṅgha of bhikkhus. Reflecting on the Suttanta, five hundred bhikkhus will attain Arahatship with the discriminations." Seeing this purpose, he set out on tour. Therefore, it was said, "wandering on tour among the Mallas."

Ubbhatakanavasandhāgāravaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Newly Built Ubbhataka Meeting Hall

297.Ubbhatakanti tassa nāmaṃ, uccattā vā evaṃ vuttaṃ.Sandhāgāranti nagaramajjhe sandhāgārasālā.Samaṇena vāti ettha yasmā gharavatthupariggahakāleyeva devatā attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gaṇhanti. Tasmā devena vāti avatvā ‘‘samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā kenaci vā manussabhūtenā’’ti vuttaṃ.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti bhagavato āgamanaṃ sutvā ‘‘amhehi gantvāpi na bhagavā ānīto, dūtaṃ pesetvāpi na pakkosāpito, sayameva pana mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivāro amhākaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sampatto, amhehi ca sandhāgārasālā kāritā, ettha mayaṃ dasabalaṃ ānetvā maṅgalaṃ bhaṇāpessāmā’’ti cintetvā upasaṅkamiṃsu.

297. Ubbhataka is its name; it is so called because of its height. Sandhāgāra means a meeting hall in the middle of the city. Samaṇena vā: Here, since deities take possession of their dwelling place at the very time the ground is prepared for construction, therefore, instead of saying, "by a deity," it is said, "by a Samaṇa, a Brāhmaṇa, or any human being." Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsū: Having heard of the Blessed One's arrival, they thought, "Even though we went, the Blessed One was not brought; even though we sent a messenger, he was not invited. But he himself, surrounded by a great Saṅgha of bhikkhus, has arrived at our dwelling place, and we have had a meeting hall built. Here, we will bring the Ten-Powered One and have him recite auspicious verses," and thinking thus, they approached.

298.Yena sandhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti taṃ divasaṃ kira sandhāgāre cittakammaṃ niṭṭhapetvā aṭṭakā muttamattā honti, buddhā ca nāma araññajjhāsayā araññārāmā, antogāme vaseyyuṃ vā no vā. Tasmā bhagavato manaṃ jānitvāva paṭijaggissāmāti cintetvā te bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu. Idāni pana manaṃ labhitvā paṭijaggitukāmā yena sandhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.Sabbasantharinti yathā sabbaṃ santhataṃ hoti, evaṃ.Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsūti ettha pana te mallarājāno sandhāgāraṃ paṭijaggitvā nagaravīthiyopi sammajjāpetvā dhaje ussāpetvā gehadvāresu puṇṇaghaṭe ca kadaliyo ca ṭhapāpetvā sakalanagaraṃ dīpamālādīhi vippakiṇṇatārakaṃ viya katvā khīrapāyake dārake khīraṃ pāyyetha, dahare kumāre lahuṃ lahuṃ bhojāpetvā sayāpetha, uccāsaddaṃ mā karittha, ajja ekarattiṃ satthā antogāme vasissati, buddhā nāma appasaddakāmā hontīti bheriṃ carāpetvā sayaṃ daṇḍadīpikaṃ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsu.

298. Yena sandhāgāraṃ tenupasaṅkamiṃsū: It seems that on that day, having finished the painted work in the meeting hall, there were only eight pieces of pearl work left. And Buddhas are those who dwell in the forest, who delight in the forest monasteries, and whether they would stay in a village or not was uncertain. Therefore, thinking, "Having known the Blessed One's mind, we will then prepare," they approached the Blessed One. Now, having obtained his consent, desiring to prepare, they approached the meeting hall. Sabbasanthari means just as everything is spread out. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamiṃsū: Here, those Malla kings, having prepared the meeting hall and also having the city streets swept, raised banners, placed full water pots and banana trees at the doors of their houses, and having made the entire city like a star-scattered sky with rows of lamps and other decorations, they would give milk to infants, feed young children little by little and put them to sleep, instructing "Do not make loud noises, today the Teacher will stay in the village for one night, for Buddhas like quiet," and having a proclamation made by beat of drum, themselves taking torches, they approached the Blessed One.

299.Bhagavantaṃyeva purakkhatvāti bhagavantaṃ purato katvā. Tattha bhagavā bhikkhūnañceva upāsakānañca majjhe nisinno ativiya virocati, samantapāsādiko suvaṇṇavaṇṇo abhirūpo dassanīyo. Purimakāyato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Pacchimakāyato. Dakkhiṇahatthato. Vāmahatthato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Upari kesantato paṭṭhāya sabbakesāvaṭṭehi moragīvavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā gaganatale asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Heṭṭhā pādatalehi pavāḷavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā ghanapathaviyaṃ asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Evaṃ samantā asīti hatthamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vijjotamānā vipphandamānā vidhāvanti. Sabbe disābhāgā suvaṇṇacampakapupphehi vikiriyamānā viya suvaṇṇaghaṭato nikkhantasuvaṇṇarasadhārāhi siñcamānā viya pasāritasuvaṇṇapaṭaparikkhittā viya verambhavātasamuṭṭhitakiṃsukakaṇikārapupphacuṇṇasamākiṇṇā viya ca vippakāsanti.

299. Bhagavantaṃyeva purakkhatvā means having put the Blessed One in front. There, the Blessed One, sitting in the midst of bhikkhus and lay followers, shone exceedingly, pleasing in every way, golden-colored, beautiful, and delightful to see. From the front of his body, a golden-colored ray arose, encompassing eighty cubits. From the back of his body. From his right hand. From his left hand, golden-colored rays arose, encompassing eighty cubits. From above, starting from the end of his hair, rays of the color of a peacock's neck arose from all the swirls of his hair, encompassing eighty cubits in the sky. From below, from the soles of his feet, coral-colored rays arose, encompassing eighty cubits in the solid earth. Thus, on all sides, for a distance of eighty cubits, six-colored Buddha-rays sparkled, fluttered, and darted about. All directions shone as if strewn with golden campaka flowers, as if sprinkled with streams of golden essence flowing from golden pots, as if surrounded by a spread golden cloth, and as if filled with powder of kiṃsuka and kaṇikāra flowers stirred up by the Verambha wind.

Bhagavatopi asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇasamujjalaṃ sarīraṃ samuggatatārakaṃ viya gaganatalaṃ, vikasitamiva padumavanaṃ, sabbapāliphullo viya yojanasatiko pāricchattako paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitānaṃ dvattiṃsacandānaṃ dvattiṃsasūriyānaṃ dvattiṃsacakkavattirājānaṃ dvattiṃsadevarājānaṃ dvattiṃsamahābrahmānaṃ siriyā siriṃ abhibhavamānaṃ viya virocati. Parivāretvā nisinnā bhikkhūpi sabbeva appicchā santuṭṭhā pavivittā asaṃsaṭṭhā āraddhavīriyā vattāro vacanakkhamā codakā pāpagarahino sīlasampannā samādhisampannā paññāvimutti vimuttiñāṇadassanasampannā. Tehi parivārito bhagavā rattakambalaparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇakkhandho, rattapadumavanasaṇḍamajjhagatā viya suvaṇṇanāvā, pavāḷavedikāparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇapāsādo virocittha.

The Blessed One's body, radiant with eighty minor marks, a fathom's reach, thirty-two major marks, shone surpassing the splendor of the sky studded with risen stars, like a blossoming lotus grove, like a hundred-yojana Pāricchatta tree in full bloom, like thirty-two moons placed in order, thirty-two suns, thirty-two universal monarchs, thirty-two deva kings, and thirty-two great Brahmās. The bhikkhus who were sitting surrounding him, all without desires, content, secluded, unmingled, with aroused energy, speakers, capable of being spoken to, instigators, censurers of evil, accomplished in virtue, accomplished in concentration, accomplished in wisdom, liberation, and knowledge and vision of liberation. The Blessed One, surrounded by them, shone like a golden trunk wrapped in a red blanket, like a golden boat in the midst of a thicket of red lotuses, like a golden palace surrounded by a coral railing.

Asītimahātherāpi naṃ meghavaṇṇaṃ paṃsukūlaṃ pārupitvā maṇivammavammitā viya mahānāgā parivārayiṃsu vantarāgā bhinnakilesā vijaṭitajaṭā chinnabandhanā kule vā gaṇe vā alaggā. Iti bhagavā sayaṃ vītarāgo vītarāgehi, vītadoso vītadosehi, vītamoho vītamohehi, nittaṇho nittaṇhehi, nikkileso nikkilesehi, sayaṃ buddho bahussutabuddhehi parivārito pattaparivāritaṃ viya kesaraṃ, kesaraparivāritā viya kaṇṇikā, aṭṭhanāgasahassaparivārito viya chaddanto nāgarājā, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, senaṅgaparivārito viya cakkavattirājā, marugaṇaparivārito viya sakko devarājā, brahmagaṇaparivārito viya hārito mahābrahmā, asamena buddhavesena aparimāṇena buddhavilāsena tassaṃ parisati nisinno pāveyyake malle bahudeva rattiṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetvā uyyojesi.

The eighty great elders, having wrapped themselves in robes the color of clouds, like great nāgas armored in jeweled armor, surrounded him, free from passion, with broken defilements, with untangled knots, with severed bonds, unattached to family or group. Thus, the Blessed One, himself free from passion, surrounded by those free from passion; free from hatred, by those free from hatred; free from delusion, by those free from delusion; without craving, by those without craving; without defilements, by those without defilements; himself awakened, by the greatly learned awakened ones, like a pericarp surrounded by petals, like a seed-vessel surrounded by pericarps, like the Nāga king Chaddanta surrounded by eight thousand nāgas, like the Haṃsa king Dhataraṭṭha surrounded by ninety thousand geese, like a universal monarch surrounded by his army, like Sakka, the king of the devas, surrounded by his host of Maras, like the great Brahmā Hārita surrounded by his host of Brahmās, having displayed the Buddha's incomparable appearance and immeasurable Buddha's grace, having instructed the Pāveyyaka Mallas for much of the night with a Dhamma talk, dismissed them.

dhammikathānāma sandhāgāraanumodanappaṭisaṃyuttā pakiṇṇakakathā veditabbā. Tadā hi bhagavā ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viya pathavojaṃ ākaḍḍhanto viya mahājambuṃ matthake gahetvā cālento viya yojaniyamadhugaṇḍaṃ cakkayantena pīḷetvā madhupānaṃ pāyamāno viya ca pāveyyakānaṃ mallānaṃ hitasukhāvahaṃ pakiṇṇakakathaṃ kathesi.

dhammikathā means a talk connected with the approval of the meeting hall and miscellaneous talk should be understood. Then, indeed, the Blessed One, as if letting down the Ganges of the sky, as if pulling up the essence of the earth, as if holding a great jambu tree on its head and shaking it, and as if squeezing a yojana-sized honey ball with a wheel press and serving honey to drink, gave the Pāveyyaka Mallas a miscellaneous talk bringing benefit and happiness.

300.Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ anuviloketi, tattha tattha tuṇhībhūtameva.Anuviloketvāti maṃsacakkhunā dibbacakkhunāti dvīhi cakkhūhi tato tato viloketvā. Maṃsacakkhunā hi nesaṃ bahiddhā iriyāpathaṃ pariggahesi. Tattha ekabhikkhussāpi neva hatthakukkuccaṃ na pādakukkuccaṃ ahosi, na koci sīsamukkhipi, na kathaṃ kathesi, na niddāyanto nisīdi. Sabbepi tīhi sikkhāhi sikkhitā nivāte padīpasikhā viya niccalā nisīdiṃsu. Iti nesaṃ imaṃ iriyāpathaṃ maṃsacakkhunā pariggahesi. Ālokaṃ pana vaḍḍhayitvā dibbacakkhunā hadayarūpaṃ disvā abbhantaragataṃ sīlaṃ olokesi. So anekasatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ antokumbhiyaṃ jalamānaṃ padīpaṃ viya arahattupagaṃ sīlaṃ addasa. Āraddhavipassakā hi te bhikkhū. Iti nesaṃ sīlaṃ disvā ‘‘imepi bhikkhū mayhaṃ anucchavikā, ahampi imesaṃ anucchaviko’’ti cakkhutalesu nimittaṃ ṭhapetvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ oloketvā āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ āmantesi ‘‘piṭṭhi me āgilāyatī’’ti. Kasmā āgilāyati? Bhagavato hi chabbassāni mahāpadhānaṃ padahantassa mahantaṃ kāyadukkhaṃ ahosi. Athassa aparabhāge mahallakakāle piṭṭhivāto uppajji.

300. Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtaṃ: Whichever direction he surveyed, it was silent everywhere. Anuviloketvā: Having looked around from there to there with two eyes, the physical eye and the divine eye. With the physical eye, he perceived their external behavior. There was not even a slight fidgeting of hands or feet for any bhikkhu, no one raised their head, no one spoke, no one sat drowsing. All were trained in the three trainings, sitting still like a lamp flame in a windless place. Thus, he perceived their behavior with the physical eye. Then, increasing the light, having seen the heart-form with the divine eye, he beheld the virtue dwelling within. He saw the virtue leading to Arahatship, like a lamp burning within the inner chamber of hundreds of bhikkhus. For those bhikkhus were practicing insight. Thus, having seen their virtue, placing the sign in the corners of his eyes, thinking, "These bhikkhus are suitable for me, and I am suitable for them," having surveyed the Saṅgha of bhikkhus, he addressed Venerable Sāriputta, "My back is aching." Why was it aching? For the Blessed One, while striving in the Great Struggle for six years, had great bodily suffering. Then, in his later years, wind arose in his back.

Saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvāti sandhāgārassa kira ekapasse te rājāno kappiyamañcakaṃ paññapesuṃ ‘‘appeva nāma satthā nipajjeyyā’’ti. Satthāpi catūhi iriyāpathehi paribhuttaṃ imesaṃ mahapphalaṃ bhavissatīti tattha saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvā nipajji.

Saṅghāṭiṃ paññāpetvā: It seems that in one side of the meeting hall, those kings had a suitable seat arranged, thinking, "Perhaps the Teacher might lie down." The Teacher also, thinking, "This highly rewarding act of theirs will be used with the four postures," lay down having the outer robe folded in four.

Bhinnanigaṇṭhavatthuvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Bhinna Nigaṇṭha Story

301.Tassa kālaṅkiriyāyātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.

301. Tassa kālaṅkiriyāyātiādi, all that needs to be said has already been said below.

302.Āmantesīti bhaṇḍanādivūpasamakaraṃ svākhyātaṃ dhammaṃ desetukāmo āmantesi.

302. Āmantesīti intending to teach the well-expounded Dhamma that puts an end to quarrels and the like, he addressed (them).

Ekakavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Section on Ones

303.Tatthāti tasmiṃ dhamme.Saṅgāyitabbanti samaggehi gāyitabbaṃ, ekavacanehi aviruddhavacanehi bhaṇitabbaṃ.Na vivaditabbanti atthe vā byañjane vā vivādo na kātabbo.Eko dhammoti ekakadukatikādivasena bahudhā sāmaggirasaṃ dassetukāmo paṭhamaṃ tāva ‘‘eko dhammo’’ti āha.Sabbe sattāti kāmabhavādīsu saññābhavādīsu ekavokārabhavādīsu ca sabbabhavesu sabbe sattā.Āhāraṭṭhitikāti āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā. Iti sabbasattānaṃ ṭhiti hetu āhāro nāma eko dhammo amhākaṃ satthārā yāthāvato ñatvā sammadakkhāto āvusoti dīpeti.

303. Tattha means in that Dhamma. Saṅgāyitabba means to be recited in unison, to be spoken in concordant words. Na vivaditabba means no dispute should be made in meaning or expression. Eko dhammo means, wishing to show the essence of harmony in many ways by way of ones, twos, and threes, first of all he said, "One Dhamma." Sabbe sattā means all beings in all existences, such as the plane of sense-desires and so on, the plane of perception and so on, and the plane of one-constituent and so on. Āhāraṭṭhitikā means their existence is dependent on nutriment; āhārato ṭhiti etesanti āhāraṭṭhitikā. Thus, he reveals that nutriment, the cause of the existence of all beings, is one Dhamma known as it actually is and well-proclaimed by our Teacher, Āvuso.

Nanu ca evaṃ sante yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘asaññasattā devā ahetukā anāhārā aphassakā’’tiādi, (vibha. 1017) taṃ vacanaṃ virujjhatīti, na virujjhati. Tesañhi jhānaṃ āhāro hoti. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārā bhūtānaṃ vā sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāya. Katame cattāro? Kabaḷīkāro āhāro oḷāriko vā sukhumo vā, phasso dutiyo, manosañcetanā tatiyā, viññāṇaṃ catuttha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.11) idampi virujjhatīti, idampi na virujjhati. Etasmiñhi sutte nippariyāyena āhāralakkhaṇāva dhammā āhārāti vuttā. Idha pana pariyāyena paccayo āhāroti vutto. Sabbadhammānañhi paccayo laddhuṃ vaṭṭati. So ca yaṃ yaṃ phalaṃ janeti, taṃ taṃ āharati nāma, tasmā āhāroti vuccati. Tenevāha ‘‘avijjampāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāraṃ vadāmi, no anāhāraṃ. Ko ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya āhāro? Pañcanīvaraṇātissa vacanīyaṃ. Pañcanīvaraṇepāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sāhāre vadāmi, no anāhāre. Ko ca, bhikkhave, pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ āhāro? Ayonisomanasikārotissa vacanīya’’nti (a. ni. 10.61). Ayaṃ idha adhippeto.

Now, if that is so, does it not contradict the statement, "The unpercipient beings are without cause, without nutriment, and without contact," (vibha. 1017)? It does not contradict. For jhāna is the nutriment for them. Even so, does this not contradict, "There are these four nutriments, bhikkhus, for the maintenance of beings that have already come to be or for the support of those about to come into being. What are the four? Edible food, either coarse or subtle; contact as the second; mental volition as the third; and consciousness as the fourth," (saṃ. ni. 2.11)? This also does not contradict. In this Sutta, only the factors that are characteristics of nutriment are spoken of as nutriment in a non-periphrastic way. Here, however, a condition is spoken of as nutriment in a periphrastic way. For every Dhamma is fit to obtain a condition. And that condition generates whatever result, that it brings, therefore it is called nutriment. Therefore, he said, "I say that ignorance, too, bhikkhus, has nutriment, not without nutriment. And what, bhikkhus, is the nutriment for ignorance? It should be said, 'The five hindrances.' And I say that the five hindrances, too, bhikkhus, have nutriment, not without nutriment. And what, bhikkhus, is the nutriment for the five hindrances? It should be said, 'Unwise attention,'" (a. ni. 10.61). This is what is intended here.

Etasmiñhi paccayāhāre gahite pariyāyāhāropi nippariyāyāhāropi sabbo gahitova hoti. Tattha asaññabhave paccayāhāro labbhati. Anuppanne hi buddhe titthāyatane pabbajitā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā tato vuṭṭhāya dhī cittaṃ, dhibbatetaṃ cittaṃ cittassa nāma abhāvoyeva sādhu, cittañhi nissāyeva vadhabandhādipaccayaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati. Citte asati natthetanti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā aparihīnajjhānā kālaṅkatvā asaññabhave nibbattanti. Yo yassa iriyāpatho manussaloke paṇihito ahosi, so tena iriyāpathena nibbattitvā pañca kappasatāni ṭhito vā nisinno vā nipanno vā hoti. Evarūpānampi sattānaṃ paccayāhāro labbhati. Te hi yaṃ jhānaṃ bhāvetvā nibbattā, tadeva nesaṃ paccayo hoti. Yathā jiyāvegena khittasaro yāva jiyāvego atthi, tāva gacchati, evaṃ yāva jhānapaccayo atthi, tāva tiṭṭhanti. Tasmiṃ niṭṭhite khīṇavego saro viya patanti. Ye pana te nerayikā neva uṭṭhānaphalūpajīvī na puññaphalūpajīvīti vuttā, tesaṃ ko āhāroti? Tesaṃ kammameva āhāro. Kiṃ pañca āhārā atthīti ce. Pañca, na pañcāti idaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Nanu paccayo āhāroti vuttametaṃ. Tasmā yena kammena te niraye nibbattā, tadeva tesaṃ ṭhitipaccayattā āhāro hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca tāva kālaṅkaroti, yāva na taṃ pāpakammaṃ byantī hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.250).

For when this conditional nutriment is taken, both periphrastic nutriment and non-periphrastic nutriment are all taken. There, conditional nutriment is found in the unpercipient plane. For, when a Buddha has not arisen, ascetics in the abodes of heretics, having done preliminary work on the space kasiṇa, having generated the fourth jhāna, and rising from that, produce a thought, "Fie on thought, fie on this thought, for the cessation of thought is good, for suffering arises dependent on thought as the cause of killing, binding, and the like. When there is no thought, there is no suffering," and having produced acceptance and liking, without declining from jhāna, on dying, they are reborn in the unpercipient plane. Whatever posture was undertaken in the human world, they are reborn in that posture, standing, sitting, or lying down, for five hundred eons. Conditional nutriment is found for beings of such a kind too. For whatever jhāna they developed and were reborn, that itself is their condition. Just as an arrow shot with the force of a bow travels as long as the force of the bow lasts, so too they remain as long as the jhāna-condition lasts. When that is exhausted, they fall like an arrow with spent force. But what is the nutriment for those hell-beings who are said to not live by the fruit of rising or by the fruit of merit? For them, action itself is the nutriment. If it is asked, are there five nutriments? It should not be said that there are five or that there are not five. But it has been said that a condition is nutriment. Therefore, the action by which they were reborn in hell, that itself is nutriment because it is the condition for their existence. Regarding this it was said, "And he does not die until that evil action is exhausted," (ma. ni. 3.250).

Kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ ārabbha cettha vivādo na kātabbo. Mukhe uppanno kheḷopi hi tesaṃ āhārakiccaṃ sādheti. Kheḷopi hi niraye dukkhavedaniyo hutvā paccayo hoti, sagge sukhavedaniyo. Iti kāmabhave nippariyāyena cattāro āhārā. Rūpārūpabhavesu ṭhapetvā asaññaṃ sesānaṃ tayo. Asaññānañceva avasesānañca paccayāhāroti iminā āhārena ‘‘sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti etaṃ pañhaṃ kathetvā ‘‘ayaṃ kho āvuso’’ti evaṃ niyyātanampi ‘‘atthi kho āvuso’’ti puna uddharaṇampi akatvā ‘‘sabbe sattā saṅkhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti dutiyapañhaṃ vissajjesi.

Here, there should be no dispute regarding material food (kabaḷīkāra). Even the saliva arising in the mouth fulfills the function of food for them. Saliva, even in hell, becomes a condition for painful feeling, and in heaven, for pleasurable feeling. Thus, in the realm of desire (kāmabhava), there are undeniably four kinds of food. In the realms of form and formlessness (rūpārūpabhava), except for the non-percipient beings (asañña), there are three. By stating, "The food-condition for both the non-percipient beings and the remaining beings," and by explaining the question, "All beings are sustained by food" with this food, and without making an explicit conclusion such as "This, friend," nor repeating the question with "There is, friend," he answered the second question, "All beings are sustained by formations (saṅkhāra)."

Kasmā pana na niyyātesi na uddharittha? Tattha tattha niyyātiyamānepi uddhariyamānepi pariyāpuṇituṃ vācetuṃ dukkhaṃ hoti, tasmā dve ekābaddhe katvā vissajjesi. Imasmimpi vissajjane heṭṭhā vuttapaccayova attano phalassa saṅkharaṇato saṅkhāroti vutto. Iti heṭṭhā āhārapaccayo kathito, idha saṅkhārapaccayoti ayamettha heṭṭhimato viseso. ‘‘Heṭṭhā nippariyāyāhāro gahito, idha pariyāyāhāroti evaṃ gahite viseso pākaṭo bhaveyya, no ca gaṇhiṃsū’ti mahāsīvatthero āha. Indriyabaddhassapi hi anindriyabaddhassapi paccayo laddhuṃ vaṭṭati. Vinā paccayena dhammo nāma natthi. Tattha anindriyabaddhassa tiṇarukkhalatādino pathavīraso āporaso ca paccayo hoti. Deve avassante hi tiṇādīni milāyanti, vassante ca pana haritāni honti. Iti tesaṃ pathavīraso āporaso ca paccayo hoti. Indriyabaddhassa avijjā taṇhā kammaṃ āhāroti evamādayo paccayā, iti heṭṭhā paccayoyeva āhāroti kathito, idha saṅkhāroti. Ayamevettha viseso.

But why did he not make an explicit conclusion or repeat the question? Because it is difficult to learn and recite when conclusions are made and questions are repeated in each case, therefore, he answered by combining the two. In this answer as well, the condition (paccaya) mentioned earlier is called formation (saṅkhāra) because it fabricates its own result. Thus, the food-condition (āhāra-paccaya) was discussed earlier, and here, the formation-condition (saṅkhāra-paccaya) is discussed; this is the distinction here from the previous discussion. "The distinction would be clear if it were understood that undeniable food (nippariyāyāhāra) was taken earlier, and here, food in a figurative sense (pariyāyāhāra) is taken," said the Elder Mahāsīva, "but they did not understand." A condition (paccaya) can be obtained for both those bound by the senses and those not bound by the senses. Without a condition, there is no such thing as a phenomenon (dhamma). There, for those not bound by the senses, such as grass, trees, and vines, the earth-essence (pathavīrasa) and water-essence (āporaso) are conditions. When the gods do not rain, the grass and so on wither, but when it rains, they become green. Thus, for them, earth-essence and water-essence are conditions. For those bound by the senses, ignorance (avijjā), craving (taṇhā), action (kamma), and food (āhāra), and so on, are conditions. Thus, earlier, the condition itself was spoken of as food, and here, as formation. This is the only distinction here.

Ayaṃkho, āvusoti āvuso amhākaṃ satthārā mahābodhimaṇḍe nisīditvā sayaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇena sacchikatvā ayaṃ ekadhammo desito. Tattha ekadhamme tumhehi sabbeheva saṅgāyitabbaṃ na vivaditabbaṃ.Yathayidaṃ brahmacariyanti yathā saṅgāyamānānaṃ tumhākaṃ idaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ addhaniyaṃ assa. Ekena hi bhikkhunā ‘‘atthi, kho āvuso, eko dhammo sammadakkhāto. Katamo eko dhammo? Sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Sabbe sattā saṅkhāraṭṭhitikā’’ti kathite tassa kathaṃ sutvā añño kathessati. Tassapi aññoti evaṃ paramparakathāniyamena idaṃ brahmacariyaṃ ciraṃ tiṭṭhamānaṃ sadevakassa lokassa atthāya hitāya bhavissatīti ekakavasena dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

This, friend, means, friend, this single principle (ekadhamma) was taught by our Teacher after sitting at the Great Bodhi-mandala and realizing it himself through the knowledge of omniscience (sabbaññutaññāṇa). There, this single principle should be chanted by all of you together, and not disputed. So that this holy life means, so that this holy life (brahmacariya) of the Teaching may be long-lasting for you as you chant together. For if one bhikkhu says, "There is, friend, one principle well-proclaimed: all beings are sustained by food, all beings are sustained by formations," and another hears his statement and then speaks, and then another speaks of that, then by this continuous succession of speech, this holy life will last long, for the benefit and happiness of the world with its devas. Thus, the Dhamma-senapati Sāriputta Thera showed the flavor of concord through the perspective of oneness.

Ekakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of Oneness is complete.

Dukavaṇṇanā
Explanation of Twoness

304.Iti ekakavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni dukavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha nāmarūpadukenāmanti cattāro arūpino khandhā nibbānañca. Tattha cattāro khandhā nāmanaṭṭhenanāmaṃ.Nāmanaṭṭhenāti nāmakaraṇaṭṭhena. Yathā hi mahājanasammatattā mahāsammatassa ‘‘mahāsammato’’ti nāmaṃ ahosi, yathā mātāpitaro ‘‘ayaṃ tisso nāma hotu, phusso nāma hotū’’ti evaṃ puttassa kittimanāmaṃ karonti, yathā vā ‘‘dhammakathiko vinayadharo’’ti guṇato nāmaṃ āgacchati, na evaṃ vedanādīnaṃ. Vedanādayo hi mahāpathavīādayo viya attano nāmaṃ karontāva uppajjanti. Tesu uppannesu tesaṃ nāmaṃ uppannameva hoti. Na hi vedanaṃ uppannaṃ ‘‘tvaṃ vedanā nāma hohī’’ti, koci bhaṇati, na cassā yena kenaci kāraṇena nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ atthi, yathā pathaviyā uppannāya ‘‘tvaṃ pathavī nāma hohī’’ti nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, cakkavāḷasinerumhi candimasūriyanakkhattesu uppannesu ‘‘tvaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ nāma, tvaṃ nakkhattaṃ nāma hohī’’ti nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, nāmaṃ uppannameva hoti, opapātikā paññatti nipatati, evaṃ vedanāya uppannāya ‘‘tvaṃ vedanā nāma hohī’’ti nāmaggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi, tāya uppannāya vedanāti nāmaṃ uppannameva hoti. Saññādīsupi eseva nayo atītepi hi vedanā vedanāyeva. Saññā. Saṅkhārā. Viññāṇaṃ viññāṇameva. Anāgatepi. Paccuppannepi. Nibbānaṃ pana sadāpi nibbānamevāti. Nāmanaṭṭhena nāmaṃ. Namanaṭṭhenāpi cettha cattāro khandhā nāmaṃ. Te hi ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ namanti. Nāmanaṭṭhena sabbampi nāmaṃ. Cattāro hi khandhā ārammaṇe aññamaññaṃ nāmenti, nibbānaṃ ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya attani anavajjadhamme nāmeti.

304. Having shown the flavor of concord through the perspective of oneness, now, to show it through the perspective of twoness, he began the discourse again. There, in the pair of name and form (nāmarūpa), name means the four immaterial aggregates and Nibbāna. There, the four aggregates, in the sense of naming (nāmanaṭṭha), are name (nāma). In the sense of naming means in the sense of name-making. Just as Mahā-sammata was named "Mahā-sammata" because of being agreed upon by the great multitude; just as parents make a given name for their son, saying, "Let this one be named Tissa, let this one be named Phussa"; or just as a name comes from a quality, such as "Dhamma-preacher, Vinaya-holder," so it is not with feeling and so on. Feeling and so on, like the great earth and so on, arise making their own name. When they arise, their name has already arisen. No one says to feeling that has arisen, "May you be named feeling," nor does it have a name-acquiring function due to anyone, just as when the earth arises, there is no name-acquiring function, saying, "May you be named earth"; when the world-circle (cakkavāḷa), Mount Sineru, the moon, the sun, and the stars arise, there is no name-acquiring function, saying, "May you be named world-circle, may you be named star," the name has already arisen, the designation settles down from spontaneous generation (opapātikā paññatti nipatati); so too, when feeling arises, there is no name-acquiring function, saying, "May you be named feeling," when that arises, the name "feeling" has already arisen. The same method applies to perception and so on. Even in the past, feeling was just feeling. Perception. Formations. Consciousness was just consciousness. And also in the future. And in the present. But Nibbāna is always just Nibbāna. Thus, in the sense of naming, it is name. Also, in the sense of bending (namanaṭṭhena), the four aggregates are name. For they bend towards the object. In the sense of naming, all name is such. For the four aggregates bend towards each other in an object; Nibbāna, due to being a condition of object-dominance (ārammaṇādhipatipaccayatāya), bends in itself towards blameless qualities (anavajjadhamme).

Rūpanti cattāro ca mahābhūtā catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya rūpaṃ, taṃ sabbampi ruppanaṭṭhenarūpaṃ.Tassa vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva veditabbā.

Form means the four great elements and the form derived from the four great elements; all of that, in the sense of being deformed (ruppanaṭṭhena), is form. The detailed discussion of that should be understood according to the method stated in the Visuddhimagga.

Avijjāti dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ. Ayampi vitthārato visuddhimagge kathitāyeva.Bhavataṇhāti bhavapatthanā. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando’’tiādi (dha. sa. 1319).

Ignorance (Avijjā) means unknowing about suffering and so on. This too has been discussed in detail in the Visuddhimagga. Craving for existence (Bhavataṇhā) means desire for existence. As it was said, "What is craving for existence? That which is desire for existence in existences," and so on (dha. sa. 1319).

Bhavadiṭṭhīti bhavo vuccati sassataṃ, sassatavasena uppajjanakadiṭṭhi. Sā ‘‘tattha katamā bhavadiṭṭhi? ‘Bhavissati attā ca loko cā’ti yā evarūpā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigata’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1320) nayena abhidhamme vitthāritā.Vibhavadiṭṭhīti vibhavo vuccati ucchedaṃ, ucchedavasena uppajjanakadiṭṭhi. Sāpi ‘‘tattha katamā vibhavadiṭṭhi? ‘Na bhavissati attā ca loko cā’ti (dha. sa. 285). Yā evarūpā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigata’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 1321) nayena tattheva vitthāritā.

View of existence (Bhavadiṭṭhī) means existence (bhava) is called eternal (sassataṃ), the view that arises as eternal. That is expanded in the Abhidhamma with the method, "What is the view of existence? 'The self and the world will be,' such a view, a view-position," and so on (dha. sa. 1320). View of non-existence (Vibhavadiṭṭhī) means non-existence (vibhava) is called annihilation (ucchedaṃ), the view that arises as annihilation. That too is expanded there with the method, "What is the view of non-existence? 'The self and the world will not be,' (dha. sa. 285) such a view, a view-position," and so on (dha. sa. 1321).

Ahirikanti ‘‘yaṃ na hirīyati hirīyitabbenā’’ti (dha. sa. 1328) evaṃ vitthāritā nillajjatā.Anottappanti ‘‘yaṃ na ottappati ottappitabbenā’’ti (dha. sa. 1329) evaṃ vitthārito abhāyanakaākāro.

Shamelessness (Ahirika) means unashamedness, expanded as "That which is not ashamed of what should be ashamed of" (dha. sa. 1328). Lack of dread (Anottappa) means the state of fearlessness, expanded as "That which does not dread what should be dreaded" (dha. sa. 1329).

Hirī ca ottappañcāti ‘‘yaṃ hirīyati hirīyitabbena, ottappati ottappitabbenā’’ti (dha. sa. 1330-31) evaṃ vitthāritāni hiriottappāni. Api cettha ajjhattasamuṭṭhānāhirī,bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃottappaṃ.Attādhipateyyā hirī, lokādhipateyyaṃ ottappaṃ. Lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā hirī, bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ ottappaṃ. Vitthārakathā panettha sabbākārena visuddhimagge vuttā.

Shame and dread (Hirī ca ottappañcā) means shame (hirī) and dread (ottappa) expanded as "That which is ashamed of what should be ashamed of, dreads what should be dreaded" (dha. sa. 1330-31). Furthermore, here, shame (hirī) arises from within (ajjhattasamuṭṭhānā), dread (ottappa) arises from outside (bahiddhāsamuṭṭhānaṃ). Shame (hirī) has self as its authority (attādhipateyyā), dread (ottappa) has the world as its authority (lokādhipateyyaṃ). Shame (hirī) is established in the nature of embarrassment (lajjāsabhāvasaṇṭhitā), dread (ottappa) is established in the nature of fear (bhayasabhāvasaṇṭhitaṃ). The detailed discussion of this is stated in the Visuddhimagga in every way.

Dovacassatāti dukkhaṃ vaco etasmiṃ vippaṭikūlagāhimhi vipaccanīkasāte anādare puggaleti dubbaco, tassa kammaṃ dovacassaṃ, tassa bhāvodovacassatā.Vitthārato panesā ‘‘tattha katamā dovacassatā? Sahadhammike vuccamāne dovacassāya’’nti (dha. sa. 1332) abhidhamme āgatā. Sā atthato saṅkhārakkhandho hoti. ‘‘Catunnañca khandhānaṃ etenākārena pavattānaṃ etaṃ adhivacana’’nti vadanti.Pāpamittatāti pāpā assaddhādayo puggalā etassa mittāti pāpamitto, tassa bhāvo pāpamittatā. Vitthārato panesā – ‘‘tattha katamā pāpamittatā? Ye te puggalā assaddhā dussīlā appassutā maccharino duppaññā. Yā tesaṃ sevanā nisevanā saṃsevanā bhajanā saṃbhajanā bhatti saṃbhatti taṃsampavaṅkatā’’ti (dha. sa. 1333) evaṃ āgatā. Sāpi atthato dovacassatā viya daṭṭhabbā.

Unteachability (Dovacassatā) means one who is difficult to speak to, in a person who is contrary-minded, attached to what is unfavorable, and without respect; the action of that one who is difficult to speak to is unteachability, the state of that is unteachability (dovacassatā). But in detail, this appears in the Abhidhamma as "What is unteachability? Unteachability when being spoken to about the Dhamma" (dha. sa. 1332). In meaning, that is the formation aggregate (saṅkhārakkhandha). "This is a designation for the four aggregates occurring in this manner," some say. Bad friendship (Pāpamittatā) means bad (pāpā) people—those without faith and so on—are friends (mittā) to this one; the state of that one with bad friends is bad friendship. In detail, this is – "What is bad friendship? Those people who are faithless, immoral, unlearned, stingy, unwise. Association with them, constant association, intimacy, consorting, close consorting, devotion, close devotion, conformity to them" (dha. sa. 1333). That too should be seen as like unteachability in meaning.

Sovacassatā ca kalyāṇamittatāca vuttappaṭipakkhanayena veditabbā. Ubhopi panetā idha lokiyalokuttaramissakā kathitā.

Teachability (Sovacassatā) and good friendship (kalyāṇamittatā) should be understood by way of opposing what was said. But both of these are spoken of here as mixed with the mundane and supramundane.

Āpattikusalatāti ‘‘pañcapi āpattikkhandhā āpattiyo, sattapi āpattikkhandhā āpattiyo. Yā tāsaṃ āpattīnaṃ āpattikusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1336) evaṃ vutto āpattikusalabhāvo.

Skill in offenses (Āpattikusalatā) means the state of skill in offenses, stated as, "The five groups of offenses are offenses, the seven groups of offenses are offenses; that knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā) which is skill in those offenses" (dha. sa. 1336).

Āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatāti ‘‘yā tāhi āpattīhi vuṭṭhānakusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1337) evaṃ vuttā saha kammavācāya āpattīhi vuṭṭhānaparicchedajānanā paññā.

Skill in emerging from offenses (Āpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "which is skill in emerging from those offenses" (dha. sa. 1337), the knowledge of determining the conclusion of emerging from offenses together with the act of declaration (kammavācā).

Samāpattikusalatāti ‘‘atthi savitakkasavicārā samāpatti, atthi avitakkavicāramattā samāpatti, atthi avitakkaavicārā samāpatti. Yā tāsaṃ samāpattīnaṃ kusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1338) evaṃ vuttā saha parikammena appanāparicchedajānanā paññā.Samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatāti ‘‘yā tāhi samāpattīhi vuṭṭhānakusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1339) evaṃ vuttā yathāparicchinnasamayavaseneva samāpattito vuṭṭhānasamatthā ‘‘ettakaṃ gate sūriye uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti vuṭṭhānakālaparicchedakā paññā.

Skill in attainments (Samāpattikusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "There is attainment with applied and sustained thought, there is attainment with sustained thought alone, there is attainment without applied and sustained thought; that knowledge which is skill in those attainments" (dha. sa. 1338), the knowledge of determining absorption (appanā) together with preliminary work (parikamma). Skill in emerging from attainments (Samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "which is skill in emerging from those attainments" (dha. sa. 1339), capable of emerging from attainment only at the time determined as previously defined, the knowledge that determines the time of emergence, "I will get up when the sun has traveled so far."

Dhātukusalatāti ‘‘aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo cakkhudhātu…pe… manoviññāṇadhātu. Yā tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ kusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1340) evaṃ vuttā aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ sabhāvaparicchedakā savanadhāraṇasammasanapaṭivedhapaññā.Manasikārakusalatāti ‘‘yā tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ manasikārakusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1341) evaṃ vuttā tāsaṃyeva dhātūnaṃ sammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇapaññā.

Skill in elements (Dhātukusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "The eighteen elements: eye-element…pe… mind-consciousness-element; that knowledge which is skill in those elements" (dha. sa. 1340), the knowledge that determines the nature of the eighteen elements: the mundane knowledge of hearing, retaining, contacting, and the supramundane knowledge of penetrating. Skill in attention (Manasikārakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "which is skill in attention to those elements" (dha. sa. 1341), the knowledge of contacting, penetrating, and reviewing those very elements.

Āyatanakusalatāti ‘‘dvādasāyatanāni cakkhāyatanaṃ…pe… dhammāyatanaṃ. Yā tesaṃ āyatanānaṃ āyatanakusalatā paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1342) evaṃ vuttā dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ uggahamanasikārapajānanā paññā. Apica dhātukusalatāpi uggahamanasikārasavanasammasanapaṭivedhapaccavekkhaṇesu vattati manasikārakusalatāpi āyatanakusalatāpi. Ayaṃ panettha viseso, savanauggahapaccavekkhaṇā lokiyā, paṭivedho lokuttaro, sammasanamanasikārā lokiyalokuttaramissakā.Paṭiccasamuppādakusalatāti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotīti yā tattha paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1343) evaṃ vuttā dvādasannaṃ paccayākārānaṃ uggahādivasena pavattā paññā.

Skill in sense-spheres (Āyatanakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "The twelve sense-spheres: eye-sense-sphere…pe… Dhamma-sense-sphere; that knowledge which is skill in those sense-spheres" (dha. sa. 1342), the knowledge of grasping and attending to the twelve sense-spheres. Moreover, skill in the elements also operates in grasping, attending, hearing, contacting, penetrating, and reviewing; skill in attention also operates, as does skill in the sense-spheres. Here, the distinction is this: hearing, grasping, and reviewing are mundane; penetration is supramundane; contacting and attending are mixed with the mundane and supramundane. Skill in dependent origination (Paṭiccasamuppādakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "Conditioned by ignorance are formations…pe… there is the arising; that knowledge there" (dha. sa. 1343), the knowledge that occurs in grasping and so on of the twelve factors of conditionality.

Ṭhānakusalatāti ‘‘ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetupaccayā uppādāya taṃ taṃ ṭhānanti yā tattha paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1344) evaṃ vuttā ‘‘cakkhuṃ vatthuṃ katvā rūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannassa cakkhuviññāṇassa cakkhurūpaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1344) ṭhānañceva kāraṇañcā’’ti evaṃ ṭhānaparicchindanasamatthā paññā.Aṭṭhānakusalatāti ‘‘ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ na hetū na paccayā uppādāya taṃ taṃ aṭṭhānanti yā tattha paññā pajānanā’’ti (dha. sa. 1345) evaṃ vuttā ‘‘cakkhuṃ vatthuṃ katvā rūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā sotaviññāṇādīni nuppajjanti, tasmā tesaṃ cakkhurūpaṃ na ṭhānaṃ na kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ aṭṭhānaparicchindanasamatthā paññā apica etasmiṃ duke ‘‘kittāvatā pana, bhante, ṭhānāṭhānakusalo bhikkhūti alaṃ vacanāyāti. Idhānanda, bhikkhu aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti pajānāti. Ṭhānañca kho etaṃ vijjati, yaṃ puthujjano kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.127) imināpi suttena attho veditabbo.

Skill in possibilities (Ṭhānakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "Whatever phenomena are a root-condition for the arising of whatever phenomena, that is a possibility; that knowledge there" (dha. sa. 1344), the knowledge that is able to determine possibilities, "Having the eye as the base, having form as the object, the eye and form are both the possibility and the cause for the arising of eye-consciousness (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1344)." Skill in impossibilities (Aṭṭhānakusalatā) means the knowledge (paññā), knowing (pajānanā), "Whatever phenomena are not a root, not a condition for the arising of whatever phenomena, that is an impossibility; that knowledge there" (dha. sa. 1345), the knowledge that is able to determine impossibilities, "Having the eye as the base, having form as the object, ear-consciousness and so on do not arise; therefore, eye and form are not a possibility, not a cause for them." Moreover, in this pair, "To what extent, venerable sir, is a bhikkhu skilled in possibilities and impossibilities?" "Enough, Ānanda, for the saying. Here, Ānanda, a bhikkhu knows, 'This is an impossibility, there is no chance that a person endowed with view could regard any formation as permanent; this possibility does not exist.' But this possibility does exist, that an ordinary person could regard some formation as permanent" (ma. ni. 3.127); the meaning should be understood by this sutta as well.

Ajjavanti gomuttavaṅkatā candavaṅkatā naṅgalakoṭivaṅkatāti tayo anajjavā. Ekacco hi bhikkhu paṭhamavaye ekavīsatiyā anesanāsu chasu ca agocaresu carati, majjhimapacchimavayesu lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo hoti, ayaṃ gomuttavaṅkatā nāma. Eko paṭhamavayepi pacchimavayepi catupārisuddhisīlaṃ pūreti, lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo hoti, majjhimavaye purimasadiso, ayaṃ candavaṅkatā nāma. Eko paṭhamavayepi majjhimavayepi catupārisuddhisīlaṃ pūreti, lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo hoti, pacchimavaye purimasadiso ayaṃ naṅgalakoṭivaṅkatā nāma. Eko sabbametaṃ vaṅkataṃ pahāya tīsupi vayesu pesalo lajjī kukkuccako sikkhākāmo hoti. Tassa yo so ujubhāvo, idaṃ ajjavaṃ nāma. Abhidhammepi vuttaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamo ajjavo. Yā ajjavatā ajimhatā avaṅkatā akuṭilatā, ayaṃ vuccati ajjavo’’ti (dha. sa. 1346).Lajjavanti ‘‘tattha katamo lajjavo? Yo hirīyati hirīyitabbena hirīyati pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ samāpattiyā. Ayaṃ vuccati lajjavo’’ti evaṃ vutto lajjībhāvo.

Straightness (Ajjava) means there are three kinds of non-straightness: cow-dung crookedness, moon crookedness, and plow-tip crookedness. For one bhikkhu, in his early years, engages in the twenty-one wrong modes of livelihood and the six improper places, but in his middle and later years, he is conscientious, scrupulous, and desires training; this is called cow-dung crookedness. One, in his early and later years, fulfills the fourfold purification of virtue, is conscientious, scrupulous, and desires training, but is similar to the former in his middle years; this is called moon crookedness. One, in his early and middle years, fulfills the fourfold purification of virtue, is conscientious, scrupulous, and desires training, but is similar to the former in his later years; this is called plow-tip crookedness. One, abandoning all this crookedness, is agreeable, conscientious, scrupulous, and desires training in all three periods. That uprightness of his is called straightness. It is also said in the Abhidhamma – "What is straightness? That which is straightness, uncrookedness, unbent, unwarped; this is called straightness" (dha. sa. 1346). Conscientiousness (Lajjava) means the state of being conscientious, stated as "What is conscientiousness? One who is ashamed of what should be ashamed of, is ashamed of the arising of evil, unwholesome phenomena; this is called conscientiousness."

Khantīti ‘‘tattha katamā khanti? Yā khanti khamanatā adhivāsanatā acaṇḍikkaṃ anassuropo attamanatā cittassā’’ti (dha. sa. 1348) evaṃ vuttā adhivāsanakhanti.Soraccanti ‘‘tattha katamaṃ soraccaṃ? Yo kāyiko avītikkamo, vācasiko avītikkamo, kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. Idaṃ vuccati soraccaṃ. Sabbopi sīlasaṃvaro soracca’’nti (dha. sa. 1349) evaṃ vutto suratabhāvo.

Khantī (Patience): "What is patience? It is forbearance, tolerance, non-irascibility, absence of resentment, and contentedness of mind," (dha. sa. 1348) thus refers to patience as enduring or tolerating.Soracca (Gentleness): "What is gentleness? It is non-transgression in bodily conduct, non-transgression in verbal conduct, non-transgression in bodily and verbal conduct. This is called gentleness. All restraint in morality is gentleness," (dha. sa. 1349) thus refers to a state of being amiable.

Sākhalyanti ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sākhalyaṃ? Yā sā vācā aṇḍakā kakkasā parakaṭukā parābhisajjanī kodhasāmantā asamādhisaṃvattanikā, tathārūpiṃ vācaṃ pahāya yā sā vācā neḷā kaṇṇasukhā pemanīyā hadayaṅgamā porī bahujanakantā bahujanamanāpā, tathārūpiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā hoti. Yā tattha saṇhavācatā sakhilavācatā apharusavācatā. Idaṃ vuccati sākhalya’’nti (dha. sa. 1350) evaṃ vutto sammodakamudukabhāvo.Paṭisanthāroti ayaṃ lokasannivāso āmisena dhammena cāti dvīhi chiddo, tassa taṃ chiddaṃ yathā na paññāyati, evaṃ pīṭhassa viya paccattharaṇena āmisena dhammena ca paṭisantharaṇaṃ. Abhidhammepi vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha katamo paṭisanthāro? Āmisapaṭisanthāro ca dhammapaṭisanthāro ca. Idhekacco paṭisanthārako hoti āmisapaṭisanthārena vā dhammapaṭisanthārena vā. Ayaṃ vuccati paṭisanthāro’’ti (dha. sa. 1351). Ettha ca āmisena saṅgaho āmisapaṭisanthāro nāma. Taṃ karontena mātāpitūnaṃ bhikkhugatikassa veyyāvaccakarassa rañño corānañca aggaṃ aggahetvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Āmasitvā dinne hi rājāno ca corā ca anatthampi karonti jīvitakkhayampi pāpenti, anāmasitvā dinne attamanā honti. Coranāgavatthuādīni cettha vatthūni kathetabbāni. Tāni samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 185-7) vitthāritāni. Sakkaccaṃ uddesadānaṃ pāḷivaṇṇanā dhammakathākathananti evaṃ dhammena saṅgaho dhammapaṭisanthāro nāma.

Sākhalya (Affability): "What is affability? It is abandoning speech that is rough, harsh, offensive to others, related to anger, and unconducive to concentration, and instead speaking words that are smooth, pleasing to the ear, endearing, touching the heart, urbane, liked by many people, and agreeable to many people. It is gentle speech, friendly speech, and non-offensive speech. This is called affability," (dha. sa. 1350) thus refers to a state of being agreeable and mild. Paṭisanthāro (Cordiality): This communal living is rent by two things: material things and the Dhamma. Cordiality is like a top-covering on a seat, in such a way that the tear isn't perceived, it covers over with material things and Dhamma. It is also said in the Abhidhamma, "What is cordiality? It is cordiality through material things and cordiality through the Dhamma. Here, someone is cordial through material things or cordial through the Dhamma. This is called cordiality" (dha. sa. 1351). Here, generosity with material things is called material cordiality. In doing so, it is appropriate to give to parents, those who do service for the Sangha, to the king, and to thieves without taking the best for oneself. Because if given after taking the best, kings and thieves will do harm and bring about the destruction of life, but if given without taking the best, they will be pleased. Here, stories such as the story of the thief Nāga should be told. These are extensively explained in the Samantapāsādikā Vinaya commentary (pāci. aṭṭha. 185-7). Cordiality through the Dhamma is the name for respectfully giving instruction, reciting the Pali, and speaking on the Dhamma.

Avihiṃsāti karuṇāpi karuṇāpubbabhāgopi. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamā avihiṃsā? Yā sattesu karuṇā karuṇāyanā karuṇāyitattaṃ karuṇācetovimutti, ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsā’’ti.Soceyyanti mettāya ca mettāpubbabhāgassa ca vasena sucibhāvo. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ soceyyaṃ? Yā sattesu metti mettāyanā mettāyitattaṃ mettācetovimutti, idaṃ vuccati soceyya’’nti.

Avihiṃsā (Non-harming): Is also compassion, or the preliminary stage of compassion. It was also said that—"What is non-harming? It is compassion towards beings, aspiring for compassion, the state of having compassion, the liberation of mind through compassion, this is called non-harming."Soceyya (Purity): Is purity by way of loving-kindness and the preliminary stage of loving-kindness. It was also said that—"What is purity? It is loving-kindness towards beings, aspiring for loving-kindness, the state of having loving-kindness, the liberation of mind through loving-kindness, this is called purity."

Muṭṭhassaccanti sativippavāso, yathāha ‘‘tattha katamaṃ muṭṭhassaccaṃ? Yā asati ananussati appaṭissati assaraṇatā adhāraṇatā pilāpanatā sammussanatā, idaṃ vuccati muṭṭhassaccaṃ’’ (dha. sa. 1356).Asampajaññanti, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ asampajaññaṃ? Yaṃ aññāṇaṃ adassanaṃ avijjālaṅgī moho akusalamūla’’nti evaṃ vuttā avijjāyeva.Satisatiyeva.Sampajaññaṃñāṇaṃ.

Muṭṭhassacca (Lost Mindfulness): Is the loss of mindfulness, as it is said, "What is lost mindfulness? It is non-mindfulness, non-recollection, lack of mindfulness, non-remembering, non-retention, confusion, and muddling; this is called lost mindfulness" (dha. sa. 1356).Asampajañña (Lack of Clear Comprehension): Is simply ignorance (avijjā), as it is said, "What is lack of clear comprehension? It is unknowing, unseeing, being beclouded by ignorance, delusion, the root of unwholesomeness."Sati (Mindfulness): Is simply mindfulness.Sampajañña (Clear Comprehension): Is knowledge (ñāṇa).

Indriyesu aguttadvāratāti ‘‘tattha katamā indriyesu aguttadvāratā? Idhekacco cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā nimittaggāhī hotī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1352) nayena vitthārito indriyasaṃvarabhedo.Bhojane amattaññutāti ‘‘tattha katamā bhojane amattaññutā? Idhekacco appaṭisaṅkhā ayoniso āhāraṃ āhāreti davāya madāya maṇḍanāya vibhūsanāya. Yā tattha asantuṭṭhitā amattaññutā appaṭisaṅkhā bhojane’’ti evaṃ āgato bhojane amattaññubhāvo. Anantaraduko vuttappaṭipakkhanayena veditabbo.

Indriyesu aguttadvāratā (Unguardedness of the Senses): Is the lack of sense restraint explained in the manner beginning with, "Here, someone seeing a form with the eye is a taker of signs," (dha. sa. 1352) etc.Bhojane amattaññutā (Lack of Moderation in Food): Is the state of lacking moderation in food as described: "Here, someone partakes of food unwisely, without reflection, for indulgence, for intoxication, for beautification, for adornment. There is discontent, lack of moderation, and lack of reflection regarding food." The subsequent pair (anantaraduka) should be understood through the method of stating the opposite.

Paṭisaṅkhānabalanti ‘‘tattha katamaṃ paṭisaṅkhānabalaṃ? Yā paññā pajānanā’’ti evaṃ vitthāritaṃ appaṭisaṅkhāya akampanañāṇaṃ.Bhāvanābalanti bhāventassa uppannaṃ balaṃ. Atthato vīriyasambojjhaṅgasīsena satta bojjhaṅgā honti. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ bhāvanābalaṃ? Yā kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkammaṃ, idaṃ vuccati bhāvanābalaṃ. Sattabojjhaṅgā bhāvanābala’’nti.

Paṭisaṅkhānabala (Power of Reflection): Is the unshakeable knowledge of not reflecting, which is explained as "What is the power of reflection? It is wisdom, understanding."Bhāvanābala (Power of Development): Is the power that arises in one who develops. In essence, it refers to the seven factors of enlightenment (bojjhaṅga), with the factor of energy (vīriya) as the foremost. It has also been said, "What is the power of development? It is cultivating, developing, and repeatedly practicing skillful qualities; this is called the power of development. The seven factors of enlightenment are the power of development."

Satibalanti assatiyā akampanavasena satiyeva.Samādhibalanti uddhacce akampanavasena samādhiyeva.Samathosamādhi.Vipassanāpaññā. Samathova taṃ ākāraṃ gahetvā puna pavattetabbassa samathassa nimittavasenasamathanimittaṃ paggāhanimittepieseva nayo.Paggāhovīriyaṃ.Avikkhepoekaggatā. Imehi pana sati ca sampajaññañca paṭisaṅkhānabalañca bhāvanābalañca satibalañca samādhibalañca samatho ca vippassanā ca samathanimittañca paggāhanimittañca paggāho ca avikkhepo cāti chahi dukehi parato sīladiṭṭhisampadādukena ca lokiyalokuttaramissakā dhammā kathitā.

Satibala (Power of Mindfulness): Is simply mindfulness (sati) in the sense of being unshakable in the face of non-mindfulness.Samādhibala (Power of Concentration): Is simply concentration (samādhi) in the sense of being unshakable in the face of distraction.Samatho (Tranquility): Is concentration (samādhi).Vipassanā (Insight): Is wisdom (paññā).Samathanimittaṃ (Sign of Tranquility): Tranquility itself, after taking that form, again as a condition for tranquility that should be initiated.Paggāhanimittepi (Sign of Exertion): The same method applies to the sign of exertion.Paggāho (Exertion): Is energy (vīriya).Avikkhepo (Non-distraction): Is one-pointedness (ekaggatā). However, through these six pairs—mindfulness and clear comprehension, the power of reflection and the power of development, the power of mindfulness and the power of concentration, tranquility and insight, the sign of tranquility and the sign of exertion, exertion and non-distraction—and further through the pair of moral accomplishment and right view, qualities that are a mixture of mundane and supramundane have been spoken of.

Sīlavipattīti ‘‘tattha katamā sīlavipatti? Kāyiko vītikkamo…pe… sabbampi dussīlyaṃ sīlavipattī’’ti evaṃ vutto sīlavināsako asaṃvaro.Diṭṭhivipattīti ‘‘tattha katamā diṭṭhivipatti? Natthi dinnaṃ natthi yiṭṭha’’nti evaṃ āgatā sammādiṭṭhivināsikā micchādiṭṭhi.

Sīlavipattī (Moral Failure): "What is moral failure? It is transgression in bodily conduct… all immorality is moral failure," thus is said the destruction of morality, lack of restraint.Diṭṭhivipattī (Failure of View): "What is failure of view? There is no giving, there is no offering," thus is said wrong view that destroys right view.

Sīlasampadāti ‘‘tattha katamā sīlasampadā? Kāyiko avītikkamo’’ti evaṃ pubbe vuttasoraccameva sīlassa sampādanato paripūraṇato ‘‘sīlasampadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘sabbopi sīlasaṃvaro sīlasampadā’’ti idaṃ mānasikapariyādānatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Diṭṭhisampadāti ‘‘tattha katamā diṭṭhisampadā? Atthi dinnaṃ atthi yiṭṭhaṃ…pe… sacchikatvā pavedentīti yā evarūpā paññā pajānanā’’ti evaṃ āgataṃ diṭṭhipāripūribhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ.

Sīlasampadā (Moral Accomplishment): "What is moral accomplishment? It is non-transgression in bodily conduct," thus, what was previously said as gentleness (soracca) is called "moral accomplishment" because of the accomplishment and fulfillment of morality. Here, "all restraint in morality is moral accomplishment" is said for the purpose of mental purification.Diṭṭhisampadā (Accomplishment of View): "What is accomplishment of view? There is giving, there is offering… they declare, having realized for themselves; whatever such wisdom and understanding there is," thus is said the knowledge that is the fulfillment of view.

Sīlavisuddhīti visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ sīlaṃ. Abhidhamme panāyaṃ ‘‘tattha katamā sīlavisuddhi? Kāyiko avītikkamo vācasiko avītikkamo kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo, ayaṃ vuccati sīlavisuddhī’’ti evaṃ vibhattā.Diṭṭhivisuddhīti visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ dassanaṃ. Abhidhamme panāyaṃ ‘‘tattha katamā diṭṭhivisuddhi? Kammassakatañāṇaṃ saccānulomikañāṇaṃ maggasamaṅgissañāṇaṃ phalasamaṅgissañāṇa’’nti evaṃ vuttā. Ettha ca tividhaṃ duccaritaṃ attanā katampi parena katampi sakaṃ nāma na hoti atthabhañjanato. Sucaritaṃ sakaṃ nāma atthajananatoti evaṃ jānanaṃ kammassakatañāṇaṃ nāma. Tasmiṃ ṭhatvā bahuṃ vaṭṭagāmikammaṃ āyūhitvā sukhato sukheneva arahattaṃ pattā gaṇanapathaṃ vītivattā.Vipassanāñāṇaṃpana vacīsaccañca anulometi, paramatthasaccañca na vilometīti saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇanti vuttaṃ.

Sīlavisuddhī (Moral Purification): Is morality capable of leading to purification. However, in the Abhidhamma, this is distinguished as, "What is moral purification? It is non-transgression in bodily conduct, non-transgression in verbal conduct, non-transgression in bodily and verbal conduct; this is called moral purification."Diṭṭhivisuddhī (Purification of View): Is the vision capable of leading to purification. However, in the Abhidhamma, this is stated as, "What is purification of view? It is knowledge of the ownership of action (kammassakatañāṇa), knowledge conforming to the truths (saccānulomikañāṇa), knowledge belonging to those on the path (maggasamaṅgissañāṇa), knowledge belonging to those who have attained the fruit (phalasamaṅgissañāṇa)." Here, the three kinds of wrong conduct (duccarita), whether done by oneself or done by others, are not one's own in name, because they destroy benefit. Right conduct (sucarita) is one's own in name, because it generates benefit; thus, knowing in this way is called knowledge of the ownership of action. While standing in that (knowledge), after accumulating much action that leads to the cycle (of rebirth) and having attained arahantship easily from ease, they have transcended the reach of calculation.Vipassanāñāṇa (Insight Knowledge): However, because it conforms to verbal truth and does not violate ultimate truth, it is said to be knowledge conforming to the truths.

diṭṭhivisuddhīti ñāṇadassanaṃ kathitaṃ.Yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhānanti taṃsampayuttameva vīriyaṃ. Api ca purimapadena catumaggañāṇaṃ. Pacchimapadena taṃsampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ.Abhidhammepana ‘‘diṭṭhivisuddhi kho panāti yā paññā pajānanā amoho dhammavicayo sammādiṭṭhi. Yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhānanti yo cetasiko vīriyārambho sammāvāyāmo’’ti evaṃ ayaṃ duko vibhatto.

Diṭṭhivisuddhī (Purification of View): Is spoken of as knowledge and vision.Yathādiṭṭhissa ca padhāna (Effort in accordance with the view): Is the energy associated with that. Moreover, by the former term, it refers to the knowledge of the four paths. By the latter term, it refers to the energy associated with that. In the Abhidhamma, however, "Purification of view is wisdom, understanding, non-delusion, investigation of the Dhamma, right view. Effort in accordance with the view is the mental exertion, the right effort," thus, this pair is distinguished.

‘‘saṃvegoti jātibhayaṃ jarābhayaṃ byādhibhayaṃ maraṇabhaya’’nti evaṃ jātiādīni bhayato dassanañāṇaṃ. Saṃvejanīyaṃ ṭhānanti jātijarābyādhimaraṇaṃ. Etāni hi cattāri jāti dukkhā, jarā dukkhā, byādhi dukkho, maraṇaṃ dukkhanti evaṃ saṃveguppattikāraṇattāsaṃvejanīyaṃ ṭhānanti vuttāni.Saṃviggassa ca yoniso padhānanti evaṃ saṃvegajātassa upāyapadhānaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu anuppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ anuppādāya chandaṃ janetī’’ti evaṃ āgatavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

Saṃvego (Religious Urgency): "Is seeing birth, aging, sickness, and death as fearful." Thus, the knowledge of seeing birth, etc., as fearful. A place of religious urgency is birth, aging, sickness, and death. Because these four are the cause of the arising of religious urgency—birth is suffering, aging is suffering, sickness is suffering, death is suffering—therefore, they are called saṃvejanīyaṃ ṭhāna (a place of religious urgency).Saṃviggassa ca yoniso padhāna (Wise effort of one who is stirred): Thus, for one who has religious urgency, effort through appropriate means. This is a designation for the energy that has come in the manner of "Here, a bhikkhu generates desire for the non-arising of unarisen evil, unskillful qualities."

Asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesūti yā kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya asantuṭṭhassa bhiyyokamyatā, tāya hi samaṅgībhūto puggalo sīlaṃ pūretvā jhānaṃ uppādeti. Jhānaṃ labhitvā vipassanaṃ ārabhati. Āraddhavipassako arahattaṃ agahetvā antarā vosānaṃ nāpajjati.Appaṭivānitā ca padhānasminti ‘‘kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya sakkaccakiriyatā sātaccakiriyatā aṭṭhitakiriyatā anolīnavuttitā anikkhittachandatā anikkhittadhuratā āsevanā bhāvanā bahulīkamma’’nti evaṃ vuttā rattindivaṃ cha koṭṭhāse katvā jāgariyānuyogavasena āraddhe padhānasmiṃ arahattaṃ apatvā anivattanatā.

Asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesū (Dissatisfaction with skillful qualities): The person who is endowed with dissatisfaction in the development of skillful qualities and a desire for more, having fulfilled morality, generates jhāna. Having obtained jhāna, they begin insight. Having begun insight, without attaining arahantship, they do not come to an end in the interim.Appaṭivānitā ca padhānasmi (Non-retreat from exertion): Is the non-retreat from the exertion begun in the manner of vigilance (jāgariyānuyoga), dividing the day and night into six portions, until arahantship is attained, as described by "diligence, continuous action, sustained action, unremitting effort, unwavering intention, unflagging commitment, cultivation, development, and repeated practice of skillful qualities."

Vijjāti tisso vijjā.Vimuttīti dve vimuttiyo, cittassa ca adhimutti, nibbānañca. Ettha ca aṭṭha samāpattiyo nīvaraṇādīhi suṭṭhu muttattā adhimutti nāma. Nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatato muttattā vimuttīti veditabbaṃ.

Vijjā (Knowledge): Is the three knowledges (tisso vijjā).Vimuttī (Liberation): Is the two liberations: liberation of the mind and Nibbāna. Here, the eight attainments (samāpattiyo) are called liberation (adhimutti) because they are well freed from the hindrances, etc. Nibbāna is to be understood as liberation (vimuttī) because it is freed from all conditioned things.

Khaye ñāṇanti kilesakkhayakare ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ.Anuppāde ñāṇanti paṭisandhivasena anuppādabhūte taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesānaṃ vā anuppādapariyosāne uppanne ariyaphale ñāṇaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘khaye ñāṇanti maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇanti phalasamaṅgissa ñāṇa’’nti.Ime kho, āvusotiādi ekake vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti pañcatiṃsāya dukānaṃ vasena thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

Khaye ñāṇa (Knowledge of destruction): Is knowledge in the Noble Path that destroys defilements.Anuppāde ñāṇa (Knowledge of non-arising): Is knowledge in the Noble Fruits that have arisen at the cessation of non-arising in the sense of rebirth, or at the cessation of the non-arising of defilements to be destroyed by the respective paths. Therefore, it is said, "Knowledge of destruction is knowledge belonging to those on the path. Knowledge of non-arising is knowledge belonging to those who have attained the fruit."Ime kho, āvuso (These, friend): Etc., should be connected in the same way as stated in the section on pairs. Thus, through the thirty-five pairs, the Elder showed the essence of harmony.

Dukavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on Pairs is Finished.

Tikavaṇṇanā
Commentary on Triplets

305.Iti dukavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni tikavasena dassetuṃ puna ārabhi. Tattha lubbhatītilobho.Akusalañca taṃ mūlañca, akusalānaṃ vā mūlantiakusalamūlaṃ.Dussatītidoso.Muyhatītimoho.Tesaṃ paṭipakkhanayena alobhādayo veditabbā.

305. Having shown the essence of harmony through pairs, now, in order to show it through triplets, he begins again. There, lobho (greed), because it is greedy. Akusalamūlaṃ (Unwholesome root): Both unwholesome and a root, or a root of unwholesomeness.Doso (Hatred): Because it is hating.Moho (Delusion): Because it is deluded. Alobha (non-greed) etc. should be understood by way of their opposites.

duccaritāni.Kāyena duccaritaṃ, kāyato vā pavattaṃ duccaritantikāyaduccaritaṃ.Sesesupi eseva nayo. Suṭṭhu caritāni, sundarāni vā caritānītisucaritāni.Dvepi cete tikā paṇṇattiyā vā kammapathehi vā kathetabbā. Paññattiyā tāva kāyadvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamokāyaduccaritaṃ.Avītikkamokāyasucaritaṃ.Vacīdvāre paññattasikkhāpadassa vītikkamovacīduccaritaṃ,avītikkamovacīsucaritaṃ.Ubhayattha paññattassa sikkhāpadassa vītikkamovamanoduccaritaṃ,avītikkamomanosucaritaṃ.Ayaṃ paṇṇattikathā. Pāṇātipātādayo pana tisso cetanā kāyadvārepi vacīdvārepi uppannākāyaduccaritaṃ.Catasso musāvādādicetanāvacīduccaritaṃ.Abhijjhā byāpādo micchādiṭṭhīti tayo cetanāsampayuttadhammāmanoduccaritaṃ.Pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa uppannā tisso cetanāpi viratiyopi kāyasucaritaṃ. Musāvādādīhi viramantassa catasso cetanāpi viratiyopi vacīsucaritaṃ. Anabhijjhā abyāpādo sammādiṭṭhīti tayo cetanāsampayuttadhammā manosucaritanti ayaṃ kammapathakathā.

duccaritāni (Misconducts). Kāyaduccaritaṃ (Bodily Misconduct): Misconduct by way of the body, or misconduct proceeding from the body. The same method applies to the rest. sucaritāni (Good Conducts): Conducts well done, or conduct that is beautiful. Both of these triplets should be spoken of in terms of designation or in terms of courses of action (kammapatha). Firstly, in terms of designation, transgression of a precept that is designated at the door of the body is kāyaduccaritaṃ (bodily misconduct). Non-transgression is kāyasucaritaṃ (bodily good conduct). Transgression of a precept that is designated at the door of speech is vacīduccaritaṃ (verbal misconduct), non-transgression is vacīsucaritaṃ (verbal good conduct). Transgression of a precept designated in both places is manoduccaritaṃ (mental misconduct), non-transgression is manosucaritaṃ (mental good conduct). This is speaking in terms of designation. However, the three intentions (cetanā) of killing living beings, etc., arising at the door of the body or at the door of speech, are kāyaduccaritaṃ (bodily misconduct). The four intentions of false speech, etc., are vacīduccaritaṃ (verbal misconduct). The three mental states of covetousness, ill-will, and wrong view are manoduccaritaṃ (mental misconduct). The three intentions that arise in one who abstains from killing living beings, etc., and also the abstinences themselves, are bodily good conduct. The four intentions in one abstaining from false speech, etc., and also the abstinences themselves, are verbal good conduct. The three mental states of non-covetousness, non-ill-will, and right view are mental good conduct; this is speaking in terms of courses of action.

kāmavitakko.Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakkobyāpādavitakko.Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakkovihiṃsāvitakko.Tesu dve sattesupi saṅkhāresupi uppajjanti. Kāmavitakko hi piye manāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā vitakkentassa uppajjati. Byāpādavitakko appiye amanāpe satte vā saṅkhāre vā kujjhitvā olokanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva vināsanā uppajjati. Vihiṃsāvitakko saṅkhāresu nuppajjati. Saṅkhāro hi dukkhāpetabbo nāma natthi. Ime sattā haññantu vā ucchijjantu vā vinassantu vā mā vā ahesunti cintanakāle pana sattesu uppajjati.

kāmavitakko (Sensual thought). byāpādavitakko (Malevolent thought): Thought connected with ill-will.vihiṃsāvitakko (Harmful thought): Thought connected with harming. Of these, two arise in both beings and formations. Sensual thought arises in one who thinks sensually about beings or formations that are beloved and pleasing. Malevolent thought arises in one who, being angry at beings or formations that are unloved and unpleasing, from the time of looking with displeasure up until the destruction. Harmful thought does not arise in formations. Because there is no formation that should be made to suffer. However, it arises in beings at the time of thinking, "May these beings be killed, destroyed, ruined, or may they not be."

nekkhammavitakko.So asubhapubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti. Asubhajjhāne rūpāvacaro. Taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto vitakkoabyāpādavitakko.So mettāpubbabhāge kāmāvacaro hoti. Mettājhāne rūpāvacaro. Taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakkoavihiṃsāvitakko.So karuṇāpubbabhāge kāmāvacaro. Karuṇājhāne rūpāvacaro. Taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā uppannamaggaphalakāle lokuttaro. Yadā alobho sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā mettā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavanti. Yadā karuṇā sīsaṃ hoti, tadā itare dve tadanvāyikā bhavantīti. Kāmasaṅkappādayo vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Desanāmattameva hetaṃ. Atthato pana kāmavitakkādīnañca kāmasaṅkappādīnañca nānākaraṇaṃ natthi.

Nekkhammavitakko. In the preliminary stage of contemplating repulsiveness (asubha), it is in the Sensuous Sphere (kāmāvacara). In the meditation on repulsiveness (asubhajhāna), it is in the Form Sphere (rūpāvacara). Having made that jhāna the basis, at the time of the arising of the path and fruition (aggaphalakāle), it is supramundane (lokuttara). Thought associated with non-ill-will is abyāpādavitakko. In the preliminary stage of loving-kindness (mettā), it is in the Sensuous Sphere. In the loving-kindness meditation (mettājhāna), it is in the Form Sphere. Having made that jhāna the basis, at the time of the arising of the path and fruition, it is supramundane. Thought associated with non-harming is avihiṃsāvitakko. In the preliminary stage of compassion (karuṇā), it is in the Sensuous Sphere. In the compassion meditation (karuṇājhāna), it is in the Form Sphere. Having made that jhāna the basis, at the time of the arising of the path and fruition, it is supramundane. When non-greed (alobha) is the principal, then the other two (non-ill-will and non-harming) follow it. When loving-kindness is the principal, then the other two follow it. When compassion is the principal, then the other two follow it. Thoughts of sensual pleasure (Kāmasaṅkappā), etc., should be understood in the same way as stated above. This is just a matter of explanation. But in reality, there is no differentiation between thoughts of sensual pleasure, etc., and concepts of sensual pleasure, etc.

kāmasaññā.Byāpādapaṭisaṃyuttā saññābyāpādasaññā.Vihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyuttā saññāvihiṃsāsaññā.Tāsampi kāmavitakkādīnaṃ viya uppajjanākāro veditabbo. Taṃsampayuttāyeva hi etā.Nekkhammasaññādayopi nekkhammavitakkādisampayuttāyeva. Tasmā tāsampi tatheva kāmāvacarādibhāvo veditabbo.

Kāmasaññā. Perception associated with ill-will is byāpādasaññā. Perception associated with harming is vihiṃsāsaññā. Their manner of arising should also be understood like that of thoughts of sensual pleasure, etc. For these are associated with those same (thoughts). Nekkhammasaññādayo (Perceptions of renunciation), etc., are also associated with thoughts of renunciation (nekkhammavitakkā), etc. Therefore, their being in the Sensuous Sphere, etc., should be understood in the same way.

kāmadhātu.‘‘Byāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo. Ayaṃ vuccati byāpādadhātu. Dasasu āghātavatthūsu cittassa āghāto paṭighāto anattamanatā cittassā’’ti ayaṃbyāpādadhātu.‘‘Vihiṃsā paṭisaṃyutto takko vitakko micchāsaṅkappo. Ayaṃ vuccati vihiṃsādhātu. Idhekacco pāṇinā vā leḍḍunā vā daṇḍena vā satthena vā rajjuyā vā aññataraññatarena vā satte viheṭhetī’’ti ayaṃvihiṃsādhātu.Tattha dve kathā sabbasaṅgāhikā ca asambhinnā ca. Tattha kāmadhātuyā gahitāya itarā dve gahitāva honti, tato pana nīharitvā ayaṃ byāpādadhātu ayaṃ vihiṃsādhātūti dassetīti ayaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikakathā nāma. Kāmadhātuṃ kathento pana bhagavā byāpādadhātuṃ byāpādadhātuṭṭhāne, vihiṃsādhātuṃ vihiṃsādhātuṭṭhāne ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ kāmadhātu nāmāti kathesīti ayaṃ asambhinnakathā nāma.

Kāmadhātu. "A thought, a concept, a wrong intention, associated with ill-will. This is called the element of ill-will (byāpādadhātu). In the ten grounds of aversion (āghātavatthūsu), the mind's aversion, repugnance, displeasure" – this is byāpādadhātu. "A thought, a concept, a wrong intention, associated with harming. This is called the element of harming (vihiṃsādhātu). Here, someone harms beings with hand, clod, stick, knife, rope, or any other means" – this is vihiṃsādhātu. There, two discourses (kathā) are all-inclusive and non-mixed. There, by taking the element of sensual pleasure (kāmadhātu), the other two are already taken; then, by extracting from that, he shows ‘this is the element of ill-will, this is the element of harming’ – this is called the all-inclusive discourse. However, when the Blessed One (Bhagavā) speaks of the element of sensual pleasure, having placed the element of ill-will in the place of the element of ill-will and the element of harming in the place of the element of harming, he speaks of the remainder as the element of sensual pleasure – this is called the non-mixed discourse.

nekkhammadhātu.‘‘Abyāpādapaṭisaṃyutto takko…pe… ayaṃ vuccati abyāpādadhātu. Yā sattesu metti…pe… mettācetovimuttī’’ti ayaṃabyāpādadhātu.‘‘Avihiṃsāpaṭisaṃyutto takko…pe… ayaṃ vuccati avihiṃsādhātu. Yā sattesu karuṇā…pe… karuṇācetovimuttī’’ti ayaṃavihiṃsādhātu.Idhāpi vuttanayeneva dve kathā veditabbā.

Nekkhammadhātu. "A thought associated with non-ill-will… This is called the element of non-ill-will (abyāpādadhātu). That which is loving-kindness towards beings… the liberation of mind through loving-kindness" – this is abyāpādadhātu. "A thought associated with non-harming… This is called the element of non-harming (avihiṃsādhātu). That which is compassion towards beings… the liberation of mind through compassion" – this is avihiṃsādhātu. Here also, two discourses should be understood in the manner stated above.

Aparāpi tisso dhātuyoti aññāpi suññataṭṭhena tisso dhātuyo. Tāsu ‘‘tattha katamā kāmadhātu? Heṭṭhato avīcinirayaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā’’ti evaṃ vitthārito kāmabhavokāmadhātunāma. ‘‘Heṭṭhato brahmalokaṃ pariyantaṃ karitvā ākāsānañcāyatanupage deve pariyantaṃ karitvā’’ti evaṃ vitthāritā pana rūpārūpabhavā itarā dve dhātuyo. Dhātuyā āgataṭṭhānamhi hi bhavena paricchinditabbā. Bhavassa āgataṭṭhāne dhātuyā paricchinditabbā. Idha bhavena paricchedo kathito. Rūpadhātuādīsu rūpārūpadhātuyo rūpārūpabhavāyeva. Nirodhadhātuyā nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ.

Aparāpi tisso dhātuyoti (There are also three other elements): Other than these, there are also three elements in the sense of emptiness (suññataṭṭhena). Among those, "What is the element of sensual pleasure (kāmadhātu)? Having made the Avīci hell the lower limit," thus the Sensuous Existence (kāmabhava) expanded in this way is called kāmadhātu. "Having made the Brahma world the lower limit and having made the gods of the Sphere of Nothingness (ākāsānañcāyatanupage) the upper limit," thus the Form and Formless Existences (rūpārūpabhavā) expanded in this way are the other two elements. For in the place where an element (dhātu) is mentioned, it should be delimited by existence (bhava), and in the place where existence is mentioned, it should be delimited by the element. Here, delimitation by existence is spoken of. In the case of the Form Element (rūpadhātu), etc., the Form and Formless Elements are simply the Form and Formless Existences. In the case of the Cessation Element (nirodhadhātu), Nibbāna is spoken of.

Hīnādīsu hīnā dhātūti dvādasa akusalacittuppādā. Avasesā tebhūmakadhammāmajjhimadhātu.Nava lokuttaradhammāpaṇītadhātu.

Among Hīnā (inferior), etc., the inferior element (hīnā dhātu) refers to the twelve unwholesome cittuppādā (arising of consciousness). The remaining mundane (tebhūmaka) phenomena are the majjhimadhātu (intermediate element). The nine supramundane phenomena are the paṇītadhātu (excellent element).

Kāmataṇhāti pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo. Rūpārūpabhavesu pana rāgo jhānanikantisassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavavasena patthanābhavataṇhā.Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgovibhavataṇhā.Apica ṭhapetvā pacchimaṃ taṇhādvayaṃ sesataṇhā kāmataṇhā nāma. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamā bhavataṇhā? Bhavadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo. Ayaṃ vuccati bhavataṇhā. Tattha katamā vibhavataṇhā? Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati vibhavataṇhā. Avasesā taṇhā kāmataṇhā’’ti. Puna kāmataṇhādīsu pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo kāmataṇhā. Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgo itarā dve taṇhā. Abhidhamme panetā ‘‘kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto…pe… arūpadhātupaṭisaṃyutto’’ti evaṃ vitthāritā. Iminā vārena kiṃ dasseti? Sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā rajanīyaṭṭhena taṇhāvatthukāti sabbataṇhā kāmataṇhāya pariyādiyitvā tato nīharitvā itarā dve taṇhā dasseti. Rūpataṇhādīsu rūpabhave chandarāgorūpataṇhā.Arūpabhave chandarāgoarūpataṇhā.Ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgonirodhataṇhā.

Kāmataṇhāti (Sensual Craving): craving for the five strands of sense pleasure. But craving for the Form and Formless existences, craving associated with jhāna- delight and eternalism view, and desire in terms of existence is bhavataṇhā (craving for existence). Craving associated with annihilationism view is vibhavataṇhā (craving for non-existence). Moreover, setting aside the latter two cravings, the remaining craving is called sensual craving (kāmataṇhā). As he said, "What is craving for existence (bhavataṇhā)? The craving associated with the view of existence (bhavadiṭṭhi), attachment, the mind's attachment. This is called craving for existence. What is craving for non-existence (vibhavataṇhā)? The craving associated with the annihilation view (ucchedadiṭṭhi), attachment, the mind's attachment. This is called craving for non-existence. The remaining craving is sensual craving." Furthermore, among sensual craving, etc., craving for the five strands of sense pleasure is sensual craving. Desire and lust (chandarāgo) in the Form and Formless existences are the other two cravings. In the Abhidhamma, however, these are elaborated as "associated with the Sensuous Sphere… associated with the Formless Sphere." What does it show by this turn (vārena)? It shows that all the mundane (tebhūmaka) phenomena are objects of craving in the sense of attachment (rajanīyaṭṭhena) and that all craving is included in sensual craving; then, having extracted from that, he shows the other two cravings. Among form craving (rūpataṇhā), etc., desire and lust in the Form Existence (rūpabhava) is rūpataṇhā. Desire and lust in the Formless Existence (arūpabhava) is arūpataṇhā. Craving associated with the annihilation view is nirodhataṇhā (craving for cessation).

saṃyojanāni.Sati rūpādibhede kāye diṭṭhi, vijjamānā vā kāye diṭṭhītisakkāyadiṭṭhi.Vicinanto etāya kicchati, na sakkoti sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātuntivicikicchā.Sīlañca vatañca parāmasatītisīlabbataparāmāso.Atthato pana ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādinā nayena āgatā vīsativatthukā diṭṭhisakkāyadiṭṭhināma. ‘‘Satthari kaṅkhatī’’tiādinā nayena āgatā aṭṭhavatthukā vimativicikicchānāma. ‘‘Idhekacco sīlena suddhi vatena suddhi sīlabbatena suddhīti sīlaṃ parāmasati, vataṃ parāmasati, sīlabbataṃ parāmasati. Yā evarūpā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigata’’ntiādinā nayena āgato vipariyesaggāhosīlabbataparāmāsonāma.

saṃyojanāni. (The fetters): The view that there is a self (diṭṭhi) in the body, which is a collection of forms (rūpādibhede kāye); or the view existing in the body is sakkāyadiṭṭhi (self-identity view). Doubting, one is troubled by this; one cannot make a firm determination (sanniṭṭhānaṃ kātuṃ) is vicikicchā (doubt). Grasping at morality and vows (sīlañca vatañca parāmasati) is sīlabbataparāmāso (clinging to rites and rituals). In reality, however, the twenty-based view (vīsativatthukā diṭṭhi) that comes in the way of "regarding form as self (rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī)," etc., is called sakkāyadiṭṭhi. The eight-based uncertainty (aṭṭhavatthukā vimati) that comes in the way of "doubting the Teacher (satthari kaṅkhati)," etc., is called vicikicchā. "Here, someone (idhekacco) believes in purification by morality, purification by vows, purification by morality and vows. That sort of view, the adherence to views (diṭṭhigata)" – the perverted grasp (vipariyesaggāho) that comes in this way is called sīlabbataparāmāso.

Tayoāsavāti ettha cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena vā āsavanaṭṭhena vāāsavā.Tattha ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ito pubbe avijjā nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī’’ti, ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavataṇhāya bhavadiṭṭhiyā, ito pubbe bhavadiṭṭhi nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī’’ti evaṃ tāva cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena āsavā veditabbā. Cakkhuto rūpe savati āsavati sandati pavattati. Sotato sadde. Ghānato gandhe. Jivhāto rase. Kāyato phoṭṭhabbe. Manato dhamme savati āsavati sandati pavattatīti evaṃ āsavanaṭṭhena āsavāti veditabbā.

Tayo āsavāti (The three taints): Here, āsavā (taints) are (so called) in the sense of long association (cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena) or in the sense of flowing out (āsavanaṭṭhena). There, "The former limit of ignorance is not apparent, bhikkhus (bhikkhave), (saying) 'Before this, there was no ignorance, then afterwards it came into being'," "The former limit of craving for existence (bhavataṇhāya) and view of existence (bhavadiṭṭhiyā) is not apparent, bhikkhus, (saying) 'Before this, there was no view of existence, then afterwards it came into being'," thus, indeed, the taints should be understood in the sense of long association. From the eye, it flows out, taints, streams, and proceeds towards forms. From the ear, towards sounds. From the nose, towards odors. From the tongue, towards flavors. From the body, towards tactile objects. From the mind, it flows out, taints, streams, and proceeds towards mental objects – thus, the taints should be understood in the sense of flowing out.

kāmāsavonāma. ‘‘Yo bhavesu bhavacchando’’ti evaṃ vutto sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo, bhavavasena vā patthanābhavāsavonāma. ‘‘Dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā nayena āgatā avijjāavijjāsavonāmāti. Kāmabhavādayo kāmadhātuādivasena vuttāyeva.

kāmāsavo (sensuality taint). "That which is desire for existence in existences (Yo bhavesu bhavacchando)," thus the craving associated with eternalism view (sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo) that is spoken of, or desire in terms of existence is called bhavāsavo (existence taint). The ignorance that comes in the way of "Unknowing of suffering (Dukkhe aññāṇa)," etc., is called avijjāsavo (ignorance taint). The Sensuous and Form and Formless Existences have already been spoken of in terms of the Sensuous Sphere, etc.

kāmesanānāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā bhavesanā? Yo bhavesu bhavacchando bhavajjhosānaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhavesanā’’ti evaṃ vutto bhavagavesanarāgobhavesanānāma. ‘‘Tattha katamā brahmacariyesanā? Sassato lokoti vā…pe… neva hoti na nahoti tathāgato parammaraṇāti vā, yā evarūpā diṭṭhi diṭṭhigataṃ vipariyesaggāho, ayaṃ vuccati brahmacariyesanā’’ti evaṃ vuttā diṭṭhigatikasammatassa brahmacariyassa gavesanadiṭṭhibrahmacariyesanānāma. Na kevalañca bhavarāgadiṭṭhiyova, tadekaṭṭhaṃ kammampi esanāyeva. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamā kāmesanā? Kāmarāgo tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati kāmesanā. Tattha katamā bhavesanā? Bhavarāgo tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhavesanā. Tattha katamā brahmacariyesanā? Antaggāhikā diṭṭhi tadekaṭṭhaṃ akusalaṃ kāyakammaṃ vacīkammaṃ manokammaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati brahmacariyesanā’’ti.

kāmesanā (sensual search). "What is the search for existence (bhavesanā)? That which is desire for existence in existences (Yo bhavesu bhavacchando), absorption in existence, this is called the search for existence," thus the craving for searching for existence that is spoken of is called bhavesanā. "What is the search for a holy life (brahmacariyesanā)? (The view) 'The world is eternal… The Tathāgata neither exists nor does not exist after death,' that sort of view, adherence to views, perverted grasp, this is called the search for a holy life," thus the view of searching for the holy life that is consented to by the adherents to views (diṭṭhigatikasammatassa) is called brahmacariyesanā. Not only craving for existence and views, but also the action (kamma) in one place with them is also a search. For it was said, "What is the sensual search? Sensual craving, the unwholesome bodily action, verbal action, and mental action in one place with it, this is called the sensual search. What is the search for existence? Craving for existence, the unwholesome bodily action, verbal action, and mental action in one place with it, this is called the search for existence. What is the search for a holy life? The extreme view (antaggāhikā diṭṭhi), the unwholesome bodily action, verbal action, and mental action in one place with it, this is called the search for a holy life."

vidhāti vuccati.Seyyohamasmīti iminā seyyasadisahīnānaṃ vasena tayo mānā vuttā. Sadisahīnesupi eseva nayo.

vidhā (sorts) is said. Seyyohamasmīti (I am better): by way of better, equal, and inferior, three kinds of conceit (mānā) are spoken of. The same method (nayo) applies to equal and inferior.

mānonāma seyyassa tividho, sadisassa tividho, hīnassa tividhotinavavidhohoti. Tattha ‘‘seyyassa seyyohamasmī’’ti māno rājūnañceva pabbajitānañca uppajjati.

māno (conceit): Conceit towards the better is threefold, conceit towards the equal is threefold, conceit towards the inferior is threefold – thus, it is navavidho (ninefold). There, "I am better than the better" – this conceit arises in both kings and renunciants.

Rājā hi raṭṭhena vā dhanavāhanehi vā ‘‘ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. Pabbajitopi sīladhutaṅgādīhi ‘‘ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. ‘‘Seyyassa sadisohamasmī’’ti mānopi etesaṃyeva uppajjati. Rājā hi raṭṭhena vā dhanavāhanehi vā aññarājūhi saddhiṃ mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. Pabbajitopi sīladhutaṅgādīhipi aññena bhikkhunā mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. ‘‘Seyyassa hīnohamasmī’’ti mānopi etesaṃyeva uppajjati. Yassa hi rañño raṭṭhaṃ vā dhanavāhanādīni vā nātisampannāni honti, so mayhaṃ rājāti vohāramukhamattameva, kiṃ rājā nāma ahanti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti. Pabbajitopi appalābhasakkāro ahaṃ dhammakathiko bahussuto mahātheroti kathāmattakameva, kiṃ dhammakathiko nāmāhaṃ kiṃ bahussuto kiṃ mahāthero yassa me lābhasakkāro natthīti etaṃ mānaṃ karoti.

Indeed, the king makes this conceit, "Who is equal to me?" with his kingdom or wealth and vehicles. The renunciant also makes this conceit, "Who is equal to me?" with his morality, ascetic practices (dhutaṅgādīhi). "I am equal to the better" – this conceit also arises in these same (people). Indeed, the king makes this conceit, "What difference is there for me (mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti)?" with other kings with his kingdom or wealth and vehicles. The renunciant also makes this conceit, "What difference is there for me with another bhikkhu (bhikkhunā mayhaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti)?" with his morality, ascetic practices, etc. "I am inferior to the better" – this conceit also arises in these same (people). Indeed, the king whose kingdom or wealth and vehicles, etc., are not very prosperous makes this conceit, "I am only called a king; what sort of king am I (kiṃ rājā nāma ahaṃ)?" The renunciant who has little gain and honor (appalābhasakkāro) also makes this conceit, "I am only just called a Dhamma speaker, learned, and a great elder (mahātheroti kathāmattakameva); what sort of Dhamma speaker am I, what sort of learned one, what sort of great elder, since I have no gain and honor (lābhasakkāro natthīti)?"

‘‘Sadisassa seyyohamasmī’’ti mānādayo amaccādīnaṃ uppajjanti. Amacco vā hi raṭṭhiyo vā bhogayānavāhanādīhi ko mayā sadiso añño rājapuriso atthīti vā mayhaṃ aññehi saddhiṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti vā amaccoti nāmameva mayhaṃ, ghāsacchādanamattampi me natthi, kiṃ amacco nāmāhanti vā ete māne karoti.

The conceits "I am better than the equal," etc., arise in ministers, etc. Indeed, the minister, with his kingdom or wealth, vehicles, etc., makes these conceits: "What other royal officer is equal to me? What difference is there for me with others? I only have the name 'minister'; I don't even have enough for mere food and clothing; what sort of minister am I?"

‘‘Hīnassa seyyohamasmī’’ti mānādayo dāsādīnaṃ uppajjanti. Dāso hi mātito vā pitito vā ko mayā sadiso añño dāso nāma atthi, aññe jīvituṃ asakkontā kucchihetu dāsā jātā, ahaṃ pana paveṇīāgatattā seyyoti vā paveṇīāgatabhāvena ubhatosuddhikadāsattena asukadāsena nāma saddhiṃ kiṃ mayhaṃ nānākaraṇanti vā kucchivasenāhaṃ dāsabya upagato, mātāpitukoṭiyā pana me dāsaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, kiṃ dāso nāma ahanti vā ete māne karoti. Yathā ca dāso, evaṃ pukkusacaṇḍālādayopi ete māne karontiyeva.

The conceits "I am better than the inferior," etc., arise in slaves, etc. Indeed, the slave makes these conceits: "Who is equal to me among other slaves by birth from my mother or father? Others, unable to live, are born as slaves for the sake of their bellies; but I am better because I come from a lineage (paveṇīāgatattā seyyoti vā). What difference is there for me with such-and-such a slave, since I have purity on both sides because of being from a lineage?" Or, "I have undertaken slavery due to my belly; but I have no slave status by the lineage of my mother and father; what sort of slave am I (kiṃ dāso nāma ahaṃ)?" And just as the slave, so too the Pukkusa-cāṇḍālas, etc., also make these same conceits.

Ettha ca seyyassa seyyohamasmīti, ca sadisassa sadisohamasmīti ca hīnassa hīnohamasmīti ca ime tayo mānā yāthāvamānā nāma arahattamaggavajjhā. Sesā cha mānā ayāthāvamānā nāma paṭhamamaggavajjhā.

Here, the three conceits – "I am better than the better (seyyassa seyyohamasmīti)," "I am equal to the equal (sadisassa sadisohamasmīti)," and "I am inferior to the inferior (hīnassa hīnohamasmīti)" – are called conceits as they really are (yāthāvamānā) and are to be abandoned by the path of Arahatship (arahattamaggavajjhā). The remaining six conceits are called conceits not as they really are (ayāthāvamānā) and are to be abandoned by the first path (paṭhamamaggavajjhā).

Tayo addhāti tayo kālā.Atīto addhātiādīsu dvepariyāyā suttantapariyāyo ca abhidhammapariyāyo ca. Suttantapariyāyena paṭisandhito pubbeatīto addhānāma. Cutito pacchāanāgato addhānāma. Saha cutipaṭisandhīhi tadantaraṃpaccuppanno addhānāma. Abhidhammapariyāyena tīsu khaṇesu bhaṅgato uddhaṃatīto addhānāma. Uppādato pubbeanāgatoaddhānāma. Khaṇattayepaccuppanno addhānāma. Atītādibhedo ca nāma ayaṃ dhammānaṃ hoti, na kālassa. Atītādibhede pana dhamme upādāya idha paramatthato avijjamānopi kālo teneva vohārena vuttoti veditabbo.

Tayo addhāti (The three times): the three periods. Among Atīto addhāti (the past time), etc., there are two modes: the Suttanta mode and the Abhidhamma mode. In the Suttanta mode, before rebirth (paṭisandhito pubbe) is called atīto addhā. After death (cutito pacchā) is called anāgato addhā. Including death and rebirth together (Saha cutipaṭisandhīhi), the interval between them is called paccuppanno addhā. In the Abhidhamma mode, from dissolution upwards in the three moments (tīsu khaṇesu bhaṅgato uddhaṃ) is called atīto addhā. Before arising (uppādato pubbe) is called anāgato addhā. In the three moments (Khaṇattaye) is called paccuppanno addhā. And this distinction of past, etc., belongs to phenomena (dhammānaṃ), not to time (kālassa). However, it should be understood that here, relying on the phenomena distinguished as past, etc., time, which does not exist in reality (paramatthato avijjamānopi), is spoken of in that very usage (vohārena).

Tayo antāti tayo koṭṭhāsā. ‘‘Kāyabandhanassa anto jīratī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 278) hi antoyeva anto. ‘‘Esevanto dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) parabhāgo anto. ‘‘Antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.80) ettha lāmakabhāvo anto. ‘‘Sakkāyo kho, āvuso, paṭhamo anto’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 6.61) koṭṭhāso anto. Idha koṭṭhāso adhippeto.Sakkāyoti pañcupādānakkhandhā.Sakkāyasamudayoti tesaṃ nibbattikā purimataṇhā.Sakkāyanirodhoti ubhinnaṃ appavattibhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ. Maggo pana nirodhādhigamassa upāyattā nirodhe gahite gahitovāti veditabbo.

Tayo antāti (The three ends): the three divisions (koṭṭhāsā). In "The end of the body's binding wears out (Kāyabandhanassa anto jīratī)," etc. (cūḷava. 278), the end itself is the end. In "This is the end of suffering (Esevanto dukkhassā)," etc. (saṃ. ni. 2.51), the further part is the end. In "This is the end, bhikkhus, of livelihoods (Antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikāna)," etc. (saṃ. ni. 3.80), the wretched state is the end. In "Self-identity (Sakkāyo), friend, is the first end (Sakkāyo kho, āvuso, paṭhamo anto)," etc. (a. ni. 6.61), the division is the end. Here, the division is intended. Sakkāyo (self-identity) means the five aggregates subject to clinging (pañcupādānakkhandhā). Sakkāyasamudayo (the arising of self-identity) means the former craving that is the cause of their production (tesaṃ nibbattikā purimataṇhā). Sakkāyanirodho (the cessation of self-identity) means Nibbāna, which is the non-occurrence of both (ubhinnaṃ appavattibhūtaṃ nibbānaṃ). However, the path should be understood as already included when cessation is taken, since it is the means of attaining cessation (nirodhādhigamassa upāyattā nirodhe gahite gahitovāti veditabbo).

Dukkhadukkhatāti dukkhabhūtā dukkhatā. Dukkhavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ.Saṅkhāradukkhatāti saṅkhārabhāvena dukkhatā. Adukkhamasukhāvedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sā hi saṅkhatattā uppādajarābhaṅgapīḷitā, tasmā aññadukkhasabhāvavirahato saṅkhāradukkhatāti vuttā.Vipariṇāmadukkhatāti vipariṇāme dukkhatā. Sukhavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sukhassa hi vipariṇāme dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tasmā sukhaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhatāti vuttaṃ. Apica ṭhapetvā dukkhavedanaṃ sukhavedanañca sabbepi tebhūmakā dhammā ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā’’ti vacanato saṅkhāradukkhatāti veditabbā.

Dukkhadukkhatāti (Suffering as suffering): suffering that is of the nature of suffering (dukkhabhūtā dukkhatā). This is a name for painful feeling (dukkhavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ). Saṅkhāradukkhatāti (Suffering of formations): suffering by way of being conditioned (saṅkhārabhāvena dukkhatā). This is a name for neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling (adukkhamasukhāvedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ). For it is conditioned (saṅkhatattā), afflicted by arising, aging, and dissolution (uppādajarābhaṅgapīḷitā); therefore, since it is devoid of the nature of other suffering, it is called the suffering of formations (saṅkhāradukkhatāti vuttā). Vipariṇāmadukkhatāti (Suffering of change): suffering in change (vipariṇāme dukkhatā). This is a name for pleasant feeling (sukhavedanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ). For suffering arises in the change of pleasure (Sukhassa hi vipariṇāme dukkhaṃ uppajjati); therefore, pleasure is called the suffering of change (vipariṇāmadukkhatāti vuttaṃ). Moreover, setting aside painful feeling and pleasant feeling, all the mundane (tebhūmaka) phenomena should be understood as the suffering of formations, since it is said, "All conditioned things are suffering (sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā)."

Micchattaniyatoti micchāsabhāvo hutvā niyato. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ ānantariyakammassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammāsabhāve niyatosammattaniyato.Catunnaṃ ariyamaggānametaṃ nāmaṃ. Na niyatotianiyato.Avasesānaṃ dhammānametaṃ nāmaṃ.

Micchattaniyato means fixed in a state of wrongness. This name applies to the act of committing an ānantarika-kamma along with fixed wrong view. Sammattaniyato means fixed in a state of rightness. This name applies to the four noble paths. Aniyato means not fixed. This name applies to the remaining dhammas.

Ārabbhāti āgamma.Kaṅkhatīti kaṅkhaṃ uppādeti.Vicikicchatīti vicinanto kicchaṃ āpajjati, sanniṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti.Nādhimucchatīti tattha adhimucchituṃ na sakkoti.Na sampasīdatīti taṃ ārabbha pasādaṃ āropetuṃ na sakkoti.

Ārabbhā means having approached. Kaṅkhatī means generates doubt. Vicikicchatī means encountering difficulty while investigating, is unable to decide. Nādhimucchatī means is unable to be resolute in that. Na sampasīdatī means is unable to establish confidence regarding that.

Arakkheyyānīti na rakkhitabbāni. Tīsu dvāresu paccekaṃ rakkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi, sabbāni satiyā eva rakkhitānīti dīpeti.Natthi tathāgatassāti. ‘‘Idaṃ nāma me sahasā uppannaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ, imāhaṃ yathā me paro na jānāti, tathā rakkhāmi, paṭicchādemī’’ti evaṃ rakkhitabbaṃ natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Kiṃ pana sesakhīṇāsavānaṃ kāyasamācārādayo aparisuddhāti? No aparisuddhā. Na pana tathāgatassa viya parisuddhā. Appassutakhīṇāsavo hi kiñcāpi lokavajjaṃ nāpajjati, paṇṇattiyaṃ pana akovidattā vihārakāraṃ kuṭikāraṃ sahagāraṃ sahaseyyanti evarūpā kāyadvāre āpattiyo āpajjati. Sañcarittaṃ padasodhammaṃ uttarichappañcavācaṃ bhūtārocananti evarūpā vacīdvāre āpattiyo āpajjati. Upanikkhittasādiyanavasena manodvāre rūpiyappaṭiggāhaṇāpattiṃ āpajjati, dhammasenāpatisadisassāpi hi khīṇāsavassa manodvāre saupārambhavasena manoduccaritaṃ uppajjati eva.

Arakkheyyānī means not to be guarded. It indicates that there is no individual guarding function at each of the three doors; all are guarded by mindfulness alone. Natthi tathāgatassā means: "There is no need for the Tathāgata to guard or conceal a bodily misconduct that has suddenly arisen, thinking, 'I will guard it so that others do not know.'" The same method applies to the remaining cases. But are the bodily conduct, etc., of other Khīṇāsavas not pure? No, they are pure. However, they are not as pure as those of the Tathāgata. A Khīṇāsava with little learning, although not committing offenses against the world, due to being unskilled in regulations, commits offenses through the body door, such as concerning the construction of monasteries, huts, shared residences, and shared beds. They commit offenses through the speech door, such as regarding communication, the correct wording, unsolicited five or six words, and announcing what is factual. They commit the offense of accepting money through the mind door, due to the manner of having deposited. Even a Khīṇāsava like the Dhammasenāpati (Sāriputta) can have mind-door misconduct arise in a blaming manner.

Cātumavatthusmiñhi pañcahi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ sāriputtamoggallānānaṃ paṇāmitakāle tesaṃ atthāya cātumeyyakehi sakyehi bhagavati khamāpite thero bhagavatā ‘‘kinti te sāriputta ahosi mayā bhikkhusaṅghe paṇāmite’’ti puṭṭho ahaṃ parisāya abyattabhāvena satthārā paṇāmito. Ito dāni paṭṭhāya paraṃ na ovadissāmīti cittaṃ uppādetvā āha ‘‘evaṃ kho me, bhante, ahosi bhagavatā bhikkhusaṅgho paṇāmito, appossukko dāni bhagavā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ anuyutto viharissati, mayampi dāni appossukkā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāraṃ anuyuttā viharissāmā’’ti.

For, on the occasion when Sāriputta and Moggallāna bowed down to the Blessed One in the Cātumavatthu, along with five hundred monks, the Sakyans of Cātumeyya, having asked forgiveness from the Blessed One for their sake, the Elder, when asked by the Blessed One, "What was it like for you, Sāriputta, when I dismissed the Sangha of monks?" replied, having generated the thought, "From now on, I will not advise anyone else," due to being dismissed by the Teacher because of not being able to tolerate the assembly. "It was like this for me, Bhante: the Blessed One has dismissed the Sangha of monks; now the Blessed One will live without concern, devoted to dwelling in happiness in this very life; now we too, without concern, will live devoted to dwelling in happiness in this very life."

Athassa tasmiṃ manoduccarite upārambhaṃ āropento satthā āha – ‘‘āgamehi tvaṃ, sāriputta na kho te, sāriputta, punapi evarūpaṃ cittaṃ uppādetabba’’nti. Evaṃ paraṃ na ovadissāmi nānusāsissāmīti vitakkitamattampi therassa manoduccaritaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Bhagavato pana ettakaṃ nāma natthi, anacchariyañcetaṃ. Sabbaññutaṃ pattassa duccaritaṃ na bhaveyya. Bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa chabbassāni padhānaṃ anuyuñjantassāpi panassa nāhosi. Udaracchaviyā piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṃ allīnāya ‘‘kālaṅkato samaṇo gotamo’’ti devatānaṃ vimatiyā uppajjamānāyapi ‘‘siddhattha kasmā kilamasi? Sakkā bhoge ca bhuñjituṃ puññāni ca kātu’’nti mārena pāpimatā vuccamānassa ‘‘bhoge bhuñjissāmī’’ti vitakkamattampi nuppajjati. Atha naṃ māro bodhisattakāle chabbassāni buddhakāle ekaṃ vassaṃ anubandhitvā kiñci vajjaṃ apassitvā idaṃ vatvā pakkāmi –

Then, the Teacher, bringing blame upon that mind-misconduct of his, said, "Wait, Sāriputta, such a thought should not be produced by you again, Sāriputta." Thus, even the mere thought of not advising or instructing others was considered mind-misconduct for the Elder. But the Blessed One does not have even this much, and this is not surprising. For one who has attained omniscience, misconduct could not occur. Even for one standing in the Bodhisatta stage, engaging in striving for six years, it did not occur. Even when the deities' doubt arose, "The ascetic Gotama is dead," due to the spine adhering to the stomach skin, even when Māra the Evil One was saying, "Siddhattha, why do you exert yourself? It is possible to enjoy pleasures and do meritorious deeds," not even the mere thought of "I will enjoy pleasures" arose.

‘‘Sattavassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ;

Then Māra, having followed him for six years in the Bodhisatta stage and for one year in the Buddha stage, having seen no fault, spoke this and departed:

Aṭṭhārasa buddhadhammānāma natthi tathāgatassa kāyaduccaritaṃ, natthi vacīduccaritaṃ, natthi manoduccaritaṃ, atīte buddhassa appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, anāgate, paccuppanne buddhassa appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, sabbaṃ kāyakammaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇānuparivatti, sabbaṃ vacīkammaṃ, sabbaṃ manokammaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇānuparivatti, natthi chandassa hāni, natthi vīriyassa hāni, natthi satiyā hāni, natthi davā, natthi ravā, natthi calitaṃ natthi sahasā, natthi abyāvaṭo mano, natthi akusalacittanti.

The eighteen Buddha-dhammas are: the Tathāgata has no bodily misconduct, no verbal misconduct, no mental misconduct; in the past the Buddha's knowledge is unimpeded, in the future, in the present the Buddha's knowledge is unimpeded, all bodily action of the Buddha, the Blessed One, follows knowledge, all verbal action, all mental action of the Buddha, the Blessed One, follows knowledge; there is no decline of desire, no decline of effort, no decline of mindfulness, no distraction, no agitation, no wavering, no suddenness, no lack of thoroughness of mind, no unwholesome thought.

Kiñcanāti palibodhā.Rāgo kiñcananti rāgo uppajjamāno satte bandhati palibundhati tasmā kiñcananti vuccati. Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo.

Kiñcanā means obstructions. Rāgo kiñcana means: Rāga, when arising, binds and obstructs beings, therefore it is called an obstruction. The same method applies to the other two.

Aggīti anudahanaṭṭhenaaggi. Rāgaggīti rāgo uppajjamāno satte anudahati jhāpeti, tasmā aggīti vuccati. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Tattha vatthūni ekā daharabhikkhunī cittalapabbatavihāre uposathāgāraṃ gantvā dvārapālarūpakaṃ olokayamānā ṭhitā. Athassā anto rāgo uppanno. Sā teneva jhāyitvā kālamakāsi. Bhikkhuniyo gacchamānā ‘‘ayaṃ daharā ṭhitā, pakkosatha, na’’nti āhaṃsu. Ekā gantvā kasmā ṭhitāsīti hatthe gaṇhi. Gahitamattā parivattitvā papatā. Idaṃ tāva rāgassa anudahanatāya vatthu. Dosassa pana anudahanatāyamanopadosikādevā. Mohassa anudahanatāyakhiḍḍāpadosikādevā daṭṭhabbā. Mohavasena hi tāsaṃ satisammoso hoti. Tasmā khiḍḍāvasena āhārakālaṃ ativattitvā kālaṅkaronti.

Aggī means fire, in the sense of burning. Rāgaggī means: Rāga, when arising, burns and scorches beings, therefore it is called fire. The same method applies to the others. Regarding this, the events include: Once, a young bhikkhunī went to the uposatha hall in the Cittalapabbata monastery and stood looking at a doorkeeper figure. Then, rāga arose in her internally. She was scorched by that very thing and died. Bhikkhunīs were going and said, "This young one is standing, call her to the uposatha." One went and took her hand, asking why she was standing. As soon as she was touched, she turned over and fell. This, indeed, is an event regarding the burning nature of rāga. However, for the burning nature of dosa, the Manopadosikā deities should be seen. For the burning nature of moha, the Khīḍḍāpadosikā deities should be seen. For, due to moha, their mindfulness is confused. Therefore, exceeding the time for food due to amusement, they die.

Āhuneyyaggītiādīsu āhunaṃ vuccati sakkāro, āhunaṃ arahantītiāhuneyyā.Mātāpitaro hi puttānaṃ bahūpakāratāya āhunaṃ arahanti. Tesu vippaṭipajjamānā puttā nirayādīsu nibbattanti. Tasmā kiñcāpi mātāpitaro nānudahanti, anudahanassa pana paccayā honti. Iti anudahanaṭṭhena āhuneyyaggīti vuccanti. Svāyamattho mittavindakavatthunā dīpetabbo –

In Āhuneyyaggī, etc., āhuna means honoring; those worthy of honoring are āhuneyyā. For, parents are worthy of honoring due to being of great assistance to their children. Children who act improperly towards them are reborn in hells, etc. Therefore, although parents do not burn, they are the causes for burning. Thus, they are called āhuneyyaggī in the sense of burning. This meaning should be shown by the Mittavindaka story –

Mittavindako hi mātarā ‘‘tāta, ajja uposathiko hutvā vihāre sabbarattiṃ dhammassavanaṃ suṇa, sahassaṃ te dassāmī’’ti vutto dhanalobhena uposathaṃ samādāya vihāraṃ gantvā idaṃ ṭhānaṃ akutobhayanti sallakkhetvā dhammāsanassa heṭṭhā nipanno sabbarattiṃ niddāyitvā gharaṃ agamāsi. Mātā pātova yāguṃ pacitvā upanāmesi. So sahassaṃ gahetvāva pivi. Athassa etadahosi – ‘‘dhanaṃ saṃharissāmī’’ti. So nāvāya samuddaṃ pakkhanditukāmo ahosi. Atha naṃ mātā ‘‘tāta, imasmiṃ kule cattālīsakoṭidhanaṃ atthi, alaṃ gamanenā’’ti nivāresi. So tassā vacanaṃ anādiyitvā gacchati eva. Mātā purato aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ kujjhitvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayhaṃ purato tiṭṭhatī’’ti pādena paharitvā patitaṃ antaraṃ katvā agamāsi.

For Mittavindaka, when told by his mother, "Dear, today, observe the uposatha and listen to the Dhamma all night in the monastery; I will give you a thousand," having undertaken the uposatha out of greed for wealth, went to the monastery and, considering this place to be safe from all directions, lay down under the Dhamma seat and slept all night, then went home. The mother, having cooked rice-gruel in the morning, offered it. He drank it after taking the thousand. Then this occurred to him: "I will accumulate wealth." He wanted to set out to sea on a ship. Then the mother stopped him, "Dear, there is wealth worth forty crores in this family; enough of going." He, not heeding her word, kept going. The mother stood in front. Then, being angry, he struck her with his foot, saying, "This one is standing in front of me," pushed her down, made an interval, and went away.

Mātā uṭṭhahitvā ‘‘mādisāya mātari evarūpaṃ kammaṃ katvā gatassa te gataṭṭhāne sukhaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃsaññī nāma tvaṃ puttā’’ti āha. Tassa nāvaṃ āruyha gacchato sattame divase nāvā aṭṭhāsi. Atha te manussā ‘‘addhā ettha pāpapuriso atthi salākaṃ dethā’’ti āhaṃsu. Salākā diyyamānā tasseva tikkhattuṃ pāpuṇāti. Te tassa uḷumpaṃ datvā taṃ samudde pakkhipiṃsu. So ekaṃ dīpaṃ gantvā vimānapetīhi saddhiṃ sampattiṃ anubhavanto tāhi ‘‘purato purato mā agamāsī’’ti vuccamānopi taddiguṇaṃ taddiguṇaṃ sampattiṃ passanto anupubbena khuracakkadharaṃ ekaṃ addasa. Tassa taṃ cakkaṃ padumapupphaṃ viya upaṭṭhāsi. So taṃ āha – ‘‘ambho, idaṃ tayā piḷandhitaṃ padumaṃ mayhaṃ dehī’’ti. ‘‘Na idaṃ sāmi padumaṃ, khuracakkaṃ eta’’nti. So ‘‘vañcesi maṃ, tvaṃ kiṃ mayā padumaṃ adiṭṭhapubba’’nti vatvā tvaṃ lohitacandanaṃ vilimpitvā piḷandhanaṃ padumapupphaṃ mayhaṃ na dātukāmoti āha. So cintesi ‘‘ayampi mayā katasadisaṃ kammaṃ katvā tassa phalaṃ anubhavitukāmo’’ti. Atha naṃ ‘‘handa re’’ti vatvā tassa matthake cakkaṃ pakkhipi. Tena vuttaṃ –

The mother, having arisen, said, "Will there be happiness for you in the place you have gone, having done such an action to a mother like me?" He boarded the ship and, while going, on the seventh day, the ship stopped. Then those people said, "Surely, there is an evil person here; give a lottery ticket." As the lottery ticket was being given, it came to him three times. They gave him a raft and threw him into the sea. He went to an island and, while experiencing prosperity with the vimāna-female beings, even when being told by them, "Do not go further, further," seeing prosperity twice as great, twice as great, gradually he saw a razor-wheel bearer. That wheel appeared to him like a lotus flower. He said to him, "Mister, give me this lotus that you are wearing." "This is not a lotus, sir; this is a razor wheel." He, "You deceive me! Have I never seen a lotus before?" said, "You are unwilling to give me the lotus flower that you are wearing, having anointed with red sandalwood." He thought, "This one also wants to experience the result of having done an action similar to what I did." Then, saying "Here, you!" he threw the wheel on his head. Therefore, it was said –

‘‘Catubbhi aṭṭhajjhagamā, aṭṭhāhipi ca soḷasa;

‘‘By four he reached eight, and by eight sixteen;
By sixteen thirty-two, greed consumed the wheel;

Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake’’ti. (jā. 1.1.104).

For the person struck by desire, the wheel spins on his head.’’ (jā. 1.1.104).

Gahapatīti pana gehasāmiko vuccati. So mātugāmassa sayanavatthālaṅkārādianuppadānena bahūpakāro. Taṃ aticaranto mātugāmo nirayādīsu nibbattati, tasmā sopi purimanayeneva anudahanaṭṭhena gahapataggīti vutto.

Gahapatī means householder. He is of great assistance by providing bed, clothes, ornaments, etc., for the woman. The woman who transgresses against him is reborn in hells, etc. Therefore, he too, in the same way as before, is called gahapataggī in the sense of burning.

Tattha vatthu – kassapabuddhassa kāle sotāpannassa upāsakassa bhariyā aticārinī ahosi. So taṃ paccakkhato disvā ‘‘kasmā tvaṃ evaṃ karosī’’ti āha. Sā ‘‘sacāhaṃ evarūpaṃ karomi, ayaṃ me sunakho viluppamāno khādatū’’ti vatvā kālaṅkatvā kaṇṇamuṇḍakadahe vemānikapetī hutvā nibbattā. Divā sampattiṃ anubhavati, rattiṃ dukkhaṃ. Tadā bārāṇasīrājā migavaṃ caranto araññaṃ pavisitvā anupubbena kaṇṇamuṇḍakadahaṃ sampatto tāya saddhiṃ sampattiṃ anubhavati. Sā taṃ vañcetvā rattiṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavati. So ñatvā ‘‘kattha nu kho gacchatī’’ti piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gantvā avidūre ṭhito kaṇṇamuṇḍakadahato nikkhamitvā taṃ ‘‘paṭapaṭa’’nti khādamānaṃ ekaṃ sunakhaṃ disvā asinā dvidhā chindi. Dve ahesuṃ. Puna chinne cattāro. Puna chinne aṭṭha. Puna chinne soḷasa ahesuṃ. Sā ‘‘kiṃ karosi sāmī’’ti āha. So ‘‘kiṃ ida’’nti āha. Sā ‘‘evaṃ akatvā kheḷapiṇḍaṃ bhūmiyaṃ niṭṭhubhitvā pādena ghaṃsāhī’’ti āha. So tathā akāsi. Sunakhā antaradhāyiṃsu. Taṃ divasaṃ tassā kammaṃ khīṇaṃ. Rājā vippaṭisārī hutvā gantuṃ āraddho. Sā ‘‘mayhaṃ, sāmi, kammaṃ khīṇaṃ mā agamā’’ti āha. Rājā asutvāva gato.

Regarding this, an event: In the time of Kassapa Buddha, the wife of a sotāpanna lay follower was an adulteress. He, seeing her directly, said, "Why are you doing this?" She, "If I do such a thing, may this dog devour me while tearing me apart!" having said this, died and was reborn as a vimāna-petī in the Kaṇṇamuṇḍaka lake. She experiences prosperity by day, suffering by night. Then, the king of Bārāṇasī, wandering for hunting, entered the forest and gradually reached the Kaṇṇamuṇḍaka lake, experiencing prosperity with her. She deceived him and experienced suffering at night. He, knowing, followed her from behind, "Where is she going?" and, standing not far away, saw a dog coming out of the Kaṇṇamuṇḍaka lake devouring her, tearing her apart, and cut it in two with a sword. There were two. When cut again, there were four. When cut again, there were eight. When cut again, there were sixteen. She said, "What are you doing, sir?" He said, "What is this?" She said, "Without doing that, spit a lump of saliva on the ground and rub it with your foot." He did so. The dogs disappeared. That day, her kamma was exhausted. The king, repenting, began to go. She said, "My kamma is exhausted, sir, do not go." The king went without listening.

Dakkhiṇeyyaggīti ettha panadakkhiṇāti cattāro paccayā, bhikkhusaṅgho dakkhiṇeyyo. So gihīnaṃ tīsu saraṇesu pañcasu sīlesu dasasu sīlesu mātāpituupaṭṭhāne dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇaupaṭṭhāneti evamādīsu kalyāṇadhammesu niyojanena bahūpakāro, tasmiṃ micchāpaṭipannā gihī bhikkhusaṅghaṃ akkositvā paribhāsitvā nirayādīsu nibbattanti, tasmā sopi purimanayeneva anudahanaṭṭhena dakkhiṇeyyaggīti vutto. Imassa panatthassa vibhāvanatthaṃ vimānavatthusmiṃ revatīvatthu vitthāretabbaṃ.

In Dakkhiṇeyyaggī, dakkhiṇā means the four requisites, the Sangha of monks is dakkhiṇeyya. They are of great assistance to laypeople by enjoining them in wholesome dhammas such as the three refuges, the five precepts, the ten precepts, attending to parents, and attending to righteous ascetics and brahmins; laypeople who act improperly towards them, having reviled and insulted the Sangha of monks, are reborn in hells, etc. Therefore, they too, in the same way as before, are called dakkhiṇeyyaggī in the sense of burning. For the elucidation of this meaning, the Revatī story in the Vimānavatthu should be expanded.

tividhenāti tīhi koṭṭhāsehi.Saṅgahoti jātisañjātikiriyagaṇanavasena catubbidho saṅgaho. Tattha sabbe khattiyā āgacchantūtiādiko (ma. ni. 1.462) jātisaṅgaho. Sabbe kosalakātiādiko sañjātisaṅgaho. Sabbe hatthārohātiādiko kiriyasaṅgaho. Cakkhāyatanaṃ katamaṃ khandhagaṇanaṃ gacchatīti? Cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhagaṇanaṃ gacchatīti. Hañci cakkhāyatanaṃ rūpakkhandhena saṅgahitanti ayaṃ gaṇanasaṅgaho, so idha adhippeto. Tasmā tividhena rūpasaṅgahoti tīhi koṭṭhāsehi rūpagaṇanāti attho.

tividhenā means with three sections. Saṅgaho means collection, fourfold collection by way of birth, origin, action, and calculation. Therein, "Let all the nobles come," etc. (ma. ni. 1.462) is birth collection. "All Kosalans," etc., is origin collection. "All elephant riders," etc., is action collection. "Which aggregate calculation does the eye-base go to? The eye-base goes to the form aggregate calculation." If the eye-base is collected by the form aggregate, this is calculation collection, which is intended here. Therefore, "tividhena rūpasaṅgahoti" means the calculation of form with three sections.

Sanidassanādīsu attānaṃ ārabbha pavattena cakkhuviññāṇasaṅkhātena saha nidassanenātisanidassanaṃ.Cakkhupaṭihananasamatthato saha paṭighenātisappaṭighaṃ.Taṃ atthato rūpāyatanameva. Cakkhuviññāṇasaṅkhātaṃ nāssa nidassanantianidassanaṃ.Sotādipaṭihananasamatthato saha paṭighenātisappaṭighaṃ.Taṃ atthato cakkhāyatanādīni nava āyatanāni. Vuttappakāraṃ nāssa nidassanantianidassanaṃ.Nāssa paṭighotiappaṭighaṃ.Taṃ atthato ṭhapetvā dasāyatanāni avasesaṃ sukhumarūpaṃ.

In Sanidassanā, etc., sanidassanaṃ means with manifestation, together with the manifestation consisting of eye-consciousness that occurs in relation to oneself. Sappaṭighaṃ means with resistance, together with being capable of resisting the eye. That, in meaning, is only the form-āyatana. Anidassanaṃ means that manifestation is not for that, consisting of eye-consciousness. Sappaṭighaṃ means with resistance, together with being capable of resisting the ear, etc. That, in meaning, is the nine āyatanas, beginning with the eye-āyatana. Anidassanaṃ means that manifestation of the type mentioned is not for that. Appaṭighaṃ means that there is no resistance for that. That, in meaning, is the remaining subtle form, setting aside the ten āyatanas.

Tayo saṅkhārāti sahajātadhamme ceva samparāye phaladhamme ca saṅkharonti rāsī karontīti saṅkhārā. Abhisaṅkharotīti abhisaṅkhāro. Puñño abhisaṅkhāropuññābhisaṅkhāro.

Tayo saṅkhārā means: Saṅkhārā, because they construct and heap up co-arisen dhammas as well as resultant dhammas in the afterlife. Abhisaṅkharoti means to construct. Puñño abhisaṅkhāro means puññābhisaṅkhāro, meritorious construction.

‘‘Tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalā cetanā kāmāvacarā rūpāvacarā dānamayā sīlamayā bhāvanāmayā’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ kāmāvacarakusalamahācittacetanānaṃ, pañcannaṃ rūpāvacarakusalacetanānañcetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ettha ca dānasīlamayā aṭṭheva cetanā honti. Bhāvanāmayā terasāpi. Yathā hi paguṇaṃ dhammaṃ sajjhāyamāno ekaṃ dve anusandhiṃ gatopi na jānāti, pacchā āvajjanto jānāti, evameva kasiṇaparikammaṃ karontassa paguṇajjhānaṃ paccavekkhantassa ñāṇavippayuttāpi bhāvanā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhāvanāmayā terasāpī’’ti.

"What is wholesome volitional formation? Wholesome intention relating to the sense sphere, relating to the form sphere, consisting of giving, consisting of morality, consisting of mental development," this is a designation for the intentions of the eight sense-sphere wholesome great consciousnesses and the five form-sphere wholesome consciousnesses. Here, only eight intentions consist of giving and morality, but all thirteen consist of mental development. Just as someone reciting a well-practiced Dhamma may not recognize one or two connections, but later, when reflecting, understands, so too, for one performing the preliminary work for a kasiṇa and reviewing a well-practiced jhāna, mental development occurs even without the association of knowledge. Therefore, it is said, "all thirteen consist of mental development."

Tattha dānamayādīsu ‘‘dānaṃ ārabbha dānamadhikicca yā uppajjati cetanā sañcetanā cetayitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati dānamayo puññābhisaṅkhāro. Sīlaṃ ārabbha, bhāvanaṃ ārabbha, bhāvanamadhikicca yā uppajjati cetanā sañcetanā cetayitattaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati bhāvanāmayo puññābhisaṅkhāro’’ti ayaṃ saṅkhepadesanā.

Regarding giving, morality, etc., "the intention, volition, and act of intending that arise in connection with giving, on account of giving, is called wholesome volitional formation consisting of giving. The intention, volition, and act of intending that arise in connection with morality, in connection with mental development, on account of mental development, is called wholesome volitional formation consisting of mental development." This is a summary explanation.

Cīvarādīsu pana catūsu paccayesu rūpādīsu vā chasu ārammaṇesu annādīsu vā dasasu dānavatthūsu taṃ taṃ dentassa tesaṃ uppādanato paṭṭhāya pubbabhāge, pariccāgakāle, pacchā somanassacittena anussaraṇe cāti tīsu kālesu pavattā cetanā dānamayā nāma. Sīlapūraṇatthāya pana pabbajissāmīti vihāraṃ gacchantassa, pabbajantassa manorathaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā pabbajito vatamhi sādhu sādhūti āvajjantassa, pātimokkhaṃ saṃvarantassa, cīvarādayo paccaye paccavekkhantassa, āpāthagatesu rūpādīsu cakkhudvārādīni saṃvarantassa, ājīvaṃ sodhentassa ca pavattā cetanā sīlamayā nāma.

However, the intention that occurs in the three periods—from the beginning of producing robes and the other four requisites, or the six sense objects such as forms, or the ten objects of giving such as food, while giving each thing; at the time of relinquishing; and later, when recollecting with a mind of gladness—is called consisting of giving. But the intention that occurs for the purpose of fulfilling morality—when going to a monastery thinking, "I will ordain"; when ordaining, bringing the aspiration to its peak; when ordained, reflecting, "Good, good is my observance!"; when observing the Pātimokkha; when reflecting on the requisites such as robes; when restraining the eye-door, etc., from forms and other things that have come into the field of vision; and when purifying one's livelihood—is called consisting of morality.

Paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttena vipassanāmaggena ‘‘cakkhuṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato bhāventassa…pe… manaṃ. Rūpe. Dhamme. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manoviññāṇaṃ. Cakkhusamphassaṃ…pe… manosamphassaṃ. Cakkhusamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ…pe… manosamphassajaṃ vedanaṃ. Rūpasaññaṃ, jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato bhāventassa pavattā cetanā bhāvanāmayā nāmā’’ti ayaṃ vitthārakathā.

According to the path of insight stated in the Paṭisambhidā, "the intention that occurs while developing the eye as impermanent, suffering, and not-self...pe... the mind; forms; phenomena; eye-consciousness...pe... mind-consciousness; eye-contact...pe... mind-contact; feeling born of eye-contact...pe... feeling born of mind-contact; perception of form; old age and death as impermanent, suffering, and not-self—is called consisting of mental development." This is a detailed explanation.

apuññābhisaṅkhāro.Dvādasaakusalacittasampayuttānaṃ cetanānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘tattha katamo apuññābhisaṅkhāro? Akusalacetanā kāmāvacarā, ayaṃ vuccati apuññābhisaṅkhāro’’ti. Āneñjaṃ niccalaṃ santaṃ vipākabhūtaṃ arūpameva abhisaṅkharotītiāneñjābhisaṅkhāro.Catunnaṃ arūpāvacarakusalacetanānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamo āneñjābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalacetanā arūpāvacarā, ayaṃ vuccati āneñjābhisaṅkhāro’’ti.

Unwholesome Volitional Formation: This is a designation for the intentions associated with the twelve unwholesome consciousnesses. It was also said, "What is unwholesome volitional formation? Unwholesome intention relating to the sense sphere; this is called unwholesome volitional formation." Imperturbable Volitional Formation: Because it volitionally forms only the formless, which is unwavering, still, peaceful, and the result [of past action]. This is a designation for the four formless-sphere wholesome consciousnesses. As it was said, "What is imperturbable volitional formation? Wholesome intention relating to the formless sphere; this is called imperturbable volitional formation."

Puggalattikesattavidho purisapuggalo, tisso sikkhā sikkhatītisekkho.Khīṇāsavo sikkhitasikkhattā puna na sikkhissatītiasekkho.Puthujjano sikkhāhi paribāhiyattānevasekkho nāsekkho.

In the Personal Triplet, a person in seven types of individuals, one who trains in the three trainings is called a trainee (sekha). An arahant, having completed training, will not train again, and is called a non-trainee (asekha). An ordinary person, being excluded from the trainings, is neither a trainee nor a non-trainee (neva sekho nāsekho).

jātittheronāma. ‘‘Cattārome, bhikkhave, therakaraṇā dhammā. Idha, bhikkhave, thero sīlavā hoti, bahussuto hoti, catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ lābhī hoti, āsavānaṃ khayā bahussuto hoti, catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ lābhī hoti, āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ diṭṭheva dhamme sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā upasampajja viharati. Ime kho, bhikkhave, cattāro therakaraṇā dhammā’’ti (a. ni. 4.22). Evaṃ vuttesu dhammesu ekena vā anekehi vā samannāgatodhammatheronāma. Aññataro theranāmako bhikkhūti evaṃ theranāmako vā, yaṃ vā pana mahallakakāle pabbajitaṃ sāmaṇerādayo disvā thero theroti vadanti, ayaṃsammutitheronāma.

Elder by Birth (jātitthero): "Monks, there are these four qualities that make one an elder. Here, monks, an elder is virtuous, learned, has attained the four jhānas, and through the destruction of the āsavas, having realized it for himself with direct knowledge, in this very life, enters and abides in the liberation of mind, liberation by wisdom, that are without āsavas. These, monks, are the four qualities that make one an elder" (A.N. 4.22). Elder by Dhamma (dhammathero): One endowed with one or many of the qualities stated in this way. Elder by Convention (sammutithero): A bhikkhu who is called an elder in some way, or whom novices and others call "elder, elder" upon seeing him ordained in old age.

Puññakiriyavatthūsudānamevadānamayaṃ.Puññakiriyā ca sā tesaṃ tesaṃ ānisaṃsānaṃ vatthu cātipuññakiriyavatthu.Itaresupi dvīsu eseva nayo. Atthato pana pubbe vuttadānamayacetanādivaseneva saddhiṃ pubbabhāgaaparabhāgacetanāhi imāni tīṇi puññakiriyavatthūni veditabbāni. Ekamekañcettha pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya kāyena karontassa kāyakammaṃ hoti. Tadatthaṃ vācaṃ nicchārentassa vacīkammaṃ. Kāyaṅgavācaṅgaṃ acopetvā manasā cintentassa manokammaṃ. Annādīni dentassa cāpi annadānādīni demīti vā dānapāramiṃ āvajjetvā vā dānakāle dānamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti. Vattasīse ṭhatvā dadato sīlamayaṃ. Khayato vayato sammasanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā dadato bhāvanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu hoti.

Among the Bases for Wholesome Action, giving alone is consisting of giving (dānamayaṃ). A wholesome action and a basis for the benefits related to each of those is a base for wholesome action (puññakiriyavatthu). The same method applies to the other two. But in meaning, these three bases for wholesome action should be understood together with the wholesome intention consisting of giving, etc., mentioned earlier, as well as with the intentions of the prior and subsequent phases. Here, for each one, while performing it with the body from the prior phase onward, there is bodily action (kāyakamma). While uttering speech for that purpose, there is verbal action (vacīkamma). While thinking in the mind without activating bodily or verbal elements, there is mental action (manokamma). And while giving food and other things, either while intending "I am giving gifts of food, etc.," or while adverting to the perfection of giving at the time of giving, there is a base for wholesome action consisting of giving. While standing on the foundation of virtue and giving, there is a base for wholesome action consisting of morality. While establishing contemplation on arising and passing away, there is a base for wholesome action consisting of mental development.

Aparānipi satta puññakiriyavatthūni apacitisahagataṃ puññakiriyavatthu, veyyāvaccasahagataṃ, pattānuppadānaṃ, pattabbhanumodanaṃ, desanāmayaṃ, savanamayaṃ, diṭṭhijugataṃ puññakiriyavatthūti. Tattha mahallakaṃ disvā paccuggamanapattacīvarappaṭiggahaṇaabhivādanamaggasampadānādivasena apacitisahagataṃ veditabbaṃ. Vuḍḍhatarānaṃ vattappaṭipattikaraṇavasena, gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuṃ disvā pattaṃ gahetvā gāme bhikkhaṃ samādapetvā upasaṃharaṇavasena, ‘‘gaccha bhikkhūnaṃ pattaṃ āharā’’ti sutvā vegena gantvā pattāharaṇādivasena ca veyyāvaccasahagataṃ veditabbaṃ. Cattāro paccaye datvā sabbasattānaṃ patti hotūti pavattanavasena pattānuppadānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Parehi dinnāya pattiyā sādhu suṭṭhūti anumodanāvasena pattabbhanumodanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Eko ‘‘evaṃ maṃ ‘dhammakathiko’ti jānissantī’’ti icchāya ṭhatvā lābhagaruko hutvā deseti, taṃ na mahapphalaṃ. Eko attano paguṇadhammaṃ apaccāsīsamāno paresaṃ deseti, idaṃ desanāmayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu nāma. Eko suṇanto ‘‘iti maṃ ‘saddho’ti jānissantī’’ti suṇāti, taṃ na mahapphalaṃ. Eko ‘‘evaṃ me mahapphalaṃ bhavissatī’’ti hitappharaṇena muducittena dhammaṃ suṇāti, idaṃ savanamayaṃ puññakiriyavatthu. Diṭṭhijugataṃ pana sabbesaṃ niyamalakkhaṇaṃ. Yaṃkiñci puññaṃ karontassa hi diṭṭhiyā ujubhāveneva mahapphalaṃ hoti.

There are also seven other bases for wholesome action: a base for wholesome action accompanied by respect, accompanied by service, giving transference of merit, rejoicing in others' merit, consisting of teaching, consisting of listening, and accompanied by right view. Here, that accompanied by respect should be understood as in the manner of rising to greet, receiving the bowl and robe, saluting, and providing the right of way upon seeing an elder. That accompanied by service should be understood as in the manner of performing duties for those older, taking the bowl of a bhikkhu who has entered the village for alms and assisting in obtaining alms in the village, and in the manner of approaching quickly and bringing a bowl, etc., upon hearing "go and bring the bowl of the bhikkhus." That giving transference of merit should be understood as in the manner of sharing by saying, "May the merit be for all beings" after giving the four requisites. That rejoicing in others' merit should be understood as in the manner of rejoicing in the merit given by others by saying, "Good, excellent." One who teaches with the intention that "they will know me as a Dhamma speaker" and becomes attached to gain does not gain great fruit. One who teaches the Dhamma he has mastered to others without expecting anything, this is called a base for wholesome action consisting of teaching. One who listens with the intention that "they will know me as faithful" does not gain great fruit. One who listens to the Dhamma with a gentle mind and with the thought "thus, great fruit will be mine" with the intention of benefiting [others], this is a base for wholesome action consisting of listening. However, that accompanied by right view is the defining characteristic of all [wholesome actions]. Indeed, while one is doing any kind of merit, great fruit comes about simply through the straightness of [one's] view.

Iti imesaṃ sattannaṃ puññakiriyavatthūnaṃ purimeheva tīhi saṅgaho veditabbo. Ettha hi apacitiveyyāvaccāni sīlamaye. Pattidānapattabbhanumodanāni dānamaye. Desanāsavanāni bhāvanāmaye. Diṭṭhijugataṃ tīsupi saṅgahaṃ gacchati.

Thus, the inclusion of these seven bases for wholesome action should be understood with the first three. Here, respect and service are included in that consisting of morality. Giving transference of merit and rejoicing in others' merit are included in that consisting of giving. Teaching and listening are included in that consisting of mental development. That accompanied by right view extends to inclusion in all three.

Codanāvatthūnīti codanākāraṇāni.Diṭṭhenāti maṃsacakkhunā vā dibbacakkhunā vā vītikkamaṃ disvā codeti.Sutenāti pakatisotena vā dibbasotena vā parassa saddaṃ sutvā codeti.Parisaṅkāya vāti diṭṭhaparisaṅkitena vā sutaparisaṅkitena vā mutaparisaṅkitena vā codeti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo.

Grounds for Accusation (codanāvatthūni) means reasons for accusation. By what is seen (diṭṭhena) means accusing after seeing a transgression with the physical eye or the divine eye. By what is heard (sutena) means accusing after hearing the sound of another with the ordinary ear or the divine ear. Or by suspicion (parisaṅkāya vā) means accusing based on suspicion of what is seen, heard, or thought. This is the summary here, but the detailed explanation should be understood in the same manner as stated in the Samantapāsādikā.

Kāmūpapattiyoti kāmūpasevanā kāmappaṭilābhā vā.Paccupaṭṭhitakāmāti nibaddhakāmā nibaddhārammaṇā.Seyyathāpi manussāti yathā manussā. Manussā hi nibaddheyeva vatthusmiṃ vasaṃ vattenti. Yattha paṭibaddhacittā honti, satampi sahassampi datvā mātugāmaṃ ānetvā nibaddhabhogaṃ bhuñjanti.Ekacce devānāma catudevalokavāsino. Tepi nibaddhavatthusmiṃyeva vasaṃ vattenti.Ekacce vinipātikānāma nerayike ṭhapetvā avasesā macchakacchapādayopi hi nibaddhavatthusmiṃyeva vasaṃ vattenti. Maccho attano macchiyā kacchapo kacchapiyāti.Nimminitvā nimminitvāti nīlapītādivasena yādisaṃ yādisaṃ attano rūpaṃ icchanti, tādisaṃ tādisaṃ nimminitvā āyasmato anuruddhassa purato manāpakāyikā devatā viya.Nimmānaratīti evaṃ sayaṃ nimmite nimmite nimmāne rati etesanti nimmānaratī.Paranimmitakāmāti parehi nimmitakāmā. Tesañhi manaṃ ñatvā pare yathārucitaṃ kāmabhogaṃ nimminanti, te tattha vasaṃ vattenti. Kathaṃ parassa manaṃ jānantīti? Pakatisevanavasena. Yathā hi kusalo sūdo rañño bhuñjantassa yaṃ yaṃ so bahuṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ taṃ tassa ruccatīti jānāti, evaṃ pakatiyā abhirucitārammaṇaṃ ñatvā tādisakaṃyeva nimminanti. Te tattha vasaṃ vattenti, methunaṃ sevanti. Keci pana therā ‘‘hasitamattena olokitamattena āliṅgitamattena ca tesaṃ kāmakiccaṃ ijjhatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘etaṃ pana natthī’’ti paṭikkhittaṃ. Na hi kāyena aphusantassa phoṭṭhabbaṃ kāmakiccaṃ sādheti. Channampi hi kāmāvacarānaṃ kāmā pākatikā eva. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

Enjoyment of Sensual Pleasures (kāmūpapattiyo) means attending to sensual pleasures or obtaining sensual pleasures. Sensual pleasures constantly present (paccupaṭṭhitakāmā) means sensual pleasures that are continuous, with continuous objects. Just as humans (seyyathāpi manussā) means like humans. Indeed, humans conduct their lives dwelling only on what is continuously [present]. They bring a woman, giving even a hundred or a thousand [coins] for whatever they are attached to, and enjoy continuous pleasure. Some gods (ekacce devā) means those dwelling in the four deva realms. They too conduct their lives dwelling only on what is continuously [present]. Some beings in the states of loss (ekacce vinipātikā) means, except for those in hell, even the remaining fish, turtles, etc., conduct their lives dwelling only on what is continuously [present]—a fish with its [female] fish, a turtle with its [female] turtle. Having created and created (nimminitvā nimminitvā) means, according to whatever form they wish in terms of blue, yellow, etc., having created such a form and assuming a lovely divine body before venerable Anuruddha. Delighting in creation (nimmānaratī) means those who delight in these created and created creations themselves are the Delighting in Creation gods. Controlling what is created by others (paranimmitakāmā) means sensual pleasures created by others. Indeed, knowing their minds, others create desired sensual pleasures according to [their] liking, and they conduct their lives there. How do they know the minds of others? By means of habitual association. Just as a skilled cook knows what the king likes while he is eating by what he takes a lot of, so too, knowing the object naturally preferred, they create just such a thing. They conduct their lives there, engaging in sexual intercourse. But some elders say that "their sexual activity is accomplished merely by smiling, looking, or embracing," but this has been refuted in the commentary with "but that is not so." Indeed, without touching the tangible with the body, the tangible does not accomplish sexual activity. Indeed, sensual pleasures are natural for all six sense-sphere [realms]. It was also said—

‘‘Cha ete kāmāvacarā, sabbakāmasamiddhino;

"These six are sense-sphere [deities], successful in all sensual pleasures;
How long is the total lifespan of all of them?" (Vibha. 1023)

Sukhūpapattiyoti sukhappaṭilābhā.Uppādetvā uppādetvā sukhaṃ viharantīti te heṭṭhā paṭhamajjhānasukhaṃ nibbattetvā upari vipākajjhānasukhaṃ anubhavantīti attho.Sukhena abhisannāti dutiyajjhānasukhena tintā.Parisannāti samantato tintā.Paripūrāti paripuṇṇā.Paripphuṭāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Idampi vipākajjhānasukhameva sandhāya vuttaṃ.Ahosukhaṃ ahosukhanti tesaṃ kira bhavalobho mahā uppajjati. Tasmā kadāci karahaci evaṃ udānaṃ udānenti.Santamevāti paṇītameva.Tusitāti tato uttariṃ sukhassa apatthanato santuṭṭhā hutvā.Sukhaṃ paṭivedentīti tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ anubhavanti.

Enjoyment of Happiness (sukhūpapattiyo) means obtaining happiness. Having produced and produced, they live happily (uppādetvā uppādetvā sukhaṃ viharantī) means, having produced the happiness of the first jhāna below, they experience the happiness of the resultant jhāna above. Drenched with happiness (sukhena abhisannā) means drenched with the happiness of the second jhāna. Saturated (parisannā) means saturated all around. Complete (paripūrā) means perfect. Suffused (paripphuṭā) is a synonym for that. This too was said referring to the happiness of the resultant jhāna. Oh, happiness! Oh, happiness! (ahosukhaṃ ahosukhaṃ) means a great craving for existence arises for them. Therefore, sometimes they exclaim in this way. Peaceful indeed (santamevā) means excellent indeed. Content (tusitā) means being content because there is no desire for happiness beyond that. They experience happiness (sukhaṃ paṭivedentī) means they experience the happiness of the third jhāna.

Sekkhā paññāti satta ariyapaññā. Arahato paññāasekkhā.Avasesā paññānevasekkhānāsekkhā.

Trainee's wisdom (sekkhā paññā) means the seven noble wisdoms. The wisdom of an arahant is non-trainee's wisdom (asekkhā). The remaining wisdom is neither-trainee-nor-non-trainee's wisdom (nevasekkhānāsekkhā).

Cintāmayādīsu ayaṃ vitthāro – ‘‘tattha katamā cintāmayā paññā? Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā sippāyatanesu yogavihitesu vā vijjāṭṭhānesu kammassakataṃ vā saccānulomikaṃ vā rūpaṃ aniccanti vā…pe… viññāṇaṃ aniccanti vā yaṃ evarūpaṃ anulomikaṃ khantiṃ diṭṭhiṃ ruciṃ muttiṃ pekkhaṃ dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato asutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccaticintāmayā paññā.Tattha katamā sutamayā paññā? Yogavihitesu vā kammāyatanesu…pe… dhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ parato sutvā paṭilabhati, ayaṃ vuccatisutamayā paññā.(Tattha katamā bhāvanāmayā paññā?) Sabbāpi samāpannassa paññābhāvanāmayā paññā’’ti (vibha. 768-69).

Regarding wisdom based on thinking (cintāmayā) and the others, this is the detailed explanation: "What is wisdom based on thinking? In [relation to] suitable vocational activities, suitable crafts, suitable branches of knowledge, or contemplating in accordance with the [law of] kamma or the truth(s), that form is impermanent...pe... that consciousness is impermanent, whatever such inclination, acceptance, liking, freedom, expectation, tolerance of Dhamma-contemplation is attained without hearing it from another, this is called wisdom based on thinking. What is wisdom based on learning? In [relation to] suitable vocational activities...pe... tolerance of Dhamma-contemplation is attained after hearing it from another, this is called wisdom based on learning. (What is wisdom based on mental development?) All wisdom of one who has attained [jhāna] is wisdom based on mental development" (Vibha. 768-69).

Sutāvudhanti sutameva āvudhaṃ. Taṃ atthato tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ. Tañhi nissāya bhikkhu paññāvudhaṃ nissāya sūro yodho avikampamāno mahākantāraṃ viya saṃsārakantāraṃ atikkamati avihaññamāno. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘sutāvudho, bhikkhave, ariyasāvako akusalaṃ pajahati, kusalaṃ bhāveti, sāvajjaṃ pajahati, anavajjaṃ bhāveti, suddhamattānaṃ pariharatī’’ti (a. ni. 7.67).

Sword of learning (sutāvudha) means learning itself is a sword. In meaning, that is the Tipiṭaka, the word of the Buddha. Indeed, relying on that, a bhikkhu, relying on the sword of wisdom, crosses the wilderness of saṃsāra without being shaken or harmed, like a heroic warrior crosses a great wilderness. Therefore, it was said: "A noble disciple, monks, with learning as his sword, abandons the unwholesome, develops the wholesome, abandons the blameworthy, develops the blameless, and maintains a pure self" (A.N. 7.67).

Pavivekāvudhanti ‘‘kāyaviveko cittaviveko upadhiviveko’’ti ayaṃ tividhopi vivekova āvudhaṃ. Tassa nānākaraṇaṃ kāyaviveko vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ. Cittaviveko ca parisuddhacittānaṃ paramavodānappattānaṃ. Upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ. Imasmiñhi tividhe viveke abhirato, na kutoci bhāyati. Tasmā ayampi avassayaṭṭhena āvudhanti vutto. Lokiyalokuttarapaññāva āvudhaṃpaññāvudhaṃ.Yassa sā atthi, so na kutoci bhāyati, na cassa koci bhāyati. Tasmā sāpi avassayaṭṭheneva āvudhanti vuttā.

Sword of seclusion (pavivekāvudha) means "seclusion of body, seclusion of mind, seclusion from attachments" this threefold seclusion itself is a sword. Its distinctions [are as follows]: seclusion of body [is for] those who delight in renunciation, in bodies detached [from sensual pleasures]. Seclusion of mind [is for] those with purified minds, who have attained supreme cleansing. Seclusion from attachments [is for] individuals without attachments. Indeed, one who delights in this threefold seclusion fears nothing. Therefore, this too is called a sword in the sense of a support. Wisdom both mundane and supramundane is the sword of wisdom (paññāvudha). One who has that fears nothing, nor does anyone fear him. Therefore, that too is called a sword in the sense of a support.

Anaññātaññassāmītindriyanti ito pubbe anaññātaṃ aviditaṃ dhammaṃ jānissāmīti paṭipannassa uppannaṃ indriyaṃ. Sotāpattimaggañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Aññindriyanti aññābhūtaṃ ājānanabhūtaṃ indriyaṃ. Sotāpattiphalato paṭṭhāya chasu ṭhānesu ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Aññātāvindriyanti aññātāvīsu jānanakiccapariyosānappattesu dhammesu indriyaṃ. Arahattaphalañāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.

Faculty of "I shall come to know the unknown" (anaññātaññassāmītindriya) means the faculty that arises in one who has set out intending "I shall come to know the Dhamma that has not been known, that is unknown before." This is a designation for the knowledge of the Sotāpatti-magga. Faculty of knowledge (aññindriya) means the faculty that is knowing, that has the nature of knowing. This is a designation for the knowledge in the six stages starting from the fruit of Sotāpatti. Faculty of one who has known (aññātāvindriya) means the faculty in the dhammas that have reached the end of the task of knowing, in those who have known. This is a designation for the knowledge of the Arahatta-phala.

Maṃsacakkhucakkhupasādo.Dibbacakkhuālokanissitaṃ ñāṇaṃ.Paññācakkhulokiyalokuttarapaññā.

Fleshly eye (maṃsacakkhu) means eye-sensitivity (cakkhupasādo). Divine eye (dibbacakkhu) means knowledge based on light. Eye of wisdom (paññācakkhu) means wisdom both mundane and supramundane.

Adhisīlasikkhādīsu adhisīlañca taṃ sikkhitabbato sikkhā cātiadhisīlasikkhā.Itarasmiṃ dvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, cittaṃ adhicittaṃ, paññā adhipaññāti ayaṃ pabhedo veditabbo –

Regarding training in higher morality (adhisīlasikkhā) and the others, training in higher morality (adhisīlasikkhā) means higher morality and a training because it should be trained in. The same method applies to the other two. Here, the distinction should be understood that morality is higher morality, mind is higher mind, and wisdom is higher wisdom—

Sīlaṃnāma pañcasīladasasīlāni, pātimokkhasaṃvaroadhisīlaṃnāma. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo cittaṃ, vipassanāpādakajjhānaṃadhicittaṃ.Kammassakatañāṇaṃ paññā, vipassanāpaññāadhipaññā.Anuppannepi hi buddhuppāde pavattatīti pañcasīladasasīlāni sīlameva, pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ buddhuppādeyeva pavattatīti adhisīlaṃ. Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayo. Apica nibbānaṃ patthayantena samādinnaṃ pañcasīlampi dasasīlampi adhisīlameva. Samāpannā aṭṭha samāpattiyopi adhicittameva. Sabbaṃ vā lokiyaṃ sīlameva, lokuttaraṃ adhisīlaṃ. Cittapaññāsupi eseva nayo.

Sīla (morality) is the five precepts and the ten precepts; pātimokkhasaṃvara (restraint according to the monastic code) is called adhisīla (higher morality). The eight attainments are citta (mind); vipassanāpādakajjhāna (the jhāna that serves as a basis for insight) is adhicitta (higher mind). The knowledge of the ownership of actions (kammassakatañāṇa) is paññā (wisdom); vipassanāpaññā (insight wisdom) is adhipaññā (higher wisdom). The five and ten precepts are simply sīla, as they occur even when a Buddha has not arisen; pātimokkhasaṃvara sīla is adhisīla, as it occurs only when a Buddha has arisen. The same principle applies to citta and paññā. Furthermore, the five or ten precepts undertaken by one desiring nibbāna are also adhisīla. The eight attained samāpattis are also adhicitta. All mundane is simply sīla; the supramundane is adhisīla. The same principle applies to citta and paññā.

Bhāvanāsukhīṇāsavassa pañcadvārikakāyokāyabhāvanānāma. Aṭṭha samāpattiyocittabhāvanānāma. Arahattaphalapaññāpaññābhāvanānāma. Khīṇāsavassa hi ekanteneva pañcadvārikakāyo subhāvito hoti. Aṭṭha samāpattiyo cassa na aññesaṃ viya dubbalā, tasseva ca paññā bhāvitā nāma hoti paññāvepullapattiyā. Tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.

Among bhāvanās (developments), the five-sense-door body of a khīṇāsava (one who has destroyed the āsavas) is called kāyabhāvanā (body development). The eight attainments are called cittabhāvanā (mind development). The arahatta fruition knowledge is called paññābhāvanā (wisdom development). For a khīṇāsava, the five-sense-door body is thoroughly developed in a unique way. Their eight attainments are not as weak as those of others, and their wisdom is truly developed, having attained fullness of wisdom. Therefore, it is said thus.

Anuttariyesuvipassanādassanānuttariyaṃmaggopaṭipadānussariyaṃ.Phalaṃvimuttānuttariyaṃ.Phalaṃ vā dassanānuttariyaṃ. Maggo paṭipadānuttariyaṃ. Nibbānaṃ vimuttānuttariyaṃ. Nibbānaṃ vā dassanānuttariyaṃ, tato uttariñhi daṭṭhabbaṃ nāma natthi. Maggo paṭipadānuttariyaṃ. Phalaṃ vimuttānuttariyaṃ.Anuttariyanti uttamaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ.

Among the anuttariyas (unsurpassed), vipassanā (insight) is dassanānuttariyaṃ (unsurpassed seeing), the path is paṭipadānussariyaṃ (unsurpassed practice), the fruit (phala) is vimuttānuttariyaṃ (unsurpassed liberation). Or, the fruit is dassanānuttariyaṃ, the path is paṭipadānuttariyaṃ, nibbāna is vimuttānuttariyaṃ. Or, nibbāna is dassanānuttariyaṃ, for there is nothing further to be seen beyond it; the path is paṭipadānuttariyaṃ, the fruit is vimuttānuttariyaṃ. Anuttariya means supreme, foremost.

Samādhīsupaṭhamajjhānasamādhisavitakkasavicāro.Pañcakanayena dutiyajjhānasamādhiavitakkavicāramatto.Sesoavitakkaavicāro.

Among samādhis, the first jhāna samādhi is savitakkasavicāro (with initial and sustained thought). According to the five-factor method, the second jhāna samādhi is avitakkavicāramatto (with only sustained thought). The rest is avitakkaavicāro (without initial and sustained thought).

Suññatādīsu tividhā kathā āgamanato, saguṇato, ārammaṇatoti. Āgamanato nāma eko bhikkhu anattato abhinivisitvā anattato disvā anattato vuṭṭhāti, tassa vipassanāsuññatānāma hoti. Kasmā? Asuññatattakārakānaṃ kilesānaṃ abhāvā. Vipassanāgamanena maggasamādhi suññato nāma hoti. Maggāgamanena phalasamādhi suññato nāma. Aparo aniccato abhinivisitvā aniccato disvā aniccato vuṭṭhāti. Tassa vipassanā animittā nāma hoti. Kasmā? Nimittakārakakilesābhāvā. Vipassanāgamanena maggasamādhianimittonāma hoti. Maggāgamanena phalaṃ animittaṃ nāma. Aparo dukkhato abhinivisitvā dukkhato disvā dukkhato vuṭṭhāti, tassa vipassanāappaṇihitānāma hoti. Kasmā? Paṇidhikārakakilesābhāvā. Vipassanāgamanena maggasamādhi appaṇihito nāma. Maggāgamanena phalaṃ appaṇihitaṃ nāmāti ayaṃāgamanatokathā. Maggasamādhi pana rāgādīhi suññatattā suññato, rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāvā animitto, rāgapaṇidhiādīnaṃ abhāvā appaṇihitoti ayaṃsaguṇatokathā. Nibbānaṃ rāgādīhi suññatattā rāgādinimittapaṇidhīnañca abhāvā suññatañceva animittañca appaṇihitañca. Tadārammaṇo maggasamādhi suññato animitto appaṇihito. Ayaṃārammaṇatokathā.

Regarding suññatā (emptiness) and so on, there are three kinds of discussions: from the perspective of arrival (āgamanato), from the perspective of qualities (saguṇato), and from the perspective of object (ārammaṇato). From the perspective of arrival means: a bhikkhu focuses on the not-self (anattato), sees it as not-self, and emerges from it as not-self; their vipassanā is called suññatā. Why? Because of the absence of defilements that create an idea of self. Through the arrival of vipassanā, the path samādhi is called suññato. Through the arrival of the path, the fruition samādhi is called suññato. Another bhikkhu focuses on impermanence (aniccatto), sees it as impermanent, and emerges from it as impermanent. Their vipassanā is called animitto (signless). Why? Because of the absence of defilements that create signs. Through the arrival of vipassanā, the path samādhi is called animitto. Through the arrival of the path, the fruit is called animitto. Another bhikkhu focuses on suffering (dukkhato), sees it as suffering, and emerges from it as suffering; their vipassanā is called appaṇihitā (undirected). Why? Because of the absence of defilements that create wishes. Through the arrival of vipassanā, the path samādhi is called appaṇihito. Through the arrival of the path, the fruit is called appaṇihito: this is the discussion from the perspective of arrival. However, the path samādhi is suññato because it is empty of rāga (lust) etc., animitto because of the absence of signs of rāga etc., and appaṇihito because of the absence of aspirations of rāga etc.: this is the discussion from the perspective of qualities. Nibbāna is suññata because it is empty of rāga etc., and because of the absence of signs and aspirations of rāga etc., it is both suññata, animitta, and appaṇihita. The path samādhi with that as its object is suññato, animitto, and appaṇihito. This is the discussion from the perspective of object.

Soceyyānīti sucibhāvakarā soceyyappaṭipadā dhammā. Vitthāro panettha ‘‘tattha katamaṃkāyasoceyyaṃ?Pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’tiādinā nayena vuttānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānaṃ vasena veditabbo.

Soceyyānī means those practices of soceyya (purity) that create pure states. Here, the detailed explanation should be understood based on the three kinds of good conduct (sucarita) mentioned in the passage beginning, "What is kāyasoceyyaṃ (bodily purity)? Abstaining from killing living beings," and so on.

Moneyyānīti munibhāvakarā moneyyappaṭipadā dhammā. Tesaṃ vitthāro ‘‘tattha katamaṃkāyamoneyyaṃ?Tividhakāyaduccaritassa pahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, tividhaṃ kāyasucaritaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyapariññā kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyapariññāsahagato maggo kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasmiṃ chandarāgappahānaṃ kāyamoneyyaṃ, kāyasaṅkhāranirodhā catutthajjhānasamāpatti kāyamoneyyaṃ. Tattha katamaṃvacīmoneyyaṃ?Catubbidhavacīduccaritassa pahānaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ, catubbidhaṃ vacīsucaritaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ, vācārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ vacīmoneyyaṃ vācāpariññā vacīmoneyyaṃ pariññāsahagato maggo, vācāya chandarāgappahānaṃ, vacīsaṅkhāranirodhā dutiyajjhānasamāpatti vacīmoneyyaṃ. Tattha katamaṃmanomoneyyaṃ?Tividhamanoduccaritassa pahānaṃ manomoneyyaṃ, tividhaṃ manosucaritaṃ manomoneyyaṃ, manārammaṇe ñāṇaṃ manomoneyyaṃ, manopariññā manomoneyyaṃ. Pariññāsahagato maggo, manasmiṃ chandarāgappahānaṃ, cittasaṅkhāranirodhā saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti manomoneyya’’nti (mahāni. 14).

Moneyyānī means those practices of moneyya (silence, sagehood) that create a state of sagehood. Their detailed explanation is: "What is kāyamoneyyaṃ (bodily sagehood)? Abandoning the three kinds of bodily misconduct is bodily sagehood; the three kinds of bodily good conduct are bodily sagehood; knowledge regarding the body is bodily sagehood; understanding of the body is bodily sagehood; the path associated with understanding is bodily sagehood; abandoning desire and lust for the body is bodily sagehood; cessation of bodily formations (kāyasaṅkhāra) and attainment of the fourth jhāna is bodily sagehood. What is vacīmoneyyaṃ (verbal sagehood)? Abandoning the four kinds of verbal misconduct is verbal sagehood; the four kinds of verbal good conduct are verbal sagehood; knowledge regarding speech is verbal sagehood; understanding of speech is verbal sagehood; the path associated with understanding; abandoning desire and lust for speech; cessation of verbal formations (vacīsaṅkhāra) and attainment of the second jhāna is verbal sagehood. What is manomoneyyaṃ (mental sagehood)? Abandoning the three kinds of mental misconduct is mental sagehood; the three kinds of mental good conduct are mental sagehood; knowledge regarding the mind is mental sagehood; understanding of the mind is mental sagehood; the path associated with understanding; abandoning desire and lust for the mind; cessation of mental formations (cittasaṅkhāra) and the attainment of the cessation of perception and feeling (saññāvedayitanirodhasamāpatti) is mental sagehood" (mahāni. 14).

āyoti vuḍḍhi.Apāyoti avuḍḍhi. Tassa tassa kāraṇaṃupāyo.Tesaṃ pajānanā kosallaṃ. Vitthāro pana vibhaṅge vuttoyeva.

Āyo means growth. Apāyo means non-growth. The means to that is upāyo. Skill in knowing these is kosallaṃ. However, the detailed explanation has already been given in the Vibhaṅga.

Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ āyakosallaṃ? Ime dhamme manasikaroto anuppannā ceva akusalā dhammā nuppajjanti, uppannā ca akusalā dhammā nirujjhanti. Ime vā pana me dhamme manasikaroto anuppannā ceva kusalā dhammā uppajjanti, uppannā ca kusalā dhammā bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattantīti, yā tattha paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi. Idaṃ vuccati āyakosallaṃ. Tattha katamaṃ apāyakosallaṃ? Ime dhamme manasikaroto anuppannā ceva kusalā dhammā na uppajjanti, uppannā ca kusalā dhammā nirujjhanti. Ime vā pana me dhamme manasikaroto anuppannā ceva akusalā dhammā uppajjanti, uppannā ca akusalā dhammā bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattantīti, yā tattha paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi. Idaṃ vuccati apāyakosallaṃ. Sabbāpi tatrupāyā paññā upāyakosalla’’nti (vibha. 771). Idaṃ pana accāyikakicce vā bhaye vā uppanne tassa tikicchanatthaṃ ṭhānuppattiyā kāraṇajānanavaseneva veditabbaṃ.

It has been said: "What is skill in growth (āyakosallaṃ)? If, when I attend to these things, unarisen unwholesome qualities do not arise, and arisen unwholesome qualities cease; or if, when I attend to these things, unarisen wholesome qualities arise, and arisen wholesome qualities lead to further development, expansion, cultivation, and fulfillment: the wisdom, understanding…right view there. This is called skill in growth. What is skill in decline (apāyakosallaṃ)? If, when I attend to these things, unarisen wholesome qualities do not arise, and arisen wholesome qualities cease; or if, when I attend to these things, unarisen unwholesome qualities arise, and arisen unwholesome qualities lead to further development, expansion, cultivation, and fulfillment: the wisdom, understanding…right view there. This is called skill in decline. All wisdom regarding the means there is skill in means (upāyakosallaṃ)" (vibha. 771). However, this should be understood only in terms of knowing the cause through presence of mind in dealing with an acute emergency or arisen fear.

Madāti majjanākāravasena pavattamānā. Tesu ‘‘ahaṃ nirogo saṭṭhi vā sattati vā vassāni atikkantāni, na me harītakīkhaṇḍampi khāditapubbaṃ, ime panaññe asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ rujjati, bhesajjaṃ khādāmāti vicaranti, ko añño mādiso nirogo nāmā’’ti evaṃ mānakaraṇaṃārogyamado.‘‘Mahallakakāle puññaṃ karissāma, daharamha tāvā’’ti yobbane ṭhatvā mānakaraṇaṃyobbanamado.‘‘Ciraṃ jīviṃ, ciraṃ jīvāmi, ciraṃ jīvissāmi; sukhaṃ jīviṃ, sukhaṃ jīvāmi, sukhaṃ jīvissāmī’’ti evaṃ mānakaraṇaṃjīvitamado.

Madā means proceeding in the manner of intoxication. Among these, "I am healthy, sixty or seventy years have passed, and I have never even eaten a piece of myrobalan; but these others worry about some place or other breaking down and go around taking medicine; who else is as healthy as I?" Thus, making pride is ārogyamado (intoxication with health). "We will do merit in old age; we are young for now"; thus, making pride while in youth is yobbanamado (intoxication with youth). "I have lived long, I live long, I will live long; I have lived happily, I live happily, I will live happily"; thus, making pride is jīvitamado (intoxication with life).

Ādhipateyyesuadhipatito āgataṃ ādhipateyyaṃ. ‘‘Ettakomhi sīlena samādhinā paññāya vimuttiyā, na me etaṃ patirūpa’’nti evaṃ attānaṃ adhipattiṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā pāpassa akaraṇaṃattādhipateyyaṃnāma. Lokaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā akaraṇaṃlokādhipateyyaṃnāma. Lokuttaradhammaṃ adhipatiṃ katvā akaraṇaṃdhammādhipateyyaṃnāma.

Among ādhipateyyas (sovereignties), ādhipateyyaṃ comes from adhipati (sovereign). "I am so accomplished in morality, concentration, wisdom, and liberation that this is not fitting for me"; thus, making oneself the sovereign, the foremost, and not doing evil is called attādhipateyyaṃ (self-sovereignty). Making the world the sovereign and not doing evil is called lokādhipateyyaṃ (world-sovereignty). Making the supramundane Dharma the sovereign and not doing evil is called dhammādhipateyyaṃ (Dharma-sovereignty).

Kathāvatthūnīti kathākāraṇāni.Atītaṃ vā addhānanti atītaṃ dhammaṃ, atītakkhandheti attho. Apica ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ atītaṃ niruddhaṃ vipariṇataṃ, ‘ahosī’ti tassa saṅkhā, ‘ahosī’ti tassa paññatti ‘ahosī’ti tassa samaññā, na tassa saṅkhā ‘atthī’ti, na tassa saṅkhā ‘bhavissatī’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.62) evaṃ āgatena niruttipathasuttenapettha attho dīpetabbo.

Kathāvatthūnī means reasons for speaking. Atītaṃ vā addhāna means past Dharma, meaning past aggregates. Furthermore, here the meaning should be explained in accordance with the passage that begins, "Whatever form, monks, is past, ceased, and changed, there is reckoning of it as 'it was,' designation of it as 'it was,' appellation of it as 'it was'; there is no reckoning of it as 'it is,' nor is there reckoning of it as 'it will be'" (saṃ. ni. 3.62), and that has come in the manner of a passage on the path of expression.

Vijjāti tamavijjhanaṭṭhena vijjā. Viditakaraṇaṭṭhenāpi vijjā. Pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇañhi uppajjamānaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ chādetvā ṭhitaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, pubbenivāsañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Cutūpapātañāṇaṃ cutipaṭisandhicchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, tañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā. Āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇaṃ catusaccacchādakaṃ tamaṃ vijjhati, catusaccadhammañca viditaṃ karotīti vijjā.

Vijjā (knowledge) is vijjā because of striking through the darkness. It is also vijjā because of making known. For, knowledge of the recollection of past lives, as it arises, strikes through the darkness that conceals past lives, and makes past lives known; therefore it is vijjā. Knowledge of the passing away and rebirth strikes through the darkness that conceals passing away and rebirth, and makes that known; therefore it is vijjā. Knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas (cankers) strikes through the darkness that conceals the Four Noble Truths, and makes the Four Noble Truths known; therefore it is vijjā.

Vihāresuaṭṭha samāpattiyodibbo vihāro.Catasso appamaññābrahmā vihāro.Phalasamāpattiariyo vihāro.

Among vihāras (abodes), the eight attainments are dibbo vihāro (divine abode). The four appamaññās (illimitables) are brahmā vihāro (brahma abode). Fruition attainment is ariyo vihāro (noble abode).

Pāṭihāriyāni kevaṭṭasutte vitthāritāneva.

The miracles (pāṭihāriyāni) are explained in detail in the Kevaṭṭa Sutta.

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādīsu vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti samasaṭṭhiyā tikānaṃ vasena asītisatapañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

"Ime kho, āvuso" and so on should be connected in the manner that has been stated. Thus, in explaining the eighty questions based on the set of three, the elder showed the flavor of harmony.

Tikavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sets of Threes is Finished.

Catukkavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Sets of Fours

306.Iti tikavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni catukkavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha ‘‘satipaṭṭhānacatukkaṃ’’ pubbe vitthāritameva.

306. Thus, having shown the flavor of harmony based on the sets of threes, he now begins the exposition again in order to show it based on the sets of fours. There, "the set of four foundations of mindfulness (satipaṭṭhāna catukkaṃ)" has already been explained in detail.

chandaṃ janetīti ‘‘yo chando chandikatā kattukamyatā kusalo dhammacchando’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ kattukamyataṃ janeti.Vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ karoti.Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti vīriyaṃ janeti.Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti cittaṃ upatthambheti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana sammappadhānavibhaṅge āgatoyeva.

Chandaṃ janetī means he generates the desire to do, the inclination to do, the wish to do, as it has been said, "whatever desire, inclination, wish to do, wholesome desire to do." Vāyamatī means he makes effort. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatī means he arouses energy. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātī means he supports the mind. This is the summary here. However, the detailed explanation has already come in the Vibhaṅga on Right Exertion.

chandasamādhi.Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārāpadhānasaṅkhārā. Samannāgatanti tehi dhammehi upetaṃ. Iddhiyā pādaṃ, iddhibhūtaṃ vā pādantiiddhipādaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana iddhipādavibhaṅge āgato eva. Visuddhimagge panassa attho dīpito. Jhānakathāpi visuddhimagge vitthāritāva.

Chandasamādhi. The formations that are predominant are padhānasaṅkhārā. Samannāgata means endowed with those qualities. Iddhiyā pādaṃ, or iddhibhūtaṃ pādaṃ, is iddhipādaṃ (base for spiritual power). The same principle applies to the rest. This is the summary here, but the detailed explanation has already come in the Vibhaṅga on the Bases of Spiritual Power. However, its meaning has been explained in the Visuddhimagga. The discourse on jhāna has also been explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga.

307.Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāyāti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve sukhavihāratthāya. Idha phalasamāpattijhānāni, khīṇāsavassa aparabhāge nibbattitajhānāni ca kathitāni.

307. Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāyā means for the sake of a pleasant abiding in this very existence. Here, the jhānas of fruition attainment and the jhānas arisen in the remaining part of the khīṇāsava's life are discussed.

Ālokasaññaṃ manasikarotīti divā vā rattiṃ vā sūriyacandapajjotamaṇiādīnaṃ ālokaṃ ālokoti manasikaroti.Divāsaññaṃ adhiṭṭhātīti evaṃ manasi katvā divātisaññaṃ ṭhapeti.Yathā divā tathā rattinti yathā divā diṭṭho āloko, tatheva taṃ rattiṃ manasikaroti.Yathā rattiṃ tathā divāti yathā rattiṃ āloko diṭṭho, evameva divā manasikaroti.Iti vivaṭena cetasāti evaṃ apihitena cittena.Apariyonaddhenāti samantato anaddhena.Sappabhāsanti saobhāsaṃ.Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāyāti ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhatthāya. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ? Middhavinodanaāloko kathito parikammaāloko vā. Iminā kiṃ kathitaṃ hoti? Khīṇāsavassa dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ vā āgatepi anāgatepi pādakajjhānasamāpattimeva sandhāya ‘‘sappabhāsaṃ cittaṃ bhāvetī’’ti vuttaṃ.

Ālokasaññaṃ manasikarotī means whether by day or by night, he attends to the light of the sun, moon, lamp, jewel, etc., as 'light'. Divāsaññaṃ adhiṭṭhātī means having attended in this way, he establishes the perception of day as if it were day. Yathā divā tathā ratti means just as he has seen the light by day, so he attends to it by night. Yathā rattiṃ tathā divā means just as he has seen the light by night, even so he attends to it by day. Iti vivaṭena cetasā means thus with an open mind. Apariyonaddhenā means not covered on all sides. Sappabhāsaṃ means with radiance. Ñāṇadassanapaṭilābhāyā means for the sake of attaining knowledge and vision. What is being discussed with this? The dispelling of drowsiness, or preliminary work on light, is being discussed. What does this mean? It means the divine eye knowledge (dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ) of the khīṇāsava. Or, even when that has come, with reference to the jhāna attainment that serves as a basis in the future, it is said, "He cultivates a mind that is radiant."

Satisampajaññāyāti sattaṭṭhānikassa satisampajaññassa atthāya.Viditā vedanā uppajjantītiādīsu khīṇāsavassa vatthu viditaṃ hoti ārammaṇaṃ viditaṃ vatthārammaṇaṃ viditaṃ. Vatthārammaṇaviditatāya evaṃ vedanā uppajjanti, evaṃ tiṭṭhanti, evaṃ nirujjhanti. Na kevalañca vedanā eva idha vuttā saññādayopi, avuttā cetanādayopi, viditā ca uppajjanti ceva tiṭṭhanti ca nirujjhanti ca. Api ca vedanāya uppādo vidito hoti, upaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ hoti. Avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo, taṇhāsamudayā kammasamudayo, phassasamudayā vedanāyasamudayo. Nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa samudayaṃ passati. Evaṃ vedanāya uppādo vidito hoti. Kathaṃ vedanāya upaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ hoti? Aniccato manasikaroto khayatūpaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ hoti. Dukkhato manasikaroto bhayatūpaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ hoti. Anattato manasikaroto suññatūpaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ hoti. Evaṃ vedanāya upaṭṭhānaṃ viditaṃ hoti, khayato bhayato suññato jānāti. Kathaṃ vedanāya atthaṅgamo vidito hoti? Avijjānirodhā vedanānirodho.…Pe… evaṃ vedanāya atthaṅgamo vidito hoti. Imināpi nayenettha attho veditabbo.

Satisampajaññāyā means for the sake of mindfulness and clear comprehension in the seven instances. In "Viditā vedanā uppajjantī" and so on, for the khīṇāsava, the object (vatthu) is known, the focus (ārammaṇaṃ) is known, the object and focus are known. Because of knowing the object and focus in this way, feelings arise in this way, remain in this way, and cease in this way. And not only feelings are mentioned here, but also perceptions and so on; even unmentioned volitions and so on, arise, remain, and cease knowingly. Moreover, the arising of feeling is known, the manifestation is known. With the arising of ignorance comes the arising of feeling, with the arising of craving comes the arising of karma, with the arising of contact comes the arising of feeling. Even while seeing the characteristic of production, he sees the arising of the aggregate of feeling. Thus, the arising of feeling is known. How is the manifestation of feeling known? When attending to it as impermanent, the manifestation as decay is known. When attending to it as suffering, the manifestation as fear is known. When attending to it as not-self, the manifestation as emptiness is known. Thus, the manifestation of feeling is known; he knows it as decaying, as fearful, as empty. How is the passing away of feeling known? With the cessation of ignorance comes the cessation of feeling.… In this way, the passing away of feeling is known. The meaning here should be understood in this way as well.

Itirūpantiādi vuttanayameva.Ayaṃ āvuso samādhibhāvanāti ayaṃ āsavānaṃ khayañāṇassa pādakajjhānasamādhibhāvanā.

Itirūpa and so on are in the same manner as stated before. Ayaṃ āvuso samādhibhāvanā means this is the jhāna samādhi bhāvanā that serves as a basis for the knowledge of the destruction of the āsavas.

308.Appamaññāti pamāṇaṃ agahetvā anavasesapharaṇavasena appamaññāva. Anupadavaṇṇanā pana bhāvanāsamādhividhānañca etāsaṃ visuddhimagge vitthāritameva. Arūpakathāpi visuddhimagge vitthāritāva.

308. Appamaññā means immeasurable because, without taking a measure, it is immeasurable in the sense of pervading without remainder. However, the explanation of non-affliction and the method of cultivation and samādhi for these have already been explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga. The discourse on the formless has also been explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga.

Apassenānīti apassayāni.Saṅkhāyāti ñāṇena ñatvā.Paṭisevatīti ñāṇena ñatvā sevitabbayuttakameva sevati. Tassa ca vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paribhuñjatī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.Saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetīti ñāṇena ñatvā adhivāsetabbayuttakameva adhivāseti. Vitthāro panettha ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso khamo hoti sītassā’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.Parivajjetīti ñāṇena ñatvā parivajjetuṃ yuttameva parivajjeti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso caṇḍaṃ hatthiṃ parivajjetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.Vinodetīti ñāṇena ñatvā vinodetabbameva vinodeti, nudati nīharati anto pavisituṃ na deti. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā nayena veditabbo.

Apassenānīti: Apassenāni means supports.Saṅkhāyā: Saṅkhāya means having known with wisdom.Paṭisevatīti: Paṭisevati means he makes use of what is appropriate to make use of, having known with wisdom. And its detailed explanation should be understood in the manner beginning with “reflecting wisely, he uses the robe.”Saṅkhāyekaṃ adhivāsetīti: Saṅkhāya ekaṃ adhivāseti means he endures what is appropriate to endure, having known with wisdom. And the detailed explanation here should be understood in the manner beginning with “reflecting wisely, he is tolerant of cold.”Parivajjetīti: Parivajjeti means he avoids what is appropriate to avoid, having known with wisdom. And its detailed explanation should be understood in the manner beginning with “reflecting wisely, he avoids a fierce elephant.”Vinodetīti: Vinodeti means he dispels what is appropriate to dispel, having known with wisdom; he drives away, he removes, he does not allow it to enter within. And its detailed explanation should be understood in the manner beginning with “he does not dwell on an arisen thought of sensual pleasure.”

Ariyavaṃsacatukkavaṇṇanā
The Four Noble Lineages (Ariyavaṃsa) Explained

309.Ariyavaṃsāti ariyānaṃ vaṃsā. Yathā hi khattiyavaṃso, brāhmaṇavaṃso, vessavaṃso, suddavaṃso, samaṇavaṃso, kulavaṃso, rājavaṃso, evaṃ ayampi aṭṭhamo ariyavaṃso ariyatanti ariyapaveṇī nāma hoti. So kho panāyaṃ ariyavaṃso imesaṃ vaṃsānaṃ mūlagandhādīnaṃ kāḷānusāritagandhādayo viya aggamakkhāyati. Ke pana te ariyā yesaṃ ete vaṃsāti? Ariyā vuccanti buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca tathāgatasāvakā ca, etesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsātiariyavaṃsā.Ito pubbe hi satasahassakappādhikānaṃ catunnaṃ asaṅkhyeyyānaṃ matthake taṇhaṅkaro medhaṅkaro saraṇaṅkaro dīpaṅkaroti cattāro buddhā uppannā, te ariyā, tesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti ariyavaṃsā. Tesaṃ buddhānaṃ parinibbānato aparabhāge asaṅkhyeyyaṃ atikkamitvā koṇḍañño nāma buddho uppanno…pe… imasmiṃ kappe kakusandho, koṇāgamano, kassapo, amhākaṃ bhagavā gotamoti cattāro buddhā uppannā. Tesaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti ariyavaṃsā. Apica atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhabuddhasāvakānaṃ ariyānaṃ vaṃsāti ariyavaṃsā. Te kho paneteaggaññāaggāti jānitabbā.Rattaññādīgharattaṃ pavattāti jānitabbā.Vaṃsaññāvaṃsāti jānitabbā.

309.Ariyavaṃsāti: Ariyavaṃsā means the lineages of the Noble Ones. Just as there is a khattiya lineage, a brahmin lineage, a vessa lineage, a sudda lineage, a samaṇa lineage, a family lineage, a royal lineage, so too this eighth, the Noble Lineage, is known as the Noble Tradition (ariyatanti), the Noble Custom (ariyapaveṇī). And indeed, this Noble Lineage is known as the foremost, like the black sandalwood scent compared to the root scents of these lineages. But who are these Noble Ones whose lineages these are? Noble Ones (ariyā) are called Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and disciples of the Tathāgata; the lineages of these Noble Ones are Noble Lineages (ariyavaṃsā). For before this, at the head of four asaṅkhyeyyas and a hundred thousand kappas, four Buddhas arose: Taṇhaṅkara, Medhaṅkara, Saraṇaṅkara, and Dīpaṅkara. They were Noble Ones, and the lineages of those Noble Ones are Noble Lineages. After the Parinibbāna of those Buddhas, after an asaṅkhyeyya had passed, a Buddha named Koṇḍañña arose…pe… in this kappa, four Buddhas have arisen: Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana, Kassapa, and our Blessed One Gotama. The lineages of those Noble Ones are Noble Lineages. Moreover, the lineages of all Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and Buddha disciples of the past, future, and present are Noble Lineages. These indeed are to be known as aggaññā, foremost; to be known as rattaññā, long-standing; to be known as vaṃsaññā, lineage.

Porāṇāti na adhunuppattikā.Asaṃkiṇṇāavikiṇṇā anapanītā.Asaṃkiṇṇapubbāatītabuddhehi na saṃkiṇṇapubbā. ‘‘Kiṃ imehī’’ti na apanītapubbā?Na saṅkīyantīti idānipi na apanīyanti.Na saṅkīyissantīti anāgatabuddhehipi na apanīyissanti, ye loke viññū samaṇabrāhmaṇā, tehi appaṭikuṭṭhā, samaṇehi brāhmaṇehi viññūhi aninditā agarahitā.

Porāṇāti: Porāṇā means not newly arisen.Asaṃkiṇṇā: Asaṃkiṇṇā means unmixed, not removed.Asaṃkiṇṇapubbā: Asaṃkiṇṇapubbā means not previously mixed by past Buddhas. “Why these?” not previously removed.Na saṅkīyantī: Na saṅkīyantī means even now they are not removed.Na saṅkīyissantī: Na saṅkīyissantī means they will not be removed even by future Buddhas; they are unrejected by wise samaṇas and brāhmaṇas in the world, unblamed, unrebuked by wise samaṇas and brāhmaṇas.

Santuṭṭho hotīti paccayasantosavasena santuṭṭho hoti.Itarītarena cīvarenāti thūlasukhumalūkhapaṇītathirajiṇṇānaṃ yena kenaci. Atha kho yathāladdhādīnaṃ itarītarena yena kenaci santuṭṭho hotīti attho. Cīvarasmiñhi tayo santosā – yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantosoti. Piṇḍapātādīsupi eseva nayo. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā sāmaññaphale vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Ime tayo santose sandhāya ‘‘santuṭṭho hoti, itarītarena yathāladdhādīsu yena kenaci cīvarena santuṭṭho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.

Santuṭṭho hotīti: Santuṭṭho hoti means he is content in terms of contentment with requisites.Itarītarena cīvarenā: Itarītarena cīvarena means with whatever robe, whether coarse or fine, rough or refined, old or worn out. But indeed, the meaning is that he is content with whatever robe, whether it be “as he has obtained it,” and so on. For there are three kinds of contentment with robes: contentment with whatever is obtained (yathālābhasantoso), contentment with whatever is available (yathābalasantoso), and contentment with whatever is suitable (yathāsāruppasantoso). The same method applies to almsfood, and so on. The detailed explanation of these should be understood in the same manner as stated in the Sāmaññaphala Sutta. Referring to these three kinds of contentment, it is said, “He is content, content with whatever robe, whether it be ‘as he has obtained it,’ and so on.”

cīvaraṃ jānitabbanti khomādīni cha cīvarāni dukūlādīni cha anulomacīvarāni jānitabbāni. Imāni dvādasa kappiyacīvarāni. Kusacīraṃ vākacīraṃ phalakacīraṃ kesakambalaṃ vāḷakambalaṃ potthako cammaṃ ulūkapakkhaṃ rukkhadussaṃ latādussaṃ erakadussaṃ kadalidussaṃ veḷudussanti evamādīni pana akappiyacīvarāni.Cīvarakkhettanti ‘‘saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā attano vā dhanena paṃsukūlaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ uppajjanato cha khettāni, aṭṭhannañca mātikānaṃ vasenaaṭṭha khettānijānitabbāni.Paṃsukūlanti sosānikaṃ, pāpaṇikaṃ, rathiyaṃ saṅkārakūṭakaṃ, sotthiyaṃ, sinānaṃ, titthaṃ, gatapaccāgataṃ, aggidaḍḍhaṃ, gokhāyitaṃ upacikakhāyitaṃ, undūrakhāyitaṃ, antacchinnaṃ, dasācchinnaṃ, dhajāhaṭaṃ, thūpaṃ, samaṇacīvaraṃ, sāmuddiyaṃ, ābhisekiyaṃ, panthikaṃ, vātāhaṭaṃ, iddhimayaṃ, devadattiyanti tevīsati paṃsukūlāni veditabbāni.

cīvaraṃ jānitabbanti: cīvaraṃ jānitabbaṃ means the six robes made of linen, and so on, and the six allowable robes made of silk, and so on, should be known. These are the twelve allowable robes. However, robes made of kusa grass, bark robes, robes made of wooden fibers, blankets made of human hair, blankets made of animal hair, patchwork robes, leather, owl feathers, tree bark cloth, creeper cloth, eraka cloth, banana cloth, bamboo cloth, and so on, are unallowable robes.Cīvarakkhettanti: cīvarakkhettaṃ means the six sources of arising—"from the Saṅgha, or from a group, or from relatives, or from friends, or by one’s own wealth, or a paṃsukūla robe." Also, the eight sources should be known according to the eight root-categories.Paṃsukūlanti: Paṃsukūlaṃ means a robe from a charnel ground, from a shop, from a street, from a rubbish heap, from a safe-delivery site, from a bathing place, from a ford, one brought back after being left, burnt by fire, gnawed by cattle, gnawed by rodents, gnawed by mice, cut at the edge, torn at the edge, brought on a flag, from a thūpa, a samaṇa robe, a sea robe, a consecration robe, a traveler’s robe, blown by the wind, made by psychic power, a Devadatta robe; these twenty-three kinds of paṃsukūla robes should be known.

sotthiyanti gabbhamalaharaṇaṃ.Gatapaccāgatanti matakasarīraṃ pārupitvā susānaṃ netvā ānītacīvaraṃ.Dhajāhaṭanti dhajaṃ ussāpetvā tato ānītaṃ.Thūpanti vammike pūjitacīvaraṃ.Sāmuddiyanti samuddavīcīhi thalaṃ pāpitaṃ.Panthikanti panthaṃ gacchantehi corabhayena pāsāṇehi koṭṭetvā pārutacīvaraṃ.Iddhimayanti ehibhikkhucīvaraṃ. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.

sotthiyanti: sotthiyaṃ means used for wiping birth-discharge.Gatapaccāgatanti: Gatapaccāgataṃ means a robe that was used to cover a corpse, taken to the charnel ground, and then brought back.Dhajāhaṭanti: Dhajāhaṭaṃ means brought from one that was hoisted on a flag.Thūpanti: Thūpaṃ means a robe venerated at an anthill.Sāmuddiyanti: Sāmuddiyaṃ means brought to land by the waves of the ocean.Panthikanti: Panthikaṃ means a robe worn by those traveling on a road who had it weighted down with stones for fear of robbers.Iddhimayanti: Iddhimayaṃ means a robe obtained by the ehibhikkhu ordination. The rest is clear enough.

Cīvarasantosoti vīsati cīvarasantosā, vitakkasantoso, gamanasantoso, pariyesanasantoso, paṭilābhasantoso, mattappaṭiggahaṇasantoso, loluppavivajjanasantoso, yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantoso, udakasantoso, dhovanasantoso, karaṇasantoso, parimāṇasantoso, suttasantoso, sibbanasantoso, rajanasantoso, kappasantoso, paribhogasantoso, sannidhiparivajjanasantoso, vissajjanasantosoti.

Cīvarasantosoti: Cīvarasantoso means the twenty kinds of contentment regarding robes: contentment with deliberation (vitakkasantoso), contentment with going (gamanasantoso), contentment with seeking (pariyesanasantoso), contentment with obtaining (paṭilābhasantoso), contentment with moderate acceptance (mattappaṭiggahaṇasantoso), contentment with avoiding greed (loluppavivajjanasantoso), contentment with whatever is obtained (yathālābhasantoso), contentment with whatever is available (yathābalasantoso), contentment with whatever is suitable (yathāsāruppasantoso), contentment with water (udakasantoso), contentment with washing (dhovanasantoso), contentment with making (karaṇasantoso), contentment with measuring (parimāṇasantoso), contentment with thread (suttasantoso), contentment with sewing (sibbanasantoso), contentment with dyeing (rajanasantoso), contentment with making allowable (kappasantoso), contentment with use (paribhogasantoso), contentment with avoiding storing up (sannidhiparivajjanasantoso), and contentment with giving away (vissajjanasantoso).

Tattha sādakabhikkhunā temāsaṃ nibaddhavāsaṃ vasitvā ekamāsamattaṃ vitakketuṃ vaṭṭati. So hi pavāretvā cīvaramāse cīvaraṃ karoti. Paṃsukūliko aḍḍhamāseneva karoti. Iti māsaḍḍhamāsamattaṃ vitakkanaṃ vitakkasantoso. Vitakkasantosena pana santuṭṭhena bhikkhunā pācīnakkhaṇḍarājivāsikapaṃsukūlikattherasadisena bhavitabbaṃ.

Here, a bhikkhu who lives in continuous residence for three months is permitted to deliberate for about one month. For having invited, he makes a robe during the robe-month. A paṃsukūlika does so in just half a month. Thus, deliberating for about a month and a half is contentment with deliberation (vitakkasantoso). A bhikkhu who is content with contentment with deliberation should be like the paṃsukūlika elder who lived at Pācīnakkhaṇḍarāji.

Therokira cetiyapabbatavihāre cetiyaṃ vandissāmīti āgato cetiyaṃ vanditvā cintesi ‘‘mayhaṃ cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ bahūnaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne labhissāmī’’ti. So mahāvihāraṃ gantvā saṅghattheraṃ disvā vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā tattha vuttho punadivase cīvaraṃ ādāya āgantvā theraṃ vandi. Thero kiṃ āvusoti āha. Gāmadvāraṃ, bhante, gamissāmīti. Ahampāvuso, gamissāmīti. Sādhu, bhanteti gacchanto mahābodhidvārakoṭṭhake ṭhatvā puññavantānaṃ vasanaṭṭhāne manāpaṃ labhissāmīti cintetvā aparisuddho me vitakkoti tatova paṭinivatti. Punadivase ambaṅgaṇasamīpato, punadivase mahācetiyassa uttaradvārato, tatheva paṭinivattitvā catutthadivase therassa santikaṃ agamāsi. Thero imassa bhikkhuno vitakko na parisuddho bhavissatīti cīvaraṃ gahetvā tena saddhiṃyeva pañhaṃ pucchamāno gāmaṃ pāvisi. Tañca rattiṃ eko manusso uccārapalibuddho sāṭakeyeva vaccaṃ katvā taṃ saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍesi.Paṃsukūlikattherotaṃ nīlamakkhikāhi samparikiṇṇaṃ disvā añjaliṃ paggahesi. Mahāthero ‘‘kiṃ, āvuso, saṅkāraṭṭhānassa añjaliṃ paggaṇhāsī’’ti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhante, saṅkāraṭṭhānassa añjaliṃ paggaṇhāmi, mayhaṃ pitu dasabalassa paggaṇhāmi, puṇṇadāsiyā sarīraṃ pārupitvā chaḍḍitaṃ paṃsukūlaṃ tumbamatte pāṇake vidhunitvā susānato gaṇhantena dukkaraṃ kataṃ, bhante’’ti. Mahāthero ‘‘parisuddho vitakko paṃsukūlikassā’’ti cintesi. Paṃsukūlikattheropi tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhito vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā tīṇi phalāni patto taṃ sāṭakaṃ gahetvā cīvaraṃ katvā pārupitvā pācīnakkhaṇḍarājiṃ gantvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.

It is said that the elder, having come to worship the cetiya at the Cetiyapabbata Monastery, reflected, "My robe is worn out; I will obtain one at a place of residence for many." He went to the Mahāvihāra, saw the Saṅgha Elder, inquired about a place of residence, and stayed there. The next day, having taken his robe, he came and paid homage to the elder. The elder asked, "What is it, friend?" "I will go to the village gate, venerable sir." "I too, friend, will go." "Good, venerable sir," he said. While going, he stood at the gateway of the Great Bodhi Tree and reflected, "I will obtain something pleasing at a place of residence for meritorious people." "My deliberation is impure," and from there he turned back. The next day, from near the mango grove; the next day, from the northern gate of the Great Cetiya; he turned back in the same way. On the fourth day, he went to the elder. The elder thought, "This bhikkhu's deliberation will not be pure." Taking the robe, he entered the village with him, asking questions. That night, a man, covered in excrement, relieved himself in his garment and threw it in the rubbish heap. The paṃsukūlika elder, seeing it swarming with blue flies, raised his joined hands in reverence. The Great Elder said, "Why, friend, do you raise your joined hands in reverence to the rubbish heap?" "I do not raise my joined hands in reverence to the rubbish heap, venerable sir, but to my Father, the Ten-Powered One. When one takes what has been discarded, having been worn by Puṇṇadāsī, shakes it out with a bit of stick, and takes it from the charnel ground, a difficult deed is done, venerable sir." The Great Elder thought, "The paṃsukūlika's deliberation is pure." The paṃsukūlika elder, standing in that very place, developed insight and attained the three fruits. Having taken that garment, made it into a robe, and worn it, he went to Pācīnakkhaṇḍarāji and attained the highest fruit, Arahatship.

gamanasantosonāma.

Gamanasantosonāma:

pariyesanasantosonāma.

Pariyesanasantosonāma:

paṭilābhasantosonāma.

Paṭilābhasantosonāma:

mattappaṭiggahaṇasantosonāma.

Mattappaṭiggahaṇasantosonāma:

loluppavivajjanasantosonāma.

Loluppavivajjanasantosonāma:

yathālābhasantosonāma.

Yathālābhasantosonāma:

yathābalasantosonāma.

Yathābalasantosonāma:

yathāsāruppasantosonāma.

Yathāsāruppasantosonāma:

udakasantosonāma. Paṇḍumattikagerukapūtipaṇṇarasakiliṭṭhāni pana udakāni vajjetuṃ vaṭṭati.

Udakasantosonāma: Udakasantoso means contentment with water. However, it is permissible to avoid water that is mixed with ochre, red clay, rotten leaves, or sticky filth.

dhovanasantosonāma. Tathā asujjhantaṃ paṇṇāni pakkhipitvā tāpitaudakenāpi dhovituṃ vaṭṭati.

Dhovanasantosonāma: Dhovanasantoso means contentment with washing. Likewise, it is permissible to wash it even with heated water, having put leaves in it that do not become clean.

karaṇasantosonāma.

Karaṇasantosonāma:

parimāṇasantosonāma.

Parimāṇasantosonāma:

suttasantosonāma.

Suttasantosonāma:

sibbanasantosonāma.

Sibbanasantosonāma:

rajanasantosonāma.

Rajanasantosonāma:

kappasantosonāma.

Kappasantosonāma:

paribhogasantosonāma.

Paribhogasantosonāma:

mahāsīvattheroāha. Ayaṃsannidhiparivajjanasantosonāma.

Mahāsīva Theroāha: Mahāsīva Thero said, "This is Sannidhiparivajjanasantosonāma:

vissajjanasantosonāma.

Vissajjanasantosonāma:

Cīvarapaṭisaṃyuttāni dhutaṅgānināma paṃsukūlikaṅgañceva tecīvarikaṅgañca. Tesaṃ vitthārakathāvisuddhimaggatoveditabbā. Iti cīvarasantosamahāariyavaṃsaṃ pūrayamāno bhikkhu imāni dve dhutaṅgāni gopeti. Imāni gopento cīvarasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭho hoti.

Cīvarapaṭisaṃyuttāni dhutaṅgānināma: Cīvarapaṭisaṃyuttāni dhutaṅgāni means the dhutaṅgas connected with robes are the paṃsukūlikaṅga and the tecīvarikaṅga. The detailed explanation of these should be understood from the Visuddhimagga. Thus, a bhikkhu who fulfills the Great Noble Lineage of contentment with robes protects these two dhutaṅgas. Protecting these, he is content with the Great Noble Lineage of contentment with robes.

Vaṇṇavādīti eko santuṭṭho hoti, santosassa vaṇṇaṃ na katheti, eko na santuṭṭho hoti, santosassa vaṇṇaṃ katheti, eko neva santuṭṭho hoti, na santosassa vaṇṇaṃ katheti, eko santuṭṭho ceva hoti, santosassa ca vaṇṇaṃ katheti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā ca vaṇṇavādī’’ti vuttaṃ.

Vaṇṇavādīti: Vaṇṇavādīti means one is content and does not speak in praise of contentment; one is not content but speaks in praise of contentment; one is neither content nor speaks in praise of contentment; one is both content and speaks in praise of contentment. To show that, it is said, “and one who speaks in praise of contentment with whatever robe.”

Anesananti dūteyyapahinagamanānuyogappabhedaṃ nānappakāraṃ anesanaṃ.Appatirūpanti ayuttaṃ.Aladdhā cāti alabhitvā. Yathā ekacco ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho cīvaraṃ labhissāmī’’ti. Puññavantehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ ekato hutvā kohaññaṃ karonto uttasati paritasati, santuṭṭho bhikkhu evaṃ aladdhā cīvaraṃ na paritasati.Laddhā cāti dhammena samena labhitvā.Agadhitoti vigatalobhagiddho.Amucchitoti adhimattataṇhāya mucchaṃ anāpanno.Anajjhāpannoti taṇhāya anotthato apariyonaddho.Ādīnavadassāvīti anesanāpattiyañca gedhitaparibhoge ca ādīnavaṃ passamāno.Nissaraṇapaññoti ‘‘yāvadeva sītassa paṭighātāyā’’ti vuttaṃ nissaraṇameva pajānanto.

Anesananti: Anesanaṃ means seeking improperly, in various ways, such as different kinds of messengers, sending, going after, and urging.Appatirūpanti: Appatirūpaṃ means unsuitable.Aladdhā cāti: Aladdhā ca means not having obtained. Just as some, thinking, "How shall I obtain a robe?", become agitated and distressed, behaving deceitfully together with meritorious bhikkhus, a contented bhikkhu, not having obtained a robe, does not become distressed in this way.Laddhā cāti: Laddhā ca means having obtained by rightful means.Agadhitoti: Agadhito means without craving and greed.Amucchitoti: Amucchito means not overcome by excessive craving.Anajjhāpannoti: Anajjhāpanno means not submerged or completely enveloped by craving.Ādīnavadassāvīti: Ādīnavadassāvīti means seeing the danger in improper seeking and in using it with greed.Nissaraṇapaññoti: Nissaraṇapañño means knowing just the escape, as it is said, "merely for warding off the cold."

Itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyāti yena kenaci cīvarena santuṭṭhiyā.Nevattānukkaṃsetīti ‘‘ahaṃ paṃsukūliko mayā upasampadamāḷeyeva paṃsukūlikaṅgaṃ gahitaṃ, ko mayā sadiso atthī’’ti attukkaṃsanaṃ na karoti.Na paraṃ vambhetīti ‘‘ime panaññe bhikkhū na paṃsukūlikā’’ti vā ‘‘paṃsukūlikaṅgamattampi etesaṃ natthī’’ti vā evaṃ paraṃ na vambheti.Yo hi tattha dakkhoti yo tasmiṃ cīvarasantose, vaṇṇavādādīsu vā dakkho cheko byatto.Analasoti sātaccakiriyāya ālasiyavirahito.Sampajāno paṭissatoti sampajānapaññāya ceva satiyā ca yutto.Ariyavaṃse ṭhitoti ariyavaṃse patiṭṭhito.

Itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyāti: Itarītaracīvarasantuṭṭhiyā means by contentment with whatever robe.Nevattānukkaṃsetīti: Nevattānukkaṃsetīti means "I am a paṃsukūlika; I took up the paṃsukūlikaṅga at the very ordination ceremony; who is like me?" He does not praise himself.Na paraṃ vambhetīti: Na paraṃ vambhetīti means he does not disparage others, saying, "These other bhikkhus are not paṃsukūlikas," or "They do not even have the least bit of the paṃsukūlikaṅga."Yo hi tattha dakkhoti: Yo hi tattha dakkho means whoever is skilled, clever, or proficient in that contentment with robes, or in praising, and so on.Analasoti: Analaso means without laziness in continuous action.Sampajāno paṭissatoti: Sampajāno paṭissato means endowed with comprehending wisdom and mindfulness.Ariyavaṃse ṭhitoti: Ariyavaṃse ṭhito means established in the Noble Lineage.

Itarītarena piṇḍapātenāti yena kenaci piṇḍapātena. Etthāpi piṇḍapāto jānitabbo. Piṇḍapātakkhettaṃ jānitabbaṃ, piṇḍapātasantoso jānitabbo, piṇḍapātapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tatthapiṇḍapātoti ‘‘odano, kummāso, sattu, maccho, maṃsaṃ, khīraṃ, dadhi, sappi, navanītaṃ, telaṃ, madhu, phāṇitaṃ, yāgu, khādanīyaṃ, sāyanīyaṃ, lehanīya’’nti soḷasa piṇḍapātā.

Itarītarena piṇḍapātenāti: Itarītarena piṇḍapātena means with whatever almsfood. Here too, almsfood should be known, the source of almsfood should be known, contentment with almsfood should be known, and the dhutaṅga connected with almsfood should be known. Here, piṇḍapātoti: piṇḍapāto means the sixteen kinds of almsfood: "rice, groats, flour, fish, meat, milk, curds, ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, molasses, rice-gruel, and things to be eaten, savored, and licked."

Piṇḍapātakkhettanti saṅghabhattaṃ, uddesabhattaṃ, nimantanaṃ, salākabhattaṃ, pakkhikaṃ, uposathikaṃ, pāṭipadikaṃ, āgantukabhattaṃ, gamikabhattaṃ, gilānabhattaṃ, gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ, dhurabhattaṃ, kuṭibhattaṃ, vārabhattaṃ, vihārabhattanti pannarasa piṇḍapātakkhettāni.

Piṇḍapātakkhettanti: Piṇḍapātakkhettaṃ means the fifteen sources of almsfood: communal meal, designated meal, invitation, ticket meal, fortnightly meal, uposatha meal, first-day meal, meal for guests, meal for travelers, meal for the sick, meal for attendants of the sick, regular meal, dwelling meal, turn meal, and monastery meal.

Piṇḍapātasantosoti piṇḍapāte vitakkasantoso, gamanasantoso, pariyesanasantoso paṭilābhasantoso, paṭiggahaṇasantoso, mattappaṭiggahaṇasantoso, loluppavivajjanasantoso, yathālābhasantoso, yathābalasantoso, yathāsāruppasantoso, upakārasantoso, parimāṇasantoso, paribhogasantoso, sannidhiparivajjanasantoso, vissajjanasantosoti pannarasa santosā.

Piṇḍapātasantoso: "Contentment with alms-food" means contentment in thought about alms-food, contentment in going, contentment in seeking, contentment in obtaining, contentment in receiving, contentment in moderate receiving, contentment in avoiding greed, contentment with what is obtained, contentment with one's strength, contentment with what is suitable, contentment with benefit, contentment with measure, contentment in consumption, contentment in avoiding accumulation, and contentment in relinquishing; these are the fifteen kinds of contentment.

vitakkasantosonāma.

Vitakkasantoso means contentment in thought.

gamanasantosonāma.

Gamanasantoso means contentment in going.

pariyesanasantosonāma.

Pariyesanasantoso means contentment in seeking.

paṭilābhasantosonāma.

Paṭilābhasantoso means contentment in obtaining.

paṭiggahaṇasantosonāma.

Paṭiggahaṇasantoso means contentment in receiving.

mattappaṭiggahaṇasantosonāma.

Mattappaṭiggahaṇasantoso means contentment in moderate receiving.

loluppavivajjanasantosonāma.Yathālābhasantosādayo cīvare vuttanayā eva.

Loluppavivajjanasantoso means contentment in avoiding greed. Yathālābhasantosā and the others are as described for robes.

upakārasantosonāma.

Upakārasantoso means contentment with benefit.

parimāṇasantosonāma.

Parimāṇasantoso means contentment with measure.

paribhogasantosonāma.

Paribhogasantoso means contentment in consumption.

sannidhiparivajjanasantosonāma.

Sannidhiparivajjanasantoso means contentment in avoiding accumulation.

vissajjanasantosonāma.

Vissajjanasantoso means contentment in relinquishing.

Piṇḍapātapaṭisaṃyuttānipana pañca dhutaṅgāni – piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ, sapadānacārikaṅgaṃ, ekāsanikaṅgaṃ, pattapiṇḍikaṅgaṃ, khalupacchābhattikaṅganti. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Iti piṇḍapātasantosamahāariyavaṃsaṃ pūrayamāno bhikkhu imāni pañca dhutaṅgāni gopeti. Imāni gopento piṇḍapātasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭho hoti. ‘‘Vaṇṇavādī’’tiādīni vuttanayeneva veditabbāni.

The five dhutaṅgas connected with alms-food are: the alms-food-practice dhutaṅga (piṇḍapātikaṅga), the going-from-house-to-house-for-alms-practice dhutaṅga (sapadānacārikaṅga), the one-session-eating-practice dhutaṅga (ekāsanikaṅga), the bowl-food-practice dhutaṅga (pattapiṇḍikaṅga), and the refusing-extra-offerings-of-food-practice dhutaṅga (khalupacchābhattikaṅga). The detailed explanation of these is given in the Visuddhimagga. Thus, a bhikkhu fulfilling the Great Lineage of the Contentment with Alms-food protects these five dhutaṅgas. Protecting these, he is content with the Great Lineage of the Contentment with Alms-food. "Praising" and the rest should be understood in the way already stated.

Senāsanenāti idha senāsanaṃ jānitabbaṃ, senāsanakkhettaṃ jānitabbaṃ, senāsanasantoso jānitabbo, senāsanapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhutaṅgaṃ jānitabbaṃ. Tatthasenāsananti mañco, pīṭhaṃ, bhisi, bimbohanaṃ, vihāro, aḍḍhayogo, pāsādo, hammiyaṃ, guhā, leṇaṃ, aṭṭo, māḷo, veḷugumbo, rukkhamūlaṃ, yattha vā pana bhikkhū paṭikkamantīti imāni pannarasa senāsanāni.

Senāsanenā: Here, lodging is to be understood, the category of lodging is to be understood, contentment with lodging is to be understood, and the dhutaṅga connected with lodging is to be understood. Among these, senāsana means a couch, a chair, a mattress, a pillow, a monastery, an aḍḍhayoga, a palace, a mansion, a cave, a rock shelter, an attic, an upper chamber, a bamboo grove, the foot of a tree, or any place where bhikkhus dwell; these are the fifteen kinds of lodging.

Senāsanakkhettanti ‘‘saṅghato vā gaṇato vā ñātito vā mittato vā attano vā dhanena paṃsukūlaṃ vā’’ti cha khettāni.

Senāsanakkhetta: The "acquired from the Saṅgha, or from a group, or from relatives, or from friends, or with one's own wealth, or from discarded rags" are the six categories.

Senāsanasantosoti senāsane vitakkasantosādayo pannarasa santosā. Te piṇḍapāte vuttanayeneva veditabbā.Senāsanapaṭisaṃyuttānipana pañca dhutaṅgāni – āraññikaṅgaṃ, rukkhamūlikaṅgaṃ, abbhokāsikaṅgaṃ, sosānikaṅgaṃ, yathāsantatikaṅganti. Tesaṃ vitthārakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Iti senāsanasantosamahāariyavaṃsaṃ pūrayamāno bhikkhu imāni pañca dhutaṅgāni gopeti. Imāni gopento senāsanasantosamahāariyavaṃsena santuṭṭho hoti.

Senāsanasantoso: Contentment with lodging means the fifteen kinds of contentment, beginning with contentment in thought about lodging. These should be understood in the way already stated for alms-food. The five dhutaṅgas connected with lodging are: the forest-dwelling-practice dhutaṅga (āraññikaṅga), the tree-root-dwelling-practice dhutaṅga (rukkhamūlikaṅga), the open-air-dwelling-practice dhutaṅga (abbhokāsikaṅga), the charnel-ground-dwelling-practice dhutaṅga (sosānikaṅga), and the using-whatever-lodging-is-assigned-practice dhutaṅga (yathāsantatikaṅga). The detailed explanation of these is given in the Visuddhimagga. Thus, a bhikkhu fulfilling the Great Lineage of the Contentment with Lodging protects these five dhutaṅgas. Protecting these, he is content with the Great Lineage of the Contentment with Lodging.

Gilānapaccayo pana piṇḍapāteyeva paviṭṭho. Tattha yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppasantoseneva santussitabbaṃ. Nesajjikaṅgaṃ bhāvanārāmaariyavaṃsaṃ bhajati. Vuttampi cetaṃ –

As for medicine for the sick, it is included in alms-food itself. Here, one should be content with contentment with what is obtained, contentment with one's strength, and contentment with what is suitable. The sitting-practice dhutaṅga (nesajjikaṅga) favors the delighting-in-development Noble Lineage. And it was said:

‘‘Pañca senāsane vuttā, pañca āhāranissitā;

"Five are stated regarding lodging, five are dependent on food; One is connected with effort, and two are dependent on robes."

puna caparaṃ āvuso bhikkhu pahānārāmo hotīti desanaṃ ārabhi.

puna caparaṃ āvuso bhikkhu pahānārāmo hotī: "Furthermore, āvuso, a bhikkhu is one who delights in abandoning"; the discourse was begun.

pahānārāmo.Kāmacchandaṃ pajahanto ramati, nekkhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, byāpādaṃ pajahanto ramati…pe… sabbakilese pajahanto ramati, arahattamaggaṃ bhāvento ramatīti evaṃ pahāne ratotipahānarato. Vuttanayeneva bhāvanāya ārāmo assātibhāvanārāmo.Bhāvanāya ratotibhāvanārato.

pahānārāmo: Pahānarato means one who delights in abandoning, delights in abandoning sensual desire, delights in developing renunciation, delights in abandoning ill-will…pe… delights in abandoning all defilements, delights in developing the path to Arahatship; thus, he delights in abandoning. Bhāvanārāmo: In the way already stated, he has delight in development, thus, bhāvanārāmo. Bhāvanārato means one who delights in development.

Imesu pana catūsu ariyavaṃsesu purimehi tīhi terasannaṃ dhutaṅgānaṃ catupaccayasantosassa ca vasena sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃ kathitaṃ hoti. Bhāvanārāmena avasesaṃ piṭakadvayaṃ. Imaṃ pana bhāvanārāmataṃ ariyavaṃsaṃ kathentena bhikkhunā paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyā kathetabbo. Dīghanikāye dasuttarasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo. Majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo. Abhidhamme niddesapariyāyena kathetabbo.

In these four Noble Lineages, the entire Vinaya Piṭaka is spoken of in terms of the first three, with their thirteen dhutaṅgas and the four kinds of contentment with requisites. The remaining two Piṭakas (Sutta Piṭaka and Abhidhamma Piṭaka) are [taught] through delighting in development. This delighting-in-development Noble Lineage should be taught by a bhikkhu according to the Nekkhammapāḷi in the Paṭisambhidāmagga, according to the Ten-Item Discourse (Dasuttarasuttanta) in the Dīgha Nikāya, according to the Foundations of Mindfulness Discourse (Satipaṭṭhānasuttanta) in the Majjhima Nikāya, and according to the method of exposition in the Abhidhamma.

paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyāti so nekkhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, kāmacchandaṃ pajahanto ramati. Abyāpādaṃ byāpādaṃ. Ālokasaññaṃ, thinamiddhaṃ. Avikkhepaṃ uddhaccaṃ. Dhammavavatthānaṃ, vicikicchaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ, avijjaṃ. Pāmojjaṃ, aratiṃ. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ, pañca nīvaraṇe. Dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ, vitakkavicāre. Tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ, pītiṃ. Catutthaṃ jhānaṃ, sukhadukkhe. Ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ bhāvento ramati, rūpasaññaṃ paṭighasaññaṃ nānattasaññaṃ pajahanto ramati. Viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiṃ…pe… nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiṃ bhāvento ramati, ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ pajahanto ramati.

paṭisambhidāmagge nekkhammapāḷiyā: In the Paṭisambhidāmagga, in the section on renunciation, "he delights in developing renunciation, delights in abandoning sensual desire. Non-ill-will, ill-will. The perception of light, sloth and torpor. Non-distraction, restlessness. Discernment of states, doubt. Knowledge, ignorance. Joy, discontent. The first jhāna, the five hindrances. The second jhāna, initial and sustained thought. The third jhāna, joy. The fourth jhāna, pleasure and pain. He delights in developing the attainment of the sphere of infinite space, delights in abandoning the perception of form, the perception of resistance, the perception of diversity. The attainment of the sphere of infinite consciousness…pe… he delights in developing the attainment of the sphere of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, delights in abandoning the perception of the sphere of nothingness."

paṭisambhidāmaggenekkhammapāḷiyā kathetabbo.

paṭisambhidāmagge should be taught in the Nekkhammapāḷi.

Dīghanikāyedasuttarasuttantapariyāyenāti ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati, ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramati…pe… dasa dhamme bhāvento ramati, dasa dhamme pajahanto ramati. Katamaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati? Kāyagatāsatiṃ sātasahagataṃ. Imaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ bhāvento ramati. Katamaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramati? Asmimānaṃ. Imaṃ ekaṃ dhammaṃ pajahanto ramati. Katame dve dhamme…pe… katame dasa dhamme bhāvento ramati? Dasa kasiṇāyatanāni. Ime dasa dhamme bhāvento ramati. Katame dasa dhamme pajahanto ramati? Dasa micchatte. Ime dasa dhamme pajahanto ramati. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotīti evaṃ dīghanikāye dasuttarasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo.

Dīghanikāye dasuttarasuttantapariyāyenā: In the Dīgha Nikāya, according to the method of the Ten-Item Discourse, "he delights in developing one thing, he delights in abandoning one thing…pe… he delights in developing ten things, he delights in abandoning ten things. What one thing does he delight in developing? Mindfulness directed to the body, accompanied by pleasure. He delights in developing this one thing. What one thing does he delight in abandoning? The conceit 'I am.' He delights in abandoning this one thing. What two things…pe… what ten things does he delight in developing? The ten kasiṇa spheres. He delights in developing these ten things. What ten things does he delight in abandoning? The ten wrong ways. He delights in abandoning these ten things. Thus, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu is one who delights in development"; in this way it should be taught according to the Ten-Item Discourse in the Dīgha Nikāya.

Majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyenāti ekāyano, bhikkhave, maggo sattānaṃ visuddhiyā, sokaparidevānaṃ samatikkamāya, dukkhadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāya, ñāyassa adhigamāya, nibbānassa sacchikiriyāya yadidaṃ cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati… vedanāsu vedanānupassī… citte cittānupassī… dhammesu dhammānupassī… ‘atthi dhammā’ti vā panassa sati paccupaṭṭhitā hoti yāvadeva ñāṇamattāya paṭissatimattāya anissito ca viharati na ca kiñci loke upādiyati. Evampi, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hoti bhāvanārato, pahānārāmo hoti pahānarato. Puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu gacchanto vā gacchāmīti pajānāti…pe… puna caparaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu seyyathāpi passeyya sarīraṃ sivathikāya chaḍḍitaṃ…pe… pūtīni cuṇṇakajātāni. So imameva kāyaṃ upasaṃharati, ayampi kho kāyo evaṃdhammo evaṃbhāvī evaṃanatītoti. Iti ajjhattaṃ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharati…pe… evampi kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotīti evaṃ majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyena kathetabbo.

Majjhimanikāye satipaṭṭhānasuttantapariyāyenā: "This is the direct path, bhikkhus, for the purification of beings, for the overcoming of sorrow and lamentation, for the destruction of pain and grief, for reaching the right path, for the realization of Nibbāna, that is, the four foundations of mindfulness. What four? Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu dwells contemplating the body in the body… contemplating feelings in feelings… contemplating mind in mind… contemplating phenomena in phenomena… 'There are phenomena,' his mindfulness is established to the extent necessary for mere knowledge and continuous mindfulness. And he dwells detached, and he clings to nothing in the world. Thus, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu is one who delights in development, delights in development, delights in abandoning, delights in abandoning. Furthermore, bhikkhus, when walking, a bhikkhu understands, 'I am walking'…pe… Furthermore, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu might see a body thrown in the charnel ground…pe… decomposed into dust. He applies this to his own body, 'This body of mine, too, is of the same nature, will become like this, and is not exempt from it.' Thus, he dwells contemplating the body in the body internally…pe… Thus, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu is one who delights in development"; in this way it should be taught according to the Foundations of Mindfulness Discourse in the Majjhima Nikāya.

Abhidhamme niddesapariyāyenāti sabbepi saṅkhate aniccato dukkhato rogato gaṇḍato…pe… saṃkilesikadhammato passanto ramati. Ayaṃ, bhikkhave, bhikkhu bhāvanārāmo hotīti evaṃ niddesapariyāyena kathetabbo.

Abhidhamme niddesapariyāyenā: In the Abhidhamma, according to the method of exposition, "he delights in seeing all conditioned things as impermanent, as suffering, as a disease, as a tumor…pe… as a defiling state. This bhikkhu, bhikkhus, is one who delights in development"; in this way it should be taught according to the method of exposition.

Nevaattānukkaṃsetīti ajja me saṭṭhi vā sattati vā vassāni aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti vipassanāya kammaṃ karontassa, ko mayā sadiso atthīti evaṃ attukkaṃsanaṃ na karoti.Na paraṃ vambhetīti aniccaṃ dukkhanti vipassanāmattakampi natthi, kiṃ ime vissaṭṭhakammaṭṭhānā carantīti evaṃ paraṃ vambhanaṃ na karoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

Neva attānukkaṃsetī: He does not exalt himself, [thinking,] "Today I am sixty or seventy years old, doing the work of insight into impermanence, suffering, and non-self; who is like me?" Thus, he does not exalt himself. Na paraṃ vambhetī: He does not disparage others, [thinking,] "There is not even mere insight into impermanence and suffering; what are these people doing, wandering about with abandoned meditation subjects?" The rest is as already stated.

310.Padhānānīti uttamavīriyāni.Saṃvarapadhānanti cakkhādīni saṃvarantassa uppannavīriyaṃ.Pahānapadhānanti kāmavitakkādayo pajahantassa uppannavīriyaṃ.Bhāvanāpadhānanti bojjhaṅge bhāventassa uppannavīriyaṃ.Anurakkhaṇāpadhānanti samādhinimittaṃ anurakkhantassa uppannavīriyaṃ.

310.Padhānāni: The supreme efforts. Saṃvarapadhāna: The effort that arises in one who restrains the eye and the other sense faculties. Pahānapadhāna: The effort that arises in one who abandons sensual thoughts and the like. Bhāvanāpadhāna: The effort that arises in one who develops the enlightenment factors. Anurakkhaṇāpadhāna: The effort that arises in one who protects the object of concentration.

Vivekanissitantiādīsu viveko virāgo nirodhoti tīṇipi nibbānassa nāmāni. Nibbānañhi upadhivivekattāviveko.Taṃ āgamma rāgādayo virajjantītivirāgo.Nirujjhantītinirodho.Tasmā ‘‘vivekanissita’’ntiādīsu ārammaṇavasena adhigantabbavasena vā nibbānanissitanti attho.Vossaggapariṇāminti ettha dve vossaggā pariccāgavossaggo ca pakkhandanavossaggo ca. Tattha vipassanā tadaṅgavasena kilese ca khandhe ca pariccajatīti pariccāgavossaggo. Maggo ārammaṇavasena nibbānaṃ pakkhandatīti pakkhandanavossaggo. Tasmā vossaggapariṇāminti yathā bhāviyamāno satisambojjhaṅgo vossaggatthāya pariṇamati, vipassanābhāvañca maggabhāvañca pāpuṇāti, evaṃ bhāvetīti ayamettha attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

Vivekanissita: Among "relies on detachment" and the rest, detachment (viveka), dispassion (virāga), and cessation (nirodha) are three names for Nibbāna. For Nibbāna is viveko because of detachment from the substrata of existence. Virāgo: Because, depending on it, the passions become dispassionate. Nirodho: Because they cease. Therefore, in "relies on detachment" and the rest, the meaning is "relies on Nibbāna" in terms of object or in terms of how it is attained. Vossaggapariṇāmi: Here, there are two kinds of relinquishment (vossagga): relinquishment by abandonment (pariccāgavossaggo) and relinquishment by inclination (pakkhandanavossaggo). Here, insight abandons the defilements and the aggregates by way of temporary abandonment, thus it is relinquishment by abandonment. The path inclines towards Nibbāna by way of object, thus it is relinquishment by inclination. Therefore, "culminating in relinquishment" means just as the mindfulness enlightenment factor, when developed, culminates in relinquishment, attains the state of insight and the state of the path, in this way he develops it; this is the meaning here. The same method [applies] in the remaining terms.

Bhadrakanti bhaddakaṃ.Samādhinimittaṃvuccati aṭṭhikasaññādivasena adhigato samādhiyeva.Anurakkhatīti samādhiparibandhakadhamme rāgadosamohe sodhento rakkhati. Ettha ca aṭṭhikasaññādikā pañceva saññā vuttā. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne dasapi asubhāni vitthāretvā kathetabbāni. Tesaṃ vitthāro visuddhimagge vuttoyeva.

Bhadraka: Auspicious. Samādhinimittaṃ: The object of concentration is said to be the concentration itself, attained by way of the perception of bones and the like. Anurakkhatī: He protects [it], purifying the states that obstruct concentration, such as greed, hatred, and delusion. And here, only five perceptions, such as the perception of bones, have been stated. But in this place, all ten kinds of foulness should be explained in detail. The detailed explanation of these is given in the Visuddhimagga.

Dhamme ñāṇanti ekapaṭivedhavasena catusaccadhamme ñāṇaṃ catusaccabbhantare nirodhasacce dhamme ñāṇañca. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ dhamme ñāṇaṃ? Catūsu maggesu catūsu phalesu ñāṇa’’nti (vibha. 796).Anvaye ñāṇanti cattāri saccāni paccakkhato disvā yathā idāni, evaṃ atītepi anāgatepi imeva pañcakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, ayameva taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, ayameva nirodho nirodhasaccaṃ, ayameva maggo maggasaccanti evaṃ tassa ñāṇassa anugatiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘so iminā dhammena ñātena diṭṭhena pattena viditena pariyogāḷhena atītānāgatena nayaṃ netī’’ti.Pariye ñāṇanti paresaṃ cittaparicchede ñāṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ pariye ñāṇaṃ? Idha bhikkhu parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ cetasā ceto paricca jānātī’’ti (vibha. 796) vitthāretabbaṃ. Ṭhapetvā pana imāni tīṇi ñāṇāni avasesaṃsammutiñāṇaṃnāma. Yathāha – ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sammutiñāṇaṃ? Ṭhapetvā dhamme ñāṇaṃ ṭhapetvā anvaye ñāṇaṃ ṭhapetvā paricchede ñāṇaṃ avasesaṃ sammutiñāṇa’’nti (vibha. 796).

Dhamme ñāṇa: Knowledge of the Dhamma is knowledge of the four Noble Truths as a single penetration, and knowledge of the Truth of Cessation, within the four Noble Truths. As it was said, "What is knowledge of the Dhamma? Knowledge of the four paths and the four fruits" (vibha. 796). Anvaye ñāṇa: Knowledge of consequence is knowledge that, having directly seen the four Truths, [knows that] just as it is now, so also in the past and in the future, these same five aggregates are the Truth of Suffering, this same craving is the Truth of Origin, this same cessation is the Truth of Cessation, and this same path is the Truth of the Path. Therefore, he said, "He infers the method with this Dhamma that is known, seen, attained, understood, and deeply penetrated, with the past and the future." Pariye ñāṇa: Knowledge of what is knowable is knowledge of the distinction of others' minds. As it was said, "What is knowledge of what is knowable? Here, a bhikkhu understands the minds of other beings and other persons with his own mind" (vibha. 796), it should be explained in detail. But setting aside these three kinds of knowledge, the remaining [knowledge] is called sammutiñāṇa. As it was said, "What is conventional knowledge? Setting aside knowledge of the Dhamma, setting aside knowledge of consequence, setting aside knowledge of what is knowable, the remaining [knowledge] is conventional knowledge" (vibha. 796).

Dukkhe ñāṇādīhi arahattaṃ pāpetvā ekassa bhikkhuno niggamanaṃ catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Tattha dve saccāni vaṭṭaṃ, dve vivaṭṭaṃ, vaṭṭe abhiniveso hoti, no vivaṭṭe. Dvīsu saccesu ācariyasantike pariyattiṃ uggahetvā kammaṃ karoti, dvīsu saccesu ‘‘nirodhasaccaṃ nāma iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpaṃ, maggasaccaṃ nāma iṭṭhaṃ kantaṃ manāpa’’nti savanavasena kammaṃ karoti. Dvīsu saccesu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇasammasanapaṭivedho vaṭṭati, dvīsu savanapaṭivedho vaṭṭati. Tīṇi kiccavasena paṭivijjhati, ekaṃ ārammaṇavasena. Dve saccāni duddasattā gambhīrāni, dve gambhīrattā duddasāni.

Having caused a bhikkhu to attain Arahatship with Dukkhe ñāṇā and the rest, the four Noble Truths meditation subject has been spoken. Here, two Truths are the round [of existence], two are the escape [from existence]; there is attachment to the round, not to the escape. Having learned the teaching concerning two Truths in the presence of a teacher, he engages in meditation. With regard to two Truths, "the Truth of Cessation is desirable, lovely, and pleasing; the Truth of the Path is desirable, lovely, and pleasing," he engages in meditation by way of hearing. With regard to two Truths, learning, questioning, hearing, retaining, reflecting, and penetrating are proper; with regard to two, hearing and penetrating are proper. He penetrates three in terms of function, and one in terms of object. Two Truths are difficult to see because they are profound, two are difficult to see because they are profound.

Sotāpattiyaṅgādicatukkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Group of Factors of Stream-Entry, etc.

311.Sotāpattiyaṅgānīti sotāpattiyā aṅgāni, sotāpattimaggassa paṭilābhakāraṇānīti attho.Sappurisasaṃsevoti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ upasaṅkamitvā sevanaṃ.Saddhammassavananti sappāyassa tepiṭakadhammassa savanaṃ.Yonisomanasikāroti aniccādivasena manasikāro.Dhammānudhammappaṭipattīti lokuttaradhammassa anudhammabhūtāya pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyā paṭipajjanaṃ.

311.Sotāpattiyaṅgāni: The factors of stream-entry are the limbs of stream-entry, the causes for the attainment of the path of stream-entry. Sappurisasaṃsevo: Associating with and attending upon good people, such as the Buddhas. Saddhammassavana: Hearing the good Dhamma, the Tipiṭaka, which is conducive [to liberation]. Yonisomanasikāro: Attending in a proper way, by way of impermanence and the like. Dhammānudhammappaṭipattī: Practicing the preliminary practice that is in accordance with the supramundane Dhamma.

Aveccappasādenāti acalappasādena. ‘‘Itipi so bhagavā’’tiādīni visuddhimagge vitthāritāni. Phaladhātuāhāracatukkāni uttānatthāneva. Apicettha lūkhapaṇītavatthuvasena oḷārikasukhumatā veditabbā.

Aveccappasādenā: With unwavering faith. "Itipi so bhagavā" and the rest have been explained in detail in the Visuddhimagga. The four factors of the fruit element and the four kinds of nutriment have easily understood meanings. Moreover, here, coarseness and subtlety should be understood in terms of coarse and fine objects.

Viññāṇaṭṭhitiyoti viññāṇaṃ etāsu tiṭṭhatīti viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Ārammaṇaṭṭhitivasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.Rūpūpāyanti rūpaṃ upagataṃ hutvā. Pañcavokārabhavasmiñhi abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ rūpakkhandhaṃ nissāya tiṭṭhati. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Rūpārammaṇanti rūpakkhandhagocaraṃ rūpapatiṭṭhitaṃ hutvā.Nandūpasecananti lobhasahagataṃ sampayuttanandiyāva upasittaṃ hutvā. Itaraṃ upanissayakoṭiyā.Vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjatīti saṭṭhipi sattatipi vassāni evaṃ pavattamānaṃ vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjati.Vedanūpāyādīsupieseva nayo. Imehi pana tīhi padehi catuvokārabhave abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa yāvatāyukaṃ pavattanavasena vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjanā veditabbā. Catukkavasena pana desanāya āgatattā viññāṇūpāyanti na vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuccamāne ca ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho ettha kammaviññāṇaṃ, katamaṃ vipākaviññāṇa’’nti sammoho bhaveyya, tasmāpi na vuttaṃ.Agatigamanānivitthāritāneva.

Viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo means viññāṇa stands in these, therefore, viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. This is said in terms of the standing of the object. Rūpūpāya means having approached form. For in the five-aggregate existence, resultant consciousness stands dependent on the form aggregate. Referring to that, this is said. Rūpārammaṇa means having form as its object, being established in form. Nandūpasecana means being sprinkled, as it were, with delight accompanied by greed and associated with joy. The other is in the sense of being a support condition. Vuddhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjatī means thus occurring for sixty or seventy years, it attains growth, increase, and abundance. Vedanūpāyādīsupi the method is the same for feeling, etc. However, with these three terms, resultant consciousness in the four-aggregate existence is stated. Its attaining growth, increase, and abundance should be understood in terms of occurring for as long as life lasts. However, since it comes in the teaching as a tetrad, "viññāṇūpāya" is not said. And if it were said thus, there might be confusion, thinking "Which here is kamma-consciousness, which is result-consciousness?" Therefore, it is not said. Agatigamanāni are just as explained in detail.

Cīvarahetūti tattha manāpaṃ cīvaraṃ labhissāmīti cīvarakāraṇā uppajjati.Iti bhavābhavahetūti etthaitīti nidassanatthe nipāto. Yathā cīvarādihetu, evaṃ bhavābhavahetūpīti attho.Bhavābhavoti cettha paṇītapaṇītatarāni telamadhuphāṇitādīni adhippetāni. Imesaṃ pana catunnaṃ taṇhuppādānaṃ pahānatthāya paṭipāṭiyāva cattāro ariyavaṃsā desitāti veditabbā.Paṭipadācatukkaṃheṭṭhā vuttameva. Akkhamādīsu padhānakaraṇakāle sītādīni na khamatītiakkhamā.Khamatītikhamā.Indriyadamanaṃdamā.‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā nayena vitakkasamanaṃsamā.

Cīvarahetū means it arises because of robes, thinking "I will obtain a desirable robe." Iti bhavābhavahetū here, iti is a particle in the sense of exemplification. Just as because of robes, etc., so also because of the cause of becoming and non-becoming is the meaning. Bhavābhavo here implies superior and ever more superior refined products such as sesame oil, honey, and molasses. It should be understood that the four ariyavaṃsas are taught in order, for the abandoning of these four arising of craving. Paṭipadācatukkaṃ has already been stated below. When one is making effort in regard to patience, etc., if cold, etc., are not tolerated, that is akkhamā. If they are tolerated, that is khamā. Indriyadamanaṃ is taming. "He does not tolerate arisen sensual thinking," in this way, the calming of thoughts is samā.

Dhammapadānīti dhammakoṭṭhāsāni. Anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ nāma alobho vā alobhasīsena adhigatajjhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni vā. Abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ nāma akopo vā mettāsīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Sammāsati dhammapadaṃ nāma suppaṭṭhitasati vā satisīsena adhigatajjhānādīni vā. Sammāsamādhi dhammapadaṃ nāma samāpatti vā aṭṭhasamāpattivasena adhigatajjhānavipassanāmaggaphalanibbānāni vā. Dasāsubhavasena vā adhigatajjhānādīni anabhijjhā dhammapadaṃ. Catubrahmavihāravasena adhigatāni abyāpādo dhammapadaṃ. Dasānussatiāhārepaṭikūlasaññāvasena adhigatāni sammāsati dhammapadaṃ. Dasakasiṇaānāpānavasena adhigatāni sammāsamādhi dhammapadanti.

Dhammapadānī means sections of Dhamma. "Non-covetousness is a Dhammapada" means either non-greed, or the jhānas, vipassanā, paths, fruits, and Nibbāna attained with non-greed as the head. "Non-ill-will is a Dhammapada" means either non-anger, or the jhānas, etc., attained with loving-kindness as the head. "Right mindfulness is a Dhammapada" means either well-established mindfulness, or the jhānas, etc., attained with mindfulness as the head. "Right concentration is a Dhammapada" means either attainment, or the jhānas, vipassanā, paths, fruits, and Nibbāna attained in terms of the eight attainments. Or the jhānas, etc., attained in terms of the ten kinds of ugliness are non-covetousness as a Dhammapada. The jhānas attained in terms of the four brahmavihāras are non-ill-will as a Dhammapada. The jhānas attained in terms of the ten recollections and the perception of repulsiveness in food are right mindfulness as a Dhammapada. The jhānas attained in terms of the ten kasinas and mindfulness of breathing are right concentration as a Dhammapada.

Dhammasamādānesu paṭhamaṃ acelakapaṭipadā. Dutiyaṃ tibbakilesassa arahattaṃ gahetuṃ asakkontassa assumukhassāpi rudato parisuddhabrahmacariyacaraṇaṃ. Tatiyaṃ kāmesu pātabyatā. Catutthaṃ cattāro paccaye alabhamānassāpi jhānavipassanāvasena sukhasamaṅgino sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ.

Among the Dhammasamādānas, the first is the practice of the naked ascetics. The second is the practice of pure Brahmacariya, even for one who is weeping with tearful face, unable to take hold of Arahatship because of intense defilements. The third is indulgence in sensual pleasures. The fourth is the Sāsanabrahmacariya of one who is endowed with happiness in terms of jhāna and vipassanā, even without obtaining the four requisites.

Dhammakkhandhāti ettha guṇaṭṭho khandhaṭṭho.Sīlakkhandhoti sīlaguṇo. Ettha ca phalasīlaṃ adhippetaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Iti catūsupi ṭhānesu phalameva vuttaṃ.

Dhammakkhandhā here, khandha has the meaning of quality and the meaning of aggregate. Sīlakkhandho means the quality of virtue. Here, the virtue of fruition is intended. The method is the same in the remaining terms also. Thus, in all four instances, only the fruit is stated.

Balānīti upatthambhanaṭṭhena akampiyaṭṭhena ca balāni. Tesaṃ paṭipakkhehi kosajjādīhi akampaniyatā veditabbā. Sabbānipi samathavipassanāmaggavasena lokiyalokuttarāneva kathitāni.

Balānī means strengths in the sense of supporting and in the sense of being unshakeable. Their being unshakeable by their opponents, such as laziness, should be understood. All of them are spoken of as mundane and supramundane only in terms of samatha, vipassanā, and magga.

Adhiṭṭhānānīti etthaadhīti upasaggamattaṃ. Atthato pana tena vā tiṭṭhanti, tattha vā tiṭṭhanti, ṭhānameva vā taṃtaṃguṇādhikānaṃ purisānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, paññāva adhiṭṭhānaṃpaññādhiṭṭhānaṃ.Ettha ca paṭhamena aggaphalapaññā. Dutiyena vacīsaccaṃ. Tatiyena āmisapariccāgo. Catutthena kilesūpasamo kathitoti veditabbo. Paṭhamena ca kammassakatapaññaṃ vipassanāpaññaṃ vā ādiṃ katvā phalapaññā kathitā. Dutiyena vacīsaccaṃ ādiṃ katvā paramatthasaccaṃ nibbānaṃ. Tatiyena āmisapariccāgaṃ ādiṃ katvā aggamaggena kilesapariccāgo. Catutthena samāpattivikkhambhite kilese ādiṃ katvā aggamaggena kilesavūpasamo. Paññādhiṭṭhānena vā ekena arahattaphalapaññā kathitā. Sesehi paramatthasaccaṃ. Saccādhiṭṭhānena vā ekena paramatthasaccaṃ kathitaṃ. Sesehi arahattapaññātimūsikābhayattheroāha.

Adhiṭṭhānānī here, adhi is merely a prefix. But in meaning, that by which they stand, or in which they stand, or that which is the basis for men of superior qualities, is adhiṭṭhāna; paññā itself is adhiṭṭhāna, paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Here, with the first, the highest fruit-wisdom; with the second, truthfulness of speech; with the third, the relinquishing of material things; with the fourth, the stilling of defilements is said, it should be understood. And with the first, the knowledge that beings are owners of their kamma, or vipassanā-paññā, having made it the beginning, fruit-wisdom is stated. With the second, making truthfulness of speech the beginning, the ultimate truth, Nibbāna. With the third, making the giving up of material things the beginning, the giving up of defilements by the highest path. With the fourth, making the defilements suppressed by samāpatti the beginning, the stilling of defilements by the highest path. Or, with wisdom as the basis, the wisdom of Arahatship-fruition is stated. With the remaining, the ultimate truth. Or, with truth as the basis, with one, the ultimate truth is stated. With the remaining, the wisdom of Arahatship, Mūsikābhayatthero said.

Pañhabyākaraṇādicatukkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Tetrad Beginning with Questions and Answers

312.Pañhabyākaraṇānimahāpadesakathāya vitthāritāneva.

312.Pañhabyākaraṇāni are just as explained in detail in the discourse on the Great Authorities.

Kaṇhanti kāḷakaṃ dasaakusalakammapathakammaṃ.Kaṇhavipākanti apāye nibbattanato kāḷakavipākaṃ.Sukkanti paṇḍaraṃ kusalakammapathakammaṃ.Sukkavipākanti sagge nibbattanato paṇḍaravipākaṃ.Kaṇhasukkanti missakakammaṃ.Kaṇhasukkavipākanti sukhadukkhavipākaṃ. Missakakammañhi katvā akusalena tiracchānayoniyaṃ maṅgalahatthiṭṭhānādīsu uppanno kusalena pavatte sukhaṃ vedayati. Kusalena rājakulepi nibbatto akusalena pavatte dukkhaṃ vedayati.Akaṇhaasukkanti kammakkhayakaraṃ catumaggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañhi yadi kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Yadi sukkaṃ bhaveyya, sukkavipākaṃ dadeyya. Ubhayavipākassa pana adānato akaṇhāsukkavipākattā akaṇhaṃ asukkanti ayamettha attho.

Kaṇha means black, the ten unwholesome courses of action. Kaṇhavipāka means having a black result because of being reborn in the apāyas. Sukka means white, the wholesome courses of action. Sukkavipāka means having a white result because of being reborn in the heavens. Kaṇhasukka means mixed action. Kaṇhasukkavipāka means a result that is both happiness and suffering. For having done mixed action, born in the animal realm due to unwholesome kamma, in places such as the elephant-stables for auspicious elephants, he experiences happiness when the wholesome kamma operates. Or, born in a royal family due to wholesome kamma, he experiences suffering when the unwholesome kamma operates. Akaṇhaasukka means the fourfold path-knowledge that destroys kamma is intended. For if that were black, it would give a black result. If it were white, it would give a white result. But since it does not give either result, it is non-black and non-white, therefore, non-black and non-white is the meaning here.

Sacchikaraṇīyāti paccakkhakaraṇena ceva paṭilābhena ca sacchikātabbā.Cakkhunāti dibbacakkhunā.Kāyenāti sahajātanāmakāyena.Paññāyāti arahattaphalañāṇena.

Sacchikaraṇīyā means to be realized by making visible and by attaining. Cakkhunā means with the divine eye. Kāyenā means with the body of one's own nature. Paññāyā means with the knowledge of Arahatship-fruition.

Oghāti vaṭṭasmiṃ satte ohananti osīdāpentīti oghā. Tattha pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgokāmogho.Rūpārūpabhavesu chandarāgobhavogho.Tathā jhānanikanti sassatadiṭṭhisahagato ca rāgo. Dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyodiṭṭhogho.

Oghā means floods, because they drag down and sink beings in the round of existence. There, the greed consisting of the five strands of sensual pleasure is kāmogho. The desire and lust for the form and formless existences is bhavogho. Likewise, the delight in jhāna accompanied by the eternity-belief. The sixty-two views are diṭṭhogho.

yogā.Te oghā viya veditabbā.

yogā. These should be understood like floods.

visaññogā.Tattha asubhajjhānaṃ kāmayogavisaṃyogo. Taṃ pādakaṃ katvā adhigato anāgāmimaggo ekantenevakāmayogavisaññogonāma. Arahattamaggobhavayogavisaññogonāma. Sotāpattimaggodiṭṭhiyogavisaññogonāma. Arahattamaggoavijjāyogavisaññogonāma.

visaññogā. There, the foulness meditation is detachment from the bond of sensual pleasure. The non-returning path attained making that the basis is entirely kāmayogavisaññogo. The Arahatship-path is bhavayogavisaññogo. The Stream-entry path is diṭṭhiyogavisaññogo. The Arahatship-path is avijjāyogavisaññogo.

ganthā.Vaṭṭasmiṃ nāmakāyañceva rūpakāyañca ganthati bandhati palibundhatītikāyagantho.Idaṃsaccābhinivesoti idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti evaṃ pavatto diṭṭhābhiniveso.

ganthā. Because it ties, binds, and fetters the name-body and form-body in the round of existence, it is kāyagantho. Idaṃsaccābhiniveso means the adherence to views that occur thus: "This alone is true, other views are worthless."

Upādānānīti ādānaggahaṇāni. Kāmoti rāgo, soyeva gahaṇaṭṭhena upādānantikāmupādānaṃ.Diṭṭhīti micchādiṭṭhi, sāpi gahaṇaṭṭhena upādānantidiṭṭhupādānaṃ.Iminā suddhīti evaṃ sīlavatānaṃ gahaṇaṃsīlabbatupādānaṃ.Attāti etena vadati ceva upādiyati cātiattavādupādānaṃ.

Upādānānī means grasping and seizing. Kāma means greed; that itself, in the sense of grasping, is upādāna, kāmupādānaṃ. Diṭṭhi means wrong view; that too, in the sense of grasping, is upādāna, diṭṭhupādānaṃ. "By this is purity," thus, the grasping of those devoted to mere rules and rituals is sīlabbatupādānaṃ. "Self," with this one both speaks and grasps, therefore, attavādupādānaṃ.

Yoniyoti koṭṭhāsā. Aṇḍe jātātiaṇḍajā.Jalābumhi jātātijalābujā.Saṃsede jātātisaṃsedajā.Sayanasmiṃ pūtimacchādīsu ca nibbattānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vegena āgantvā upapatitā viyātiopapātikā.Tattha devamanussesu saṃsedajaopapātikānaṃ ayaṃ viseso. Saṃsedajā mandā daharā hutvā nibbattanti. Opapātikā soḷasavassuddesikā hutvā. Manussesu hi bhummadevesu ca imā catassopi yoniyo labbhanti. Tathā tiracchānesu supaṇṇanāgādīsu. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘tattha, bhikkhave, aṇḍajā supaṇṇā aṇḍajeva nāge haranti, na jalābuje na saṃsedaje na opapātike’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.393). Cātumahārājikato paṭṭhāya uparidevā opapātikāyeva. Tathā nerayikā. Petesu catassopi labbhanti.Gabbhāvakkantiyosampasādanīye kathitā eva.

Yoniyo means wombs. Aṇḍajā means born from an egg. Jalābujā means born from a womb. Saṃsedajā means born from moisture. This is a designation for those born in beds and in decaying fish, etc. Opapātikā means spontaneously born, as if coming with speed. There, this is the distinction among the moisture-born and spontaneously born among devas and humans: moisture-born beings are born feeble and young. Spontaneously born beings are born as if sixteen years old. For among humans and terrestrial devas these four kinds of birth are found. Likewise, among animals such as Garuḷas and Nāgas. For it was said, "There, monks, Garuḷas born from eggs seize Nāgas born from eggs, but not those born from a womb, born from moisture, or spontaneously born" (saṃ. ni. 3.393). Beginning from the realm of the Four Great Kings, the devas above are only spontaneously born. Likewise, the inhabitants of hell. All four are found among pretas. Gabbhāvakkantiyo have already been spoken of in the Sampasādanīya Sutta.

Attabhāvapaṭilābhesupaṭhamo khiḍḍāpadosikavasena veditabbo. Dutiyo orabbhikādīhi ghātiyamānaurabbhādivasena. Tatiyo manopadosikāvasena. Catuttho cātumahārājike upādāya uparisesadevatāvasena. Te hi devā neva attasañcetanāya maranti, na parasañcetanāya.

Attabhāvapaṭilābhesu the first should be understood in terms of those who are corrupted by play. The second in terms of goats and so on being slaughtered by butchers, etc. The third in terms of those corrupted by mind. The fourth in terms of the devas beginning with the realm of the Four Great Kings and the remaining upper devas. For those devas do not die either by their own intention or by the intention of others.

Dakkhiṇāvisuddhādicatukkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Tetrad Beginning with Purity of Donations

313.Dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyoti dānasaṅkhātā dakkhiṇā visujjhanti mahapphalā honti etāhītidakkhiṇāvisuddhiyo.

313.Dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyo means donations, which are called dakkhiṇā, become pure, are of great fruit by these, therefore, dakkhiṇāvisuddhiyo.

Dāyakato visujjhati, no paṭiggāhakatoti yattha dāyako sīlavā hoti, dhammenuppannaṃ deyyadhammaṃ deti, paṭiggāhako dussīlo. Ayaṃ dakkhiṇā vessantaramahārājassa dakkhiṇāsadisā.Paṭiggāhakatovisujjhati, no dāyakatoti yattha paṭiggāhako sīlavā hoti, dāyako dussīlo, adhammenuppannaṃ deti, ayaṃ dakkhiṇā coraghātakassa dakkhiṇāsadisā.Neva dāyakato visujjhati, no paṭiggāhakatoti yattha ubhopi dussīlā deyyadhammopi adhammena nibbatto. Vipariyāyena catutthā veditabbā.

Dāyakato visujjhati, no paṭiggāhakato means where the donor is virtuous, he gives material goods produced by lawful means, but the recipient is immoral. This donation is similar to the donation of King Vessantara. Paṭiggāhakato visujjhati, no dāyakato means where the recipient is virtuous, but the donor is immoral, he gives something produced by unlawful means, this donation is similar to the donation of a robber-executioner. Neva dāyakato visujjhati, no paṭiggāhakato means where both are immoral, and the material goods are also produced by unlawful means. The fourth should be understood in the opposite way.

Saṅgahavatthūnīti saṅgahakāraṇāni. Tāni heṭṭhā vibhattāneva.

Saṅgahavatthūnī means causes of sympathy. These have already been distinguished below.

Anariyavohārāti anariyānaṃ lāmakānaṃ vohārā.

Anariyavohārā means the speech of the ignoble, the base.

Ariyavohārāti ariyānaṃ sappurisānaṃ vohārā.

Ariyavohārā means the speech of the noble, the true.

Diṭṭhavāditāti diṭṭhaṃ mayāti evaṃ vāditā. Ettha ca taṃtaṃsamuṭṭhāpakacetanāvasena attho veditabbo.

Diṭṭhavāditā means speaking thus, "It has been seen by me." Here, the meaning should be understood in terms of the different kinds of motivating intention.

Attantapādicatukkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Tetrad Beginning with One Who Torments Himself

314.Attantapādīsu paṭhamo acelako. Dutiyo orabbhikādīsu aññataro. Tatiyo yaññayājako. Catuttho sāsane sammāpaṭipanno.

314. Among Attantapā, the first is the naked ascetic. The second is one of the butchers, etc. The third is a sacrificer. The fourth is one who is practicing rightly in the Sāsana.

Attahitāya paṭipannādīsu paṭhamo yo sayaṃ sīlādisampanno, paraṃ sīlādīsu na samādapeti āyasmā vakkalitthero viya. Dutiyo yo attanā na sīlādisampanno, paraṃ sīlādīsu samādapeti āyasmā upanando viya. Tatiyo yo nevattanā sīlādisampanno, paraṃ sīlādīsu na samādapeti devadatto viya. Catuttho yo attanā ca sīlādisampanno parañca sīlādīsu samādapeti āyasmā mahākassapo viya.

Among Attahitāya paṭipannā, the first is one who is himself accomplished in virtue, etc., but does not encourage others in virtue, etc., like venerable Vakkali Thera. The second is one who is not himself accomplished in virtue, etc., but encourages others in virtue, etc., like venerable Upananda. The third is one who is himself neither accomplished in virtue, etc., nor does he encourage others in virtue, etc., like Devadatta. The fourth is one who is himself accomplished in virtue, etc., and encourages others in virtue, etc., like venerable Mahākassapa.

tamoti andhakārabhūto.Tamaparāyaṇoti tamameva paraṃ ayanaṃ gati assāti tamaparāyaṇo. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Ettha ca paṭhamo nīce caṇḍālādikule dujjīvite hīnattabhāve nibbattitvā tīṇi duccaritāni paripūreti. Dutiyo tathāvidho hutvā tīṇi sucaritāni paripūreti. Tatiyo uḷāre khattiyakule bahuannapāne sampannattabhāve nibbattitvā tīṇi duccaritāni paripūreti. Catuttho tādisova hutvā tīṇi sucaritāni paripūreti.

tamo means being darkness. Tamaparāyaṇo means having darkness itself as the supreme resort and destiny. The meaning should be understood thus in all the terms. Here, the first, born in a low Caṇḍāla family and living a miserable life, fulfills the three kinds of misconduct. The second, being thus, fulfills the three kinds of good conduct. The third, born in a noble Khattiya family and having an abundance of food and drink, fulfills the three kinds of misconduct. The fourth, being just so, fulfills the three kinds of good conduct.

Samaṇamacaloti samaṇaacalo. Ma-kāro padasandhimattaṃ. So sotāpanno veditabbo. Sotāpanno hi catūhi vātehi indakhīlo viya parappavādehi akampiyo. Acalasaddhāya samannāgatotisamaṇamacalo.Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘katamo ca puggalo samaṇamacalo? Idhekacco puggalo tiṇṇaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ parikkhayā’’ti (pu. pa. 190) vitthāro. Rāgadosānaṃ pana tanubhūtattā sakadāgāmīsamaṇapadumonāma. Tenāha – ‘‘katamo pana puggalo samaṇapadumo? Idhekacco puggalo sakideva imaṃ lokaṃ āgantvā dukkhassantaṃ karoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samaṇapadumo’’ti (pu. pa. 190). Rāgadosānaṃ abhāvā khippameva pupphissatīti anāgāmīsamaṇapuṇḍarīkonāma. Tenāha – ‘‘katamo ca puggalo samaṇapuṇḍarīko? Idhekacco puggalo pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ…pe… ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samaṇapuṇḍarīko’’ti (pu. pa. 190). Arahā pana sabbesampi ganthakārakilesānaṃ abhāvā samaṇesusamaṇasukhumālonāma. Tenāha – ‘‘katamo ca puggalo samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo? Idhekacco āsavānaṃ khayā…pe… upasampajja viharati. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo samaṇesu samaṇasukhumālo’’ti.

Samaṇamacalo means samaṇa acalo. The ma-kāra is merely for euphonic combination. He should be understood as a Stream-enterer. For a Stream-enterer is unshakeable by opposing views, like an Indakhīla post by the four winds. He is endowed with unshakable faith, therefore samaṇamacalo. And it was said, "And what person is a samaṇamacalo? Here, a certain person, with the destruction of three fetters…" (pu. pa. 190) the detailed passage. However, because greed and hatred are thinned out, a Once-returner is called samaṇapadumo. Therefore, he said, "And what person is a samaṇapadumo? Here, a certain person, having come to this world only once, makes an end of suffering; this person is called a samaṇapadumo" (pu. pa. 190). Because greed and hatred are absent, he will quickly blossom, therefore, a Non-returner is called samaṇapuṇḍarīko. Therefore, he said, "And what person is a samaṇapuṇḍarīko? Here, a certain person, with the destruction of the five lower fetters… this person is called a samaṇapuṇḍarīko" (pu. pa. 190). But an Arahant, because of the absence of all the defilements that make ties, among samaṇas is called samaṇasukhumālo. Therefore, he said, "And what person among samaṇas is a samaṇasukhumālo? Here, a certain person, with the destruction of the āsavas… dwells having realized it for himself with direct knowledge. This person is called a samaṇasukhumālo among samaṇas."

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti samapaññāsāya catukkānaṃ vasena dvepañhasatāni kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

"Ime kho, āvuso," etc., should be connected in the way already said. Thus, while stating two hundred questions in terms of the tetrads of equal wisdom, the elder showed the flavor of concord.

Catukkavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Tetrads is Finished.

Pañcakavaṇṇanā
Description of the Pentads

315.Iti catukkavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni pañcakavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha pañcasu khandhesurūpakkhandholokiyo. Sesālokiyalokuttarā. Upādānakkhandhālokiyāva. Vitthārato pana khandhakathā visuddhimagge vuttā.Kāmaguṇāheṭṭhā vitthāritāva.

315. Thus, having shown the essence of harmony (sāmaggirasa) by way of the tetrad, now, to show it by way of the pentad, he begins the discourse again. Therein, among the five aggregates (khandha), the aggregate of form (rūpakkhandha) is mundane (lokiya). The remaining are both mundane and supramundane (lokiyalokuttarā). The aggregates of clinging (upādānakkhandhā) are only mundane. However, the detailed discourse on the aggregates has been given in the Visuddhimagga. Sensual pleasures (kāmaguṇā) have already been extensively explained below.

gatiyo. Nirayoti nirassādo. Sahokāsena khandhā kathitā. Tato paresu tīsu nibbattā khandhāva vuttā. Catutthe okāsopi.

Destinies (gatiyo). Niraya means without joy. The aggregates have been spoken of along with their locations. After that, in the following three, only the aggregates arisen are spoken of, while in the fourth, the location (okāsa) is also included.

āvāsamacchariyaṃ.Tena samannāgato bhikkhu āgantukaṃ disvā ‘‘ettha cetiyassa vā saṅghassa vā parikkhāro ṭhapito’’tiādīni vatvā saṅghikampi āvāsaṃ nivāreti. So kālaṅkatvā peto vā ajagaro vā hutvā nibbattati. Kule macchariyaṃkulamacchariyaṃ.Tena samannāgato bhikkhu tehi kāraṇehi attano upaṭṭhākakule aññesaṃ pavesanampi nivāreti. Lābhe macchariyaṃlābhamacchariyaṃ.Tena samannāgato bhikkhu saṅghikampi lābhaṃ maccharāyanto yathā aññe na labhanti, evaṃ karoti. Vaṇṇe macchariyaṃvaṇṇamacchariyaṃ. Vaṇṇoti cettha sarīravaṇṇopi guṇavaṇṇopi veditabbo. Pariyattidhamme macchariyaṃdhammamacchariyaṃ.Tena samannāgato bhikkhu ‘‘imaṃ dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā eso maṃ abhibhavissatī’’ti aññassa na deti. Yo pana dhammānuggahena vā puggalānuggahena vā na deti, na taṃ macchariyaṃ.

Stinginess about dwellings (āvāsamacchariyaṃ). A bhikkhu possessing this, upon seeing a newcomer, says things like, "Here, requisites for the cetiya or the saṅgha are placed," and thus prevents even what belongs to the saṅgha from being used as a dwelling. Having died, he is reborn as a peta or a python. Stinginess about families is stinginess about families (kulamacchariyaṃ). A bhikkhu possessing this, for those reasons, prevents others from entering his supporting families. Stinginess about gains is stinginess about gains (lābhamacchariyaṃ). A bhikkhu possessing this, being stingy even about gains belonging to the saṅgha, acts in such a way that others do not receive them. Stinginess about appearance is stinginess about appearance (vaṇṇamacchariyaṃ). Appearance (vaṇṇo) here should be understood as both physical appearance and good qualities. Stinginess about the Teaching (pariyattidhamme macchariyaṃ) is stinginess about the Teaching (dhammamacchariyaṃ). A bhikkhu possessing this does not give the Teaching to another, thinking, "Having learned this dhamma, he will surpass me." However, if he does not give it out of respect for the dhamma or consideration for the individual, that is not stinginess.

nīvaraṇāni.Kāmacchando nīvaraṇapatto arahattamaggavajjho. Kāmarāgānusayo kāmarāgasaṃyojanapatto anāgāmimaggavajjho. Thinaṃ cittagelaññaṃ. Middhaṃ khandhattayagelaññaṃ. Ubhayampi arahattamaggavajjhaṃ. Tathā uddhaccaṃ. Kukkuccaṃ anāgāmimaggavajjhaṃ. Vicikicchā paṭhamamaggavajjhā.

Hindrances (nīvaraṇāni). Sensual desire (kāmacchando), when it becomes a hindrance, is to be abandoned by the arahatta-magga. The underlying tendency of sensual lust (kāmarāgānusayo), when it becomes a bond of sensual lust (kāmarāgasaṃyojana), is to be abandoned by the anāgāmi-magga. Thīna is mental dullness. Middha is dullness of the three aggregates. Both are to be abandoned by the arahatta-magga. Similarly, restlessness (uddhacca). Worry (kukkucca) is to be abandoned by the anāgāmi-magga. Doubt (vicikicchā) is to be abandoned by the paṭhama-magga.

Saṃyojanānīti bandhanāni. Tehi pana baddhesu puggalesu rūpārūpabhave nibbattā sotāpannasakadāgāmino antobaddhā bahisayitā nāma. Tesañhi kāmabhave bandhanaṃ. Kāmabhave anāgāmino bahibaddhā antosayitā nāma. Tesañhi rūpārūpabhave bandhanaṃ. Kāmabhave sotāpannasakadāgāmino antobaddhā antosayitā nāma. Rūpārūpabhave anāgāmino bahibaddhā bahisayitā nāma. Khīṇāsavo sabbattha abandhano.

Fetters (Saṃyojanānī) means bonds. Among those beings bound by them, those reborn in the realms of form and formlessness (rūpārūpabhava) who are sotāpanna and sakadāgāmi are called "bound internally, lying down externally." For them, the bond is in the realm of sensual desire (kāmabhava). Anāgāmi in the realm of sensual desire are called "bound externally, lying down internally." For them, the bond is in the realms of form and formlessness. Sotāpanna and sakadāgāmi in the realm of sensual desire are called "bound internally, lying down internally." Anāgāmi in the realms of form and formlessness are called "bound externally, lying down externally." A khīṇāsava is unbound in every way.

sikkhāpadaṃ,sikkhākoṭṭhāsoti attho. Sikkhāya vā padaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ, adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya adhigamupāyoti attho. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana sikkhāpadakathā vibhaṅgappakaraṇe sikkhāpadavibhaṅge āgatā eva.

Precept (sikkhāpadaṃ) means a division of training (sikkhākoṭṭhāsoti). Or, a step in training (sikkhāya padaṃ) is a precept (sikkhāpadaṃ), meaning a means of attaining the training in higher mind and higher wisdom (adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhāya adhigamupāyoti). This is a summary here. However, the detailed discourse on the precepts has already come in the Sikkhāpadavibhaṅga in the Vibhaṅga-ppakaraṇa.

Abhabbaṭṭhānādipañcakavaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Pentad Beginning with the States of Impossibility (Abhabbaṭṭhānādi)

316.‘‘Abhabbo, āvuso, khīṇāsavo bhikkhu sañcicca pāṇa’’ntiādi desanāsīsameva, sotāpannādayopi pana abhabbā. Puthujjanakhīṇāsavānaṃ nindāpasaṃsatthampi evaṃ vuttaṃ. Puthujjano nāma gārayho, mātughātādīnipi karoti. Khīṇāsavo pana pāsaṃso, kunthakipillikaghātādīnipi na karotīti.

316. "A khīṇāsava bhikkhu is incapable, āvuso, of intentionally taking life," etc., is similar to what was said in the summary of the discourse; however, sotāpanna, etc., are also incapable. This was said even for the sake of dispraising ordinary people and praising khīṇāsava. An ordinary person is blameworthy, he even commits matricide, etc. But a khīṇāsava is praiseworthy, he does not even kill ants or termites, etc.

ñātibyasanaṃ,corarogabhayādīhi ñātivināsoti attho. Bhogānaṃ byasanaṃbhogabyasanaṃ,rājacorādivasena bhogavināsoti attho. Rogo eva byasanaṃrogabyasanaṃ.Rogo hi ārogyaṃ byasati vināsetīti byasanaṃ, sīlassa byasanaṃsīlabyasanaṃ.Dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhi eva byasanaṃdiṭṭhibyasanaṃ.Ettha ca ñātibyasanādīni tīṇi neva akusalāni na tilakkhaṇāhatāni. Sīladiṭṭhibyasanadvayaṃ akusalaṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ. Teneva ‘‘nāvuso, sattā ñātibyasanahetu vā’’tiādimāha.

Calamity of relatives (ñātibyasanaṃ) means the destruction of relatives by robbers, disease, fear, etc. Calamity of possessions (bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ) is calamity of possessions (bhogabyasanaṃ), meaning the destruction of possessions due to kings, robbers, etc. Disease itself is a calamity (rogo eva byasanaṃ) is calamity of disease (rogabyasanaṃ). For disease destroys (byasati vināseti) health (ārogyaṃ), therefore it is a calamity (byasanaṃ). Calamity of virtue (sīlassa byasanaṃ) is calamity of virtue (sīlabyasanaṃ). This is a name for immorality (dussīlyassetaṃ nāmaṃ). A view that arises destroying right view (sammādiṭṭhiṃ vināsayamānā uppannā diṭṭhi eva byasanaṃ) is calamity of view (diṭṭhibyasanaṃ). And here, the first three, calamity of relatives, etc., are neither unwholesome nor struck by the three characteristics. The two, calamity of virtue and calamity of view, are unwholesome and struck by the three characteristics. Therefore, he said, "No, āvuso, beings are not [purified] because of calamity of relatives," etc.

Ñātisampadāti ñātīnaṃ sampadā pāripūrī bahubhāvo.Bhogasampadāyapieseva nayo. Ārogyassa sampadāārogyasampadā.Pāripūrī dīgharattaṃ arogatā.Sīladiṭṭhisampadāsupieseva nayo. Idhāpi ñātisampadādayo no kusalā, na tilakkhaṇāhatā. Sīladiṭṭhisampadā kusalā, tilakkhaṇāhatā. Teneva ‘‘nāvuso, sattā ñātisampadāhetu vā’’tiādimāha.

Accomplishment of relatives (Ñātisampadā) means the accomplishment or abundance of relatives (ñātīnaṃ sampadā pāripūrī bahubhāvo). For accomplishment of possessions (bhogasampadāyapi) the method is the same. Accomplishment of health (ārogyassa sampadā) is accomplishment of health (ārogyasampadā). Fullness is long-lasting freedom from disease (pāripūrī dīgharattaṃ arogatā). For accomplishment of virtue and accomplishment of view (sīladiṭṭhisampadāsupi) the method is the same. Here too, the accomplishment of relatives, etc., are not wholesome, nor are they struck by the three characteristics. Accomplishment of virtue and accomplishment of view are wholesome, and they are struck by the three characteristics. Therefore, he said, "No, āvuso, beings are not [purified] because of accomplishment of relatives," etc.

Sīlavipattisīlasampattikathā mahāparinibbāne vitthāritāva.

The discourse on failure in virtue and accomplishment of virtue (Sīlavipattisīlasampattikathā) has already been extensively given in the Mahāparinibbāna Sutta.

Codakenāti vatthusaṃsandassanā, āpattisaṃsandassanā, saṃvāsappaṭikkhepo, sāmīcippaṭikkhepoti catūhi codanāvatthūhi codayamānena.Kālena vakkhāmi no akālenāti ettha cuditakassa kālo kathito, na codakassa. Paraṃ codentena hi parisamajjhe vā uposathapavāraṇagge vā āsanasālābhojanasālādīsu vā na codetabbaṃ. Divāṭṭhāne nisinnakāle ‘‘karotāyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ āyasmantaṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ okāsaṃ kāretvā codetabbaṃ. Puggalaṃ pana upaparikkhitvā yo lolapuggalo abhūtaṃ vatvā bhikkhūnaṃ ayasaṃ āropeti, so okāsakammaṃ vināpi codetabbo.Bhūtenāti tacchena sabhāvena.Saṇhenāti maṭṭhena mudukena.Atthasañhitenāti atthakāmatāya hitakāmatāya upetena.

By one who is censuring (Codakenā) means by one who is censuring with four grounds for censure: pointing out the object (vatthusaṃsandassanā), pointing out the offense (āpattisaṃsandassanā), rejection of association (saṃvāsappaṭikkhepo), rejection of proper conduct (sāmīcippaṭikkhepo). I will speak at the right time, not at the wrong time (Kālena vakkhāmi no akālenā) here the time is spoken of for the one being censured, not for the one censuring. For indeed, one censuring another should not censure him in the middle of an assembly or at the uposatha or pavāraṇā, or in the assembly hall or dining hall, etc. When one is sitting during the day, one should ask for permission, saying, "May the venerable one grant me leave, I wish to speak to the venerable one," and then censure. However, having examined the person, if he is a fickle person who, by saying what is untrue, brings dishonor to the bhikkhus, he should be censured even without asking for permission. With truth (Bhūtenā) means with what is actual, with what is genuine. Gently (Saṇhenā) means smoothly, softly. Conveying a beneficial meaning (Atthasañhitenā) means endowed with the desire for benefit, the desire for welfare.

Padhāniyaṅgapañcakavaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Pentad of Factors of Striving (Padhāniyaṅga)

317.Padhāniyaṅgānīti padhānaṃ vuccati padahanaṃ, padhānamassa atthīti padhāniyo, padhāniyassa bhikkhuno aṅgānipadhāniyaṅgāni. Saddhoti saddhāya samannāgato. Saddhā panesā āgamanasaddhā, adhigamanasaddhā, okappanasaddhā, pasādasaddhāti catubbidhā. Tattha sabbaññubodhisattānaṃ saddhā abhinīhārato āgatattāāgamanasaddhānāma. Ariyasāvakānaṃ paṭivedhena adhigatattāadhigamanasaddhānāma. Buddho dhammo saṅghoti vutte acalabhāvena okappanaṃokappanasaddhānāma. Pasāduppattipasādasaddhānāma. Idha okappanasaddhā adhippetā.Bodhinti catutthamaggañāṇaṃ. Taṃ suppaṭividdhaṃ tathāgatenāti saddahati. Desanāsīsameva cetaṃ, iminā pana aṅgena tīsupi ratanesu saddhā adhippetā. Yassa hi buddhādīsu pasādo balavā, tassa padhānavīriyaṃ ijjhati.Appābādhoti arogo.Appātaṅkoti niddukkho.Samavepākiniyāti samavipācanīyā.Gahaṇiyāti kammajatejodhātuyā.Nātisītāya nāccuṇhāyāti atisītagahaṇiko sītabhīrū hoti, accuṇhagahaṇiko uṇhabhīrū hoti, tesaṃ padhānaṃ na ijjhati. Majjhimagahaṇikassa ijjhati. Tenāha – ‘‘majjhimāya padhānakkhamāyā’’ti.Yathābhūtaṃ attānaṃ āvikattāti yathābhūtaṃ attano aguṇaṃ pakāsetā.Udayatthagāminiyāti udayañca atthaṅgamañca gantuṃ paricchindituṃ samatthāya, etena paññāsalakkhaṇapariggāhakaṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ vuttaṃ.Ariyāyāti parisuddhāya.Nibbedhikāyāti anibbiddhapubbe lobhakkhandhādayo nibbijjhituṃ samatthāya.Sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyāti tadaṅgavasena kilesānaṃ pahīnattā yaṃ yaṃ dukkhaṃ khīyati, tassa tassa dukkhassa khayagāminiyā. Iti sabbehi imehi padehi vipassanāpaññāva kathitā. Duppaññassa hi padhānaṃ na ijjhati.

317. Factors of striving (Padhāniyaṅgānī) means padhāna is said to be exertion; one who has exertion is padhāniyo, the factors of a striving bhikkhu are factors of striving (padhāniyaṅgāni). Faith (Saddho) means endowed with faith. That faith, however, is fourfold: faith of arrival (āgamanasaddhā), faith of attainment (adhigamanasaddhā), faith of conviction (okappanasaddhā), and faith of confidence (pasādasaddhā). Therein, the faith of all-knowing bodhisattas is called faith of arrival (āgamanasaddhā) because it comes from their aspiration. The faith of noble disciples is called faith of attainment (adhigamanasaddhā) because it is attained through penetration. The unwavering conviction when it is said, "Buddha, Dhamma, Saṅgha," is called faith of conviction (okappanasaddhā). The arising of confidence is called faith of confidence (pasādasaddhā). Here, faith of conviction is intended. Enlightenment (Bodhi) means the fourth path-knowledge. He has faith that it has been well-penetrated by the Tathāgata. This is similar to the summary of the discourse, but by this factor, faith in all three jewels is intended. For indeed, when confidence in the Buddha, etc., is strong, then the energy for striving succeeds. With little illness (Appābādho) means without disease. With little affliction (Appātaṅko) means without suffering. Of even digestion (Samavepākiniyā) means easily digestible. Fit for assimilation (Gahaṇiyā) means by the heat-element born of kamma. Neither too cold nor too hot (Nātisītāya nāccuṇhāyā) means one who is too sensitive to cold is a timid person, and one who is too sensitive to heat is a timid person; their striving does not succeed. The striving of one who is of middling sensitivity succeeds. Therefore, he said, "With a middle way that is fit for striving." Revealing his self as it actually is (Yathābhūtaṃ attānaṃ āvikattā) means revealing his actual faults. Going to arising and passing away (Udayatthagāminiyā) means capable of discerning and defining arising and passing away; by this, the knowledge of arising and passing away (udayabbayañāṇa) which grasps the characteristics of wisdom is spoken of. Noble (Ariyāyā) means pure. Penetrative (Nibbedhikāyā) means capable of penetrating the aggregates of greed, etc., which were never before penetrated. Leading to the complete destruction of suffering (Sammā dukkhakkhayagāminiyā) means because of the abandonment of the defilements according to their respective aspects, whatever suffering is destroyed is led to the destruction of that suffering. Thus, by all these terms, only insight-wisdom (vipassanāpaññāva) is spoken of. For indeed, the striving of one with little wisdom does not succeed.

Suddhāvāsādipañcakavaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Pentad Beginning with the Pure Abodes (Suddhāvāsa)

318.Suddhāvāsāti suddhā idha āvasiṃsu āvasanti āvasissanti vāti suddhāvāsā. Suddhāti kilesamalarahitā anāgāmikhīṇāsavā.Avihātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāpadāne vuttameva.

318. Pure Abodes (Suddhāvāsā) means the pure ones dwelt here, dwell, and will dwell; therefore they are pure abodes. Pure means anāgāmi and khīṇāsava devoid of the stains of defilements. What should be said about Aviha, etc., has already been said in the Mahāpadāna Sutta.

Anāgāmīsuāyuno majjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarāva kilesaparinibbānaṃ arahattaṃ pattoantarāparinibbāyīnāma. Majjhaṃ upahacca atikkamitvā pattoupahaccaparinibbāyīnāma. Asaṅkhārena appayogena akilamanto sukhena pattoasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīnāma. Sasaṅkhārena sappayogena kilamanto dukkhena pattosasaṅkhāraparinibbāyīnāma. Ime cattāro pañcasupi suddhāvāsesu labbhanti.Uddhaṃsotoakaniṭṭhagāmīti ettha pana catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yo hi avihāto paṭṭhāya cattāro devaloke sodhetvā akaniṭṭhaṃ gantvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo avihāto dutiyaṃ vā tatiyaṃ vā catutthaṃ vā devalokaṃ gantvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo kāmabhavato akaniṭṭhesu nibbattitvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto akaniṭṭhagāmī nāma. Yo heṭṭhā catūsu devalokesu tattha tattheva nibbattitvā parinibbāyati, ayaṃ na uddhaṃsoto na akaniṭṭhagāmī nāmāti.

Among the anāgāmi, one who, without transgressing the middle of his lifespan, attains the arahatta, the extinction of the defilements, in between, is called one who attains final nibbāna in between (antarāparinibbāyī). One who attains it having overcome and transgressed the middle is called one who attains final nibbāna having overcome (upahaccaparinibbāyī). One who attains it without effort, without exertion, easily, is called one who attains final nibbāna without exertion (asaṅkhāraparinibbāyī). One who attains it with effort, with exertion, laboriously, is called one who attains final nibbāna with exertion (sasaṅkhāraparinibbāyī). These four can be found in all five Pure Abodes. One with an upward stream, going to Akaniṭṭha (Uddhaṃsotoakaniṭṭhagāmī) here, however, the tetrad should be understood. For one who, beginning from Aviha, purifies the four deva-worlds and goes to Akaniṭṭha and attains final nibbāna, is called "one with an upward stream, going to Akaniṭṭha." One who, beginning from Aviha, goes to the second or third or fourth deva-world and attains final nibbāna, is called "one with an upward stream, not going to Akaniṭṭha." One who, from the realm of sensual desire, is reborn in Akaniṭṭha and attains final nibbāna, is called "not one with an upward stream, going to Akaniṭṭha." One who is reborn in each of the four deva-worlds below and attains final nibbāna right there, is called "not one with an upward stream, not going to Akaniṭṭha."

Cetokhilapañcakavaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Pentad of Mental Barrenness (Cetokhila)

319.Cetokhilāti cittassa thaddhabhāvā.Satthari kaṅkhatīti satthu sarīre vā guṇe vā kaṅkhati. Sarīre kaṅkhamāno ‘‘dvattiṃsamahāpurisavaralakkhaṇapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nāma sarīraṃ atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati. Guṇe kaṅkhamāno ‘‘atītānāgatapaccuppannajānanasamatthaṃ sabbaññutañāṇaṃ atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Ātappāyāti vīriyakaraṇatthāya.Anuyogāyāti punappunaṃ yogāya. Sātaccāyātisatatakiriyāya. Padhānāyāti padahanatthāya.Ayaṃ paṭhamo cetokhiloti ayaṃ satthari vicikicchāsaṅkhāto paṭhamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo.Dhammeti pariyattidhamme ca paṭivedhadhamme ca. Pariyattidhamme kaṅkhamāno ‘‘tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassānīti vadanti, atthi nu kho etaṃ natthī’’ti kaṅkhati. Paṭivedhadhamme kaṅkhamāno ‘‘vipassanānissando maggo nāma, magganissando phalaṃ nāma, sabbasaṅkhārapaṭinissaggo nibbānaṃ nāmāti vadanti, taṃ atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Saṅghe kaṅkhatīti ‘‘ujuppaṭipannotiādīnaṃ padānaṃ vasena evarūpaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno cattāro maggaṭṭhā cattāro phalaṭṭhāti aṭṭhannaṃ puggalānaṃ samūhabhūto saṅgho nāma atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Sikkhāya kaṅkhamāno‘‘adhisīlasikkhā nāma, adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhā nāmāti vadanti, sā atthi nu kho natthī’’ti kaṅkhati.Ayaṃ pañcamoti ayaṃ sabrahmacārīsu kopasaṅkhāto pañcamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo kacavarabhāvo khāṇukabhāvo.

319. Mental barrenness (Cetokhilā) is rigidity of mind. He is doubtful about the Teacher (Satthari kaṅkhatī) means he is doubtful about the body or the qualities of the Teacher. Being doubtful about the body, he doubts, "Is there really a body adorned with the thirty-two marks of a great man, or is there not?" Being doubtful about the qualities, he doubts, "Is there really all-knowing knowledge capable of knowing the past, future, and present, or is there not?" For the sake of zeal (Ātappāyā) means for the sake of doing energy. For the sake of application (Anuyogāyā) means for the sake of repeated application. For the sake of constancy (Sātaccāyāti) means for the sake of continuous action. For the sake of striving (Padhānāyā) means for the sake of exertion. This is the first mental barrenness (Ayaṃ paṭhamo cetokhilo) means this first rigidity of mind is doubt about the Teacher (satthari vicikicchāsaṅkhāto paṭhamo cittassa thaddhabhāvo). About the Dhamma means about the Dhamma of study and the Dhamma of realization. Being doubtful about the Dhamma of study, he doubts, "They say that the word of the Buddha is the Tipiṭaka, eighty-four thousand aggregates of Dhamma; is this true, or is it not?" Being doubtful about the Dhamma of realization, he doubts, "They say that there is a path that is the outflow of insight, that there is a fruit that is the outflow of the path, that there is nibbāna which is the relinquishing of all conditioned things; is this true, or is it not?" He is doubtful about the Saṅgha means he doubts, "Is there really such a Saṅgha, a community of eight individuals, four who have entered the path and four who are established in the fruit, who are practicing such a practice, according to the terms 'practicing straightly,' etc., or is there not?" Being doubtful about the training (Sikkhāya kaṅkhamāno) means he doubts, "They say that there is training in higher virtue, training in higher mind, and training in higher wisdom; is that true, or is it not?" This is the fifth (Ayaṃ pañcamo) means this fifth rigidity of mind is anger toward his fellow brahmacārīs, a state of being like rubbish, a state of being like a stump.

Cetasovinibandhādipañcakavaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Pentad Beginning with the Bonds of the Heart (Cetasovinibandha)

320.Cetasovinibandhāti cittaṃ bandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gaṇhantīti cetasovinibandhā.Kāmeti vatthukāmepi kilesakāmepi.Kāyeti attano kāye.Rūpeti bahiddhārūpe.Yāvadatthanti yattakaṃ icchati, tattakaṃ.Udarāvadehakanti udarapūraṃ. Tañhi udaraṃ avadehanato ‘‘udarāvadehaka’’nti vuccati.Seyyasukhanti mañcapīṭhasukhaṃ.Passasukhanti yathā samparivattakaṃ sayantassa dakkhiṇapassavāmapassānaṃ sukhaṃ hoti, evaṃ uppannaṃ sukhaṃ.Middhasukhanti niddāsukhaṃ.Anuyuttoti yuttappayutto viharati.Paṇidhāyāti patthayitvā.Brahmacariyenāti methunaviratibrahmacariyena.Devo vā bhavissāmīti mahesakkhadevo vā bhavissāmi.Devaññataro vāti appesakkhadevesu vā aññataro.

320. Bonds of the heart (Cetasovinibandhā) means they seize the mind as if having bound it and made it into a fist; therefore they are bonds of the heart. Sensual pleasures (Kāme) means both sensual objects and sensual defilements. The body (Kāye) means his own body. Form (Rūpe) means external form. As much as (Yāvadattha) means as much as he wants, that much. Filling his belly (Udarāvadehaka) means full to the belly. For the belly is called "filling the belly" because it swells up the belly. Pleasure of lying down (Seyyasukha) means the pleasure of couch and chair. Pleasure of reclining (Passasukha) means the pleasure that arises when one lies down turning from side to side, the pleasure of the right side and the left side. Pleasure of drowsiness (Middhasukha) means the pleasure of sleep. Devoted (Anuyutto) means he lives associated with and devoted to it. Aspiring (Paṇidhāyā) means wishing for it. By the brahmacariya (Brahmacariyenā) means by the brahmacariya of abstaining from sexual intercourse. I will be a deva (Devo vā bhavissāmī) means I will be a deva of great power. Or one of the devas (Devaññataro vā) means or one of the other devas of lesser power.

Indriyesupaṭhamapañcake lokiyāneva kathitāni. Dutiyapañcake paṭhamadutiyacatutthāni lokiyāni, tatiyapañcamāni lokiyalokuttarāni. Tatiyapañcake samathavipassanāmaggavasena lokiyalokuttarāni.

In the faculties (Indriyesu), only mundane ones have been spoken of in the first pentad. In the second pentad, the first, second, and fourth are mundane, the third and fifth are both mundane and supramundane. In the third pentad, mundane and supramundane ones are spoken of by way of serenity, insight, and the path.

Nissaraṇiyapañcakavaṇṇanā
Exposition of the Pentad of Means of Escape (Nissaraṇiya)

321.Nissaraṇiyāti nissaṭā visaññuttā.Dhātuyoti attasuññasabhāvā.Kāme manasikarototi kāme manasikarontassa, asubhajjhānato vuṭṭhāya agadaṃ gahetvā visaṃ vīmaṃsanto viya vīmaṃsanatthaṃ kāmābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ pesentassāti attho.Na pakkhandatīti na pavisati.Na pasīdatīti pasādaṃ nāpajjati.Nasantiṭṭhatīti na patiṭṭhati.Na vimuccatīti nādhimuccati. Yathā pana kukkuṭapattaṃ vā nhārudaddulaṃ vā aggimhi pakkhittaṃ patilīyati patikuṭati pativattati na sampasāriyati; evaṃ patilīyati na pasāriyati.Nekkhammaṃ kho panāti idha nekkhammaṃ nāma dasasu asubhesu paṭhamajjhānaṃ, tadassa manasikaroto cittaṃ pakkhandati.Tassa taṃ cittanti tassa taṃ asubhajjhānacittaṃ.Sugatanti gocare gatattā suṭṭhu gataṃ.Subhāvitanti ahānabhāgiyattā suṭṭhu bhāvitaṃ.Suvuṭṭhitanti kāmato suṭṭhu vuṭṭhitaṃ.Suvimuttanti kāmehi suṭṭhu vimuttaṃ. Kāmapaccayā āsavā nāma kāmahetukā cattāro āsavā.Vighātāti dukkhā.Pariḷāhāti kāmarāgapariḷāhā.Na so taṃ vedanaṃ vedetīti so taṃ kāmavedanaṃ vighātapariḷāhavedanañca na vedayati.Idamakkhātaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇanti idaṃ asubhajjhānaṃ kāmehi nissaṭattā kāmānaṃ nissaraṇanti akkhātaṃ. Yo pana taṃ jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasanto tatiyaṃ maggaṃ patvā anāgāmiphalena nibbānaṃ disvā puna kāmā nāma natthīti jānāti, tassa cittaṃ accantanissaraṇameva. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.

321. Nissaraṇiyā means free, detached. Dhātuyo means states empty of self. Kāme manasikaroto means when one directs the mind towards sensual pleasures, it means directing the mind towards sensual pleasures for the purpose of investigation, like investigating poison after taking an antidote, having arisen from the meditation on the unattractive. Na pakkhandatīti does not incline. Na pasīdatīti does not attain clarity. Na santiṭṭhatīti does not settle down. Na vimuccatīti is not liberated. Just as a chicken feather or a piece of tendon thrown into a fire shrinks, curls up, turns back, and does not spread out; similarly, it shrinks and does not become clear. Nekkhammaṃ kho panāti here, nekkhamma means the first jhāna among the ten kinds of unattractiveness; when one directs the mind towards that, the mind inclines. Tassa taṃ cittanti that mind of his, that meditation on the unattractive. Sugatanti well-gone because it has gone to its object. Subhāvitanti well-developed because it leads to abandonment. Suvuṭṭhitanti well-risen from sensual pleasures. Suvimuttanti well-freed from sensual pleasures. Kāmapaccayā āsavā means the four āsavas caused by sensual pleasures. Vighātāti sufferings. Pariḷāhāti burnings of sensual lust. Na so taṃ vedanaṃ vedetīti he does not experience that feeling of sensual pleasure, the feeling of suffering and burning. Idamakkhātaṃ kāmānaṃ nissaraṇanti this meditation on the unattractive, being free from sensual pleasures, is declared to be the escape from sensual pleasures. But when one, having made that jhāna the basis, contemplates the formations, attains the third path, sees Nibbāna with the fruit of non-returning, and then knows that there are no more sensual pleasures, his mind is completely free. The same method applies to the remaining passages.

Ayaṃ pana viseso, dutiyavāre mettājhānāni byāpādassa nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Tatiyavāre karuṇājhānāni vihiṃsāya nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Catutthavāre arūpajjhānāni rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma. Accantanissaraṇe cettha arahattaphalaṃ yojetabbaṃ.

However, this is the difference: in the second instance, the mettājhānas are the escape from ill-will. In the third instance, the karuṇājhānas are the escape from harm. In the fourth instance, the arūpajjhānas are the escape from forms. In the case of complete escape, the fruit of Arahatship should be applied here.

sakkāyaṃ manasikarototi suddhasaṅkhāre pariggaṇhitvā arahattaṃ pattassa sukkhavipassakassa phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāya vīmaṃsanatthaṃ pañcupādānakkhandhābhimukhaṃ cittaṃ pesentassa.Idamakkhātaṃ sakkāyanissaraṇanti idaṃ arahattamaggena ca phalena ca nibbānaṃ disvā ṭhitassa bhikkhuno puna sakkāyo natthīti uppannaṃ arahattaphalasamāpatticittaṃ sakkāyassa nissaraṇanti akkhātaṃ.

sakkāyaṃ manasikarototi when one, having taken hold of pure formations, having attained Arahatship, directs the mind towards the five aggregates of clinging for the purpose of investigation, having arisen from the fruition attainment. Idamakkhātaṃ sakkāyanissaraṇanti this Arahatship fruition attainment-mind, which arises in a bhikkhu who, having seen Nibbāna with the path and the fruit of Arahatship, is standing in the knowledge that there is no more self-identity, is declared to be the escape from self-identity.

Vimuttāyatanapañcakavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Five Factors of Deliverance

322.Vimuttāyatanānīti vimuccanakāraṇāni.Atthapaṭisaṃvedinoti pāḷiatthaṃ jānantassa.Dhammapaṭisaṃvedinoti pāḷiṃ jānantassa.Pāmojjanti taruṇapīti.Pītīti tuṭṭhākārabhūtā balavapīti.Kāyoti nāmakāyo paṭipassambhati.Sukhaṃ vedayatīti sukhaṃ paṭilabhati.Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti arahattaphalasamādhinā samādhiyati. Ayañhi taṃ dhammaṃ suṇanto āgatāgataṭṭhāne jhānavipassanāmaggaphalāni jānāti, tassa evaṃ jānato pīti uppajjati. So tassā pītiyā antarā osakkituṃ na dento upacārakammaṭṭhāniko hutvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘cittaṃ samādhiyatī’’ti. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ pana viseso,samādhinimittanti aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu aññataro samādhiyeva samādhinimittaṃ.Suggahitaṃ hotītiādīsu ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānaṃ uggaṇhantena suṭṭhu gahitaṃ hoti.Suṭṭhu manasikatanti suṭṭhu upadhāritaṃ.Suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāyāti paññāya suṭṭhu paccakkhaṃ kataṃ.Tasmiṃ dhammeti tasmiṃ kammaṭṭhānapāḷidhamme.

322. Vimuttāyatanānīti means causes for deliverance. Atthapaṭisaṃvedinoti of one who knows the meaning of the Pāḷi. Dhammapaṭisaṃvedinoti of one who knows the Pāḷi. Pāmojjanti initial joy. Pītīti strong joy that is the nature of satisfaction. Kāyoti the mind-body is calmed. Sukhaṃ vedayatīti experiences happiness. Cittaṃ samādhiyatīti becomes concentrated with the Arahatship fruition attainment. For as he listens to that Dhamma, he knows the jhānas, vipassanā, paths and fruits in each place where he arrives, and as he knows thus, joy arises in him. Not allowing himself to be distracted by that joy, being one whose practice is near-attainment, he develops insight and attains Arahatship. Referring to that, it was said, "the mind becomes concentrated." The same method applies to the rest as well. However, this is the difference: samādhinimittanti means concentration itself, one of the thirty-eight objects, is the sign of concentration. Suggahitaṃ hotītiādīsu among these, it is well-grasped by one who is learning the meditation subject from a teacher. Suṭṭhu manasikatanti well-attended to. Suppaṭividdhaṃ paññāyāti well-penetrated by wisdom. Tasmiṃ dhammeti in that Dhamma of the meditation subject Pāḷi.

Vimuttiparipācanīyāti vimutti vuccati arahattaṃ, taṃ paripācentītivimuttiparipācanīyā. Aniccasaññāti aniccānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Anicce dukkhasaññāti dukkhānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Dukkhe anattasaññāti anattānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Pahānasaññāti pahānānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.Virāgasaññāti virāgānupassanāñāṇe uppannasaññā.

Vimuttiparipācanīyāti vimutti means Arahatship; that which matures it is vimuttiparipācanīyā. Aniccasaññāti perception that arises in the knowledge of the contemplation of impermanence. Anicce dukkhasaññāti perception that arises in the knowledge of the contemplation of suffering in impermanence. Dukkhe anattasaññāti perception that arises in the knowledge of the contemplation of non-self in suffering. Pahānasaññāti perception that arises in the knowledge of the contemplation of abandonment. Virāgasaññāti perception that arises in the knowledge of the contemplation of dispassion.

‘‘Ime kho āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti chabbīsatiyā pañcakānaṃ vasena tiṃsasatapañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

‘‘Ime kho āvuso’’tiādi should be connected in the manner already stated. Thus, while explaining the thirty-five questions based on the fivefold series, the Elder showed the essence of harmony.

Pañcakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Explanation of the Fives is Finished.

Chakkavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sixes

323.Iti pañcakavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni chakkavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthaajjhattikānīti ajjhattajjhattikāni.Bāhirānīti tato ajjhattajjhattato bahibhūtāni. Vitthārato pana āyatanakathāvisuddhimaggekathitāva.Viññāṇakāyāti viññāṇasamūhā.Cakkhuviññāṇanti cakkhupasādanissitaṃ kusalākusalavipākaviññāṇaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.Cakkhusamphassoti cakkhunissito samphasso.Sotasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo.Manosamphassoti ime dasa samphasse ṭhapetvā seso sabbo manosamphasso nāma. Vedanāchakkampi eteneva nayena veditabbaṃ.Rūpasaññāti rūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannā saññā. Etenupāyena sesāpi veditabbā. Cetanāchakkepi eseva nayo. Tathā taṇhāchakke.

323. Having thus shown the essence of harmony based on the fivefold series, now, in order to show it based on the sixfold series, he began the discourse again. There, ajjhattikānīti means internal-internal. Bāhirānīti means external to that which is internal-internal. But in detail, the discussion of the āyatanas has already been spoken of in the Visuddhimagga. Viññāṇakāyāti means aggregates of consciousness. Cakkhuviññāṇanti means consciousness, whether wholesome, unwholesome, or resultant, that depends on the eye-faculty. This method applies everywhere. Cakkhusamphassoti means contact dependent on the eye. The same method applies to sotasamphassā and the rest as well. Manosamphassoti means all the remaining contacts, except these ten contacts, are called mind-contact. The six groups of feelings should be understood in the same way. Rūpasaññāti means perception that arises having form as its object. The rest should be understood in this way. The same method applies to the six groups of intention. Similarly, with the six groups of craving.

Agāravoti gāravavirahito.Appatissoti appatissayo anīcavutti. Ettha pana yo bhikkhu satthari dharamāne tīsu kālesu upaṭṭhānaṃ na yāti. Satthari anupāhane caṅkamante saupāhano caṅkamati, nīce caṅkamante ucce caṅkamati, heṭṭhā vasante upari vasati, satthudassanaṭṭhāne ubho aṃse pārupati, chattaṃ dhāreti, upāhanaṃ dhāreti, nahāyati, uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā karoti. Parinibbute pana cetiyaṃ vandituṃ na gacchati, cetiyassa paññāyanaṭṭhāne satthudassanaṭṭhāne vuttaṃ sabbaṃ karoti, ayaṃsatthari agāravonāma. Yo pana dhammassavane saṃghuṭṭhe sakkaccaṃ na gacchati, sakkaccaṃ dhammaṃ na suṇāti, samullapanto nisīdati, sakkaccaṃ na gaṇhāti, na vāceti, ayaṃdhamme agāravonāma. Yo pana therena bhikkhunā anajjhiṭṭho dhammaṃ deseti, nisīdati, pañhaṃ katheti, vuḍḍhe bhikkhū ghaṭṭento gacchati, tiṭṭhati, nisīdati, dussapallatthikaṃ vā hatthapallatthikaṃ vā karoti, saṅghamajjhe ubho aṃse pārupati, chattupāhanaṃ dhāreti, ayaṃsaṅghe agāravonāma. Ekabhikkhusmimpi hi agārave kate saṅghe agāravo katova hoti. Tisso sikkhā pana apūrayamānovasikkhāya agāravonāma. Appamādalakkhaṇaṃ ananubrūhayamānoappamāde agāravonāma. Duvidhampipaṭisanthāraṃakarontopaṭisanthāre agāravonāma. Cha gāravā vuttappaṭipakkhavasena veditabbā.

Agāravoti without respect. Appatissoti without deference, not behaving humbly. Here, a bhikkhu who does not go for service in the three periods of time while the Teacher is alive; when the Teacher walks without footwear, he walks with footwear; when he walks on a lower level, he walks on a higher level; when he lives below, he lives above; in the place for seeing the Teacher, he covers both shoulders, holds an umbrella, wears footwear, bathes, or urinates or defecates. But when the Teacher has passed away, he does not go to worship the cetiya; in the place of the cetiya, in the place for seeing the Teacher, he does everything that was said above; this is called lack of respect for the Teacher. But one who does not go respectfully when the Dhamma is being proclaimed, does not listen respectfully to the Dhamma, sits talking, does not respectfully grasp it, nor recite it, this is called lack of respect for the Dhamma. But a senior bhikkhu who teaches the Dhamma unasked, sits down, asks a question, pushes elderly bhikkhus as he goes, stands, sits down, makes a shoulder-rest for his robe or a hand-rest, covers both shoulders in the Sangha, holds an umbrella and footwear, this is called lack of respect for the Sangha. For even if one lacks respect for a single bhikkhu, it is as if he lacks respect for the Sangha. But one who does not fulfill the three trainings is called lack of respect for the training. One who does not cultivate the characteristic of diligence is called lack of respect for diligence. One who does not do either kind of hospitality is called lack of respect for hospitality. The six kinds of respect should be understood in the manner opposite to what has been said.

Somanassūpavicārāti somanassasampayuttā vicārā.Somanassaṭṭhāniyanti somanassakāraṇabhūtaṃ.Upavicaratīti vitakkena vitakketvā vicārena paricchindati. Esa nayo sabbattha.Domanassūpavicārāpi evameva veditabbā. Tathāupekkhūpavicārā. Sāraṇīyadhammāheṭṭhā vitthāritā.Diṭṭhisāmaññagatoti iminā pana padena kosambakasutte paṭhamamaggo kathito. Idha cattāropi maggā.

Somanassūpavicārāti deliberations associated with joy. Somanassaṭṭhāniyanti being the cause of joy. Upavicaratīti investigates with thought, discerns with discernment. This method applies everywhere. Domanassūpavicārāpi should be understood in the same way. Similarly, upekkhūpavicārā. Sāraṇīyadhammā have been explained in detail below. Diṭṭhisāmaññagatoti with this expression, the first path is spoken of in the Kosambaka Sutta. Here, all four paths are meant.

Vivādamūlachakkavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Six Roots of Quarrels

325.Vivādamūlānīti vivādassa mūlāni.Kodhanoti kujjhanalakkhaṇena kodhena samannāgato.Upanāhīti veraappaṭinissaggalakkhaṇena upanāhena samannāgato.Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo kathaṃ devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattati. Kosambakakkhandhake viya dvīsu bhikkhūsu vivādaṃ āpannesu tasmiṃ vihāre tesaṃ antevāsikā vivadanti. Tesaṃ ovādaṃ gaṇhanto bhikkhunisaṅgho vivadati. Tato tesaṃ upaṭṭhākā vivadanti. Atha manussānaṃ ārakkhadevatā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Tattha dhammavādīnaṃ ārakkhadevatā dhammavādiniyo honti adhammavādīnaṃ adhammavādiniyo. Tato ārakkhadevatānaṃ mittā bhummā devatā bhijjanti. Evaṃ paramparā yāva brahmalokā ṭhapetvā ariyasāvake sabbe devamanussā dve koṭṭhāsā honti. Dhammavādīhi pana adhammavādinova bahutarā honti. Tato ‘‘yaṃ bahukehi gahitaṃ, taṃ taccha’’nti dhammaṃ vissajjetvā bahutarāva adhammaṃ gaṇhanti. Te adhammaṃ purakkhatvā vadantā apāyesu nibbattanti. Evaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vivādo devamanussānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya hoti.

325. Vivādamūlānīti means roots of quarrels. Kodhanoti endowed with anger, characterized by being prone to anger. Upanāhīti endowed with animosity, characterized by not relinquishing enmity. Ahitāya dukkhāya devamanussānanti how does the quarrel of two bhikkhus lead to harm and suffering for gods and humans? As in the Kosambaka Section, when two bhikkhus have fallen into quarreling, in that monastery, their pupils quarrel. The bhikkhu Sangha, accepting their advice, quarrels. Then their supporters quarrel. Then the guardian deities of the humans become two factions. There, the guardian deities of those who advocate the Dhamma are female deities who advocate the Dhamma, and the guardian deities of those who do not advocate the Dhamma are female deities who do not advocate the Dhamma. Then the friendly earth deities of the guardian deities are split. Thus, in succession, up to the Brahma world, all the gods and humans, except for the noble disciples, become two factions. However, those who do not advocate the Dhamma are more numerous than those who advocate the Dhamma. Then, rejecting the Dhamma, thinking, "that which is accepted by the majority is true," the majority take up what is not the Dhamma. Upholding and speaking what is not the Dhamma, they are reborn in the lower realms. Thus, the quarrel of two bhikkhus leads to harm and suffering for gods and humans.

Ajjhattaṃ vāti tumhākaṃ abbhantaraparisāya.Bahiddhā vāti paresaṃ parisāya.

Ajjhattaṃ vāti within your own assembly. Bahiddhā vāti within the assembly of others.

Makkhīti paresaṃ guṇamakkhanalakkhaṇena makkhena samannāgato.Paḷāsīti yugaggāhalakkhaṇena paḷāsena samannāgato.Issukīti parasakkārādīni issāyanalakkhaṇāya issāya samannāgato.Maccharīti āvāsamacchariyādīhi samannāgato.Saṭhoti kerāṭiko.Māyāvīti katapāpapaṭicchādako.Pāpicchoti asantasambhāvanicchako dussīlo.Micchādiṭṭhīti natthikavādī ahetukavādī akiriyavādī.Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti sayaṃ diṭṭhimeva parāmasati.Ādhānaggāhīti daḷhaggāhī.Duppaṭinissaggīti na sakkā hoti gahitaṃ vissajjāpetuṃ.

Makkhīti endowed with denigration, characterized by denigrating the good qualities of others. Paḷāsīti endowed with presumption, characterized by taking hold of the yoke. Issukīti endowed with envy, characterized by envying the gains of others. Maccharīti endowed with avarice, such as avarice regarding dwellings. Saṭhoti deceitful. Māyāvīti concealing his evil deeds. Pāpicchoti having evil desires, immoral, desiring the impossible. Micchādiṭṭhīti holding wrong views, asserting non-existence, asserting absence of cause, asserting absence of action. Sandiṭṭhiparāmāsīti adhering to his own views. Ādhānaggāhīti holding firmly. Duppaṭinissaggīti unable to let go of what has been grasped.

Pathavīdhātūti patiṭṭhādhātu.Āpodhātūti ābandhanadhātu.Tejodhātūti paripācanadhātu.Vāyodhātūti vitthambhanadhātu.Ākāsadhātūti asamphuṭṭhadhātu.Viññāṇadhātūti vijānanadhātu.

Pathavīdhātūti means the element of solidity. Āpodhātūti means the element of cohesion. Tejodhātūti means the element of heat. Vāyodhātūti means the element of support. Ākāsadhātūti means the element of space. Viññāṇadhātūti means the element of consciousness.

Nissaraṇiyachakkavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Six Elements of Escape

326.Nissaraṇiyā dhātuyoti nissaṭadhātuyova.Pariyādāya tiṭṭhatīti pariyādiyitvā hāpetvā tiṭṭhati.‘Mā hevantissa vacanīyo’ti yasmā abhūtaṃ byākaraṇaṃ byākaroti, tasmā mā evaṃ bhaṇīti vattabbo.Yadidaṃ mettācetovimuttīti yā ayaṃ mettācetovimutti, idaṃ nissaraṇaṃ byāpādassa, byāpādato nissaṭāti attho. Yo pana mettāya tikacatukkajjhānato vuṭṭhito saṅkhāre sammasitvā tatiyamaggaṃ patvā ‘‘puna byāpādo natthī’’ti tatiyaphalena nibbānaṃ passati, tassa cittaṃ accantaṃ nissaraṇaṃ byāpādassa. Etenupāyena sabbattha attho veditabbo.

326. Nissaraṇiyā dhātuyoti are indeed elements of escape. Pariyādāya tiṭṭhatīti stands having exhausted, having diminished. ‘Mā hevantissa vacanīyo’ti because he declares what is untrue, therefore he should be told not to speak thus. Yadidaṃ mettācetovimuttīti this liberation of mind by loving-kindness, this is the escape from ill-will, meaning free from ill-will. But when one, having arisen from the triple or quadruple jhāna of loving-kindness, contemplates the formations and attains the third path, sees Nibbāna with the third fruit, thinking, "there is no more ill-will," his mind is completely free from ill-will. In this way, the meaning should be understood everywhere.

Animittācetovimuttīti arahattaphalasamāpatti. Sā hi rāganimittādīnañceva rūpanimittādīnañca niccanimittādīnañca abhāvā ‘‘animittā’’ti vuttā.Nimittānusārīti vuttappabhedaṃ nimittaṃ anusaratīti nimittānusārī.

Animittā cetovimuttīti is the fruition attainment of Arahatship. For that is called "signless" because of the absence of signs of lust and so on, as well as signs of form and so on, and signs of permanence and so on. Nimittānusārīti one who follows a sign, following a sign of the kinds already mentioned.

Asmīti asmimāno.Ayamahamasmīti pañcasu khandhesu ayaṃ nāma ahaṃ asmīti ettāvatā arahattaṃ byākataṃ hoti.Vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallanti vicikicchābhūtaṃ kathaṃkathāsallaṃ.‘Mā hevantissa vacanīyo’ti sace te paṭhamamaggavajjhā vicikicchā uppajjati, arahattabyākaraṇaṃ micchā hoti, tasmā mā abhūtaṃ bhaṇīti vāretabbo.Asmimānasamugghātoti arahattamaggo. Arahattamaggaphalavasena hi nibbāne diṭṭhe puna asmimāno natthīti arahattamaggo asmimānasamugghātoti vutto.

Asmīti is the conceit "I am." Ayamahamasmīti by this much, "this name is what I am" in the five aggregates, Arahatship is declared. Vicikicchākathaṃkathāsallanti the dart of doubt and uncertainty. ‘Mā hevantissa vacanīyo’ti if doubt arises in him that is liable to the first path, the declaration of Arahatship is false, therefore he should be prevented from speaking what is untrue. Asmimānasamugghātoti is the path of Arahatship. For when Nibbāna is seen by way of the path and fruit of Arahatship, there is no more conceit "I am," therefore the path of Arahatship is said to be the uprooting of the conceit "I am."

Anuttariyādichakkavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Sixes beginning with the Unsurpassable

327.Anuttariyānīti anuttarāni jeṭṭhakāni. Dassanesu anuttariyaṃdassanānuttariyaṃ.Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Tattha hatthiratanādīnaṃ dassanaṃ na dassanānuttariyaṃ, niviṭṭhasaddhassa pana niviṭṭhapemavasena dasabalassa vā bhikkhusaṅghassa vā kasiṇāsubhanimittādīnaṃ vā aññatarassa dassanaṃdassanānuttariyaṃnāma. Khattiyādīnaṃ guṇakathāsavanaṃ na savanānuttariyaṃ, niviṭṭhasaddhassa pana niviṭṭhapemavasena tiṇṇaṃ vā ratanānaṃ guṇakathāsavanaṃ tepiṭakabuddhavacanasavanaṃ vāsavanānuttariyaṃnāma. Maṇiratanādilābho na lābhānuttariyaṃ, sattavidhaariyadhanalābho panalābhānuttariyaṃnāma. Hatthisippādisikkhanaṃ na sikkhānuttariyaṃ, sikkhattayapūraṇaṃ panasikkhānuttariyaṃnāma. Khattiyādīnaṃ pāricariyā na pāricariyānuttariyaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ pana ratanānaṃ pāricariyāpāricariyānuttariyaṃnāma. Khattiyādīnaṃ guṇānussaraṇaṃ nānussatānuttariyaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ pana ratanānaṃ guṇānussaraṇaṃanussatānuttariyaṃnāma.

327. Anuttariyānī means unsurpassed, foremost. Among sights, the unsurpassed is dassanānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed sight. The same method applies to the remaining terms as well. Here, seeing elephant jewels, etc., is not unsurpassed sight, but for one with unwavering faith, seeing the Ten-Powered One (Dasabala), the Sangha, or any kasina or asubha sign with unwavering affection, is called dassanānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed sight. Hearing tales of the virtues of kings, etc., is not unsurpassed hearing, but for one with unwavering faith, hearing tales of the virtues of the Triple Gem or hearing the Tipitaka, the word of the Buddha, is called savanānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed hearing. Gaining jewel-stones etc. is not unsurpassed gain, but gaining the seven kinds of noble wealth is called lābhānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed gain. Learning elephant training, etc., is not unsurpassed training, but fulfilling the three trainings is called sikkhānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed training. Serving kings, etc., is not unsurpassed service, but serving the Triple Gem is called pāricariyānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed service. Recollecting the virtues of kings, etc., is not unsurpassed recollection, but recollecting the virtues of the Triple Gem is called anussatānuttariyaṃ, unsurpassed recollection.

anussatiṭṭhānānināma.Buddhānussatīti buddhassa guṇānussaraṇaṃ. Evaṃ anussarato hi pīti uppajjati. So taṃ pītiṃ khayato vayato paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Upacārakammaṭṭhānaṃ nāmetaṃ gihīnampi labbhati, esa nayo sabbattha. Vitthārakathā panettha visuddhimagge vuttanayeneva veditabbā.

anussatiṭṭhānāni means the bases for recollection. Buddhānussatī is the recollection of the Buddha's virtues. For one who recollects in this way, joy arises. Establishing that joy as subject to decay and dissolution, one attains Arahatship. This is called an upacāra-kammaṭṭhāna, which is accessible even to laypersons; this method applies everywhere. The detailed explanation here should be understood in the same way as described in the Visuddhimagga.

Satatavihārachakkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Constantly Dwelling Six

328.Satatavihārāti khīṇāsavassa niccavihārā.Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvāti cakkhudvārārammaṇe āpāthagate taṃ rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇena disvā javanakkhaṇe iṭṭhe arajjantoneva sumano hoti,aniṭṭhe adussantona dummano.Asamapekkhane mohaṃ anuppādentoupekkhako viharatimajjhatto, satiyā yuttattāsato,sampajaññena yuttattāsampajāno.Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Iti chasupi dvāresu upekkhako viharatīti iminā chaḷaṅgupekkhā kathitā.Sampajānoti vacanato pana cattāri ñāṇasampayuttacittāni labbhanti.Satatavihārāti vacanato aṭṭhapi mahācittāni labbhantiarajjanto adussantoti vacanato dasapi cittāni labbhanti. Somanassaṃ kathaṃ labbhatīti ce āsevanato labbhati.

328. Satatavihārā means the constant abodes of the Khīṇāsava. Cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā, Having seen a form with the eye: having seen a form that has come into range at the eye-door with eye-consciousness, not being attached to what is desirable at the moment of javana, neva sumano hoti, he is not delighted, not being averse to what is undesirable, na dummano, nor is he dejected. Not generating delusion in regard to equanimity, upekkhako viharati, he dwells equanimous, in the middle way, being endowed with mindfulness, sato, mindful, being endowed with comprehension, sampajāno, fully aware. The same method applies to the remaining terms as well. Thus, by "he dwells equanimous at all six doors," the sixfold equanimity is described. From the word sampajāno, fully aware, four cittas associated with knowledge are obtained. From the word Satatavihārā, constant abodes, eight great cittas are obtained, and from the words arajjanto adussanto, not being attached, not being averse, ten cittas are obtained. If it is asked, how is joy obtained? It is obtained through cultivation.

Abhijātichakkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Six Kinds of Birth

329.Abhijātiyoti jātiyo.Kaṇhābhijātiko samānoti kaṇhe nīcakule jāto hutvā.Kaṇhaṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyatīti kāḷakaṃ dasadussīlyadhammaṃ pasavati karoti. So taṃ abhijāyitvā niraye nibbattati.Sukkaṃ dhammanti ahaṃ pubbepi puññānaṃ akatattā nīcakule nibbatto. Idāni puññaṃ karomīti puññasaṅkhātaṃ paṇḍaraṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyati. So tena sagge nibbattati.Akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ nibbānanti nibbānañhi sace kaṇhaṃ bhaveyya, kaṇhavipākaṃ dadeyya. Sace sukkaṃ, sukkavipākaṃ dadeyya. Dvinnampi appadānato pana ‘‘akaṇhaṃ asukka’’nti vuttaṃ. Nibbānañca nāma imasmiṃ atthe arahattaṃ adhippetaṃ. Tañhi kilesanibbānante jātattā nibbānaṃ nāma. Taṃ esa abhijāyati pasavati karoti.Sukkābhijātiko samānoti sukke uccakule jāto hutvā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

329. Abhijātiyo means births. Kaṇhābhijātiko samāno, Being born of a dark birth: having been born into a low, base family. Kaṇhaṃ dhammaṃ abhijāyatī, He produces a dark Dhamma: he engenders the dark Dhamma, the ten kinds of misconduct. Having produced that, he is reborn in hell. Sukkaṃ dhammaṃ, A bright Dhamma: thinking, "Because I did not perform meritorious deeds in the past, I was born into a low family. Now, I will perform meritorious deeds," he engenders the bright Dhamma, which is counted as merit. By that, he is reborn in heaven. Akaṇhaṃ asukkaṃ nibbānaṃ, Nibbāna neither dark nor bright: for if Nibbāna were dark, it would give a dark result; if it were bright, it would give a bright result. But because it gives neither, it is said to be "neither dark nor bright." And here, Nibbāna is intended to mean Arahatship. For it is called Nibbāna because it is born at the extinction of the defilements. He produces and engenders that. Sukkābhijātiko samāno, Being born of a bright birth: having been born into a high, noble family. The rest should be understood in the same way as described above.

Nibbedhabhāgiyachakkavaṇṇanā
Description of the Six Qualities Conducive to Penetration

Nibbedhabhāgiyāti nibbedho vuccati nibbānaṃ, taṃ bhajanti upagacchantītinibbedhabhāgiyā.Aniccasaññādayo pañcake vuttā. Nirodhānupassanāñāṇe saññānirodhasaññānāma.

Nibbedhabhāgiyā means conducive to penetration; nibbedho means Nibbāna, and those that lead to and approach it are nibbedhabhāgiyā, conducive to penetration. The impermanence perception, etc., have been described in the pentad. The perception in the knowledge of contemplation of cessation is called nirodhasaññā, perception of cessation.

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti dvāvīsatiyā chakkānaṃ vasena bāttiṃsasatapañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādi, "These, friend," etc., should be construed in the same way as described above. Thus, in explaining the thirty-two questions by way of the sixes, the Elder showed the flavor of harmony.

Chakkavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Description of the Sixes is Finished.

Sattakavaṇṇanā
Description of the Sevens

330.Iti chakkavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni sattakavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi.

330. Having shown the flavor of harmony by way of the sixes, he now begins the discourse again to show it by way of the sevens.

saddhādhanaṃ.Esa nayo sabbattha.Paññādhanaṃpanettha sabbaseṭṭhaṃ. Paññāya hi ṭhatvā tīṇi sucaritāni pañcasīlāni dasasīlāni pūretvā saggūpagā honti, sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ, paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇañca paṭivijjhanti. Imāsaṃ sampattīnaṃ paṭilābhakāraṇato paññā ‘‘dhana’’nti vuttā. Sattapi cetāni lokiyalokuttaramissakāneva kathitāni.Bojjhaṅgakathā kathitāva.

saddhādhanaṃ, wealth of faith. This method applies everywhere. However, paññādhanaṃ, wealth of wisdom, is the best of all. For by standing in wisdom, having fulfilled the three kinds of good conduct, the five precepts, and the ten precepts, they go to heaven, and they penetrate to the knowledge of a disciple-aspirant, the knowledge of a Paccekabuddha, and the knowledge of a Samma Sambuddha. Because it is the cause of obtaining these accomplishments, wisdom is called "wealth." All seven of these are described as being a mixture of mundane and supramundane. The account of the Bojjhaṅga, enlightenment factors, has been described.

Samādhiparikkhārāti samādhiparivārā. Sammādiṭṭhādīni vuttatthāneva. Imepi satta parikkhārā lokiyalokuttarāva kathitā.

Samādhiparikkhārā, requisites of samādhi: the retinue of samādhi. Sammādiṭṭhi, right view, etc., have the meanings as previously stated. These seven requisites are also described as being both mundane and supramundane.

asaddhammā.Vipariyāyenasaddhammāveditabbā. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.Saddhammesupana saddhādayo sabbepi vipassakasseva kathitā. Tesupi paññā lokiyalokuttarā. Ayaṃ viseso.

asaddhammā, bad qualities: saddhammā, good qualities should be understood in the opposite way. The rest here is of obvious meaning. However, among the saddhammesu, good qualities, faith and the rest are described as belonging solely to the Vipassanā practitioner. Among these, wisdom is mundane and supramundane. This is the distinction.

sappurisadhammā.Tattha suttageyyādikaṃ dhammaṃ jānātītidhammaññū.Tassa tasseva bhāsitassa atthaṃ jānātītiatthaññū.‘‘Ettakomhi sīlena samādhinā paññāyā’’ti evaṃ attānaṃ jānātītiattaññū.Paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu mattaṃ jānātītimattaññū.Ayaṃ kālo uddesassa, ayaṃ kālo paripucchāya, ayaṃ kālo yogassa adhigamāyāti evaṃ kālaṃ jānātītikālaññū.Ettha ca pañca vassāni uddesassa kālo. Dasa paripucchāya. Idaṃ atisambādhaṃ. Dasa vassāni pana uddesassa kālo. Vīsati paripucchāya. Tato paraṃ yoge kammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Aṭṭhavidhaṃ parisaṃ jānātītiparisaññū.Sevitabbāsevitabbaṃ puggalaṃ jānātītipuggalaññū.

sappurisadhammā, qualities of a good person: Therein, one who knows the Dhamma, such as the Sutta, Geyya, etc., is dhammaññū, a knower of Dhamma. One who knows the meaning of that same thing that was spoken is atthaññū, a knower of meaning. One who knows oneself, thus: "I am so much in virtue, concentration, and wisdom," is attaññū, a knower of self. One who knows moderation in receiving and using is mattaññū, a knower of moderation. One who knows the time, thus: "This is the time for learning, this is the time for questioning, this is the time for practice, for attainment," is kālaññū, a knower of time. And here, five years is the time for learning. Ten for questioning. This is too crowded. However, ten years is the time for learning. Twenty for questioning. After that, work should be done on practice. One who knows the eight kinds of assemblies is parisaññū, a knower of assemblies. One who knows which person should be associated with and which should not is puggalaññū, a knower of persons.

331.Niddasavatthūnīti niddasādivatthūni. Niddaso bhikkhu, nibbīso, nittiṃso, niccattālīso, nippaññāso bhikkhūti evaṃ vacanakāraṇāni. Ayaṃ kira pañho titthiyasamaye uppanno. Titthiyā hi dasavassakāle mataṃ nigaṇṭhaṃ niddasoti vadanti. So kira puna dasavasso na hoti. Na kevalañca dasavassova. Navavassopi…pe… ekavassopi na hoti. Eteneva nayena vīsativassādikālepi mataṃ nibbīso, nittiṃso, niccattālīso, nippaññāsoti vadanti. Āyasmā ānando gāme vicaranto taṃ kathaṃ sutvā vihāraṃ gantvā bhagavato ārocesi. Bhagavā āha –

331. Niddasavatthūnī, matters concerning Niddasa: Niddaso, Nibbīso, Nittiṃso, Niccattālīso, Nippaññāso, these are the reasons for speaking of a bhikkhu thus. This question arose in the time of the Titthiyas. For the Titthiyas call a Nigaṇṭha who died after ten years "Niddaso." And he is not again one who has lived for ten years. And not only one who has lived for ten years, but also one who has lived for nine years…pe… one year is not. In this same way, they call one who died after twenty years "Nibbīso," "Nittiṃso," "Niccattālīso," "Nippaññāso." Āyasmā Ānanda, while wandering in a village, heard that talk and went to the monastery and reported it to the Blessed One. The Blessed One said:

‘‘Na idaṃ, ānanda, titthiyānaṃ adhivacanaṃ mama sāsane khīṇāsavassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khīṇāsavo hi dasavassakāle parinibbuto puna dasavasso na hoti. Na kevalañca dasavassova, navavassopi…pe… ekavassopi. Na kevalañca ekavassova, dasamāsikopi…pe… ekamāsikopi. Ekadivasikopi. Ekamuhuttopi na hoti eva. Kasmā? Puna paṭisandhiyā abhāvā. Nibbīsādīsupi eseva nayo. Iti bhagavā mama sāsane khīṇāsavassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti –

‘‘This, Ānanda, is not a term of the Titthiyas, but a term for a Khīṇāsava in my dispensation. For a Khīṇāsava who has attained Parinibbāna after ten years is not again one who has lived for ten years. And not only one who has lived for ten years, but also one who has lived for nine years…pe…one year. And not only one year, but also one who has lived for ten months…pe…one month. Even one who has lived for one day. Even one moment is not again. Why? Because of the absence of rebirth. The same method applies to Nibbīsa, etc. Thus, the Blessed One declared, "This is a term for a Khīṇāsava in my dispensation."’’ –

idhāvuso, bhikkhu, sikkhāsamādānetiādimāha. Tatthaidhāti imasmiṃ sāsane.Sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hotīti sikkhattayapūraṇe bahalacchando hoti.Āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemoti anāgate punadivasādīsupi sikkhāpūraṇe avigatapemena samannāgato hoti.Dhammanisantiyāti dhammanisāmanāya. Vipassanāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Icchāvinayeti taṇhāvinayane.Paṭisallāneti ekībhāve.Vīriyārambheti kāyikacetasikassa vīriyassa pūraṇe.Satinepakketi satiyañceva nepakkabhāve ca.Diṭṭhipaṭivedheti maggadassane. Sesaṃ sabbattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.

idhāvuso, bhikkhu, sikkhāsamādāne, Here, friend, a bhikkhu, in undertaking the training, etc., he said. Therein, idhā, here: in this dispensation. Sikkhāsamādāne tibbacchando hoti, he has intense desire in undertaking the training: he has strong desire in fulfilling the three trainings. Āyatiñca sikkhāsamādāne avigatapemo, and in the future, in undertaking the training, he has unfailing affection: he is endowed with unfailing affection in fulfilling the training even on the next day, etc. Dhammanisantiyā, for contentment in Dhamma: this is a term for Vipassanā. Icchāvinaye, in the abandoning of desire: in the abandoning of craving. Paṭisallāne, in seclusion: in being alone. Vīriyārambhe, in the instigation of effort: in fulfilling physical and mental effort. Satinepakke, in mindfulness and skill: in mindfulness and also in skillful behavior. Diṭṭhipaṭivedhe, in the penetration of view: in the sight of the Path. The rest should be understood everywhere in the same way as described above.

Saññāsuasubhānupassanāñāṇe saññāasubhasaññā.Ādīnavānupassanāñāṇe saññāādīnavasaññānāma. Sesā heṭṭhā vuttā eva. Balasattakaviññāṇaṭṭhitisattakapuggalasattakāni vuttanayāneva. Appahīnaṭṭhena anusayantītianusayā.Thāmagato kāmarāgo kāmarāgānusayo. Esa nayo sabbattha. Saṃyojanasattakaṃ uttānatthameva.

Saññāsu, perceptions: The perception in the knowledge of contemplation of foulness is asubhasaññā, perception of foulness. The perception in the knowledge of contemplation of danger is called ādīnavasaññā, perception of danger. The rest have been described below. The seven powers, the seven states of consciousness, the seven states, and the seven individuals are in the same way as described above. Anusayā, underlying tendencies: they underlie in the sense of not being abandoned. The lust that has become strong is the underlying tendency of lust. This method applies everywhere. The seven Saṃyojanas are of obvious meaning.

Adhikaraṇasamathasattakavaṇṇanā
Description of the Seven Ways of Settling Disputes

adhikaraṇasamathā. Uppannuppannānanti uppannānaṃ uppannānaṃ.Adhikaraṇānanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kiccādhikaraṇanti imesaṃ catunnaṃ.Samathāya vūpasamāyāti samathatthañceva vūpasamanatthañca.Sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārakoti ime satta samathā dātabbā.

adhikaraṇasamathā, settling of disputes. Uppannuppannānaṃ, of arisen, of arisen: of those that have arisen, have arisen. Adhikaraṇānaṃ, disputes: of these four: disputes about what is proper and improper, disputes about accusations, disputes about offenses, and disputes about duties. Samathāya vūpasamāyā, for the settling, for the allaying: both for the purpose of settling and for the purpose of allaying. Sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārako, the procedure in the presence should be given…pe…the covering over with grass: these seven ways of settling should be given.

vivādādhikaraṇaṃnāma. Sīlavipattiyā vā ācāradiṭṭhiājīvavipattiyā vā anuvadantānaṃ anuvādo upavadanā ceva codanā ca, idaṃanuvādādhikaraṇaṃnāma. Mātikāya āgatā pañca, vibhaṅge dveti sattapi āpattikkhandhā, idaṃāpattādhikaraṇaṃnāma. Saṅghassa apalokanādīnaṃ catunnaṃ kammānaṃ karaṇaṃ, idaṃkiccādhikaraṇaṃnāma.

vivādādhikaraṇaṃ, dispute: what is proper and improper. Whether due to transgression of virtue or transgression of conduct, view, or livelihood, the accusing, upavādo, is both upavadanā, disparagement, and codanā, censure; this is called anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ, dispute about accusations. The five that have come in the Mātikā and the two in the Vibhaṅga, these seven aggregates of offenses are called āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, dispute about offenses. The performance of the four kinds of acts, such as the Sangha's apalokana, invitation; this is called kiccādhikaraṇaṃ, dispute about duties.

sammukhāvinayonāma.

sammukhāvinayo, the procedure in the presence is as follows:

saṅghasammukhatā.Sametabbassa vatthuno bhūtatādhammasammukhatā.Yathā taṃ sametabbaṃ, tatheva sammanaṃvinayasammukhatā.Yo ca vivadati, yena ca vivadati, tesaṃ ubhinnaṃ atthapaccatthikānaṃ sammukhībhāvopuggalasammukhatā.Ubbāhikāya vūpasame panettha saṅghasammukhatā parihāyati. Evaṃ tāva sammukhāvinayeneva sammati.

saṅghasammukhatā, presence of the Sangha: dhammasammukhatā, presence of the Dhamma: the realness of the thing to be settled. vinayasammukhatā, presence of the Vinaya: settling it in the way it should be settled. puggalasammukhatā, presence of the individual: the presence of both the plaintiff and the defendant who are disputing. Here, the presence of the Sangha is lost with the resolution by the Ubbāhikā. Thus, it is settled by the procedure in the presence.

Sace panevampi na sammati, atha naṃ ubbāhikāya sammatā bhikkhū ‘‘na mayaṃ sakkoma vūpasametu’’nti saṅghasseva niyyātenti, tato saṅgho pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ bhikkhuṃ salākaggāhāpakaṃ sammannati. Tena guḷhakavivaṭakasakaṇṇajappakesu tīsu salākaggāhesu aññataravasena salākaṃ gāhāpetvā sannipatitaparisāya dhammavādīnaṃ yebhuyyatāya yathā te dhammavādino vadanti, evaṃ vūpasantaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ sammukhāvinayena ca yebhuyyasikāya ca vūpasantaṃ hoti.

But if it is not settled even in this way, then the bhikkhus appointed by the Ubbāhikā, saying, "We are not able to allay it," hand it over to the Sangha itself. Then the Sangha appoints a bhikkhu who possesses five qualities to be the distributor of ballots. Having had the ballots distributed by him in one of the three ways, either secretly, openly, or by whispering in the ear, according to how the Dhammavādīs, speakers of the Dhamma, speak, by the majority of the assembled company, the dispute is allayed in this way. Thus, the dispute is settled both by the procedure in the presence and by the Yebhuyyasikā.

yebhuyyasikānāma. Evaṃ vivādādhikaraṇaṃ dvīhi samathehi sammati.Anuvādādhikaraṇaṃcatūhi samathehi sammati – sammukhāvinayena ca sativinayena ca amūḷhavinayena ca tassapāpiyasikāya ca.Sammukhāvinayenevasammamānaṃ yo ca anuvadati, yañca anuvadati, tesaṃ vacanaṃ sutvā sace kāci āpatti natthi, ubho khamāpetvā, sace atthi, ayaṃ nāmettha āpattīti evaṃ vinicchitaṃ vūpasammati. Tattha sammukhāvinayalakkhaṇaṃ vuttanayameva. Yadā pana khīṇāsavassa bhikkhuno amūlikāya sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsitassa sativinayaṃ yācamānassa saṅgho ñatticatutthena kammena sativinayaṃ deti, tadā sammukhāvinayena ca sativinayena ca vūpasantaṃ hoti. Dinne pana sativinaye puna tasmiṃ puggale kassaci anuvādo na ruhati.

yebhuyyasikā, decision by majority: Thus, a dispute is settled by two ways of settling. Anuvādādhikaraṇaṃ, a dispute about accusations, is settled by four ways of settling—by the procedure in the presence, by the mindfulness verdict, by the verdict of innocence, and by the Tassapāpiyasikā. By the procedure in the presence, after hearing the words of the one who is accusing and the one who is being accused, if there is no offense, having had both apologize, if there is, it is settled after deciding, "This is the offense here." There, the characteristic of the procedure in the presence is the same as described above. But when the Sangha gives the mindfulness verdict by a Ñatticatuttha-kamma to a Khīṇāsava bhikkhu who has been accused of a baseless transgression of virtue and who is asking for a mindfulness verdict, then it is settled both by the procedure in the presence and by the mindfulness verdict. But after the mindfulness verdict has been given, no accusation against that person arises again.

Yadā ummattako bhikkhu ummādavasena assāmaṇake ajjhācāre ‘‘saratāyasmā evarūpiṃ āpatti’’nti bhikkhūhi codiyamāno ‘‘ummattakena me, āvuso, etaṃ kataṃ, nāhaṃ taṃ sarāmī’’ti bhaṇantopi bhikkhūhi codiyamānova puna acodanatthāya amūḷhavinayaṃ yācati, saṅgho cassa ñatticatutthena kammena amūḷhavinayaṃ deti, tadā sammukhāvinayena ca amūḷhavinayena ca vūpasantaṃ hoti. Dinne pana amūḷhavinaye puna tasmiṃ puggale kassaci tappaccayā anuvādo na ruhati.

When a mad bhikkhu, due to his madness, is accused by the bhikkhus of unascetic behavior, saying, "The Venerable One remembers committing such an offense," and even though he says, "Friends, this was done by me in my madness, I do not remember it," he still asks for the verdict of innocence to prevent further accusations, and the Sangha gives him the verdict of innocence by a Ñatticatuttha-kamma, then it is settled both by the procedure in the presence and by the verdict of innocence. But after the verdict of innocence has been given, no accusation arises again against that person due to that cause.

Āpattādhikaraṇaṃtīhi samathehi sammati sammukhāvinayena ca paṭiññātakaraṇena ca tiṇavatthārakena ca. Tassa sammukhāvinayeneva vūpasamo natthi. Yadā pana ekassa vā bhikkhuno santike saṅghagaṇamajjhesu vā bhikkhu lahukaṃ āpattiṃ deseti, tadāāpattādhikaraṇaṃsammukhāvinayena ca paṭiññātakaraṇena ca vūpasammati.

Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, A dispute about offenses, is settled by three ways of settling—by the procedure in the presence, by confession, and by the covering over with grass. There is no allaying of it by the procedure in the presence alone. When a bhikkhu confesses a minor offense either in the presence of one bhikkhu or in the midst of the Sangha-assembly, then āpattādhikaraṇaṃ, the dispute about offenses, is settled both by the procedure in the presence and by confession.

Tattha sammukhāvinaye tāva yo ca deseti, yassa ca deseti, tesaṃ sammukhībhāvo puggalasammukhatā. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.

There, in the procedure in the presence, the presence of the individual is the presence of those who confess and those to whom they confess. The rest is the same as described above.

paṭiññātakaraṇaṃnāma. Saṅghādisese hi parivāsādiyācanā paṭiññā. Parivāsādīnaṃ dānaṃ paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ nāma. Dve pakkhajātā pana bhaṇḍanakārakā bhikkhū bahuṃ assāmaṇakaṃ ajjhācaritvā puna lajjidhamme uppanne sace mayaṃ imāhi āpattīhi aññamaññaṃ kāressāma, siyāpi taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ kakkhaḷattāya saṃvatteyyāti aññamaññaṃ āpattiyā kārāpane dosaṃ disvā yadā tiṇavatthārakakammaṃ karonti, tadā āpattādhikaraṇaṃ sammukhāvinayena ca tiṇavatthārakena ca sammati.

It is called making acknowledgment. In Saṅghādisesa offenses, requesting parivāsa etc., is acknowledgment. Giving parivāsa etc., is called making acknowledgment. However, if two monks who are quarrelsome and makers of disputes, after committing many unseemly acts, and then when shame arises in them, [think] "if we were to have each other dealt with according to these offenses, that matter might lead to harshness," seeing fault in having each other dealt with according to the offenses, when they perform the covering-with-grass act, then the offense-dispute is settled by the facing-the-front Vinaya and by the covering with grass.

Kiccādhikaraṇaṃekena samathena sammati sammukhāvinayeneva. Imāni cattāri adhikaraṇāni yathānurūpaṃ imehi sattahi samathehi sammanti. Tena vuttaṃ – uppannuppannānaṃ adhikaraṇānaṃ samathāya vūpasamāya sammukhāvinayo dātabbo…pe… tiṇavatthārakoti. Ayamettha vinicchayanayo. Vitthāro pana samathakkhandhake āgatoyeva. Vinicchayopissa samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.

A kiccādhikaraṇa is settled by a single reconciliation, by the facing-the-front Vinaya alone. These four disputes are settled according to suitability by these seven reconciliations. Therefore, it was said: "For the appeasement, for the allaying of arisen disputes, the facing-the-front Vinaya should be given…pe… covering with grass." This is the method of decision here. But the detailed explanation has already come in the Samatha Khandhaka. And its decision is stated in the Samantapāsādikā.

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti cuddasannaṃ sattakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhanavuti pañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

"These, friend(s)" etc., should be construed according to the manner stated. Thus, while the Elder was speaking of ninety-eight questions based on the fourteen sets of sevens, he showed the flavor of harmony.

Sattakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sets of Sevens is Finished.

Aṭṭhakavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Sets of Eights

333.Iti sattakavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni aṭṭhakavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthamicchattāti ayāthāvā micchāsabhāvā.Sammattāti yāthāvā sammāsabhāvā.

333. Thus, after showing the flavor of harmony based on the sets of sevens, now, in order to show it based on the sets of eights, he again began the discourse. There, micchattā means incorrectly, having a false nature. Sammattā means correctly, having a right nature.

334.Kusītavatthūnīti kusītassa alasassa vatthūni patiṭṭhā kosajjakāraṇānīti attho.Kammaṃ kattabbaṃ hotīti cīvaravicāraṇādikammaṃ kātabbaṃ hoti.Na vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti duvidhampi vīriyaṃ nārabhati.Appattassāti jhānavipassanāmaggaphaladhammassa appattassa pattiyā.Anadhigatassāti tasseva anadhigatassa adhigamatthāya.Asacchikatassāti tasseva apaccakkhakatassa sacchikaraṇatthāya.Idaṃ paṭhamanti idaṃ handāhaṃ nipajjāmīti evaṃ osīdanaṃ paṭhamaṃ kusītavatthu. Iminā nayena sabbattha attho veditabbo. ‘‘Māsācitaṃ maññe’’ti ettha panamāsācitaṃnāma tintamāso. Yathā tintamāso garuko hoti, evaṃ garukoti adhippāyo.Gilānā vuṭṭhito hotīti gilāno hutvā pacchā vuṭṭhito hoti.

334. Kusītavatthūnī means the grounds, the bases, the causes of laziness for a lazy person. Kammaṃ kattabbaṃ hotī means there is work to be done, such as considering robes. Na vīriyaṃ ārabhatī means he does not undertake effort of either kind. Appattassā means for the sake of attaining the jhāna, Vipassanā, path, and fruition that have not been attained. Anadhigatassā means for the sake of achieving that which has not been achieved. Asacchikatassā means for the sake of realizing that which has not been directly experienced. Idaṃ paṭhamaṃ means this is the first ground for laziness, such as "Come now, I will lie down," thus relaxing. The meaning should be understood in this way everywhere. But in "māsācitaṃ maññe," māsācitaṃ means a month that is wet. The idea is that just as a wet month is heavy, so too [he feels] heavy. Gilānā vuṭṭhito hotī means having been sick, he later recovers.

335.Ārambhavatthūnīti vīriyakāraṇāni. Tesampi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.

335. Ārambhavatthūnī means causes of effort. The meaning of these, too, should be understood in the same way.

336.Dānavatthūnīti dānakāraṇāni.Āsajja dānaṃ detīti patvā dānaṃ deti. Āgataṃ disvāva muhuttaṃyeva nisīdāpetvā sakkāraṃ katvā dānaṃ deti, dassāmi dassāmīti na kilameti. Iti ettha āsādanaṃ dānakāraṇaṃ nāma hoti.Bhayā dānaṃ detītiādīsupi bhayādīni dānakāraṇānīti veditabbāni. Tatthabhayaṃnāma ayaṃ adāyako akārakoti garahābhayaṃ vā apāyabhayaṃ vā.Adāsi meti mayhaṃ pubbe esa idaṃ nāma adāsīti deti.Dassati meti anāgate idaṃ nāma dassatīti deti.Sāhu dānanti dānaṃ nāma sādhu sundaraṃ, buddhādīhi paṇḍitehi pasatthanti deti.Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāratthaṃ dānaṃ detīti samathavipassanācittassa alaṅkāratthañceva parivāratthañca deti. Dānañhi cittaṃ mudukaṃ karoti. Yena laddhaṃ hoti, sopi laddhaṃ meti muducitto hoti, yena dinnaṃ, sopi dinnaṃ mayāti muducitto hoti, iti ubhinnampi cittaṃ mudukaṃ karoti, teneva ‘‘adantadamanaṃ dāna’’nti vuccati. Yathāha –

336. Dānavatthūnī means causes of giving. Āsajja dānaṃ detī means having approached, he gives a gift. Having seen [a recipient] arrive, he immediately has him seated, makes an offering, and gives a gift, without tiring [him] by saying, "I will give, I will give." Thus, here, approaching is called a cause of giving. In bhayā dānaṃ detī etc., fear etc., should be understood as causes of giving. There, bhayaṃ means either fear of blame that "this one is a non-giver, a non-doer," or fear of the lower realms. Adāsi me means he gives, [thinking] "This one gave this to me before." Dassati me means he gives, [thinking] "He will give this to me in the future." Sāhu dānaṃ means he gives, [thinking] "Giving is good, beautiful, praised by the Buddhas and wise people." Cittālaṅkāracittaparikkhāratthaṃ dānaṃ detī means he gives for the sake of adorning and providing for the mind of samatha and Vipassanā. For giving makes the mind soft. He by whom it is obtained, he too, having obtained, is soft-minded. He by whom it is given, he too, having given, is soft-minded. Thus, it makes the mind soft for both. Therefore, it is called "giving, the taming of the untamed." As it was said:

‘‘Adantadamanaṃ dānaṃ, adānaṃ dantadūsakaṃ;

"Giving is the taming of the untamed, non-giving is the corrupting of the tamed;
By giving and kind speech, they rise up and they bow down."

Imesu pana aṭṭhasu dānesu cittālaṅkāradānameva uttamaṃ.

But among these eight kinds of giving, giving for the sake of adorning the mind is the best.

337.Dānūpapattiyoti dānapaccayā upapattiyo.Dahatīti ṭhapeti.Adhiṭṭhātīti tasseva vevacanaṃ.Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti.Hīne vimuttanti hīnesu pañcakāmaguṇesu vimuttaṃ.Uttari abhāvitanti tato uttari maggaphalatthāya abhāvitaṃ.Tatrūpapattiyā saṃvattatīti yaṃ patthetvā kusalaṃ kataṃ, tattha tattha nibbattanatthāya saṃvattati.

337. Dānūpapattiyo means rebirths due to giving. Dahatī means he establishes. Adhiṭṭhātī is a synonym for that. Bhāvetī means he develops. Hīne vimuttaṃ means liberated from the inferior five strands of sensual pleasure. Uttari abhāvitaṃ means undeveloped for the sake of the higher path and fruition. Tatrūpapattiyā saṃvattatī means it leads to rebirth in that place where he made the aspiration and did the wholesome deed.

Vītarāgassāti maggena vā samucchinnarāgassa samāpattiyā vā vikkhambhitarāgassa. Dānamatteneva hi brahmaloke nibbattituṃ na sakkā. Dānaṃ pana samādhivipassanācittassa alaṅkāro parivāro hoti. Tato dānena muducitto brahmavihāre bhāvetvā brahmaloke nibbattati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vītarāgassa no sarāgassā’’ti.

Vītarāgassā means one whose passion is destroyed by the path, or whose passion is suppressed by attainment. For it is not possible to be reborn in the Brahma world by giving alone. But giving is an adornment and provision for the mind of concentration and Vipassanā. From that, having softened his mind by giving, developing the Brahma-vihāras, he is reborn in the Brahma world. Therefore, it was said: "of one without passion, not of one with passion."

khattiyaparisā,samūhoti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha.

khattiyaparisā means a group. This method [applies] everywhere.

lokadhammā.Etehi mutto nāma natthi, buddhānampi hontiyeva. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhime, bhikkhave, lokadhammā lokaṃ anuparivattanti, loko ca aṭṭha lokadhamme anuparivattatī’’ti (a. ni. 8.5).Lābho alābhoti lābhe āgate alābho āgato evāti veditabbo.Yasādīsupi eseva nayo.

lokadhammā. There is no one free from these, they happen even to Buddhas. And it was said: "These eight worldly conditions, monks, revolve around the world, and the world revolves around the eight worldly conditions" (A. N. 8.5). Lābho alābho means when gain has come, it should be understood that loss has certainly come. The same method [applies] in yasā etc.

338.Abhibhāyatanavimokkhakathā heṭṭhā kathitā eva.

338. The talk about the abhibhāyatana and vimokkha has already been spoken of below.

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti ekādasannaṃ aṭṭhakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhāsīti pañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

"These, friend(s)" etc., should be construed according to the manner stated. Thus, while the Elder was speaking of eighty-eight questions based on the eleven sets of eights, he showed the flavor of harmony.

Aṭṭhakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sets of Eights is Finished.

Commentary on the Sets of Nines

340.Iti aṭṭhakavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni navakavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthaāghātavatthūnīti āghātakāraṇāni.Āghātaṃ bandhatīti kopaṃ bandhati karoti uppādeti.

340. Thus, after showing the flavor of harmony based on the sets of eights, now, in order to show it based on the sets of nines, he again began the discourse. There, āghātavatthūnī means causes of hatred. Āghātaṃ bandhatī means he binds, makes, produces anger.

Taṃ kutettha labbhāti taṃ anatthacaraṇaṃ mā ahosīti etasmiṃ puggale kuto labbhā, kena kāraṇena sakkā laddhuṃ? Paro nāma parassa attano cittaruciyā anatthaṃ karotīti evaṃ cintetvā āghātaṃ paṭivinodeti. Atha vā sacāhaṃ paṭikopaṃ kareyyaṃ, taṃ kopakaraṇaṃ ettha puggale kuto labbhā, kena kāraṇena laddhabbanti attho. Kuto lābhātipi pāṭho, sacāhaṃ ettha kopaṃ kareyyaṃ, tasmiṃ me kopakaraṇe kuto lābhā, lābhā nāma ke siyunti attho. Imasmiñca atthetanti nipātamattameva hoti.

Taṃ kutettha labbhā means from where can that causing of harm be obtained in this person, so that that causing of harm does not happen? By what cause is it possible to obtain? [He thinks:] "Another does harm to another according to his own mental inclination." Thus, he averts hatred. Or, alternatively, if I were to retaliate with anger, from where can that cause of anger be obtained in this person? By what cause is it obtained?" is the meaning. "Kuto lābhātipi" is also a reading. If I were to get angry here, from where is gain in that causing of anger for me? What would be the gains?" is the meaning. And in this meaning, ta is merely a particle.

341.Sattāvāsāti sattānaṃ āvāsā, vasanaṭṭhānānīti attho. Tattha suddhāvāsāpi sattāvāsova, asabbakālikattā pana na gahitā. Suddhāvāsā hi buddhānaṃ khandhāvārasadisā. Asaṅkhyeyyakappe buddhesu anibbattantesu taṃ ṭhānaṃ suññaṃ hotīti asabbakālikattā na gahitā. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.

341. Sattāvāsā means abodes of beings, places of dwelling. There, the Suddhāvāsas too, are abodes of beings, but they are not included because they are not perpetual. For the Suddhāvāsas are like the Buddhas' storehouses of aggregates. Because that place is empty when Buddhas have not arisen for countless aeons, they are not included because they are not perpetual. Whatever else should be said here, it has already been said below.

342.Akkhaṇesudhammo ca desiyatīti catusaccadhammo desiyati.Opasamikoti kilesūpasamakaro.Parinibbānikoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbānāvaho.Sambodhagāmīti catumaggañāṇapaṭivedhagāmī.Aññataranti asaññabhavaṃ vā arūpabhavaṃ vā.

342. In the inopportune times dhammo ca desiyatī means the Dhamma of the Four Noble Truths is taught. Opasamiko means making for the stilling of defilements. Parinibbāniko means leading to final liberation by the final liberation of defilements. Sambodhagāmī means leading to the penetration of the four path knowledges. Aññataraṃ means either the realm of non-perception or the formless realm.

343.Anupubbavihārāti anupaṭipāṭiyā samāpajjitabbavihārā.

343. Anupubbavihārā means abidings to be entered sequentially.

344.Anupubbanirodhāti anupaṭipāṭiyā nirodhā.

344. Anupubbanirodhā means cessations in sequence.

‘‘Ime, kho āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti channaṃ navakānaṃ vasena catupaṇṇāsa pañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

"These, friend(s)" etc., should be construed according to the manner stated. Thus, while the Elder was speaking of fifty-four questions based on the six sets of nines, he showed the flavor of harmony.

Navakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Sets of Nines is Finished.

Dasakavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Sets of Tens

345.Iti navakavasena sāmaggirasaṃ dassetvā idāni dasakavasena dassetuṃ puna desanaṃ ārabhi. Tatthanāthakaraṇāti ‘‘sanāthā, bhikkhave, viharatha mā anāthā, dasa ime, bhikkhave, dhammā nāthakaraṇā’’ti (a. ni. 10.18) evaṃ akkhātā attano patiṭṭhākarā dhammā.

345. Thus, after showing the flavor of harmony based on the sets of nines, now, in order to show it based on the sets of tens, he again began the discourse. There, nāthakaraṇā means the conditions that make one a refuge, the things that make oneself a support, which were declared thus: "Dwell, monks, with a refuge, not without a refuge. These ten things, monks, make one a refuge" (A. N. 10.18).

Kalyāṇamittotiādīsu sīlādiguṇasampannā kalyāṇā assa mittātikalyāṇamitto.Te cassa ṭhānanisajjādīsu saha ayanato sahāyātikalyāṇasahāyo.Cittena ceva kāyena ca kalyāṇamittesu eva sampavaṅko onatotikalyāṇasampavaṅko. Suvacohotīti sukhena vattabbo hoti sukhena anusāsitabbo.Khamoti gāḷhena pharusena kakkhaḷena vuccamāno khamati, na kuppati.Padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsaninti yathā ekacco ovadiyamāno vāmato gaṇhāti, paṭippharati vā asuṇanto vā gacchati, evaṃ akatvā ‘‘ovadatha, bhante, anusāsatha, tumhesu anovadantesu ko añño ovadissatī’’ti padakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhāti.

In kalyāṇamitto etc., kalyāṇamitto means a good friend because he is endowed with virtues such as morality. And because he goes together, accompanies him in places of standing and sitting etc., he is a kalyāṇasahāyo. kalyāṇasampavaṅko means he is one who inclines, is prone towards good friends in mind and body. Suvaco hotī means he is easy to speak to, easy to instruct. Khamo means he is patient when being spoken to harshly, rudely, or severely; he does not get angry. Padakkhiṇaggāhī anusāsani means just as some person, when being advised, takes it in the wrong way, retorts, or goes away without listening, he does not do so, but takes it in the right way, [thinking,] "Advise me, venerable sir, instruct me. If you do not advise me, who else will advise me?"

Uccāvacānīti uccāni ca avacāni ca.Kiṃ karaṇīyānīti kiṃ karomīti evaṃ vatvā kattabbakammāni. Tatthauccakammānināma cīvarassa karaṇaṃ rajanaṃ cetiye sudhākammaṃ uposathāgāracetiyagharabodhiyagharesu kattabbanti evamādi.Avacakammaṃnāma pādadhovanamakkhanādikhuddakakammaṃ.Tatrupāyāyāti tatrupagamanīyā.Alaṃ kātunti kātuṃ samattho hoti.Alaṃ saṃvidhātunti vicāretuṃ samattho.

Uccāvacānī means high and low. Kiṃ karaṇīyānī means the tasks to be done after saying "What shall I do?" There, uccakammāni means making a robe, dyeing, plastering a shrine, doing work in the uposatha hall, shrine room, Bodhi-tree room etc. Avacakammaṃ means small tasks such as washing the feet, anointing etc. Tatrupāyāyā means those that are to be approached. Alaṃ kātuṃ means he is capable of doing. Alaṃ saṃvidhātuṃ means he is capable of managing.

dhammakāmo,tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ piyāyatīti attho.Piyasamudāhāroti parasmiṃ kathente sakkaccaṃ suṇāti, sayañca paresaṃ desetukāmo hotīti attho. ‘‘Abhidhamme abhivinaye’’ti ettha dhammo abhidhammo, vinayo abhivinayoti catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tatthadhammoti suttantapiṭakaṃ.Abhidhammoti satta pakaraṇāni.Vinayoti ubhatovibhaṅgā.Abhivinayoti khandhakaparivārā. Atha vā suttantapiṭakampi abhidhammapiṭakampidhammoeva. Maggaphalāniabhidhammo.Sakalaṃ vinayapiṭakaṃvinayo.Kilesavūpasamakāraṇaṃabhivinayo.Iti sabbasmimpi ettha dhamme abhidhamme vinaye abhivinaye ca.Uḷārapāmojjoti bahulapāmojjo hotīti attho.

dhammakāmo means he loves the Tipiṭaka, the word of the Buddha. Piyasamudāhāro means he listens attentively when another is speaking, and he himself wants to teach others. In "Abhidhamme abhivinaye," the set of four should be understood: Dhamma is Abhidhamma, Vinaya is Abhivinaya. There, dhammo is the Suttanta Piṭaka. Abhidhammo is the seven treatises. Vinayo is the Ubhatovibhaṅga. Abhivinayo is the Khandhaka and Parivāra. Alternatively, both the Suttanta Piṭaka and the Abhidhamma Piṭaka are dhammo. The paths and fruitions are abhidhammo. The entire Vinaya Piṭaka is vinayo. That which causes the stilling of defilements is abhivinayo. Iti sabbasmimpi ettha dhamme abhidhamme vinaye abhivinaye ca means in all of this Dhamma, Abhidhamma, Vinaya, and Abhivinaya. Uḷārapāmojjo means he has abundant joy.

Kusalesudhammesūti kāraṇatthe bhummaṃ, catubhūmakakusaladhammakāraṇā, tesaṃ adhigamatthāya anikkhittadhuro hotīti attho.

346.Kusalesu dhammesū means locative in the sense of cause: because of wholesome states of the four planes, for the sake of attaining them, he is unburdened, not casting off the burden.

346.Kasiṇadasake sakalaṭṭhenakasiṇāni.Tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ khettaṭṭhena vā adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vāāyatanāni. Uddhanti upari gaganatalābhimukhaṃ.Adhoti heṭṭhā bhūmitalābhimukhaṃ.Tiriyanti khettamaṇḍalamiva samantā paricchinditvā. Ekacco hi uddhameva kasiṇaṃ vaḍḍheti, ekacco adho, ekacco samantato. Tena tena vā kāraṇena evaṃ pasāreti ālokamiva rūpadassanakāmo. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavīkasiṇameko sañjānāti uddhaṃ adho tiriya’’nti.Advayanti idaṃ pana ekassa aññabhāvānupagamanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi udakaṃ paviṭṭhassa sabbadisāsu udakameva hoti, na aññaṃ, evameva pathavīkasiṇaṃ pathavīkasiṇameva hoti, natthi tassa añño kasiṇasambhedoti. Esa nayo sabbattha.Appamāṇanti idaṃ tassa tassa pharaṇaappamāṇavasena vuttaṃ. Tañhi cetasā pharanto sakalameva pharati, na ‘‘ayamassa ādi, idaṃ majjha’’nti pamāṇaṃ gaṇhātīti.Viññāṇakasiṇanti cettha kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattaviññāṇaṃ. Tattha kasiṇavasena kasiṇugghāṭimākāse kasiṇugghāṭimākāsavasena tattha pavattaviññāṇe uddhaṃ adho tiriyatā veditabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayena panetāni pathavīkasiṇādīni vitthārato visuddhimagge vuttāneva.

346. In the ten kasiṇas, kasiṇāni means kasiṇas in the sense of totality. Āyatanāni means spheres in the sense of the field of objects or in the sense of the basis for states with that as their object. Uddhaṃ means upwards, facing the sky. Adho means downwards, facing the ground. Tiriyaṃ means surrounding on all sides like a circular field. For one person develops the kasiṇa upwards only, another downwards, another all around. For this or that reason, he extends it in this way, like light, wanting to see forms. Therefore, it was said: "One perceives the earth kasiṇa upwards, downwards, across." Advayaṃ means this, however, was said for the purpose of non-apprehension of the otherness of one. Just as for one who has entered water, there is water in all directions, not anything else, so too, the earth kasiṇa is only the earth kasiṇa, there is no mixture of another kasiṇa with it. This method [applies] everywhere. Appamāṇaṃ means this was said in terms of the measurelessness of its pervasion. For while pervading with the mind, he pervades it entirely, and he does not take a measure, [thinking,] "this is its beginning, this is its middle." Viññāṇakasiṇaṃ here means consciousness functioning in the space of the kasiṇa-removal. There, upwards, downwards, and across should be understood in the space of the kasiṇa-removal in terms of the kasiṇa and in the consciousness functioning there in terms of the space of the kasiṇa-removal. This is the summary here. But these earth kasiṇas etc., have been spoken of in detail in the Visuddhimagga according to the method of meditation subjects.

Akusalakammapathadasakavaṇṇanā
Commentary on the Ten Courses of Unwholesome Action

347.Kammapathesu kammāneva sugatiduggatīnaṃ pathabhūtattākammapathānāma. Tesu pāṇātipāto adinnādānaṃ musāvādādayo ca cattāro brahmajāle vitthāritā eva.Kāmesumicchācāroti ettha panakāmesūti methunasamācāresu methunavatthūsu vā.Micchācāroti ekantanindito lāmakācāro. Lakkhaṇato pana asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanākāmesumicchācāro.

347. In the courses of action, actions themselves are called kammapathā because they are the path to the good and bad destinations. Among them, killing living beings, taking what is not given, false speech, and the other four, have already been explained in detail in the Brahmajāla Sutta. In kāmesumicchācāro, kāmesū means in sexual practices or in objects of sexual desire. Micchācāro means blameworthy, base conduct. But in terms of its characteristic, the volition that arises through the body-door with the intention of unrighteousness, transgressing against places where one should not go, is kāmesumicchācāro.

agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃnāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitā, piturakkhitā, mātāpiturakkhitā, bhāturakkhitā, bhaginirakkhitā, ñātirakkhitā, gottarakkhitā, dhammarakkhitā, sārakkhā, saparidaṇḍāti māturakkhitādayo dasa. Dhanakkītā, chandavāsinī, bhogavāsinī, paṭavāsinī, odapattakinī, obhatacumbaṭā, dāsī ca bhariyā ca, kammakārī ca bhariyā ca, dhajāhaṭā, muhuttikāti etā dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati. Itthīsu pana dvinnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānaṃ dasannañca dhanakkītādīnanti dvādasannaṃ itthīnaṃ aññe purisā. Idaṃ agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. So panesa micchācāro sīlādiguṇarahite agamanīyaṭṭhāne appasāvajjo. Sīlādiguṇasampanne mahāsāvajjo. Tassa cattāro sambhārā agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanappayogo, maggenamaggappaṭipattiadhivāsananti. Eko payogo sāhatthiko eva.

agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ: "Not to be approached" means, for men, those women who are protected by their mother, protected by their father, protected by both mother and father, protected by their brother, protected by their sister, protected by relatives, protected by lineage, protected by the Dhamma, those under protection, and those with a penalty, these ten beginning with 'protected by their mother'. Those bought with wealth, those living by consent, those living for wealth, those living for clothing, those who receive a bowl of food, those living under a veil, a female slave, a wife, a female worker, a wife, a captured flag (war captive), and a temporary one; these twenty, beginning with 'bought with wealth'. But among women, other men towards the two, those under protection and those with a penalty, and the ten beginning with those bought with wealth, are not allowed to approach. This is called "Not to be approached." This misconduct (micchācāra), in a place not to be approached devoid of virtue such as morality, is of slight offense. Endowed with virtue such as morality, it is a great offense. It has four requisites: an object not to be approached, a mind of association with that, an effort of association, and the adherence to the wrong path through the path.

abhijjhā,parabhaṇḍābhimukhī hutvā tanninnatāya pavattatīti attho. Sā ‘‘aho vata idaṃ mamassā’’ti evaṃ parabhaṇḍābhijjhāyanalakkhaṇā adinnādānaṃ viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Tassā dve sambhārā parabhaṇḍaṃ, attano pariṇāmanañca. Parabhaṇḍavatthuke hi lobhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatīdaṃ mamassā’’ti attano na pariṇāmeti.

abhijjhā: Covetousness means proceeding towards another's goods with inclination for them. It, having the characteristic of coveting another's goods, thinking "Oh, may this be mine!", is like stealing, of slight and great offense. It has two requisites: another's goods, and transforming them into one's own. For even when greed arises with another's goods as the object, there is no breach of the path of action until one transforms it into one's own, thinking, "Oh, may this be mine!"

byāpādo.So paraṃ vināsāya manopadosalakkhaṇo pharusāvācā viya appasāvajjo mahāsāvajjo ca. Tassa dve sambhārā parasatto ca, tassa vināsacintā ca. Parasattavatthuke hi kodhe uppannepi na tāva kammapathabhedo hoti, yāva ‘‘aho vatāyaṃ ucchijjheyya vinasseyyā’’ti tassa vināsaṃ na cinteti.

byāpādo: Ill-will. It, having the characteristic of malevolence intending the destruction of another, is like harsh speech, of slight and great offense. It has two requisites: another being, and the thought of their destruction. For even when anger arises with another being as the object, there is no breach of the path of action until one thinks of their destruction, thinking, "Oh, may this be destroyed, may this perish!"

micchādiṭṭhi.Sā ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā nayena viparītadassanalakkhaṇā. Samphappalāpo viya appasāvajjā mahāsāvajjā ca. Apica aniyatā appasāvajjā, niyatā mahāsāvajjā. Tassā dve sambhārā vatthuno ca gahitākāraviparītatā, yathā ca taṃ gaṇhāti, tathābhāvena tassūpaṭṭhānanti.

micchādiṭṭhi: Wrong view. It, having the characteristic of perverse seeing in the manner of "there is no giving," etc., is like frivolous talk, of slight and great offense. Moreover, undetermined wrong view is of slight offense, determined wrong view is of great offense. It has two requisites: the perversity of the object and the manner in which it is grasped, and the presence of it as it is grasped.

Imesaṃ pana dasannaṃ akusalakammapathānaṃ dhammato koṭṭhāsato ārammaṇato vedanāto mūlatoti pañcahākārehi vinicchayo veditabbo.

Now, regarding these ten unwholesome paths of action, a decision should be known in five ways: by way of dhamma, by way of division, by way of object, by way of feeling, and by way of root.

dhammatoti etesu hi paṭipāṭiyā satta cetanādhammāva honti. Abhijjhādayo tayo cetanāsampayuttā.

dhammato: By way of dhamma, in these, respectively, only seven are mental states (cetanā). The three, covetousness, etc., are associated with mental states.

Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta, micchādiṭṭhi cāti ime aṭṭha kammapathā eva honti, no mūlāni. Abhijjhābyāpādā kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Abhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā lobho akusalamūlaṃ hoti. Byāpādo doso akusalamūlaṃ hoti.

Koṭṭhāsato: By way of division, respectively, the seven and wrong view, these eight are only paths of action, not roots. Covetousness and ill-will are both paths of action and roots. For covetousness, having reached the state of root, becomes greed, an unwholesome root. Ill-will becomes hate, an unwholesome root.

Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇato saṅkhārārammaṇo hoti. Adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ vā saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā, micchācāro phoṭṭhabbavasena saṅkhārārammaṇo. ‘‘Sattārammaṇo’’tipi eke. Musāvādo sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā, tathā pisuṇavācā. Pharusavācā sattārammaṇāva. Samphappalāpo diṭṭhasutamutaviññātavasena sattārammaṇo vā saṅkhārārammaṇo vā. Tathā abhijjhā. Byāpādo sattārammaṇova. Micchādiṭṭhi tebhūmakadhammavasena saṅkhārārammaṇā.

Ārammaṇato: By way of object, killing takes a living being as its object and also conditioned things as its object. Stealing takes a being as its object or conditioned things. Sexual misconduct takes conditioned things as its object by way of tangible things. Some say, "It takes a being as its object." False speech takes a being as its object or conditioned things, and so does malicious speech. Harsh speech takes only a being as its object. Frivolous talk takes a being as its object or conditioned things by way of what is seen, heard, sensed, and cognized. So does covetousness. Ill-will takes only a being as its object. Wrong view takes conditioned things as its object by way of the three realms.

Vedanātoti pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano hoti. Kiñcāpi hi rājāno coraṃ disvā hasamānāpi ‘‘gacchatha naṃ ghātethā’’ti vadanti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā pana dukkhasampayuttāva hoti. Adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ. Micchācāro sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano. Sanniṭṭhāpakacitte pana majjhattavedano na hoti. Musāvādo tivedano. Tathā pisuṇavācā. Pharusavācā dukkhavedanā. Samphappalāpo tivedano. Abhijjhā sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedanā tathā micchādiṭṭhi. Byāpādo dukkhavedano.

Vedanāto: By way of feeling, killing is accompanied by painful feeling. Although kings, seeing a thief, even while laughing, say, "Go, kill him," the determining thought (sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā), however, is only associated with painful feeling. Stealing has three kinds of feeling. Sexual misconduct has two kinds of feeling: pleasant and neutral. However, in the determining thought, there is no neutral feeling. False speech has three kinds of feeling. So does malicious speech. Harsh speech has painful feeling. Frivolous talk has three kinds of feeling. Covetousness has two kinds of feeling: pleasant and neutral, and so does wrong view. Ill-will has painful feeling.

Mūlatoti pāṇātipāto dosamohavasena dvimūlako hoti. Adinnādānaṃ dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā. Micchācāro lobhamohavasena. Musāvādo dosamohavasena vā lobhamohavasena vā tathā pisuṇavācā samphappalāpo ca. Pharusavācā dosamohavasena. Abhijjhā mohavasena ekamūlā. Tathā byāpādo. Micchādiṭṭhi lobhamohavasena dvimūlāti.

Mūlato: By way of root, killing has two roots: hate and delusion. Stealing has two roots: hate and delusion or greed and delusion. Sexual misconduct has greed and delusion. False speech has two roots: hate and delusion or greed and delusion, and so do malicious speech and frivolous talk. Harsh speech has hate and delusion. Covetousness has one root: delusion. So does ill-will. Wrong view has two roots: greed and delusion.

Kusalakammapathadasakavaṇṇanā
Description of the Ten Wholesome Paths of Action

Pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādīni samādānasampattasamucchedavirativasena veditabbāni.

Abstinence from killing (pāṇātipātā veramaṇi), etc., should be understood as accomplishment of undertaking, accomplishment of cessation, and abstaining.

Dhammatopana etesupi paṭipāṭiyā satta cetanāpi vattanti viratiyopi. Ante tayo cetanāsampayuttāva.

Dhammato: By way of dhamma, in these too, respectively, seven mental states occur, and also abstinence. The last three are only associated with mental states.

Koṭṭhāsatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta kammapathā eva, no mūlāni. Ante tayo kammapathā ceva mūlāni ca. Anabhijjhā hi mūlaṃ patvā alobho kusalamūlaṃ hoti. Abyāpādo adoso kusalamūlaṃ. Sammādiṭṭhi amoho kusalamūlaṃ.

Koṭṭhāsato: By way of division, respectively, the seven are only paths of action, not roots. The last three are both paths of action and roots. For non-covetousness, having reached the state of root, becomes non-greed, a wholesome root. Non-ill-will is non-hate, a wholesome root. Right view is non-delusion, a wholesome root.

Ārammaṇatoti pāṇātipātādīnaṃ ārammaṇāneva etesaṃ ārammaṇāni. Vītikkamitabbatoyeva hi veramaṇī nāma hoti. Yathā pana nibbānārammaṇo ariyamaggo kilese pajahati, evaṃ jīvitindriyādiārammaṇāpete kammapathā pāṇātipātādīni dussīlyāni pajahantīti veditabbā.

Ārammaṇato: By way of object, the objects of abstinence from killing, etc., are the same as the objects of killing, etc. For abstinence is so-called from what should be transgressed. Just as the Noble Path, having nibbāna as its object, abandons defilements, so these paths of action, having a living being, etc., as their object, abandon evil conduct such as killing, etc., should be understood.

Vedanātoti sabbe sukhavedanā honti majjhattavedanā vā. Kusalaṃ patvā hi dukkhavedanā nāma natthi.

Vedanāto: By way of feeling, all are associated with pleasant feeling or neutral feeling. For, having attained wholesomeness, there is no such thing as painful feeling.

Mūlatoti paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa alobhaadosaamohavasena timūlāni honti, ñāṇavippayuttacittena viramantassa dvimūlāni. Anabhijjhā ñāṇasampayuttacittena viramantassa dvimūlā, ñāṇavippayuttacittena ekamūlā. Alobho pana attanāva attano mūlaṃ na hoti. Abyāpādepi eseva nayo. Sammādiṭṭhi alobhādosavasena dvimūlā evāti.

Mūlato: By way of root, for one abstaining with a mind associated with knowledge, the seven respectively have three roots: non-greed, non-hate, and non-delusion; for one abstaining with a mind dissociated from knowledge, there are two roots. Non-covetousness, for one abstaining with a mind associated with knowledge, has two roots; for one abstaining with a mind dissociated from knowledge, there is one root. Non-greed, however, is not its own root by itself. The same method applies to non-ill-will. Right view has only two roots: non-greed and non-hate.

Ariyavāsadasakavaṇṇanā
Description of the Ten Noble Dwellings

348.Ariyavāsāti ariyā eva vasiṃsu vasanti vasissanti etesūti ariyavāsā.Pañcaṅgavippahīnoti pañcahi aṅgehi vippayuttova hutvā khīṇāsavo avasi vasati vasissatīti tasmā ayaṃ pañcaṅgavippahīnatā, ariyassa vāsattā ariyavāsoti vutto. Esa nayo sabbattha.

348.Ariyavāsā: Noble dwellings, because the Noble Ones have dwelt, dwell, and will dwell in these. Pañcaṅgavippahīno: Having abandoned the five factors, the arahant dwells. Therefore, this abandonment of the five factors, being a dwelling of the Noble One, is called a Noble Dwelling. This method applies everywhere.

Evaṃ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hotīti chaḷaṅgupekkhāya samannāgato hoti. Chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma keti? Ñāṇādayo. ‘‘Ñāṇa’’nti vutte kiriyato cattāri ñāṇasampayuttacittāni labbhanti. ‘‘Satatavihāro’’ti vutte aṭṭha mahācittāni. ‘‘Rajjanadussanaṃ natthī’’ti vutte dasa cittāni labbhanti. Somanassaṃ āsevanavasena labbhati.

Evaṃ kho, āvuso, bhikkhu chaḷaṅgasamannāgato hoti: Thus, friend, a bhikkhu is endowed with six factors of equanimity. What is six-factored equanimity? Knowledge, etc. When "knowledge" is mentioned, four cittas associated with knowledge are obtained in terms of function. When "constant abiding" is mentioned, eight great cittas are obtained. When "there is no passion or aversion" is mentioned, ten cittas are obtained. Happiness is obtained by way of cultivation.

Satārakkhena cetasāti khīṇāsavassa hi tīsu dvāresu sabbakālaṃ sati ārakkhakiccaṃ sādheti. Tenevassa ‘‘carato ca tiṭṭhato ca suttassa ca jāgarassa ca satataṃ samitaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hotī’’ti vuccati.

Satārakkhena cetasā: With a mind protected by mindfulness, for the arahant, mindfulness performs the function of guarding at all times in the three doors. Therefore, it is said, "For him, while walking, standing, sleeping, and awake, knowledge and vision are constantly and continuously present."

Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇānanti bahūnaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ. Ettha casamaṇāti pabbajjupagatā.Brāhmaṇāti bhovādino.Puthupaccekasaccānīti bahūni pāṭekkasaccāni, idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, idameva dassanaṃ saccanti evaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ gahitāni bahūni saccānīti attho.Nunnānīti nihatāni.Paṇunnānīti suṭṭhu nihatāni.Cattānīti vissaṭṭhāni.Vantānīti vamitāni.Muttānīti chinnabandhanāni katāni.Pahīnānīti pajahitāni.Paṭinissaṭṭhānīti yathā na puna cittaṃ āruhanti, evaṃ paṭinissajjitāni. Sabbāneva tāni gahitaggahaṇassa vissaṭṭhabhāvavevacanāni.

Puthusamaṇabrāhmaṇāna: Of many ascetics and brahmins. Here, samaṇā: ascetics are those who have gone forth. Brāhmaṇā: brahmins are those who use the term "bho" (an ancient Indian term of address). Puthupaccekasaccānī: Many individual truths, meaning many truths grasped individually, thinking, "This doctrine alone is true, this doctrine alone is true." Nunnānī: are defeated. Paṇunnānī: are well defeated. Cattānī: are abandoned. Vantānī: are vomited. Muttānī: are made with broken bonds. Pahīnānī: are abandoned. Paṭinissaṭṭhānī: are released in such a way that they do not rise in the mind again. All these are synonyms for the state of abandoning what has been grasped.

Samavayasaṭṭhesanoti etthaavayāti anūnā.Saṭṭhāti vissaṭṭhā. Sammā avayā saṭṭhā esanā assātisamavayasaṭṭhesano.Sammā vissaṭṭhasabbaesanoti attho.Rāgā cittaṃ vimuttantiādīhi maggassa kiccanipphatti kathitā.

Samavayasaṭṭhesano: Here, avayā: means not deficient. Saṭṭhā: means abandoned. Samavayasaṭṭhesano: He whose seeking is rightly not deficient and abandoned. It means one who has rightly abandoned all seeking. Rāgā cittaṃ vimutta: By "the mind is freed from passion," etc., the accomplishment of the function of the Path is stated.

Rāgome pahīnotiādīhi paccavekkhaṇāya phalaṃ kathitaṃ.

Rāgome pahīno: By "passion is abandoned by me," etc., the fruit of reviewing is stated.

Asekkhadhammadasakavaṇṇanā
Description of the Ten Trainless Qualities

Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhītiādayo sabbepi phalasampayuttadhammā eva. Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhi, sammāñāṇanti dvīsu ṭhānesu paññāva kathitā.Sammāvimuttīti iminā padena vuttāvasesā. Phalasamāpattidhammā saṅgahitāti veditabbā.

Asekkhā sammādiṭṭhī: Trainless Right View, etc., are all qualities associated with the fruition. Here, in the two places, Right View and Right Knowledge, only wisdom is stated. Sammāvimuttī: By this term, the remaining factors are stated. The qualities of fruition attainment should be understood as included.

‘‘Ime kho, āvuso’’tiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Iti channaṃ dasakānaṃ vasena samasaṭṭhi pañhe kathento thero sāmaggirasaṃ dassesīti.

"Ime kho, āvuso," etc., should be connected in the manner stated above. Thus, the Elder, speaking of sixty-six questions by way of six decades, showed the flavor of harmony.

Dasakavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

The Commentary on the Tens is finished.

Pañhasamodhānavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Compilation of Questions

349.Idha pana ṭhatvā pañhā samodhānetabbā. Imasmiñhi sutte ekakavasena dve pañhā kathitā. Dukavasena sattati. Tikavasena asītisataṃ. Catukkavasena dvesatāni. Pañcakavasena tiṃsasataṃ. Chakkavasena bāttiṃsasataṃ. Sattakavasena aṭṭhanavuti. Aṭṭhakavasena aṭṭhāsīti. Navakavasena catupaṇṇāsa. Dasakavasena samasaṭṭhīti evaṃ sahassaṃ cuddasa pañhā kathitā.

349.Here, however, standing here, the questions should be compiled. In this sutta, two questions have been stated in terms of one. Seventy in terms of two. One hundred and eighty in terms of three. Two hundred in terms of four. Three hundred and thirty in terms of five. Three hundred and thirty-two in terms of six. Ninety-eight in terms of seven. Eighty-eight in terms of eight. Fifty-four in terms of nine. Sixty-six in terms of ten. Thus, one thousand and fourteen questions have been stated.

Imañhi suttantaṃ ṭhapetvā tepiṭake buddhavacane añño suttanto evaṃ bahupañhapaṭimaṇḍito natthi. Bhagavā imaṃ suttantaṃ ādito paṭṭhāya sakalaṃ sutvā cintesi – ‘‘dhammasenāpati sāriputto buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā appaṭivattiyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Sāvakabhāsitoti vutte okappanā na hoti, jinabhāsitoti vutte hoti, tasmā jinabhāsitaṃ katvā devamanussānaṃ okappanaṃ imasmiṃ suttante uppādessāmī’’ti. Tato vuṭṭhāya sādhukāraṃ adāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā vuṭṭhahitvā āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ āmantesi, sādhu, sādhu, sāriputta, sādhu kho tvaṃ sāriputta, bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgītipariyāyaṃ abhāsī’’ti.

Except for this sutta, there is no other sutta in the Tipitaka, in the Buddha's word, so adorned with many questions. The Blessed One, having heard this entire sutta from the beginning, thought: "The General of the Dhamma, Sāriputta, revealing the power of the Buddha, roars a lion's roar that cannot be turned back. When it is said to be the speech of a disciple, there is no conviction; when it is said to be the speech of the Conqueror, there is conviction. Therefore, having made it the speech of the Conqueror, I will generate conviction in this sutta for gods and humans." Then, rising up, he gave approval. Therefore, it was said, "Then the Blessed One, rising up, addressed the Venerable Sāriputta, 'Good, good, Sāriputta! Well, Sāriputta, you have spoken the Saṅgīti discourse to the bhikkhus.'"

saṅgītipariyāyanti sāmaggiyā kāraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘sādhu, kho tvaṃ, sāriputta, mama sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsanditvā bhikkhūnaṃ sāmaggirasaṃ abhāsī’’ti.Samanuñño satthā ahosīti anumodanena samanuñño ahosi. Ettakena ayaṃ suttanto jinabhāsito nāma jāto. Desanāpariyosāne imaṃ suttantaṃ manasikarontā te bhikkhū arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsūti.

saṅgītipariyāya: The cause of harmony. This is said: "Well, Sāriputta, having compared it with my all-knowing knowledge, you have spoken the flavor of harmony to the bhikkhus." Samanuñño satthā ahosī: The Teacher approved with appreciation. By this much, this sutta became known as the Conqueror's speech. At the end of the teaching, those bhikkhus, giving attention to this sutta, attained arahantship.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

End of the Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, the Commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya.

11. Dasuttarasuttavaṇṇanā

11. Description of the Dasuttara Sutta

350.Evaṃme sutanti dasuttarasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ apubbapadavaṇṇanā –āvuso bhikkhaveti sāvakānaṃ ālapanametaṃ. Buddhā hi parisaṃ āmantayamānā ‘bhikkhave’ti vadanti. Sāvakā satthāraṃ uccaṭṭhāne ṭhapessāmāti satthu ālapanena anālapitvā āvusoti ālapanti.Te bhikkhūti te dhammasenāpatiṃ parivāretvā nisinnā bhikkhū. Ke pana te bhikkhūti? Anibaddhavāsā disāgamanīyā bhikkhū. Buddhakāle dve vāre bhikkhū sannipatanti – upakaṭṭhavassūpanāyikakāle ca pavāraṇakāle ca. Upakaṭṭhavassūpanāyikāya dasapi vīsatipi tiṃsampi cattālīsampi paññāsampi bhikkhū vaggā vaggā kammaṭṭhānatthāya āgacchanti. Bhagavā tehi saddhiṃ sammoditvā kasmā, bhikkhave, upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya vicarathāti pucchati. Atha te ‘‘bhagavā kammaṭṭhānatthaṃ āgatamha, kammaṭṭhānaṃ no dethā’’ti yācanti.

350.Evaṃme sutaṃ: Thus I have heard, the Dasuttara Sutta. Herein is the explanation of uncommon words: āvuso bhikkhave: Friends, bhikkhus, this is an address to the disciples. Buddhas, when addressing an assembly, say 'bhikkhus'. The disciples, thinking, 'we will place the Teacher in a higher position', address the Teacher as "friend" without addressing him with the Teacher's form of address. Te bhikkhū: Those bhikkhus, those bhikkhus surrounding the General of the Dhamma. But who were those bhikkhus? They were bhikkhus of unfixed residence, who could go in any direction. In the Buddha's time, bhikkhus assemble twice: at the time of approaching the rains residence and at the time of invitation. At the approaching rains residence, ten or twenty or thirty or forty or fifty bhikkhus come in groups for the purpose of a meditation subject. The Blessed One, rejoicing with them, asks, "Why, bhikkhus, do you wander for the approaching rains residence?" Then they request, "Venerable Sir, we have come for the purpose of a meditation subject; give us a meditation subject."

Satthā tesaṃ cariyavasena rāgacaritassa asubhakammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Dosacaritassa mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ, mohacaritassa uddeso paripucchā – ‘kālena dhammassavanaṃ, kālena dhammasākacchā, idaṃ tuyhaṃ sappāya’nti ācikkhati. Vitakkacaritassa ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Saddhācaritassa pasādanīyasuttante buddhasubodhiṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca pakāseti. Ñāṇacaritassa aniccatādipaṭisaṃyutte gambhīre suttante katheti. Te kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sace sappāyaṃ hoti, tattheva vasanti. No ce hoti, sappāyaṃ senāsanaṃ pucchitvā gacchanti. Te tattha vasantā temāsikaṃ paṭipadaṃ gahetvā ghaṭetvā vāyamantā sotāpannāpi honti sakadāgāminopi anāgāminopi arahantopi.

The Teacher gives them an unattractive meditation subject according to their disposition, for those of passionate disposition. For those of hateful disposition, he gives a meditation subject of loving-kindness; for those of deluded disposition, instruction and questioning: 'Hearing the Dhamma at the right time, discussing the Dhamma at the right time, this is suitable for you,' thus he indicates. For those of speculative disposition, he gives mindfulness of breathing as a meditation subject. For those of faithful disposition, he reveals the Buddha's excellent enlightenment, the Dhamma's excellent nature, and the Saṅgha's excellent practice in inspiring suttas. For those of knowledgeable disposition, he speaks of profound suttas connected with impermanence, etc. Having taken the meditation subject, if it is suitable, they dwell there. If it is not, they ask about a suitable lodging and depart. Dwelling there, taking up the three-month practice, striving and endeavoring, they become stream-enterers, once-returners, non-returners, and arahants.

Tato vutthavassā pavāretvā satthu santikaṃ gantvā ‘‘bhagavā ahaṃ tumhākaṃ santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā sotāpattiphalaṃ patto…pe… ahaṃ aggaphalaṃ arahatta’’nti paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ ārocenti. Tattha ime bhikkhū upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya āgatā. Evaṃ āgantvā gacchante pana bhikkhū bhagavā aggasāvakānaṃ santikaṃ peseti, yathāha ‘‘apaloketha pana, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne’’ti. Bhikkhū ca vadanti ‘‘kiṃ nu kho mayaṃ, bhante, apalokema sāriputtamoggallāne’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.2). Atha ne bhagavā tesaṃ dassane uyyojesi. ‘‘Sevatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne; bhajatha, bhikkhave, sāriputtamoggallāne. Paṇḍitā bhikkhū anuggāhakā sabrahmacārīnaṃ. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, janetā evaṃ sāriputto. Seyyathāpi jātassa āpādetā evaṃ moggallāno. Sāriputto, bhikkhave, sotāpattiphale vineti, moggallāno uttamatthe’’ti (ma. ni. 3.371).

Then, having spent the rainy season and performed the Pavāraṇā ceremony, they go to the Teacher and declare the qualities they have attained, saying, "Bhagavā, having taken a meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna) in your presence, I have attained the fruit of stream-entry…pe… I have attained the highest fruit of Arahantship." In this case, these monks came near the beginning of the rains-residence. However, when monks who have come like this are about to depart, the Blessed One sends them to the Chief Disciples, as he said, "Seek permission from Sāriputta and Moggallāna, monks." And the monks say, "What, Bhante, should we seek from Sāriputta and Moggallāna?" (saṃ. ni. 3.2). Then the Blessed One encouraged them to see them. "Associate with Sāriputta and Moggallāna, monks; be devoted to Sāriputta and Moggallāna, monks. The wise monks are helpful to their fellow Brahmacārīs. Just as Sāriputta is like a parent, so is Moggallāna like the one who brings up the born. Sāriputta, monks, trains in the fruit of stream-entry; Moggallāna trains in the highest goal" (ma. ni. 3.371).

Sāvakavineyyānāma ye buddhānampi dhammadesanāya bujjhanti sāvakānampi.Buddhavineyyāpana sāvakā bodhetuṃ na sakkonti. Sāvakavineyyabhāvaṃ pana etesaṃ ñatvā katarassa bhikkhuno desanāya bujjhissantīti olokento sāriputtassāti disvā therassa santikaṃ pesesi. Thero te bhikkhū pucchi ‘‘satthu santikaṃ gatattha āvuso’’ti. ‘‘Āma, gatamha satthārā pana amhe tumhākaṃ santikaṃ pesitā’’ti. Tato thero ‘‘ime bhikkhū mayhaṃ desanāya bujjhissanti, kīdisī nu kho tesaṃ desanā vaṭṭatī’’ti cintento ‘‘ime bhikkhū samaggārāmā, sāmaggirasassa dīpikā nesaṃ desanā vaṭṭatī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā tathārūpaṃ desanaṃ desetukāmodasuttaraṃ pavakkhāmītiādimāha. Tattha dasadhā mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vibhattoti dasuttaro, ekakato paṭṭhāya yāva dasakā gatotipi dasuttaro, ekekasmiṃ pabbe dasa dasa pañhā visesitātipi dasuttaro, taṃdasuttaraṃ. Pavakkhāmīti kathessāmi.Dhammanti suttaṃ.Nibbānapattiyāti nibbānapaṭilābhatthāya.Dukkhassantakiriyāyāti sakalassa vaṭṭadukkhassa pariyantakaraṇatthaṃ.Sabbaganthappamocananti abhijjhākāyaganthādīnaṃ sabbaganthānaṃ pamocanaṃ.

Sāvakavineyyā means those who understand the Dhamma teaching even by the Buddhas or by the disciples. But Buddhavineyyā cannot be enlightened by disciples. Knowing their potential to be guided by a disciple (sāvakavineyyabhāvaṃ), and considering which monk's teaching they would understand, he saw it was Sāriputta and sent them to the Elder. The Elder asked those monks, "Have you gone to the Teacher, friends?" "Yes, we have gone. But the Teacher has sent us to you." Then the Elder, thinking, "These monks will understand through my teaching; what kind of teaching is suitable for them?" concluded, "These monks are living together harmoniously (samaggārāmā); a teaching that elucidates the essence of harmony (sāmaggirasassa dīpikā) is suitable for them," and wishing to teach such a teaching, he began with "Dasuttaraṃ pavakkhāmī" (I will explain the tens). There, the arrangement of the subject matter in ten ways is the Dasuttara. Also, because it proceeds from one to ten, it is Dasuttara. Because ten questions are distinguished in each section, it is also Dasuttara. That is the Dasuttaraṃ. Pavakkhāmī means I will speak. Dhammaṃ means the Sutta. Nibbānapattiyā means for the attainment of Nibbāna. Dukkhassantakiriyāyā means for making an end to all the suffering of the round of rebirths (vaṭṭa). Sabbaganthappamocanaṃ means the liberation from all fetters (gantha), such as the fetter of greed (abhijjhākāyagantha).

Iti thero desanaṃ uccaṃ karonto bhikkhūnaṃ tattha pemaṃ janento evametaṃ uggahetabbaṃ pariyāpuṇitabbaṃ dhāretabbaṃ vācetabbaṃ maññissantīti catūhi padehi vaṇṇaṃ kathesi, ‘‘ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo’’tiādinā nayena tesaṃ tesaṃ suttānaṃ bhagavā viya.

Thus, while raising his voice in teaching the Dhamma, and generating affection in those monks, the Elder taught the qualities of the Dhamma with four phrases, considering, "They will learn this, master it, remember it, and recite it," just like the Blessed One with those suttas in the manner of "This is the one way, monks" (ekāyano ayaṃ, bhikkhave, maggo).

Ekadhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ones

351.(Ka) tatthabahukāroti bahūpakāro.

351.(Ka) There, bahukāro means of great benefit.

bhāvetabboti vaḍḍhetabbo.

bhāvetabbo means to be developed.

pariññeyyoti tīhi pariññāhi parijānitabbo.

pariññeyyo means to be fully understood with the three kinds of understanding.

pahātabboti pahānānupassanāya pajahitabbo.

pahātabbo means to be abandoned by contemplation of abandonment (pahānānupassanā).

hānabhāgiyoti apāyagāmiparihānāya saṃvattanako.

hānabhāgiyo means conducive to decline, to falling into the lower realms.

visesabhāgiyoti visesagāmivisesāya saṃvattanako.

visesabhāgiyo means conducive to distinction, to a higher state.

duppaṭivijjhoti duppaccakkhakaro.

duppaṭivijjho means difficult to realize.

uppādetabboti nipphādetabbo.

uppādetabbo means to be produced.

abhiññeyyoti ñātapariññāya abhijānitabbo.

abhiññeyyo means to be fully known by knowledge and full understanding.

sacchikātabboti paccakkhaṃ kātabbo.

sacchikātabbo means to be directly experienced.

Evaṃ sabbattha mātikāsu attho veditabbo. Iti āyasmā sāriputto yathā nāma dakkho veḷukāro sammukhībhūtaṃ veḷuṃ chetvā niggaṇṭhiṃ katvā dasadhā khaṇḍe katvā ekamekaṃ khaṇḍaṃ hīraṃ hīraṃ karonto phāleti, evameva tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sappāyaṃ desanaṃ upaparikkhitvā dasadhā mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā ekekakoṭṭhāse ekekapadaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘katamo eko dhammo bahukāro, appamādo kusalesu dhammesūti’’tiādinā nayena desanaṃ vitthāretuṃ āraddho.

In this way, the meaning should be understood in all the matrices. Thus, Venerable Sāriputta, just as a skilled bamboo worker cuts a bamboo, removes the knots, divides it into ten sections, and splits each section into thin strips, likewise, having discerned the suitable teaching for those monks, having established the subject matter in ten ways, dividing each section into single terms, he began to expand the teaching in the manner of "Which one thing is of great benefit? Heedfulness in wholesome qualities (appamādo kusalesu dhammesu)," etc.

appamādo kusalesu dhammesūti sabbatthakaṃ upakārakaṃ appamādaṃ kathesi. Ayañhi appamādo nāma sīlapūraṇe, indriyasaṃvare, bhojane mattaññutāya, jāgariyānuyoge, sattasu saddhammesu, vipassanāgabbhaṃ gaṇhāpane, atthapaṭisambhidādīsu, sīlakkhandhādipañcadhammakkhandhesu, ṭhānāṭṭhānesu, mahāvihārasamāpattiyaṃ, ariyasaccesu, satipaṭṭhānādīsu, bodhipakkhiyesu, vipassanāñāṇādīsu aṭṭhasu vijjāsūti sabbesu anavajjaṭṭhena kusalesu dhammesu bahūpakāro.

appamādo kusalesu dhammesu means he spoke of heedfulness (appamāda), which is beneficial in all ways and in all aspects of wholesome qualities. This heedfulness is of great benefit in the perfection of virtue, restraint of the senses, moderation in eating, dedication to wakefulness, the seven good qualities, taking up the embryo of insight, in the discriminations of meaning (atthapaṭisambhidā), in the five aggregates beginning with the aggregate of virtue, in the possible and the impossible, in the attainment of the Great Monastery (mahāvihārasamāpatti), in the Noble Truths, in the foundations of mindfulness (satipaṭṭhāna), in the factors of enlightenment (bodhipakkhiya), and in the eight knowledges (vijjā) beginning with insight knowledge, in all faultless wholesome qualities.

saṃyuttanikāyeappamādavaggenānappakāraṃ thometi. Taṃ sabbaṃ ekapadeneva saṅgahetvā thero appamādo kusalesu dhammesūti āha.Dhammapadeappamādavaggenāpissa bahūpakāratā dīpetabbā. Asokavatthunāpi dīpetabbā –

In the Saṃyutta Nikāya, in the chapter on Heedfulness (Appamādavagge), it is praised in various ways. Having gathered all of that into a single term, the Elder said, "Heedfulness in wholesome qualities (appamādo kusalesu dhammesu)." In the Dhammapada, the great benefit of heedfulness should be shown by the chapter on Heedfulness (appamādavaggena). It should also be shown by the Story of Asoka:

(Ka) asokarājā hi nigrodhasāmaṇerassa ‘‘appamādo amatapada’’nti gāthaṃ sutvā eva ‘‘tiṭṭha, tāta, mayhaṃ tayā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ kathita’’nti sāmaṇere pasīditvā caturāsītivihārasahassāni kāresi. Iti thāmasampannena bhikkhunā appamādassa bahūpakāratā tīhi piṭakehi dīpetvā kathetabbā. Yaṃkiñci suttaṃ vā gāthaṃ vā appamādadīpanatthaṃ āharanto ‘‘aṭṭhāne ṭhatvā āharasi, atitthena pakkhando’’ti na vattabbo. Dhammakathikassevettha thāmo ca balañca pamāṇaṃ.

(Ka) For King Asoka, upon hearing the verse "Heedfulness is the path to the Deathless (appamādo amatapada)" from the novice Nigrodha, being pleased with the novice, said, "Stay, venerable one, you have recited the entire Tipiṭaka, the word of the Buddha, to me," and built eighty-four thousand monasteries. Thus, a monk endowed with strength should declare and speak of the great benefit of heedfulness by means of the three baskets (piṭaka). When someone brings any sutta or verse that illuminates heedfulness, one should not say, "You are bringing it standing in the wrong place, you are gushing out of a dried well." Here, the strength and power of the Dhamma speaker is the measure.

kāyagatāsatīti ānāpānaṃ catuiriyāpatho satisampajaññaṃ dvattiṃsākāro catudhātuvavatthānaṃ dasa asubhā nava sivathikā cuṇṇikamanasikāro kesādīsu cattāri rūpajjhānānīti ettha uppannasatiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ.Sātasahagatāti ṭhapetvā catutthajjhānaṃ aññattha sātasahagatā hoti sukhasampayuttā, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.

kāyagatāsatī means mindfulness directed to the body: mindfulness of breathing (ānāpāna), the four postures (catuiriyāpatho), mindfulness and clear comprehension (satisampajaññaṃ), the thirty-two parts (dvattiṃsākāro), the four elements analysis (catudhātuvavatthānaṃ), the ten corpses (dasa asubhā), the nine charnel ground contemplations (nava sivathikā), the powder meditation (cuṇṇikamanasikāro), the four form jhānas among the parts of the body starting with hair: this is a designation for mindfulness that arises here. Sātasahagatā means, setting aside the fourth jhāna, elsewhere it is accompanied by pleasure (sukhasampayuttā), referring to that, this was said.

sāsavo upādāniyoti āsavānañceva upādānānañca paccayabhūto. Iti tebhūmakadhammameva niyameti.

sāsavo upādāniyo means it is a condition for both the āsavas and the clinging (upādāna). Thus, it determines only the three-plane Dhamma.

asmimānoti rūpādīsu asmīti māno.

asmimāno means the conceit "I am" (asmīti māno) in forms, etc.

ayoniso manasikāroti anicce niccantiādinā nayena pavatto uppathamanasikāro.

ayoniso manasikāro means unwise attention, proceeding in the wrong way, such as thinking of the impermanent as permanent (anicce niccantiādinā nayena).

yoniso manasikāroveditabbo.

yoniso manasikāro should be understood.

ānantarikocetosamādhīti aññattha maggānantaraṃ phalaṃ ānantariko cetosamādhi nāma. Idha pana vipassanānantaro maggo vipassanāya vā anantarattā attano vā anantaraṃ phaladāyakattā ānantariko cetosamādhīti adhippeto.

ānantariko cetosamādhī means elsewhere, the fruit immediately following the path is called immediate concentration (ānantariko cetosamādhi). But here, the path immediately following insight (vipassanā), or because of being immediately after insight, or because of giving its fruit immediately after itself, is the concentration with immediate result (ānantariko cetosamādhi) is intended.

akuppaṃ ñāṇanti aññattha phalapaññā akuppañāṇaṃ nāma. Idha paccavekkhaṇapaññā adhippetā.

akuppaṃ ñāṇa means elsewhere, the knowledge of the fruit (phalapaññā) is called unwavering knowledge (akuppañāṇa). Here, the knowledge of reviewing (paccavekkhaṇapaññā) is intended.

āhāraṭṭhitikāti paccayaṭṭhitikā.Ayaṃ eko dhammoti yena paccayena tiṭṭhanti, ayaṃ eko dhammo ñātapariññāya abhiññeyyo.

āhāraṭṭhitikā means conditioned by nutriment. Ayaṃ eko dhammo means the one thing through which they persist, this one thing is to be fully known by knowledge.

akuppācetovimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti.

akuppā cetovimuttī means the liberation of mind of Arahantship-fruit.

Duppaṭivijjhoti ettha pana maggo kathito.Sacchikātabboti phalaṃ kathitaṃ, maggo ekasmiṃyeva pade labbhati. Phalaṃ pana anekesupi labbhatiyeva.

Duppaṭivijjho means here, the path is spoken of. Sacchikātabbo means the fruit is spoken of; the path is obtained in one term only, but the fruit can be obtained in many terms.

Bhūtāti sabhāvato vijjamānā.Tacchāti yāthāvā.Tathāti yathā vuttā tathāsabhāvā.Avitathāti yathā vuttā na tathā na honti.Anaññathāti vuttappakārato na aññathā.Sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhāti tathāgatena bodhipallaṅke nisīditvā hetunā kāraṇena sayameva abhisambuddhā ñātā viditā sacchikatā. Iminā thero ‘‘ime dhammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, ahaṃ pana tumhākaṃ rañño lekhavācakasadiso’’ti jinasuttaṃ dassento okappanaṃ janesi.

Bhūtā means existing by nature. Tacchā means as they truly are. Tathā means having such a nature as stated. Avitathā means they are not otherwise than as stated. Anaññathā means not different from the stated manner. Sammā tathāgatena abhisambuddhā means rightly fully awakened by the Tathāgata, having sat at the Bodhi-platform, having known, understood, and directly experienced by cause and reason, by himself. With this, the Elder, showing the word of the Jina, generating confidence, saying, "These things are fully awakened by the Tathāgata, but I am like a reader of the king's letter for you."

Ekadhammavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Ones is finished.

Dvedhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Twos

352.(Ka)ime dve dhammā bahukārāti ime dve satisampajaññā dhammā sīlapūraṇādīsu appamādo viya sabbattha upakārakā hitāvahā.

352.(Ka) ime dve dhammā bahukārā means these two qualities, mindfulness and clear comprehension, are everywhere helpful and beneficial, like heedfulness in the perfection of virtue and so on.

samathoca vipassanā cāti ime dve saṅgītisutte lokiyalokuttarā kathitā. Imasmiṃ dasuttarasutte pubbabhāgā kathitā.

samatho ca vipassanā ca means these two were spoken of as mundane and supramundane in the Saṅgīti Sutta. In this Dasuttara Sutta, the preliminary parts are spoken of.

sattānaṃ saṃkilesāya sattānaṃ visuddhiyāti ayoniso manasikāro hetu ceva paccayo ca sattānaṃ saṃkilesāya, yoniso manasikāro visuddhiyā. Tathā dovacassatā pāpamittatā saṃkilesāya; sovacassatā kalyāṇamittatā visuddhiyā. Tathā tīṇi akusalamūlāni; tīṇi kusalamūlāni. Cattāro yogā cattāro visaṃyogā. Pañca cetokhilā pañcindriyāni. Cha agāravā cha gāravā. Satta asaddhammā satta saddhammā. Aṭṭha kusītavatthūni aṭṭha ārambhavatthūni. Nava āghātavatthūni nava āghātappaṭivinayā. Dasa akusalakammapathā dasa kusalakammapathāti evaṃ pabhedā ime dve dhammā duppaṭivijjhāti veditabbā.

sattānaṃ saṃkilesāya sattānaṃ visuddhiyā means unwise attention is the cause and condition for the defilement of beings, wise attention for their purification. Likewise, being difficult to advise and bad friendship are for defilement; being easy to advise and good friendship are for purification. Likewise, the three unwholesome roots; the three wholesome roots. The four yokes (yogā), the four unyokings (visaṃyogā). The five mental hindrances (cetokhilā), the five faculties (indriyāni). The six lack of respect (agāravā), the six respects (gāravā). The seven unwholesome qualities (asaddhammā), the seven wholesome qualities (saddhammā). The eight grounds for laziness (kusītavatthūni), the eight grounds for exertion (ārambhavatthūni). The nine grounds for resentment (āghātavatthūni), the nine ways to eliminate resentment (āghātappaṭivinayā). The ten unwholesome courses of action (akusalakammapathā), the ten wholesome courses of action (kusalakammapathā): thus, the divisions, these two qualities should be understood as difficult to realize.

saṅkhatā dhātūti paccayehi katā pañcakkhandhā. Asaṅkhatā dhātūti paccayehi akataṃ nibbānaṃ.

saṅkhatā dhātū means the five aggregates made by conditions. Asaṅkhatā dhātū means Nibbāna, not made by conditions.

vijjā ca vimutti cāti etthavijjāti tisso vijjā.Vimuttīti arahattaphalaṃ.

vijjā ca vimutti cā means here vijjā means the three knowledges (tisso vijjā). Vimuttī means the fruit of Arahantship.

Imasmiṃ vāre abhiññādīni ekakasadisāneva, uppādetabbapade pana maggo kathito, sacchikātabbapade phalaṃ.

In this section, the higher knowledges, etc., are similar to the ones, but in the "to be produced" (uppādetabba) term, the path is spoken of, and in the "to be directly experienced" (sacchikātabba) term, the fruit.

Dvedhammavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Twos is finished.

Tayodhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Threes

353.(Cha)kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhammanti etthanekkhammanti anāgāmimaggo adhippeto. So hi sabbaso kāmānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ.Rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ āruppanti ettha āruppepi arahattamaggo. Puna uppattinivāraṇato sabbaso rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ nāma.Nirodho tassanissaraṇanti idha arahattaphalaṃ nirodhoti adhippetaṃ. Arahattaphalena hi nibbāne diṭṭhe puna āyatiṃ sabbasaṅkhārā na hontīti arahattaṃ saṅkhatanirodhassa paccayattā nirodhoti vuttaṃ.

353.(Cha) kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhammaṃ means here nekkhammaṃ refers to the path of non-returning (anāgāmimaggo). For that is entirely the escape from sensual pleasures. Rūpānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ āruppaṃ means here, even in the immaterial attainments (āruppa), it is the path of Arahantship. Because of preventing rebirth again, it is entirely the escape from forms. Nirodho tassa nissaraṇaṃ means here the fruit of Arahantship is meant by cessation (nirodhoti). For, when Nibbāna is seen by the fruit of Arahantship, all formations do not arise again in the future; therefore, Arahantship is called cessation because it is the condition for the cessation of conditioned things.

atītaṃse ñāṇanti atītaṃsārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ itaresupi eseva nayo.

atītaṃse ñāṇaṃ means knowledge with a past object. This same method applies to the others as well.

Imasmimpi vāre abhiññādayo ekakasadisāva. Duppaṭivijjhapade pana maggo kathito, sacchikātabbe phalaṃ.

In this section too, the higher knowledges (abhiññā), etc., are similar to the ones. But in the "difficult to realize" (duppaṭivijjha) term, the path is spoken of, and in the "to be directly experienced" (sacchikātabbe) term, the fruit.

Tayodhammavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Threes is finished.

Cattārodhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Fours

354.(Ka)cattāri cakkānīti etthacakkaṃnāma dārucakkaṃ, ratanacakkaṃ, dhammacakkaṃ, iriyāpathacakkaṃ, sampatticakkanti pañcavidhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yaṃ panidaṃ samma, rathakāra, cakkaṃ chahi māsehi niṭṭhitaṃ, chārattūnehī’’ti (a. ni. 3.15) idaṃ dārucakkaṃ. ‘‘Pitarā pavattitaṃ cakkaṃ anuppavattetī’’ti (a. ni. 5.132) idaṃ ratanacakkaṃ. ‘‘Pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (ma. ni. 2.399) idaṃ dhammacakkaṃ. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) idaṃ iriyāpathacakkaṃ. ‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ pavattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) idaṃ sampatticakkaṃ. Idhāpi etadeva adhippetaṃ.

354.(Ka) cattāri cakkānī means here cakkaṃ can be of five kinds: a wooden wheel, a jewel wheel, the Dhamma wheel, the posture wheel, and the attainment wheel. Among them, "Whatever this wheel, O chariot-maker, is finished in six months, in six fortnights" (a. ni. 3.15), this is a wooden wheel. "He rolls on the wheel set in motion by his father" (pitarā pavattitaṃ cakkaṃ anuppavattetī) (a. ni. 5.132), this is a jewel wheel. "The wheel set in motion" (pavattitaṃ cakkaṃ) (ma. ni. 2.399), this is the Dhamma wheel. "Four-wheeled, nine-doored" (catucakkaṃ navadvāra) (saṃ. ni. 1.29), this is the posture wheel. "These four wheels, monks, when possessed by gods and humans, the four wheels turn on" (cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ pavattatī) (a. ni. 4.31), this is the wheel of attainment. Here, this is what is intended.

Patirūpadesavāsoti yattha catasso parisā sandissanti, evarūpe anucchavike dese vāso.Sappurisūpanissayoti buddhādīnaṃ sappurisānaṃ avassayanaṃ sevanaṃ bhajanaṃ.Attasammāpaṇidhīti attano sammā ṭhapanaṃ, sace pana pubbe assaddhādīhi samannāgato hoti, tāni pahāya saddhādīsu patiṭṭhāpanaṃ.Pubbe ca katapuññatāti pubbe upacitakusalatā. Idamevettha pamāṇaṃ. Yena hi ñāṇasampayuttacittena kusalaṃ kataṃ hoti, tadeva kusalaṃ taṃ purisaṃ patirūpadese upaneti, sappurise bhajāpesi. So eva ca puggalo attānaṃ sammā ṭhapeti. Catūsu āhāresu paṭhamo lokiyova. Sesā pana tayo saṅgītisutte lokiyalokuttaramissakā kathitā. Idha pubbabhāge lokiyā.

Patirūpadesavāso means dwelling in a suitable place where the four assemblies are found. Sappurisūpanissayo means reliance on, association with, and devotion to good people such as the Buddhas. Attasammāpaṇidhī means rightly establishing oneself; if one was previously endowed with lack of faith, etc., abandoning those, establishing oneself in faith, etc. Pubbe ca katapuññatā means having previously accumulated merit. This alone is the measure here. For by whatever wholesome deed is done with knowledge-accompanied mind, that same wholesome deed leads that person to a suitable place and causes them to associate with good people. And that same person rightly establishes oneself. Among the four nutriments, the first one is mundane only. But the remaining three are spoken of as a mixture of mundane and supramundane in the Saṅgīti Sutta. Here, they are mundane in the preliminary part.

kāmayogavisaṃyogādayo anāgāmimaggādivasena veditabbā.

kāmayogavisaṃyogā etc., should be understood as in terms of the path of non-returning, etc.

hānabhāgiyādīsu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī kāmasahagatā saññāmanasikārā samudācarantihānabhāgiyosamādhi. Tadanudhammatā sati santiṭṭhatiṭhitibhāgiyosamādhi. Vitakkasahagatā saññāmanasikārā samudācarantivisesabhāgiyosamādhi. Nibbidāsahagatā saññāmanasikārā samudācaranti virāgūpasañhitonibbedhabhāgiyosamādhīti iminā nayena sabbasamāpattiyo vitthāretvā attho veditabbo. Visuddhimagge panassa vinicchayakathā kathitāva.

Among hānabhāgiyā, etc., when one who has attained the first jhāna, sense-sphere associated perceptions and attention arise, it is hānabhāgiyo samādhi (a concentration to be abandoned). Mindfulness stands in conformity with that, it is ṭhitibhāgiyo samādhi (a concentration that stays). Perception and attention associated with thinking arise, it is visesabhāgiyo samādhi (a concentration that is special). Perception and attention associated with disenchantment arise, it is nibbedhabhāgiyo samādhi (a concentration connected to disenchantment), in this manner, the meaning should be expanded by elaborating all the attainments. Its analysis has already been spoken of in the Visuddhimagga.

Imasmimpi vāre abhiññādīni ekakasadisāneva. Abhiññāpade panettha maggo kathito. Sacchikātabbapade phalaṃ.

In this section too, the higher knowledges (abhiññā), etc., are similar to the ones. In the "higher knowledge" (abhiññā) term here, the path is spoken of. In the "to be directly experienced" (sacchikātabba) term, the fruit.

Cattārodhammavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.

Explanation of the Fours is finished.

Pañcadhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Five Dhammas

355.(Kha) pītipharaṇatādīsu pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññāpītipharaṇatānāma. Sukhaṃ pharamānaṃ uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññāsukhapharaṇatānāma. Paresaṃ ceto pharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyapaññācetopharaṇatānāma. Ālokapharaṇe uppajjatīti dibbacakkhupaññāālokapharaṇatānāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃpaccavekkhaṇanimittaṃnāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā, tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā. Paracitte paññā cetopharaṇatā, dibbacakkhu ālokapharaṇatā. Tamhā tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhitassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimitta’’nti (vibha. 804).

355.(Kha) Among pītipharaṇatā etc., the wisdom arising spreading rapture in the two jhānas is called pītipharaṇatā (the quality of spreading rapture). The wisdom arising spreading happiness in the three jhānas is called sukhapharaṇatā (the quality of spreading happiness). The knowledge of the mind of others arising spreading the minds of others is called cetopharaṇatā (the quality of spreading minds), that is, knowledge of the minds of others. The wisdom of the divine eye arising in the spreading of light is called ālokapharaṇatā (the quality of spreading light). The reviewing knowledge is called paccavekkhaṇanimitta (the condition of reviewing). This was also said: “Wisdom in the two jhānas is the quality of spreading rapture; wisdom in the three jhānas is the quality of spreading happiness. Wisdom regarding the minds of others is the quality of spreading minds; the divine eye is the quality of spreading light. The reviewing knowledge of one who has arisen from that concentration is the condition of reviewing” (vibha. 804).

Tattha pītipharaṇatā sukhapharaṇatā dve pādā viya. Cetopharaṇatā ālokapharaṇatā dve hatthā viya. Abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ majjhimakāyo viya. Paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ sīsaṃ viya. Iti āyasmā sāriputtatthero pañcaṅgikaṃ sammāsamādhiṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasampannaṃ purisaṃ katvā dassesi.

Therein, pītipharaṇatā and sukhapharaṇatā are like two feet. Cetopharaṇatā and ālokapharaṇatā are like two hands. The jhāna that is the basis for the abhiññā is like the central body. The paccavekkhaṇanimitta is like the head. Thus, venerable Sāriputta Thera showed the five-factored right concentration as a person complete with limbs and sub-limbs.

ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ce vātiādīsu arahattaphalasamādhi adhippeto. So hi appitappitakkhaṇe sukhattāpaccuppannasukho.Purimo purimo pacchimassa pacchimassa samādhisukhassa paccayattā āyatiṃsukhavipāko.

This concentration is both pleasant in the present etc., refers to the concentration of the fruition of Arahatship. For, being pleasant at the moment of attainment, it is pleasant in the present. Being a condition for the happiness of the later and later concentration happiness for the former and former, it is with happy result in the future.

ariyo.Kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvānirāmiso.Buddhādīhi mahāpurisehi sevitattāakāpurisasevito.Aṅgasantatāya ārammaṇasantatāya sabbakilesadarathasantatāya casanto.Atappanīyaṭṭhenapaṇīto.Kilesapaṭippassaddhiyā laddhattā kilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvaṃ vā laddhattāpaṭippassaddhaladdho.Paṭippassaddhaṃ paṭippassaddhīti hi idaṃ atthato ekaṃ. Paṭippassaddhakilesena vā arahatā laddhattā paṭippassaddhaladdho. Ekodibhāvena adhigatattā ekodibhāvameva vā adhigatattāekodibhāvādhigato.Appaguṇasāsavasamādhi viya sasaṅkhārena sappayogena cittena paccanīkadhamme niggayha kilese vāretvā anadhigatattānasasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato.Tañca samādhiṃ samāpajjanto tato vā vuṭṭhahanto sativepullapattattā.Satova samāpajjati sato vuṭṭhahati.Yathāparicchinnakālavasena vā sato samāpajjati sato vuṭṭhahati. Tasmā yadettha ‘‘ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’’ti evaṃ paccavekkhamānassa paccattaṃyeva aparappaccayaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, taṃ ekamaṅgaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Evamimehi pañcahi paccavekkhaṇañāṇehi ayaṃ samādhi ‘‘pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhī’’ti vutto.

Ariya (noble). Because of the absence of sensual pleasures, round of existence pleasures and worldly pleasures, it is without sensual pleasure. Because it is cultivated by Buddhas and other great beings, it is cultivated by non-base persons. Because of the continuity of factors, the continuity of the object, and the continuity of all defilements and distresses, it is peaceful. In the sense of not causing agitation, it is exalted. Having been attained by the subsiding of defilements, or having attained the state of subsiding of defilements, it is attained by subsiding. For this, subsiding and subsided are one in meaning. Or, having been attained by an Arahat with subsided defilements, it is attained by subsiding. Having been attained by one-pointedness, or one-pointedness itself having been attained, it is attained by one-pointedness. Unlike conditioned and with effort concentration with defilements, not having been attained after suppressing opposing qualities with a conditioned and effortful mind, or warding off defilements, it is not gone to by suppressing and warding off with effort. And while attaining that concentration or arising from it, because of the fullness of mindfulness, one attains mindfully, one arises mindfully. Or according to the defined time, one attains mindfully, one arises mindfully. Therefore, the individual knowledge, independent of others, that arises for one who reviews thus, "This concentration is both pleasant in the present and with happy result in the future," that is one factor. This method applies to the rest as well. Thus, with these five reviewing knowledges, this concentration is said to be “right concentration with five knowledges.”

Imasmiṃ vāre visesabhāgiyapade maggo kathito. Sacchikātabbapade phalaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.

In this section, the path is described in the section on what should be distinguished. Fruition is in the section on what should be realized. The rest is just like the previous.

Chadhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Six Dhammas

356.Chakkesu sabbaṃ uttānatthameva. Duppaṭivijjhapade panettha maggo kathito. Sesaṃ purimasadisaṃ.

356.In the sixes, all the meanings are plain. In this section on what is difficult to penetrate, the path is described. The rest is like the previous.

Sattadhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Seven Dhammas

357.(Ña)sammappaññāyasudiṭṭhā hontīti hetunā nayena vipassanāñāṇena sudiṭṭhā honti.Kāmāti vatthukāmā ca kilesakāmā ca, dvepi sapariḷāhaṭṭhena aṅgārakāsu viya sudiṭṭhā honti.Vivekaninnanti nibbānaninnaṃ.Poṇaṃ pabbhāranti ninnassetaṃ vevacanaṃ.Byantībhūtanti niyatibhūtaṃ. Nittaṇhanti attho. Kuto? Sabbaso āsavaṭṭhānīyehi dhammehi tebhūmakadhammehīti attho. Idha bhāvetabbapade maggo kathito. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.

357.(Ña) Are well seen with right wisdom: because of that reason and method, they are well seen with insight knowledge. Sensual pleasures: both object-sensual pleasures and defilement-sensual pleasures, both are well seen as like a charcoal pit, with the sense of burning. Inclined to seclusion: inclined to Nibbāna. Leaning, tending: these are synonyms for inclined. Gone to destruction: gone to destruction by nature. That is, without craving. From where? From all the qualities that are the basis for the āsavas, that is, from the qualities of the three realms. Here, in the section on what should be cultivated, the path is described. The rest is just like the previous.

Aṭṭhadhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Eight Dhammas

358.(Ka)ādibrahmacariyikāya paññāyāti sikkhattayasaṅgahassa maggabrahmacariyassa ādibhūtāya pubbabhāge taruṇasamathavipassanāpaññāya. Aṭṭhaṅgikassa vā maggassa ādibhūtāya sammādiṭṭhipaññāya.Tibbanti balavaṃ.Hirottappanti hirī ca ottappañca.Pemanti gehassitapemaṃ.Gāravoti garucittabhāvo. Garubhāvanīyañhi upanissāya viharato kilesā nuppajjanti ovādānusāsaniṃ labhati. Tasmā taṃ nissāya vihāro paññāpaṭilābhassa paccayo hoti.

358.(Ka) By the wisdom that is the beginning of the Brahmā-faring: by the wisdom of preliminary serenity and insight which is the beginning of the Brahmā-faring of the three trainings, or by the wisdom of right view which is the beginning of the eightfold path. Intense: strong. Shame and fear of blame: hirī and ottappa. Affection: affection based on household life. Reverence: the state of having a reverential mind. For when living in dependence on what is worthy of reverence, defilements do not arise, and one receives instructions and guidance. Therefore, living in dependence on that is a condition for the attainment of wisdom.

(Cha) akkhaṇesu yasmā petā asurānaṃ āvāhanaṃ gacchanti, vivāhanaṃ gacchanti, tasmā pettivisayeneva asurakāyo gahitoti veditabbo.

(Cha) Because beings in the realm of ghosts go to summon and dismiss the asuras at inauspicious times, therefore, it should be understood that the asura realm is included in the realm of ghosts.

appicchassāti ettha paccayaappiccho, adhigamaappiccho, pariyattiappiccho, dhutaṅgaappicchoti cattāro appicchā. Tattha paccayaappiccho bahuṃ dente appaṃ gaṇhāti, appaṃ dente appataraṃ vā gaṇhāti, na vā gaṇhāti, na anavasesagāhī hoti. Adhigamaappiccho majjhantikatthero viya attano adhigamaṃ aññesaṃ jānituṃ na deti. Pariyattiappiccho tepiṭakopi samāno na bahussutabhāvaṃ jānāpetukāmo hoti sāketatissatthero viya. Dhutaṅgaappiccho dhutaṅgapariharaṇabhāvaṃ aññesaṃ jānituṃ na deti dvebhātikattheresu jeṭṭhakatthero viya. Vatthu visuddhimagge kathitaṃ.Ayaṃ dhammoti evaṃ santaguṇanigūhanena ca paccayapaṭiggahaṇe mattaññutāya ca appicchassa puggalassa ayaṃ navalokuttaradhammo sampajjati, no mahicchassa. Evaṃ sabbattha yojetabbaṃ.

Of one who is content with little: here, there are four kinds of contentedness with little: contentedness with little regarding requisites, contentedness with little regarding attainment, contentedness with little regarding learning, and contentedness with little regarding dhutaṅgas. Among these, one who is content with little regarding requisites takes little when much is offered, or takes even less when little is offered, or does not take at all; he is not one who takes everything without leaving anything behind. One who is content with little regarding attainment, like the Elder Majjhantika, does not let others know of his attainment. One who is content with little regarding learning, even though being a Tepiṭaka, does not want to make known his state of great learning, like the Elder Sāketa Tissa. One who is content with little regarding dhutaṅgas does not let others know of his practice of dhutaṅgas, like the elder brother among the two brother Elders. The subject is described in detail in the Visuddhimagga. This Dhamma: thus, this ninefold supramundane Dhamma is attained by a person who is content with little, both by concealing his own good qualities and by knowing moderation in accepting requisites, not by one who is greedy. Thus, it should be connected everywhere.

Santuṭṭhassāti catūsu paccayesu tīhi santosehi santuṭṭhassa.Pavivittassāti kāyacittaupadhivivekehi vivittassa. Tatthakāyavivekonāma gaṇasaṅgaṇikaṃ vinodetvā aṭṭhaārambhavatthuvasena ekībhāvo. Ekībhāvamattena pana kammaṃ na nipphajjatīti kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbatteti, ayaṃcittavivekonāma. Samāpattimatteneva kammaṃ na nipphajjatīti jhānaṃ pādakaṃ katvā saṅkhāre sammasitvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃupadhivivekonāma. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘kāyaviveko ca vivekaṭṭhakāyānaṃ nekkhammābhiratānaṃ. Cittaviveko ca parisuddhacittānaṃ paramavodānappattānaṃ. Upadhiviveko ca nirupadhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ visaṅkhāragatāna’’nti (mahāni. 49).

Of one who is content: of one who is content with the three kinds of contentment regarding the four requisites. Of one who is secluded: of one who is secluded by bodily seclusion, mental seclusion, and seclusion from defilements. Therein, bodily seclusion is the state of being alone by abandoning groups and gatherings in terms of the eight bases of undertaking. But since the action is not accomplished by merely being alone, he develops the eight attainments after doing preliminary work on the kasiṇa; this is called mental seclusion. Since the action is not accomplished by mere attainments, having made jhāna the basis, after contemplating conditioned things, he attains Arahatship together with the discriminations; this is called seclusion from defilements. Therefore, the Blessed One said: “Bodily seclusion is for those who delight in renunciation of the qualities which cause distraction. Mental seclusion is for those with purified minds who have attained supreme cleansing. Seclusion from defilements is for those persons without defilements who have gone to the unconditioned” (mahāni. 49).

Saṅgaṇikārāmassāti gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ceva kilesasaṅgaṇikāya ca ratassa.Āraddhavīriyassāti kāyikacetasikavīriyavasena āraddhavīriyassa.Upaṭṭhitasatissāti catusatipaṭṭhānavasena upaṭṭhitasatissa.Samāhitassāti ekaggacittassa.Paññavatoti kammassakatapaññāya paññavato.Nippapañcassāti vigatamānataṇhādiṭṭhipapañcassa.

Who delights in company: who delights in groups and in gatherings and in defilement-company. Who has aroused energy: who has aroused energy in terms of bodily and mental energy. Who has established mindfulness: who has established mindfulness in terms of the four establishments of mindfulness. Who is concentrated: whose mind is one-pointed. Who is wise: who is wise with the wisdom of action and its result. Without proliferation: without proliferation of conceit, craving, views, etc.

Idha bhāvetabbapade maggo kathito. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.

Here, in the section on what should be cultivated, the path is described. The rest is just like the previous.

Explanation of the Nine Dhammas

359.(Kha)sīlavisuddhīti visuddhiṃ pāpetuṃ samatthaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ.Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti parisuddhabhāvassa padhānaṅgaṃ.Cittavisuddhīti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtā aṭṭha paguṇasamāpattiyo.Diṭṭhivisuddhīti sapaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ.Kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhīti paccayākārañāṇaṃ. Addhattayepi hi paccayavaseneva dhammā pavattantīti passato kaṅkhaṃ vitarati.Maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhīti obhāsādayo na maggo, vīthippaṭipannaṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ maggoti evaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇaṃ.Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti rathavinīte vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā kathitā, idha taruṇavipassanā.Ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti rathavinīte maggo kathito, idha vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā. Etā pana sattapi visuddhiyo vitthārena visuddhimagge kathitā.Paññāti arahattaphalapaññā.Vimuttipiarahattaphalavimuttiyeva.

359.(Kha) Purity of virtue: the fourfold purity of virtue which is able to lead to purity. A principal factor for purity: a principal factor for the state of purity. Purity of mind: the eight well-developed attainments that are the basis for insight. Purity of view: seeing name and form with conditions. Purity of overcoming doubt: knowledge of conditionality. For, seeing that things occur only through conditions even in the three times, he overcomes doubt. Purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path: the lights, etc., are not the path; the knowledge of arising and passing away that has entered the course is the path; thus, knowledge regarding what is the path and what is not. Purity of knowledge and vision of the way of practice: in the Chariot Relay Discourse, the insight leading to abandoning is described; here it is preliminary insight. Purity of knowledge and vision: in the Chariot Relay Discourse, the path is described; here it is the insight leading to abandoning. However, all seven purities are described in detail in the Visuddhimagga. Wisdom: the wisdom of the fruition of Arahatship. Release also: just the release of the fruition of Arahatship.

dhātunānattaṃ paṭicca uppajjati phassanānattanti cakkhādidhātunānattaṃ paṭicca cakkhusamphassādinānattaṃ uppajjatīti attho.Phassanānattaṃ paṭiccāti cakkhusamphassādinānattaṃ paṭicca.Vedanānānattanti cakkhusamphassajādivedanānānattaṃ.Saññānānattaṃ paṭiccāti kāmasaññādinānattaṃ paṭicca.Saṅkappanānattanti kāmasaṅkappādinānattaṃ.Saṅkappanānattaṃ paṭicca uppajjati chandanānattanti saṅkappanānattatāya rūpe chando sadde chandoti evaṃ chandanānattaṃ uppajjati.Pariḷāhanānattanti chandanānattatāya rūpapariḷāho saddapariḷāhoti evaṃ pariḷāhanānattaṃ uppajjati.Pariyesanānānattanti pariḷāhanānattatāya rūpapariyesanādinānattaṃ uppajjati.Lābhanānattanti pariyesanānānattatāya rūpapaṭilābhādinānattaṃ uppajjati.

Dependent on diversity of elements, diversity of contacts arises: dependent on the diversity of elements such as the eye element, diversity of contacts such as eye-contact arises; this is the meaning. Dependent on diversity of contacts: dependent on the diversity of contacts such as eye-contact. Diversity of feelings: diversity of feelings born of eye-contact, etc. Dependent on diversity of perceptions: dependent on the diversity of perceptions such as sensual perception. Diversity of intentions: diversity of intentions such as sensual intention. Dependent on diversity of intentions, diversity of desires arises: because of the diversity of intentions, desire for form, desire for sound; thus, diversity of desires arises. Diversity of burning: because of the diversity of desires, burning for form, burning for sound; thus, diversity of burning arises. Diversity of search: because of the diversity of burning, diversity of search for form, etc., arises. Diversity of gains: because of the diversity of search, diversity of gains such as acquisition of form, etc., arises.

maraṇasaññāti maraṇānupassanāñāṇe saññā.Āhārepaṭikūlasaññāti āhāraṃ pariggaṇhantassa uppannasaññā.Sabbalokeanabhiratisaññāti sabbasmiṃ vaṭṭe ukkaṇṭhantassa uppannasaññā. Sesā heṭṭhā kathitā eva. Idha bahukārapade maggo kathito. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.

Perception of death: the perception in the knowledge of mindfulness of death. Perception of disgust for food: the perception that arises for one who reflects on food. Perception of non-delight in all the world: the perception that arises for one who is disgusted with all of existence. The rest has already been described earlier. Here, in the section on manifold benefit, the path is described. The rest is just like the previous.

Dasadhammavaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Ten Dhammas

360.(Jha)nijjaravatthūnīti nijjarakāraṇāni.Micchādiṭṭhi nijjiṇṇā hotīti ayaṃ heṭṭhā vipassanāyapi nijjiṇṇā eva pahīnā. Kasmā puna gahitāti asamucchinnattā. Vipassanāya hi kiñcāpi jiṇṇā, na pana samucchinnā, maggo pana uppajjitvā taṃ samucchindati, na puna vuṭṭhātuṃ deti. Tasmā puna gahitā. Evaṃ sabbapadesu nayo netabbo.

360.(Jha) Factors of eradication: causes of eradication. Wrong view is eradicated: this was already eradicated, abandoned, even earlier by insight. Why is it taken up again? Because it is not completely cut off. For although it is overcome by insight, it is not completely cut off; but the path, having arisen, completely cuts it off, and does not allow it to arise again. Therefore, it is taken up again. Thus, the method should be applied in all sections.

Ettha ca sammādiṭṭhipaccayā catusaṭṭhi dhammā bhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchanti. Katame catusaṭṭhi? Sotāpattimaggakkhaṇe adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriyaṃ paripūreti, paggahaṭṭhena vīriyindriyaṃ paripūreti, anussaraṇaṭṭhena satindriyaṃ paripūreti, avikkhepaṭṭhena samādhindriyaṃ paripūreti, dassanaṭṭhena paññindriyaṃ paripūreti, vijānanaṭṭhena manindriyaṃ, abhinandanaṭṭhena somanassindriyaṃ, pavattasantatiadhipateyyaṭṭhena jīvitindriyaṃ paripūreti…pe… arahattaphalakkhaṇe adhimokkhaṭṭhena saddhindriyaṃ, pavattasantatiadhipateyyaṭṭhena jīvitindriyaṃ paripūretīti evaṃ catūsu maggesu catūsu phalesu aṭṭha aṭṭha hutvā catusaṭṭhi dhammā pāripūriṃ gacchanti. Idha abhiññeyyapade maggo kathito. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva.

And here, conditioned by right view, sixty-four qualities go to the fulfillment of development. Which sixty-four? At the moment of the path of Stream-entry, it fulfills the faculty of faith through conviction, it fulfills the faculty of energy through exertion, it fulfills the faculty of mindfulness through recollection, it fulfills the faculty of concentration through non-distraction, it fulfills the faculty of wisdom through seeing, it fulfills the faculty of mind through knowing, it fulfills the faculty of joy through rejoicing, it fulfills the faculty of life through the power of continuity…pe… at the moment of the fruition of Arahatship, it fulfills the faculty of faith through conviction, it fulfills the faculty of life through the power of continuity; thus, in the four paths and four fruitions, eight qualities in each, sixty-four qualities go to fulfillment. Here, in the section on what should be directly known, the path is described. The rest is just like the previous.

Idha ṭhatvā pañhā samodhānetabbā. Dasake sataṃ pañhā kathitā. Ekake ca navake ca sataṃ, duke ca aṭṭhake ca sataṃ, tike ca sattake ca sataṃ, catukke ca chakke ca sataṃ, pañcake paññāsāti aḍḍhachaṭṭhāni pañhasatāni kathitāni honti.

Here, questions should be answered by placing them in context. One hundred questions are described in the set of ten. And one hundred in the set of one and the set of nine, one hundred in the set of two and the set of eight, one hundred in the set of three and the set of seven, one hundred in the set of four and the set of six, fifty in the set of five; thus, five hundred and fifty questions are described.

‘‘Idamavoca āyasmā sāriputto, attamanā te bhikkhū āyasmato sāriputtassa bhāsitaṃ abhinandu’’nti sādhu, sādhūti abhinandantā sirasā sampaṭicchiṃsu. Tāya ca pana attamanatāya imameva suttaṃ āvajjamānā pañcasatāpi te bhikkhū saha paṭisambhidāhi aggaphale arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsūti.

"This was said by venerable Sāriputta. Those monks, pleased in mind, rejoiced at the words of venerable Sāriputta," approving with "Good, good," they accepted it with their heads. And through that pleasure of mind, those five hundred monks, reflecting on this very sutta, were established in the highest fruition, Arahatship, together with the discriminations.

Sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya

The Sumaṅgalavilāsinī, commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya,

Niṭṭhitā ca pāthikavaggassa vaṇṇanāti.

And the explanation of the Pāthika Vagga is finished.

Nigamanakathā
Concluding Remarks

Ettāvatā ca –

With this much -

sumaṅgala, pariveṇanivāsinā thiraguṇena;

By Sumaṅgala, resident in Pariveṇa, with steadfast qualities;
By Dāṭhānāga Saṅghatthera, in the lineage of the Elders.

Dīghāgamavarassadasabala, guṇagaṇaparidīpanassa aṭṭhakathaṃ;

The commentary on the Dīghāgama, which fully illuminates the qualities of the Ten Powers;
Named Sumaṅgala Vilāsinī by name.

Sā hi mahāṭṭhakathāya, sāramādāya niṭṭhitā;

That indeed, taking the essence from the Great Commentary, is finished;
This is with eighty-one bhāṇavāras of the Pāḷi.

visuddhimaggopibhāṇavārehi;

The Visuddhimagga too, is with bhāṇavāras;
Since it was done for the sake of explaining the meaning of the Āgamas.

Tasmā tena sahā’yaṃ, aṭṭhakathā bhāṇavāragaṇanāya;

Therefore, together with that, this commentary, by the calculation of bhāṇavāras;
Well-measured and thoroughly defined, is four hundred and forty.

Sabbaṃ cattālīsādhikasata, parimāṇaṃ bhāṇavārato evaṃ;

All told, four hundred and forty is the measure by bhāṇavāras;
May it reveal the tradition, to those residing in the Mahāvihāra.

Mūlakaṭṭhakathāsāra, mādāya mayā imaṃ karontena;

By the merit accumulated by me, while making this, taking the essence of the Mūlakaṭṭhakathā, may the whole world be happy.

buddhaghosoti garūhi gahitanāmadheyyena therena katā ayaṃsumaṅgalavilāsinīnāma dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā –

This Sumaṅgalavilāsinī named commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya, was made by the elder named Buddhaghosa, who was respected by the teachers.

Tāva tiṭṭhatu lokasmiṃ, lokanittharaṇesinaṃ;

So long may it stand in the world, for those seeking deliverance from the world,
Showing the method for purity of view to sons of good family.

Yāva buddhoti nāmampi, suddhacittassa tādino;

So long as even the name of the Buddha, of pure mind, the steadfast one,
Of the world-honored, the greatest in the world, the mighty seer, shall continue in the world.

Sumaṅgalavilāsinī nāma

Named Sumaṅgalavilāsinī

Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathā niṭṭhitā.

The commentary on the Dīgha Nikāya is finished.